WT Ewyv Hha5eyejaeryr

ANNEXURE-1
:: ELECTRO-MECHANICAL TENDER ::
CONSTRUCTION
OF
PETROLEUM STORAGE DEPOT AT PALI (RAJASTHAN)
REVISION - 5A
CONTENTS
SECTION TOPICS
PART - 1 INTRODUCTION
PART - 2 SCOPE OF WORK
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PART - 3 Specifications for fabrication of Vertical storage tanks
Specifications for Sand pad foundation
Specifications for welding requirements of Vertical storage
tanks & Pipelines
Radiographic Inspection procedure for Vertical Tanks
Radiography for Pipelines including inspection &
interpretation
Testing Procedure of Vertical Cone Roof & Internal
Floating Roof Tanks
Specifications for Aluminium & Hybrid Internal Floating
Roof
Specifications for erection, testing, commissioning of
piping & other equipment
Specifications for Pipeline works
Specifications for Pressure testing of pipelines
Specifications for blast cleaning & painting works for
tanks, pipelines, structural & other equipment
Specifications for supply & erection of equipment
Specifications for Fall Arrestor System
Specifications for Plant PEB Structures
Specifications for Civil
Technical specification of fixed water spray/ fixed foam
accessories
Specifications for Breather Valve with Flame
Specifications for Retractable Stairs
Specification for remote operated HVLR variable flow 1000
/ 750 / 500 US GPM
PART - 4 ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS/ DATASHEETS/ SPECIFICATIONS
Supply, Fabrication, erection, testing & commissioning of

all vertical storage tanks & Underground horizontal tanks
including Foundation
Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of
equipment
Supply, Fabrication of Steel Structures along with
Foundation through PEB method
Supply, Fabrication, laying, testing & commissioning of all
piping works – Product Piping, Fire Water Piping, Sprinkler
system, Foam
Supply, Fabrication, erection of all MS Structural works
including Pipe racks, Dyke Wall, Pipe Supports, Operating
platforms, Manifold
Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of
Electrical Equipment along with associated works
PART - 5 RECOMMENDED MAKES/ BRAND
PART - 6 MASTER BOQ

1
Part -
Introduction
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
CONSTRUCTION OF PETROLEUM STORAGE DEPOT AT PALI,
RAJASTHAN
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Nayara Energy (formerly known as Essar Oil) is an integrated downstream oil

company of international scale encompassing the entire hydrocarbon value chain
from refining to production and marketing, across segments, including retail. In
2017, Essar Oil was acquired by Rosneft, the world’s largest public oil and gas
company by liquid hydrocarbon production and reserves and an investment
consortium led by global commodity trading firm Trafigura & UCP Investment Group.
Essar Oil has since been renamed as Nayara Energy.
Nayara Energy Limited proposes to set-up a Petroleum Depot at Village: Sawaipura,

Chotila, Dist: Pali. The product will be received by Tank wagon ex Essar Oil’s
Vadinar Refinery, the product will be stored in IFR (MS) / CR (HSD) Tanks and the
same will be delivered by Road to Dealers and bulk Customers / Consumers. The
nearest railway station is Kairla.
Approx. 60 acres of land is acquired for setting-up of this depot.
The depot shall be designed and constructed for full compliance with OISD 117, 118,
244 and other statutory codes & standards as applicable.
This document defines the minimum requirements for scope of work of General
Electro-Mechanical Contract and guidelines to the Contractor for the complete
General electrical and mechanical works at Pali Depot.
Part -2
Scope of Work
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
SCOPE OF WORK FOR ELECTRO-MECHANICAL TENDER
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATION
1.1 The detailed specifications given hereafter are for the items of works described
in the schedule of quantities attached herein and shall be guidance for proper
execution of work to the required standards.
1.2 It may also be noted that the specification are of generalized nature and these
shall be read in conjunction with the description of item in schedule of quantities
and drawings.
1.3 The work also includes all minor details of construction which are obviously and
fairly intended, and which may not have been referred to in these documents but
are essential for the entire completion in accordance with standard engineering
practice.
1.4 In case any difference or discrepancy between the specifications and the
description in the schedule of quantities, the schedule of quantities shall take
precedence.
1.5 In case any difference or discrepancy between the specifications and the drawing,
the drawing shall take precedence.
1.6 Unless specifically otherwise mentioned, all the applicable latest codes and
standards published by the Bureau of Indian Standards and all other standards,
shall govern in all respects of design, workmanship, quality, properties of
materials, method of testing and method of measurements.
1.7 All the drawings are indicative contractor shall prepare and submit detailed construction
drawing to Nayara for approval prior to execution
2. SCOPE OF WORK
2.1 MECHANICAL
The mechanical work shall be carried out as per the specification provided
in MECHANICAL DESIGN BASIS. The scope of work broadly comprises of but
not limited to the following:
a) Design, Supply, Fabrication, erection, testing & commissioning of all vertical
storage tanks & Underground horizontal tanks including Foundation
b) Dyke Wall
c) Construction of RCC Ring Beam and Sand Pad Foundation for Tanks
1
d) Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of equipment
e) Supply, Fabrication of Steel Structures.
f) Installation of ROSOV, DBBV and MOV supplied by automation vender.
g) Construction of structure shed (PEB) including footing and RCC flooring and
other civil
h) works as per drawing.
i) Supply, Fabrication, laying, testing & commissioning of all piping works
including pipe support– Product Piping, Fire Water Piping, Sprinkler system,
Foam system, Instrument Air
j) Supply, Fabrication, erection of all MS Structural works including Pipe racks,
Pipe Supports, Operating platforms, Manifold platforms, Access platforms,
Gangways
k) Supply, Installation of fall arrester and Retractable swing ladder.
l) All Statutory approval from office of Govt. of Rajasthan and Govt. of India, required to
construct/commissioned the depot.
2.2 ELECTRICAL
The electrical work shall be carried out as per the specification provided in
ELECTRICAL DESIGN BASIS. The jobs include broadly installation & commissioning
of all the electrical equipment & switchgears, laying of cables of different sizes,
earthing of equipment, motors, panels, sheds and buildings, internal and external
illumination, area lighting, documentation, nomenclature embossing, Metallic
Display board for SLD and safety signboard, testing, commissioning and handing
over to the satisfaction of NEL. The Contractor’s broad scope of the electrical
works includes:
a) Cabling: Supply of all cables and accessories, laying, termination of all the
Electrical Cables in Package item from other supplier like VRU, STP, OWS and
MOV, DBBV etc.
b) Complete earthing including supply of all materials.
c) Illumination: Peripheral lighting, Shed Lighting, Building Lighting.
d) Supply of Walkie Talkie with frequency license from minister of
telecommunication.
e) Installation, Testing, Commissioning and Handing over.
f) Supply and installation of PA system.
g) The contractor shall submit the following documents at the time of handing
over:
• Layout Diagram of the Installation
• Cable route and earthing layout
• Cable schedule
• Earth resistance values
• Single Line Diagram of power schematic and bill of materials
2
3. PROCUREMENT
All materials required for successful completion of this project shall be procured by
the contractor from NEL’s approved vendors/suppliers. In case vendor list of a
particular item is not available, the contractor shall specifically seek NEL approval on
the proposed list of vendors during Bid Stage for all major items. Any Deviation to
vendor list should be brought out in the offer and no other vendor shall be accepted
afterwards.
All materials including the vessels, equipment (fixed and rotary), accessories of
vessels and equipment, raw materials for tanks construction, pipes of different dia.
and length, valves, pipe fittings, all structures, structural platforms / ladders, stairs,
electrical items, firefighting items, paints etc. within the specified battery limits etc.
will be procured and transported to project site by Contractor
Unloading at site, Safe storage at project site and site transportation are under scope
of Contractor.
4. NOTE TO CONTRACTOR
4.1 Approved Design documents are attached herewith for references. It will be prime
responsibility of Contractor to check, verify and update documents during residual
engineering phase.
4.2 Contractor shall float enquiries for required items for the project to approved
Vendors only. Contractor shall carry out Inspection and expediting services for all
the ordered items for the project.
4.3 Contractor shall carry out Construction of Oil terminal facility as per latest codes
& standards.
4.4 Contractor shall depute planning engineers at site to monitor & control the
project progress.
4.5 Contractor shall depute competent persons to ensure quality control and safety
of operations.
4.6 Contractor shall construct temporary site office with all amenities and facilities
for execution of site activities.
3
4.7 Contractor shall adhere to local & international statutory guidelines followed in
oil industry.
4.8 Contractor shall arrange for construction power, water and other utilities
required during construction, pre-commissioning & commissioning phases.
4.9 Commissioning Assistance
4.9.1 Contractor shall prepare equipment log book, Safe Operating Procedure
for all equipment and various facilities including and not limited to civil,
mechanical, and electrical.
4.9.2 All the drawings are indicative. Contractor must submit detailed con-
struction drawings to Nayara for approval prior to execution of work.
4.9.3 OEM representative must witness/ supervise commissioning of the
equipment and extend the warranty to Nayara Energy Limited.
4.9.4 Contractor will ensure to provide 1 no. engineer and 1 no. document
controller (5 years’ experience minimum) at the project site.
4.9.5 Contactor to submit as-built drawing
5. IMPORTANT NOTES RELATED TO SCOPE OF WORK
5.1 The contractor shall himself check & satisfy the compactness, evenness of the
levels of plots as per drawings and instructions of Engineer in Charge, to required
levels, etc., including supply of all related materials, tools, tackles, equipment,
machinery etc. Any defects / differential level of roads found at a later stage,
due to inconsistent & insufficient consolidation / compactness shall be solely
attributable to the contractor and the same has to be rectified at his own cost to
the entire satisfaction of the Nayara Energy or if any damage due to bad
workmanship is found within warrantee/guarantee period, the same shall be
rectify by the Contractor or cost of rectification of the damaged portion shall be
recovered from Security Deposit against warrantee/guarantee of work done by
contractor.
5.2 The Contractor shall provide minimum 1 (one) year comprehensive Warranties /
Guarantees to Nayara of all Mechanical items / fixtures / equipment’s /
Electricals items etc. being installed/ used at site to complete the job. The
Warranties / Guarantees shall commence from the date of commissioning only.
The contractor shall also pass on the Warranties / Guarantees to Nayara Energy
Ltd. as received from the OEM’s, if it is more than 1 year from the date of
4
commissioning. The contractor shall also provide the necessary spare parts, etc.
to Nayara Energy Ltd. received free of cost from OEM’s.
5.3 The Contractor shall arrange the operating manuals/guidelines, etc., for all items
or equipment’s installed at the site. Also, the Contractor shall arrange for the
suitable training from the OEM’s to Nayara staff without any extra cost.
5.4 Fully equipped field laboratory shall be set-up by the Contractor for testing (as
per IS and other codes). All equipment’s, testing machine and tools shall be
calibrated, also re- calibrated time to time and certificate with validity to be
tagged on the machine and or copies to be submitted to the Engineer-in-charge.
Also, scope shall include the arrangement and costing of construction materials
testing in external lab, if required. The external lab must be NABL approved. All
expenses towards the testing of such construction materials shall be in the scope
of the contractor.
5.5 The complete work shall be done as per attached Standard Specifications,
Drawings, Approved Make list and instructions of Engineer in Charge.
Note: Nayara Energy Limited has the right to change/modify/add the Scope of Work as
& when required by Nayara Energy Limited. In case any additional cost, then the said
cost for additional work shall be mutually agreed between the Parties based on the
agreed rate.
5
Part - 3
Technical Specifications
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
RAJASTHAN
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-SP-80 Rev: 01 Date: 12-6-2019
CONDITIONS & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR FABRICATION OF VERTICAL CONE ROOF

& VERTICAL FLOATING ROOF AND HORIZONTAL TANKS
1.0 SCHEDULE OF TANKS
SR DIA x HT TANK
TANK NO PRODUCT QTY
NO in Mtr. TYPE
1 TK-100A/B/C 16 X 15 MS 3 IFRVT
2 TK-200A/B/C 23 X 19 HSD 3 CRVT
3 TK-100D 2.75 X 13 MS 1 UG HDR
4 TK-200D 2.75 X 13 HSD 1 UG HDR
5 TK-200E 2.25 X 5.5 HSD 1 UG HDR
6 TK-300A/B/C/D/E 2.75 X 13 ETHANOL 5 UG HDR
7 TK-400A 1.8 X 4.25 SLOP TANK (OWS) 1 UG HDR
8 TK-500A/B 18 X 13 FIRE WATER 2 CRVT
2.0 DRAWINGS & DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

2.1 The drawings supplied by the NAYARA are indicative and are for general guidance
only. The procurement of steel plates and allied material is in scope of contractor.
2.2 The fabrication drawing shall be prepared by the Contractor on AUTO-CAD with the
minimum of wastage and subject to the requirements laid down in NAYARA’s standard
drawings and codes as applicable. The drawings shall be approved by NAYARA before
commencement of work. It is the contractor’s responsibility to supply, transport steel
plates for bottom, shell, roof, extension plate, foam dam, wind girders and
reinforcement plates for shell/roof manholes & nozzles.
2.3 The detailed fabrication drawings shall include materials specifications, sizes,
quantities and component wise weight of tank bottom, shell, roof and all other
fittings and appurtenances required to complete the desired tanks.
3.0 ERECTION & FABRICATION

3.1 The scope of work under erection and fabrication services of the contract shall
include supply of all materials required for the entire work. It also includes
supply, transportation, fabrication, erection, alignment, welding, testing, painting
and commissioning of all appurtenances and accessories and other instruments as
specified in the tender documents, final cleaning, supplying and application of
primers and paints as required.
1
RAJASTHAN
3.2 The fabrication and erection works shall be carried out by HYDRAULIC JACKING
METHOD i.e. manual erection of first 2/3 shells and roof plates to facilitate
installation of jacks for hoisting the steel tank in accordance with tender
specifications and drawings to be prepared and furnished by contractor for
NAYARA’s approval before commencement of work.
3.3 Since construction of sand pad foundations is in contractor’s scope of work, he shall
himself check & satisfy the evenness of levels within acceptable tolerance and
convexed of the foundations before commencement of tank fabrication. Any defect in
the tank found at a later date due to defective sand pad foundation shall be solely
attributed to the contractor.
3.4 Underside surface of bottom plates for tanks shall be Grit blasted and painted with
one coat of Epoxy zinc phosphate primer of 75 microns and 2 coats of high build
bitumen coating of 90-100 micron each, up to total DFT of 260 microns, before plates
are laid on the sand pad foundation.
3.5 Required gaskets, studs, bolts and washers are required to be supplied by contractors
at their own cost wherever fastening by bolts is required to be carried out.
3.6 The edge preparation of plates shall be done using Pug Cutting Machine only.
3.7 Shell plates shall be shaped by power operated rolling machine to exactly suit the
curvature of the tank under fabrication. Rolled plates shall be either stacked
vertically on longer edge or on properly designed stackers having radius equal to
that of the tank for which the plates have been rolled, so as to avoid damage to
plate curvature.
3.8 Unless otherwise specified by NAYARA, painting shall be carried out as per
specifications.
3.9 All roof structural members, stairways, hand railings etc. shall be blast cleaned and
made free from rust and scale & painted as per enclosed specifications.
3.10 All machined surfaces of plate edges adjacent to welded joints, bolts and nuts shall
be left unpainted and coated with an approved corrosion inhibitor in a petroleum
base before dispatch.
3.11 The suitability and capacity of all plants and equipment used for erection shall be to
the satisfaction of the Site Engineer/ Engineer-in-Charge.
3.12 All structural steel should be so stored & handled at the site that the members are not
subjected to excessive stresses and damage.
3.13 During erection, the steel work shall be securely bolted or otherwise fastened and
wherever necessary properly braced to provide for all loads to be carried by the
structure during erection including load of equipment.
3.14 No permanent bolting or welding should be done until proper alignment is obtained.
2
RAJASTHAN
4.0 LIST OF STRUCTURALS AND APPURTENANCES FOR TANKS STRUCTURALS:

The structural for the fixed roof and Internal floating roof tanks include Roof central
drum, trusses, girders, rafters (Main, secondary, tertiary), main central and
secondary columns (in case of column supported tanks), curb angles, roof handrail at
the top, spiral staircase with hand rails, mid landings and top landing platforms.
APPURTENANCES
A. MS TANK _TK-100A/B/C (IFRVT)
SR. NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. NOM. SIZE

(MM)
1. SHELL MANHOLE 2 750
2. INLET 1 300
3. OUTLET 1 300
4. PRODUCT DRAW OFF/DRAIN 1 100
5. RECIRCULATION LINE NOZZLE WITH JET MIXER 1 250
6. PRESSURE RELIEF LINE 1 25
7. VRU 1 100
8. PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 1 80
9. ROOF MANHOLE WITH COVER 2 600
10. PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 1 50
11. VENT 4 150
12. TEMPERATURE ELEMENT (INSIDE 16” SLEEVE PIPE WITH 1 80
STILL WELL PIPE)
13. LEVEL TRANSMITTER (INSIDE 16” SLEEVE PIPE WITH STILL 1 200
WELL PIPE)
14. LEVEL TRANSMITTER 1 200
15. LEVEL SWITCH (INSIDE 16” SLEEVE PIPE) 1 80
16. DIP HATCH WITH STILL WELL 1 200
17. SPARE 1 100
18. STILL WELL 1 500
3
RAJASTHAN
B. HSD TANK_TK-200A/B/C (CRVT)

(MM)
2. INLET 1 350
3. OUTLET 1 400
4. PRODUCT DRAW OFF/DRAIN 1 100
5. RECIRCULATION 1 250
6. PRESSURE RELIEF LINE 1 80
7. FOAM POURER 3 150
9. PRESSURE RELIEF LINE (INSIDE 16” SLEEVE PIPE) 1 1”
10. VENT -1 4 150
11. TEMPERATURE ELEMENT (INSIDE 16” SLEEVE PIPE WITH 1 50
STILL WELL PIPE)
12. LEVEL TRANSMITTER (INSIDE 16” SLEEVE PIPE WITH STILL 1 200
WELL PIPE)
14. LEVEL SWITCH (INSIDE 16” SLEEVE PIPE) 1 80
15. DIP HATCH WITH STILL WELL 1 200
C. MS TANK_TK-100D (UG HDR)

(MM)
1. Shell Manhole with cover 2 600
2. Inlet 1 80
3. Outlet 1 80
4. Temperature element 1 80
5. Level Transmitter (Radar Type) 1 200
6. Dip hatch 1 80
7. Vent 1 80
8. Level switch 1 50
9. Pump Firing Nozzle 1 600
4
RAJASTHAN
D. HSD TANK TK-200D/E (UG HDR)

(MM)
2. Inlet 1 80
3. Outlet 1 80
6. Dip hatch 1 80
7. Vent 1 80
9. Pump Nozzle 1 600
E. ETHANOL TANK_TK-300A/B/C/D/E (UG HDR)

(MM)
2. Inlet 1 80
3. Outlet 1 80
6. Dip hatch 1 80
7. Vent 1 80
9. Pump Firing Nozzle 1 600
5
RAJASTHAN
F. FIRE WATER TANK_TK-500A/B (CRVT)

(MM)
2. INLET 1 150
3. OUTLET 1 600
5. OVERFLOW 1 150
6. RECIRCULATION LINE 1 300
7. SPARE 1 100
9. DRAIN 1 100
10. VENT 4 150
G. SLOP TANK (OWS)_TK-400A (UG HDR)

(MM)
2. Tank Lorry Discharge/Fill Pipe 1 100
3. Suction Pipe on Manhole cover 1 50
4. Suction Pipe 1 50
5. Drain 1 50
6. Vent 1 50
7. Blank Connection (Submersible Pump) 1 100
4.1 For CR tanks, supply of Structural & appurtenances include trusses, central drum,
girders, rafters, kerb angles, hand railing on tank top, spiral staircase with railing,
landing platforms, appurtenances such as hinged type shell manholes, inlet and
outlet nozzles, water draw off sump, water draw off nozzle including pipe,
temperature nozzle with hatch, dip pipe with hatch, nozzle with hatch for central
dipping, roof vents (PV Valves), Emergency Vents roof manholes, pad plates for all
openings in shell and roof (except roof/shell manholes & nozzles), thermal
expansion relief nozzles with required length of heavy duty ASTM A 106 pipe from
bottom to top of the tank outside & up to bottom inside the tank and flanged gate/
NR valves, painters hooks, tank history plate, structure for wind girders( including
railing, stiffeners, rain water pipe etc.), base plate, splice plate, cleats, earthing
boss with bolts, etc.
6
RAJASTHAN
4.2 It also includes supply & fixing of all attachments fasteners such as studs, nuts,
washers & Non asbestos/ Spiral Wound metallic gaskets at contractors cost.
Contractor will also fix the Gate valves/ GOVs/ MOVs. ROSOVs/ DBBVs will be
supplied by Instrumentation Vendor. The contractor will supply and fix gaskets,
nuts, studs, washers etc. on inlet, outlet and water draw off line.
4.3 For IFR tank, structural and appurtenances shall include girders, rafters, kerb angles,
spiral staircase with railing, landing platforms, appurtenances such as shell manholes,
inlet and outlet nozzles, water draw off sump, water draw off nozzle including pipe,
pad plates for all openings in shell and roof except shell manholes, thermal expansion
relief nozzles with required length of heavy duty ASTM A 106 pipe and flanged gate/
NR valves, Free & Circulation vents as per API 650, tank history plate, pad plates for
all openings in shell and roof except shell manholes, datum plate, splice plate,
cleats, earthing boss etc.
4.4 Structural members & supports for wind girders including extended well near
staircase shall include angles, channels, girders, stiffeners, pipe railing, rain water
pipe etc. Item also includes provision of one no. through manhole on each tank for
fixing tank float level gauge by the tank gauging supplier. Also, the tank gauging
supplier shall need to provide nozzles at his cost for the purpose of fixing tank level
gauges including supports on the tanks. The contractor shall coordinate with tank
gauging supplier for these jobs accordingly.
4.5 Any other structure or appurtenance as required to complete the tank fabrication
work as per standard drawings and specifications but not mentioned above will also be
supplied and fabricated by contractor without any additional cost to NAYARA.
5.0 WELDING
5.1 Tanks and their structural attachments shall be welded by the Metal Arc process. The
welding may be performed on manual/automatic or semi-automatic mode using
suitable equipment.
5.2 The welding sequence for tack welding and final welding of the bottom, shell and
roof plates shall be such so as to minimize the distortion due to welding shrinkage
and it shall be as per standard drawing or any other method as deemed suitable by
the contractor who may also submit his own welding sequence and may use it after
its approval by Engineer-in-Charge.
5.3 Welding shall not be carried out when the surfaces of the parts to be welded are wet
from any causes and during periods of rain and high winds unless the welder and work
are properly shielded.
7
RAJASTHAN
5.4 Low Hydrogen electrodes namely E-70 series shall be used for all manual metal arc
welds of shell courses having thickness of 12 mm or more & for attachment of shell
courses to bottom or annular plates.
5.5 High Cellulose/ Rutile type electrodes namely E-60 series as per latest addition of AWS
A 5.1 (Carbon Steel Covered Arc Welding Electrodes) specifications wherever
applicable for covered electrodes for metal arc welding of mild steel.
5.6 Electrodes shall be stored in dry places in their original packets or cartons. Preheating
of electrodes shall be provided as per AWS requirements.
5.7 Tack welds used in the assembly of circumferential and vertical joints of tank shells,
and those used for assembling the shell to the bottom shall be removed and surface
grinded properly and gaps filled with weld metal.
5.8 Welder performance qualification shall be carried out as per API-650 Section 7
Welding Procedure and Welder Qualification’ or ASME Boiler & pressure Vessels
Code Sec. IX. Welders shall be qualified in the approved procedure as per the code
requirements. The qualification test shall be arranged by contractor at his cost
and witnessed by Site Engineer/ Engineer-In-Charge / inspection agency. IS:823
should also be referred in the matter.
5.9 Welder test certificate is treated invalid if he has not done any welding for
continuous six months. Fresh certificate is to be obtained before carrying out
welding again by him.
5.10 All longitudinal and circumferential shell joints shall be of full penetration, full
fusion, double welded butt welds using any of edge preparations profile permitted
by codes.
6.0 TANK CALIBRATION

6.1 Coordination with CPWD /Legal Metrology/ Weights & Measure dept. or any other
approved authority including payment of calibration fee and professional/other
expenses.
6.2 Temporary scaffolding, with steel structural of safe design, shall be erected around
the tank to ensure safety of the workers during strapping of the tank.
6.3 Tested water meters and hoses shall be arranged for physical calibration of tank
bottom up to datum plate level.
6.4 Required water, labour & equipment for calibration shall be arranged by the
contractor at their own cost. Calibration shall be carried out in presence of CPWD
/Legal Metrology/ Weights & Measure dept or their authorized representative.
6.5 After calibration is carried out, scaffolding materials shall be retained till
completion of painting & thereafter can be dismantled and removed from site
8
RAJASTHAN
immediately. Damages if any, caused to the sand pad foundations shall be repaired
at no extra cost to the NAYARA.
6.6 After calibration, the water shall be drained out and the bottom, shell from inside,
steel structures underside of roof shall be cleaned properly and manhole covers to be
fixed properly including replacing the gaskets etc wherever necessary as directed by
Site Engineer.
6.7 Preparation and submission of calibration charts in triplicate duly approved by CPWD
/ calibrating authorities. One set of charts shall be submitted duly laminated and
balance two in file covers.
7.0 ACCEPTANCES
7.1 Before handing over the tank to the NAYARA, the contractor shall ensure following:
7.2 The tank bottom and roof should be in specified uniform slope after hydrostatic test
of the tanks.
7.3 In case, where bottom is not having reasonably uniform slope, the contractor will
have to find out the reasons for the defect and bring the bottom plates to desired
slope at no extra cost to NAYARA.
7.4 Similarly, deformities in roof plates shall be rectified to bring the roof plates in
desired uniform specified slope at no extra cost to NAYARA.
7.5 The shell should be in plumb. Maximum acceptable limit for out of plumb-ness of tank
shell is 1/200 of the tank height, beyond which repairs to be carried out at
contractors cost without any cost to the NAYARA.
7.6 Tank earthing shall be tested with 3 point Megger to give acceptable earth resistance
of less than 1 Ohms. Certificate from licensed electrical contractor is to be submitted
to this effect.
7.7 The sand pad foundations shall be finished to its original condition. The site should be
cleared of all scrap and contractor’s equipment and machinery used in tank
fabrication.
9
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR CONSTRUCTION OF SAND PAD FOUNDATION FOR VERTICAL STORAGE

TANKS
1.0 MATERIALS
1.1 SAND
Sand shall be natural river sand from a source approved by the owner before
commencement of work. It shall be clean, durable, angular, gritty & free from mica,
salt and organic or vegetable matter Sand shall be screened free of all foreign matter
and shall conform in grading to the requirements in Grading Zone III of Table No. 3 of
latest edition of IS 383 for fine aggregates.
1.2 MURRUM / CLAY
Murram/ clay shall be of best quality available and free from all foreign material.
Same shall be brought at site after approval from site Engineer.
1.3 WATER
Water for consolidation shall be potable and free from mineral salts. Same shall be
got tested from a reputed test house for suitability before the start of works.
1.4 BITUMEN
Bitumen for the Carpet shall be 80/100 grade.
2.0 SETTING OUT

2.1 Before starting the work, the contractor shall line out the position of the foundation
as per layout drawing and also construct a concrete bench mark which shall be the
datum for levels. The bench mark shall be constructed in a manner which will ensure
that it is not disturbed or undergo settlement. The laying out of the benchmark shall
be approved by Site Engineer.
3.0 SUBGRADE
3.1 Excavation shall be to the exact dimensions as per standard drawings for sand pad
foundation unless instructed in writing by the Site Engineer.
3.2 The sub grade shall be watered and rammed to level and shall be free from soft
spots.
3.3 Tank bottom will be concave shaped with the slope towards the center ranging from
1:40 to 1:100 depending upon the diameter of the tank so that central depression
shall not exceed 250 mm
3.4 The diameter of bituminous carpet shall be kept 300 mm larger than the diameter of
the tank.
3.5 Height of the Sand Pad Foundation shall be kept minimum 1 m. above finish ground
level.
10
RAJASTHAN
4.0 SAND FILLING & MURRUM FILLING

4.1 Sand and murram before filling shall be dry and shall be spread in layers of 200 mm
thickness.
4.2 Each layer shall be profusely watered and compacted using appropriate compaction
techniques like plate vibrator or rammers so as to attain a relative density not below
90 to 95% of maximum laboratory density, up to the satisfaction of Site Engineer.
4.3 The Relative density of a particular type of sand shall be predetermined in the
laboratory by adopting methods given in IS- 2720 (part XIV).
5.0 BITUMEN CARPET

5.1 Sand or stone grit of fineness modulus 3.5 (max) heated to 130C shall be thoroughly
mixed with bitumen 80/100 grade heated to the required temperature. The
proportion of the mix shall be 100 KG of bitumen per cum. of sand or stone grit
5.2 Before laying the carpet any unevenness in the sand pad surface shall be made good
and it shall be ensured that the surface is free from moisture.
5.3 The surface shall be lightly rolled to obtain a smooth surface and properly graded as
per standard drawing.
5.4 Surface of the carpet shall be blinded by applying a 5 mm thick seal coat of hot
bitumen and immediately spreading coarse sand uniformly.
5.5 The completed carpet shall conform to the profile given in drawing for sand pad
foundation. No point on carpet shall be off from the specified level by more than 10
mm.
5.6 Levels shall be jointly recorded for:
• The sub-grade.
• Final consolidated surface before carpeting.
• Finished carpet surface.
These levels shall be the basis for computation of quantities of excavation, filling etc.
6.0 OTHER REQUIREMENTS

6.1 All materials required for the work shall be supplied by the contractor after being
approved by the Site Engineer.
6.2 Drawing for sand pad foundation shows a central sump but the foundation shall be
constructed complete without the sump.
6.3 Heating of bitumen shall be done only in area permitted as safe for open fire. The
contractor shall obtain necessary permits from local authorities if heating has to be
done outside NAYARA premises and shall show the same to our Site Engineer.
11
RAJASTHAN
DETAILS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF SAND PAD
Detail 1:
Clean medium to coarse river sand layer, compacted using a vibrating plate in layers of 150
mm compacted thickness to at least 90-95% density index (relative density). A dozer may
also be used for compaction. Each 150 mm thick layer may be watered first, before
compaction. The density achieved in each compacted sand layer shall be monitored at the
rate of 2 tests in each layer.
Detail 2:
Well graded hard broken stone, 80mm and down size, well compacted, with voids filled with
clean river sand. This is to be done in three layers of about 300mm thickness each. After
placing the first layer of 300 mm thickness, place clean river sand, 50 mm thickness on top
of the broken stone layer and it shall be copiously watered with a nozzle/ water jet in order
to force the river sand into the void spaces of the broken stone. When all the sand goes into
the voids of the broken stone, one more layer of clean river sand shall be placed again and
copiously watered to force it into the voids of the broken. The process shall be repeated
until no more sand and water get into the void space of the broken stone. At this stage, a
thin sheet of water will stand on the layer.
The density achieved in each broken stone ring layer shall be monitored (using balloon
method or any other suitable method), at the rate of at least two tests in each layer, to
ensure that a density of at least 2.15 t/m3 is achieved.
The broken stone used in the ring layer mentioned above shall be well graded hard broken
stone conforming to the following gradation (reproduced from IS:383 – 1970 Table – 2)
IS Sieve Designation % age Passing

80mm 100%
63mm 85-100%
40 mm 0-30%
20 mm 0-5%
10 mm 0-5%
Detail 3:
75 mm thick compacted layer using Sand or stone grit of fineness modulus 3.5 (max) in hot
asphalt grade VG10, 8 to 10% by volume and rolled and compacted.
12
RAJASTHAN
Detail 4:
40 mm thick CC: 1: 2:4. Expansion joints at 4 m c/c shall also be provided as part of
construction. The expansion joints shall be filled suitably and poly sulphide material as per
manufacturer’s specification.
Detail 5:
75 mm thick BRICK PITCHING IN CM 1:5
Detail 6:
150 mm thick Murram filling
Detail 7:
Sieved clean river sand, free from sharp objects such as broken shells, pebbles, stone pieces
etc. Thickness of the second layer is 50 mm above and 50 mm below the LDPE film.
Detail 8:
Black Low-Density Polyethylene (LDPE) film, 1000 gauge (-250 micrometer thick), as per
IS:2508-1984. Joints in the film shall be heat-sealed insitu during laying of the film, using a
3-sealer iron and checked carefully.
The film shall be laid at a slope (towards the periphery of the tank pad) of at least 1 in 500
to effectively drain leaked product, if any, away from the pad. The film shall be anchored at
the periphery of the tank pad, as shown in the sketch.
Detail 9:
PVC Sch 40 pipe of wall thickness 3.38 mm (0.133”) as drain pipe, 25 mm inner diameter,
perforated in the under-tank area, as per guide lines given in API standard 650, Appendix- I.
The outer end of the pipe may project 150mm beyond the pad and covered with a nylon or
Netlon mesh to prevent entry of insects and rodents. The maximum spacing of the pipes shall
be 15m centre to centre along the periphery. Minimum of four pipes to be provided.
Filter -1
12 mm and down size stone chips layer of 300 mm horizontal thickness.
Filter – 2
40 mm and down size hard broken stone layer of 300 horizontal thickness.
13
RAJASTHAN
Detail 10:
A layer of clean medium to coarse river sand compacted using a vibrating plate, after
watering the 150 mm thick layer of sand. At least 65% density index (relative density) shall
be achieved after compaction.
14
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FABRICATION, ERECTION, WELDING OF VERTICAL STORAGE

TANKS INCLUDING WELDING REQUIREMENTS IN TANK & PIPELINES FABRICATION
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0 STEEL PLATES
1.1 Plates shall conform to IS: 2062 GR. B Fully Killed subject to stipulations provided in
IS: 803.
2.0 STRUCTURAL SECTIONS

2.1 Structural steel will conform to IS: 808 latest Edition.
2.2 Structural steel will be of approved make.
2.3 Sectional weight will be considered for payment purposes.
3.0 WELDING ELECTRODES

3.1 Manual arc welding electrodes shall conform to E-60 & E-70 classification series in the
latest edition America Welding Society, AWS A 5.1 “Carbon Steel covered Arc Welding
Electrodes”.
3.2 Low Hydrogen electrodes namely E-70 series shall be used for all manual metal arc
welds of shell courses having thickness of 12 mm or more & for attachment of shell
courses to bottom or annular plates.
3.3 High Cellulose/ Rutile type electrodes namely E-60 series as per latest addition of AWS
A 5.1 (Carbon Steel Covered Arc Welding Electrodes) specifications wherever
applicable for covered electrodes for metal arc welding of mild steel.
3.4 Electrodes shall be stored in dry places in their original packets or cartons. Preheating
of electrodes shall be provided as per AWS requirements.
4.0 PIPING
4.1 All pipes for nozzles on product tanks and pressure relief & expansion lines shall be as
per ASTM A 106 Grade B, Schedule 40. The pipes used for water services shall be as
per IS-1239 / IS-3589 (Heavy grades).
5. 0 FLAN GE S
5.1 Material for WNRF flanges to conform to ASTM A-105 for all nozzles.
5.2 Flanges shall conform to ASME B 16.5 for dimensions
5.3 All flanges will have raised serrated faces finished to 125 AARH.
15
RAJASTHAN
6.0 STUDS AND NUTS

6.1 All bolts and nuts shall conform to A 193 Gr. B7 and A194 Gr.2H respectively and
washers to IS-2016-1967.
7.0 GASKETS
7.1 150# Spiral Wound SS316 + Grafoil Ι ASME B16.20/ASME B16.5 (Glass Filled Teflon For
Ethanol Service)
Note: Thickness of Gasket shall be 2mm upto 300 NB and 3mm for sizes above 300NB.
8.0 CODE OF PRACTICE

8.1 The fabrication, erection and welding of the tanks shall generally conform to
directional enclosed drawings, latest edition of API-650 and IS:803 (code of
practice for design, fabrication and erection of vertical mild steel cylindrical
welded oil storage tanks)
8.2 Constructional tolerances, for various items, shall not exceed beyond permissible
limits in the above codes.
9.0 WELDING REQUIREMENTS IN TANK AND PIPELINE FABRICATION

9.1 WELDING
9.1.1 Welding of steel plates and related accessories shall be carried out conforming to the
requirements of various paragraph in this chapter.
9.2 WELDING RESPONSIBILITY
9.2.1 The contractor is responsible for the welding done by welders employed by him.
Engineer-In-Charge shall conduct the tests required to qualify welding procedures,
and to qualify the welders and if, necessary re-qualify welders and welding
operators.
9.3 WELDING QUALIFICATIONS
9.3.1 QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS: Qualification of the welding procedures to be used
and of the performance of welders and welding operators shall conform to the
requirements of the ASME Section IX.
9.3.2 PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION BY OTHERS: Engineer-In-Charge is responsible for
qualifying any welding procedure that will be used. Welding procedures qualified by
others may be used, subject to the specific approval of the Engineer-in-Charge /
Inspector provided that the following conditions are met.
a) The proposed Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) has been prepared,
qualified and executed by responsible, recognized organization with expertise in
the field of welding and
b) The Contractor has not made any change in the welding procedure.
16
RAJASTHAN
9.3.3 The impact testing is generally not required.

9.3.4 The material is to be welded are in the thickness range between 5 mm to 40 mm.
Therefore, Post weld heat treatment is not required.
9.3.5 The design pressure is atmospheric, and the design temperature Is in the range -4 deg
C to 50 oC
9.3.6 The welding process is SMAW or GTAW or a combination thereof.
9.3.7 Welding electrodes for the SMAW process shall be E60 and E 70 classification series (E-
6010, E 6013, 7018 and E 7018-1 in AWS A 5.1).
9.3.8 The contractor accepts written responsibility for both i.e. the Welding Procedure
Specifications (WPS) and the Procedure Qualification Record (PQR).
9.3.9 The contractor has at least currently employed welder or welding operator, who have
met with the following requirements.
While in employment, the welder has satisfactorily passed a performance
qualification test using the procedure and the P-Number material specified in the
WPS.
a) The performance bend test required by ASME Section IX QW-302 shall be used for
this purpose
9.4 PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION BY OTHERS
9.4.1 Site Engineer may accept a performance qualification made by certified agencies with
the specific approval of the Engineer-In-Charge.
9.4.2 The Contractor shall obtain a copy from the certified agencies of the performance
qualification test record & submit the same to Engineer-In-Charge with specific
recommendation & approval of Inspector with the following details.
b) The name of the agency.
c) The name of the welder or welding operator.
d) The procedure identification.
e) The date of successful qualification.
f) The data that Individual last used the procedure on tank fabrication.
9.5 QUALIFICATION RECORD
9.5.1 The Contractor shall maintain a self-certified record, available to the Engineer-In-
Charge and the Inspector. The records will have the following details:
a) The procedure used.
b) The welders and welding operators employed showing the date and results of
procedure and performance qualifications
c) The identification symbol assigned to each welder and welding operator.
9.6 WELDING MATERIALS
9.6.1 FILLER METAL
a) Filler metal shall conform to the requirements of ASME Section IX.
17
RAJASTHAN
b) A filler metal, not yet incorporated in ASME Section IX may be used with NAYARA
approval, if a procedure qualification test is first successfully made
9.7 PREPARATION FOR WELDING

9.7.1 CLEANING
a) Internal and external surfaces to be thermally cut or welded shall be clean.
b) They will be free from paint oil rust scale and other material that would be
detrimental to either the weld or the base metal when heat is applied.
9.7.2 END PREPARATION

a) End preparation is acceptable only if the surface is reasonably smooth and true,
and slag from oxygen or arc cutting is cleaned from thermally cut surfaces.
b) Dis-colouration remaining on a thermally cut surface is not considered detrimental
oxidation.
c) End preparation, for groove welds specified in ASME or as specified, which meets
the WPS is acceptable.
9.8 ALIGNMENT
9.8.1 CIRCUMFERENTIAL WELDS
a) Inside surface of steel plate ends to be joined shall be aligned within the
dimensional limits in the WPS and the engineering design.
b) If the external surfaces of the steel plates are not aligned, the weld shall be
tapered between them.
9.9 WELDING REQUIREMENTS

9.9.1 WELDS: Welds including addition of weld metal for alignment shall be made in
accordance with a qualified procedure and by qualified welders or welding
operators
9.9.2 WELDER’S IDENTIFICATION SYMBOL: Each qualified welder and welding operator shall
be assigned an identification symbol.
a) Unless otherwise specified in the engineering design, each weld or adjacent area
shall be marked with the identification symbol of the welder or welding operator.
b) In addition of marking the weld, appropriate records shall be maintained.
9.9.3 TACK WELDS
a) Tack welds at the root of the joint shall be made with filler equivalent to that to
be used in the root pass.
b) Tack welds shall be made by a qualified welder or welding operator.
18
RAJASTHAN
c) Tack welds shall be fused with the root pass weld, except that those which
have cracked shall be removed. Bridge tacks (above the weld) shall be
removed.
9.9.4 PEENING: Peening is prohibited on the root pass and final pass of a weld.
9.9.5 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: No welding shall be done if there is impingement on the weld
area, of rain, snow, sleet or excessive wind or if the weld area is frosted or wet.
9.9.6 FILLET AND SOCKET WELDS: Fillet welds, including socket welds, may vary from convex
to concave. The size of a fillet weld shall be as per engineering design.
9.9.7 SEAL WELDS: Seal welding shall be done by a qualified welder. Seal welds shall cover
all exposed threads.
19
RAJASTHAN
RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION PROCEDURE OF VERTICAL TANKS
1.0 RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION:

Radiographic inspection of weld joints of vertical tanks shall be conducted as per
latest API 650, generally as per following details:
1.1 JOINTS REQUIRING RADIOGRAPHY
1.1.1 Tank shell butt welds
1.1.2 Tank bottom annular plate butt welds
1.1.3 All ‘T’ joints in Shell irrespective of plate thickness. Each film shall clearly show
not less than 50 MM of weld length on each side of vertical intersection and 150
MM along the vertical weld.
1.1.4 Butt weld of bottom sump.
1.1.5 Shell joints covered by reinforcement pad plate.
1.1.6 Horizontal weld of Gauge pipe and vertical weld of gauge well in Floating roof
tank.
1.2 JOINTS NOT REQUIRING RADIOGRAPHY
1.2.1 Welds of roof plates
1.2.2 Welds of bottom plates
1.2.3 Welds Joining roof plates to curb angle
1.2.4 Welds joining curb angle to shell plates
1.2.5 Welds joining bottom plates to shell plates
1.2.6 Welds joining appurtenances to tank
2.0 NUMBER AND LOCATIONS OF RADIOGRAPHS

VERTICAL JOINTS
2.1 Tanks having plate thickness up to 10 mm or less
2.1.1 One spot radiograph shall be taken in the first 3 m of completed vertical joint
of each type and thickness welded by each welder.
2.1.2 Thereafter, without regard to number of welders, one additional spot
radiograph shall be taken in each additional 30 M and any remaining fraction of
vertical joint of the same type and thickness.
2.1.3 In addition to the above requirements, one random spot radiograph shall be
taken in each vertical joint in the lowest course of the tank. The spot
radiographs already taken on the lowest course may be used to meet this
requirement.
2.1.4 In addition, junctions of all vertical & horizontal joints (Tee Joints) shall be
radio-graphed.
2.2 Tanks having plate thickness greater than 10 mm and up to and including 25 mm
20
RAJASTHAN
2.2.1 Spot radiographs shall be taken as per 2.1 above.

2.2.2 In addition, two spot radiographs shall be taken in each vertical joint of lowest
course of the tank. 0ne of the radiograph will be as close to the bottom as
practicable and other shall be taken at random.
2.3 Tanks having plate thickness greater than 25 mm and up to and including 40 mm
2.3.1 For plate thickness up to 25 MM, spot radiographs shall be taken as per details
given in 2.1 & 2.2 above.
2.3.2 In addition, all vertical joints in plate thickness in the range of more than 25
mm and up to and including 40 mm shall be fully radio-graphed.
2.4 HORIZONTAL JOINTS
One spot radiograph shall be taken in the first 3 M of completed horizontal butt
joint of the same type and thickness without regard to number of welders.
2.4.1 Thereafter, one radiograph shall be taken in each 60 M and any remaining
fraction of horizontal joint of the same type and thickness.
2.4.2 No. of such radiographs should exclude junctions of vertical & horizontal seams.
2.5 BOTTOM ANNULAR PLATE BUTT JOINT
2.5.1 For single butt welded joint using backing up strip, one spot radiograph shall be
taken on 50% of radial joints. Location of radiographs shall be preferably at the
outer edge where shell plate joins the annular plate. The minimum length of
the radiograph shall be 150 MM. Extra care should be exercised to interpret
such radiographs.
2.6 GAUGE PIPE & PAD PLATE
2.6.1 100% radiograph of gauge pipe and gauge well in FR tank.
2.6.2 100% radiograph of vertical and horizontal joints, where pad plate fouls.
2.7 REMARKS
2.7.1 For the purpose of radiography, plates shall be considered of the same
thickness when difference in specified or design thickness does not exceed 0.85
mm.
2.7.2 When two or more tanks are erected in the same terminal/depot, the number
of spot radiographs to be taken should be based on meterage of the welds of
the same type and thickness in each individual tank rather than aggregate
meterage of welds of all tanks.
2.7.3 It is permissible to inspect the work of two welders with one spot radiograph, if
they weld opposite sides of the same butt joint. In the event of rejection of a
spot radiograph, further spot radiographs shall be used to determine whether
one or both welders were at fault.
2.7.4 As far as possible, an equal number of spot radiographs shall be taken from the
work of each welder, except that this requirement does not apply where length
21
RAJASTHAN
of joints welded by welder is much less than average in comparison with other
welders.
2.7.5 Radiographs shall be taken as soon as practicable during process of welding.
The number and locations of radiographs should be pre-determined as per
guidelines mentioned above.
2.7.6 Each radiograph shall clearly show a minimum of 150 MM of weld length and 50
MM on either side from the center line of the weld. Hence each film should
show minimum radiograph of 150 x 100 MM of selected weld. The film shall be
centered on the weld and shall be of sufficient width to permit adequate space
for the location of identification works and a thickness gauge.
3.0 EXAMINATION OF RADIOGRAPHS

3.1 The radiographic examination method employed shall be in accordance with the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section V “Non-Destructive Examination” Article 2
3.2 The requirements of Article 2, Section V of ASME code are to be used only as a guide.
However, final acceptance of radiographs shall be based on the ability to see the
prescribed penetra meter image and the specified hole. Contractor will engage
minimum one L-2 inspector at site for interpretation of radiographs which in-turn will
be submitted to Nayara’s M&I deptt. for final interpretation.
3.3 The acceptability of welds examined by radiography shall be judged by the standards
in Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UW-51 (b), of the ASME code.
4.0 DETERMINATION OF LIMITS OF DEFECTIVE WELDING

4.1 When a section of weld is shown by radiograph to be unacceptable under provisions
given above or limits of the deficient welding are not defined by the radiograph, two
adjacent spots shall be examined by radiography.
4.2 However, if the original radiograph shows at least 75 MM of acceptable weld between
the defect and any one edge of the film, an additional radiograph need not be taken
of the weld on that side of the defect.
4.3 If the weld at either side of two adjacent sections fails to comply with the
requirements of 11.7.3, additional nearby spots shall be examined until the limits of
acceptable welding are determined or the fabricator may replace all the welding
performed by the welder on that joint.
4.4 If the welding is replaced as per 11.6.3, one radiograph should be taken at any
selected location on any other joint on which the same welder has welded.
4.5 If any of these additional spots fails to comply with the requirements of 11.7.3, the
limits of unacceptable welding shall be determined as specified for the initial section
22
RAJASTHAN
5.0 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE WELDS

5.1 The defective weld shall be removed by chipping or melting out by thermal gouging
process from both sides of joint and re welding. Only sufficient cutting out of the
defective joints, as is necessary to correct the defect, is required.
5.2 All repaired weld in joints shall be checked by repeating the original inspection
procedure and by repeating the hydrostatic testing / vacuum box testing method.
6.0 RECORD OF RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION

6.1 The fabricator shall make a record consisting of all films with their identification
marks on a developed shell - plate diagram.
6.2 After completion of tanks, the films shall be handed over to Nayara Energy.
23
RAJASTHAN
RADIOGRAPHY FOR PIPING WORKS
1.0 RADIOGRAPHY
1.1 RADIATION SOURCE – Radiographic examination shall be carried out by using Gama
radiation.
1.2 RADIOGRAPHIC QUALITY LEVEL – The radiographic quality level required wire
1.3 The Radiographic Quality Inspector shall be equivalent to the 2-2T level of practice
ASTM-E 1025 unless otherwise a higher or lower quality level is agreed upon between
NAYARA and the Contractor.
1.4 If it is impossible to place the radiation source inside the pipe, the weld will be
inspected with the source on the outside. An overlap of at least 40mm at the ends of
each film shall be required to ensure that the first and last location increment
numbers are common to successive films and to establish that no part of a weld has
been omitted.
2.0 PROTECTION AND CARE OF FILM

All unexposed films shall be protected and stored properly as per the requirements of
API 1104 standard and ASTM E 94. The exposed and unexposed film shall be protected
from heat, light, dust and moisture. Sufficient shielding shall be supplied to prevent
exposure of film to damaging radiation prior to and following the use of the film for
radiographic exposure.
3.0 PROCEDURE-
The procedure of radiographic examination shall be qualified to the entire satisfaction
of NAYARA prior to use. It shall include but not be limited to the following
requirement.
a. ad foil intensifying screen, at the rear of the film shall be used for all exposures.
b. Fine grain films shall be used.
c. A densitometer shall be used to determine film density. The transmitted film
density shall be 2.0 and 3.5 throughout the weld. The unexposed base density of
the film shall not exceed 0.30.
d. Radiographic identification system and documentation for radiographic
interpretation reports and their recording system.
24
RAJASTHAN
4.0 THIRD PARTY INSPECTION:

It must be noted that whenever, inspection notice is given to the third party for
inspection of materials, a copy will also be dispatched to NAYARA so that NAYARA
representatives may join inspection if required. However, party is not absolved of his
responsibility of providing proper type and quality of materials including
workmanship.
25
RAJASTHAN
RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION PROCEDURE FOR PIPING WORKS
1.0 RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION. GENERAL

a. Radiographic inspection of weld joints shall be conducted as per latest API 1104,
The radiographic requirement shall be as given below.
b. First weld of each welder is to be radiographed except that for pipe 100 mm and
lower in nominal size, where the first two welds of each welder are to be
completely radiographed.
c. The radiographic procedure shall be approved by the Owner’s Inspector, the
procedure and quality of radiographic examination, limits of acceptability, repair
and removal of defects shall be as per API code 1104, ASTM E-94 and ASTM E-142.
d. The contractor shall be responsible for carrying out radiography, rectification of
defects and re-radiography of welds repaired and rectified. He shall make
necessary arrangements for providing the equipment as well as radiographic
film for the satisfactory and timely completion of the job.
e. Radiographic inspection of the welds shall be preferably made with X rays. Iridium
192 isotope or any other source may be used with the approval of the site
engineer.
f. The contractor shall fulfill all the statutory safety requirements in handling the X
ray or gamma ray equipment.
g. The details of the radiography shall be duly entered and signed by him in a
register and shall be submitted to the Owner’s Inspector for approval.
h. The contractor shall afford all necessary facilities to the inspector at site such as
darkroom with controlled temperature, viewer etc. for the examination of the
radiographic film.
i. Interpretation of radiographs shall be done as per acceptable standards.
j. When the entire joint is unacceptable, the weld shall be cut completely and the
pipe ends shall be restored for rewelding. After reweld the joint shall be again
checked.
k. No repair of welds shall be done without prior permission of the site engineer.
l. For each weld found unacceptable due to welder’s fault such as lack of fusion
and penetration, two additional checks should be carried out on welds
performed by the same welder whose joint was judged unacceptable originally.
The operation is progressive and the procedure of radio graphing two additional
welds for each weld deemed unsatisfactory shall be followed till such time two
consecutive satisfactory welds are obtained.
m. The contractor shall carry out these additional radiographs at his own expense.
26
RAJASTHAN
n. To avoid the possibility of too many defective welds by as single welder going
undetected over a period of time, the contractor shall arrange to radiography
promptly so that there is no backing in radiography.
o. Repairs and / or work of defective welds shall be done in time to avoid delays in
the construction programme.
2.0 EXAMINATION OF RADIOGRAPHS

a. The radiographic examination method employed shall be in accordance with the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section V “Non-Destructive Examination”
Article 2.
b.The requirements of Article 2, Section V of ASME code are to be used only as a
guide. However, final acceptance of radiographs shall be based on the ability to
see the prescribed penetrameter image and the specified hole. Contractor will
engage minimum one L-2 inspector at site for interpretation of radiographs which
in-turn will be submitted to NAYARA’s M&I deptt. for final interpretation.
3.0 DETERMINATION OF LIMITS OF DEFECTIVE WELDING

a. When a section of weld is shown by radiograph to be unacceptable under
provisions of 10.1 or limits of the deficient welding are not defined by the
radiograph, two adjacent spots shall be examined by radiography.
b. However, if the original radiograph shows at least 75 MM of acceptable weld
between the defect and any one edge of the film, an additional radiograph need
not be taken of the weld on that side of the defect.
c. If the weld at either side of two adjacent sections fails to comply with the
requirements of 10.1 additional nearby spots shall be examined until the limits of
acceptable welding are determined or the fabricator may replace all the welding
performed by the welder on that joint.
d. If the welding is replaced one radiograph should be taken at any selected location
on any other joint on which the same welder has welded.
e. If any of these additional spots fails to comply with the requirements of 10.1 the
limits of unacceptable welding shall be determined as specified for the initial
section
4.0 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE WELDS

a. The defective weld shall be removed by chipping or melting out by thermal
gouging process from both sides of joint and re-welding. Only sufficient cutting out
of the defective joints, as is necessary to correct the defect, is required.
27
RAJASTHAN
b. All repaired weld in joints shall be checked by repeating the original inspection
procedure and by repeating the hydrostatic testing / vacuum box testing method.
5.0 RECORD OF RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION:

The fabricator shall make a record consisting of all films with their identification
marks and submit the same on completion of work.
28
RAJASTHAN
RADIOGRAPHIC INTERPRETATION OF WELD JOINTS AS PER API 1104
1. CRACK : Not Acceptable

2. LACK OF ROOT PENETRATION : Individual defect shall not exceed FUSION 1”
in 12” weld length.
3. LACK OF SIDE WALL FUSION : Shall not exceed 2”. Total length shall not
exceed 3” in weld length.
4. INTERNAL CONCAVITY : Not acceptable.
5. POROSITY : Max. Dimension shall not exceed ½” in 12”
Weld Length. Distribution of gas pockets as
per Porosity Chart given in Code.
6. BURN THROUGH : Individual defect shall not exceed ¼”.
7. SLAG INCLUSION : Any elongated slag shall not exceed 2” in
Length or 1/16” in Width.
Total length of such defect shall not exceed 2” in 12” weld length. Parallel slag lines shall be
considered as separate conditions if width of either exceeds 1/32”. Isolated slag inclusion
width shall not exceeds 1/8”. Total length of any isolated inclusion shall not exceed %2” in
12” length of weld nor shall there be four isolated inclusion of width greater than 1/8” in
this length.
8. UNDER CUTTING: Undercutting shall not exceed 1/32” in depth and 2” length under
cutting adjacent to the root bead shall not exceed 2” in length.
29
RAJASTHAN
TESTING PROCEDURE OF VERTICAL CONE ROOF & INTERNAL FLOATING

ROOF TANKS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Initial reduced levels of Sand Pad foundation top, bottom plate top at minimum 8
points on periphery @ 45 degree apart.
1.2 Plate thickness checking for all plates at minimum 6 random points on each plate
using ultrasonic gauge.
1.3 Initial levels of tank bottom before Hydrostatic testing of tank and after full erection
of tank & transfer of load to SPF at above 8 points after every 1 m. Increase in water
level.
1.4 Verticality test for tanks @ 3 m c/c on tank periphery.
1.5 Reinforcement pads for shell manhole, nozzles to be tested with pneumatic pressure
of 1 kg./sq.cm through tell-tale holes. After testing, the tell-tale hole shall be
plugged with threaded stud and shall not be sealed.
2.0 TANK BOTTOM TESTING

2.1 WATER DRAW OFF SUMP
2.1.1 Fabricate sump as per drawing.
2.1.2 Radiograph the butt weld of the sump.
2.1.3 Place the bottom plate on the ground. Invert the sump on the bottom plate and weld
with it. (Carry out DP test of the fillet joint after root run)
2.1.4 Create pneumatic/ hydraulic pressure of 2 kg per sq.cm inside the sump after
providing nozzles (two) on the bottom plate.
2.1.5 Repair the defective welds and repeat test till entire satisfaction.
2.1.6 Cut the bottom plate at the sump as per requirement.
2.1.7 Weld the bottom to sump collar and carry out root DYE PENETRATION (DP) Test.
2.2 ANNULAR PLATE BUTT WELDS
2.2.1 RADIOGRAPHY: Radiography as per details given in this tender schedule for single
welded butt joints with back up bar, one spot radiograph shall be taken on 50% of
radial joints as near to periphery as possible.
2.2.2 PNEUMATIC PRESSURE / VACUUM BOX TEST BEFORE ERECTION OF FIRST STRAKE OF
SHELL
a. Complete all annular plate radial butt welds for at least 800 mm length from
outer edge of tank bottom towards tank center.
b. For tanks without annular plates, 800 mm length of sketch plate joints to be
welded as described above.
30
RAJASTHAN
c. Conduct vacuum box test of the above joints at 3 PSI vacuum.

d. Repair the defective welds and repeat test till fully successful.
2.2.3 BOTTOM PLATE LAP WELDS
a. In case of erection by conventional method, complete welding of all bottom
seams. Erect at least lowest (1st) course of shell plates and 2nd course of shell
plates. In case of erection by jacking method complete welding of bottom
seams after full erection and tack welding of the lowest course to bottom
plate.
b. Testing of bottom plate lap welds should be done only by vacuum box method of
testing by creating a vacuum of 3 pounds per square inch on the welds seams
under test.
c. In addition, all bottom plates including weld joints shall have thorough visual
inspection for pin holes, inadequate weld size, improper reinforcement,
undercutting etc.
3.0 SHELL TESTING

3.1 FILLET WELD - 1st STRAKE PLATE TO BOTTOM PLATE
3.1.1 Complete shell to bottom fillet weld from inside periphery of tank bottom.
3.1.2 Check visually for craters cracks or other surface cracks. Check that undercutting of
base metal does not exceed 0.4 mm
3.1.3 Conduct CHALK-KEROSENE test by injecting kerosene from outer periphery un welded
joint and applying chalk on inside fillet weld.
3.1.4 Rectify the defective weld and repeat the test till entire satisfaction.
3.1.5 Complete the outer periphery fillet weld and check it visually as per API-650.
3.2 SHELL APPURTENANCE - REINFORCEMENT PLATES TO SHELL PLATES WELDS
3.2.1 Make 6 mm dia. screw threaded TELL TALE hole in the reinforcement pads before its
welding to shell and shell appurtenances.
3.2.2 The reinforcement pads shall be tested by applying up to 15 pounds per square inch
gauge pneumatic pressure between the tank shell & the reinforcement plates on
each opening using TELL TALE hole.
3.2.3 Use soap suds on welds between reinforcement plate to shell, reinforcement plate to
appurtenances and appurtenances to shell plate welds.
3.2.4 Repair the defective weld and repeat the test till entire satisfaction.
3.2.5 Close the tell-tale hole with a bolt or screw.
3.3 SHELL PLATE BUTT JOINTS RADIOGRAPHY
3.3.1 Prepare shell plate development diagram.
3.3.2 Mark locations for spot radiographs as per guide lines detailed in this tender
schedule.
31
RAJASTHAN
3.3.3 Conduct spot radiography.

3.3.4 Get the radiographs interpreted and repair the defective welds.
3.3.5 Conduct radiography of repaired welds.
3.3.6 Repeat till satisfactory results are obtained.
3.4 SPOT RADIOGRAPHY SHOULD BE CONDUCTED CONCURRENTLY DURING ERECTION AND
WELDING OF SHELL PLATES.
4.0 HYDROSTATIC TESTING

4.1 Weld the permanent “BENCH MARKS” on the tank shell approximately 300 mm above
the bottom plate at minimum eight places @ 45 degree apart along periphery.
4.2 Take initial levels on these bench marks.
4.3 Commence filling water @ 1 m water column per day in the tank for a height up to 4
mtrs.
4.4 In case differential settlement between two consecutive points is less than 5 mm
then increase water filling rate @ 2 m water column per day.
4.5 Fill water up to top leg of top curb angle.
4.6 Hammer the shell joints. Sweating from any joints will be an evidence for leak.
4.7 Repair the defective weld & repeat test till satisfaction.
4.8 Upon satisfactory completion of hydrostatic test, dewatering process may be
commenced @ the rate of 2 m to 3 m water column per day.
5.0 TESTING OF ROOF

5.1 CONE ROOF
5.1.1 Test roof in accordance with any of API-650 recommendations i.e. apply internal
pneumatic pressure not exceeding weight of roof plates and check for leakage by
soap solution. Alternatively, roof seams may also be tested by vacuum box test.
5.1.2 Internal pneumatic pressure, not exceeding weight of roof plates, works out to be
40 mm of water gauge. Hence testing roof should be done at 40 mm of water
gauge only.
5.1.3 Commence dewatering of tank.
5.1.4 Clean the tank from inside and check positions of column bases. Ensure that column
bases are in perfect contact with bottom plates.
5.1.5 Record levels of points on bottom plates and levels of tank periphery.
5.1.6 Compare the final levels with the original levels & analyze the findings in view of the
consultant’s recommendations.
5.1.7 In case of variation in final levels and original levels is more than anticipated, report
matter to Competent Authority for further guidance.
5.2 TESTING OF DECKS OF FLOATING ROOF
32
RAJASTHAN
5.2.1 Procedure as per specification given for aluminum internal deck shall be followed.
5.3 FLOATATION TEST
5.3.1 The procedure given in the specification for aluminum internal deck shall be
followed.
5.4 ANNULAR SPACE AROUND GAUGE WELL
5.4.1 While roof is subjected to floatation test, note down the annular space between
outer dia. of gauge well and inner dia. of gauge well sleeve in roof at every 1 m
ascend of roof during its floatation test up to the height when the weather
shields just touch the top leg of top curb angle. Before taking such readings,
tank roof should be made concentric with tank shell with the help of wooden
blocks in the rim space at each observation point.
5.4.2 Repeat the same observations while emptying out water from the tank.
5.4.3 In no case, gauge well should rub against gauge well sleeve.
5.4.4 Reason for excessively low annular gap should be analyzed and carry out necessary
correction.
5.5 RIM SPACE
5.5.1 While roof is subjected to floatation test, note down rim space at every 1 m ascend
of roof at 3 m peripheral interval along the outer edge of the rim.
5.5.2 Rim space of as per manufacturer’s requirement practically be same at all the
positions of the roof.
5.6 PRIMARY ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM
5.6.1 The roof drainage system shall be in accordance with API 650 Appendix H standards
and as per specifications given under IFR deck.
6.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

6.1 FOR FR TANK
6.1.1 Raw material control/identification.
6.1.2 Approval /review of welding procedure qualification record.
6.1.3 Review of WPS.
6.1.4 Bottom plate layout.
6.1.5 Vacuum box test.
6.1.6 Fit-up/set-up of shells.
6.1.7 Individual shell plumb.
6.1.8 Basis of shell plumb, peaking and bending.
6.1.9 Circularity and dimension of pair of shell.
6.1.10 Back chip DP.
6.1.11 Overall plumb.
6.1.12 NDT including radiography as per contract.
33
RAJASTHAN
6.1.13 Overall visual and dimensional check.

6.1.14 Checking of leaks; Hydrostatic testing of tank.
6.1.15 Roof Floatation test.
6.1.16 Roof visual and dimensional check.
6.1.17 PAD pneumatic test.
6.1.18 Surface profile for blasted surface check
6.1.19 Stage wise Painting thickness check.
6.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN FOR CR TANKS
6.2.1 Raw material control/identification.
6.2.2 Approval /review of Welder procedure qualification record.
6.2.3 Review of WPS.
6.2.4 Tank bottom plate layout.
6.2.5 Vacuum box test.
6.2.6 Fit-up/set-up of shells.
6.2.7 Individual shell plumb.
6.2.8 Basis of shell plumb, peaking and bending.
6.2.9 Circularity and dimension of pair of shell.
6.2.10 Back chip DP.
6.2.11 Overall plumb.
6.2.12 NDT including radiography as per contract.
6.2.13 Overall visual and dimensional check.
6.2.14 PAD pneumatic test
6.2.15 Hydrostatic testing.
6.2.16 Roof pneumatic test.
6.2.17 Surface profile for blasted surface check
6.2.18 Stage wise Painting thickness check.
7.0 DRAWINGS
7.1 Contractor shall prepare all working drawings as and submit to NAYARA for
approval. No fabrication will start without the approval of NAYARA. Contractor shall
submit the construction drawings which include:
7.1.1 Plate cutting schedule.
7.1.2 Location of all weld seams, weld sizes and details of weld etc.
7.1.3 Material to be used.
7.1.4 Welding procedures and radiographic inspection.
7.1.5 Edge preparation and method employed.
7.1.6 Tolerances
7.1.7 Quality, brand and gauge of electrodes to be used.
34
RAJASTHAN
7.1.8 Details of welding reinforcement

7.1.9 Nozzle orientation and details
7.1.10 Details of brackets for supporting pipes, platforms, staircase, earthing connections,
wind girders etc.
7.1.11 Details of structure for roof support
7.1.12 Details of appurtenances.
7.1.13 Details of fixtures
7.1.14 Earthing pit and grid design.
7.1.15 Complete bill of materials with item wise quantities for materials to be supplied by
NAYARA and the contractor.
7.1.16 Any correction or modifications suggested by Nayara while approving the drawings.
7.2 On completion of work, as built drawings are to be prepared and furnished by the
contractor as required by Nayara.
7.3 All drawings are to be prepared on Auto-CAD (on PC). The contractor shall submit
one set of floppies containing the above drawings, one set of tracing and 3 sets of
drawings/printouts.
8.0 DOCUMENTATION: The fabricator shall submit the following completion documents
for the storage in shape of a file duly blinded. Three sets shall be submitted.
8.1 As built drawings of the tank foundation (NAYARA supplied in case SPF has been got
constructed through separate agency).
8.2 As built drawings of the tank.
8.3 Settlements results of tank bottom.
8.4 Bottom layout with respect to earth north and test results of the bottom.
8.5 Shell development drawings indicating the location of radiography and test result of
the radiograph.
8.6 Wind girder drawings.
8.7 Roof layout and test results.
8.8 Pontoon and floating roof test results.
8.9 Pipe support drawings with orientations.
8.10 Test certificates of seal.
8.11 Test certificate for steel plates and steel structure used.
8.12 Floating roof drainage system drawing and test results.
8.13 Rolling ladder detail drawing.
8.14 Foam / cooling system drawings.
8.15 Certificate of tank mountings i.e. PR valves, foam Seal etc.
8.16 General arrangement drawings and material specification.
8.17 Nozzle orientation drawing.
35
RAJASTHAN
8.18 Stairway details with orientation.

8.19 Certificate of earthing of tank.
8.20 Calibration charts.
8.21 Radiography films (separately)
36
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ALUMINIUM & HYBRID INTERNAL FLOATING ROOF
1.0 GENERAL
This specification defines the minimum requirements for the design, materials,
fabrication, inspection, testing and documentation of an Aluminium Internal Floating
Roof as applied to steel oil storage tanks operating at low pressure
2.0 SCOPE
The Aluminium pontoon type Internal Floating roof shall be of non-contact type as per
API 650 Appendix H Section H.2.2.e (latest edition).
3.0 CODES AND STANDARDS

3.1 API Standard 650 Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage, Appendix H.
• API Standard 653 Tank Inspection, Repair, Alteration, and Reconstruction.
• API Standard 2000 Venting Atmospheric and Low-Pressure Storage Tanks (Non-
refrigerated and Refrigerated)
• NFPA 11 Low Expansion Foam
• NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
• MoEF Guidelines for Controlling Emissions of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC)
from Aboveground Storage Tanks
4.0 DESIGN
4.1 General
4.1.1 The roof and accessories shall be so designed as to allow the internal floating roof to
operate throughout its normal travel without manual attention and without damage to
any part of the tank or floating roof.
4.1.2 The roof shall be designed and built to float and rest in a reasonably horizontal
pattern.
4.1.3 The floating roof shall be naturally buoyant and provide buoyancy to support at least
two times its own weight i.e. 100 % excess buoyancy, and shall remain afloat even in
the event of puncture in 2 adjoining pontoons. Buoyancy is based on a product with a
specific gravity of 0.70.
4.1.4 Roof buoyancy shall support at least twice the dead weight of the entire floating roof.
Buoyancy at the rim shall be twice the dead weight at the rim.
4.1.5 All parts shall be sized to pass through a Ø24” diameter tank manhole.
4.1.6 Deck sheets and structural members must be fastened to allow the sheet to be
removed from the topside of the deck.
37
RAJASTHAN
4.1.7 Pontoons shall not be connected to the support leg system. Pontoons shall be Ø10” or
Ø12” outside diameter. Each pontoon shall be independent & not be connected to
another pontoon.
4.1.8 Pontoons shall have removable/replaceable test plugs.
4.1.9 The Aluminium Internal Floating Roof System shall be offered along with indicative
reduction in Hydrocarbon loss compared to Fixed Roof Tanks and External Floating
Roof Tanks computed as per API approved procedure.
4.1.10 Aluminium Internal Floating Roof should have easy access for operation and
maintenance. Vendor should indicate maintenance procedures, in case of replacement
and repairs, suitable corrosion gauges as per H.6.7 of API 650 Appendix H shall be
provided. Complete description and technical details in form of manuals including
detailed operating and maintenance procedures shall be made available. Vendor shall
arrange to attend the entire checklist / punch list jobs arising out of pre-
commissioning activities.
4.1.11 The minimum design point load shall however be kept as 1000 PSF and thickness of
Aluminum Sheet of Deck should be a minimum 0.60 mm.
4.1.12 All weld joints are to be fully welded and there should not be partial length welding.
Pontoon weld joints to be leak tested with minimum 20 psi (g) air pressure.
4.1.13 Aluminium Internal Floating Roof System should have the following primary features:
a. Provision of centre vent on the fixed roof
b. Roof vents on the fixed roof.
c. Gauge wells
d. Column negotiators
e. Earthing and anti-rotation cable
f. Deck breather valve
g. Man way Approach to top of deck
4.1.14 Vendor to ensure that no where Aluminium should come in contact with tank carbon
steel surfaces. Aluminium shall be isolated from carbon steel by an austenitic stainless
steel spacer, an elastomeric bearing pad or equivalent protection.
4.1.15 Complete design calculations of the internal floating roof calculations for complete
roof buoyancy, stability, tilting, leg supports, bleeder vents etc including QAP and
floating roof testing procedure of Aluminium floating roof tanks shall be got vetted
through any one among the list of consultants attached and additionally the materials
required for this item shall also require Third party inspection / clearance from any
agency from the list of consultants attached.
38
RAJASTHAN
4.2 SEALS/ ROOF PENETRATION / VAPOUR CONTROL

4.2.1 Columns, ladder, gauge float & tape and other items that penetrate the floating roof
shall be provided with a seal that will permit a local horizontal deviation of plus or
minus 4-5 inches (100 – 125 mm).
4.2.2 The column and vertical ladder negotiator seals shall be fabricated of material that
must be suitable for the product service and operating temperature. Appurtenances
shall be plumb within a tolerance of +3 inches (75 mm).
4.2.3 Gasketed sliding cover plates, which are free to move with the appurtenance relative
to the cover, shall be sized to allow the full movement without exposing product
within the opening i.e. all penetration seals shall be designed to provide a close fit,
taking in to account horizontal and vertical movement of the floating roof deck.
4.2.4 Guide wheels and a hold down device shall be installed on penetration seals to reduce
wear on seal material and increase the effectiveness of the seal.
4.2.5 A peripheral seal that spans the annular space between the internal floating roof deck
and the tank shell shall be provided. Any vertical appurtenances that penetrate the
deck are required to have a seal.
4.2.6 Double seals with a minimum vapour recovery of 96 % shall be provided.
4.2.7 A peripheral seal of vapour mounted Mechanical Shoe type shall be designed to
accommodate +100 mm (4 in) of local deviation between the floating roof and the
tank shell.
4.2.8 In line with provisions of Environment (Protection) Amendment Rules 2008, primary
seals shall vapour mounted with a maximum seal gap of 4 cm and a maximum gap area
of 200 cm2 / m of Tank diameter.
4.2.9 Secondary seals, shall be rim mounted with a maximum seal gap width of 1.3 cm and
maximum gap area of 20 cm2 / m of tank diameter.
4.2.10 The floating roof shall be equipped with a mechanical shoe type sealing system. Rim
space shall be 6.7 inches (170mm) nominal.
4.2.11 Shoe plate shall be a minimum of 1.2mm thick x 406mm (16”) deep. Type 304
Stainless Steel.
4.2.12 Fabric for the seal vapour barrier and other non-metallic components shall be
compatible with the stored product.
4.3 SUPPORT LEGS
4.3.1 Floating roof shall be provided with two position legs: low and high position shall be at
approximately 1.20 M and 2.1 M respectively. However, the low position can be preset
to other heights.
4.3.2 Changing high/low position must be accomplished from top side of floating roof and
while tank is in service.
39
RAJASTHAN
4.3.3 Each leg must be capable of vertical adjustment of +3" in the event that the tank
bottom settles after tank is in service. Adjustment to be made from top side of
floating roof while tank is in service.
4.3.4 Legs shall be self-draining (notched or perforated).
4.3.5 Wherever roof legs of the Internal Floating roof lands on the tank bottom, SS shoes is
to be provided.
4.3.6 Support leg housings shall not be attached to the pontoons.
4.4 ROOF LADDER
4.4.1 The floating roof should allow the installation of a fixed ladder from the roof hatch to
the tank floor without reducing the operation levels of the tank. The ladder shall be
positioned adjacent to the gauge well (450 mm NB) through connections between a
150 mm NB slotted pipe adjacent to the gauge well.
4.5 ANTI-ROTATION DEVICES
4.5.1 The internal floating roof shall be centered and restrained from rotating. A guide pole
with rollers, two or more seal centering cables or other suitable device(s) shall be
provided as required for this purpose.
4.5.2 Anti-rotation cables shall be Ø3/16” minimum diameter Stainless Steel cable and shall
penetrate the deck through a guide tube. The cable will run from the fixed roof to a
floor anchor. The floor anchor will be fitted with a Stainless-Steel drawbar spring to
compensate for floor settlement.
4.6 VENT:
4.6.1 Floating Roof: A pressure/vacuum gasketed vent shall be provided on the floating roof
to prevent over stressing of the floating roof or seal. This vent shall be adequate to
evacuate air and gasses from underneath the roof when the roof is on its supports
during filling operations.
4.6.2 It shall also be adequate to release any vacuum generated underneath the roof after
it settles on its supports during withdrawal operations. It shall not open while the roof
is fully afloat due to pressure or vacuum. The roof manufacturer may recommend
ideal operating rates and possibly the installation of an inlet diffuser
4.7 MANHOLES AND INSPECTION HATCHES
4.7.1 The manufacturer shall specify the appropriate number of manholes according to the
application. However, at least one (1) manhole shall be provided with the floating
roof to allow for access to and ventilation of the tank when the floating roof is
suspended on its supports and the tank is empty.
4.8 ANTI-STATIC / GROUNDING DEVICES
4.8.1 Antistatic protection shall be provided with electrical bonding to the tank shell or
floating roof, all conductive parts shall be electrically connected and bonded to the
outer tank structure.
40
RAJASTHAN
4.8.2 This may be accomplished by electric drains in the seal area or flexible cables from
the external tank roof to the internal floating roof. Flexible cables are preferred.
They shall be 1/8-inch (3 mm) diameter stainless steel aircraft cable to insure
strength, corrosion resistance, joint reliability, flexibility, and service life.
4.8.3 Minimum quantities for grounding cables shall be:
Tank Diameter Quantity

< 24 m dia 2
> 24 m < 45 m dia 4
> 45 m < 64 m dia 6
> 64 m dia 8
4.9 ROOF DRAINS

4.9.1 The floating roof shall be provided with roof drains to drain liquid from the top of the
roof into the tank stock. There shall be a minimum of one drain/sheeting run.
4.9.2 Roof drains shall be at least Ø1/2” diameter, extending 4 inches into the stock.
4.10 ROOF MAN WAYS
4.10.1 Roof man ways shall be installed for access from tank bottom to above the internal
floating roof near each tank manway.
4.10.2 Man ways shall be a minimum of Ø600mm ID Manway covers on the floating roof shall
be equipped with gasketed sealing system. Tanks above Ø30m (100ft) shall be fitted
with a minimum of two (2) man ways.
5.0 MATERIALS
5.1 ALUMINIUM IFR (FOR MS SERVICE)
Aluminum Extrusions Alloy: AA 6005/6063/6061–T6/ASTM B221 EQV.

Configuration: Extruded Shapes
Typical UTS: 35-42 Ksi
Deck Sheeting Alloy: AA 3003/3105-ASTM B-209/ EQV.
Thickness: 0.60 mm
Width: 1500 mm
Typical UTS: 18 to 23 Ksi
Pontoons Size Alloy
200 mm OD: AA6063-T6-ASTM B-221/EQV.
250 mm OD: AA 3004/3105
Thickness: 1.92 mm extruded for 200 mm dia 1.3
mm fabricated for 250 mm dia
Seals Composition: Primary SS Mechanical Shoe seal and
41
RAJASTHAN
Secondary rim vapour mounted wiper

seal
End caps for all pontoons Alloy: AA 5052 H34 /H14 – ASTM B – 209/ EQV.
Configuration: Flanged Plate
Thickness: 3.0 mm
Anti-rotation cable Material: 18-8 Stainless Steel
Diameter: 6.0 mm
Typ. Breaking 1500 kg
Strength:
End brackets Alloy: AA 5052 H 34 /H14 – ASTM B – 209/ EQV.
Configuration: Welded, Double Gusseted
Thickness: 3.0 mm
Grounding cables Material: 18-8 Stainless Steel
Diameter: 3.0 mm
Resistance: 0.100 ohm/m approx.
Legs Alloy: AA 6063 – T6-ASTM B-221/ EQV.
Size: Minimum 50.8 mm OD
Configuration: Extruded Tubes
Thickness: 2.03 mm
Typical UTS: 28-35 Ksi
Leg Shoes: S.S.- 300 Series
Fasteners Material: Stainless Steel
Grade: SS Gr. A2, IS:1367
Note: All wetted parts to be SS304.

The dimensions mentioned above represent the minimum specifications.
6.0 COMMISSIONING & WARRANTY

6.1 The manufacturer/ successful bidder shall provide required Cathodic Protection for
the Aluminium & SS IFR decks with sacrificial anode system during the entire period of
floatation test to be carried out.
6.2 The OEM of the IFR shall also undertake visit to the site prior to commissioning the
tank with petroleum product for thorough inspection of the IFR deck & shall issue
necessary clearance for commissioning of the roof with petroleum product.
6.3 The manufacturer shall guarantee all material and workmanship to be of best quality,
in accordance with the best-approved methods of manufacturing and to be free from
all defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of completion.
6.4 A ten (10) year anti sinking warranty shall be issued upon completion of installation
42
RAJASTHAN
7.0 INSPECTION AND QUALITY CONTROL

7.1 Detailed Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) shall be got vetted through any one among the
list of consultants attached and submitted to NAYARA for final clearance.
7.2 Floating Roof Testing procedure as per API 650H shall be submitted for NAYARA’s
clearance.
7.3 The materials shall be inspected at the Manufacturer’s workshop prior to dispatch.
Additionally, one visit of NAYARA official at Manufacturers place is also required to be

arranged by the vendor before dispatch of material. Stage wise and final inspection
during execution shall be carried out by NAYARA at site.
8.0 INFORMATION & DRAWINGS TO BE SUBMITTED WITH THE OFFER :
The following drawings / documents and information shall be furnished along with the
offer.
8.1 Details of similar installations constructed.
8.2 Details of manufacturing / fabrication / erection / testing facilities available with the
tenderer / sub vendor. Manpower available, deployment details and jobs on hand.
8.3 Overall general arrangement and cross-sectional drawings of Internal floating roof
showing dimensional details, appurtenances provided, primary & secondary seal
arrangement.
8.4 Detailed material specifications.
8.5 Deviations from specifications to be listed out
9.0 DETAILS TO BE FURNISHED BY SUCCESSFUL TENDERER

The successful tenderer shall furnish four sets, unless mentioned otherwise, of the
following data / documents / drawings for review / approval/ information.
9.1 Detailed drawings of Aluminium Internal Floating Roof.
9.2 Detailed bar chart indicating time schedule for different activities like design,
procurement, fabrication / manufacturing, stage inspection.
9.3 Drawings of deck, ladder, details of roof legs (long and short) for internal floating roof
tanks with specification, bill of material etc.
9.4 Design calculations for internal floating roof for buoyancy and for deflection of deck,
calculations for Pressure and Vacuum Relief Valve on the IFR and Roof Vent and roof
leg calculations of internal floating roof.
9.5 Detailed erection schedule.
9.6 Progress report (weekly) for procurement, fabrication / construction, testing and
inspection, progress review meeting with owner.
43
RAJASTHAN
9.7 Individual tank reports 5 in numbers of hard copies and soft copies (AUTOCAD for
drawings) containing the following documents for each tank:
a. Inspection certificates and test reports.
b. Material test and analysis certificates.
c. Radiographic films with inspection reports.
d. As built drawings / final data / documents with reproducible for all final drawings.
e. Sets of as-built drawings, incorporating all changes with respect to approved
drawings, will be furnished on completion of work.
f. Other relevant information / drawings / documents as required.
9.8 Design guarantee, performance, erection of aluminium internal floating roof.
9.9 The successful tenderer shall undertake to obtain guarantee towards design &
performance of the internal floating roof along with seals from the manufacturer
directly in the name of Nayara Energy.
9.10 Upon placement of order for procurement of the aluminum IFR deck and prior to siting
the materials, the successful tenderer shall organize for a joint meeting of the IFR
deck manufacturer, NAYARA and the tenderer at the Office of the Corporation at
Mumbai during which following shall be firmed up:
a. Detailed Bill of Materials including packing lists.
b. Schedule of taking up manufacturing and siting the materials.
c. Scope of QA & QC including stage wise inspection by TPI agency (as approved by
NAYARA) during manufacturing and prior to dispatch of materials.
d. Detailed procedure for erection, installation, testing & commissioning of the IFR
deck including chronology of site works that must be taken up prior to and after
supplying the IFR deck.
e. Any other issue including scope that needs to be specifically discussed for taking
up works.
44
RAJASTHAN
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ERECTION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING OF

PIPING & EQUIPMENT
MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR PIPING AND RELATED ITEMS

1.0 PRODUCT PIPING
DESCRIPTION SIZE RANGE NB(MM) SPECIFICATION

Pipes 15-20 SCH 160 Ι Seamless Ι ASTM 106 Gr.B Ι ASME B36.10
25-50 SCH 80 Ι Seamless Ι ASTM 106 Gr.B Ι ASME B36.10
80-100 SCH 40 | ERW | API 5L | ASME B36.10
Fittings 15-20 6000# Ι Socket Weld Ι ASTM A105 Ι ASME B16.11
(R=1.5D for 25-40 3000# Ι Socket Weld Ι ASTM A105 Ι ASME B16.11
Elbows) 50 SCH 80 Ι Butt Weld Ι ASTM A234 Gr. WPB Ι Seamless Ι ASME
B16.9
80-100 4.78 THK Ι Butt Weld Ι ASTM A234 Gr. WPB Ι Seamless Ι
ASME B16.9
150-450 6.35 THK Ι Butt Weld Ι ASTM A234 Gr. WPB-W Ι ASME
B16.9
500 7.14 THK Ι Butt Weld Ι ASTM A234 Gr. WPB-W Ι ASME
B16.9
Flanges 15-500 150# Ι Weld Neck Ι Raised Face Ι 125 AARH Ι ASTM A105 Ι
ASME B16.5 Ι Bore to suit pipes, which are as follows:
15-20 NB : ASTM A106 Gr.B SCH 160
25-50 NB : ASTM A106 Gr.B SCH 80
80-100 NB : API 5L X 4.78 THK
150-450 NB : API 5L X 6.35 THK
500 NB : API 5L X 7.14 THK
Blinds 15-500 150# Ι Raised Face Ι 125 AARH Ι ASTM A105 Ι ASME
B16.5
Gaskets All sizes 150# Ι Compressed Non Asbestos Ring Ι ASME B16.21/
ASME B16.5
Note: Thickness of Gasket shall be 2mm upto 300NB and
3mm for sizes above 300NB.
Studs/Nuts/ All Studs and Nuts shall conform to ASTM A193 Gr. B7 and
Washers ASTM A194 Gr. 2h respectively.
Washers shall conform to IS 2016 (Punched washers ‘A’
with 2mm minimum thickness)
Gate Valves 20-25 800# Ι Rising Stem Ι Outside Screw & Yoke Ι Bolted
Bonnet Ι Solid Wedge Ι Renewable Seat Ring Ι Hand
Wheel Operated Ι Body & Bonnet ASTM A105 Ι Trim
Stellited Ι Stem 13 Cr Steel Ι Mfg. Std. API 602 Ι Testing
45
RAJASTHAN
Std. API 598

Note: To be supplied with 100mm long ASTM A 106 Gr.B
Sch 80 seamless pipes with ASME B16.5 Weld neck
Flanged at one end and welded to each end of the
valve.
50 150# Ι Rising Stem Ι Outside Screw & Yoke Ι Bolted
Bonnet Ι Solid Wedge Ι Renewable Seat Ring Ι Body
& Bonnet ASTM A216 Gr.WCB Ι Trim Stellited Ι Stem 13
Cr Steel Ι Raised Face Flanged Ι Mfg. Std. API 600 Ι
Testing Std. API 598
Ball Valves 15- 50 150# Ι Single Piece Ι Full Bore Ι Fire Safe to API 607 Ι
Anti Static Ι Anti Blow Out Stem Ι Lever Operated Body
ASTM A216 Gr.WCB Ι Ball & Stem SS316L Ι Seat RPTFE Ι
Raised Face Flanged Ι Mfg. Std. BS 5351 Ι Testing Std. BS
6577
Non-Return 50- 250 150# Ι Swing Type Ι Body & Cover ASTM A216 Gr.WCB
Valves Ι Disc ASTM A216 Gr.WCB With 13% Cr SS Facing Ι
Raised Face Flanged Ι Mfg. Std. BS 1868 Ι Testing Std. BS
5146
2.0 FIRE WATER/SPRINKLER WATER

Pipes 15-50 IS 1239 I BE I SMLS I B36.1
50-100 IS 1239 I BE I ERW I B36.1
150-650 IS 3589 I BE I ERW I B36.1
200-600 IS 3589 I Gr 330 BE I ERW I B36.1
Fittings (R=1.5D 15-40 3000# Ι Socket Weld Ι ASTM A105 Ι ASME B16.11
for Elbows) 50-150 SCH 40 Ι Butt Weld Ι ASTM A234 Gr. WPB Ι ASME B16.9
200-300 SCH 20 Ι Butt Weld Ι ASTM A234 Gr. WPB-W Ι ASME B16.9
350-400 SCH 10 Ι Butt Weld Ι ASTM A234 Gr. WPB-W Ι ASME B16.9
Flanges 15-400 150# Ι Slip on Ι Raised Face Ι 125 AARH Ι ASTM A105 Ι
ASME B16.5
Blinds 15-400 150# Ι Raised Face Ι 125 AARH Ι ASTM A105 Ι ASME
B16.5
Gaskets All sizes 150# Ι Compressed Non Asbestos Ring Ι ASME B16.21/
ASME B16.5
Note: Thickness of Gasket shall be 2mm upto 300NB and
3mm for sizes above 300NB.
Studs/Nuts/ All Studs and Nuts shall conform to ASTM A193 Gr. B7 and
Washers ASTM A194 Gr. 2h respectively.
Washers shall conform to IS 2016 (Punched washers ‘A’
with 2mm minimum thickness)
46
RAJASTHAN

Stellited Ι Stem 13 CrSt Ι Mfg. Std. API 602 Ι Testing Std.
API 598
& Bonnet ASTM A216 Gr.WCB Ι Trim Stellited Ι Stem 13
CrSt Ι Raised Face Flanged Ι Mfg. Std. API 600 Ι Testing
Std. API 598
Ball Valves 15- 50 150# Ι Single Piece Ι Full Bore Ι Fire Safe to API 607 Ι
Anti Static Ι Anti Blow Out Stem Ι Body ASTM A216
Gr.WCB Ι Ball & Stem SS316L Ι Seat RPTFE Ι Raised Face
Flanged Ι Mfg. Std. BS 5351 Ι Testing Std. BS 6755- Part1
Non-Return 50 150# Ι Swing Type Ι Body & Cover ASTM A216 Gr.WCB
Valves Ι Disc ASTM A216 Gr.WCB + 13 CrSt Ι Raised Face
Flanged Ι Mfg. Std. BS 1868 Ι Testing Std. BS 6755-Part1
3.0 INSTRUMENT AIR PIPING
DESCRIPTION SIZE RANGE SPECIFICATION

NB(MM)
Pipes 15-50 Heavy Grade Ι ERW Ι IS 1239 Part 1 & Galvanized as
per IS 4736
Fittings 15-50 Ductile Iron (Galvanized) Ι Grooved type Ι VICTAULIC or
Equivalent
Flanges 15-50 Flange Adaptors Ι Ductile Iron (Galvanized) Ι
VICTAULIC or Equal
Stellited Ι Stem 13 CrSt Ι Mfg. Std. API 602 Ι Testing Std.
API 598
& Bonnet ASTM A216 Gr.WCB Ι Trim Stellited Ι Stem
13 CrSt Ι Raised Face Flanged Ι Mfg. Std. API 600 Ι
Non-Return 50- 250 150# Ι Swing Type Ι Body & Cover ASTM A216 Gr.WCB
Valves Ι Disc ASTM A216 Gr.WCB + 13 CrSt Ι Raised Face
Flanged Ι Mfg. Std. BS 1868 Ι Testing Std. BS 6755-
Part1
47
RAJASTHAN
5.0 AQUEOUS FILM FORMING FOAM (AFFF) PIPING

Pipes 15-40 SCH 40S Ι Seamless Ι ASTM A312 TP 316L Ι Plain end Ι
ASME B36.19
50 SCH 40S Ι Seamless Ι ASTM A312 TP 316L Ι Bevel end Ι
ASME B36.19
65-80 SCH 20S Ι Seamless Ι ASTM A312 TP 316L Ι Bevel end Ι
ASME B36.19
Fittings 15-40 3000# Ι ASTM A182 Gr. F 316L Ι Socket Weld Ι ASME
(R=1.5D for B16.11
Elbows) 50 SCH 40S Ι ASTM A403 Gr. WP 31 LS Ι Butt Weld Ι ASME
B16.9
65-80 SCH 20S Ι ASTM A403 Gr. WP 316LS Ι Butt Weld Ι ASME
B16.9
Flanges 15-80 SS Slip-on Raised Face Flange, 125 AARH as per ASTM
A182 Gr. F316L DIM. ASME B16.5 Class 150
Globe Valves 15-80 150# Ι Rising Stem Ι Outside Screw & Yoke Ι Bolted
Bonnet Ι Integral seat Ι Plug type disc Ι Hand Wheel
Operated Ι Body, Bonnet, Disc ASTM A351 CF8M Ι
Raised Face Flanged Ι Mfg. Std. MSS SP-42 Ι Testing
Std. API 598
Ball Valves 150# Ι Single Piece Ι Full Bore Ι Anti Blow Out Stem
Ι Body/End Piece/Ball ASTM A351 CF8M Ι Seat
RPTFE Ι Raised Face Flanged Ι Mfg. Std. MSS SP-72 Ι
Non-Return 50- 250 150# Ι Swing Type Ι Body/Bonnet/Disc ASTM A351 CF8M
Valves Ι Raised Face Flanged Ι Mfg. Std MSS SP-42 Ι Testing
Std. API 598
6.0 STRUCTURAL SECTIONS

6.1 Structural steel work shall conform to IS: 808 - latest Edition.
6.2 Structural steel materials shall be of approved make and shall be conforming to IS-
2062 Gr A.
6.3 Sectional weight as per IS standard will be considered for payment purposes.
7.0 WELDING SPECIFICATIONS – SS Piping

7.1 Edge preparation - as per relevant code (ASA B31.3 / ASME sec viii)
7.2 Preheating - Nil
7.3 Electrode - AWS E316L-16
7.4 Drying of electrodes in oven - Yes
48
RAJASTHAN
7.5 Root run - Preferably with TIG welding using ER316L wire / alternately - with above
electrode
7.6 Remaining weld runs - With above electrode
7.7 Weld cleaning - After every weld run, the slag must be thoroughly removed before
applying the subsequent weld run.
7.8 Post-weld heat treatment - None
7.9 Radiography - as per relevant codes (ASA B31.3 / ASME sec viii)
7.10 Hydrotesting - to use water with chlorides below 50 ppm
7.11 Electrodes shall be stored in dry places in their original packets or cartons. Pre
heating of electrodes shall be provided as per AWS requirements.
7.12 Tack welds used in the assembly of circumferential and vertical joints of tank shells,
and those used for assembling the shell to the bottom shall be removed and surface
grinded properly and gaps filled with weld metal.
7.13 Welder performance qualification shall be carried out as per API-650 Section 7
Welding Procedure and Welder Qualification’ or ASME Boiler & pressure Vessels Code
Sec. IX. Welders shall be qualified in the approved procedure as per the code
requirements. The qualification test shall be arranged by contractor at his cost and
witnessed by Site Engineer/ Engineer-In-Charge / inspection agency. IS:823 should also
be referred in the matter.
49
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATONS FOR PIPELINE WORKS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Measurement of pipeline shall be taken for actual pipeline laid at site. The rate for
laying & welding includes provision of saddle plates beneath the pipelines. Gate
valves, flanges, strainers, filters etc. would not be included for measurement in
pipeline.
1.2 Maximum wastage of 1.5% shall be allowed in pipeline fabrication for all diameter of
pipes.
2.0 REQUIREMENT OF DRAWINGS

2.1 Drawings accompanying the tender document are indicative of scope of work and
issued for tendering purpose only.
2.2 The contractor shall prepare the isometric drawings for product piping and calculate
the actual requirement of various items/fittings like bends, flanges etc. The complete
set of drawings shall be submitted for approval, before commencement of the work.
No fabrication will start without the approval of NAYARA. The construction drawings
shall include
a. Location of all weld seams, weld sizes and details of weld etc.
b. Material to be used.
c. Welding procedures and radiographic inspection.
d. Edge preparation and method employed.
e. Tolerances
f. Quality, brand and gauge of electrodes to be used.
g. Details of welding reinforcement
h. Details of brackets for supporting pipes, platforms, etc.
i. Complete bill of materials with item wise quantities for materials to be supplied by
NAYARA and the contractor.
j. Any correction or modifications suggested by NAYARA while approving the
drawings.
2.2 The drawings shall be prepared on computer of as built drawings shall be submitted
after completion of work. All drawings are to be prepared on Auto-CAD.
3.0 INSPECTION
3.1 Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representative or third party appointed by
NAYARA shall have free access at all reasonable time to inspect those parts at the
manufacturer's works which are connected with the fabrication of the steel work and
50
RAJASTHAN
shall be provided with all reasonable facilities for satisfying himself that the
fabrication is being undertaken in accordance with the provision of this contract.
3.2 Inspection shall be made at site/ at the place of manufacture prior to dispatch of the
fittings. The inspection shall be conducted so as not to interfere unnecessarily with
the operation of work.
3.3 Should any structure or part of a structure be found not to comply with any of the
drawings and specifications, it shall be rejected. No structure or part of the structure
once rejected shall be re-submitted for test except in case where the corporation
considers the defects as rectifiable.
3.4 Defects which may appear during fabrication shall be made good by the contractor.
3.5 The suitability and capacity of all plants & equipment used for erection shall be to the
satisfaction of the engineer.
4.0 FABRICATIONS:
4.1 Fabrication, installation/erection and assembly shall be done as indicated in P & IDs
and piping layout drawings.
4.2 Contractor shall promptly notify Engineer-in-charge of any defective or damaged
material, materials that are not as per specification and materials that differ in any
manner from the designations in the drawings.
Pipe to pipe jointing for CS & SS materials
50 NB and above : Butt welding
Below 50 NB : Socket weld Coupling
Pipe to pipe jointing for Galvanised materials
All sizes for Instrument Air : Grooved fittings
All sizes for Service Water : Screwed Coupling
4.3 Bends, reducers, expanders, tees and end blinds provided shall be factory made
forged irrespective of diameter of pipeline. Such fittings shall have approximately the
similar material composition as that of pipeline under fabrication. Use of miter
bends/reducers are not permitted.
4.4 Carbon steel pipes shall be cut by mechanical or thermal cutting depending upon
thickness and size. Thermal cutting shall not be employed for stainless steel. Internal
burrs shall be removed by suitable grinding.
4.5 Section of pipes shall not be welded together to form a random length shorter than
3m.
4.6 Contractor shall provide facility to fabricate reinforcement pads.
4.7 All welding ends shall be beveled with an angle of 300 +/- 50, and a root pass pass of
1.5mm. The bevels shall be machine-cut bevels or smooth, clean, slage-free flame-
cut.
51
RAJASTHAN
4.8 All pipe branches shall be at 900 unless otherwise indicated in the drawing.
5.0 CODES/STANDARDS TO BE FOLLOWED:

5.1 API - 1104:
5.2 ANSI B 31.3: Code for petroleum Refinery Piping
5.3 IS 823: Code of procedure of manual Arc welding of mild steel.
5.4 IS 814: Metal arc welding for mild steel.
5.5 IS 817: Welder qualification tests.
6.0 ERECTION:
6.1 Cleaning - Before erection all pre-fabricated spool pieces, pipe fittings etc. shall be
cleaned inside and outside by suitable means. The cleaning process shall include
removal of foreign matter such as scale, sand, weld spatter, cutting chips etc. by wire
brushes cleaning tools etc., and blowing out with compressed air and/or flushing out
with water.
6.2 Flange Connections - While fitting up matching flanges, care shall be exercised to
properly align the pipes and to check the flanges for trueness so that faces of the
flanges can be pulled together without inducing any stresses in the pipes and
equipment nozzles.
6.3 Valves - Valves shall be installed with spindle/ actuators orientation / position as
shown in the layout drawings.
6.4 Line mounted equipment / items - installation for line mounted items like filters,
strainers, sight glasses etc., including their supporting arrangements shall from part of
piping erection work and no separate payment shall be made for this work.
7.0 PIPE SUPPORTS:

Pipe supports are designed to effectively sustain the weight and thermal effects of the
piping system and to prevent its vibrations. Location and design of pipe supports will
be as per the following table or as given by site engineer:
Nominal pipe size in MM. Maximum span in M.
20/25 mm 2.10 m
050 mm 3.05 m
080 mm 3.60 m
100 mm 4.25 m
150 mm 5.15 m
200 mm 5.75 m
250 mm 6.70 m
300 mm 7.00 m
52
RAJASTHAN
350 mm & above 7.60 m
The above spacing are indicative and will be kept as per site requirements (min.
above). The minimum clearance of 300 mm has to be maintained between the ground
and the bottom surface of pipeline. All pipeline supports will be numbered serially for
identification.
8.0 TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEM:

8.1 Testing of piping after erection shall be done as per API-1104 and as specified in price
bid.
8.2 With the exclusion of instrumentation, piping systems fabricated or assembled in the
shop/factories shall be tested at the site, irrespective of whether or not they have
been pressure tested prior to site welding or fabrication.
8.3 A test pressure of 10.5 kg/sq.cm shall be maintained for minimum 4 hours.
8.4 All tests shall be completed to the satisfaction of site engineer including retesting if
any leakage is noticed during testing.
8.5 The site engineer shall be notified in advance by the contractor of testing sequence/
program, to enable him to be present for witnessing the test.
8.6 All equipment, materials, consumables and services required for carrying out the
pressure testing of piping system shall be provided by the contractor at his own cost.
8.7 Water for testing shall be arranged by contractor at his own cost.
8.8 Test records in triplicate shall be prepared and submitted by the contractor for each
piping system line wise for the pressure test done in the proforma as approved by site
engineer.
8.9 Hydro-Testing of piping after erection shall be done as per following pressure bar:
• Product Pipeline : 26 Bar
• Fire water Pipeline : 26 Bar
• Foam Pipeline : 26 Bar
9.0 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED BY CONTRACTOR: (FOUR COPIES EACH)

9.1 Welders qualification test report as per IS-817.
9.2 Electrode and material test certificates from the manufacturer.
9.3 Complete record of the Hydrostatic testing carried out on each section of the pipeline
including test certificates for the same for submission to CCOE authorities.
9.4 Flushing reports.
9.5 Pipeline quantity certificates for product piping system as per the pipelines laid.
9.6 On completion of work, as built drawings of complete piping system are to be
prepared and furnished by the contractor as required by NAYARA. All drawings are to
53
RAJASTHAN
be prepared on Auto-Cad (on PC). The contractor shall submit two CDs containing all
drawings, one set of tracing and 3 sets of drawings/ printouts.
9.7 Pipeline elevation profile for the entire route of pipeline. Any other records as
required by the site engineer.
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK ASSOCIATED WITH PIPING
1.0 GENERAL:
The work covered consists of supply, fabrication & erection of structural steel, pipe
supports and cable trays in strict accordance with this specification and applicable
drawings. Structural steel shall conform to IS 2062.
2.0 CODES
2.1 All structural steel work shall be in accordance with IS : 800 Code of practice for the
use of structural steel in General Building Construction and the other Indian Standards
referred to therein.
2.2 Indian Standards referred to in these specifications shall be the latest published by
Indian Standard Institute.
2.3 Welding shall be in accordance with Indian Standard IS : 823, IS: 800, IS : 816 and IS :
808 including other relevant IS Specification on welding.
3.0 MATERIALS
3.1 All materials used in fabrication shall conform to the requirements as mentioned in
the following codes:
3.2 Grating shall be done out of electro forged construction as per the specifications given
in tender to match the required
3.3 Grating shall be galvanized as per requirements specified.
4.0 FABRICATION
4.1 All fabrication work shall be in accordance with IS: 800 Section V.
4.2 All fabrication shall be carried out as per the drawings approved by NAYARA.
4.3 Platform and ladders shall be shop assembled in the largest unit suitable for handling,
transportation and erection.
5.0 STRAIGHTENING:
5.1 All material shall be clean and straight. If straightening or flattening is necessary, it
shall be done by a process approved by Engineer-in-Charge / NAYARA and in a manner
that will not damage the material.
54
RAJASTHAN
6.0 GAS CUTTING:

6.1 The use of a hand cutting torch is permissible if the metal being cut is not subject to
substantial stress during the operation.
6.2 Gas cut edges subject to substantial tensile stress shall be cut by a mechanically
guided torch, or if hand cut, shall be carefully examined and any nicks removed by
grinding.
6.3 Shearing, cropping and gas cutting shall be clean, reasonably square and free from any
distortion and should the inspector find it necessary, the edges shall be subsequently
ground.
7.0 WELDING:
7.1 Surface to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint and other
foreign material, and shall be wire brushed and cleaned prior to welding.
7.2 Parts to be fillet welded shall be brought into as close contact as practicable and in no
event shall be separated more than 5mm. If the separation is 5mm or greater, the size
of the fillet welds shall be increased by the amount of the separation.
7.3 Abutting parts to be butt-welded shall be carefully aligned together within 3 mm gap.
Welding sequence shall be followed to avoid needless distortion, and minimize
shrinkage stresses.
8.0 CONNECTIONS:
8.1 Connections shall be as shown on the drawings. Where details are not given, standard
beam connections shall be followed. In any case connections shall be strong enough to
develop the full strength of the member and shall be approved by Engineer-in-Charge
/ NAYARA. One sided, or eccentric connections will not be permitted, unless they are
shown in detail on the drawing and are approved by Engineer-in-Charge / NAYARA
8.2 All shop connections shall be bolted or welded as approved by Engineer-in-Charge /
NAYARA.
8.3 Welded connections shall be made only where indicated on the drawings or approved
by Engineer-in-Charge / NAYARA. Holes shall not be made or enlarged by flame, nor
will flame cut of unfair holes in the shop or in the field be acceptable. Grout holes
shall be provided in the steel members as shown in the drawings and holes shall be
provided in members to permit connections of supported items.
55
RAJASTHAN
9.0 INSPECTION:
9.1 The contractor shall arrange for inspection of the fabrication of items as and when
directed by NAYARA.
9.2 However, such inspection shall not relieve the contractor of his responsibilities to
furnish satisfactory work.
9.3 Materials of workmanship not conforming to provisions of the specifications may be
rejected at any time defects are found during the progress of the work.
9.4 The Site Engineer shall have free access to the Contractor shop for periodical
inspection and all arrangement/facilities for the inspection shall be provided by the
Contractor at his cost.
10.0 ERECTION
10.1 The positioning, leveling, alignment, plumbing of the structures shall be in accordance
with the relevant drawings.
10.2 Maximum tolerance for line and level of the steel work shall be ± 3mm for any part of
the structure. The structure shall not be out of plumb by more than 3.5mm on each 10
meter section of height as well as not more than 7mm per 30 meter length.
10.3 Wherever so provided in the respective drawings or otherwise as instructed by the
Engineer-in-Charge/NAYARA, the Contractor shall so arrange that the structural
support is mounted and grouted on concrete foundation.
11.0 LADDERS AND RUNGS (AS APPLICABLE)

11.1 Contractor shall provide and install all iron ladders and rungs where indicated and as
detailed on the drawings. He shall also include base plates, fastenings, anchor bolts,
guard rails/rings, safety chains, etc.
12.0 PAINTING (SHOP AND SITE COAT)

12.1 For painting requirements, minimum one coat of primer painting shall be applied after
proper surface preparation as per painting manual for supply of readymade fabricated
items to the site.
13.0 MEASUREMENTS
13.1 All structural steel work shall include painting of the structural steel work wherever
required including shop coat and site coat of primer as per painting specification.
56
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATIONS FOR PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPELINES
1.0 GENERAL:
a. Soundness of the welds shall be tested by means of hydrostatic tests. The test
shall be conducted only after fulfilling the requirements of visual inspection,
radiography etc. and when the entire work is certified by the site engineer for
the performance of such tests.
b. This recommended practice covers the hydrostatic testing of new and existing
petroleum pipelines and the dynamic testing of existing pipelines. It recommends
minimum procedures to be followed, equipment to be used and conditions to be
considered during the hydrostatic and dynamic testing of pipelines.
c. Nothing in this recommended practice should be considered as a fixed rule for
application without regard to sound engineering judgment. Certain Governmental
requirements may differ from the criteria set forth in this recommended
practice, and its issuance is not intended to supersede or override such
requirements.
2.0 TEST MEDIUM

The hydrostatic test should be conducted with potable water.
3.0 EQUIPMENT FOR A HYDROSTATIC TEST:

3.1 Equipment for the hydrostatic test should be properly selected and in good working
order. Equipment affecting the accuracy of the measurements used to validate the
specified test pressure should be designed to measure the pressures to be
encountered during the hydrostatic test.
3.2 Equipment for conducting the hydrostatic test may include the following:
a. A high volume pump capable of filling the line at minimum velocity of 2 km/h
(approximately 1 mph)
b. A test medium supply line filler capable of ensuring a clean test medium.
c. An injection pump to introduce corrosion inhibiters or other chemicals into the
test segment, if their use is required.
d. A meter or other comparable means of measuring line fill.
e. A variable speed positive displacement pump capable of pressurizing the line at
least 7 kg/Sqcm. (approximately 100 psi) in excess of the specified test pressure.
The pump should have a known volume per stroke and should be equipped with a
stroke counter (a constant speed pump having a variable flow rate control may be
used in lieu of the above if the liquid test medium injected into the pipeline is
measured during pressurization.
57
RAJASTHAN
f. Portable tank, if required, capable of providing a source of liquid test medium.

g. A large diameter bourdon tube type pressure gauge with a pressure range and
increment divisions necessary to indicate anticipated test pressures.
h. A deadweight tester certified for accuracy and capable of measuring increments
of 0.1 Kg/Sqcm (1.5 psi).
i. A 24 hour recording pressure gauge with charts and ink. This gauge should be
deadweight tested immediately prior to and after use.
j. Two glass laboratory thermometers, with a 75 mm. (approximately 3 in)
immersion capability, capable of measuring temperatures from 0 deg. C (32 oF) to
50 oC (122 oF).
k. A 24 hour recording thermometer capable of recording temperatures from 0 oC
(32 oF) to 50 oC (122 oF).
l. Pigs, scrappers, spheres and similar devices to be used to clean the test segment
and to facilitate the removal of air from the line.
m. Temporary manifolds and connections as necessary.
n. Equipment, materials and fluids needed to displace the test medium from the
test segment.
4.0 TEST PLAN:

The following factors should be considered in planning a hydrostatic test:
4.1 Maximum operating pressure anticipated through the life of the facility.
4.2 Location of pipe and other piping components in the test segment by size, wall
thickness, grade type and internal design pressure(s).
4.3 Shell pressure rating and locating of all pipeline valves, air vents and connections to
the segment.
4.4 Anticipated temperature of test medium, atmosphere and ground.
4.5 Source (s) of test medium and any inhibiting or other treating requirements.
4.6 Locations and requirements for test medium disposal.
4.7 Profile and alignment drawing maps.
4.8 Safety precautions and procedures.
5.0 TEST PROCEDURES:

A hydrostatic test procedure diagram with explanatory notes and data should be
prepared prior to testing and should indicate in a detailed fashion the following:
5.1 The length and location of the test segment (s).
5.2 Test medium to be used.
5.3 Procedures for cleaning and filling the line.
58
RAJASTHAN
5.4 Procedures for the pressurization of test segment (s) including the locations of the
injection points and the specified minimum and maximum test pressures.
5.5 Minimum test duration for test segment (s).
5.6 Procedures for removal and disposal of test medium.
5.7 Safety precautions and procedures.
A specified test pressure is defined as the minimum test pressure which should be
applied to the most elevated point in the test segment. As detailed analysis of the
profile to determine static and dynamic pressures while the pipeline is being tested
should be performed so that the pipeline will not be over pressured at points which
are at low elevations.
6.0 LINE FILL AND CLEANING:

6.1 The line fill operation should serve the dual function of cleaning the line and
introducing the necessary test medium into the test segment. screens or filters should
be installed in the test medium supply line to control the contamination of the test
medium by debris or sediment.
6.2 The quality and source of water should be determined. Water which is not free of
sediments and may be injurious to the pipe, valves, equipment etc. should not be
used unless it is filtered.
6.3 The filling operation should be planned and executed in a manner which prevent the
infusion of air into the test segment. Vents, if necessary should be provided on the
test segment to permit the purging of trapped air.
6.4 Pumping of the test medium should continue until the pigging devices have been
received at the receiving scraper trap, or until they have passed the block valve
terminating the test segment.
7.0 PRESSURIZATION :
7.1 Personnel conducting the test should maintain continuous surveillance over the
operation and ensure that it is carefully controlled.
7.2 The test segment should be pressurized at a moderate and constant rate. When
approximately 70% of the specified test pressure is reached, the pumping rate should
be regulated to minimize pressure variations and to ensure that increments of no
greater than 1 kg/ sqcm may be accurately read and recorded. Pipe connections
should be periodically checked for leaks during pressurization.
8.0 THE TEST HOLD:

8.1 When the test pressure is reached, pumping should be stopped and all valves and
connections to the line should be inspected for leakage, a period of conservation
59
RAJASTHAN
should follow during which test personnel verify that specified test pressure is being
maintained at the line pressure and temperature have stabilized.
8.2 Upon the completion, the injection pump should be disconnected of its connection to
the pipeline and checked for leakage. Pressure should be monitored and recorded
continuously during the duration of the test.
9.0 DISPLACEMENT OF TEST MEDIUM:

9.1 Water should be completely drained off. This can be accomplished with spheres,
squeegees and / or other pigging devices wherever practical. Water should be
disposed off at approved locations in a manner that will cause minimal environmental
effects.
10.0 PURGING OF SS PIPELINES OF AFFF:

10.1 The scope of work is inclusive of providing repeated purging with an inert gas like
Nitrogen for the SS pipelines meant for AFFF in order to empty out the hydrotested
water.
10.2 The successful bidder shall get the work procedure approved by NAYARA/ NAYARA’s
Consultant before mobilization of machinery required for the particular activity.
60
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR BLAST CLEANING & PAINTING OF MILD STEEL, VERTICAL CONE ROOF /
FLOATING ROOF OIL STORAGE TANKS, UG TANKS & PIPELINES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 These specifications define basic requirements for painting of mild steel vertical cone
roof & floating oil storage tanks.
1.2 It is deemed that the work shall be carried out by the contractor with the best quality
of specified material and workmanship at his own cost.
1.3 Adequate numbers of required tools, brushes, blast material, scaffolding,
shot/Blasting equipment, air compressors etc. shall be arranged by the contractor at
site.
1.4 During storage and application of paints, the paint manufacturer’s instructions shall
be strictly followed. Particular attention shall be paid to the following:
1.5 Proper storage avoiding exposure and extreme temperature.
1.6 Specified surface preparation.
1.7 Mixing and thinning.
1.8 Application of paints and the recommended time intervals between consecutive paint
coats.
1.9 Two pack paint system will be mixed by mechanical means. The Site Engineer/
Engineer-In-Charge may allow hand mixing of small quantities at his discretion.
1.10 Restrictions for number of batches per tank.
2.0 MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

2.1 Surface Preparation: The pipe surface needs to be prepared before applying the
Coating system, by following the process elaborated below:
2.1.1 Steel surface shall be cleaned of dust & grease.
2.1.2 Heavier layers of rust & weld splatters shall be removed by chipping with sharp edges.
2.1.3 Thereafter, Steel surface shall be cleaned by abrasive blasting.
2.1.4 Blast cleaning operation shall not be undertaken in high humid condition (when the
relative humidity exceeds 85%).
2.1.5 The abrasive (Grit/ Shot) blast cleaning to obtain Near White Metal equivalent to SA
2.5 as per ISO 8501-1 or NACE No 2.
2.1.6 Grit Type:
Steel Grit 50 : G 50
Mesh size : 25
Maximum Height of Profile : 83 µ
61
RAJASTHAN
2.1.7 The abrasive-blasted surface shall have a shining and 'near white metal' appearance
and the surface roughness shall be 60-75 microns in accordance with ISO 4287-1.
2.1.8 After abrasive-blast cleaning, the surface shall be dry brushed to remove abrasive dust
and silica deposits.
2.1.9 Pipe which has not been coated within four hours after cleaning shall be completely re-
blasted prior to coating application.
3.0 PAINTING OF TANKS

3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
3.1.1 Before Blasting surface shall be cleaned thoroughly leaving it free of all scales, dust,
grease, oil coating, moisture and other impurities with the help of brass wire brushes,
sand paper, emery paper etc.
3.1.2 Wherever required any weld metal etc. shall be ground off by grinding machine to get
smooth polished surface.
3.1.3 Heavy deposits of grease of oily matter if any shall be removed by suitable solvent
wash before Blasting is undertaken.
3.2 BLASTING
3.2.1 The abrasive (Grit/ Shot) blast cleaning to obtain Near White Metal equivalent to SA
2.5 as per ISO 8501-1 or NACE No 2. Precautions to observed to ensure that metallic
particles used in the process are cleaned to avoid bi metallic galvanic cell type
corrosion. Visual Check to be carried out and particles must be removed by stiff wire
brush.
3.2.2 Before Blasting, the surface have to be cleaned thoroughly leaving it free from all
scales, dust, grease, oil coating, moisture and other impurities. Any weld metal etc.
shall be ground by grinding machine to get a smooth surface. Heavy deposit of greases
of oily matter if any shall be removed by solvent wash.
3.2.3 Good quality sand is to be used, it should be free from moisture dust and other foreign
materials. The sand to be used shall be of 16-30 mesh quality, i.e. zero % of abrasives
to be retained on 16 mesh screen and 100% retained on 30 mesh screen.
3.2.4 Minimum air supply pressure to be maintained at the delivery nozzle is 7 kg/cm2 (100
psi aprox.) during blasting operation.
3.2.5 The compressor capacity shall be checked to ensure that it is capable of giving the
requisite volume of air at specified pressure based on the nozzle size and type
employed for Blasting.
3.2.6 Blast cleaning shall not be performed where dust can contaminate surfaces undergoing
such cleaning or during humid weather conditions (humidity exceeding 85%).
3.2.7 After Blasting, the surface need to be cleaned by dry brush or by dry compressed air
(free from moisture and oil) to remove sand, dust or silica deposits.
62
RAJASTHAN
3.2.8 Irrespective of method of surface preparation, the first coat of primer must be
applied on dry surface by airless/conventional spray and as directed by Site Engineer.
Delaying the primer application is not advisable beyond 2 hours if weather is dry and
humidity level is less than 80% and if primer is applied within 4 hours, there is no need
to provide inhibitor wash over the blasted surfaces if it is not possible to apply primer
within 4 hours, then application of inhibitor is a must. It is essential to preplan the
activities to start the primer application immediately after Blasting.
3.2.9 The surfaces shall be blast cleaned using one of the abrasives, sand or chilled cast iron
or malleable iron and steel at pressure of 7 kg/cm2 at appropriate distance and angle
depending on nozzle size maintaining constant velocity and pressure. Chilled cast
iron, malleable iron and steel shall be in the form of shot or grit of size not greater
than 0.555” maximum in case of steel and malleable iron and 0.04 in case of chilled
iron”.
3.2.10 Blast cleaned surface should be inspected by using magnifier glass or surface profile
for anchor patterns. Surface profile in blast cleaning should ideally be 50 to 70
microns (generally 1/3 of the total DFT).
3.2.11 Arrangements for inspection at various stages of work should be made available so
that entire blasted area is accessible for inspection.
3.2.12 The thickness of plates used for tank shell is not uniform. This factor should be kept in
mind blast cleaning to prevent damage for thinner plates. When carrying out blast
cleaning on the shell and roof, the work shall always be done in such a manner with
respect to the wind direction that the abrasive practices are blown away clear of the
tank surface.
3.3 CLEANING
3.3.1 Abrasives or dirt particles and the other metals shall be removed from the blasted
surface by means of clean soft brush or vacuum or compressed air (free from oil and
moisture).
4.0 PAINTING SUMMARY
Table No. Description

1 PAINTING OF CR TANKS FOR HSD
2 PAINTING OF IFR / FR TANKS FOR MS
3 PAINTING OF CR TANKS FOR FIRE WATER
4 PAINTING OF UNDERSIDE OF BOTTOM PLATES
5 PAINTING OF STEEL STRUCTURE
6 PAINTING OF MS PIPES & PIPE FITTINGS
7 RE-PAINTING OF MS STRUCTURALS / PIPES / PIPE FITTINGS
63
RAJASTHAN
8 PAINTING FOR VALVES / NRVS / STRAINERS / PUMPS / COMPRESSORS

9 PAINTING FOR GI PIPELINES AS PART OF SPRINKLER WORKS
Table 1: PAINTING OF CR TANKS FOR HSD

Tank Type Carbon Steel Cone Roof Tanks for HSD
EXTERNAL PAINTING INTERNAL PAINTING
Surface to be Painted External side of shell and roof, Upper side of BOTTOM plates; First
structural and other non-galvanized strake of inside surface of SHELL
steel works like spiral stair case, hand including all structurals etc. up to
rail, mid and top landing platforms, same height; underside surface of
top railing etc. ** roof of CR & tank shell up to 300 mm
height below the curb angle including
all roof structurals etc. up to same
height.
Surface Preparation Blast clean to SA 2%i Blast clean to SA 2%i
Paint System recommended One coat of P1 (70 - 80 μm) + One One coat of P1 (70 – 80 μ) + Two coats
coat of U1 (120 μm) + Two coats of F1 of L1 (125 μ) each
(40 - 45 μm each)
Total DFT (Min.) 275 μm 325 μm
Note: **
a) For structural steel refer the respective table.
b) In case of the petroleum tanks and piping, the colour of finished paint (F1) shall be
aluminium. In case of fire hydrant lines, the colour of finished paint (F1) shall be
fire red.
Table 2: PAINTING OF IFR / FR TANKS FOR MS

Tank Type Carbon Steel Floating Roof Tanks for MS.
Surface to be Painted External surface of Shell up to and Upper side of BOTTOM plates, Inner
including Curb angle, Upper side of surface of SHELL up to top of tank
roof and shell appurtenances and including all structurals and inside
Structurals and other non-galvanized appurtenances including all items
steel works like spiral stair case, hand coming in contact with liquid stored
rail, mid and top landing platforms, (except Internal Non-contact type
top railing and rolling ladder etc. ** Floating roof).
Paint System recommended One coat of P1 (70 - 80 μm) + One One coat of P1 (70 – 80 μm) + Two
coat of U1 (120 μm) + Two coats of F1 coats of L1 (125 μm each)
(40 - 45 μm each)
Total DFT (Min.) 275 μm 325 μm
64
RAJASTHAN
Note: **
a) Cone roof / horizontal tanks in above services shall also be internally painted as
given above. For Structural Steel refer the respective table.
Table 3: PAINTING OF CR TANKS FOR FIRE WATER

Tank Type Carbon Steel Cone Roof tanks for FIRE - WATER
Surface to be Painted External side of SHELL and roof Upper side of BOTTOM plates, Inner
structurals and also external surfaces surface of SHELL up to top of tank,
of above ground mild steel pipelines including all structurals on the
and fittings for all types of tanks, underside of roof.
Structurals and other non-galvanized
steel works like spiral stair case, hand
rail, mid and top landing platforms,
top railing etc.
Paint System recommended One coat of P1 (70 - 80 μm) + One One coat of P1 (70 - 80 μm) + Two
coat of U1 (120 μm) + Two coats of F1 coats of coal tar epoxy coating of F3
(40 - 45 μm each) (150 μm each)
Thickness of paint system 275 μm Total DFT (Min.): 325 μm
Table 4: PAINTING OF UNDERSIDE OF BOTTOM PLATES

Type Underside of Bottom plates
Surface Preparation Blast clean to SA 2%i
Paint system Recommended One coat of Epoxy zinc phosphate primer (70 – 80 μm) + Two coats of High
Build Bitumen Coating (90 - 100 μm each)
Table 5: PAINTING OF STEEL STRUCTURE

Type Structural Steel (External)
Surface Preparation Blast clean to SA 2%i
Paint system Recommended One coat of P1 (70 - 80 μm) + One coat of U1 (120 μm) + Two coats of F1 (40 -
45 μm each)
Thickness of paint system 275 μm
Table 6: PAINTING OF MS PIPES & PIPE FITTINGS
• Blast clean to SA 2½.

• One coat of P1 (70 – 80 μ).
65
RAJASTHAN
• One coat of U1 (120 μm).

• Two coats of F1 (40 – 45 μm each).
TOTAL SYSTEM THICKNESS: 275 μm
Table 7: RE-PAINTING OF MS STRUCTURALS / PIPES / PIPE FITTINGS
• Surface preparation to SSPC SP2.

• One coast of Tie coat (200 μm).
• One coast of F1 (50 μm).
Table 8: PAINTING FOR VALVES / NRVS / STRAINERS / PUMPS / COMPRESSORS
• Manual cleaning of damaged / affected surface with hard wire brush SSPC SP 2.
• 2 coats of Red oxide Zinc phosphate primer P3 – DFT – 30 – 35 μ each.
• 2 coats of Synthethic Enamel F4 – DFT – 15 – 20 μ each.
Table 9: PAINTING FOR GI PIPELINES AS PART OF SPRINKLER WORKS
• Surface preparation to SSPC SP2.

• One coat of Etch Primer (6 μm).
• One coat of Mastic Primer P4 (175 μm).
• Two coats of F1 (40 μm each).
5.0 SPECIFICATIONS FOR PAINTS

5.1 PRIMERS
5.1.1 ZINC ETHYL SILICATE PRIMER – (P1)
The zinc ethyl silicate consists of two packs. One pack contains the ethyl silicate
binder with suitable solvents. The other pack contains zinc dust with additives. They
have to be mixed in suitable proportions before application as recommended by
manufacturer.
66
RAJASTHAN
Colour : Gray
Application : Spray (airless/air)
Dry film thickness per coat : 75 microns
Theoretical coverage : 8 sq.m/litre
Drying time : 4 hours
Re-coating time : 10 hours (min.)
% of total metallic zinc in dryfilm : 85 – 90% by wt.
(As per the ASTM D520 – Spherical : 4 months under sealed conditions
size Storage life
5.1.2 TWO PACK EPOXY POLYAMIDE ZINC PHOSPHATE PRIMER: (P2)

These coatings are corrosion resistant inhibitive primers based on cold cured epoxy –
polyamide two pack systems, over which subsequent coatings can be applied
Type of epoxy : Condensation product of bisphenol A and

Epichlorohydrin with terminal epoxides Groups
Epoxide equivalent : 450 - 500
Curing agent : Polyamide
Volume solids : 45-50%
Pigment : The main pigment shall be a mixture of iron
oxide with zinc phosphate.
Out of total pigmentation, the minimum
quantity of zinc phosphate should be 9% W/W.
Pigment volume concentration : 40-45%
Application : By brush or spray
Dry film thickness / coat : 75 microns
Spreading rate : 6 – 7 sq. m / litre
Drying time : Surface dry in four hours
Over coating time : 24-48 hours. This should be very strictly adhered
to in order to avoid peeling of subsequent coat.
Storage life : 12 months under sealed conditions.
5.1.3 REDOXIDE ZINC PHOSPHATE PRIMER (P3)

This primer is based on single pack modified alkyd medium pigmented with a mixture
of zinc phosphate and red oxide.
Volume solids: 40 + 2%
Main Pigment: A mixture of zinc phosphate and Red oxide. Out of the total
pigmentation, the minimum quantity of zinc phosphate should be 10 %.
Color: Brown
Pigment Volume Concentration: 30-35%
67
RAJASTHAN
Application: Brush or spray

Dry film thickness per coat: 30-35 
Theoretical coverage: 11 – 13 sqm/litre
Drying time: Touch dry- 1 hour
Hard dry- over night
Over coating time: Minimum – over night
Storage life: 6 months under sealed conditions
5.1.4 MASTIC COATING (P4)
This is a two-pack high build, modified aluminium epoxy mastic coating possessing
self-priming properties and good adhesion to even rusted steel or aged paints. The
coating is tolerable to under prepared surfaces.
Volume solids : 90 ± 2
Colour : Aluminium
Application : by brush air less spray
Theoretical coverage : 5 sq.m / litre
Overcoat interval : 24-48 hrs. This should be very strictly adhered to in
order to avoid peeling of subsequent coat.
Storage life : 12 months under sealed conditions
5.1.5 TWO PACK EOPXY – POLYAMIDE MIO UNDERCOAT (U1)

These coatings are high build paints based on cold cured epoxy polyamide system
pigmented with chemically inert pigments and extenders formulated to permit
application at a DFT higher than 100 microns per coat.

epichlorohydrin with terminal epoxides groups.
Epoxide equivalent : 450 – 500
Volume solids : 55 – 60%
Pigment : The main pigment shall be micaceous iron oxide
(MIO – about 65% w/w of total pigments.
Application : By brush or airless spray
Dry film thickness / coat : 110-120 microns
Spreading rate : 5 – 5.5 sq.m/l
Drying time : Touch dry in 2 hours, hard dry in 48 hours
Overcoating time : 24-48 hours. This should be very strictly adhered
to in order to avoid peeling of subsequent coat.
68
RAJASTHAN
5.2 FINISH PAINTS

5.2.1 TWO PACK ALIPHATIC ACRYLIC POLYURETHANE FINISH PAINT (F1)
Part A and Part B are to be mixed together to form a pigmented polyurethane paint in
suitable proportions as recommended by manufacturer.
Part A consists of polyacrylate polyol with appropriate pigments, extenders, solvents

and additives. Part B consists of an aliphatic poly isocyanate with appropriate solvents
and additives.
Volume solids : 45%

Main pigment : Rutile TiO2 (min.80% w/w on total pigment weight)
and extenders with other suitable pigments to get
the desired colour
Colour : As desired
Application : Brush or spray
Dry film thickness per coat : 30-35 microns
Theoretical coverage : 11-13 m2/litre
Drying time : Surface dry 1 hr. Full cure 7 days
5.2.2 COAL TAR EPOXY (F3)

A high build two component epoxy coal-tar product meant for excellent performance
under total / partial / intermittent immersion conditions in salt or fresh water. It is a
blend of epoxy and coal-tar pitch in suitable ratios.

epichlorohydrin with terminal epoxides groups
Application : By brush or airless spray
Dry film thickness / coat : 150-200 microns
Spreading rate (Theoretical) : 4 - 5 sq.m/l
Drying time : Touch dry – overnight dependent on ambient
temperature and ventilation. Hard dry – in 48
hours
Over-coating time : 24-48 hours. This should be very strictly adhered
to in order to avoid peeling of subsequent coat
Storage life : Up to 9 months under sealed Conditions
69
RAJASTHAN
5.2.3 SYNTHETIC ENAMEL (F4)

A high quality enamel based on synthetic resin vehicle stable weather resistant
pigment designed for both protection and decoration.

Application : By brush or conventional spray
Spreading rate (Theoretical) : 15 m2/l.
Drying time : Surface dry - 4 hrs.
Hard dry : in 18 hrs
5.2.4 TWO PACK EPOXY BASED TANK LINER (L1)

These coatings are high build paints based on epoxies and cured with polyamines or
modified epoxy-phenolic and cured with amine adduct. They are specially meant as
liners to interiors of petroleum tanks formulated to permit application at a DFT of 125
microns per coat.

Spreading rate (Theoretical) : 4-5 m2/litre
5.2.5 TIE COAT:
Colour : Aluminium/ any shade

Gloss : Semi gloss
Volume Solids : 80 – 82%
DFT : 150 – 200 microns
Dry time : 7-9 hours
Application : By airless/ air spray
Over coating interval : 12-18 hours
5.2.6 PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN DURING PAINTING

Precautions to be taken during application of epoxy and polyurethane paints.
• Do not apply when temperature falls below 10oC or rises above 50oC and when
relative humidity rises above 90%. Do not apply during rain, fog or mist.
• Use all the mixed paints within the stipulated pot life period indicated by the
manufacturer.
70
RAJASTHAN
5.2.7 Precautions to be taken during application of Inorganic Zinc Ethyl Silicate Primer
The coating must be fully cured and free from residual solvents before over coating,
which normally takes 24 hours but time may be extended if relative humidity is below
80%. While over coating, it is desirable to apply a mist coat first to avoid bubbing
problem which appears due to air entrapment.
5.3 U/G TANK DOPING:

5.3.1 The surface preparation shall be done on the outside surface of the tank. The turn
buckle, anchor bolts, buried portion of the manholes, nozzles, saddles, etc. shall be
thoroughly cleaned and all mill scales, dirt shall be thoroughly cleaned before doping.
5.3.2 Scrapping and cleaning the surface and carrying out the doping with 3 coats (minimum
DFT 200 microns per coat) of Shalimastic-HD Thixotropic or approved equivalent cold
applied anticorrosive treatment after preparing the surface as per manufacturer’s
specifications and as directed by the Site Engineer.
5.3.3 Three coatings shall be given with an interval of 24 hrs between the coatings In case
of old tank, the Contractor will have to scrap the old primer & anticorrosive paint to
the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge by the methods as approved by him/her,
before applying the fresh paint, without any extra cost to the Corporation.
71
RAJASTHAN
5.4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR DOPING FOR UNDERGROUND PRODUCT AND FIRE
HYDRANT PIPELINES
SCOPE: This specification lays down the requirements for selection, application and
protective coatings on exposed metal surface of underground piping. Vendor to supply
all the material required for pipe coating and wrapping, including supply of primer,
coating and wrapping material and other accessories required for the purpose. The
scope should also include application of primer and providing pipe coating/wrapping
as per the specifications given below or as per the instructions of Engineer-in-charge.
5.4.1 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS:
a. Material to be used shall be Pypkote AW/ approved equivalent 4mm thick,
complying with the requirements of AWWA C203, Section 8.
b. The product comprises of a central core of 50 micron HMHDPE film and a second
center core of fiber glass tissue which lends mechanical strength and dimensional
stability to the product.
c. Interleaved between the center cores are 3 layers of coal tar mix.
d. The membrane is terminated on both exterior by thermo-fusible HM HDPE film. All
the seven layers are calendared together to create a 4 mm thick tape.
5.4.2 CHARACTERISTIC AND TESTING PROCEDURES:
1. Characteristics of modified mix Testing Procedure

a) Softening point : In excess of 115°C LTM01 (ASTMD-36)
°
B) Penetration (25 C, 100g, 5 sec.) : 0.3 to 2mm. LTM02 (ASTMD-5)
c) Filler content : 20 to 30% ---
2. Characteristics of Tape
a) Nominal thickness : 4 mm + 0.2mm ---
°
b) Pliability : Does not break at 17 C LTM03 (ASTMD228)
c) Tensile Strength :
Lengthwise : Min. 350N/5cm LTM07
Crosswise : Min. 100N/5cm (DIN 52123)
d) Elongation :
Lengthwise: Min. 20% LTM07
Crosswise : Min. 30% (DIN 52123)
e) Heat Resistance : Does not drip at 100 °C LTM 05 (ASTMD 146)
72
RAJASTHAN
5.4.3 APPLICATION PROCESS:

A. APPLICATION OF PRIMER:
• Apply a coat of primer (Coal Tar and solvent based primer) of density 0.90 to
0.95 gms/cm3 and viscosity of 1000-2000 centipoise (Pypkote primer
manufacture by IWL or its equivalent) at the rate of 100 gms/sq.m.
• The primer shall be allowed to dry until the solvent evaporates and the surface
becomes tacky.
B. APPLICATION OF COATING/ WRAPPING TAPE:
• Pypkote AW 4mm tape is wound around the pipe in spiral fashion and bonded
completely to the primer coated surface of the pipe by thermo fusion process
and with recommended overlaps as per manufacturer’s specifications.
• The overlaps are sealed by the same thermofusion process. 250 mm is left
uncoated on either end of the pipe to permit installation and welding. This area
is coated in-situ after the pipeline is installed.
• Additional reinforcements may be provided at the ends of pipe to prevent
damage during lifting the pipe by crane.
•
In case of damage, rectification can be easily accomplished by patching up the
damaged area by thermofusion. Holiday test may be conducted over the coated
surface.
5.4.4 TESTING OF WRAPPING
• Holiday testing: The coating of pipes shall be checked for any voids/ holidays in
coating according to AWWA C-203-86.
• Holiday detection should be done at 14 to 15 KV at the brush.
• Thickness of coating: coating thickness should be measured using a pit gauge or
cutting sample at selected spots. After testing, the damaged coating places should
be repaired and holiday tested again.
5.5 STORING OF PAINT:

For the storage of paints, special storage space should be set up and handling of
paints should be as follows:
5.5.1 All paints should be stored in the place with the mark of “NO FIRE (PAINTS
STORAGE)”. Open flames should be strictly forbidden.
5.5.2 The storage place should be a separate house and distance from other surrounding
building must be more than 1.5 m.
5.5.3 In case a part of main building is used for this purpose, the room for storage should be
fireproof or anti-fire construction.
5.5.4 The roof of the storage should be covered with fireproofing materials.
73
RAJASTHAN
5.5.5 Each storing room should have extinguishers and sufficient quenching sand. If storing
capacity is small, only quenching sand should be provided.
5.5.6 It should be a well-ventilated room free from excessive heat or direct rays of the sun.
5.5.7 All paint should be kept away from dust.
5.5.8 All paint should be stored, sealed tightly and safely.
5.6 BURN AWAY OF CLOTH OR OTHER MATERIALS

5.6.1 Paint soaked cloth and other materials may cause spontaneous combustion. So it should
be burnt away in the assigned place without storing it in the storing place.
5.6.2 Open air storage should be avoided as direct heat from the sun causes serious
deterioration.
5.7 INSPECTION
5.7.1 For both primer and finish coat no deviation on dry film-thickness shall be tolerated.
5.6.2 Additional coat of paint shall be provided if reduction in thicknesses is noticed.
(At no extra cost).
5.7.3 Engineer-in-charge and / or his representative shall be the inspecting authority of 5.7.5
the work.
5.8 SAFETY
5.8.1 All safety regulations and requirements in force, as stipulated in Projects. Site rule
shall be strictly adhered to by painting contractor.
5.8.2 Any spillage’s of volatiles shall be wiped up immediately, oily or solvent rags shall not
be allowed to accumulate anywhere within the job site and shall be kept in closed
container before disposing off.
5.8.3 Material shall be stored in a store to be built by contractor and approved by Site
Manager for storage of painting material.
5.9 COLOR CODING

5.9.1 Pipelines shall be color coded to indicate the product that is being carried. The colour
coding shall constitute the name of product written in between two bands of 100 mm
width on each side preceded by an arrow along the direction. Band with product name
shall be painted at a gap of every 20 mtrs. for the pipe line length up to 1 KM, gap of
every 50 mtrs.for pipe line length up to 2 KM and gap of every 100 mtrs for pipe line
length beyond 2KM.The band shall also be painted on both sides of the valves. The
colour coding of band & arrow shall be as per details given below.
74
RAJASTHAN
5.9.2 The base colour of the white oil tanks, pipelines shall be of Aluminum or off white as
per operation guide line. The name of the product carried shall be written between
two bands in black letters for white oil lines along the direction of flow.
5.9.3 A gap of approximately two letter size shall be maintained between the band &
product name at both ends as well as between band & start of arrow.300 mm (12
inch.) long arrow shall be painted after each band on the pipe line with respective
colour code in direction of flow.
5.9.4 The size of letters for product name, width and length of arrow for various diameter
pipe line shall be as under.
Pipeline Letter size of Width of the Length of Arrow

Diameter (inch) product Name (inch) Arrow (inch.) (inch)
Up to 6 2 2 12
Above 6 up to 15 4 2 12
Above 15 6 4 12
5.9.5 The entire stand point (in tank wagon gantry) and entire loading arm (in case of tank
lorry filling gantry) shall be painted with colour code of respective product, instead of
colour bands to ensure better visibility and avoid wrong loading /decantation.
5.9.6 The colour code for branded fuel shall be decided by respective oil companies for
suitable identification of the pipelines.
5.9.7 In case of change in use of pipeline w.r.t. product, relevant colour coding shall be
changed immediately.
5.9.8 The recommended colour coding for bands shall be:
PRODUCT COLOUR PIPE LINE COLOUR OF ARROW IS CODE

BANDS NO*
MS 95BS IV Aluminum /off white Signal red Brilliant green** 537
HSD BS IV Aluminum /off white Oxford blue Brilliant green** 105
*Refer-Indian Standard No. of IS 5:2007

** IS Colour Code No. for Brilliant Green is 221 as per IS 5:2007.
Nayara Energy to approve the color scheme for the bands and pipeline. The contractor
must obtain the approval to avoid any rework.
75
RAJASTHAN
6.0 INSPECTION FORMAT DURING PAINT APPLICATION
76
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATIONS FOR SUPPLY AND ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT
1.0 SUPPLY ERECTION OF STATIC EQUIPMENT

1.1 The type of static and dynamic equipment to be supplied, installed is given in the Bill
of Quantities.
1.2 The equipment are classified as follows:
1.2.1 Static equipment like tanks, vessels, air dryers etc.
1.2.2 Dynamic or rotary equipment like pumps, compressors, etc.
1.3 Installation shall be carried out in the order as given below:
1.3.1 Check the foundations on which equipment is to be erected.
1.3.2 Place the equipment on the foundation and set anchor bolts
1.3.3 Carry out provisional centering, levelling and alignment by shims and packing
(however positioning of the vessel shall be accurately carried out)
1.3.4 Fix the foundation bolts by pouring mortar into anchor pockets
1.3.5 Carryout out completely the centering for level by tightening the anchor bolts and
allow for grouting of equipment
2.0 ERECTION OF PUMPS WITH MOTORS/ENGINES

2.1 All equipment erection shall be done by experienced fitters. For this purpose, the
contractor shall employ an able erection supervisor and crew who have done similar
jobs.
2.2 Erection shall be carried out as per instructions of the equipment manufacturers and
direction of site engineer.
2.3 All the instruments of hydrant engine such as pressure gauges, Composite gauges etc.,
including instrument panels, shall be installed by the contractor as part of equipment
erection and no separate payment will be made.
2.4 After piping has been connected, the alignment shall be checked by the contractor
again, to ensure the piping connections do not induce any undue stresses on the
equipment.
2.5 Pumps will be supplied for erection either completely assembled, couple to the drive
and both mounted on a common base plate or in 3 individual parts as pump assembly,
motor and base plate or as pump assembly and motor mounted on separate base
plate. The pumps shall be erected on foundations and leveled with shims and wedges
with help of precision levels and other instruments. The pump and the driver shall
then be coupled and aligned. Final alignment shall be done after all piping
connections are made. Shims and wedges where required will be arranged by the
contractor.
77
RAJASTHAN
2.6 Trial runs of equipment - unless indicated otherwise, all equipment shall be subjected
to trial runs up to the satisfaction of the site engineer on load and without load
condition. This also includes coordination with the supplier of equipment to
commission the same.
78
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION PLANT PEB BUILDINGS
PEB structures are buildings with sheds. Basic supporting members are of structural steel
having a profile to suit the design requirements. The claddings are of Pre coated Galvalume
sheet.
GENERAL SPECIFICATION
1.0 GENERAL:
1.1 The detailed specifications given hereafter are for the items of works described in the
schedule of quantities attached herein, and shall be guidance for proper execution of
work to the required standards.
1.2 It may also be noted that the specification are of generalized nature and these shall
be read in conjunction with the description of item in schedule of quantities and
drawings.
1.3 The work also includes all minor details of construction which are obviously and fairly
intended and which may not have been referred to in these documents but are
essential for the entire completion in accordance with standard engineering practice.
1.4 In case any difference or discrepancy between the specifications and the description
in the schedule of quantities, the schedule of quantities shall take precedence.
1.5 In case any difference or discrepancy between the specifications and the drawing, the
drawing shall take precedence.
1.6 Unless specifically otherwise mentioned, all the applicable latest codes and standards
published by the Bureau of Indian Standards and all other standards, shall govern in all
respects of design, workmanship, quality, properties of materials, method of testing
and method of measurements.
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of work generally comprises of but not limited to:

• Construction of PEB Buildings including foundation, sub-structure, super-structure
as per the specifications enclosed with the tender.
79
RAJASTHAN
List of PEB Buildings (with Tentative size)
Sl. No. Description Length Breadth

(M) (M)
1 TT Calibration Shed 9 8
2 TLF & TWD Pump House 70 5
3 TLF Gantry 48 15
4 Watch Tower (6 Nos.) 3 3
5 Fire Pump House 30 6
6 Surprise check platform 1.5 1.5
7 Foam Pump House 10 10
8 TT Lock and Unlock Shed 10 4
9 Visitor Parking + Officer Parking 18 6
PEB BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTION
Construction of plant buildings/sheds, earthwork in excavation in all types of soils,

earthwork in backfilling, construction of foundations, footings, columns, providing
and laying of plain cement concrete, flooring, roof sheeting, fabrication and erection
of structural steel work (including preparation of structural steel fabrication
drawings), laying of RCC yards/ pavements recessing, transportation and disposal of
unserviceable material, including supply of all related material etc. all other items
complete as per BOQ, design basis, specifications, standards, drawings, documents
enclosed along with the tender and direction of Engineer-in-charge.
Any other work not mentioned specifically above but required to complete the job.
NOTE: The contractor shall himself check & satisfy the compactness, evenness of the
machinery etc. Any defect / differential level of roads found at a later stage, due to
inconsistent & insufficient consolidation / compactness shall be solely attributable to
the contractor and the same has to be rectified at his own cost to the entire
satisfaction of the Nayara Energy or if any damage due to bad workmanship is found
within warrantee period, cost of rectification of the damaged portion shall be
recovered from Security Deposit against warranty of work done by contractor.
80
RAJASTHAN
The complete work shall be done as per attached Standard Specifications, Drawings
and instructions of Engineer in Charge.
Preparation of Construction Drawings, obtaining approval of Owner / Consultant prior

to construction, preparation of drawings and documents, obtaining approvals from
Statutory authorities (wherever required), testing and commissioning of Civil /
Structural Works.
The General layout of all major facilities / main roads and approach roads etc, design
drawings, estimated Bill of Quantities etc. are enclosed as part of this Tender
Document.
This document shall be read in conjunction with respective specifications, standards,

drawings and other documents forming a part of the Tender Document.
81
RAJASTHAN
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CIVIL & STRUCTURAL AND OTHER ALLIED WORKS
1.0 EARTHWORK
1.1 EXCAVATION
1.1.1 Excavation shall be carried out in soil of any nature and consistency, in the presence
of water or in the dry, met on the site to the lines, levels and contours shown on the
detailed drawings and contractor shall remove all excavated materials to soil heaps on
site or transport for use in filling on the site or stack them for reuse as directed by the
Owner / Consultant.
1.1.2 Surface dressing shall be carried out on the entire area occupied by the buildings
including plinth protection as directed without any extra cost. The depth of
excavation shown on the drawings are the depths after surface dressing.
1.1.3 The site around all buildings and structures to a width of 3 metres beyond the edge of
plinth protection, ramps, steps, etc. shall be dressed and sloped away from the
buildings.
1.1.4 Black cotton soil, and other expansive or unsuitable soils excavated shall not be used
for filling in foundations, and plinths of buildings or in other structures including
manholes, septic tanks etc. and shall be disposed off within the contract area marked
on the drawings, as directed, levelled and neatly dressed.
1.1.5 In case of trenches exceeding 2 metres depth or where soil is soft or slushy, the sides
of trenches shall be protected by timbering and shoring. The Contractor shall be
responsible to take all necessary steps to prevent the sides of trenches from caving in
or collapsing. The extent and type of timbering and shoring shall be as directed by the
Owner / Consultant.
1.1.6 Where the excavation is to be carried out below the foundation level of adjacent
structure, the precautions to be taken such as under pinning, shoring and strutting
etc. shall be determined by Owner / Consultant. No excavation shall be done unless
such precautionary measures are carried out as per directions of Owner / Consultant.
1.1.7 Specification for Earth work shall also apply to excavation in rock in general. The
excavation in rock shall be done such that extra excavation beyond the required width
and depth as shown in drawings is not made. If the excavation done in depth greater
than required / ordered. The contractor shall fill the extra excavation with concrete
of mix 1:5:10 as the foundation concrete at his own cost.
1.1.8 Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for dewatering / defiling as
required to carry out proper excavation work by bailing or pumping out water, which
may accumulate in the excavation pit from any cause / source whatsoever.
1.1.9 Contractor shall provide suitable draining arrangements at his own cost to prevent
surface water entering the foundation pits from any source.
82
RAJASTHAN
1.1.10 The contractor is forbidden to commence the construction of structures or to carry

out concreting before Owner / Consultant has inspected, accepted and permitted the
excavation bottom.
1.1.11 Excavation in disintegrated rock means rock or Boulders including brickbats which may
be quarried or split with crow bars. This will also include laterite arid hard
conglomerate.
1.1.12 Excavations in hard rock - meant excavation made in hard rock to be done manually,
or by blasting using only explosives and / or pneumatic hammers. In case of blasting,
control blasting should be adopted depending on site conditions. For using explosives
contractor shall follow all provisions of Indian Explosives Act / Rules 1983, corrected /
revised upto date.
1.1.13 In case of hard rock excavation to be carried out using explosives the, contractor shall
obtain the written approval in advance.
1.1.14 The measurements for excavations shall be restricted and limited to minimum
excavation line as per drawing for payment purposes.
1.2 FILLING
1.2.1 Back filling of excavations in trenches, foundations and elsewhere shall consist of one
of the following materials approved by Owner / Consultant
i. Soil
ii. Sand
iii. Moorum
iv. Hard-core
v. Stone / gravel
vi. All back-filling material shall be approved by the Owner / Consultant
1.2.2 Soil filling - Soil material shall be free from rubbish, roots, hard lumps and any other
foreign organic material. Filling shall be done in regular horizontal layers each not
exceeding 20 cm. depth.
1.2.3 Back filling around completed foundations, structures, trenches and in plinth shall be
done to the lines and levels shown on the drawings.
1.2.4 Back filling around pipes in the trench shall be done after hydrotesting is done.
1.2.5 Back filling around liquid retaining structures shall be done only after leakage testing
is completed and approval of Owner / Consultant is obtained.
1.2.6 Sand used for filling under foundation concrete, around foundation and in plinth etc.
shall be fine / coarse, strong, clean, free from dust, organic and deleterious matter.
The sand filling under foundation shall be rammed with Mech. compactor. Sand
material shall be approved by Owner / Consultant.
83
RAJASTHAN
1.2.7 Moorum for filling, where ordered, shall be obtained from approved pits and quarries
which contain siliceous material and natural mixture of clay. Moorum shall not contain
any admixture of ordinary earth. Size of moorum shall vary from dust to 10 mm.
1.2.8 Hard-core shall be of broken stone of 90 mm to 10 mm size suitable for providing a
dense and compact sub grade. Stones shall be sound, free from flakes, dust and other
impurities. Hard core filling shall be spread and levelled in layers, 15 cm thick,
watered and well compacted with ramming or with mechanical / hand compacts
including hand packing wherever required.
2.0 PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK

These specifications deal with cement concrete, plain or reinforced, for general use,
and covers the requirements for concrete materials, their storage, grading, mix
design, strength & quality requirements, pouring at all levels, reinforcements,
protection, curing, form work, finishing, painting, admixtures, inserts and other
miscellaneous works.
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Cement: Any of the following cements may be used as required.
IS - 269 Ordinary Portland cement, 33-grade.

IS - 8041 Rapid hardening Portland cement.
IS - 455 Portland slag cement.
IS - 8112 43 Grade ordinary Portland cement.
IS - 12330 Sulphate resistant ordinary Portland cement.
IS - 12269 53 Grade ordinary port land cement.
IS - 6909 Specifications for super Sulphate cement.
2.1.2 Water: Water used for mixing and curing concrete and mortar shall conform to the
requirements as laid down in clause 5.4 of IS: 456. Sea water shall not be used for
concrete work.
2.1.3 Aggregates: Coarse and fine aggregates for cement concrete plain and reinforced shall
conform to the requirements of IS 383 and / or IS 515. Before using, the aggregates
shall be tested as per IS: 2386.
Coarse aggregate: Coarse aggregate for all cement concrete work shall be broken or
crushed hard stone, black trap stone obtained from approved Quarries or gravel.
Sand: Fine aggregate for concrete work shall be river bed coarse sand from approved
sources. Grading of coarse sand shall be within grading zones I, II or III laid down in IS:
84
RAJASTHAN
383, table 4. If required, the aggregates (both fine and coarse) shall have to be
thoroughly washed and graded as per direction of Owner / Consultant.
2.2 MIXING
All cement concrete plain or reinforced shall be machine mixed. Mixing by hand may
be employed where quantity of concrete involved is small, with the specific prior
permission of the Owner / Consultant. 10% extra cement shall be added in case of
hand mixing as stipulated in IS-456.
2.3 WATER CEMENT RATIO
Once a mix, including its water-cement ratio, has been determined and specified for
use by the Owner / Consultant, that water cement ratio shall be maintained.
2.4 LAYING
Concreting shall be commenced only after the Owner / Consultant has inspected and
passed the sub-base / base or the centering, shuttering and reinforcement. Concrete
in slab beams, columns, footings etc. shall be laid gently in layers not exceeding 15
cm and shall be properly consolidated by means of approved mechanical vibrators.
2.5 CURING
a. After the concrete has begun to harden, it shall be protected with moist gunny
bags, sand or any other material approved by the Owner / Consultant against quick
drying. After 24 hours of laying concrete, the surface shall be cured by flooding
with water or by covering with wet absorbent materials for 7 days as per the
direction of Owner / Consultant.
b. Approved curing compounds may be used in lieu of moist curing with the
permission of the Owner / Consultant. Such compounds shall be applied to all
exposed surfaces of the concrete as soon as possible after the concrete has set. No
extra payment shall be made for the same.
2.6 GRADES OF CONCRETE
2.6.1 Grades of cement concrete shall be as given below:
Grade Specified Characteristic compressive strength at 28 days (N/mm²)

i. M 7.5 7.5 (75 Kg/cm²)
ii. M 10 10 (100 Kg/cm²)
iii. M 15 15 (150 Kg/cm²)
iv. M 20 20 (200 Kg/cm²)
v. M 25 25 (250 Kg/cm²)
vi. M 30 30 (300 Kg/cm²)
vii. M 35 35 (350 Kg/cm²)
85
RAJASTHAN
2.6.2 Grades lower than M 20 shall not be used in reinforced concrete.

2.6.3 M 7.5 grades of concrete may be used for lean concrete bases & simple foundation for
masonry walls.
2.6.4 A sieve analysis test of aggregates shall be carried out as and when the source of
supply is changed without extra charge not-withstanding the mandatory test required
to be carried out as per CPWD specification.
2.6.5 All test in support of mix design shall be maintained as a part of records of the
contract. Test cubes for mix design shall be prepared by the contractor under his own
arrangements and at his costs, but under the supervision of the Owner / Consultant.
2.7 NOMINAL MIX CONCRETE
2.7.1 All concrete work (P.C.C / R.C.C) shall be with nominal mix concrete unless specified
otherwise. The proportions of materials used for concrete of grades M5, M 7.5, M10,
M15 and M20 shall be as per following Table.
PROPORTIONS FOR NOMINAL MIX OF CONCRETE
Grade of Total Quantity of Dry Proportion of Fine Aggregate Quantity of water per 50 Kg
Concrete Aggregate by Mass per 50 Kg to coarse aggregate (by of cement Maximum in
of Cement (as sum of Fine Mass) liters.
and coarse aggregates), in
Kg, Max.
M5 800 Generally, 1.2 subject to an 60
upper limit of 1:1.5 and a
lower limit of 1:2.5
M 7.5 625 -do- 45
M 10 480 -do- 34
M 15 350 -do- 25
M 20 250 -do- 30
Notes:
1. The proportions of the fine aggregates should be adjusted from upper limit to
lower limit progressively as the grading of the fine aggregates become finer and
the maximum size of coarse aggregate becomes larger. Graded coarse aggregate as
per IS: 383 may be used.
2. This Table envisages batching by weight. Volume batching when done, the nominal
mixes would roughly be 1:3:6, 1:2:4 and 1:1.5:3 for M10, M15 and M20
respectively.
3. For under water concreting the quantity of coarse aggregate, either by volume or
mass, shall not be less than 1.5 times not more than twice that of fine aggregates.
86
RAJASTHAN
2.7.2 The cement content of the mix specified for any nominal mix shall be proportionately
increased if the quantity of water in a mix has to be increased to overcome the
difficulties of placement and compaction, so that water - cement ratio is not
exceeded. In case of vibrated concrete, the limits specified, above may suitably be
reduced to avoid segregation.
2.7.3 If the nominal mix concrete made in accordance with the proportion given for a
particular grade does not yield the specified strength, such concrete shall be
classified as belonging to lower grade. However, if the strength results of test are
higher than those specified for the grade in the nominal mix of concrete it shall not be
placed in a higher grade.
2.8 DESIGN MIX CONCRETE
2.8.1 Design mix shall be allowed for major works where it is contemplated to be used by
installing weigh batch mixing plant as per IS 4925.
At the time of tendering, the contractor, after taking into account the type of
aggregates, plant and method of laying he intends to use, shall allow in his tender for
the design mix i.e., aggregate / cement and water / cement ratios which he considers
will achieve the strength requirements specified, and workability for concrete to be
properly finished.
2.8.2 Soon after the contractor gets L.O.I. to commence the work, he shall carry out
preliminary tests for design mix on trial mixes proposed by him in design of mix to
satisfy the Owner / Consultant that the characteristic strength specified in clause
4.6.3 is obtained. Prior to this may ask the contractor has to get design mix done as
per IS 10262 through govt. approved / reputed institute and contractor shall arrange
the same at his own cost. The concrete mix to be actually used shall be approved by
the Owner / Consultant.
2.8.3 Notwithstanding the above, the following shall be the maximum combined weight of
coarse and fine aggregate per 50 kg of cement.
Grade of Concrete Maximum weight of fine & coarse

aggregates together per 50 kg of cement
(For Nominal Mix only)
i. M - 10 480 kg
ii. M - 15 350 kg
iii. M - 20 250 kg
87
RAJASTHAN
2.8.4 The workability of concrete produced shall be adequate, so that the concrete can be
properly placed and compacted. The slump shall be as follows, when vibrators are
used.
i. Mass concrete in RCC foundations & retaining walls : 10 to 25 mm

ii. Beams, slabs & columns simply reinforced : 25 to 40 mm
iii. Thin RCC sections or sections with congested reinforcement : 40 to 50 mm
2.8.5 The minimum consumption of the cement irrespective of design mix shall not be less
than the following:
M 20 300 kg/cu m
M 25 300 kg/cu m
M 30 320 kg/cu m
M 35 340 kg/cu m
M 40 360 kg/cu m
2.9 TESTING OF CONCRETE

2.9.1 Testing of concrete, sampling and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with
Clauses 15, 16 & 17 of IS 456.
2.9.2 A slump test shall be taken at each mixer at least once in every fifty batches mixed.
Any batch for which a slump test is being made shall not be transferred to the place of
laying until the slump test has been completed. Any batch which gives a slump in
excess of that described at the time of preliminary tests shall be rejected and
removed from the site.
2.9.3 Atleast six cubes shall be taken for every 30 cu. metres of concrete or part thereof
deposited in the work on any day. Three cubes shall be tested for 28 days strength.
2.9.4 If a test for particular work does not meet the specified requirements, the Owner /
Consultant, in his absolute discretion may accept the work at a correspondingly
reduced rate provided the average strength at 28 days is not less than 85% of the
specified strength.
2.9.5 If the results are poorer than 85% of the specified strength, the Owner / Consultant
may order further testing of any kind as may be deemed necessary in his opinion,
including load tests. The load tests shall be carried on the portion of the structure
involving concrete represented by the unsatisfactory works test and such other
adjoining elements of a building as the Owner / Consultant may decide.
88
RAJASTHAN
If the results of the load tests are not satisfactory, the contractor shall at his ow n
cost undertake remedial measures including dismantling and reconstruction according
to the directions and to the satisfaction of the Owner / Consultant. If the load test is
successful, the Owner / Consultant may exercise his judgment before accepting or
rejecting the work and shall still have the power to apply a reduction in rate as
herein- stated before, in case the work in question is accepted.
2.10 PROPORTIONING
Mixes of cement concrete shall be as ordered. Where the concrete is specified by
grade, it shall be prepared by mixing cement, sand and coarse aggregate by weight as
per mix design. In case the concrete is specified as volumetric mix, then dry volume
batching shall be done, making proper allowances for dampness in aggregates and
bulking in sand. Equivalent volume batching for concrete specified by grade may
however be allowed by the Owner / Consultant at his discretion.
2.11 PRE-CAST CONCRETE

The specifications for pre-cast concrete will be similar as for the cast in situ concrete.
All pre-cast work shall be carried out in a yard made for the purpose This yard shall be
dry, properly levelled and having a hard and even surface. If the ground is to be used
as a soft former of the units, shall be paved with concrete or masonry and provided
with a layer of plaster (1:2 proportion) with smooth neat cement finish or a layer of
MS sheeting. The casting shall be over suitable vibrating tables or by using form
vibrators as per directions of Owner / Consultant.
The yard, lifting equipment, curing tank, finished material storage space etc. shall be
designed such that the units are not lifted from the mould before 7 (seven) days of
curing and can be removed for erection after 28 (Twenty-Eight) days of curing. The
moulds shall preferably be of steel or of timber lined with G.I. sheet metal. The yard
shall preferably be fenced.
Lifting hooks, wherever necessary or as directed by Owner / Consultant shall be

embedded in correct position of the units to facilitate erection, even though they may
not be so on the drgs. and shall be burnt off and finished after erection.
89
RAJASTHAN
Pre-cast concrete units, when ready shall be transported to site by suitable means
approved by Owner / Consultant. Care shall be taken to ensure that no damage occurs
during transportation. All adjustments, leveling and plumbing shall be done as per,
the instructions of the Owner / Consultant. The contractor shall render all help with
instruments, materials and staff to the Owner / Consultant for checking the proper
erection of the pre-cast units.
After erection and alignment, the joints shall be filled with grout or concrete as
directed by Owner / Consultant. If shuttering has to be used for supporting the pre-
cast unit they shall not be removed until the joints has attained sufficient strength
and in no case before 14 (fourteen) days. The joint between pre-cast roof planks shall
be pointed with 1:2 (1 cement: 2 sand) mortar where called for in the drgs.
2.12 PROTECTION OF CONCRETE

All concrete shall be protected from damage by rain or by workmen, equipment,
overload or any other causes. All edges, corners and projections of concrete members
likely to be damaged, shall be protected by means of wooden cover fillets.
2.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

Construction joints shall be made only where shown on the drawings or as approved by
2.14 SEPARATION JOINT

Separation Joint shall be obtained by using an approved alkathene sheet struck on the
surface against which concrete shall be placed. Adequate care should be taken to
cause no damage to the sheet.
2.15 DAMP PROOF COURSES

Damp proof course shall consist of cement concrete or RCC of specified proportions
and thickness. Surface of brick or stone masonry shall be levelled and prepared before
laying the cement concrete.
2.16 SAMPLING OF CONCRETE

Sampling & strength Test of concrete, Acceptance criteria and Inspection & Testing of
Structure: This shall be as per the requirements laid down in clause Nos: 15, 16 & 17
of IS: 456.
90
RAJASTHAN
3.0 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

3.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT SHALL COMPRISE
i. Mild steel bars conforming to IS: 432 Part-I
ii. TISCON CRS bars.
iii. Hard drawn steel wire fabric conforming to IS: 1566
iv. Cold twisted bars conforming to IS:1786.
v. TMT bars
vi. Fusion bonded Epoxy coated bars conforming to IS: 13620
3.2 All joints in reinforcement shall be lapped adequately to develop the full strength of
the reinforcement, unless reinforcement are as per provision of IS: 456 or as per
instruction of Owner / Consultant.
Following procedure shall be followed for welding of Tor steel reinforcement bars.
1. Welding of Tor steel reinforcement bars shall be taken up only after specific
approval by Owner / Consultant.
2. Lap welding with longitudinal beads shall only be adopted.
3. The thickness of weld bead should be 0.2 X diameter of bar and the length of the
longitudinal bead required shall be 10 X diameter of bar, however, the maximum
length of continuous bead shall be limited to 5 X diameter of bar with
intermediate gap. When welding is done on both sides bead length shall be 5 X
diameter of bar on each side.
4. Stripper at closer spacing shall be provided in the lap welded joints as directed by
Owner / Consultant.
3.3 M.S. round bars shall be hooked at ends as specified. Ribbed Tor-Steel shall be bent at
right angles at ends as indicated or directed.
4.0 FORM WORK

4.1 The shuttering or form work shall conform to the shape, lines and dimensions as
shown on the drawings and be so constructed as to remain sufficiently rigid during
placing and compacting of the concrete and shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss
of liquid from the concrete. The surface that becomes exposed on the removal of
forms shall be examined by Owner / Consultant or his authorised representative
before any defects are made good. Work that has sagged or bulged out, or contains
honey combing, shall be rejected. All shuttering shall be plywood or steel shuttering.
91
RAJASTHAN
4.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for sufficiency and adequacy of all form work.
Centering and form work shall be approved by the Owner / Consultant, before placing
of reinforcement and concreting.
4.3 STRIPPING TIME
Forms shall not be struck until the concrete has reached a strength at least twice the
stress to which the concrete may be subjected at the time of removal of form work.
The strength referred to shall be that of concrete using the same cement and
aggregates, with the same proportions and cured under conditions of temperature and
moisture similar to those existing on the work. Where possible, the form work shall be
left longer as it would assist the curing.
Note 1 - In normal circumstances and where ordinary Portland Cement is used forms
may generally be removed after the expiry of the following periods:
a. Walls, columns and vertical faces of all structural 24 to 48 hours as may be decided by the
members Owner / Consultant
b. Slabs (props left under) 3 days
c. Beam soffits (Props left under) 7 days
d. Removal of props under slabs
1. Spanning upto 4.5 m 7 days

2. Spanning over 4.5 m 14 days
e. Removal of props under beams and arches:
1. Spanning up to 6 m 14 days
2. Spanning over 6 m 21 days
For other types of cements, the stripling time recommended for ordinary Portland
Cement may be suitably modified.
Note 2 - The number of props left under, their sizes and disposition shall be such as to
be able to safely carry the full dead load of the slab, beam or arch as the case may be
together with any live load likely to occur during curing or further construction.
5.0 BRICK WORK

This specification covers the construction of brick masonry in foundations, arches,
walls, etc. at all elevations. The provision of IS: 2212 shall be complied with unless
permitted otherwise.
92
RAJASTHAN
5.1 BRICKS
All bricks shall conform to class 35 as designated in CPWD Specifications unless
specified otherwise.
5.2 MORTAR
5.2.1 Cement and water shall conform to the requirements laid down for cement concrete
work.
5.2.2 Sand for masonry mortar shall be river bed coarse sand conforming to IS: 2116.
Maximum quantities of clay, fine dust shall not be more than 5% by weight. Organic
impurities shall not exceed the limits laid down in IS: 2116.
5.2.3 Mix of mortar for building brick work shall be as specified in the item of work.
5.2.4 Mixing of mortar shall be done in a mechanical mixer. When quantity involved is
small, hand mixing may be permitted by the Owner / Consultant. Any mortar
remaining unused for more than 30 minutes after mixing shall be rejected.
5.3 BRICK MASONRY
Brick work shall be built in English bond, unless otherwise specified. The thickness of
joints shall be 10 mm + 3 mm. Thickness of joints shall be kept uniform. In case of
foundations and manholes etc. Joints upto 15 mm may be accepted.
5.4 HALF BRICK MASONRY
All courses shall be laid with stretchers. Reinforcement comprising 2 Nos. 6 mm dia MS
bars shall be provided over the top of the first course and thereafter at every third
course.
5.5 LAYING
All iron fixtures, pipe spouts, hold fasts of doors and windows, which are required to
be built into the wall shall be embedded in cement concrete blocks 1:2:4 mix (1
cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) 150 mm x 100
mm x 100 mm size, unless otherwise indicated in the item.
5.6 CURING
Brick work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering when the mortar is green.
Masonry work shall be kept constantly moist on all faces for a minimum period of
seven days.
5.7 CEMENT CONCRETE BLOCK
Cement concrete block shall be machined made in the proportion of such that mix
shall not be leaner than one cement to Twelve combined aggregates (by volume) but
having minimum strength of M 7.5. Combined aggregate shall be graded as near as
possible to IS: 383. The fineness modules of combined aggregate shall be between 3.6
and 4. The concrete block shall be properly cured as per IS-456. The surface of conc.
block shall have even face without any honeycomb and free from cracks.
5.7.1 Mortar
93
RAJASTHAN
Cement and water shall confirm to the requirements laid down for cement concrete
work.
5.7.2 Sand for concrete block masonry mortar’s shall be coarse sand generally conforming
to IS:2116. Maximum quantities of clay, fine dust, shall not be more than 5% by
weight. Organic impurities shall not exceed the limits laid down in IS:2116.
5.7.3 Mix of mortar for building concrete block shall be as specified in the item of work.
5.7.4 Mixing of the mortar shall be done in a mechanical mixer. When quantity involved is
small hand mixing may be permitted by Owner / Consultant. Any mortar remaining
unused for more than 30 minutes after mixing shall be rejected.
5.8 CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY
The thickness of joints shall be 10 mm +- 3mm. Thickness of joints shall be kept
uniform. In case of foundation and manholes etc. joints upto 15 mm may be accepted.
5.9 HALF CONCRETE BLOCK
All courses shall be laid with stretchers. Reinforcement comprising 2 nos. 6 mm dia MS
bars shall be provided over the top of the first course and thereafter at every fourth
course.
5.10 LAYING
All iron fixtures, pipes spouts, hold fasts of doors and windows which are required to
be built into the wall shall be embedded in cement concrete blocks 1:2:4 mix (1
cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate. 20 mm nominal size) 150 mm X 100
mm size unless otherwise indicated in the item.
5.11 CURING
Concrete block masonry shall be protected from rain by suitable covering when mortar
is green. Masonry work shall be kept constantly moist on all faces for a minimum
period of seven days.
6.0 UNDER GROUND PIPING

6.1 The pipes shall be centrifugal cast concrete pipes with reinforcement conforming to
IS: 458. The class of pipes shall be NP2. The laying and jointing shall be done as per IS:
783.
6.2 The surface and edges of the pipes shall be well defined, and their ends shall be
perpendicular to longitudinal axis.
6.3 LOWERING & LAYING
6.3.1 The pipes shall be lowered when the trench is ready, and the bottom has been
properly graded as per drawings.
94
RAJASTHAN
6.3.2 Before lowering, the pipes shall be inspected carefully. Broken or cracked pipe shall
be rejected. The inside of the pipe shall be cleaned off from sand, earth or any other
matter.
6.3.3 The pipes shall be lowered carefully so as not to disturb the bed and sides of the
trench. Heavy pipes shall be lowered with chain pully blocks.
6.3.4 Pipes shall be set according to line and grade. Prior to making joints all surface shall
be thoroughly cleaned and prepared as required for the type of joint to be made. Pipe
shall be carefully centered so that the completed sewer will have a smooth uniform
invert.
6.3.5 NAYARA shall be consulted wherever the pipe line crosses a road, railway line trench
etc.
6.3.6 Connection to existing sewer shall be done through a manhole generally.
6.3.7 The ends of the pipe line shall be kept sealed to prevent entry of any foreign
materials. The seals will be broken before the testing is done.
6.4 JOINTING
6.4.1 The jointing shalt be done as per stipulations of IS: 783.
6.4.2 Concrete pipes shall have collar joints.
6.5 TESTING
6.5.1 The pipeline shall be tested for water tightness of joints. The test shall he carried out
from manhole, pipe ends shall be closed and filled with water so that water level is
upto the top of the manholes.
6.5.2 The line shall be kept full for 24 hours. Observations shall be taken after one-hour
interval and if leakage is within 2.5 litres / km/ hr/cm of dia of pipelines, it shall be
deemed to have passed the test.
6.5.3 Owner / Consultant may at his own discretion ask the subcontractor to test the laid
pipe in sections, in which case the subcontractor will do the same as per the
procedure to be decided by the Owner / Consultant without any extra cost to Owner.
The procedure adopted in such cases, will be according to the criteria mentioned in
7.2 above.
6.5.4 In case joints are found to leak, they shall be repaired or redone and test shall be
repeated until the joints are approved by Owner / Consultant.
6.5.5 After completion of the test all temporary seals will be removed, the test water shall
be drained out / pumped out and the line cleaned properly.
6.5.6 Before commissioning the cleanliness of the pipeline will be checked by:
6.5.7 Torch & Mirror Test
In this method of testing, a torch will be held one end of the pipeline inside a
manhole and its image through the pipeline will be reflected and seen on a mirror
held at the opposite end of the pipeline, inside the next manhole. Any obstruction /
95
RAJASTHAN
debris / major mis-allignment will not give a clear image in which case the pipeline
will again be cleaned / rectified, and the test re-done.
6.5.8 Ring Test
In this method of testing two steel / wooden rings of suitable thickness and design
shall be fixed facing each other at a distance of 2 feet or more. The block of rings
shall be inserted from one end of the pipeline, inside manhole and pulled by a rope
fixed to the block from the other end of the pipeline inside the next manhole. The
rings shall be of dia. 2” less than the inside dia of pipe under testing. The rope used
for pulling the ring block may be inserted in the pipeline by the subcontractor either
during construction or afterwards by suitable means. Any obstruction / debris / major
misalignment will prevent the ring to pass through the pipeline in which case the
pipeline will again be cleaned / rectified and the test redone.
6.6 RESTORATION OF DAMAGED SURFACES AND CLEARING THE SITE
6.6.1 All pavements, structures, pipelines, cables, etc. removed, damaged disturbed during
the pipe laying work shall be restored to original conditions.
6.6.1 Surplus excavated soil or rubbish material shall be removed to a place A!. directed by
7.0 BARRICADING
7.1 Before starting any welding at site fire barricading screen with water curtain shall be
erected on the site. Minimum height of barricading screen shall be 6 m including 1 m
for water curtain.
7.2 Suitable Hydrocarbon detector with local hooters shall be provided by contractor.
7.3 Water curtain shall be placed at a height of 6 m above finished ground level.
7.4 Only new GI sheet fencing shall be used for Barricading structure.
7.5 The structure is to be dismantled only after completion of work after getting
permission from NAYARA.
7.6 All unserviceable materials shall be disposed-off suitably outside plant premises.
8.0 FLOORING AND PAVING

8.1 SUB BASE OF FLOOR
8.1.1 The area to be paved shall be divided into suitable panels. Form work shall be
provided. The boarding / battens shall be fixed in position with their toe at proper
level, giving slope where required. Alternatively, base concrete may be deposited in
the whole area at a stretch
8.1.2 Before placing the base concrete the sub-base shall be properly wetted and rammed.
The concrete of the specified mix shall then be deposited between the forms where
provided, thoroughly tamped and the surface, finished level with the top edge of the
96
RAJASTHAN
forms. The surface of base concrete shall be spreader uniformly. The surface shall be
finished rough to provide adequate bond for the topping. Two or three hours after
concrete has been laid the surface shall be brushed with wire brush to remove any
scum or Latinate and swept clean so that coarse aggregate is exposed.
8.2 CEMENT CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH
8.2.1 The surface of base concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned by scrubbing with coir or
steel wire brush. Before laying the toping, the surface shall be soaked with water at
least for 12 hours and surplus water mopped up immediately before the toping is laid.
8.2.2 The forms shall be fixed over the base concrete dividing into suitable panels. Where
glass dividing strips are provided, thickness of glass dividing strips shall be 4 or as
indicated. Before placing the concrete toping, neat cement slurry at the rate of 2
kg/sq.m shall be then thoroughly brushed into the base concrete just ahead of the
finish. The topping shall then be laid, thoroughly compacted by using screed board /
plate vibrator. The surface floated with a wooden float to a fair and even surface
shall be left for some time till moisture disappears from it. Junctions with skirting /
dado or wall surfaces shall be rounded off using cement mortar 1:2 curing shall be
carried out for a minimum of 7 days.
97
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FALL ARRESTOR SYSTEM
1.0 This section intends to provide Technical Specifications & data sheets for the Life Line
based Total Fall Arrestor system to be installed at TWD Area, Lock/ Unlock Shed,
Calibration Tower.
2.0 The arrangement of 1 set of Fall Arrestor system for each bay consist of the following:
a. SS Wire rope: Minimum 10 M
b. Shock Ansorber: 1 no
c. Tensioner: 1no
d. Cable Extremity plate: 2 nos
e. Carriage Body: 2 nos
f. Anti-static full safety harness: 2 nos
g. Retractable block: 2 nos
(Note: The items mentioned above shall be provided as minimum for providing fall
arrestor system as per the respective items of price schedule. Payment for required
structural supports shall be paid under respective items of the price schedule)
3.0 The detailed scope of supply is mentioned under each technical portion of tender
document and standard specifications. The scope of supply (includes transportation,
packing, forwarding, transit insurance, testing, erection & commissioning, TPI) in
brief, as given here below, shall be read in conjunction with the scope of supply under
various sections of the tender document.
4.0 necessary tests shall be conducted by the bidder to determine whether the equipment
with auxiliaries offered conform to the relevant standards and specifications as listed
in this tender. Such tests shall be conducted after arranging the equipment in a
manner representative of actual service conditions at the site and the external
component and fittings in places which are likely to affect the performance.
5.0 Compliance with this specification will not relieve the bidder of his responsibility for
supplying the equipment/item of proper design, material and workmanship to meet
the specified operating requirements and also proper workmanship and performance
of the facilities under the contract.
98
RAJASTHAN
99
RAJASTHAN
100
RAJASTHAN
101
RAJASTHAN
102
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEETS FOR FALL ARRESSOR SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
1.0 MAIN CABLE FOR HORIZONTAL ANCHORAGE LINE:

1. Diameter : Min. 8 mm
2. Material : SS 316 meeting the requirements of EN 795 Class C
standards or Equivalent American Standard
3. Construction : 7 x 19
4. Cable extremity : Swage less termination built in SS 304
5. Extremity Plate : Stainless Steel 304
6. Intermediate Supports : SS 304 AT 10 M. ± 2 M.c/c
7. Tensioner : SS 304 with swage less termination of end wire
8. Shock absorber : SS 304 construction to limit impact force in event
of Fall to less than 6.5 kN.
2.0 RETRACTABLE FALL ARRESTOR BLOCK:
1. Casing : Reinforced Plastic

2. Hanging Rope : Stainless Steel Wire rope of dia 4.5 mm
3. Anchorage type : Anchorage eye with swivel action
4. Standard : EN 360:2002 or Equivalent American standard
5. Length of rope : To be site specific as per site condition
6. Connection to main : Through Aluminium Karabiner connected to the
stainless cable steel carriage shuttle ensuring 100%
anchorage at all times.
7. Carriage body : SS 316 with friction free movement
3.0 ANTI-STATIC FULL BODY ADJUSTABLE HARNESS:

Anti static Full body adjustable harness with two front adjustable loops without
lanyard, shoulder and thigh strap differentiated by a dual colour scheme, ideally
positioned sit strap for extended comfort, two chest attachment textile loops and a
dorsal attachment Aluminium D ring for fall arrest, adjustable shoulder and thigh
straps conforming to EN 361:2002 complete.
The total fall arrestor system shall be certified to Indian or International Standards for
use in potentially explosive atmospheres. All other sub-components, fixtures and
fasteners should be in compliance with the respective EN or American standard
103
RAJASTHAN
specified above. The system should be subject to NAYARA approved 3rd party
inspection agency for confirmation of the specs and tests as per relevant standards.
To ensure correct installation the entire line should be proof loaded at site to a static
force of 6 kN.
4.0 QAP, INSPECTION & TESTING:

Vendor shall submit QAPs for each item/ components for approval by NAYARA or its
TPI agencies. All the materials used in the manufacture of the Swing/ Retractable
stair shall be subjected to examination for testing and approval by NAYARA/ TPI
Agency appointed by NAYARA prior to and after manufacture. Manufacturer (OEM
vendor) shall furnish all necessary information concerning the supply to owner. After
completion of manufacture and prior to dispatch, the entire unit shall be subjected to
demonstration & acceptance tests for approval by NAYARA/ TPI Agency appointed by
NAYARA. NAYARA/ its TPI Agency reserves the right to witness all the tests as per
approved QAP with sufficient advance notice.
5.0 DOCUMENTATION:
Following minimum documentation in 3 sets is to be submitted by the OEM vendor:
a. All material test certificates used for fabrication as per QAP approvals.
b. Inspection Release Notes.
c. Certificate of conformity to required design.
d. As built drawings.
All the certificates shall be approved by NAYARA/ its TPI Agency for acceptance
before dispatch of the swing/ retractable stairs.
6.0 WARRANTY:
All the components forming part of the Stair assembly shall be under Warranty for a
period of 24 months from the date of supply or 18 months from the date of
commissioning whichever is earlier. Further all the components requiring replacement
during Warranty shall be guaranteed within the balance Warranty period. This
condition does not apply for the components such as fasteners, rubber bumper which
are subject to normal wear & tear.
104
RAJASTHAN
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF FIXED WATER SPRAY/ FIXED FOAM ACCESSORIES
1.0 INLINE BALANCE PRESSURE FOAM PROPORTIONER

1.1 TECHNICAL DATA:
1.1.1 MOC - Stainless Steel (304) construction (ASTM A351-CF8)
1.1.2 SIZE: 80, 100 & 150 NB (As per Design)
1.1.3 MAXIMUM SERVICE: 14 Bar (200 PSI) PRESSURE
1.1.4 MINIMUM WORKING: 3.0 Bar (44 PSI) PRESSURE
1.1.5 MOUNTING Between the Flanges: ANSI B16.5-150#
1.1.6 THREAD OPENING: BSPT or NPT optional
1.1.7 PRESSURE SENSING HOSE: TEFLON tube with Stainless Steel braided cover
1.1.8 TRIM CONNECTION & VARIOUS CONTROL VALVES: Stainless Steel
1.1.9 FACTORY HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURE: 25 Kg./ Sq.cm. (350 PSI)
1.1.10 FINISH Epoxy red painted
1.2 APPLICATION:
1.2.1 As per The Inline Balance Pressure Foam Proportioners are used with positive
displacement foam concentrate supply pump. The system controls accurately the flow
of foam concentrate into the water stream over a wide range of flow rate and
pressure.
1.2.2 The Inline Balance Pressure Foam Proportioning System is used for simultaneous
operation of the multiple foam injection even with different pressures between the
two-injection point with a single concentrate supply line. Various sizes of inline
balance pressure proportioners can be combined to suit the flow requirement of each
hazard area.
1.3 SPECIFICATIONS:
1.3.1 As per Inline balance pressure proportioning system utilizes a single, positive
displacement foam concentrate supply pump, an atmospheric foam concentrate
storage tank, inline balance proportioner, and a foam concentrate regulating valve.
The pressure regulating valve is mounted on foam concentrate return line to the foam
concentrate storage tank. The valve regulates the foam concentrate supply pressure.
1.3.2 The Inline balance pressure proportioner consists of a ratio controller, diaphragm
operated pressure balancing valve, water and foam gauges, and pressure sensing hose
of teflon tube with stainless steel braided cover, interconnecting trim fittings with
various control and flush valves. The water inlet pressure and foam concentrate
pressure at metering orifice is sensed by a diaphragm valve and it automatically
balances the concentrate supply to provide accurately proportioned water foam
solution over a wide range of flow conditions.
105
RAJASTHAN
1.3.3 A foam concentrate supply valve is also provided as an optional item. The system
requires foam concentrate supply pressure of 1.5-2.0 bar higher than the water supply
pressure. The Inline balance pressure proportioner is also provided with a manual
balancing valve.
2.0 MEDIUM VELOCITY SPRAY NOZZLE:

2.1 TECHNICAL DATA:
2.1.1 MOC: Stainless Steel Material with strainer
2.1.2 MAXIMUM WORKING PRESSURE: 12 Bar (175 PSI)
2.1.3 EFFECTIVE WORKING PRESSURE: 1.4 to 3.5 Kg/Sq.cm (20 - 50 PSI)
2.1.4 END CONNECTION ½” BSPT (½” NPT OPTIONAL)
2.1.5 FINISH: Natural finish
2.1.6 APPROVALS: UL Listed & FM Approved
2.1.7 SPRAY ANGLE & K FACTOR: As per Design
2.1.8 HOUSING: A351-CF8M
2.1.9 PIN: ASTM-A479 GR 31803
2.1.10 DEFLECTOR: ASTM A240 GR 2205
2.1.11 STRAINER: STAINLESS STEEL 316
2.2 APPLICATION:
2.2.1 Medium Velocity Water Spray Nozzles are open type (non-automatic nozzles, designed
for directional spray application in fixed fire protection system.
2.2.2 Medium velocity water spray nozzle has an external deflector, which discharges water
in a directional cone shaped pattern of small droplet size. The water is uniformly
distributed over the surface to be protected.
2.2.3 The main pipeline strainer as per NFPA-15 is required for system utilizing nozzle
orifice diameter less than 9.5mm (3/8 inch) and also for the system water likely to
contain obstructive materials.
3.0 FOAM MAKER

3.1 TECHNICAL DATA
3.1.1 MOC: Carbon Steel
3.1.2 Inlet Size: 65 NB, 80 NB, 100 NB (As per design)
3.1.3 Working Pressure: Min 2.8 kg/sqcm; Max: 7 kg/sqcm
3.1.4 Flange Connection: ANSI B 16.5 # 150
3.1.5 Vapour Seal Rupture pressure: 0.7 to 1.75 kg/sqcm
3.1.6 Maximum permissible Back pressure: 0.07 kg/sqcm
3.1.7 Vapour Seal: Glass
3.1.8 Finish: Red RAL 3000
106
RAJASTHAN
3.1.9 Approval: UL Listed

3.2 SPECIFICATIONS
3.2.1 Foam Chamber is an air aspirating foam discharge device, covering wide range of flow
from 150 to 2400 litres per minute at 2.8 to 7 kg/sq.cm. inlet pressure. The Foam
Chamber contains a vapour seal to prevent the entry of vapour into the foam chamber
and the foam solution pipe. Each foam chamber is supplied with an orifice plate,
designed for the required flow and inlet pressure. The orifice is field replaceable in
the event of change in design parameters.
The foam is produced by introducing air into the foam solution stream. The inlet of
foam chamber is designed to create venturi jet which draws air into the foam solution
stream. The air is drawn into the foam solution through the holes located on the foam
chamber covered with stainless steel screen to exclude nesting birds and insects. The
aerated foam is directed into the deflector for the gentle application of the expanded
foam.
3.2.2 On removal of cover plate from the top of the chamber allows the system to be tested
and to draw a sample of the expanded foam, without removing the vapour seal or
disconnecting the foam chamber from the tank. Frangible glass bursting disc (vapour
seal) can be replaced by easily.
3.2.3 The vapour seal is designed to rupture within 0.7 to 1.75 Kg/sq.cm. (10 to 25 PSI)
pressure at inlet flange of Foam Chamber, as required by NFPA, UL & FM standard.
The vapour seal will withstand maximum back pressure of 0.07 Kg/sq.cm. Bar (1.0 PSI)
or equal to 686mm of water column as specified by API for welded storage tank.
3.2.4 The vapour seal is frangible glass. The vapour seal is supplied with holder and for
spares it can be with or without holder. The ‘O’ ring used for seal are Nitride rubber
and optional Viton for polar solvent.
3.2.5 Foam Deflector (as per OEM of Foam Chamber) made of is carbon steel material with
matching flanges as per ANSI B 16.5 # 150 shall be installed.
4.0 FOAM CONCENTRATE CONTROL VALVE

4.1 TECHNICAL DATA
4.1.1 SIZE: 25NB, 40NB & 50NB (As per design)
4.1.2 RATED PRESSURE: 14 Kg./sq.cm. (200 PSI)
4.1.3 END CONNECTION: Flanged end to ANSI B 16.5 Class 150#
4.1.4 PRESSURE SENSING: Teflon tube with Stainless HOSE Steel braided cover
4.1.5 TRIM CONNECTION: Stainless Steel
4.1.6 FACTORY HYDRO-TEST PRESSURE: 25 Kg./sq.cm. (365 PSI)
107
RAJASTHAN
4.1.7 FINISH: RED RAL 3000

4.2 APPLICATION
4.2.1 Foam concentrate control valve is designed for use in bladder tank foam system or
inline balance pressure proportioning system. The valve opens automatically when
water supply is established through the inlet pipe of ratio controller of bladder tank or
in the inline balance pressure proportioning system. The valve shall open at minimum
of 2.1 Kg./sq.cm. (30 psi) water pressure.
4.3 SPECIFICATION
4.3.1 The foam concentrate control valve utilizes water as the medium to open the valve. A
manual override facility is provided to open the valve. In normal condition the valve
remains in closed position.
4.3.2 When, a minimum water pressure of 2.1 Kg./sq.cm. (30 psi) is established the valve
opens and closing of the valve is manual.
5.0 ATMOSPHERIC FOAM CONCENTRATE STORAGE TANK

5.1 TECHNICAL DATA
5.1.1 STORAGE CAPACITY: As per Design
5.1.2 MOC: SS 304
5.1.3 EXPANSION DOME: 2% of total tank capacity
5.1.4 FINISH: Natural finish
5.1.5 Fill connection with expansion dome
5.1.6 Drain connection at bottom (Nos as per detailed drawing approval)
5.1.7 Flanged suction connection at the bottom of tank
5.1.8 Flanged return connection at the bottom or at the top of tank.
5.1.9 Site Gauge, Air Vent with Sillica Gel assembly, Lifting Hook.
5.1.10 Ladder
108
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATIONS FOR BREATHER VALVE WITH FLAME ARRESTOR
1.0 CODES & STANDARDS

1.1 Codes, Standards and Regulations
The breather valve and emergency vent covered by this specification shall be
designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the requirements of this
Project Specifications, Company approved data sheets and the latest editions of
applicable National / International codes and standards ( not limited to those listed
hereunder ) and Statutory Regulations (where applicable).
6.1.19 API 2000 : Venting Atmospheric and Low-pressure Storage Tanks
6.1.20 API 650 : Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage
6.1.21 IS 10987 : Code of Practice for Design, Fabrication, Testing & Installation of
Underground/ Aboveground Horizontal Cylindrical Steel Storage Tanks for Petroleum
Products
6.1.22 OISD 244 : Storage and Handling of Petroleum Products at Depots & Terminals
6.1.23 ISO16852 : Standard For Flame arrestors
1.2 Project Specifications
The breather valve covered by this specification shall be designed, manufactured and
tested in accordance with the requirements of the following Project Specifications:
1.2.1.1 Design Criteria
1.2.1.2 Piping Specifications.
1.2.1.3 Painting Specifications.
2.0 BASIS OF DESIGN

2.1 Closed vessels or tanks filled with liquid products must have an opening through which
the accumulated pressure can be released so that the vessel does not explode. Along
the same lines, a vacuum has to be compensated for when the tank or vessel is
drained so that it does not implode. Unallowable overpressure and vacuum will
accumulate with loading and unloading procedure, steam cleaning processes,
blanketing and thermal effects etc. But free openings enable a free exchange with the
atmosphere or with connected pipe systems that are uncontrolled and unmonitored.
2.2 To avoid product loss, Breather valve / pressure vacuum relief valve shall be used for
aboveground vertical petroleum products storage tank & underground horizontal tank
to control the free exchange air movement between storage tank & atmosphere.
2.3 Following consideration shall be accounted as the causes of Overpressure & Vacuum
for sizing breather valve & emergency vent -
2.3.1 Liquid movement into the tank or out of the tank
2.3.2 Weather changes (due to pressure and temperature changes)
109
RAJASTHAN
2.3.3 Fire exposure

2.4 Normal inbreathing results from a maximum outflow of liquid from the tank (liquid
transfer effect) and contraction or condensation of vapour caused by a maximum
decrease in vapour space (thermal effects).
2.5 Normal out-breathing results from a maximum inflow of liquid into the tank &
maximum vaporization caused by such flow (liquid transfer effect) and expansion or
vaporization that results from maximum increase in vapour-space temperature
(thermal effects). Volatile or flashing liquid shall have higher rate of out-breathing.
2.6 Thermal inbreathing as well as out-breathing is affected by insulation of tanker.
Vendor shall consider the incoming as well as outgoing liquid flow rate of 2500 m3/hr
for inbreathing & out-breathing capacity calculation for aboveground vertical storage
tanks. For underground horizontal storage tanks, incoming & outgoing liquid flow rate
shall be 72 m3/hr for inbreathing & out-breathing capacity calculation.
2.7 For external fire exposure of tank, Emergency vent are recommended to release the
overpressure to prevent the explosion of the tank.
2.8 Flame arresters protect systems subjected to explosion hazards from the effects of
explosions. These devices are installed at the opening of an enclosure or to the
connecting pipe of a system of enclosures and whose intended function is to allow
flow but prevent the transmission of flame.
2.9 In case of Ethanol & bio-diesel tanks, silica gel breather shall be provided to absorb
the moisture; this will be installed along-with the breather valves.
3.0 DESIGN AND MANUFACTURE

3.1 Determination of venting requirement for the tanks shall be done as per API 2000, 5th
Edition.
3.2 Vendor to design & manufacture breather valve & Emergency vent as per API 2000,
Latest edition.
3.3 For aboveground vertical storage tanks, incoming & outgoing liquid flow rate shall be
considered as 2500 m3/h.
3.4 For underground horizontal storage tanks, incoming & outgoing liquid flow rate shall
be considered as 72 m3/h.
3.5 The complete responsibility of design, manufacture and supply, supervision of
installation shall be with vendor.
3.6 Vendor to supply breather valve for horizontal underground storage tanks for
petroleum products & ethanol, breather valve & Emergency vent for the vertical
overground storage tanks for petroleum products.
110
RAJASTHAN
3.7 Flame arrester combined with breather valve as single integrated unit shall be
designed, manufactured & supplied by breather valve vendor as per below
3.8 The flame filter should be accessible from outside without removal of valve from the
seating flange for ease of maintenance.
3.9 The flame arrestor with breather valve shall be tested as a combined device as per
ISO 16852, the flows and pressure settings mentioned by the vendor in the technical
offer.
3.10 The breather valve combined with flame arrestor will be witness tested at vendors
shop for full lift at 10% overpressure i.e. 10% above set pressure.
3.11 Flame filter element shall be Replaceable crimped Ribbon Type based Element Bank.
3.12 Flame arrestor / Flame arrestor with breather valve will have ATEX certification based
on the gas groups i.e. namely IIA, IIB, IIC.
3.12.1 Silica Gel breather shall be designed, manufactured & supplied by breather valve
vendor. The bottom & the top of the silica gel breather shall be fixed to the body by
means of rubber gaskets & studs. Vendor to consider removal & refilling arrangement
of silica gel while designing the silica gel breather.
3.13 Environmental design criteria –
The climatic and other conditions under which the equipment will operate are
detailed in the process package (design criteria) of the bidding document. Conditions
specific to the Equipment Package shall be detailed on individual equipment data
sheets. Vendor is responsible for ensuring that all equipment and components
provided are suitable for the utility and environmental conditions as specified during
the entire design life.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:
Altitude 183 m from Mean Sea Level

Relative Humidity 50 % - 60 %
Ambient Temperature Maximum 47°C
Minimum 5 °C
Annual Rainfall 465 mm
Seismic Zone II
Maximum rainfall (in mm) per
9.98 mm
hour
Predominant wind direction North East
Average wind speed 1.97 m/s
111
RAJASTHAN
3.14 ALL Breather valves (with /without Flame Arresters and with Silica Gel), Emergency
Vent and Rim vent valves shall be witness tested at vendor’s shop for full lift at 10%
overpressure i.e 10% above set pressure.
4.0 VENDOR SCOPE OF SUPPLY:

Scope of supply shall be as follows but not limited to:
4.1 breather valves along with flame arrester for vertical aboveground storage tanks
4.2 breather valves along with flame arrester for under-ground horizontal storage tanks
4.3 emergency vents for vertical aboveground storage tanks.
4.4 Silica gel breather shall be provided with breather valve for underground storage tank
for ethanol service.
4.5 Vendor to provide companion flange for breather valve & emergency vent.
4.6 Vendor to submit sizing calculation for breather valve & emergency vent along with
GA drawing. However vendor to note that the size & number of breather valves shall
be as per the table provided in Annexure I.
4.7 Painting shall be done by vendor as per project specification.
4.8 Inspection, testing and QA / QC requirements as specified
4.9 Vendor to provide special tools and tackles as required for normal operation &
maintenance
4.10 Mandatory spare parts (Vendor to specify)
4.11 Vendor to provide list of Spares for 2 years normal operation (separate price).
4.12 Installation, supervision & commissioning is under vendor’s scope of work. Vendor
services shall be available for plant commission & start up.
112
RAJASTHAN
Appendix – I
Table for quantity & size of Breather valve/ Emergency vent valve for Storage tanks
Flame Silica Gel

Tank No. Fluid Handled Size of Vents Number of Vents
Arrester Breather
Aboveground Tank
TK-200A HSD 6" 4 YES -
TK-200B HSD 6" 4 YES -
TK-200C HSD 6" 4 YES -
Underground Tank
TK-100D MS 3" 2 YES -
TK-200D HSD 3" 2 YES -
TK-200E HSD 3” 4 YES -
TK-300A ETHANOL 3" 2 YES YES
TK-300B ETHANOL 3" 2 YES YES
TK-300C ETHANOL 3" 2 YES YES
TK-300D ETHANOL 3" 2 YES YES
TK-300E ETHANOL 3" 2 YES YES
TK-400A SLOP 2” 1 YES -
113
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATIONS FOR SWING /RETRACTABLE STAIRS
1.0 APPLICABILITY:
1.1 The swing /retractable stairs shall be provided at following facilities:
1. TT Gantry - 8
2. Calibration - 2
3. Security check and wagon approach platform –5
4. Lock/ Unlock – 2
2.0 SPECIFICATIONS FOR SWING / RETRACTABLE STAIRS:

2.1 The assembly provided shall be full Factory fabricated, assembled, tested, crated Self
swing/ retractable & self supporting folding stair with required Tension spring
assembly. The static load capacity of the assembly should be designed for a minimum
of 250 Kg. The assembly should not contain any maintenance bearings & bushings.
2.2 The assembly shall be constructed with Aluminium T 6063 alloy to prevent any spark
due to contact with TT/ TW or the Gantry structure. The stair assembly shall consist
of the following minimum features/ components:
a. Base frame made of C channel of 150 or 200 mm height as per the gantry loading
platform dimensions. Cross bar reinforcement for the underside of the stair case
frame to prevent tilt & bend/ twist during operation.
b. 2 nos Tension spring enclosed in an assembly to prevent damage/ injury due to
breakage of the springs.
c. Non moving Base step (Mild Steel as per IS 2062 and Hot Dip Galvanised to 360
gm/sqm) with clear width of 800 mm between the hand rails. Treads shall be
minimum 300 mm wide with non-slip serrated pattern on the treads. The number
of moving steps varying from (1+3) option to (1+6) option to be decided by the
location as per requirement based on existing Gantry structure height, Tank trucks
operating in the location or height of tank wagons etc. The moving steps
(Aluminium) shall be self leveling type with a suitable stopper or locking device to
keep the steps in horizontal position under loaded conditions.
d. Adjustable spring box on either side of the stair case for flexible balancing
between (-)40 to (+)45 degree. Parking position to be designed at 85 degree to
avoid collision with TT/ TW.
e. Hand railing arrangement with a mid rail made of flat, hand rail & top hand rail
made of pipe for comfortable grip while walking on stairs & for ease of lowering
and raising operation to reach the top of TT/ TW etc.
f. Adjustable chain stops with easy locking arrangement to support load up to 250 kg
at last stair with Self supporting design. SS wire rope of 8 mm dia (min) with
114
RAJASTHAN
rubber shrouds/ grip to pull the stair case comfortably into the parking position
with a single hand effort.
g. Automatic foot lock to keep the stair case in parking position when not in
operation. Padded lower edge with rubber bumper or rubber fender of appropriate
thickness to protect the TT/ TW surface.
h. Construction of all rotating joints shall be to avoid friction & static sparking.
i. Safety Cage with Swing gate need not be provided as part of the Stair assembly
since a separate life line based fall protection system is adopted. However, the
design & construction should permit fixing of the safety cage at a later date if
required.
j. Painting & Finishing: Pickling & Passivation for Aluminum & structural parts with
minimum coating thickness of 25 µm (Average) & 20 µm (Local) as per latest
edition of IS 1868 or equivalent standards such as ASTM B580, ASTM D3933, ISO
10074, applicable DIN, EN Standards.
3.0 QAP, INSPECTION & TESTING:

Vendor shall submit QAPs for each item/ components for approval by NAYARA or its
TPI agencies. All the materials used in the manufacture of the swing/ Retractable
stair shall be subjected to examination for testing and approval by NAYARA/ TPI
Agency appointed by NAYARA prior to and after manufacture. Manufacturer (OEM
vendor) shall furnish all necessary information concerning the supply to owner. After
completion of manufacture and prior to dispatch, the entire unit shall be subjected to
demonstration & acceptance tests for approval by NAYARA/ TPI Agency appointed by
NAYARA Energy. NAYARA/ its TPI Agency reserves the right to witness all the tests as
per approved QAP with sufficient advance notice.
4.0 DOCUMENTATION:
Following minimum documentation in 3 sets is to be submitted by the OEM vendor:
2 All material test certificates used for fabrication as per QAP approvals.
3 Inspection Release Notes.
4 Certificate of conformity to required design.
5 As built drawings.
All the certificates shall be approved by NAYARA/ its TPI Agency for acceptance
before dispatch of the swing/ retractable stairs.
115
RAJASTHAN
5.0 WARRANTY:
All the components forming part of the Stair assembly shall be under Warranty for a
period of 24 months from the date of supply or 18 months from the date of
commissioning whichever is earlier. Further all the components requiring replacement
during Warranty shall be guaranteed within the balance Warranty period. This
condition does not apply for the components such as fasteners, rubber bumper which
are subject to normal wear & tear.
116
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR REMOTE OPERATED HVLR VARIABLE FLOW 1000 / 750 / 500 US GPM
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements regarding design, materials, fabrication,

performance testing, supply, warranty and comprehensive maintenance of Remote-
Control System for UL Listed / FM Approved High-Volume Long-Range Foam-Cum-
Water Monitor non-aspirating type, along with foam induction mechanism of following
types;
1000 USGPM Remote Operated Variable Flow (1000/750/ 500 USGPM)
The above types of HVLR shall be supplied in accordance to the respective data sheets
and specifications of this document. In case of conflict between this specification and
respective data sheet, the provisions of the data sheet shall govern. The above HVLRs
are intended for use in fire-fighting application at Petroleum Oil Terminals at Nayara
Energy, Pali.
The scope of this specification shall include, but not limited to following;
a. Design, Procurement of brought out items & Supply of Remote-Control Mechanism

for High-Volume Long-Range Foam-Cum-Water Monitor along with foam induction
mechanism as per respective data sheets.
b. Carrying out various Factory & Site Performance Testing of the Remote-Control
Mechanism as per this specification and data sheet.
c. Supply of remote-control mechanism with 3 no. FLP WITH WP motors for remote
operations of the monitor along with required no. of FLP WITH WP position sensors
etc.
d. Supply of one FLP WITH WP Motorized isolation valve (Gate Valve) (100 mm NB for
1000 USGPM & 150 NB mm NB for 2000 USGPM) for water entry isolation of monitor
from the hydrant, dedicated FLP WITH WP motor control panel & FLP WITH WP
operator console along with associated cablings for Power & signals. Motor control
panel along with operator console shall be required to be placed within 100-meter
from the monitor
e. Supply & fixing / mounting of all the cabling / wiring from FLP WITH WP motors
mounted over the monitor & motorized isolation valve to the local FLP WITH WP
junction box mounted on the monitor / nearby structure.
117
RAJASTHAN
f. Supply of FLP/WP Cable Glands: Cable glands shall be double compression type,
Weather proof, Flameproof made of extruded brass, nickel plated. It shall be
complete with double seal and cone grip arrangement, PVC hoods, check nuts etc.
Bidder shall check cable diameter under and over armour, prior to supply of
glands.
g. Supply and laying of all cables required from FLP WITH WP junction box to the
motor control panel & operator console, to be located within 100 meters, shall be
in the scope of Bidder. Operator console may be mounted on the motor control
panel. All cabling shall FRLS XLPE.
h. Erection & commissioning of each monitor along with motor control panel,
operator console, foam induction mechanism & cable terminations in all respects.
i. All the operation of the monitor viz. Horizontal movement, Vertical Movement, Jet
/ spray adjustment should be possible manually from Monitor (without use of
power) and remotely from remote operator console / control panel by way of
remote Push button control. Necessary mechanical stoppers to be provided on the
monitor to ensure that monitor does not move beyond - 90 degree & 90-degree
range.
j. Earthing of all panels & other fire Fighting equipments supplied by the contractor
shall be connected by 50 x 6 GI strip to the nearest Earthing grid available at site.
Digging of underground trenches, laying of protection slab / bricks over the cable,
backfilling of trench and leveling of earth, provide cable route markers, pipe /
conduit if required.
Other erection materials like cable tray, supporting structure, cable, tray
channels, brackets, clamp and other hardware materials as required for laying of
cable.
k. Supply, installation and commissioning of SIL 2 PLC as per IEC 61508, 61511,
NFPA72 & NFPA 85. Control panel for Remote foam cum water monitor system
including field instruments like MOV with actuator, solenoid valve, position
indicators, pressure gauge, Differential pressure gauge etc.,
k.1.1 The supplied control panel in field & security room will comprises of minimum
following Push Button & lamps, hard wire with HVLR PLC.
118
RAJASTHAN
a) Nozzle vertical i) Full open

b) Nozzle Horizontal j) Full Closed
c) Jet Stop k) Jet start
d) Fog Stop l) Fog start
e) Up Stop m) Up start
f) Down Stop n) Down start
g) Left Stop o) Left start
h) Right Stop p) Right start
k.1.2 HVLR PLC shall have provision for following hard wire signal connection with
TAS PLC as minimum POWER ON, PLC ON & SYSTEM FAULT.
The scope for above arrangements is in HVLR vendor scope.
k.1.3 Supply of signal, control & power cable as required.

k.1.4 signal / power cables including junction boxes as required for the complete
system is in the scope of HVLR Vendor.
k.1.5 Provision & Installation of Flame Proof Control Panel along with required
electrical equipment in the field.
k.1.6 Complete instrumentation and control system as required to make the Remote
operated Long-Range Water cum Foam Monitor with Foam induction system
complete in all respects to be remotely operable.
k.1.7 Isolation / Gate valves shall be made operable from remote as well as manual
operation facility shall also be provided.
k.1.8 Provision of manual and / or automatic simulation facility.
k.1.9 HVLR PLC will have provision of RS-485 port.
k.1.10 Each HVLR should have individual SIL 2 PLC.
i. Comprehensive AMC (Annual maintenance contract) for 3 years post

warranty period of 2 years.
2.0 APPROVAL
a. Instruments certified for use in the specific hazardous area classification shall have
certifications / approvals from accredited international agencies like FM, CENELEC,
PTB, BASSEFA, ATEX etc.-
119
RAJASTHAN
Equivalent Indian standards are as under:

• IS:2148 (FLP WITH WP Instruments)
• IS:2147 (WP)
• IS:3043 (Earthing)
• IS-13314 (Solid state inverters run from storage batteries)
• IS:11260 (Stabilized power supplies AC output) IEC-146 (Solid state inverters)
b. For Indian vendors – Certification / Approval needed from BIS, CMRI & PESO.
c. All enclosures for electrical equipment as applicable shall be suitable for use in
Hazardous area as per Haz. Area Classification and vendor shall submit valid test
certificate issued by CMRI & PESO. CMRI approval in case of foreign vendor is not
required. We shall accept equivalent approval from country of origin with PESO
approval.
d. Flameproof enclosures and instruments which are manufactured outside India and
certified by accredited international authorities shall also have approval of PESO,
India. In case bidder has got only international approval on hand at the time of bid
due date and already applied for PESO approval, then bidder shall be required to
get PESO approval and submitted to Nayara Energy post award but not later than
submission of relevant data sheet of FLP WITH WP enclosure of above for approval
to Nayara Energy. Bidder has to submit undertaking along with technical bid for
that effect and mention timeline of obtaining PESO approval.
e. All double compression flp with wp cable glands and plugs as applicable shall be
provided by the vendor. unused entries shall be fitted with flp with wp plugs as
applicable.
f. Specifications of FLP WITH WP Glands are as under:
FLP WITH WP / WP Cable Glands: Cable glands shall be double compression type,
Weather proof, Flameproof made of extruded brass, nickel plated. It shall be
complete with double seal and cone grip arrangement, PVC hoods, check nuts etc.
Vendor shall check cable diameter under and over armour, prior to supply of glands.
3.0 REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM

Remote Control System shall be provided for horizontal and vertical rotation of the
monitor from the operator console to be supplied along with each Monitor. Jet and
spray movement of the monitor nozzle shall also be remotely controlled from the
operator console. The remote-control system shall be electrical. One dedicated motor
120
RAJASTHAN
control panel as well as operator console to be provided for each monitor. The
remote-control system shall consist of following components:
a. 3 no. FLP / WP motors to be mounted on the monitor for horizontal / vertical
rotation as well for jet / spray movement of the nozzle. All the Motors mounted on
the monitor shall be either 3 Phase (415 Volt, 50 Hz) or 1 Phase (240 Volt, 50 Hz)
with Weather protection for motor enclosure as minimum IP65 OR NEMA 4X. In
both the case bidder shall submit PESO approval certificate along with technical
bid.
b. Hard stop mechanism in place of position sensors is acceptable provided monitor
meets all the functionality of remote control as per tender specification. All the
motors and actuators shall comply with requirements enclosed as Annexure – A.
c. FLP WITH WP / WP Position sensors as required (Detailed Specifications as per
Annexure - B)
d. 200 / 150 MM NB FLP WITH WP / WP MOV Specs of Gate valves (Detailed
Specifications as per Annexure - A)
e. FLP WITH WP / WP Junction boxes mounted on the monitor.
f. Power & control cables (Detailed Specifications as per Annexure - A).
g. Minimum conductor size for power cable for Control panel shall be 4 mm² copper
and all cables shall be1100 V grade PVC insulated, PVC sheathed, armored fire-
retardant type.
h. Necessary power / control cabling / wiring from monitor mounted FLP WITH WP
junction box to the motors of monitor including Isolation valve actuator shall be
provided by the Bidder for each monitor. Also cabling from FLP WITH WP junction
box mounted over the monitor to the Motor control panel / Operator console shall
be provided by the Bidder.
i. FLP WITH WP / WP Motor control panel & FLP WITH WP / WP Operator console
j. Programmable Logic Controller – Conventional (Detailed Specifications as per
Annexure - A)
k. Operator console shall have minimum following indication and control functions for
each monitor.
Push Buttons with indication - up, down, right and left movements, Push button /
joystick with indication - Spray / Jet.
Push Buttons with indication on / off – Open / Close of Motor Operated Isolation valve.
Power available - Indication Lamps
121
RAJASTHAN
Power supply cable & laying (3 phase) from emergency feeder to motor control panel
shall be under contractors’ scope.
4.0 SITE WORK

a. Erection, installation and commissioning of the monitor, MOV, Control panel,
console and associated jobs at site.
5.0 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE

The manufacturer shall guarantee the material, workmanship and the performance of
the entire unit for a period of two year from the date of acceptance of the material at
site. The Bidder shall rectify any mechanical defect, faulty workmanship or
operational defects found or replace the item(s) during this period without any extra
cost to Nayara Energy.
6.0 PACKING
a. The entire unit shall be packed in proper crates to ensure that no damage takes
place during transportation.
b. All the equipment shall be divided into multiple sections for protection and ease of
handling during transportation. The equipment shall be properly packed for the
selected mode of transportation, i.e. by ship, rail or trailer. The equipment shall
be wrapped in polythene sheets before being placed in crates / cases to prevent
damage to finish. The crates / cases shall have skid bottoms for handling.
c. Special notations such as Fragile. This side up, Center of gravity, Weight, Owners
particulars, PO no. etc. shall be clearly and indelibly marked on the packages
together with other details as per purchases as per purchase order.
d. The equipment may be stored outdoors for long periods before installation. The
packing shall be completely suitable for outdoor storage in areas with heavy rains
and high ambient temperature unless otherwise agreed. In order to prevent
movement of equipment / components within the crates, proper packing supports
shall be provided.
e. A set of instruction manuals for erection, testing and commissioning, a set of
operation and maintenance manuals and a set of final drawings shall be enclosed
in a waterproof.
f. Packing should be strictly done separately for each location, with clear
demarcation on the casing about the destination address to avoid any confusion /
re-transportation.
122
RAJASTHAN
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS (PRODUCT SERVICE)
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 This specification along with data sheets, other specifications & attachments to
inquiry / order describes and constitutes the minimum requirement for horizontal and
vertical centrifugal pumps and their accessories / auxiliaries for use in the process &
pipeline applications. The intent of these requirements is to supplement the
requirements as given in data sheets, other specifications and other applicable codes
/ standards referred to in data sheets / specifications.
1.2 Contractor and vendor shall make all possible efforts to comply strictly with the
requirements of this specification and other aforesaid specifications / attachments to
inquiry / order. In case any deviations are considered essential by vendor, same shall
be separately listed (with cross reference to Page No. / Section / Clause No. / Para
etc. of the respective document) in vendor’s offer under section titled as “List of
deviations / exceptions to the inquiry document”, duly supported with proper reasons
for the deviation for Company’s considerations. No cognizance shall be given to any
deviation indicated elsewhere, but not listed in the deviation list. All such issues
should be conveyed to Company in writing by the perspective Contractor / vendor
prior / during the pre-bid conference, if any, before submitting the final offer. No
deviation and exception from this specification shall be permitted without written
approval of Company.
1.3 Except as specified herein, the pumps shall be designed, manufactured, tested and
supplied in accordance with API-610 (latest edition), data sheets, specifications and
applicable codes / standards (latest edition).
1.4 In the event of any conflict / contradiction / discrepancy / dispute between this
specification, other specifications, codes and standards and other technical
documents, Contractor shall refer the matter to Company for clarification. The
following order of precedence shall govern.
1.4.1 Scope of Work & Design Basis / Criteria
1.4.2 P & ID / SLD
123
RAJASTHAN
1.4.3 Data Sheets
1.4.4 Job / Equipment Specifications
1.4.5 Standard Specifications.
1.4.6 Codes & Standards.
In case any issue remains unresolved, the most stringent requirement shall apply.
1.5 Contractor / vendor shall seek Company's approval regarding such features which are
not specified by Company but requirements of API-610 call for purchaser decision on
these matters.
1.6 It shall be the responsibility of Contractor / vendor to furnish operating unit.

Compliance with this specification shall not relieve Contractor / vendor of the
responsibilities of furnishing equipment and accessories / auxiliaries of proper design,
materials and workmanship to meet the specified start up and operating conditions. In
case Contractor / vendor considers requirement of additional instrumentation,
controls, safety devices and any other accessories / auxiliaries essential for safe and
satisfactory operation of the equipment, he shall recommend the same along with
reasons in a separate section along with his offer and include the same in his scope of
supply.
1.7 Pump vendor shall be a regular and established manufacturer of centrifugal pumps.
1.8 Pump vendor shall have adequate engineering, manufacturing and testing facilities for
pumps conforming to API standard.
1.9 Pump model offered shall be from the existing regular manufacturing range of the
pump vendor. Vendor’s / manufacturer’s catalogue and general reference list shall be
furnished along with the offer.
124
RAJASTHAN
1.10 The offered pump shall be of a proven design in similar service. At least two (2) units
of comparable type, rating and design should have been designed, manufactured from
the proposed manufacturing unit, tested and supplied by vendor during last three
years from the date of submission of offer and at least one unit must have successfully
completed 8000 hours of operation at site without any problems. Contractor / vendor
shall have to furnish references from users, if called for.
1.11 Since this reference list will be used for establishing provenness of proposed model for
operating under specified operating conditions, it is in vendor’s own interest to select
such reference, where the proposed model is supplied and operating at conditions
similar to those specified for item against which the proposed model is offered. In
addition, manufacturer’s catalogue and general reference list for the pump shall also
be furnished.
1.12 Pump vendor shall assume responsibility for satisfactory hydraulic and mechanical
performance of the equipment for the specified service.
1.13 Pump and all auxiliaries shall be suitable for the specified area classification.
1.14 Pump vendor shall not offer any alternative designs.
1.15 Two sets of special tools and tackles required either for installation / erection and
operation and maintenance of the pump units shall be included in vendor’s scope of
supply.
2.1 Codes, Standards and Regulations
2.1.1 The centrifugal pumps covered by this specification shall be designed,

manufactured and tested in accordance with the requirements of this Project
Specifications, Company approved data sheets and the latest editions of
applicable National / International codes and standards (not limited to those
listed hereunder) and Statutory Regulations (where applicable).
• API Std.610 Centrifugal Pumps for Petroleum, Heavy Duty for the (main
governing code) Chemical and Gas Industry Services.
125
RAJASTHAN
• OISD: 113 Standard on classification of area for electrical installations at

hydrocarbon and handling facilities.
• DGMS latest notifications. For Electrical Installations at Petroleum Facilities
• API Std. 614 Lubrication, Shaft Sealing and Control Oil Systems for Special
Purpose Applications
• API Std. 660 Heat Exchanger for General Refinery Services.
• API Std. 670 Non-Contacting Vibration and Axial Position Monitoring System
• API Std. 682 Pumps-Shaft Sealing Systems for Centrifugal and Rotary Pumps
• ISO 1940 Balance quality of Rotating Rigid Bodies
• ISO 5198 Centrifugal, mixed flow and axial pumps – Code for hydraulic
performance tests
• ASME Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges- Ring-Joint, Spiral B -16.20 Wound
and Jacketed.
2.2 PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.1 The centrifugal pump(s) covered by this specification shall be designed,

manufactured and tested in accordance with the requirements of the following
Project Specifications:
• Design Basis
• Electrical Specifications.
• Instrumentation Specifications.
• Piping Specifications.
• Insulation Specifications.
• Painting Specifications.
2.3 MANDATORY INDIAN STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS
2.3.1 This document has been prepared to the National / International Standards
detailed within. Contractor shall ensure that the scope of work is executed in
accordance with all mandatory Indian statutory requirements.
126
RAJASTHAN
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Contractor shall furnish completely filled in data sheets for each centrifugal
pump as per API 610 for Company’s review and approval. Contractor shall
supply all necessary equipments specified for the package / unit and auxiliary
systems and all other requirements in accordance with this specifications. Any
equipment that is necessary to make a complete, operable, safe and
dependable package / unit but not specifically identified herein shall also be in
Contractor’s scope of supply. The scope of supply for each centrifugal pump
unit shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:
• Pump & Driver

• Common Base Plate (drain rim type)
• Seals and Seal systems
• Cooling Systems (if required)
• Flexible couplings, complete with suitable non-sparking guard
• Power transmission gear unit (if required)
• All necessary interconnecting pipework, fittings and valves, including drain
connections, terminating at the edge of the base plate / skid.
• All necessary electricals, controls and instrumentation (as applicable).
• Any additional piping, instrumentation or accessories necessi-
tated nominated by this specification or as shown within the package lim-
its on nominated P&ID drawings.
• All necessary spare parts for start-up and commissioning.
• Spare parts recommended for one year of operation. Mechanical seal
1 nos, bearings(1 nos for each size),O rings,coupling (1 nos) ,lube first fill ect.
• Two (2) sets of any tools required for maintenance of the pump unit
• Inspection and testing as called for in this specification and its attachments
• All documentation as specified in this specification and as listed in the
Company’s procurement documentation
• Preparation for Shipment.
• TLF and TWG centrifugal pump supplier should be same.
• Minimum 3 nos of visit of pump vender for each set .
127
RAJASTHAN
3.1.2 All the above components shall be mounted on a common structural skid fully
assembled, piped with inlet and outlet piping terminated at the skid edge with
appropriately rated flanges, wired, tested and painted for corrosive
environment. Contractor shall be responsible for the complete design,
engineering, coordination, testing, delivery and proper functioning of the
equipment, notwithstanding any omissions from this specification.
3.2 TECHNICAL DATA OF CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
Sl. Technical Unit Technical data

No. Specification
1 Pump Tag. No. P- 100A/B P- 1001- P-200 – P-201-
A/B/C A/B/C A/B/C
2 Service Fluid MS MS HSD HSD
3 Quantity Nos. (1w + 1s) (2w + 1s) (2w + 1s) 3
4 Type Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
Centrifugal Centrifugal Centrifugal Centrifugal
End Suction, End End End Suction,
Top Delivery Suction, Suction, Top Delivery
Top Top
Delivery Delivery
5 Density Kg/m3 720-775 720-775 820-845 820-845
6 Capacity m3/hr 550 180 550 360
7 Differential mlc 65 65 65 65
Head
8 Shut-off head mlc * * * *
9 Pump speed RPM 1500 1500 1500 1500
10 NPSH (required) mlc * * * *
11 Type of Flexible Flexible Flexible Flexible
coupling
Type of driver Induction Induction Induction Induction
Motor with Motor with Motor with Motor with
FLP FLP FLP FLP
Driver rating KW * * * *
Type of Mechanical Mechanical Mechanical Mechanical
gland/seal seal seal seal seal
Suction / mm / * * * *
discharge nozzle mm
dia
Material of
construction -
Casing Carbon Carbon steel Carbon Carbon
steel steel steel
Impeller Cast iron Cast iron Cast iron Cast iron
NPSH (required) mlc * * * *
128
RAJASTHAN

No. Specification
Shaft Carbon Carbon steel Carbon Carbon steel
steel steel
Shaft sleeve * * * *
Baseplate MS MS MS MS
fabricated fabricated fabricated fabricated
Notes –
1. “*” denotes data to be provided by vendor

2. Pumps shall be designed as per API 610
3. Shaft sealing system for the pumps shall be designed as per API 682
4. The noise level shall not exceed 85 dBA at a distance of 1.0 m from the equipment
5. Suction specific speed shall be limited within 8500 (USCS Units)
6. Mandatory spares for 1 years O & M shall be provided
4.0 ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN CRITERIA
4.1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
4.1.1 The climatic and other conditions under which the equipment will operate are
detailed in the process package (design criteria) of the bidding document.
Conditions specific to the Equipment Package shall be detailed on individual
equipment data sheets. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all
equipment and components provided are suitable for the utility and
environmental conditions as specified during the entire design life.
4.2 AREA CLASSIFICATION
4.2.1 Electrical and Instrumentation will be rated for the applicable Hazardous Area
classification according to API RP500.
5.0 BASIC DESIGN
5.1 Contractor’s standard design shall be capable of meeting the performance

requirements when operating in the environment as mentioned the process package or
elsewhere for a period of total design life of the installation of 20 years with minimum
uninterrupted service period of 3 years. Contractor / vendor shall identify any aspects
129
RAJASTHAN
of the standard components of packages that don’t meet this specification and submit
descriptions to Company during the tendering process. Except where amended by the
data sheets or this specification, the design of centrifugal pumps shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the current edition of Standard API - 610
‘Centrifugal Pumps for Petroleum, Heavy Duty Chemical and Gas Industry Services’.
6.0 WARRANTY
6.1 Vendor shall have final and total responsibility for the design and mechanical
performance of all equipment supplied under this specification. Vendor shall warrant
the equipment furnished by him and the performance of the said equipment in
accordance with this specification and with warranty requirements given elsewhere in
bid package.
7.0 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS:
7.1 SPARE PARTS
7.1.1 Vendor shall provide spare parts needed for start-up and commissioning. Vendor
shall also furnish a separate itemized list of recommended spares for one year
normal operation and maintenance included in offered price.
7.1.2 Lists shall include part number, part description, serial number and normal
delivery lead time. Contractor shall ensure listed parts are available for
shipment at the time of equipment shipment. Recommended spares should take
into account related factors of equipment reliability, effect of equipment
downtime upon production or safety, cost of parts and availability of
equipment service facilities.
7.1.3 All spare parts furnished by Vendor should be wrapped and packaged so that
they will be preserved in original as new condition under the normal conditions
of storage to be anticipated in India. Spare parts shall be properly tagged and
coded so that later identification as to intended equipment usage will be
facilitated.
130
RAJASTHAN
7.1.4 They shall be packaged separately, clearly marked as “spare parts” and shipped
at the same time as the equipment. Packing lists shall be furnished so that the
parts can be handled without uncrating, if required. Start-up spares shall be
packed and identified separately.
7.2 TOOLS
7.2.1 Vendor shall provide two sets of special tools or fixtures as required, for
installation / erection, operation & maintenance and disassembly of the
furnished equipment. All such tools shall be permanently tagged with
information pertaining to their use. Any special drawings or instructions
pertaining to the use of such tools shall be included in the instruction manual.
8.0 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
8.1 After final Testing and approval, the assembly shall be drained of water and dried. All
items shall be properly packed and protected against damage during shipment. Each
crate, bag or package shall be clearly identified with the purchase order number and
identification symbol and shall be securely fastened to the package. Exposed surfaces
shall be coated with an easily removable rust preventative. All flanged opening shall
be protected with steel plate covers attached by proper bolting and sealed with
plastic compound.
8.2 All electrical control enclosures shall be properly plugged at entries and loaded with
silica gel bags where necessary. The contractor shall state in their proposal their
recommendations for long term storage (up to 12 months) for both indoor and outdoor
storage in a corrosive environment.
9.0 INSPECTION & TESTING
9.1 All the pumps shall be inspected & tested at the supplier’s works before delivery. All
the tests shall be arranged by the supplier free of cost at his works. The supplier shall
submit the Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) detailing the tests offered along-with the
quotation.
Following tests to be carried out:
131
RAJASTHAN
• Capacity testing: To demonstrate the rated capacity at the rated discharge

pressure
• Hydrostatic testing: To demonstrate the pressure retaining parts of the pump will
not leak or fail structurally when subjected to hydrostatic pressure
• Noise test: To demonstrate the noise at a distance of 1 m from the pump is <85
dBA
• NPSH test shall be done by vacuum tank suppression or throttling method over one
pump of each model / capacity.
• Dynamic balancing of impeller & assembled motor for one pump in each model /
capacity.
• Vibration levels for one pump in each model / capacity.
• Frame, alignment checking, overall dimensions, painting arrow marking for flow
direction, serial no, etc. shall be done in assembled condition with driver on
common base frame.
• FLP motors.
10.0 VENDOR DATA
10.1 Contractor shall provide all information as specified in the Company’s Procurement
Documentation. This shall include, as a minimum the following:
SL. DESCRIPTION WITH OFFER AFTER FINAL WITH

NO. PURCHASE EQUIPMENT
ORDER DATA BOOK
1 Completed data sheet and calculations Yes R Yes
2 Catalogue / Literature / Leaflet / Standard Curve of Yes Yes
offered Model.
3 Performance characteristics Yes Yes
4 GA drawing for pump, driver & accessories including Yes R Yes
dimensional outline.
5 Auxiliary system schematic diagram – cooling and lube Yes R Yes
oil (as applicable)
6 Cross-sectional drawing with parts lists and material Yes I Yes
of construction.
7 Mechanical seal cross-sectional drawing. Yes I Yes
8 Mechanical seal flushing diagram including all R Yes
accessories (as applicable)
9 Schematic & wiring diagram for electrical control and R Yes
instrumentation.
132
RAJASTHAN

ORDER DATA BOOK
10 Coupling data & drawing. I Yes
11 Foundation Plan - Anchor bolt details. I Yes
12 Data for external forces & moments. I Yes
13 Torsional vibration and critical speed calculation. I Yes
14 Driver requirement data. I Yes
15 Torque speed characteristics I Yes
16 Part list & Material of Construction. I Yes
17 Completed lube schedule I Yes
18 Proposed test procedure and erection details R Yes
19 Material Test Certificates. R* Yes
20 Performance Test Records including curves and data. R* Yes
21 Installation, Operating & Maintenance manual I Yes
22 Mechanical clearance diagram I Yes
23 Mechanical Catalogue containing all the final I Yes
drawings.
24 List of spare parts I Yes
25 List of tools I Yes
26 List of deviations from spec. Yes
27 Experience Details Yes
28 Maintenance schedule (2 sets) – laminated Yes
29 Vendor / Manufacturer Guarantee / Warranty Yes
LEGEND:
I - INFORMATION, R- REVIEW, * at the time of inspection.
All drawings, calculations and data sheets will require review and approval by
Company and will require the issue of “as-built” documents by Contractor. All
drawings shall have the Purchaser equipment number and purchase order number.
Vendor shall provide a complete document package for unit components and specific
for protection of the equipment if taken out of service for finite periods. Shop details
shall be completed with all dimensions, thickness and details of construction including
all nozzle locations and orientations. All material thickness shall be shown. All welds
shall be detailed for fully described by notes or weld symbols and annotated to the
relevant weld procedure specification. Review of the drawings by Company does not
relieve Contractor of his responsibility for the correctness of the design to suit the
stated conditions.
133
RAJASTHAN
TYPICAL DATA SHEET FOR PRODUCT PUMPS
AREA CLASS FLAME PROOF

DESIGN CODE API 610 (8th, EDITION) WITH MODIFICATION AS PER SPECIFICATION
APPLICATION *
OPERATING CONDITIONS
PERFORMANCE DATA: *
LIQUID HANDLED * NPSH REQUIRED *
CAPACITY (MAX) KLPH * NO. OF STAGES ONE
CAPACITY (NOR) KLPH * R.P.M. 1500
SUCTION HEAD MLC * NAME OF MANUFACTURER *
DISCHARGE HEAD MLC * EFFICIENCY AT DUTY POINT *
TOTAL DIFF HEAD MLC * MAX. BKW ABSORBED AT DUTY PT *
NPSH AVAILABLE MLC * SHUT OFF HEAD AS PER SPECIFICATION
VAP. PR AT P.T. KG/CM² * DIRACTION OF ROTATION *
VISCOSITY AT P.T. Cp * FACING DRIVER END *
SPECIFIC GRAVITY * SEAL HOUSING PLAN NO. *
CORROSIVITY NIL WATER COOLING REQD. FOR *
SUSPENDED SOLIDS NIL JACKETING REQD. FOR *
MINM. FLOW * FLUSHING REQD. FOR *
SPECIFIC SPEED *
PUMP MODEL NO. *
TEST CURVE NO. *
PUMP SECTIONAL DRG. NO. *
MECHANICAL SEAL DRG. NO. *
AUXILARY PIPING CONNECTIONS
SIZE *
LPM *
LANTERN: INLET / OUTLET *
SEAL QUENCH / VENT / DRAIN NPT *
SEAL FLUSH (FLGD. PIPING) NPT *
CASING WITH BLOCK V/V NPT *
CASING & FLGD. PIPING NPT *
PEDESTAL NPT *
BASE PLATE DRAIN NPT *
BEARING HOUSING NPT *
CONSTRUCTION DETAILS INSPECTION AND TESTING
CASING SPLIT RADIAL SPLIT SHOP TEST: *
CASING TYPE SINGLE VOLUTE REQUIRED AND WITNESSED YES
PERFORMANCE TEST As per spec. (QAP to be developed by the
contractor)
IMPELLER TYPE & CASING CLOSED HYDROSTATIC TEST PR. As per spec. (QAP to be developed by the
contractor)
IMPELLER DIA: (mm) * MAX. ALLOWABLE CASING PR. As per spec.
COUPLING TYPE AND RATING FLEXIBLE SPACER
MECHANICAL SEAL MAKE: Eagle Poonawalla / Flowserve / Burgmann / MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION AS PER API 610 (8th edition), class S-6 or
Durmatellaic / John Crane superior
BEARING: MAKE *
DRIVER END - RADIAL Y/N Number: CASING: CARBON STEEL
DRIVER END - THRUST Y/N Number: IMPELLER: 12% CHROME
BEARING LUBRICANT * SHAFT: AISI 4140
MACHANICAL SEAL: As per API 682 SHAFT SLEEVE: AUS of 12 % CHROME
MODEL AND MAKE * WEAR RINGS: *
SUCTION X DISCHARGE LINE SIZE * BEARING ENCLOSURE: *
SUCTION X DISCHARGE POSN. *
SUCTION X DISCHARGE FL. RATING 150 #,
DRIVE MOTOR DETAILS ACCESSORIES REQUIRED
AUTO RECIRCULATION VALVE NO
SUPPLIED BY PUMP MANUF. BASE PLATE YES
TYPE SQUIREL CAGE & FLP WITH VFD FOUNDATION BOLTS YES
INSULATION FLEXIBLE COUPLING AND MAKE YES, Coupling shall be metaflex type with
spacer of M/s. Flexibox / M/s. Rathi / M/s.
Power & Machinery pvt. Ltd. / M/s. Flender &
M/s. Euroflex.
134
RAJASTHAN
MOTOR HP * COUPLING GUARD YES, non-sparking type fabricated from 18

SWG (min) Aluminium steel.
(Margine as per API 610) V-BELT AND PULLEY N. A.
DUTY CONTINUOUS BELT GUARD N. A.
LOCATION OUT DOORS COMPANION FLANGES (WNRF) & YES, & GASKET TO BE OIL RESISTANT
GASKET
AS PER SPECIFICATION
BOLTS AND NUTS FOR COMPANION YES
FLANGES
135
RAJASTHAN
NOTE:
1. “*” Denotes data to be provided by vendor.

2. Pumps shall be designed as per API 610 (8th Edition).
3. Shaft sealing system for the pumps shall be designed as per API 682.
4. Pump shall be centre line mounted.
5. Pumps where difference between NPSHA and NPSHR from quoted minimum flow to
rated flow is 0.5 Mtr. Or less are not acceptable. It should be at least 1.0 m (3.3 ft)
at the rated duty point. The said NPSHR value shall correspond to the maximum
value of NPSHR from rated flow down to the recommended minimum flow.
6. Casing drain pipe with flanged valve up to the edge of the base plate shall be in
pump manufacturer's scope of supply.
7. Anchor foundation bolts with special grouting mixture recommended by the
manufacturer for grouting of these bolts and pump motor base frames shall be
provided.
8. Pumps preservation technique along with the required solvents / liquid to be
supplied as part of the pumps since the actual usage of the pumps shall be after
period of 18 months normally.
9. Liquid velocity at suction nozzle shall be < = 4.5 m/s.
10. The pumps manufacturer to note that fabricated impellers are not acceptable.
11. Bearing housing of pumps shall be provided with a flat surface of at least 25 mm in
diameter for location of contact type vibration transducers.
12. The pump couplings shall be of forged steel and non-lubricated, laminated disc
type, with stainless steel / monel laminations. The selected coupling shall have a
service factor not less 1.5 over motor name plate rating. A spacer coupling of
minimum normal length (127 mm) shall be used unless otherwise specified, the
spacer length shall permit the removal of coupling, bearing, seal and / or rotor as
applicable without disturbing the drive or the suction and discharge piping.
13. The head capacity curve for the pump shall be of continuously rising type up to
shut off with a minimum shut off head of 105% for single pump working and for
parallel operation it shall be minimum of 110% but not exceeding 120% of the head
at best efficiency point for rated impeller. The minimum continuous stable flow
shall be indicated on the pump. H Q curve and corresponding head and NPSHR for
this point shall also be mentioned.
14. The motor KW at operating point plus API mergin should not be lower than the KW
required at the end of the HQ curve. It means motor should be selected at
operating point plus API mergin or power requirement at the end of the curve
whichever is higher.
136
RAJASTHAN
15. Socket welded or union joints valves are not acceptable. Only Flanged valve shall
be acceptable.
16. Painting shall be as per Manufacturer’s standard.
137
RAJASTHAN
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMP (WATER SERVICE)
1.0 GENERAL
inquiry / order describes and constitutes the minimum requirement for horizontal and
vertical centrifugal pumps and their accessories / auxiliaries used in the water service
applications. The intent of these requirements is to supplement the requirements as
given in data sheets, other specifications and other applicable codes / standards
referred to in data sheets / specifications.
requirements of this specification and other aforesaid specifications /attachments to
supplied in accordance with IS-5120 (latest edition), data sheets, specifications and
1.4.2 P & ID / SLD
138
RAJASTHAN
1.4.3 Data Sheets
In case any issue still remains unresolved, the most stringent requirement shall apply.
not specified by Company but requirements of IS-5120 call for purchaser decision on
these matters.

materials and workmanship to meet the specified start up and operating conditions. In
case Contractor / vendor considers requirement of additional instrumentation,
controls, safety devices and any other accessories / auxiliaries essential for safe and
satisfactory operation of the equipment, he shall recommend the same along with
reasons in a separate section along with his offer and include the same in his scope of
supply.
1.7 Pump vendor shall be a regular and established manufacturer of centrifugal pumps as
per IS-5120.
pumps conforming to IS standard.
pump vendor. Vendor’s / manufacturer’s catalogue and general reference list shall be
139
RAJASTHAN
1.11 Since this reference list will be used for establishing provenness of proposed model for
operating under specified operating conditions, it is in vendor’s own interest to select
such reference, where the proposed model is supplied and operating at conditions
similar to those specified for item against which the proposed model is offered. In
addition, manufacturer’s catalogue and general reference list for the pump shall also
be furnished.
supply.
2.1 CODES, STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
2.1.1 The centrifugal pumps covered by this specification shall be designed,

manufactured and tested in accordance with the requirements of this Project
Specifications, Company approved data sheets and the latest editions of
applicable National / International codes and standards (not limited to those
listed hereunder) and Statutory Regulations (where applicable).
• IS: 5120: Centrifugal Pumps for Water Industry Services.

• DGMS latest notifications: For Electrical Installations at Petroleum Facilities
• ISO 1940: Balance quality of Rotating Rigid Bodies
140
RAJASTHAN
• ISO 5198: Centrifugal, mixed flow and axial pumps – Code for hydraulic
performance tests
• ASME Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges - Ring-Joint, Spiral B - 16.20 Wound
and Jacketed.
• API RP 500: Electrical area classification
2.2.1 The centrifugal pump(s) covered by this specification shall be designed,

• Design Basis
2.3 MANDATORY INDIAN STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS
2.3.1 This document has been prepared to the National / International Standards
detailed within. Contractor shall ensure that the scope of work is executed in
accordance with all mandatory Indian statutory requirements.
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Contractor shall furnish completely filled in data sheets for each centrifugal
pump as per IS: 5120 for Company’s review and approval. Contractor shall
supply all necessary equipment specified for the package / unit and auxiliary
systems and all other requirements in accordance with this specifications. Any
equipment that is necessary to make a complete, operable, safe and
dependable package / unit but not specifically identified herein shall also be in
Contractor’s scope of supply. The scope of supply for each centrifugal pump
unit shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:
141
RAJASTHAN
• Pump & Driver

• Common Base Plate (drain rim type)
connections, terminating at the edge of the baseplate / skid.
• Any additional piping, instrumentation or accessories necessitated
nominated by this specification or as shown within the package limits on
nominated P&ID drawings.
• Spare parts required for one year of operation should be mentioned
offer.
• All documentation as specified in this specification and as listed in the
Company’s procurement documentation
3.1.2 All the above components shall be mounted on a common structural skid fully
appropriately rated flanges, wired, tested and painted for corrosive
environment. Contractor shall be responsible for the complete design,
engineering, coordination, testing, delivery and proper functioning of the
equipment, notwithstanding any omissions from this specification.
3.2 TECHNICAL DATA OF CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS (WATER SERVICE)

No. Specification
1 Pump Tag. No. P- 500-A/B/C/D/E P- 501-A/B
2 Service Fluid Water Water
3 Quantity Nos. 5 2
4 Type Horizontal Horizontal
Centrifugal Centrifugal
142
RAJASTHAN

No. Specification
5 Density Kg/m3 1000 1000
6 Capacity m3/hr 610 40
7 Differential Head mlc 110 120
8 Type of driver Diesel Engine Driven Electric Motor (Non-
FLP)
Manufacturer to provide data as per standard datasheet provided as annexure-1.
4.1.1 The climatic and other conditions under which the equipment will operate are
detailed in the process package (design criteria) of the bidding document.
Conditions specific to the Equipment Package shall be detailed on individual
equipment data sheets. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all
equipment and components provided are suitable for the utility and
environmental conditions as specified during the entire design life.
5.0 BASIC DESIGN
5.1 Contractor’s standard design shall be capable of meeting the performance

descriptions to Company during the tendering process.
5.2 Except where amended by the data sheets or this specification, the design of
centrifugal pumps shall be in accordance with the requirements of the latest edition
of IS: 5120 ‘Centrifugal Pumps for water Industry Services’.
143
RAJASTHAN
6.0 WARRANTY
6.1 Vendor shall have final and total responsibility for the design and mechanical
performance of all equipment supplied under this specification.
6.2 Vendor shall warrant the equipment furnished by him and the performance of the said
equipment in accordance with this specification and with warranty requirements given
elsewhere in bid package.
7.0 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS
7.1 SPARE PARTS
7.1.1 Vendor shall provide spare parts needed for start-up and commissioning. Vendor
shall also furnish a separate itemized list of recommended spares for one year
normal operation and maintenance included in offered price.
7.1.2 Lists shall include part number, part description, serial number and normal
delivery lead time. Contractor shall ensure listed parts are available for
shipment at the time of equipment shipment. Recommended spares should take
into account related factors of equipment reliability, effect of equipment
downtime upon production or safety, cost of parts and availability of
equipment service facilities.
7.1.3 All spare parts furnished by Vendor should be wrapped and packaged so that
they will be preserved in original as new condition under the normal conditions
of storage to be anticipated in India.
7.1.4 Spare parts shall be properly tagged and coded so that later identification as to
intended equipment usage will be facilitated. They shall be packaged
separately, clearly marked as “spare parts” and shipped at the same time as
the equipment.
7.1.5 Packing lists shall be furnished so that the parts can be handled without
uncrating, if required. Start-up spares shall be packed and identified
separately.
144
RAJASTHAN
7.2 TOOLS
7.2.1 Vendor shall provide two sets of special tools or fixtures as required, for
installation / erection, operation & maintenance and disassembly of the
furnished equipment. All such tools shall be permanently tagged with
information pertaining to their use.
7.2.2 Any special drawings or instructions pertaining to the use of such tools shall be
included in the instruction manual.
8.1 After final Testing and approval, the assembly shall be drained of water and dried. All
items shall be properly packed and protected against damage during shipment.
8.2 Each crate, bag or package shall be clearly identified with the purchase order number
and identification symbol, and shall be securely fastened to the package.
8.3 Exposed surfaces shall be coated with an easily removable rust preventative. All
flanged opening shall be protected with steel plate covers attached by proper bolting
and sealed with plastic compound.
8.4 All electrical control enclosures shall be properly plugged at entries and loaded with
silica gel bags where necessary.
8.5 The contractor shall state in their proposal their recommendations for long term
storage (up to 12 months) for both indoor and outdoor storage in a corrosive
environment.
9.1 All the pumps shall be inspected & tested at the supplier’s works before delivery. All
the tests shall be arranged by the supplier free of cost at his works. The supplier shall
submit the Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) detailing the tests offered along-with the
quotation.
145
RAJASTHAN
9.2 Following tests to be carried out:

pressure
• All casting shall be subjected to surface inspection after suitably cleaning and
chipping and or abrasive blasting. Those shall be subject to visual inspection prior
to specific NDT and be proven free from sand, scale, cracks, tears, voids and other
harmful defects.
dBA
pump of each model / capacity.
• Dynamic balancing of impeller & assembled motor for one pump in each model /
capacity.
• Vibration levels for one pump in each model/capacity.
common base frame.
• NFLP motors.
10.0 VENDOR DATA
10.1 Contractor shall provide all information as specified in the Company’s Procurement

ORDER DATA BOOK
offered Model.
4 GA drawing for pump, driver & Yes R Yes
accessories including
dimensional outline
5 Auxiliary system schematic Yes R Yes
146
RAJASTHAN

ORDER DATA BOOK
diagram – cooling and lube oil (as applicable)
6 Cross-sectional drawing with parts lists and material Yes I Yes
of
construction.
8 Mechanical seal flushing diagram including all R Yes
accessories (as applicable)
instrumentation.
13 Torsional vibration and critical speed calculation I Yes
drawings.
147
RAJASTHAN
LEGEND:
I - INFORMATION, R - REVIEW, * - at the time of inspection.
stated conditions.
148
RAJASTHAN
PROCESS & OPERATING DATASHEET FOR SERVICE WATER PUMPS
NO. REQD.: * WORKING: * INSTLD. STAND BY: * NON-INSTLD. STAND BY: *

TYPE: HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL LIQUID HANDLED: WATER OPERATING MODE: AUTO / MAN
LOCATION: SHED AREA CLASSIFICATION: HAZARDOUS / NON-HAZARDOUS
1 DENSITY (Kg/m³): * AT PUMPING TEMPERATURE - *
2 VAPOUR PRES. (Kg/Cm²-a): * AT PUMPING TEMPERATURE - *
3 VISCOSITY (cP): * AT PUMPING TEMPERATURE - *
4 PRESENCE OF CORROSIVE / TOXIC *
COMPONENTS
5 SOLID PERCENTAGE: * pH OF LIQ: * SUCTION PRESS. Kg/cm²a FLOODED
6 OPERATING TEMPERATURE °C * DISCHARGE PRESS. Kg/cm²a *
7 AVAILABLE NPSH (Minimum) MLC * DIFFERENTIAL PRESS. Kg/cm² *
8 NORMAL CAPACITY M³/HR * DIFFERENTIAL HEAD MLC *
9 MAXIMUM CAPACITY M³/HR * MAX ACCEPTABLE SHUT OFF Kg/cm² *
DIFF. PRES.
10 MINIMUM CAPACITY M³/HR * SAFE MIN FLOW M³/HR *
UTILITIES
11 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY PHASE: 3 VOLTS: 415 (+/- 10%,) CYCLES / SEC: 50 (+/-) 3%
12 COOLING WATER SUPPLY TEMP (°C): PRESS: FLOW (M³/HR):
13 SEALING WATER SUPPLY TEMP (°C): PRESS: FLOW (M³/HR):
14 STEAM SUPPLY TEMP (°C): PRESS: FLOW (Kg/HR):
TECHNICAL DATA
15 DESIGN TEMP. (°C) 65 DESIGN PRESSURE (Kg/cm²g) *
16 MANUFACTURER: * IMPELLER TYPE: * MOUNTING: *
17 MODEL NO.: * IMPELLER DIA RATED: * MAX.: * MIN.: *
(M):
18 SPEED: * BEARING TYPE: * JACKETED: NA
19 TYPE OF GLAND OR SEAL: GLAND PACKING ROTATION (FACING *
COUPLING):
PUMP & ACCESSORIES
20 PUMP EFFICIENCY (%) * FLUSHING PLAN NO. -

21 NO. OF STAGES * COUPLING TYPE DIRECTLY COUPLED
22 WK² OF IMPELLER * COUPLING SUPPLIED YES / NO YES
23 SHUT OFF HEAD (MLC) * TYPE OF COUPLING GUARD *
24 NPSH REQUIRED * TYPE OF BASE PLATE FABRICATED
25 MOMENT OF INERTIA, GD² * BASE PLATE SUPPLIER PUMP VENDOR
(kg/m²)
26 CW REQUIRED (M³/HR) * SEALING WATER REQD. (M³/HR) *
27 CW PRES. (Kg/Cm²-G) * SW PRESS. REQD. (Kg/Cm²-G) *
28 HYD. TEST PRESS. * SUCTION - NB FLG STD. *
29 TYPE OF LUBRICATION * DISCHARGE - NB FLG STD. *
30 VENT COCK SUPPLIED YES / NO * GEAR / BELT TYPE NA
31 DRAIN COCK SUPPLIED YES / NO *
32 TYPE * MAKE * SPEED *
DRIVER
33 EFFICIENCY (%) * DRIVER COOLING ARRGMNT. *

34 ABSORBED POWER * MAXIMUM: _____ KW INSTALLED: *
35 STARTING TORQUE * FULL LOAD TORQUE *
MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION
36 CASING CI TO IS:210 FG260 BEARING HOUSING CI TO FG 220
37 IMPELLER CF8M CASING WEAR RING CI TO FG 220
38 SHAFT EN8 GLAND OR SEAL CI TO FG 220
39 SHAFT SLEEVE SS 410 GLAND SLEEVE *
40 COLUMN PIPE - LANTERN RING *
41 NECK BUSH * BASE PLATE MS FABRICATED
GENERAL
42 GA DRAWING NUMBER * TOTAL WEIGHT (Kg) *
43 PERFORMANCE CURVE NO. * ORDER NUMBER -
149
RAJASTHAN
NOTES:
1. ‘*’ Denotes data to be provided by the vendor.

2. Pump shall be as per IS 5120 & shall be designed for continuous service.
be acceptable.
rated flow is 0.5 Mtr. Or less are not acceptable. It should be at least 1.0 (3.3 ft)
5. Casing drain pipe with flanged valve up to the edge of the base plate shall be in
pump manufacturer's scope of supply. Liquid velocity at suction nozzle shall be < =
4.5 m/s.
7. The pump couplings shall be of forged steel and non-lubricated, laminated disc
type, with stainless steel / monel laminations. The selected coupling shall have a
service factor not less 1.5 over motor name plate rating. A spacer coupling of
minimum normal length (127 mm) shall be used unless otherwise specified, the
spacer length shall permit the removal of coupling, bearing, seal and / or rotor as
applicable without disturbing the drive or the suction and discharge piping.
9. The head capacity curve for the pump shall be of continuously rising type up to
shut off with a minimum shut off head of 105% for single pump working and for
parallel operation it shall be minimum of 110% but not exceeding 120% of the head
at best efficiency point for rated impeller.
10. The minimum continuous stable flow shall be indicated on the pump. H Q curve
and corresponding head and NPSHR for this point shall also be mention.
150
RAJASTHAN
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PROGRESSIVE CAVITY PUMP (SCREW TYPE – POSITIVE

DISPLACEMENT TYPE)
1.0 GENERAL
inquiry / order describes and constitutes the minimum requirement for Positive
Displacement pumps - Screw and their accessories / auxiliaries for use in the process
& pipeline applications. The intent of these requirements is to supplement the
requirements as given in data sheets, other specifications and other applicable codes
/ standards referred to in data sheets / specifications.
requirements of this specification and other aforesaid specifications /attachments to
supplied in accordance with API-676 (latest edition), data sheets, specifications and
1.4.2 P & ID / SLD
151
RAJASTHAN
1.4.3 Data Sheets
In case any issue still remains unresolved, the most stringent requirement shall apply.
not specified by Company but requirements of API-676 call for purchaser decision on
these matters.

materials and workmanship to meet the specified start up and
1.7 Operating conditions. In case Contractor / vendor considers requirement of additional

instrumentation, controls, safety devices and any other accessories / auxiliaries
essential for safe and satisfactory operation of the equipment, he shall recommend
the same along with reasons in a separate section along with his offer and include the
same in his scope of supply.
1.8 Pump vendor shall be a regular and established manufacturer of Screw pumps.
pumps conforming to API standard.
pump vendor. Vendors / manufacturer’s catalogue and general reference list shall be
152
RAJASTHAN
1.12 Since this reference list will be used for establishing proven-ness of proposed model
for operating under specified operating conditions, it is in vendor’s own interest to
select such reference, where the proposed model is supplied and operating at
conditions similar to those specified for item against which the proposed model is
offered. In addition, manufacturer’s catalogue and general reference list for the
pump shall also be furnished.
supply.
2.1.1 The screw pump(s) covered by this specification shall be designed,

• Design Basis
153
RAJASTHAN
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
3.1 GENERAL
Contractor shall furnish completely filled in data sheets for each screw pump as per
API 676 for Company’s review and approval. Contractor shall supply all necessary
equipment specified for the package / unit and auxiliary systems and all other
requirements in accordance with this specifications. Any equipment that is necessary
to make a complete, operable, safe and dependable package / unit but not
specifically identified herein shall also be in Contractor’s scope of supply. The scope
of supply for each screw pump unit shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the
following:
• Pump & Driver

• Safety valve (externally mounted – loose supply)
connections, terminating at the edge of the baseplate / skid.
• Pump by-pass line with a valve.
• Any additional piping, instrumentation or accessories necessitated nominated by
this specification or as shown within the package limits on nominated P&ID
drawings.
• Spare parts recommended for one year of operation included in offered price.
• All documentation as specified in this specification and as listed in the Company’s
procurement documentation
154
RAJASTHAN
All the above components shall be mounted on a common structural skid fully
appropriately rated flanges, wired, tested and painted for corrosive environment.
Contractor shall be responsible for the complete design, engineering, coordination,
testing, delivery and proper functioning of the equipment, notwithstanding any
omissions from this specification.
3.2 TECHNICAL DATA OF SCREW PUMPS (HORIZONTAL)
Sl. Technical Technical data

No. Specification
1 Pump Tag. No. P- 100-C P- 200-D

2 Service Fluid MS HSD
3 Quantity 1 1
4 Type Horizontal Horizontal
Twin Screw pump Twin Screw pump
5 Density 720-775 820-845
6 Capacity 120 120
7 Differential 55 55
Head
8 Type of driver Electric motor Electric motor
(FLP) (FLP)
9 Driver speed 1500 1500
10 Type of Mechanical Mechanical
gland/seal seal seal
3.3 TECHNICAL DATA OF SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS

No. Specification
1 Pump Tag. No. P- 101- D P- 201-D P-201 -E P- 300- P-400A
A/B/C/D
/E
2 Service Fluid MS HSD HSD ETHANOL Slop
3 Quantity Nos. 1 1 1 5 1
4 Type Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertica
Vertical Centrif Centrifug Centrifu l
Centrifu ugal al gal Centrif
155
RAJASTHAN
gal ugal
5 Density Kg/m3 720-775 820- 820- 789 1000
845 845
6 Capacity m3/hr 30 30 5 30 10
7 Differential mlc 60 60 25 60 30
Head
8 Shut-off head mlc * * * * *
9 Pump speed RPM 1500 or 1500 or 1500 or 1500 or 1500 or
3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
10 NPSH mlc Flooded Flooded Flooded Flooded Flooded
(available)
11 NPSH (required) mlc * * * * *
Type of Flexible Flexible Flexible Flexible Flexible
coupling
Type of driver Electric Electric Electric Electric Inductio
motor motor motor motor n Motor
(FLP) (FLP) (FLP) (FLP) with FLP
Driver rating KW * * * * *
Type of Mecha Mec Mecha Mecha Mecha
gland/seal nical han nical nical nical
seal ical seal seal seal
seal
Suction/ mm / * * * * *
discharge mm
nozzle dia
Material of
construction -
Casing Carbon Carbon Carbon Carbon Carbon
steel steel steel steel steel
Impeller Cast Cast Cast Cast Cast
iron iron iron iron iron
Shaft Carbon Carbon Carbon Carbon Carbon
steel steel steel steel steel
Shaft sleeve * * * * *
Baseplate MS MS MS MS MS
fabricat fabricat fabricat fabricat fabricat
ed ed ed ed ed
Notes:
1. “ * “ denotes data to be provided by vendor
2. Pumps shall be designed as per API 610
3. Shaft sealing system for the pumps shall be designed as per API 682
4. The noise level shall not exceed 85 dBA at a distance of 1.0 m from the equipment
5. Suction specific speed shall be limited within 8500 (USCS Units)
6. Mandatory spares for 2 years O & M shall be provided
156
RAJASTHAN
The climatic and other conditions under which the equipment will operate are
detailed in the process package (design criteria) of the bidding document. Conditions
specific to the Equipment Package shall be detailed on individual equipment data
sheets. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all equipment and components
provided are suitable for the utility and environmental conditions as specified during
the entire design life.
Electrical and Instrumentation will be rated for the applicable Hazardous Area
classification according to API RP500.
5.0 BASIC DESIGN
Contractor’s standard design shall be capable of meeting the performance

descriptions to Company during the tendering process. Except where amended by the
data sheets or this specification, the design of Positive Displacement pumps shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the latest edition of Standard API – 676.
This shall include the following details –
1. Process parameters are given in the Data Sheet attached with this specification.
2. Type of Pump: Horizontal Progressive Cavity Single Screw Pump with built in Gear
Box and Capacity Control Mechanism.
3. Motor: As per standard data sheet.
4. Design, Construction & Testing Code: API 676 (Latest Edition).
5. Joint between Shaft & Rotor – Universal Joint.
6. Rotor: Rotor to be made of Hardened Steel or Stainless Steel and are covered with
a Chrome Plating to give resistance to corrosive and abrasive materials. Some
157
RAJASTHAN
liquid affects the Chrome Plating and in those applications a Non-Plated Rotor
should be used.
7. Stator: Stators are metal tubes with internally molded cavities of Synthetic or
Natural Rubber.
8. Mounting: Foot mounting
5.1 PRESSURE CASINGS
The hoop-stress values used in the design of the casing shall not exceed the maximum
allowable stress values in tension specified in section VIII, division 1, of the ASME code
at the maximum operating temperature of the material used. The maximum allowable
working pressure of the casing shall be at least equal to the specified relief valve
setting. The relief valve setting shall exceed the rated discharge pressure by at least
10 percent or 1.7 bar (25 psi), which is greater.
5.2 CASING CONNECTIONS
Inlet and outlet connections shall be flanged or machined and studded, and oriented
as specified. If threaded connections are standard, they may be used for NPS 11/2 and
smaller. The inlet connection shall be rated for the maximum allowable inlet working
pressure. The outlet connection shall be rated for the maximum allowable outlet
working pressure, the vendor will specify if higher inlet connection flange ratings are
required or if threaded connections NPS 11/2 and smaller are prohibited.
5.3 ROTATING ELEMENTS
Stationary and moving pumping elements shall be designed and fabricated of material
to prevent galling. Rotating parts shall be properly aligned. Internal loads shall be
fully supported by the use of such means as hydraulic balance, bearings or bushings.
Rotors and shafts shall be of sufficient stiffness and material compatibility to prevent
wear between the rotor bodies and the casing, and between gear-timed rotor bodies
at the most unfavorable specified conditions, including 110 percent of the relief-valve
set pressure. Rotor bodies not integral with the shaft shall be permanently fixed to
the shaft to prevent unintended relative motion under any operating condition. Rotor
158
RAJASTHAN
and shafts shall be of materials that have corrosion and erosion resistance compatible
with the application.
5.3 MECHANICAL SEALS
Mechanical seals shall be of the single-balanced type (one rotating face per seal
chamber) with either a sliding gasket or a bellows between the axially movable face
and the shaft sleeve or housing. Mechanical Seal shall be as per API 682 – Shaft Sealing
Systems for Centrifugal & Rotary Pumps.
The standard does not cover the design of the component parts of mechanical seals:
however, the design and materials of the component parts shall be suitable for the
specified service conditions. The manufacturer shall advice the vendor of the
maximum sealing pressure and the maximum dynamic and static pressure ratings of
the seal.
If Seal flushing and cooling is provided by the pumped fluid, the pump vendor shall
ensure that sufficient flow reaches the primary seal faces to provide for cooling and
maintenance of a stable film at the seal faces.
5.4 BEARINGS
Antifriction bearings shall have a L-10 rated life of either 25000 hours with continuous
operation at rated conditions, or 16000 hours at maximum axial and radial loads and
rated speed.
5.5 LUBRICATION
Unless otherwise specified, bearings and bearing housings shall be arranged for
hydrocarbon oil lubrication. When specified, oil-lubricated bearings in separate
housings shall be furnished with constant-level oilers.
6.0 WARRANTY
Vendor shall have final and total responsibility for the design and mechanical
performance of all equipment supplied under this specification. Vendor shall warrant
the equipment furnished by him and the performance of the said equipment in
159
RAJASTHAN
accordance with this specification and with warranty requirements given elsewhere in
bid package.
7.0 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS:
7.1 SPARE PARTS
Vendor shall provide spare parts needed for start-up and commissioning. Vendor shall
also furnish a separate itemized list of recommended spares for one year normal op-
eration and maintenance included in offered price. Lists shall include part number,
part description, serial number and normal delivery lead time. Contractor shall
ensure listed parts are available for shipment at the time of equipment
shipment. Recommended spares should take into account related factors of
equipment reliability, effect of equipment downtime upon production or safety, cost
of parts and availability of equipment service facilities. All spare parts furnished by
Vendor should be wrapped and packaged so that they will be preserved in original as
new condition under the normal conditions of storage to be anticipated in India.
Spare parts shall be properly tagged and coded so that later identification as to in-
tended equipment usage will be facilitated. They shall be packaged separately,
clearly marked as “spare parts” and shipped at the same time as the equipment.
Packing lists shall be furnished so that the parts can be handled without uncrating,
if required. Start-up spares shall be packed and identified separately.
7.2 TOOLS
Vendor shall provide two sets of special tools or fixtures as required, for installation /
erection, operation & maintenance and disassembly of the furnished equipment. All
such tools shall be permanently tagged with information pertaining to their use. Any
special drawings or instructions pertaining to the use of such tools shall be included in
the instruction manual.
After final Testing and approval, the assembly shall be drained of water and dried. All
items shall be properly packed and protected against damage during shipment. Each
crate, bag or package shall be clearly identified with the purchase order number and
identification symbol and shall be securely fastened to the package. Exposed surfaces
shall be coated with an easily removable rust preventative. All flanged opening shall
160
RAJASTHAN
be protected with steel plate covers attached by proper bolting and sealed with
plastic compound. All electrical control enclosures shall be properly plugged at entries
and loaded with silica gel bags where necessary. The contractor shall state in their
proposal their recommendations for long term storage (up to 12 months) for both
indoor and outdoor storage in a corrosive environment.
All the pumps shall be inspected & tested at the supplier’s works before delivery as
per API 676. All the tests shall be arranged by the supplier free of cost at his works.
The supplier shall submit the Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) detailing the tests offered
along-with the quotation.
Following tests to be carried out:

pressure
• All casting shall be subjected to surface inspection after suitably cleaning and
chipping and or abrasive blasting. Those shall be subject to visual inspection prior
to specific NDT and be proven free from sand, scale, cracks, tears, voids and other
harmful defects.
dBA
pump of each model/capacity.
• Dynamic balancing of rotor & assembled motor for one pump in each model /
capacity.
• Vibration levels for one pump in each model/capacity.
common base frame.
• FLP motors.
161
RAJASTHAN
10.0 VENDOR DATA
Contractor shall provide all information as specified in the Company’s Procurement


ORDER DATA BOOK
offered Model.
4 GA drawing for pump, driver & accessories including Yes R Yes
dimensional outline.
5 Auxiliary system schematic diagram – cooling and lube Yes R Yes
oil (as applicable)
6 Cross-sectional Yes I Yes
8 Mechanical seal R Yes
instrumentation.
13 Torsional vibration and critical speed Calculation. I Yes
drawings.
162
RAJASTHAN
LEGEND:
I - INFORMATION, R- REVIEW, * at the time of inspection.
stated conditions.
163
RAJASTHAN
TYPICAL DATA SHEET FOR SCREW PUMP
TAG NO.: * SERVICE: * NUMBER REQD: *

DESIGN CODE: API 676 (Latest edition)
PUMP TYPE: PROGRESSIVE CAVITY SCREW PUMP INSTALLATION: OUTDOOR DUTY: CONTINUOUS
OPERATING CONDITIONS
LIQUID HANDLED: * NPSH REQUIRED: *
PUMPING TEMP., °C * SUCTION STATIC HEAD, MLC *
CAPACITY (MAX) M³/HR * DISCHARGE STATIC HEAD, MLC *
CAPACITY (NOR) M³/HR * PUMP SPEED 150 0
CAPACITY (MIN) M³/HR * ROTOR DIAMETER *
SUCTION PRESSURE, KG/CM² * RATED POWER CONP., KW *
DISCHARGE PRESSURE, KG/CM² * DRIVER RATING, KW *
DIFF HEAD AT RATED CAPACITY, MLC * DRIVER SPEED, RPM (Full load) *
NPSH AVAILABLE, MLC FLOODED MIN. CONT. FLOW, M³/HR *
VAP. PR AT P.T., KG/CM² * MAX. PRESS, KG/CM² *
VISCOSITY AT P.T., CP * EFFICIENCY, (%) *
SPECIFIC GRAVITY * SUCTION PIPE LENGTH, M *
CORROSIVITY * DISCHARGE PIPE LENGTH, M *
DESIGN PRESSURE, KG/CM² *
DESIGN TEMP., °C *
CONTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
TYPE: PROGRESSIVE CAVITY SCREW MAX. ALLOW CASING PR., KG/CM²: * SIZE: *
PUMP
DRIVE SYSTEM * HYDRO TEST PR., KG/CM²: * COOLING / *
SHAFT SEALING * NOZZ. SIZE * DISCHARGE * LUBRICATING
SUCTION: MEDIUM:
RELIEF VALVE * RATING: ASA 150# MECHANICAL YES
SEAL:
RELIEF VALVE SET PRESSURE * FACING: RF SPECIAL *
FEATURE:
POSITION END & TOP
SUC & DISCH:
DRIVER MOTOR DETAILS
DRIVER: ELECTRIC MOTORS RPM: 1500
TYPE: SQUIRREL CAGE INDUCTION MOTOR LOCATION: OUTDOOR
VOLTAGE / PHASE / FREQUENCY: 415 V +/- 10%, 3 PHASE, 50 Hz +/- 3% INSULATION CLASS CLASS “F”, (TEMP RISE UP TO CLASS-
B).
MOTOR MANUFACTURER: CROMPTON / KIRLOSKAR / BHARAT BIJLEE / ABB / SIEMENS, EFF. CLASS - 2. TB - METALLIC.
MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION
CASING: * ROTOR SHAFT: *
SHAFT SLEEVE: * COUPLING *
STATOR: * RELIEF VALVE: *
STATOR SLEEVE: * GASKET: *
BEARINGS: *
164
RAJASTHAN
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-ME-SP-004 Rev: 00 Date: 14-01-2019
NOTE:
1. “*” Denotes data to be provided by vendor.

2. Pumps shall be designed as per API 676 (Latest Edition).
3. The motor KW shall be suitable for at least 110 percent of the relief valve setting.
be acceptable.
5. Anchor foundation bolts with special grouting mixture recommended by the
manufacturer for grouting of these bolts and pump motor base frames shall be
provided.
rated flow is 0.5 Mtr. Or less are not acceptable. It should be at least 1.0 m (3.3 ft)
Part - 4
Associated Drawings/
Datasheets/ Specifications
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
4.1
Supply, Fabrication, erection, testing &
commissioning of all vertical storage
tanks & Underground horizontal tanks
including Foundation
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GAD for Tanks
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
Datasheet for MS Tanks
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
RAJASTHAN
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-011 Rev: 01 Date: 02.01.2019
DATA SHEET (MS)
Rev Date Description Prepared Reviewed Approved Client Review
01 02.01.2019 ISSUED FOR REVIEW JK PP/DB SKJ

00 19.12.2018 ISSUED FOR REVIEW JK PP SKJ
Page 1 of 4
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET (MS)

SIZE 16 M. DIA X 15 M. HEIGHT – 2500 KL
Status:  Tender  Order  As Built

Service MS Type of Tank Fixed Cone Roof with Aluminium IFD
GENERAL
Location Nominal Diameter 16 m

Number of Tanks 3 Overall Height 15 m
Equipment Tag Number TK-100A/B/C Safe Capacity m³ 2500
Design capacity m³ 3000
Medium MS Design Liquid Sp. gr. 1.00
Specific Gravity 0.720 - 0.780 Design Liquid Level 15.0 m
Viscosity Cst 0.5 – 1.0 @38 °C Tank Heating / Cooling Not Required
Flash Point °C <10 Nozzle Heating Not Required
Reid Vapour Pressure Kg/cm² 0.61 @38 °C Heating / Cooling Medium Nil
Corrosivity Heat load (Kw/hr.) Nil
PROCESS
Filling Rate m³/hr 550 Tank Mixers Not Required

Emptying Rate m³/hr 360 Water Draw off Sump Yes
Storage Temp. °C 40 Tank Gauging Dual Gauge
Storage Pressure kPa ATMOSPHERIC Nitrogen Blanketing Not Required
Design (Vacuum) Pressure MM WC 25 Ambient – Temp °C 40
Design (Positive) Pressure MM WC FULL OF LIQUID Atmos. Press. kPa 100
Design Temp. °C 80 Vapour Space mm 5%
Design & Const. Code API-650 12TH EDITION. MARCH 2013 Cathodic Protection NO
Addendum 3. August 2018
Shell Design Method One Foot Method Insulation Thickness (mm) Not Applicable
Design Wind Speed (m/sec) 33.3 Not Applicable
Seismic Code / Zone As per APP. E /O (Outside Seismic Zone) Finishing & Painting Shell: Refer Painting Specification
Foundation Type Ring Beam Roof: Refer Painting Specification
Corrosion Allowance mm 1.5 mm for Shell, Bottom Bottom: Refer Painting Specification
Joint Efficiency 1 Hydro test: By Contractor
MECHANICAL
Insulation Not Applicable

Tank Bottom Type Cone down to Centre External
Hand - Railing Spiral Stairway & All around the roof Access Landing Platform
Clean Out Door NO
Tank Roof Type Fixed Cone with Aluminium IFD Earthing Boss 2 Nos.
Slope Roof 1 in 12 Lightning protection NO
Bottom 1 in 100 WEIGHT
Stiffening Rings Required As per Code Empty Weight (MT) 80 (Without IFR)
Inspection & Testing Hydro Test Level Upto Full Level Operating Weight (MT) 2405 (Without IFR)
Radiography As per Section 8 & Fig. 8.1 of API 650 Test Weight (MT) 3080 (Without IFR)
Stress Relieving As per code
Level Gauge Yes Gauge Hatch Yes
Spiral Stairway Yes Name Plate Yes
*ACCESSORIES
Hand Railing (On Roof) Yes Atmospheric Vent Assembly Yes

Earth Connection Yes Foam System No
Platform at Roof Yes Instrumentation Yes
Foam Pourer Platform No
Water Sprinkler Yes
BOTTOM, SHELL, ROOF & REINFORCEMENT A 36 / IS:2062 Gr. B STAIRWAY PLATFORM AND STRUCTURAL A 36/ A 53
PLATE
SHELL / ROOF NOZZLE NECK UPTO 250 NB A 106 Gr. B HAND RAILING A 53
NOZZLE FLANGES A 105 GRATINGS CS GALV.
MAN-HOLE NECK / FLANGE / COVER PLATE A 36 GAUGE WELL / STILL WELL / SLEEVE A 106 Gr. B / A 53/ A 36
MATERIALS
BOLTING FOR NOZZLES A 193 Gr. B7 / A 194 Gr.2H FITTINGS A 234 Gr. WPB
BOLTING FOR STRUCTURES A 193 Gr. B7 / A 194 Gr.2H NAME PLATE / BRACKET SS 304 / A 36
LEG PIPE SUPT. / SLEEVE A 106 Gr. B EARTHING CONN. AS PER SPECIFICATIONS
INTERNALS A 36 / A 106 Gr. B / SS304 GASKETS (PERMANENT) SS 316 Spiral Wound Graphite Filled
STRUCTURES AND EXTERNALS (GUSSETS) A 36 SHELL / ROOF NOZZLE NECK ABOVE 250 NB A 36
ANCHOR BOLTS / NUTS A 307 Gr. B / A 563 Gr. A
* - Free vents to be designed for flow rate 600 Kl/hr.
Page 2 of 4
RAJASTHAN
NOTE 1
NOZZLE INDEX
MARK. SERVICE QTY. NOM. SIZE SCH. THK. RATING / DESCRIPTION
(mm) TYPE
M1/2 SHELL MANHOLE 2 750 AS PER CODE WITH COVER
N1 INLET 1 300 SCH XS 150/RF
N2 OUTLET 1 300 SCH XS 150/RF
N3 PRODUCT DRAW OFF/DRAIN 1 100 SCH XS 150/RF
N4 RECIRCULATION LINE NOZZLE WITH JET MIXER 1 250 SCH XS 150/RF
N5 PRESSURE RELIEF LINE 1 25 SCH XS 150/RF
N6 VRU 1 100 SCH XS 150/RF
N7 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 1 80 SCH XS 150/RF
MH2A/B ROOF MANHOLE WITH COVER 2 600 AS PER CODE
N8 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 1 50 SCH 40 150/RF
N 11A-D VENT 4 150 SCH 40 150/RF
N9 TEMPERATURE ELEMENT (INSIDE 16” SLEEVE PIPE 1 80 SCH 40 150/RF
WITH STILL WELL PIPE)
N10 LEVEL TRANSMITTER (INSIDE 16” SLEEVE PIPE WITH 1 200 SCH 40 150/RF
STILL WELL PIPE)
N12 LEVEL TRANSMITTER 1 200 SCH 40 150/RF
N13 LEVEL SWITCH (INSIDE 16” SLEEVE PIPE) 1 80 SCH 40 150/RF
N14 DIP HATCH WITH STILL WELL 1 200 SCH 40 150/RF
N15 SPARE 1 100 SCH 40 150/RF
N17 STILL WELL 1 500 SCH 40 150/RF
Page 3 of 4
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET – MS STORAGE TANKS
NOTES
1. All dimensions are in MM unless otherwise specified.

2. Nozzles above 2” NB shall be provided with reinforcement pads as per API-650. Reinforcing pads shall have tell-tale holes OF ¼” Ø. These pads shall
be air tested at 1.05 kg/cm2 (g), with soap solution & there after filled with hard grease in line with API 650 code.
3. All bolt holes in nozzle flanges & manholes to be straddle center lines of tank & nozzle
4. All tolerances shall be as per clause 7.5 of API – 650
5. All F.P weld to be chipped back to sound metal on the second side & rewelded.
6. Three plates joints on bottom shall not be closer than 300 mm from 1) Each other & 2) Tank Shell
7. All erection lugs & cleats to be removed before hydro test.
8. Curb angle joints shall stagger with shell joints at least by 300 mm.
9. Prj. Of nozzle shall be measured from intersection of nozzle axis & outer surface of shell/roof.
10. All weld spatters & large weld beads should be removed by grinding.
11. Flange gasket surfaces shall be 125 AARH finish
12. Calibration & strapping shall be done in accordance with IS 2550 & 2555 or equivalent.
13. Nozzles 2” NB & below shall be provided with 2 stiffener flats of size 40 W * 8 THK at 90° apart.
14. All nozzle flanges shall be of ASME B16.5 class 150# up to 24” NB & flanges shall be on both end of nozzle flange.
15. Water to be filled up to curb angle during hydro testing of tank.
16. All sharp corners to be rounded off.
17. Nozzles above 10” NB may be fabricated from plate with 100% radiography for welded seams.
18. Wherever the weld distance on nozzle opening or R.F pad does not comply the requirement of clause no. 5.7.2 same shall be as per fig. 5.9 of API-
650.
19. Painting of tank shall be as per project specification.
20. Testing requirement:
Bottom Plate: By partial vacuum T 3-5 P.S.I.G
Shell Weld: Radiography as per API-650 Fig.8.1
Nozzle Pad on Shell only: By air pressure at 15 P.S.I.G
Shell to Bottom: By kerosene oil & chalk method. As per API-650 Clause no. 7.2.4.3
Tank Shell: By filling water up to curb angle
Fixed Roof: As per API-650 Clause no. 7.3.7
21. Electrodes: E-6013: Plates up to 12mm thick
E-7018: Plates up to 12.5mm thick and above and shell to annular joint
Page 4 of 4
Datasheet for HSD Tanks
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET (HSD)

Page 1 of 4
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET (HSD)

Status: • Tender  Order  As Built

Service HSD Type of Tank Fixed Cone Roof
GENERAL

Equipment Tag Number TK-200A/B/C Safe Capacity m³ 7000
Medium HSD Design Liquid Sp. gr. 1.00
Specific Gravity 0.820 – 0.880 Design Liquid Level 19.0 m
Viscosity Cst 38 °C Tank Heating / Cooling Not Required
Flash Point °C 35 – 65 °C Nozzle Heating Not Required
Reid Vapour Pressure Kg/cm² 0.02 @38 °C Heating / Cooling Medium Nil
PROCESS
Filling Rate m³/hr. 1100 Tank Mixers Not Required

Emptying Rate m³/hr. 720 Water Draw off Sump Yes
Storage Temp. °C 40 Tank Gauging dual gauge
Foundation Type Sand Pad Foundation Roof: Refer Painting Specification
MECHANICAL

Clean Out Door NO
Tank Roof Type Fixed Cone Earthing Boss 3 Nos.
Stiffening Rings Required As per Code Empty Weight (MT) 221
Inspection & Testing Hydro Test Level Upto Full Level Operating Weight (MT) 8094.21
Radiography As per Section 8 & Fig. 8.1 of API 650 Test Weight (MT) 8094.21
*ACCESSORIES

Earth Connection Yes Foam System Yes
Platform at Roof Yes Instrumentation Yes
Foam Pourer Platform Yes
Water Sprinkler Yes
BOTTOM, SHELL, ROOF & REINFORCEMENT IS 2062 Gr. B STAIRWAY PLATFORM AND STRUCTURAL IS 2062 Gr A/B
PLATE
SHELL / ROOF NOZZLE NECK UPTO 250 NB A 106 Gr. B HAND RAILING IS 2062 Gr A/B
NOZZLE FLANGES A 105 GRATINGS CNAF

MAN-HOLE NECK / FLANGE / COVER PLATE IS 2062 Gr. B GAUGE WELL / STILL WELL / SLEEVE SA 106 Gr. B
MATERIALS
BOLTING FOR NOZZLES A 193 Gr. B7 / A 194 Gr.2H FITTINGS SA 234 Gr. WPB
BOLTING FOR STRUCTURES IS 1363 NAME PLATE / BRACKET SS 304 / A 36
LEG PIPE SUPT. / SLEEVE A 106 Gr. B EARTHING CONN. IS 2062 Gr B
INTERNALS IS 2062 Gr. B/ SS GASKETS (PERMANENT) SS 316 Spiral Wound Graphite Filled
STRUCTURES AND EXTERNALS (GUSSETS) IS 2062 Gr B SHELL / ROOF NOZZLE NECK ABOVE 250 NB IS 2062 Gr. B
ANCHOR BOLTS / NUTS IS 2062 Gr. B FOAM SYSTEM PIPES AS PER SPECIFICATION
Page 2 of 4
RAJASTHAN
NOTE 1
NOZZLE INDEX
(mm) TYPE
MH1/2 SHELL MANHOLE 2 750 AS PER CODE WITH COVER
N3 DRAIN 1 100 SCH XS 150/RF
N4 RECIRCULATION 1 250 SCH XS 150/RF
N6 PRODUCT DRAW OFF 1 150 SCH XS 150/RF
N7 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 1 80 SCH XS 150/RF
N16 A/B/C FOAM POURER WITH DEFLECTOR 1 200 SCH XS 150/RF
M 3/4 ROOF MANHOLE WITH COVER 2 600 AS PER CODE
N5 PRESSURE RELIEF LINE (INSIDE 16” SLEEVE PIPE) 1 25 SCH 40 150/RF
N8 SPARE 1 100 SCH 40 150/RF
N 11A-D VENT -1 4 150 SCH 40 150/RF
N9 TEMPERATURE ELEMENT (INSIDE 16” SLEEVE PIPE 1 80 SCH 40 150/RF
WITH STILL WELL PIPE)
N10 LEVEL TRANSMITTER (INSIDE 16” SLEEVE PIPE WITH 1 200 SCH 40 150/RF
STILL WELL PIPE)
N12 LEVEL TRANSMITTER 1 200 SCH 40 150/RF
N13 LEVEL SWITCH (INSIDE 16” SLEEVE PIPE) 1 80 SCH 40 150/RF
N14 DIP HATCH WITH STILL WELL 1 200 SCH 40 150/RF
Page 3 of 4
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET – HSD STORAGE TANKS
NOTES

9. Prj. Of nozzle shall be measured from intersection of nozzle axis & outer surface of shell/roof.
650.
Page 4 of 4
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET (HSD)

Page 1 of 4
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET (HSD)

SIZE 2.11 M. DIA X 6.266 M. HEIGHT – 20 KL

Service High Speed Diesel Type of Tank Underground Cylindrical Horizontal
GENERAL
Location Pali Nominal Diameter 2250 mm

Number of Tanks 1 Length 5500 mm
Equipment Tag Number TK – 200E Net Capacity (pump volume) m³ 20
Medium High Speed Diesel Design Liquid Sp. gr. 1.00
Specific Gravity 0.820 - 0.845 Design Liquid Level 1850
Viscosity Cst 2.0 - 7.0 @38 °C Tank Heating / Cooling Not Required
Reid Vapour Pressure kPa 0.02 @38 °C Heating / Cooling Medium Nil
Corrosivity 0.1 @38 °C Heat load (Kw/hr.) Nil
PROCESS
Filling Rate By Gravity Tank Mixers Not Required

Storage Temp. °C 40 Tank Gauging Single Gauge
Operating Level mm 1850 Ambient – Temp °C 40
Design Pressure kPa ATMOSPHERIC + FULL OF LIQUID Atmos. Press. kPa 100
Design Temp. °C 65 Vapour Space mm 500
Design & Const. Code IS 10987 (LATEST EDITION) Cathodic Protection NO
Shell Design Method Insulation Thickness (mm) Not Applicable
Design Wind Speed (Km/hr.) Not Applicable
Seismic Code / Zone IS:1893-2002 Ed. /II Finishing & Painting Shell: Refer Painting Specification
Foundation Type Holding Down bolt & RCC Beam Roof: Refer Painting Specification
Corrosion Allowance mm 1.5 mm for Shell, End Plate Bottom: Refer Painting Specification
Joint Efficiency AS Per Code Hydro test: As per code By Contractor
MECHANICAL
Tank Bottom Type External
Tank Roof Type Access Yes

Slope Roof NA Hand - Railing NO – Internal Hard Railing
Bottom NA
Stiffening Rings As per Code
Inspection & Testing Hydro Test Level Upto Full Level Clean Out Door NO
Radiography Spot Earthing Boss 2 Nos.
Stress Relieving NO Lightning protection NO
Level Gauge Yes. One Radar Gauge Gauge / Thief Hatch Yes
Emergency Vent (API2000) NO Stilling Well(s) NO
*ACCESSORIES
Press. / Vac. Vent (API2000) NO Side Entry Mixer(s) Not required

Vortex Breaker NO Foam System NO
Inlet Diffuser NO Deluge System NO
Floating suction NO Temp Av gauge in still well Yes
SHELL, END & REINFORCEMENT PLATE IS 2062 Gr. B PAD PLATE IS 2062 Gr. B
INTERNAL STIFFNER RING / ANGLE IS 2062 Gr. B WEAR PLATE IS 2062 Gr. B
NOZZLE FLANGES SA 105 GAUGE WELL / STILL WELL / SLEEVE
EARTHING CONN. IS 2062 Gr. A / B INTERNAL BOLTS IS 1367 CL. 4.6 / 4.0 OR SA 193 Gr. B7 /
194 Gr. 2H / IS 1363
MATERIALS
BOLTING FOR NOZZLES IS 1367 CL. 4.6 / 4.0 OR SA 193 Gr. B7 / PAD FOR LIFTING BOLT IS 2062 Gr. B
194 Gr. 2H
BOLTING FOR STRUCTURES IS 1363 NOZZLE SA 106 Gr. B / IS 2062 GR. B
BRACKET IS 2062 Gr. B
TOP PLATE IS 2062 Gr. B / SS
STRUCTURES AND EXTERNALS (GUSSETS) IS 2062 Gr. B
LIFTING BOLT IS 1363
Page 2 of 4
RAJASTHAN
NOTE 1
NOZZLE INDEX
(mm) TYPE
M1/2 SHELL MANHOLE 2 600 AS PER CODE WITH COVER
N3 TEMPERATURE ELEMENT 1 80 SCH XS 150/RF
N4 LEVEL TRANSMITTER 1 200 SCH XS 150/RF
N5 DIP HATCH 1 80 SCH XS 150/RF
N6 VENT 1 80 SCH XS 150/RF
N7 LEVEL SWITCH 1 80 AS PER CODE
N8 INLET DRAIN 1 80 SCH 40 150/RF
Page 3 of 4
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET – HSD STORAGE TANKS
NOTES
1. For storing Products listed under MS group in Data Sheet. All materials shall be compatible to the products listed under this Group.
2. Refer Data Sheet for Site Data
3. Drawings for tank, nozzles (including nozzle loads), etc. shall be approved by Engineer prior to any procurement / fabrication.
4. Corrosion allowance is applicable to all parts.
5. Painting External - shell, roof, bottom and accessories.
6. Painting Internal - as specified only.
7. Nozzle elevations for nozzles with piping connections to be as per Approved Contractor Piping GA.
8. Size, type and rating of flanges / fittings on the nozzles for instruments and gauge hatch etc., shall be to match with the corresponding approved
item. Gauge hatch cover to be of non-sparking type.
9. The accessories as identified in the data sheet shall be supplied and installed.
Page 4 of 4
Datasheet for FW Tanks
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET (FIRE WATER)


Service WATER Type of Tank Fixed Cone Roof
GENERAL

Equipment Tag Number TK-500A/B Safe Capacity m³ 3000
Medium WATER Design Liquid Sp. gr. 1.00
Specific Gravity 1.0 Design Liquid Level 13.0 m
Viscosity Cst 1.0 @38 °C Tank Heating / Cooling Not Required
Flash Point °C NA Nozzle Heating Not Required
Reid Vapour Pressure Kg/cm² 0.61 @ 38 °C Heating / Cooling Medium Nil
PROCESS
Filling Rate m³/hr. 200 Tank Mixers Not Required

Storage Temp. °C 40 Tank Gauging Single gauge
Foundation Type Sand Pad Foundation Roof: Refer Painting Specification
MECHANICAL

Clean Out Door NO
Tank Roof Type Fixed Cone Earthing Boss 2 Nos.
Stiffening Rings Required As per Code Empty Weight (MT) 86
Inspection & Testing Hydro Test Level Upto Full Level Operating Weight (MT) 3381
Radiography As per Section 8 & Fig. 8.1 of API 650 Test Weight (MT) 3381
*ACCESSORIES

Earth Connection Yes Foam System NA
Platform at Roof Yes Instrumentation NO
Foam Pourer Platform NA
Water Sprinkler NA
BOTTOM, SHELL, ROOF & REINFORCEMENT A 36 / IS:2062 Gr. B STAIRWAY PLATFORM AND STRUCTURAL A 36/ A 53
PLATE
SHELL / ROOF NOZZLE NECK UPTO 250 NB A 106 Gr. B HAND RAILING A 53
NOZZLE FLANGES A 105 GRATINGS CS GALV.

MATERIALS
MAN HOLE NECK / FLANGE / COVER PLATE A 36 GAUGE WELL / STILL WELL / SLEEVE A 106 Gr. B / A 53/ A 36
BOLTING FOR NOZZLES A 193 Gr. B7 / A 194 Gr. 2H FITTINGS A 234 Gr. WPB
BOLTING FOR STRUCTURES A 193 Gr. B7 / A 194 Gr. 2H NAME PLATE / BRACKET SS 304 / A 36
LEG PIPE SUPT. / SLEEVE A 106 Gr. B EARTHING CONN. AS PER SPECIFICATIONS
INTERNALS A 36 / A 106 Gr. B / SS304 GASKETS (PERMANENT) SS 316 Spiral Wound Graphite Filled
STRUCTURES AND EXTERNALS (GUSSETS) A 36 SHELL / ROOF NOZZLE NECK ABOVE 250 NB A 36
ANCHOR BOLTS / NUTS A 307 Gr. B / A 563 Gr. A
Page 2 of 4
RAJASTHAN
NOTE 1
NOZZLE INDEX
(mm) TYPE
MH1/2 SHELL MANHOLE 2 750 AS PER CODE WITH COVER
N3 LEVEL TRANSMITTER 1 200 SCH XS 150/RF
N4 OVERFLOW 1 150 SCH XS 150/RF
N5 RECIRCULATION LINE 1 300 SCH XS 150/RF
N7 SPARE 1 100 SCH XS 150/RF
M 3/4 ROOF MANHOLE WITH COVER 2 600 AS PER CODE
N8 DRAIN 1 100 SCH 40 150/RF
N 5A-D VENT 4 150 SCH 40 150/RF
Page 3 of 4
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET – FIRE WATER STORAGE TANKS
NOTES

9. Prj. Of nozzle shall be measured from intersection of nozzle axis & outer surface of shell / roof.
650.
Page 4 of 4
Datasheet for UG MS Tank
& HSD Tank (70KL)
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET AND SPECIFICATION FOR MS STORAGE

TANKS UNDERGROUND (70 KL)

Page 1 of 4
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET
SIZE 3.0 M. DIA X 10.5 M. LENGTH – 70 KL

Service MS Type of Tank Underground Cylindrical Horizontal
GENERAL

Equipment Tag Number TK – 100D Net Capacity (pump volume) m³ 70
Medium MS Design Liquid Sp. gr. 1.00
PROCESS

Emptying Rate m³/hr. ____ Water Draw off Sump Yes
Shell Design Method ____ Insulation Thickness (mm) Not Applicable
Design Wind Speed (Km/hr.) ____ Not Applicable
Seismic Code / Zone IS:1893-2002 Ed. / V Finishing & Painting Shell: Refer Painting Specification
MECHANICAL
Tank Bottom Type ____ External
Tank Roof Type ____ Access NO

Slope Roof NA Hand - Railing NO
Bottom NA
*ACCESSORIES

194 Gr. 2H / IS 1363
MATERIALS
194 Gr. 2H
Page 2 of 4
RAJASTHAN
NOTE 1
NOZZLE INDEX
MARK. SERVICE QTY. NOM. SIZE THK. SCH. RATING / TYPE
M1/2 Shell Manhole with cover 2 600 8 THK -
N1 Inlet 1 80 - 40 150/SORF
N2 Outlet 1 80 - 40 150/SORF
N3 Temperature element 1 80 - 40 150/SORF
N4 Level Transmitter (Radar Type) 1 200 - 40 150/SORF
N5 Dip hatch 1 80 - 40 150/SORF
N6 A/B Vent 2 80 - 40 150/SORF
N7 Level switch 1 80 - 80 150/SORF
N8 Pump Fixing Nozzle 1 600 - 40 150/SORF
N9 From VRU 1 25 - 40 150/SORF
DATA SHEET - MS UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK
Page 3 of 4
RAJASTHAN
NOTES
Page 4 of 4
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET AND SPECIFICATION FOR HSD STORAGE


Page 1 of 4
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET

Service High Speed Diesel Type of Tank Underground Cylindrical Horizontal
GENERAL

Equipment Tag Number TK – 200D Net Capacity (pump volume) m³ 70
Medium High Speed Diesel Design Liquid Sp. gr. 1.00
Corrosivity 0.1 @38 °C Heat load (Kw/hr.) Nil
PROCESS

MECHANICAL
Tank Roof Type ____ Access Yes

Slope Roof NA Hand - Railing NO – Internal Hard Railing
Bottom NA
*ACCESSORIES

194 Gr. 2H / IS 1363
MATERIALS
194 Gr. 2H
Page 2 of 4
RAJASTHAN
NOTE 1
NOZZLE INDEX
M1/2 Shell Manhole with cover 2 600 8 THK - -
N1 Inlet 1 80 - 40 150/SORF
N2 Outlet 1 80 - 40 150/SORF
N6 Vent 1 80 - 40 150/SORF
N8 Pump Nozzle 1 600 - 40 150/SORF
Page 3 of 4
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET - HSD UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK
NOTES
1. For storing Products listed under HSD group in Data Sheet. All materials shall be compatible to the products listed under this Group.
Page 4 of 4
Datasheet for UG Ethanol Tank
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET AND SPECIFICATION FOR ETHANOL

STORAGE TANKS UNDERGROUND (70 KL)

Page 1 of 4
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET

Service Ethanol Type of Tank Underground Cylindrical Horizontal
GENERAL

Equipment Tag Number TK – 300 A / B / C / D / E Net Capacity (pump volume) m³ 70
Medium Ethanol Design Liquid Sp. gr. 1.00
PROCESS

Emptying Rate m³/hr. ____ Water Draw off Sump Yes
Seismic Code / Zone IS:1893-2002 Ed. / V Finishing & Painting Shell: Refer Painting Specification
MECHANICAL
Tank Roof Type ____ Access NO

Slope Roof NA Hand - Railing NO
Bottom NA
*ACCESSORIES

194 Gr. 2H / IS 1363
MATERIALS
BOLTING FOR NOZZLES IS 1367 CL. 4.6 / 4.0 OR SA 193 Gr. B7 / PAD FOR LIFTING BOLT IS 2062Gr.B
194 Gr. 2H
Page 2 of 4
RAJASTHAN
NOTE 1
NOZZLE INDEX
M1/2 Shell Manhole with cover 2 600 8 THK -
N1 Inlet 1 80 - 40 150/SORF
N2 Outlet 1 80 - 40 150/SORF
N6 A/B Vent 2 80 - 40 150/SORF
N8 Pump Fixing Nozzle 1 600 - 40 150/SORF
Page 3 of 4
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET - MS UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK
NOTES
Page 4 of 4
Datasheet for Slop Tank
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET AND SPECIFICATION FOR SLOP STORAGE


Page 1 of 4
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET

Service SLOP Type of Tank Underground Cylindrical Horizontal
GENERAL

Equipment Tag Number TK – 400A Net Capacity (pump volume) m³ 10
Medium SLOP Design Liquid Sp. gr. 1.00
Specific Gravity 0.845 Design Liquid Level -
Viscosity Cst ____ Tank Heating / Cooling Not Required
Flash Point °C < 10 °C Nozzle Heating Not Required
Reid Vapour Pressure kPa ____ Heating / Cooling Medium Nil
PROCESS
Filling Rate Tank Mixers Not Required

Emptying Rate m³/hr. ____ Water Draw off Sump NO
Operating Level mm - Ambient – Temp °C 40
Foundation Type ____ Roof: Refer Painting Specification
MECHANICAL
Tank Roof Type ____ Access Yes

Slope Roof NA Hand - Railing NO – Internal Hand Railing
Bottom NA
Level Gauge NO Gauge / Thief Hatch Yes
*ACCESSORIES

Floating suction NO Temp Av gauge in still well NO
194 Gr. 2H / IS 1363
MATERIALS
194 Gr. 2H
BRACKET IS 2062 Gr. B Nozzle Thickness 50 mm to be of Sec 80
Page 2 of 4
RAJASTHAN
NOTE 1
NOZZLE INDEX
MARK. SERVICE QTY. NOM. SIZE SCH. / THK. RATING / TYPE DESCRIPTION
N1 Shell Manhole with cover 2 500 8 THK
N2 Tank Lorry Discharge/Fill Pipe 1 100 40/5.4 150/SORF
N4 Receipt Pipe 1 50 80/4.5 150/SORF
N5 Density Transmitter 1 80 80/4.5 150/SORF
N6 Vent 1 50 80/4.5 150/SORF
N7 Level Switch 1 80 40/5.4 150/SORF
N8 Blank Connection (Submersible Pump) 1 50 40/5.4 150/SORF
N9 Level Transmitter 1 150 40/5.4 150/SORF
Page 3 of 4
RAJASTHAN
DATA SHEET - SLOP UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK
NOTES
1. For storing Products listed under SLOP group in Data Sheet. All materials shall be compatible to the products listed under this Group.
Page 4 of 4
DATASHEET FOR 1000 / 500 L Foam Tank
1 Material MS (IS 2062) with FRP Lining

2 Thichness of shell 3 mm shell and flat end with 2 mm thkinternal
FRP lining
3 Capacity 1000 / 500 L
4 Type of Welding Joint efficiency 0.7 without radiography
5 Design Pressure Atmospheric
6 Hydrostaic Pressure Fill Test @ Atm Pressure
7 Drawing Given
8 Inspection manhole 500 dia. X 3 thk
9 Filling Connection 80 NB, Sch 40
10 Vent Valve 40 NB, Sch 40
11 Drain Valave 25 NB, 3000# Full coupling, Ball Valve
12 Supply Connection 25 NB, 3000# Full coupling, Ball Valve
13 Coupling for fixing level indicator 2 Nos. 15 NB 3000# half coupling given
14 Supporting Legs (Saddle) 2 - MS (IS 2062)
15 Lifting Lugs 4 Nos. - MS (IS 2062)
16 Access Ladder MS (IS 2062) Std
17 Level Indicator acrylic tube
18 Foam Pick up connection Given
19 Strainer VTS
20 Fittings for connecting to Monotor VTS
21 Finish External 2 coats of Epoxy primer and 2 coats of fire red
epoxy
22 Finish Internal 2 mm Thk FRP Lining
Welding Specification
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
RAJASTHAN
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR

WELDING

RAJASTHAN
CONTENTS
Sr. Description
No.
1 Field Weld Map and Descriptions
2 Welding Procedures Specifications (WPS)
3 Welding Repair Procedures
4 Welding Procedure Qualification Test (WPQT) and Procedures Qualification Record
(PQR)
NOTE:
All welding jobs will be executed ensuring that all the requirements of API 650 & ASME
Sec IX are complied with. However, some additional specific details are intended to be
covered in this Welding Procedures Manual.
RAJASTHAN
1. Field Weld Map and Description

RAJASTHAN
Field Weld Description for Storage Tanks
No. Joint Weld Joint Location Base Metal Plate Thick Weld Filler Metal Weld WPS NO
Pos. 1 2 1 2 Process AWS Brand Exam PQR NO
1 Annular 1G S 355 J2 S 355 J2 10 10 SMAW E7018 As per AWS VE, RT,
Together UNI EN UNI EN
10025 10025
2 Bottom 1F S 235 J2 S 235 J2 9 9 SMAW E7018 As per AWS VE, VT

Together UNI EN UNI EN
10025 10025
3 Annular To 1F S 355 J2 S 355 J2 10 9 SMAW E7018 As per AWS VE, VT

Bottom UNI EN UNI EN
10025 10025
4 & Annular To 1F S 355 J2 S 355 J2 10 18 SMAW E7018 As per AWS VE, PT

5 Shell UNI EN UNI EN Or DT.
10025 10025
6, 7, Shell 3G S 355 J2 S 355 J2 18 18 SMAW E7018 As per AWS VE, RT

8, 9 (Vertical UNI EN UNI EN 16 16
14.5 14.51
10025 10025
joint) 13 3
11.5 11.5
10 10
RAJASTHAN
10, Shell 3G S 355 J2 S 355 J2 11.5 11.5 SMAW E7018 As per AWS VE, RT
11, (Vertical UNI EN UNI EN 10 10
9 9
10025 10025
12 joint)
13 Shell 3G S 275 S 275 8 8 SMAW E7018 As per AWS VE, RT

J2 J2
(Vertical UNI UNI
joint) EN EN
10025 10025

J2 J2
(Vertical UNI UNI
joint) EN EN
10025 10025

J2 J2 16 14.5
Together UNI UNI
EN EN
10025 10025
16 Shell 2G S 355 S355 14.5 13 SMAW E7018 As per AWS VE, RT

J2 J2 13 11.5
Together UNI UNI 11.5 10
EN EN 10 9
10025 10025 9 8
/S275
J2
UNI
EN
10025
RAJASTHAN
17 Shell 2G S 275 S 275 8 6 SMAW E7018 As per AWS VE

J2 J2 6 6
Together UNI UNI
EN EN
10025 10025
18 Top angle 2G S 275 S 275 6 8 SMAW E7018 As per AWS VE

J2 JR
/Plate UNI UNI
To EN EN
10025 10025
Shell
19 Wind 1F S 275 S 275 6 6 SMAW E7018 As per AWS VE

J2 JR
Girder & UNI UNI
TO 4F EN EN
10025 10025
Shell
NOTE: VE – Visual Examination, VT – Vacuum Box Test, RT – Radiographic Test, PT – Penetrating Diesel Test, LT – Liquid
Penetrant Test
RAJASTHAN
2. Welding Procedures Specifications (WPS)
QW-482 Welding Procedures Specifications (WPS)
Welding Process (es): SMAW Type: Manual

(Automatic, Semi-Auto, Manual)
Joints (QW-402) Details
Joint Design: Fillet

Thickness Range: (4.76 to 24 mm)
Backing: (YES / NO): NO
 Metal  Non Fusing Metal

 Non Metallic  Other
Base Metals (QW-403)

P-No.: 1 Group No.: 2 to P-No.: 1 Group No.: 2
Filler Metals (QW-404)
Root Filler passes
Spec. No. (SFA) 5.1 5.1
AWS (Class) E7018 E7018
F-No. 4 4
A-No. 1 1
Size of Filler Metals 3.2, 4, 5 mm 3.2, 4 mm
Weld Metals
Thickness Range:
Groove NA NA
Fillet Un limited Un limited
Electrode –Flux (Class) Low Hydrogen iron Low Hydrogen iron
powder powder
RAJASTHAN
Flux Trade Name ESAB ESAB

Consumables Insert NA NA
Others
Positions (QW-405) Post Weld Heat Treatment (QW-407)

Position(s) of Groove: Temp. Range NA
Welding Progression: Time Range NA
Position(s) of Fillet: All Gas (QW-408)
Pre-Heat (QW-406) Percent Composition

Pre-heat Temp. Min 20° C Gas(es) Mixture Flow Rate
Inter pass Temp. Max 250° C Shielding NA NA NA
Pre heat maintenance NA Trailing NA NA NA
(Continuous or special heating where applicable Backing NA NA NA
should be recorded)
RAJASTHAN
Electrical characteristics (QW-409)
Current AC or DC: DC, Polarity: +Ve.

Amp.’s Range: 90-260 A, Volts Range: 22-30 V
Tungsten Electrode size and type: NA
Mode of metal transfer for GMAW: NA
Electrode Wire feed speed range: NA
Technique (QW-410) :
String or weave bead : Root – Stringer, Fill up and Final –
Weaving
Orifice or Gas Cup size : NA
Initial and interpass cleaning (Brushing, : Brushing and Grinding
Grinding, etc)
Method of back Gouging : Grinding
Oscillation : NA
Contact tube to work distance : NA
Multiple or single pass (per side) : Multiple
Multiple or single electrodes : Single
Travel speed (range) : 160 – 180 mm / minute
Peening : NA
Other : NA
Weld Process Filler Metal Current Volt Travel Other
layer(s) Speed (e.g. Remarks,
Comments,
Class Dia. Polarity Amp Range Hot wire
mm / addition,
minute Technique,
Torch angle,
etc)
1 SMAW E7018 3.2/5.0 mm DC(+) 90-260 22-30 160-180

2 and SMAW E7018 3.2/4.0 mm DC(+) 125-210 22-30 160-180
on
RAJASTHAN
QW-482 Welding Procedures Specifications (WPS)
Welding Process (es): SMAW Type: Manual

(Automatic, Semi-Auto, Manual)
Joints (QW-402)
Joint Design: Groove

Thickness Range: (4.76 - 24 mm)
Backing: (YES / NO): Yes for all passes, No

for first pass
 Metal  Non Fusing Metal
 Non Metallic  Other
Base Metals (QW-403)

Filler Metals (QW-404)
Root Filler passes
Spec. No. (SFA) 5.1 5.1
AWS (Class) E7018 E7018
F-No. 4 4
A-No. 1 1
Size of Filler Metals 2.5 / 3.2 2.5, 3.2, 4 mm
Weld Metals (Above 3.2 mm & to WT
Thickness Range: Up to 3.2 mm + reinforcement)
Groove
RAJASTHAN
Fillet NA NA
Electrode –Flux (Class) Low Hydrogen iron Low Hydrogen iron
powder powder
Flux Trade Name ESAB ESAB
Consumables Insert NA NA
Others
Positions (QW-405) Post Weld Heat Treatment (QW-407)
Position(s) of Groove: 1G, 2G, 3G Temp. Range - NA -
Welding Progression: UPHIL for 3G Time Range - NA -
Position(s) of Fillet: All Gas (QW-408)
Pre-Heat (QW-406) Percent Composition

Pre-heat Temp. Min 20° C Gas(es) Mixture Flow Rate
Inter pass Temp. Max 250° C Shielding NA NA NA
Pre heat maintenance NA Trailing NA NA NA
(Continuous or special heating where applicable Backing NA NA NA
should be recorded)
Electrical characteristics (QW-409)
Current AC or DC: DC Polarity: +Ve.

Amp.’s Range: 90 - 210 A, Volts Range: 22-30 V
Tungsten Electrode size and type: NA
Mode of metal transfer for GMAW: NA
Electrode Wire feed speed range: NA
Technique (QW-410) : Root – Stringer, Fill up and Final –
String or weave bead Weaving
Orifice or Gas Cup size : NA
Initial and interpass cleaning (Brushing / : Brushing and Grinding
Grinding, etc)
Method of back Gouging : Grinding
Oscillation : 3D or 10 mm max (D – Diameter of
electrode)
Contact tube to work distance : NA
Multiple or single pass (per side) : Multiple
Multiple or single electrodes : Single
Travel speed (range) : 180 – 350 mm / minute
Peening : NA
RAJASTHAN
Other : NA
Weld Process Filler Metal Current Volt Travel Other

layer(s) Speed (e.g. Remarks,
Comments,
Class Dia. Polarity Amp Range Hot wire
mm / addition,
minute Technique,
Torch angle,
etc)
Inside
1 SMAW E7018 2.5/3.2 mm DC(+) 80-140 22-30 250-350
2 SMAW E7018 3.2/4 mm DC(+) 90-210 22-30 220-240
3 & on SMAW E7018 3.2/4 mm DC(+) 125-210 22-30 220-240
Outside
1 SMAW E7018 2.5/3.2 mm DC(+) 80-140 22-30 180-200
2 & on SMAW E7018 3.2/4 mm DC(+) 90-210 22-30 220-240
RAJASTHAN
3. WELDING REPAIR PROCEDURE
3.1 Specifications
Welding Process : SMAW/GMAW (MIG CO2)

Base Metal Specification : (S355 J2, S235 J2, S275 JR) UNI EN 10025
Thickness : 4.76 to 24 mm
Welding Material :
AWS No. : E7018
Pre-Heating (°C) : Up to 350 °C in mother oven and 100 °C in portable
ovens near welders
3.2 Removal Of Defect
1. Overlap or Excessive Convexity

These defects will be reduced by removal of excess weld metal by grinding.
2. Excess Concavity of Weld or Crater
These Defects will be cleaned before depositing additional weld metal.

RAJASTHAN
3. Internal Defects
Internal defects will be removed with sound metal beyond each end of the defect
by grinding. These gouged grooves will be ground and inspected by VE prior to
repair welding.
4- Arc Strikes
Arc Strikes caused by arc welding electrodes or frayed electrical cables would be
ground to bring down the inadvertent discontinuity and inspected by VE.
3.3 Repair Welding
Repair welding condition will be in accordance with the original WPS.
3.4 Surface finishing
After repairs have been made, the repaired area will be blended into the surrounding
surface to avoid sharp notches or crevices.
3.5 Inspection
Repair welded joints will be inspected by original N.D.E. Method that was used to
examine the original weld.
RAJASTHAN
4. WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION TEST (WPQT)
PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORD (PQR)
STEEL PLATES FOR THE TESTING

In order to confirm the proposed welding procedures specifications, we have provided
the following materials to carryout the welding procedure qualification test (WPQT)
and welder’s performance qualification test (WQT) in accordance with the contract
specifications.
(1) Materials for WPQT

a) Groove weld (3G position) 16 mm
Mild Steel
(2) Materials for WQT

a) Groove weld (3G positions) 16 mm
Mild Steel
NDT AND MECHANICAL TEST REQUIREMENTS
(1) For WPQT

Test Items Tensile Face Bend Root Bend Macro Hardness Impact X-Ray
ASME IX ASME IX ASME IX ASME IX API 650 API 650 ASME IX
QW-150 QW-161, 2 QW-161, 3 QW-183 QW-191
WPQT- 2 2 2 100%
MCL-plate
(2) For WQT

1. 100% of X-Ray will be carried out on each groove welded test pieces.
RAJASTHAN
PQR FOR SMAW:
Welding Process: SMAW Manual WPS No.: PQR No.:

Joint Design: Thickness Range: Joint Detail:
Groove 4.8 to 24 mm
Parent Material: Mild Steel Plate
Welding Positions: Diameter / Range:
3G --
Pre-Heat: Min 20 °C Sequence of Beads:
Interpass Temp: Max 250 °C
Post Weld Heat Treatment:
N/A
Pass Process Filler Metal Polarity Flux Gas Volts Amps Speed
No. No. Weld Direction Gas Flow Mm/min
1 SMAW(1) E7018 3.2 DC (+) N/A N/A 24 90-120 120-180
mm
2 SMAW(1) E7018 3.2/4 DC (+) N/A N/A 24 90-120 120-180
mm
3 SMAW(1) E7018 3.2/4 DC (+) N/A N/A 24 90-120 120-180
mm
4 Grinding
5 SMAW(1) E7018 DC (+) N/A N/A 24 90-120 120-180
2.5/3.2 mm
6 SMAW(1) E 7018 3.2 DC (+) N/A N/A 24 90-120 120-180
mm
RAJASTHAN
Approval (Welding) Mechanical Test & NDT

Test Type No. Result Test Type No.
Tensile 2 RT 100%
Root Bend 2 Satisfactory MPI or PT -
Contractor Client Face Bend 2 Satisfactory
Test Acceptance Side Bend -
Macro (HV) -
Charpy (SET) -
Nick Break -
Contractor Client
Bill of Quantity I - Tankage
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
B
Tank Foundation
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
Part - 4.2
Supply, Installation, Testing &
Commissioning of equipment
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
Datasheet for MS TWD Pumps
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
Construction of Petroleum Storage Depot at Pali, Rajasthan
DATA SHEET FOR MS TWD PUMPS

P-100A/B
REV. 01
Project No. NAYA-PALI Unit 2

Project Construction of Petroleum Storage Depot Item No. P-100 A/B
Client Nayara Energy Limited Service MS TWD PUMPS
Location Pali, Rajasthan Document No. NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-017
Contractor / Consultant SAGA GLOBAL CONSULTANTS Issued For REVIEW & COMMENTS
REVISION INDEX
REV. DESCRIPTION AND / OR REVISED SHEETS
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0 1
Date 19.12.18 02.01.2019
Prepared By JK JK
Checked By PP PP/BD
Approved By SKJ SKJ
Client Review
Page 1 of 6
PAGE 2 OF 6
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP JOB NO. ITEM NO. P-100 A/B
DATA SHEET REQ / SPEC NO. /

PURCH. ORDER NO. DATE
INQUIRY NO. BY
1 APPLICABLE TO: PROPOSAL PURCHASE AS BUILT

2 FOR NAYARA ENERGY LIMITED UNIT (1W + 1S)
3 SITE PALI, RAJASTHAN SERVICE MS Wagon Unloading
4 NOTES: INFORMATION BELOW TO BE COMPLETED: BY PURCHASER BY MANUFACTURER BY MANUFACTURER OR PURCHASER

5 DATA SHEET REVISIONS
6 ITEM NO. ATTACHED ITEM NO. ATTACHED ITEM NO. ATTACHED NO. DATE BY
7 PUMP P-100 A/B 1
8 MOTOR 2
9 SEAL 3
10 COUPLINGS 4
11 APPLICABLE OVERLAY STANDARD(S): Refer to Applicable standards mentioned in specification sheet. 5
12 OPERATING CONDITIONS (5.1.3) LIQUID (5.1.3)
13 FLOW, NORMAL 550 (m3/h) RATED 550 (m3/h) LIQUID TYPE OR NAME MS
14 OTHER HAZARDOUS FLAMMABLE (5.1.5)
*
15 SUCTION HEAD MAX./RATED / 5 (MLC) MIN. NORMAL MAX.
16 DISCHARGE HEAD 65 (MLC) PUMPING TEMP. (°C) 5 40
17 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TO BE PROVIDED BY VENDOR (Kg/cm2)VAPOR PRESS. (Kgf/cm2 ) 0.61 at 38 O C
18 DIFF. HEAD 60 (MLC) NPSHA 3.0 (m) RELATIVE DENSITY (SG) 0.720 0.750 0.780 Max
19 PROCESS VARIATIONS (5.1.4) VISCOSITY (cst) 0.71
20 STARTING CONDITION (5.1.4) Automatic start with open delivery valve SPECIFIC HEAT, Cp (kcal/kg.0C)
21 SERVICE : CONTINUOUS INTERMITTENT (STARTS/DAY) CHLORIDE CONCENTRATION (6.5.2.4) (ppm)
22 PARALLEL OPERATION REQ'D (5.1.13) H2S CONCENTRATION (ppm) WET (5.12.1.12c)
23 SITE DATA (5.1.3) CORROSIVE/EROSIVE AGENT (5.12.1.9)
24 LOCATION : (5.1.30) MATERIALS (5.12.1.1)

25 INDOOR HEATED OUTDOOR UNHEATED APPENDIX H CLASS (5.12.1.1) API CLASS S5
26 ELECTRICAL AREA CLASSIFICATION (5.1.24 / 6.1.4) MIN DESIGN METAL TEMP (5.12.4.1) 5 (°C)
27 CL T3 GR IIA/IIB DIV ZONE 2 REDUCED HARDNESS MATERIALS REQ'D (5.12.1.12)
28 WINTERIZATION REQ'D TROPICALIZATION REQ'D BARREL/CASE CS IMPELLER CS
29 SITE DATA (5.1.30) CASE/IMPELLER WEAR RINGS 12% CHR HARDENED
30 ALTITUDE 183 (m) BAROMETER (KSCG) SHAFT EN8 / AISI 4140
31 RANGE OF AMBIENT TEMP : MIN / MAX 5 / 47 (°C) DIFFUSERS
32 RELATIVE HUMIDITY : MIN / MAX / 60 (%)
33 UNUSUAL CONDITIONS (5.1.30) DUST FUMES PERFORMANCE
34 OTHER DRY PROPOSAL CURVE NO. (r/min)
35 IMPELLER DIA. RATED MAX. MIN. (mm)
36 IMPELLER TYPE
37 DRIVER TYPE RATE POWER (kW) EFFICIENCY (%)
38 INDUCTION MOTOR STEAM TURBINE GEAR MINIMUM CONTINUOUS FLOW:
39 OTHER THERMAL (m3/h) STABLE (m3/h)
40 PREFERRED OPERATING REGION TO (m3/h)
41 MOTOR DRIVER (6.1.1 / 6.1.4) ALLOWABLE OPERATING REGION TO (m3/h)
42 MANUFACTURER MAX HEAD @ RATED IMPELLER (m)
43 150 (kW) (r/min) MAX POWER @ RATED IMPELLER (kW)
44 FRAME ENCLOSURE FLP NPSHR AT RATED FLOW (m) (5.1.10)
45 HORIZONTAL VERTICAL SERVICE FACTOR MAX. SUCTION SPECIFIC SPEED (5.1.11)
46 VOLTS/PHASE/HERTZ 380/415 / 3 / 50 MAX SOUND PRESS. LEVEL REQ'D (dBA) (5.1.16)
47 TYPE EST MAX SOUND PRESS. LEVEL (dBA) (5.1.16)
48 MINIMUM STARTING VOLTAGE (6.1.5) EST MAX SOUND POWER LEVEL (dBA) (5.1.16)
49 INSULATION TEMP. RISE UTILITY CONDITIONS (5.1.3)

50 FULL LOAD AMPS ELECTRICITY VOLTAGE PHASE HERTZ
51 LOCKED ROTOR AMPS DRIVERS 415 3 50
52 STARTING METHOD VFD HEATING not applicable
53 LUBE SYSTEM VOLTAGE DIP 80% OTHER (6.1.5)
54 BEARING (TYPE / NUMBER) : STEAM MAX. PRESS. MAX. TEMP. MIN. PRESS. MIN. TEMP.
55 RADIAL / DRIVERS not applicable
56 THRUST / HEATING not applicable
57 VERTICAL THRUST CAPACITY COOLING WATER : (5.1.19) SOURCE not applicable
58 UP (N) DOWN (N) SUPPLY TEMP (°C) MAX. RETURN TEMP. (°C)
59 NORM PRESS. (KSCG) DESIGN PRESS. (BARA)
60 Note : MIN. PET. PRESS. (KSCG) MAX. ALLOW. D.P. (BARA)
61 CHLORIDE CONCENTRATION : (mg/kg)
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-017 Page 2 of 6

PAGE 3 OF 6
JOB NO. 0 ITEM NO. P-100 A/B
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP REQ / SPEC NO. 0 /
DATA SHEET PURCH. ORDER NO. 0 DATE 0
INQUIRY NO. 0 BY 0
1
2 REMARKS :
3 1) PUMP IS USED FOR TANK TRUCK LOADING PURPOSE. MINIMUM CONTINUOUS FLOW FOR PUMP PROTECTION SHALL BE FURNISED BY VENDOR
4 2) PUMP MECHANICAL DESIGN TEMPARATURE SHALL BE 65 DEG C
5 3) NPSHA IS CALCULATED BASED ON RATED OPERATING CONDITION AT PUMP BOTTOM CENTRE LINE OF PUMP SUCTION
6 4) PUMP IS LOCATED IN HAZARDUOUS AREA CLASSIFICATION - ZONE II, GAS GROUP IIA, TEMP CLASS T3
7 5) SITE AMBIENT TEMPARATURE = 40 DEG C
8 6) PUMP SHALL BE MOUNTED ON THE BASE PLATE ALONG WITH THE MOTOR AND TO BE ALIGNED AT THE FACTORY BEFORE DISPATCH TO THE SITE
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56

PAGE 4 OF 6
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP DATA SHEET REQ / SPEC NO. 0 /
SINGLE STAGE OVERHUNG (TYPE OH) PURCH. ORDER NO. 0 DATE 0
INQUIRY NO. 0 BY 0
1 CONSTRUCTION ( API-610 Latest Edition ) SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINT

2 ROTATION : (VIEWED FROM COUPLING END) CW CCW MANUFACTURERS STANDARD OTHER (SEE BELOW)
3 PUMP TYPE : (4.1) SPECIFICATION NO.
OH2 OH3 OH6 OTHER OVER HUNG TYPE PUMP :
5 CASING MOUNTING : PRIMER
6 CENTERLINE IN-LINE OTHER OR FOOT MOUNTED FINISH COAT
7 BASEPLATE : (6.3.17)
8 CASING TYPE : PRIMER
9 SINGLE VOLUTE MULTIPLE VOLUTE DIFFUSER FINISH COAT
10 CASE PRESSURE RATING : DETAILS OF LIFTING DEVICES (6.3.20)
11 OH6 PUMP SUCTION REGION DESIGNED FOR MAWP (5.3.6) SHIPMENT: (7.4.1)
12 MAX ALLOWABLE WORKING PRESSURE 7 (barg) DOMESTIC EXPORT EXPORT BOXING REQUIRED
13 @ 40 (°C) OUTDOOR STORAGE MORE THAN 6 MONTHS
14 HYDROTEST PRESSURE 16 (barg) SPARE ROTOR ASSEMBLY PACKAGED FOR :
15 NOZZLE CONNECTIONS : (5.4.2) HORIZONTAL STORAGE VERTICAL STORAGE
16 SIZE FLANGE FAC'G POSITION TYPE OF SHIPPING PREPARATION
17 RATING
18 SUCTION 300 150 RF END HEATING AND COOLING
19 DISCHARGE 250 150 RF TOP HEATING JACKET REQD. (5.8.9)
20 COOLING REQD.
21 PRESSURE CASING AUX. CONNECTIONS : (5.4.3) COOLING WATER (CW) PIPING PLAN (6.5.3.1)
22 NO. SIZE (DN) TYPE C.W. PIPING :
23 DRAIN BY VENDOR With valve & flange PIPE TUBING FITTINGS
24 VENT C.W. PIPING MATERIALS :
25 WARM-UP S.STEEL C.STEEL GALVANIZED
26 COOLING WATER REQUIREMENTS :
27 MACHINED AND STUDDED CONNECTIONS (5.4.3.8) BEARING HOUSING (m3/h)
28 CYLINDRICAL THREADS REQUIRED (5.4.3.3) HEAT EXCHANGER (m3/h)
29 ROTOR : TOTAL COOLING WATER (m3/h)

30 COMPONENT BALANCE TO ISO 1940 G 1.0 (5.9.4.4) HEAT MEDIUM : STEAM OTHER
31 COUPLINGS : (6.2.2) HEATING PIPING : TUBING PIPE
32 MANUFACTURER MODEL BEARINGS AND LUBRICATION
33 RATING (kW per 100 r/mim) vendor to specify BEARING (TYPE/NUMBER) (5.10.1) :
34 SPACER LENGTH (mm) SERVICE FACT. 2 RADIAL /
35 COUPLING BALANCE TO ISO 1940-1 G 6.3 (6.2.3) THRUST /
36 COUPLING WITH PROPRIETARY CLAMPING DEVICE (6.2.11) LUBRICATION: (5.11.3, 5.11.4)
37 COUPLING PER ISO 14691 (6.2.4) GREASE OIL
38 COUPLING PER ISO 10441 (6.2.4) PURGE OIL MIST PURE OIL MIST
39 COUPLING PER API 671 (6.2.4) ASME B15.1 CONSTANT LEVEL OILER PREFERENCE (5.10.2.2)
40 NON SPARK COUPLING GUARD (6.2.14C) OIL VISC. ISO GRADE
41 COUPLING GUARD STANDARD PER OSHA Approved (6.2.14a) INSTRUMENTATION

42 BASEPLATES : ACCELEROMETER (6.4.2.1)
43 API BASEPLATE NUMBER (ANNEX D) PROVISION FOR MOUNTING ONLY (5.10.2.11)
44 NON-GROUT CONSTRUCTION (6.3.13) FLAT SURFACE REQD (5.10.2.12)
45 OTHER with foundation bolt TEMP. GAUGE (WITH THERMOWELLS) (8.1.3.6)
46 MECHANICAL SEAL : (5.8.1) PRESSURE GAUGE TYPE bourdon tube type (0-150 PSI)
47 SEE ISO 21049 / API 682 DATA SHEET
48 Mechanical seals to be as per API-682, 3rd Edition.
49 Seal Type : Double Mechanical Seal. REMARKS :
50 Seal plans : 11, 61
51 Vendor to submit seal manufacturer's recommendation along with offer. MASSES (kg)
52 PUMP To be provided by vendor
53 BASEPLATE To be provided by vendor
54 DRIVER To be provided by vendor
55 TOTAL To be provided by vendor

PAGE 5 OF 6
INQUIRY NO. 0 BY 0
1 SPARE PARTS (TABLE 18) QA INSPECTION AND TESTING (CONT.)

2 START-UP NORMAL MAINTENANCE TEST NON-WIT WIT OBSERVE
3 HYDROSTATIC (7.3.2)
4 OTHER PURCHASER REQUIREMENTS PERFORMANCE (7.3.3)
5 COORDINATION MEETING REQUIRED (9.1.3) RETEST ON SEAL
6 MAXIMUM DISCHARGE PRESSURE TO INCLUDE (5.3.2) 65 m LEAKAGE (7.3.3.2.d)
7 MAX RELATIVE DENSITY 750 kg/m3 NPSH (7.3.4.2)
8 MAX DIA. IMPELLERS AND/OR NO. OF STAGES single stage TRUE PEAK VELOCITY
9 OPERATION TO TRIP SPEED 1600 rpm DATA (7.3.3.4.d)
10 OH3 BEARING HS6 LIFTER (8.1.2.6) COMPLETE UNIT TEST (7.3.4.3)
11 CONNECTION DESIGN APPROVAL (5.12.3.4) SOUND LEVEL TEST (7.3.4.4)
12 TORSIONAL ANALYSIS REQUIRED (5.9.2.1) CLEANLINESS PRIOR TO
13 TORSIONAL ANALYSIS REPORT (5.9.2.6) FINAL ASSEMBLY(7.2.2.2)
14 PROGRESS REPORTS (9.3.3) NOZZLE LOAD TEST (6.3.6)
15 OUTLINE OF PROCEDURES FOR OPTIONAL TEST (9.2.5) CHECK FOR CO-PLANAR
16 ADDITIONAL DATA REQUIRING 20 YEARS RETENTION (7.2.1.1.f) MOUNTING PAD SURFACES (6.3.3)
17 PIPING APPURTENANCES MECHANICAL RUN UNTIL OIL
18 MANIFOLD PIPING TO SINGLE CONNECTION (6.5.1.6) TEMP. STABLE (7.3.4.7.1)
19 VENT DRAIN COOLING WATER 4 h MECHANICAL RUN AFTER
20 MOUNT SEAL RESERVOIR OFF BASEPLATE (6.5.1.4) OIL TEMP. STABLE (7.3.4.7.3)
21 FLANGES REQ'D IN PLACE OF SOCKET WELD UNIONS (6.5.2.8) 4 h MECH. RUN TEST (7.3.4.7.2)
22 INSTALLATION LIST IN PROPOSAL (9.2.3L) BRG HSG RESONANCE TEST
23 CONNECTION BOLTING (7.3.4.6)
24 PTFE COATING ASTM A153 GALVANIZED AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT TEST
25 PAINTED SS (7.3.4.5)
26 QA INSPECTION AND TESTING IKSCGCT TESTING (5.12.4.3)
27 SHOP INSPECTION (7.1.4) PER EN 13445
28 PERFORMANCE CURVE APPROVAL PER ASME VIII
29 TEST WITH SUBSTITUTE SEAL (7.3.3.2.b)
30 MATERIAL CERTIFICATION REQUIRED (5.12.1.8) VENDOR KEEP REPAIR AND HT RECORDS (7.2.1.1.c)
31 CASING IMPELLER SHAFT VENDOR SUBMIT TEST PROCEDURES (7.3.1.2 / 9.2.5)
32 OTHER VENDOR SUBMIT TEST DATA WITHIN 24 h (7.3.3.3.e)
33 CASTING REPAIR PROCEDURE APPROVAL REQD (5.12.2.5) INCLUDE PLOTTED VIBRATION SPECTRA (5.9.3.3)
34 INSPECTION REQUIRED FOR CONNECTION WELDS (5.12.3.4.e) SUBMIT INSPECTION CHECK LIST (7.1.6)
35 MAG. PARTICLE LIQUID PENETRANT
36 RADIOGRAPHIC ULTRASONIC
37 INSPECTION REQUIRED FOR CASTINGS (7.2.1.3 / 5.12.1.5)
40 HARDNESS TEST REQUIRED : (7.2.2.3)
41 ADDITIONAL SUBSURFACE EXAMINATION FOR 7.2.1.3
42 FOR
43 METHOD
44 REMARKS
45 1. NPSH test shall be carried out between NPSHA & NPSHR in less than 1 m
46 2. Pump shall be supplied with single mechanical seal as per API 682 - plan 11
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

PAGE 6 OF 6
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP - REFERENCES REQ / SPEC NO. 0 /

PRESSURE DESIGN CODES PURCH. ORDER NO. 0 DATE 0
WELDING REQUIREMENTS INQUIRY NO. 0 BY 0
PURCHASER - DEFINED MATERIAL INSPECTIONS
2 FOR NAYARA ENERGY LIMITED UNIT 2
3 SITE PALI, RAJASTHAN SERVICE PMS
4 NOTES: INFORMATION BELOW TO BE COMPLETED BY PURCHASER BY MANUFACTURER BY MANUFACTURER OR PURCHASER

5
6 PRESSURE VESSEL DESIGN CODE REFERENCES
7 THESE REFERENCES MUST BE LISTED BY THE MANUFACTURER
8 CASTING FACTORS USED IN DESIGN (5.3.4) (TABLE 3)
9 SOURCE OF MATERIAL PROPERTIES
10
11 WELDING AND REPAIRS (5.12.3)
12 THESE REFERENCES MUST BE LISTED BY THE PURCHASER. (DEFAULT TO TABLE 10 IF NO PURCHASER PREFERENCE IS STATED)
13 ALTERNATIVE WELDING CODES AND STANDARDS (5.12.3.1)
14 WELDING REQUIREMENT (APPLICABLE CODE OR STANDARD) PURCHASER - DEFINED DEFAULT PER TABLE 10
15 Welder / Operator qualification
16 Welding procedure qualification
17 Non-pressure retaining structural welding such as baseplates or supports
18 Magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination of the plate edges
19 Postweld heat treatment
20 Postweld heat treatment of casing fabrication welds
21
22 MATERIAL INSPECTION (7.2.2.1) (7.2.1.3)
24 ALTERNATIVE MATERIAL INSPECTIONS AND ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA (SEE TABLE 13)
25 TYPE OF INSPECTION METHODS FOR FABRICATIONS CASTINGS
26 RADIOGRAPHY
27 ULTRASONIC INSPECTION
28 MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION
29 LIQUID PENETRANT INSPECTION
30 REMARKS
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59

Datasheet for HSD TWD Pumps
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
DATA SHEET FOR HSD TWD PUMPS

P-200 A / B / C
REV. 01

Project Construction of Petroleum Storage Depot Item No. P-200 A / B / C
Client Nayara Energy Limited Service HSD TWD PUMPS
REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0 1
Date 19.12.18 02.01.2019
Prepared By JK JK
Checked By PP PP/BD
Approved By SKJ SKJ
Client Review

PAGE 2 OF 6
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP JOB NO. ITEM NO. P-200 A/B/C

INQUIRY NO. BY

2 FOR Nayara Energy Limited UNIT 2W+1S
3 SITE Pali, Rajasthan SERVICE HSD WAGON UNLOADING

7 PUMP P-200 A/B/C 1
8 MOTOR 2
9 SEAL 3
10 COUPLINGS 4
13 FLOW, NORMAL 550 (m3/h) RATED 550 (m3/h) LIQUID TYPE OR NAME HSD
*
17 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TO BE PROVIDED BY VENDOR (Kg/cm2)VAPOR PRESS. (Kgf/cm2 ) 0.02 at 38 O C
18 DIFF. HEAD 60 (m) NPSHA 6.0 (m) RELATIVE DENSITY (SG) 0.820 0.850 0.880 Max
19 PROCESS VARIATIONS (5.1.4) VISCOSITY (cst) 1.6 5.9

36 IMPELLER TYPE


PAGE 3 OF 6
JOB NO. 0 ITEM NO. P-200 A/B/C

INQUIRY NO. 0 BY 0
1
2 REMARKS :
5 3) NPSHA IS CALCULATED BASED ON RATED OPERATING CONDITION AT PUMP CENTER LINE OF PUMP SUCTION NOZZLE
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56

PAGE 4 OF 6

INQUIRY NO. 0 BY 0
1 CONSTRUCTION ( API-610 latest Edition ) SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINT

12 MAX ALLOWABLE WORKING PRESSURE 7 (Barg) DOMESTIC EXPORT EXPORT BOXING REQUIRED
14 HYDROTEST PRESSURE 1 (Barg) SPARE ROTOR ASSEMBLY PACKAGED FOR :
17 RATING
20 COOLING REQD.
33 RATING (kW per 100 r/mim) Vendor to Specify BEARING (TYPE/NUMBER) (5.10.1) :
34 SPACER LENGTH (mm) SERVICE FACT. RADIAL /
41 COUPLING GUARD STANDARD PER DSHA Approved (6.2.14a) INSTRUMENTATION

45 OTHER WITH FOUNDATION BOLTS TEMP. GAUGE (WITH THERMOWELLS) (8.1.3.6)
46 MECHANICAL SEAL : (5.8.1) PRESSURE GAUGE TYPE Bourdon Tube Type (0-150 PSI)

PAGE 5 OF 6

INQUIRY NO. 0 BY 0

6 MAXIMUM DISCHARGE PRESSURE TO INCLUDE (5.3.2) 65m LEAKAGE (7.3.3.2.d)
25 PAINTED SS (7.3.4.5)
42 FOR
43 METHOD
44 REMARKS
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

PAGE 6 OF 6

2 FOR Nayara Energy Limited UNIT 2W+1S
3 SITE Pali, Rajasthan SERVICE HSD

5
10
21
26 RADIOGRAPHY
30 REMARKS
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59

Datasheet for Stripper
MS TWD Pumps
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
DATA SHEET FOR MS PUMP (TWIN SCREW)

P-100 C
REV. 01

Project Construction of Petroleum Storage Depot Item No. P-100 C
Client Nayara Energy Limited Service MS TWIN SCREW PUMP
Contractor / SAGA GLOBAL CONSULTANTS Issued For REVIEW & COMMENTS
REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0 1
Date 19.12.18 02.01.2019
Prepared By JK JK
Checked By PP PP/BD
Approved By SKJ SKJ
Client Review
Page 1 of 2
DATA SHEET FOR MS PUMP (TWIN SCREW)

PD PUMP DATASHEET
1 Item No.: P-100 C Applicable Standard: API 676

2 Type: TWIN SCREW PUMP
3 Client: NAYARA ENERGY LIMITED Supplier:
4 Project: PETROLEUM STORAGE DEPOT Mfr.:
5 Service: MS Model No.: Serial No. No. Req.: 1
6 Location: UNDER ROOF Series / Parallel Operation: PARALLEL
7 Driver: ELECTRIC MOTOR Duty: CONTINOUS
8 OPERATING CONDITIONS - EACH PUMP
9 Fluid Pumped: MS Pumping Temp.: 40 °C Density: 720 - 775 kg/m³
10 Normal Capacity: 120 m³/hr Rated Capacity: m³/hr
11 Specific Heat: kJ/kg°C Viscosity @ PT: 0.7 cP Percentage Weight Solids: 0.00%
12 Vapor Pressure @Pump Temperature: * 7.890 mLC at 38 °C Corrosion / Erosion Due to: -
13 Suction Pressure Rated: 0.25 kg/cm2 Max. Suction Pressure: mWC
14 Discharge Pressure Rated: 5.50 kg/cm2 Differential Head: 60 MLC MLC
15 Differential Pressure: 5.25 kg/cm2 NPSH Available: 2.50 mWC
16 Hydraulic Power: * KW l Hazardous:  Flammable:
17 PERFORMANCE AND CONSTRUCTION
18 Size: * VTS Pump Speed: * 1450 RPM
19 NPSH Req'd at Rated Capacity: * 2.3 Mwc Safe Min Flow: *
20 Pump Speed At Design Capacity: * 1450 rpm Suction Specific Speed: *
21 Casing Mounting: * Centerline
22 Casing Split: * Axial
23 Casing Type: * Volute
24 Impeller Type: * Closed Rotation: *
25 Impeller Diameter: * Maximum: * Minimum: * Actual
26 Efficiency: * 69.94% Rated Power: * 26.5 KW Max. at end of Curve: * 30 kw
27 Maximum Shutoff Pressure: * Casing Design Press / Temp. * (Max. / Min.) /
28 Suction Size NB: * 150 Flange Rating, ANSI: * 150 # RF
29 Discharge Size NB: * 150 Vent / Drain: * TO BE PROVIDED
30 Cooling water / jacketing: *
31 MECHANICAL SEAL
32 Type: * API-682 (Double Mechanical Seal) Manufacturer: * LEAK PROOF / EAGLE Model Number / Size: *
33 Seal Face Material: * CSVS SIC Seal Flush Type: * PLAN 11 Seal Fluid Required: *
34 DRIVER & TRANSMISSION
35 Type: * INDUCTION MOTOR ENCLOSURE TEFC (FLP) Transmission: DIRECT (COUPLING WITH GUARD)
36 Speed: 1450 RPM VOLTAGE / PHASE / FREQUENCY: 415 V / 3 PH / 50 HZ
37 Permissible Noise Level: 80 DBA Electrical Classification: CL T3 ZONE 2 Gr IIA/IIB Div
38 Engine: Item Number / KW: * 30 KW
39 WEIGHT
40 Pump with Base Plate: * Pump with Base Plate & Engine: *
41
42 Casing / Barrel: * CARBON STEEL Impeller: * NA Casing / Impeller Wear Rings: * CARBON STEEL / CR STEEL
43 Shaft: * AISI 410 Shaft Sleeve: * NA Diffuser: * NA
44 Case Gasket: * AUS SPIRAL Gland Plate: * CARBON STEEL Bearing Housing: * CARBON STEEL
45 Stuffing Box: * CARBON STEEL Seal Assembly: * CS VS SIC Base Plate: * MS FAB
46 Remarks:
47 (*) Indicates data to be provided / confirmed by Vendor.
48
49
50

Datasheet for Stripper
HSD TWD Pumps
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
DATA SHEET FOR HSD PUMP (TWIN SCREW)

P-200 D
REV. 01

Project Construction of Petroleum Storage Depot Item No. P-200 D
Client Nayara Energy Limited Service HSD TWIN SCREW PUMP
REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0 1
Date 19.12.18 02.01.2019
Prepared By JK JK
Checked By PP PP/BD
Approved By SKJ SKJ
Client Review
Page 1 of 2
DATA SHEET FOR HSD PUMP (TWIN SCREW)

PD PUMP DATASHEET
1 Item No.: P-200 D Applicable Standard: API 676

2 Type: TWIN SCREW PUMP
5 Service: HSD Model No.: Serial No. No. Req.: 1
9 Fluid Pumped: HSD Pumping Temp.: 40 °C Density: 820 - 845 kg/m³
10 Normal Capacity: 120 m³/hr Rated Capacity: 130 m³/hr
11 Specific Heat: kJ/kg°C Viscosity @ PT: 2 - 4.5 cP Percentage Weight Solids: 0.00%
14 Discharge Pressure Rated: 5.50 kg/cm2 Differential Head: 60 MLC MLC
15 Differential Pressure: 5.2 kg/cm2 NPSH Available: FLOODED mWC
18 Size: * VTS Pump Speed: * 1450 RPM
20 Pump Speed At Design Capacity: * rpm Suction Specific Speed: *
21 Casing Mounting: * Centerline
22 Casing Split: * Axial
23 Casing Type: * Volute
24 Impeller Type: * Closed Rotation: *
25 Impeller Diameter: * Maximum: * Minimum: * Actual
26 Efficiency: * 69.94% Rated Power: * 29.34 KW Max. at end of Curve: * 32 kw
28 Suction Size NB: * 250 Flange Rating, ANSI: * 150 # RF
29 Discharge Size NB: * 250 Vent / Drain: *
31 MECHANICAL SEAL
32 Type: * API-682 (Double Mechanical Seal) Manufacturer: * Model Number / Size: *
39 WEIGHT
41
42 Casing / Barrel: * CARBON STEEL Impeller: * NA Casing / Impeller Wear Rings: *
43 Shaft: * AISI 410 Shaft Sleeve: * NA Diffuser: * NA
46 Remarks:
48
49

Datasheet for MS TLF Pumps
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
DATA SHEET FOR MS TLF PUMPS

P-101 A / B / C
REV. 01

Project Construction of Petroleum Storage Depot Item No. P-101 A/B/C
Client Nayara Energy Limited Service MS TLF PUMPS
REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0 1
Date 19.12.18 02.01.2019
Prepared By JK JK
Checked By PP PP/BD
Approved By SKJ SKJ
Client Review
Page 1 of 6
PAGE 2 OF 6
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP JOB NO. NAYA-PALI ITEM NO. P-101 A/B/C

INQUIRY NO. BY

2 FOR NAYARA ENERGY LIMITED UNIT (2W+1S)
3 SITE PALI, RAJASTHAN SERVICE MS TLF PUMP

8 MOTOR 2
9 SEAL 3
10 COUPLINGS 4
13 FLOW, NORMAL (m3/h) RATED 180 (m3/h) LIQUID TYPE OR NAME MS
14 DISCHARGE PRESSURE HAZARDOUS FLAMMABLE (5.1.5)
*
17 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE VENDOR TO PROVIDE (kg/cm2) VAPOR PRESS. (Kgf/cm2 ) 0.61 at 38 O C
18 DIFF. HEAD 60 (MLC) NPSHA 3 (m) RELATIVE DENSITY (SG) 0.720 0.750 0.780 Max
19 PROCESS VARIATIONS (5.1.4) VISCOSITY (cst) 0.71

36 IMPELLER TYPE

52 STARTING METHOD SOFT STARTER HEATING not applicable

PAGE 3 OF 6
JOB NO. NAYA-PALI ITEM NO. P-101 A/B/C
INQUIRY NO. 0 BY 0
1
2 REMARKS :
5 3) NPSHA IS CALCULATED BASED ON RATED OPERATING CONDITION AT CENTER LINE OF PUMP SUCTION NOZZLE
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56

PAGE 4 OF 6
INQUIRY NO. 0 BY 0
1 CONSTRUCTION ( API-610 Latest Edition ) SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINT

17 RATING
20 COOLING REQD.


45 OTHER with formation bolt TEMP. GAUGE (WITH THERMOWELLS) (8.1.3.6)

PAGE 5 OF 6
INQUIRY NO. 0 BY 0

25 PAINTED SS (7.3.4.5)
42 FOR
43 METHOD
44 REMARKS
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

PAGE 6 OF 6

2 FOR NAYARA ENERGY LIMITED UNIT 3 NUMBERS
3 SITE PALI, RAJASTHAN SERVICE PMS

5
10
21
26 RADIOGRAPHY
30 REMARKS
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

Datasheet for HSD TLF Pumps
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
DATA SHEET FOR HSD TLF PUMPS

P-201 A / B / C
REV. 01

Client Nayara Energy Limited Service HSD TLF PUMPS
REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0 1
Date 19.12.18 02.01.2019
Prepared By JK JK
Checked By PP PP/BD
Approved By SKJ SKJ
Client Review
Page 1 of 6
NAYARA ENERGY LIMITED PAGE 2 OF 6
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP JOB NO. NAYA-PALI ITEM NO. P-201 A/B/C

INQUIRY NO. BY
DOC NO.:
1 APPLICABLE TO: NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-022
PROPOSAL PURCHASE AS BUILT
2 FOR NAYARA ENEGRY LIMITED UNIT 3
3 SITE PALI, RAJASTHAN SERVICE HSD

8 MOTOR 2
9 SEAL 3
10 COUPLINGS 4
13 FLOW, NORMAL 360 (m3/h) RATED 380 (m3/h) LIQUID TYPE OR NAME HSD
*
15 SUCTION HEAD MAX./RATED 5 / (MLC) MIN. NORMAL MAX.
17 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE VENDOR TO PROVIDE (kg/cm2) VAPOR PRESS. (Kgf/cm2 ) 0.02 at 38 O C
18 DIFF. HEAD 60 (MLC) NPSHA 6.0 (m) RELATIVE DENSITY (SG) 0.820 0.850 0.880 Max
19 PROCESS VARIATIONS (5.1.4) VISCOSITY (cst) 1.6 5.9

27 CL ZONE 2 GR II A DIV I/ II REDUCED HARDNESS MATERIALS REQ'D (5.12.1.12)
36 IMPELLER TYPE




INQUIRY NO. 0 BY 0
DOC NO.: NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-022
1
2 REMARKS :
5 3) NPSHA IS CALCULATED BASED ON RATED OPERATING CONDITION AT PUMP BOTTOM OF BASE PLATE WHICH IS AT 200MM FROM GRADE
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56



INQUIRY NO. 0 BY 0
DOC NO.: NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-022
1 CONSTRUCTION ( API-610 latest Edition ) SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINT
13 @ (°C) OUTDOOR STORAGE MORE THAN 6 MONTHS
17 RATING
20 COOLING REQD.

45 OTHER WITH FOUNDATION BOLTS TEMP. GAUGE (WITH THERMOWELLS) (8.1.3.6)



INQUIRY NO. 0 BY 0
DOC
1 NO.: NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-022
SPARE PARTS (TABLE 18) QA INSPECTION AND TESTING (CONT.)
25 PAINTED SS (7.3.4.5)
42 FOR
43 METHOD
44 REMARKS
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

PAGE 6 OF 6
DOC NO.: NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-022 JOB NO. NAYA-PALI ITEM NO. P-201 A/B/C

2 FOR NAYARA ENEGRY LIMITED UNIT 3
3 SITE PALI, RAJASTHAN SERVICE HSD

5
10
21
26 RADIOGRAPHY
30 REMARKS
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59

Datasheet for Fire Fighting Pump
(Diesel Driven)
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
DATA SHEET FOR FIRE WATER PUMPS

(DIESEL ENGINE DRIVEN)
P-500 A / B / C REV. 01

Client Nayara Energy Limited Service FIRE WATER PUMPS
REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0 1
Date 19.12.18 02.01.2019
Prepared By JK JK
Checked By PP PP/BD
Approved By SKJ SKJ
Client Review
Page 1 of 2
DATA SHEET FOR FIRE WATER PUMPS (DIESEL ENGINE DRIVEN)

CENTRIFUGAL PUMP DATASHEET
1 Item No.: P-500 A / B / C Applicable Standard: NFPA 20

2 Type: CENTRIFUGAL PUMP
5 Service: FIRE WATER Model No.: Serial No. No. Req.: 3
7 Driver: DIESEL ENGINE DRIVEN Duty: CONTINOUS
9 Fluid Pumped: Water Pumping Temp.: 40 °C Density: 1000 kg/m³
11 Specific Heat: kJ/kg°C Viscosity @ PT: 1 cP Percentage Weight Solids: 0.00%
13 Suction Pressure Rated: mWC Max. Suction Pressure: 105 mWC
14 Discharge Pressure Rated: mWC Differential Head: 110 mWC
15 Differential Pressure: mWC NPSH Available: 7.00 mWC
16 Hydraulic Power: * KW  Hazardous:  Flammable:
18 Size: * Pump Speed: * 1800 RPM
20 Pump Speed At Design Capacity: * 1800 rpm Suction Specific Speed: *
21 Casing Mounting: * FOOT
22 Casing Split: * HORIZONTAL SPLI CASING TYPE
23 Casing Type: * VOLUTE
24 Impeller Type: * CLOSED Rotation: *
25 Impeller Diameter: * Maximum: * Minimum: * 291 Actual
26 Efficiency: * 60.00% Rated Power: * VTS KW Max. at end of Curve: * 340 kw
28 Suction Size NB: * 400 Flange Rating, ANSI: *
31 MECHANICAL SEAL
32 Type: * Balanced Single Mechanical Seal Manufacturer: * Model Number / Size: *
33 Seal Face Material: * Seal Flush Type: * Seal Fluid Required: *
35 Type: * Cooled Starting Method: Self Start
36 Speed: 1800 RPM/24V
37 Make: GREAVES MAKE
38 Engine: Item Number / KW: * GREAVES ENGINE - VENDOR TO SPECIFY
39 WEIGHT
41
42 Casing / Barrel: * CI Impeller: * BRONZE Casing / Impeller Wear Rings: * VTS /
43 Shaft: * SS410 Shaft Sleeve: * SS410 Diffuser: *
44 Case Gasket: * Gland Plate: * - Bearing Housing: *
45 Stuffing Box: * Seal Assembly: * - Base Plate: * MS FAB
46 Remarks:
48 NOTE:
49 1 Vendor to provide alongwith the offer, Characteristic curve of pump & Tests carried out based on approved QAP.
50

Datasheet for Fire Fighting Pump
(Jockey)
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
RAJASTHAN
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-024 Rev: 00 Date: 14-01-2019
DATASHEET FOR JOCKEY PUMPS

(P-501 A/B)

0 14-01-2019 Issued for Approval SN PP PCS
Page 1 of 2
RAJASTHAN
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-024 Rev: 00 Date: 14-01-2019
DATASHEET FOR JOCKEY PUMPS
1.0 FIRE WATER PUMP DATA SHEET (JOCKEY PUMP) (P-501 A/B)
Plant 1 PROJECT Construction of Petroleum 3 AMBIENT TEMP Max: 50 deg

Storage Depot at Pali Min: 5 deg
2 LOCATION Pali, Rajasthan 4 TYPE OF HAZARD Class A & B
Pump Charteristics 5 No. of Pumps Two (2) 8 Suction Condition Flooded
6 Capacity of each pump 50 Kl/hr 9 Operation Parallel
7 Total Head-Rated 120 MWC 10 Duty Intermittent
Pump Construction 11 Type of Pump End Suction
Material of 12 Casing CI FG 260, IS210 15 Shaft Sleeve Bronze Gr2 IS318
Construction 13 Impeller Bronze Gr.2 IS318 16 Wearing Ring Bronze Gr.2 IS318
14 Shaft SS AISI 410 17 Stuffing Box CI FG 260, IS210
15 18 Lantern Ring Bronze Gr.2 IS318
19 Gland CI, FG 260, IS210
Liquid Pumped 20 Temp. 40 deg C
Accessories & 21 MS Companion Flange with YES 25 Recom Spares for 2 yrs of YES
Services Required nuts, bolts & gaskets normal operation
22 Foundation Bolts YES 26 Erection Supervision YES
23 Common Base Plate YES 27 Commissioning YES
24 Coupling Guard YES 28 Paint Fire Red Shade no. 536 as
per IS-5
Driver Data 29 Prime Mover Motor (Non-FLP)
Miscellaneous 36 Local Start / stop Station Yes 38 Automation Facility in Yes
Control Panel
37 Pressure Gauge (0 - 16 kg / Yes (2 Nos for each pump) 39 Mechanical Seal Balance Single Mechanical
cm²) Seal
Page 2 of 2
Datasheet for Foam Pump
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
DATA SHEET FOR FOAM PUMP
REV. 01
Project No. NAYA-PALI Unit

Project Construction of Petroleum Storage Depot Item No.
Client Nayara Energy Limited Service FOAM PUMP
REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0 1
Date 19.12.18 02.01.2019
Prepared By JK JK
Checked By PP PP/BD
Approved By SKJ SKJ
Client Review
Page 1 of 2
DATASHEET OF FOAM PUMP
Item No.
Applicable Standard: API 676 Latest Edition
Area / Unit: Foam Tank /
1 Type: Plunger Pump

2 Client: NAYARA Energy Limited Supplier:
3 Project: Petroleum Storage Depot Mfr.: Ref. P&ID:
4 Site: Pali Model No.: Serial No.:
5 Service: Foam Concentrate No. Req.: 2
6 Location: Indoor Series / Parallel Operation: -
7 Driver: Electricity Duty: Intermittent
9 Fluid Pumped: Aqueous Film - Forming Foam (AFFF) concentrate Pumping Temp.: 0 - 40 °C Density: 1000 - 1120 kg/m³
11 Specific Heat: kJ/kg °C Viscosity @ PT: 10 cSt Percent Weight Solids:
12 Vapor Pressure @ Pump Temperature: m Corrosion / Erosion Due to:
13 Suction Pressure Rated: m Suction Pressure: atm
14 Discharge Pressure Rated: 120 MLC Differential Head: 15 MLC
15 Normal Discharge Rate 5 Kl / h NPSH Available: 5 m
16 Hydraulic Power: * KW  Hazardous:  Flammable: NO
18 Size: * Pump Speed: *
19 NPSH Req'd at Rated Capacity: * Safe Min Flow: *
20 Pump Speed At Design Capacity: * Suction Specific Speed: *
21 Casing Mounting: *
22 Casing Split: *
23 Casing Type: *
24 Impeller Type: * Rotation: *
25 Impeller Diameter:* Maximum: * Minimum: * Actual:
26 Efficiency: * 130 MLC 70% Rated Power: * 2KW Max. at end of curve: *
27 Maximum Shutoff Pressure: * 8.5 M Casing Design Press. / Temp. * (Max. / Min.) /
28 Suction Size NB: * 40 mm Flange Rating, ANSI: * ANSI B 16.5, 150#
29 Discharge Size NB: * 25 mm Vent / Drain: *
30 Cooling water / Jacketing: * NA
31 MECHANICAL SEAL
32 Type: * Manufacturer: * API 682 Model Number / Size: *
33 Seal Face Material: * Seal Flush Type: * Seal Plan 11 Seal Fluid Required: *
35 Type: * Induction Motor Enclosure: * Transmission: *
36 Motor: Item Number / KW: *
37 Speed: * Voltage / Phase / Frequency: 415 V / 3 PH / 50 Hz
38 Permissible Noise Level: * 80 dB Electrical Area Classification: (CI):
39 (Gr.):
40 (Div.):
41 WEIGHT
42 Pump with Base Plate* Pump with Base Plate & Motor: *
43 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
44 Casing / Barrel: * SS 316L Impeller: * SS 316L VTS Casing / Impeller Wear Rings: * VTS /
45 Shaft: * SS 316L VTS Shaft Sleeve: * Diffuser: *
46 Case Gasket: * Gland Plate: * Bearing Housing: * VTS
47 Stuffing Box: * Seal Assembly: * Base Plate: *
48 Remarks:
49
50
NOTES:

2 Foam concentrate contact parts should be SS-316
3 Vendor to provide alongwith the offer, Characteristic curve of pump & Tests carried out based on approved QAP.
4 In addition to this data sheet the screw / gear pump shall confirm to NEL Standard technical specification.
5 Pump should be spark proof.

Datasheet for Slop Pump
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
DATA SHEET FOR SLOP PUMP

(SUBMERSIBLE)
P-400 A REV. 01

Project Construction of Petroleum Storage Depot Item No. P-400 A
Client Nayara Energy Limited Service SLOP PUMP (SUBMERSIBLE)
REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0 1
Date 19.12.18 02.01.2019
Prepared By JK JK
Checked By PP PP/BD
Approved By SKJ SKJ
Client Review
Page 1 of 2
DATA SHEET FOR SLOP PUMP (SUBMERSIBLE)

1 Item No.: P-400 A Applicable Standard: API RP 11S

2 Type: SUBMERSIBLE PUMP
5 Service: SLOP Model No.: Serial No. No. Req.: 1
6 Location: SUBMERGED Series / Parallel Operation: PARALLEL
9 Fluid Pumped: SLOP Pumping Temp.: 40 °C Density: 1000 kg/m³
14 Discharge Pressure Rated: 3.00 kg/cm2 Differential Head: 30 MLC
16 Hydraulic Power: * KW  Hazardous: l Flammable:
18 Size: * Pump Speed: * VTS RPM
19 NPSH Req'd at Rated Capacity: * Mwc Safe Min Flow: *
21 Casing Mounting: * SUSPENDED
22 Casing Split: * RADIAL
25 Impeller Diameter: * Maximum: * VTS Minimum: * Actual
26 Efficiency: * 45.00% Rated Power: * 3 KW Max. at end of Curve: * kw
28 Suction Size NB: * 50 Flange Rating, ANSI: *
31 MECHANICAL SEAL
32 Type: * API-682 (Double Mechanical Seal) Manufacturer: * Model Number / Size: *
33 Seal Face Material: * Seal Flush Type: * PLAN 11 Seal Fluid Required: *
36 Speed: RPM VOLTAGE / PHASE / FREQUENCY: 415 V / 3 PH / 50 HZ
39 WEIGHT
41
42 Casing / Barrel: * ASTM216WCB Impeller: * CR S Casing / Impeller Wear Rings: *
43 Shaft: * SS410 Shaft Sleeve: * CR S Diffuser: *
44 Case Gasket: * Gland Plate: * Bearing Housing: *
45 Stuffing Box: * Seal Assembly: * Base Plate: * MS FAB
46 Remarks:
48
49
50

Datasheet for
MS Submersible Pump
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
DATA SHEET FOR MS PUMP (SUBMERSIBLE)

P-101 D
REV. 01

Client Nayara Energy Limited Service MS PUMP (SUBMERSIBLE)
REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0 1
Date 19.12.18 02.01.2019
Prepared By JK JK
Checked By PP PP/BD
Approved By SKJ SKJ
Client Review
Page 1 of 2
DATA SHEET FOR MS PUMP (SUBMERSIBLE)

1 Item No.: P-101 D Applicable Standard: API RP 11S

5 Service: MOTOR SPIRIT (MS) Model No.: Serial No. No. Req.: 1
9 Fluid Pumped: MOTOR SPIRIT (MS) Pumping Temp.: 40 °C Density: 720 - 775 kg/m³
25 Impeller Diameter: * Maximum: * VTS Minimum: * VTS Actual 220
26 Efficiency: * 45.00% Rated Power: * 9.1 KW Max. at end of Curve: * 14.11 kw
28 Suction Size NB: * STRAINER 80 / 65 Flange Rating, ANSI: *
29 Discharge Size NB: * 65 MM /65 Vent / Drain: *
31 MECHANICAL SEAL
37 Permissible Noise Level: 80 DBA Electrical Classification: CL T3 ZONE 2 A-B Gr IIA/IIB 1 Div 1
38 Engine: Item Number / KW: * - KW
39 WEIGHT
41
42 Casing / Barrel: * CARBON STEEL Impeller: * CARBON STEEL Casing / Impeller Wear Rings: * CARBON STEEL
43 Shaft: * AISI 4140 Shaft Sleeve: * CARBON STEEL Diffuser: * N/A
46 Remarks:
48
49

Datasheet for
HSD Submersible Pump
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
DATA SHEET FOR HSD PUMP

(SUBMERSIBLE)
P-201 D REV. 01

Client Nayara Energy Limited Service HSD PUMP (SUBMERSIBLE)
REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0 1
Date 19.12.18 02.01.2019
Prepared By JK JK
Checked By PP PP/BD
Approved By SKJ SKJ
Client Review
Page 1 of 2
DATA SHEET FOR HSD PUMP (SUBMERSIBLE)

1 Item No.: P-201 D Applicable Standard: API RP 11S

5 Service: HIGH SPEED DIESEL (HSD) Model No.: Serial No. No. Req.: 1
9 Fluid Pumped: HIGH SPEED DIESEL (HSD) Pumping Temp.: 40 °C Density: 820 - 840 kg/m³
25 Impeller Diameter: * Maximum: * VTS Minimum: * VTS Actual VTS
31 MECHANICAL SEAL
33 Seal Face Material: * CSVS SIC Seal Flush Type: * Seal Fluid Required: *
37 Permissible Noise Level: 80 DBA Electrical Classification: CL T3 ZONE 2 A-B Gr IIA/IIB Div 1
39 WEIGHT
41
46 Remarks:
48
49
50

Datasheet for Ethanol Pump
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
DATA SHEET FOR ETHANOL PUMPS

(SUBMERSIBLE)
P-300 A/B/C/D/E REV. 01

Project Construction of Petroleum Storage Depot Item No. P-300 A/B/C/D/E
Client Nayara Energy Limited Service ETHANOL PUMP (SUBMERSIBLE)
REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0 1
Date 19.12.18 02.01.2019
Prepared By JK JK
Checked By PP PP/BD
Approved By SKJ SKJ
Client Review
Page 1 of 2
DATA SHEET FOR ETHANOL PUMPS (SUBMERSIBLE)

1 Item No.: P-300 A/B/C/D/E Applicable Standard: API RP 11S

5 Service: ETHANOL Model No.: Serial No. No. Req.: 5
9 Fluid Pumped: ETHANOL Pumping Temp.: 40 °C Density: 1000 kg/m³
13 Suction Pressure Rated: 0.2 Kg/cm2 Max. Suction Pressure: mWC
14 Discharge Pressure Rated: 3.00 Kg/cm2 Differential Head: 75 MLC
15 Differential Pressure: 2.8 Kg/cm2 NPSH Available: FLOODED mWC
16 Hydraulic Power: * KW  Hazardous:  Flammable:
25 Impeller Diameter: * Maximum: * VTS Minimum: * VTS Actual VTS
28 Suction Size NB: * STRAINER Flange Rating, ANSI: * 150 # RF
29 Discharge Size NB: * 65 MM Vent / Drain: *
31 MECHANICAL SEAL
32 Type: * API-682 Double Mechanical Seal) Manufacturer: * LEAK PROOF / EAGLE Model Number / Size: *
39 WEIGHT
41
46 Remarks:
48
49
50

Instrment Air Package
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
PROCESS DATA SHEET FOR INSTRUMENT AIR

PACKAGE
REV. 00
Project No. Unit

Client Nayara Energy Limited Service
Location Pali, Rajasthan Document No.
REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By
Client Review
Page 1 of 4
PROCESS DATA SHEET FOR INSTRUMENT AIR PACKAGE
1 GENERAL
1.1 Package Name: Air Compressor Package
1.2 Package Tag No.
1.3 Area Classification Safe Area
2 DESCRIPTION
2.1 Instrument air system consists of followings.
2.2 - Lubricated Air Compressor (1 W + 1 S) - Pre Filter & After Filter (1 W + 1 S)
2.3 - Air Dryer (1W) - Separator (1 W) - Dew Point Analyzer (1 W)
2.4 - Air Cooler (1W) - Instrument Air receiver (1 W)
3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
3.1 Average Ambient Min / Max Temperature 18.3 / 36 °C
3.2 Average relative humidity 50%-60%
3.3 Altitude from Sea Level 183 m from Mean Sea Level
4 AIR INTAKE FILTER DESIGN DATA
4.1 Type - Dry type Multistage High Efficiency
4.2 Quantity nos. 1 No. (Note. 12)
4.3 Design Criteria - Efficiency of 97% for particle size < 1 microns *
4.4 Allowable Pressure Drop bar 0.012 *
5 AIR COMPRESSOR DESIGN DATA
5.1 Type - Lubricated Screw Type Air Compressor
5.2 Quantity Required nos. 1 Working
5.3 Driver - Electric Motor
5.4 Free Air Delivery m³/hr Vendor to Provide
5.5 Dry Air Design Capacity Nm³/hr 85
5.6 Composition - Air saturated with water
5.7 Discharge Pressure Control - Capacity Control
5.8 OPERATING DESIGN
5.9 Suction Temperature (Min / Max) °C 30 5 - 85
5.1 Suction Pressure Bar a 1.0133 -
5.11 Discharge Pressure (Min. / Nor. / Max.) Bar g 4.5 / 7 / 10 15
5.12 Discharge Temperature °C 40 By Vendor (Note 7)
5.13 MOC (Stator / Rotor) - Vendor to confirm
6 INSTRUMENT AIR DRYER DESIGN DATA
6.1 Type - Pressure Swing Adsorption (PSA) dessicant type with Regeneration facility
6.2 Quantity Required nos. 1 No. (Twin Bed: 1 Drying + 1 Regenerating)
6.3 Dryer Capacity Nm³/hr. 75 (min.)
6.4 Filteration Efficiency for Pre / After-filters % 99.99%
OPERATING
6.5 Pressure (min / nor / max) Bar g 4.5 / 7 / 10
6.6 Temperature °C By Vendor
6.7 Allowable Pressure drop (complete dryer package) Bar 0.7 (max.) at dirty conditions *
6.8 Dessicant Type - Activated Alumina *
6.9 FILTERS:
6.1 Air Pre-filter nos. 1 No.
6.11 Air After-filter nos. 1 No.
6.12 AIR QUALITY AT DRYER OUTLET
6.13 Dew Point °C -40 °C @ 7 barg at skid outlet
6.14 Oil Content mg/m³ ≤ 0.1
6.15 Air Quality at Dryer outlet shall be ISO 8573.1 class 1.2.1. °C Dew Point of -40 °C at 7 barg.
7 DEW POINT ANALYSER
7.1 Quantity Required nos. One (1) No.
8 INSTRUMENT AIR RECEIVER
8.1 Size, ID x Height (S / S) mm x mm By Vendor
8.2 Quantity Required nos. 1 No.
8.3 Operating Pressure (Min / Nor / Max) barg 4.5 / 7 / 10
8.4 Operating Temperature °C 30
8.5 Design Pressure bar g 10
8.6 Design Temperature °C 5-85
8.7 Material Construction - CS with Epoxy Coating
8.8 Corrosion Allowance mm 3
8.9 Design Code - ASME Sec VIII Div. 1
9 GUARANTEES AT SKID BATTERY LIMIT (at air receiver outlet)
9.1 Dry Air Flowrate Nm³/hr. 75
9.2 Dry Air Battery Limit Pressure Bar g 7 (max.)
9.3 Dew Point °C -40 °C at 7 barg at skid outlet
9.4 Solid particle Content micron a) 0.1 to 0.5 micron - 100 particle/m³
b) 0.5 to 1.0 micron - 1 particle/m³
c) 1 to 5 micron - 0 particle/m³
9.5 Oil Content mg/m³ ≤ 0.1
9.6 Air Purge Loss Nm³/hr. 15 % (Vendor to Confirm)
Air Quality at Dryer outlet shall be ISO 8573.1 class 1.2.1.
Vendor to select suitable air compressor capacity to meet above package capacity demand.
* Denotes vendor to confirm / provide.
Doc No.: Rev: 00 Page 2 of 4

PROCESS DATA SHEET FOR INSTRUMENT AIR PACKAGE
NOTES
1 Capacity control for the compressor shall be based on air demand and automatic. Suitable compressor controls to be provided by vendor.
Operating logic shall be as follows.
- Duty compressor runs either loaded or unloaded condition depending on demand as detected by pressure transmitter on air receiver.
- If instrument air pressure does not fall, duty compressor stops after a predetermined time.
- If instrument air pressure falls, duty compressor starts again.
- When duty compressor is in operation, if the pressure falls below certain level due to abnormal condition or high consumption, standby compressor to be
started.
- Once the pressure is restored, standby compressor stops and the duty compressor runs loaded or unloaded condition same as normal operation.
- Loading and unloading based upon receiver pressure should be as below and these setting should be adjustable.
Compressor. 1 Compressor. 2
Unload ** Bar Unload ** Bar
Load ** Bar Load ** Bar
**- By Vendor.
2 Compressor in the instrument air system will be sized to deliver a dry compressed air at package battery limit as per the design capacities mentioned \
3 Maximum ambient temperature of 40 °C shall be used for air cooler sizing.

4 Dryer shall operate under the following service conditions:
i) Inlet conditions: Saturated air at 10 °C above specified ambient conditions.

ii) Discharge conditions: Less than 10 °C than maximum ambient temperature with an outlet pressure dew point of equal to or less than -40
°C.
5 A minimum corrosion allowance of 3 mm shall be provided for all the CS equipment within the package.
6 Compressor discharge shall be protected with a blocked discharge full flow relief valve (provided on air receiver) set at 10 barg.
Compressor discharge equipment and piping system upto the package battery limit shall be designed for maximum 15 barg.
7 All the piping and equipment shall be designed for 5 / 85°C.

8 Compressed air pressure shall not be more than 10 barg at skid battery limit at air receiver outlet.
9 To be decided by vendor based upon Dryer requirement. Should be less than 10°C of maximum ambient temperature.
10 Complete package shall be accommodated in single container, except Instrument Air receiver shall be placed in skidded arrangement including all
accessories like piping, instrument items etc.
11 All individual drains shall be connected in a single header and all tie ins for customer connection shall be terminated with flange.
12 Vendor to provide Differential Pressure Indicating transmitter across filter.
13 Vendor to provide Free air delivery and Instrument receiver sizing calculation.
14 Details shall be confirmed later as per Vendor input.

CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :-

Minimum 5 °C
Seismic Zone II
Maximum rainfall (in mm) per hour 9.98 mm
Datasheet for HSD
Pump (Submersible)
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
DATA SHEET FOR HSD PUMP

(SUBMERSIBLE)
P-201 E REV. 01

Project Construction of Petroleum Storage Depot Item No. P-201 E
Client Nayara Energy Limited Service HSD PUMP (SUBMERSIBLE) FOR HSD DISTRIBUTION
Location Pali, Rajasthan Document No. NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-028A
REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0 1
Date 19.12.18 02.01.2019
Prepared By JK JK
Checked By PP PP/BD
Approved By SKJ SKJ
Client Review
Page 1 of 2
DATA SHEET FOR HSD PUMP (SUBMERSIBLE)

1 Item No.: P-201 E Applicable Standard: API RP 11S

5 Service: HIGH SPEED DIESEL (HSD) Model No.: Serial No. No. Req.: 1
9 Fluid Pumped: HIGH SPEED DIESEL (HSD) Pumping Temp.: 40 °C Density: 820 - 840 kg/m³
14 Discharge Pressure Rated: 3.00 kg/cm2 Differential Head: 27.5 MLC
16 Hydraulic Power: * KW  Hazardous:  Flammable:
25 Impeller Diameter: * Maximum: * 220 Minimum: * 170 Actual 220
31 MECHANICAL SEAL
36 Speed: 2900 / 1500 RPM VOLTAGE / PHASE / FREQUENCY: 415 V / 3 PH / 50 HZ
39 WEIGHT
41
46 Remarks:
48
49
50

Product Hose Datasheet
Sr. Items Description

No.
Inner Lining Polypropylene
Outer Cover Weather proof and abrasion resistant outer cover made of polymeric coated
Polyester fabric.
Outer wire Galvanized wire
Type LD 10 ZZ
Working pressure 10 kg/cm2
Hydro test pressure 15 kg/cm2
Working Temp. + 80 oC
Hose Specification EN 13765/2003 (E) type-2
End connection One end swaged with C.S stub along with 4” NB ASA 150#, back up swivel
flange of C.S. material and other end fitted with C.S cam lock coupling only
female part (coupler)
Service For Unloading of hydrocarbon fuels
SIZE 4” ID X 6 Mtrs Long
2. Cam Locks end fitting, Male Part (Adaptor to suitable above hose with female threading, MOC: CS)
Part - 4.3
Supply, Fabrication of Steel Structures along with
Foundation through PEB method
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
TT Calibration Shed
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
Visitor Parking + Officer Parking
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
Foam Tank Pump House
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
Fire Water Pump House
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
TT Lock & Unlock Shed
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
Surprise Check Platform
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
TLF / TWD Pump House
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
TLF Gantry
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
Watch Tower
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
Part - 4.4
Supply, Fabrication, laying, testing & commissioning of all
piping works – Product Piping, Fire Water Piping, Sprinkler
system, Foam system, Instrument Air
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
RAJASTHAN
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-PI-PMS-001 Rev: 00 Date: 03-02-2019
PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

0 03-02-2019 Issued for Approval JK PP PCS
Page 1 of 38
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 SCOPE
2.0 REFERRED CODES & STANDARDS
3.0 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
4.0 PIPE CLASS IDENTIFICATION
5.0 PIPES
6.0 FLANGES
7.0 FITTINGS
8.0 BENDS, MITRES AND REDUCERS FABRICATED FROM PIPE
9.0 GASKETS
10.0 BOLTING
11.0 MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
12.0 ATTACHMENTS - PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Page 2 of 38
RAJASTHAN
1.0 SCOPE
This specification (PMS) covers the commonly used piping materials specifications for
process, utility and steam services. Schedules / thickness and branch connections
specified herein correspond to pressure-temperature rating given on each class.
2.0 REFERRED CODES & STANDARDS
All Piping shall be designed in accordance with the Process Piping Code, ASME B31.3
All codes, standards and specifications referred to herein shall be as per ASME B 31.3,
Editions and addenda (if any) of referred Codes and Standards shall be as per the Job
Engineering Design Basis (Piping).
For the sake of brevity, the initials of the society to which the codes are referred to
may be omitted in the specification. For example; B16.5 is a code referring to ASME;
A106 is a standard referring to ASTM.
3.0 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Individual piping Class has been generally designed to cover a set of services operating
within pressure-temp. Combination as per ASME B16.5 / B16.34 or part of it.
The PMS shall be strictly adhered to in the design, requisitioning, purchasing,

fabrication and testing of the piping system. However, deviations of material may
occur due to design conditions and / or availability. All substitutions must be duly
approved.
Unless mentioned otherwise, pipe thicknesses in the specs are for above ground
piping.
Page 3 of 38
RAJASTHAN
4.0 PIPE CLASS IDENTIFICATION
The class designation shall consist of not more than three components made up of a
letter, number & letter; e.g. B1A.
a. The first letter indicates pressure rating.
A/J 150 Class

B 300 Class
C 600 Class
b. The middle number indicates difference in the specifications within the same
rating and material as enlisted in the Table attached.
Page 4 of 38
RAJASTHAN
TABLE FOR MIDDLE NUMBER
Middle Carbon Steel – A Alloy Steel - B, C, D, E, SS304 / SS304 H / S304 L K SS 316 / 316H / 321 / 347 / LINED STEEL Y
No. F, G, H 321H M
1 CA = 1.5 CA = 1.5 CA = NIL (SS 304) CA = NIL (SS 316)
2 CA = 0 (GALV) CA = 1.5 (IBR) CA = NIL (SS 304 - CRYO) CA = NIL (SS 321 - CRYO)
3 CA = 1.5 (Cat ’D’) CA = 6.0 CA = NIL (CAT ‘D’ SS 304) CA = 1.5 (SS321)
4 CA = 1.5 (LTCS) CA = 3.0 CA = 1.5 (SS 304H) CA = NIL (SS321)
5 CA = 1.5 (Hydrogen) CA = 1.5 (Hydrogen) CA = 3.0 (SS 304H) CA = 1.5 (SS316H) + H2 CA = 0, GALV < 6”
CEMENT LINED >= 6”
6 CA = 4.5 CA = 4.5 CA = 1.5 (SS 304L) CA = NIL (SS 316H)
7 CA = 1.5 (Vacuum) CA = Nil (SS 304L - Vacuum) CA = NIL (SS 347)
8 CA = 1.5 (Conc. Sulphuric Acid) CA = 1.5 (SS 304L - CRYO) CA = 1.5 (SS 347)
9 CA = 3.0 CA = 1.5 (SS 304) CA = 1.5 (SS 316)
10 CA = 1.5 (Offsites)
11 CA = 3.0 (Max. Hardness 200 BHN) CA = NIL (SS 304L)
12 CA = 6.0 (IBR) CA = NIL (SS 304 - IBR)
13 CA = 6.0
14 CA = 3.0 (NACE) CA = 3.0 (NACE) CA = 3.0 (SS 321 - NACE)
15 CA = 3.0 (Liquid Sulphur)
16 CA = 4.5 (NACE) CA = 4.5 (NACE) CA = 1.5 (SS 304L - NACE) CA = 1.5 (SS 321 - NACE)
17 CA = 3.0 (Cl, HCl dry)
18 CA = 1.5 (Oxygen) CA = NIL (SS 304L - Oxygen)
19 CA = 3.0 (Caustic, Stress Relieved)
20 CA = 1.5 (Jacket for A15A)
21 CA = 1.5 (SS 304) CA = 1.5 (SS 316)
22 CA = 1.5 (IBR) CA = 3.0 (SS 304H) CA = 1.5 (SS 316)
23 CA = 1.5
Page 5 of 38
RAJASTHAN
Middle Carbon Steel – A Alloy Steel - B, C, D, E, SS304 / SS304 H / S304 L K SS 316 / 316H / 321 / 347 / LINED STEEL Y
No. F, G, H 321H M
25 CA = 1.5
26 CA = 1.5
27 CA = 1.5
31 CA = 1.5 (SS 304H) (-29 to 704 CA = 1.5 (SS 316) (-29 TO 704 °C)
°C)
32 CA = 1.5 STEAM TRACING
33 CA = 1.5 (UNDER / ABOVE GROUND FIRE
WATER)
34 CA = 0 (GALV) ≤ 12” (FIRE WATER SPRAY)
& FOAM SOL)
Page 6 of 38
RAJASTHAN
c. The last letter indicates type of material.
A Carbon Steel H 3.5% Ni Steel

B Carbon Mo Steel J Nickel / Titanium
C 1.0% Cr, 0.5% Mo Steel K Stainless Steel type 304, 304H, 304L.
D 1.25% Cr, 0.5% Mo Steel L Aluminium
E 2.25% Cr, 1.0% Mo Steel M Stabilised stainless steel type 316, 316H, 321, 321H, 347
F 5.0% Cr, 0.5 % Mo Steel N 316 L Stainless steel
G 9.0% Cr, 1.0% Mo Steel Y Lined Steel
5.0 PIPES
 Pipe dimension shall be in accordance with ASME B36.10, IS 1239 & IS 3589 for
wrought steel and wrought iron pipe; to B36.10 / B36.19 for stainless steel pipe
and respective ASTM Standard for non-ferrous and non - metallic pipes.
 All pipe threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1 except where otherwise noted.
 Pipe thicknesses not covered in different classes of this specification shall be
calculated to meet specific job requirement based on actual max. Design condition
to economies on thickness. However, in such cases the thickness shall be
calculated at not less than 80% of class rating. Unless defined otherwise in the Job
Engineering Design Basis (Piping).
 Maximum of 10% of Corrosion Allowance may be adjusted to optimize on pipe
schedule. However, if CA is suffixed by 'minimum', this downward adjustment shall
not be used.
 Non-standard pipe sizes 1¼”, 2½”, 3½”, 5” and 22” shall not be treated as a part
of this specification.
 Galvanized Pipes shall be only Hot Dip galvanized as per IS 2629
6.0 FLANGES
 Flanges shall be in accordance with the following codes, except where otherwise
noted:
Upto 24” (150# - 1500#) ASME B16.5

Upto 12” 2500# ASME B16.5
Above 24” ASME B16.47 SERIES ‘B’ / AWWA
Page 7 of 38
RAJASTHAN
 Flanges to ASME B16.47 SERIES ‘A’ or any other standard (e.g. DIN, GOST, JIS etc.)
may be specified to mate with equipment or valve flanges with the corresponding
bolting.
 Finish of steel flange faces shall be as follows:
Stock Finish: 1000 μin AARH max.

Serrated Finish / 125 AARH /: Serrations with 125 – 250 μin AARH
Smooth finish AARH: 32 TO 63 μin AARH
 Brinnel hardness for RTJ groove shall be at least 20 BHN more than that of
corresponding gasket as specified.
 Fig. 8 and SPCR & BLN shall be as per B16.48 upto 24” (150 - 1500#) & upto 12” for
2500#. For other sizes; it shall be as per manufacturer’s standard suiting to
matching flanges procured.
7.0 FITTINGS
 Forged steel SW and threaded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.11,
unless otherwise specified. For items not covered under B16.11, reference may be
made to BS 3799 (or appropriate MSS-SP-Std).
 BW Fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.9, unless otherwise specified.
 Dimensions of steel BW fittings for sizes not covered in ASME B16.9 shall conform
to MSS-SP-Std.
 Usage of unions shall be restricted to utilities only.
8.0 BENDS, MITRES AND REDUCERS FABRICATED FROM PIPE
Miters and Reducers fabricated from Pipe may be used if specified in particular Piping
Class.
9.0 GASKETS
 Non-metallic gaskets shall conform to B16.21 (corresponding to B16.5) up to 24”

and B16.21 (corresponding to B16.47B) beyond 24", unless otherwise specified.
 Spiral wound gaskets (SP.WND or SPWD) and Ring Joint gaskets shall conform to
B16.20.
Page 8 of 38
RAJASTHAN
10.0 BOLTING
 All bolts shall conform to B18.2.1, nuts to be B18.2.2. Reference shall also be
made to B16.5 for studs.
 Threads shall be to coarse Thread Series, B1.1, having Class 2A allowances for bolts
and studs, and Class 2B tolerance for nuts.
 Nuts for Bolts and Studs shall be the American Standard Hexagon Heavy Series.
11.0 MATERIAL SPECIFICATION INDEX
S. No Piping Spec. ASME Rating Service Piping Material Piping C. A

1 A1A Class 150, RF Motor Spirit, High Speed Carbon Steel - A106 1.5 MM
Diesel, Ethanol Gr B / APL 5L Gr B
2 A1K Class 150, RF Chemical Additives, Foam Stainless Steel - SS 0 MM
Concentrate 304
3 A33A Class 150, RF Fire Water Carbon Steel - IS-1239 1.5 MM
/ IS-3589
4 J2A Class 150, RF Instrument Air Carbon Steel (Galv.) 0 MM
IS-1239 (Galv.)
5 J34A Class 150, RF Foam Solution and Fire Water Carbon Steel - Galv 0 MM
Spray (IS 1239 & IS 3589)
Page 9 of 38
RAJASTHAN
12.0 ATTACHMENTS - PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Page 10 of 38
ANSI Class 150 # Pipe Class A1A

Corr. All. 1.5 MM
Base Material Carbon Steel
TEMPERATURE (Deg. C) AND PRESSURE (Kg/Sq. cm g) RATINGS
TEMP °C -29.00 38.00 93.00

PRESS.Kg/cm²(g) 15.00 15.00 15.00
MOTOR SPIRIT, HIGH SPEED DIESEL

SERVICE
ETHANOL
ITEM SIZE DESCRIPTION
MAINTAINENCE JOINTS ALL FLANGED (TO BE KEPT MINIMUM)

PIPE JOINTS 1½" AND BELOW SW COUPLING
2" AND ABOVE BUTT WELDED
DRAINS ON LINES ≤ 1½" REFER IOTDE STD
ON LINES ≥ 2" AS PER P & ID OR 0.75".
VENTS ON LINES ≤ 1½" REFER IOTDE STD
ON LINES ≤ 2" AS PER P & ID OR 0.75".
TEMP. CONN. 1½" FLANGED. REFER IOTDE STD
PRESS. CONN. ¾" SW NIPPLE WITH VALVE TO SPEC
1 ASBESTOS FREE GASKETS AND STEM PACKING SHALL BE USED FOR ALL VALVES.
NOTES
2 SCHDULE / THICKNESS SHALL BE SELECTED WITH RESPECT TO THE PIPE WALL THICKNESS PROVIDED.
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-PI-PMS-001 Rev: 00 Page 11 of 38


Corr. All. 1.5 MM
48
44
42
40
36
34
32
30
26
T 24
T R 22
T R R 20
T R R R 18
BRANCH PIPE NB
T R R R R 16
T R R R R R 14
T P R R R R R 12
T P P R R R R R 10
T P P P R R R R R 8
T P P P P R R R R R 6
5
T P P P P P R R R R R 4
3½
T P P P P P P R R R R R 3
2½
T P P P P P P P R R R R R 2
T T H H H H H H H H H H H H 1½
1¼
T T H H H H H H H H H H H H H 1
T T T H H H H H H H H H H H H H ¾
T T T T H H H H H H H H H H H H H ½
¼
¼ ½ ¾ 1 1¼ 1½ 2 2½ 3 3½ 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 30 32 34 36 40 42 44 48
RUN PIPE NB
BRANCH CONNECTION CHART LEGEND
CODE DESCRIPTION
H H. COUPLING
P PIPE TO PIPE
R REINFORCED
S SOCKOLETS
T TEES
W WELDOLETS


Corr. All. 1.5 MM
INPUT ID ITEM TYPE DIA. (INCH NB) ENDS / FACE SCH / THK / RATING DESCRIPTION DESG. STD. BASIC MATERIAL NOTE
FROM TO CARBON STEEL
DESCRIPTION
PIPE GROUP
PIP PIPE ½" ¾" PE SCH 160 SEAMLESS B 36.10 ASTM A 106 GR. B
PIP PIPE 1" 1½" PE XS SEAMLESS B 36.10 ASTM A 106 GR. B
PIP PIPE 2" 2" BE Sch 40 SEAMLESS B 36.10 ASTM A 106 GR. B
PIP PIPE 3" 6" BE Sch 40 SEAMLESS B 36.10 ASTM A 106 GR. B
PIP PIPE 8" 20" BE Sch 20 ERW B 36.10 API 5L GR. B, PSL 1
PIP PIPE 22" 24" BE Sch 20 E.F.S.W B 36.10 API 5L GR. B, PSL 1
NIP NIPPLE ½" ¾" PBE SCH 160 SEAMLESS B 36.10 ASTM A 106 GR. B
NIP NIPPLE 1" 1½" PBE XS SEAMLESS B 36.10 ASTM A 106 GR. B
FITTING GROUP
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW ½" 1½" SW 3000#. B 16.11 ASTM A 105
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW 2" 6" BE M R = 1.5D ASTM A 105 B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB 3
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW 8" 24" BE M R = 1.5D ASTM A 105 B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB-W 3
TEE / RTEE TEE ½" 1½" S.W 3000# EQUAL / REDUCING B 16.11 ASTM A 105
TEE / RTEE TEE 2" 6" BE M, M EQUAL / REDUCING B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB 3
TEE / RTEE TEE 8" 24" BE M, M EQUAL / REDUCING B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB-W 3
ERE / CRE REDUCER 2" 6" BE M, M CONC. / ECC. B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB 3
ERE / CRE REDUCER 8" 24" BE M, M CONC. / ECC. B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB-W 3
SWGC / SWGE SWAGE ½" 3" PBE M, M CONC. / ECC. BS 3799 ASTM A 105 3
CAP CAP 2" 24" BE M B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB 3
CPLH / CPLF COUPLING ½" 1½" S.W 3000# HALF / FULL B 16.11 ASTM A 105
CPLR COUPLING RED ½" 1½" S.W 3000# B 16.11 ASTM A 105
FLANGE GROUP
FLG FLANGE SW ½" 1½" RF M 150#, Ra=125 AARH B 16.5 ASTM A 105 3
FLG FLANGE WN 2" 24" RF M 150#, Ra=125 AARH B 16.5 ASTM A 105 3
FBLD FLANGE BLIND ½" 24" RF 150#, Ra=125 AARH B 16.5 ASTM A 105
FEF FLANGE FIG. 8 ½" 8" FF 150#, Ra=125 AARH B 16.48 ASTM A 105
FEF SPACER & BLIND 10" 24" FF 150#, Ra=125 AARH B 16.48 ASTM A 105


Corr. All. 1.5 MM
VALVES GROUP
GAT GATE VALVE ½" 1½" SW 800# SW-3000#, B 16.11, B:A 105; T:13% Cr; St API 602 BODY - ASTM A 105, TRIM: STELLITED, STEM: 13% CR. STEEL
51001
GAT GATE VALVE 2" 24" RF 150# FLG TO B 16.5, Ra=125 AARH, B:A 216 GR. API 600 BODY - ASTM A 216 GR.WCB, TRIM 13% Cr STEEL 51001
WCB; T:SS 304
GLO GLOBE VALVE ½" 1½" SW 800# SW-3000#, B 16.11 B:A 105; T:13% Cr; St BS EN ISO 15761 BODY - ASTM A 105, TRIM: STELLITED, STEM: 13% CR. STEEL
51001
GLO GLOBE VALVE 2" 16" RF 150# FLG TO B 16.5, Ra=125 AARH, B:A 216 GR. BS 1873 BODY - ASTM A 216 GR.WCB, TRIM 13% Cr STEEL 51001
WCB; T:SS 304
CHV CHECK VALVE ½" 1½" SW 800# SW-3000#, B 16.11, B:A 105; T:13% Cr; St BS EN ISO 15761 BODY - ASTM A 105, TRIM: STELLITED 51001
CHV CHECK VALVE 2" 24" RF 150# FLG TO B 16.5, Ra=125 AARH, B:A 216 GR. BS-1868 BODY - ASTM A 216 GR. WCB, TRIM 13% Cr STEEL 51001
WCB; T:SS 304
BAL BALL VALVE ½" 16" RF 150# FLG TO B 16.5, Ra=125 AARH, B:A 216 GR. BS EN ISO 17292 BODY ASTM A 105 / A 216 GR. WCB, TRIM 13% Cr, BODY SEAT
WCB; T:SS 304 RPTFE 51001
BFLY BUTTERFLY VALVE 3" 24" RF 150# FLG TO B 16.5, Ra=125 AARH, B:A 216 GR. API 609 BODY A 216 GR. WCB, TRIM 13% Cr STEEL 51001
WCB; T:SS 304
BOLT GROUP
BLT STUD BOLT ½" 24" 150# B 18.2.1 / 18.2.2 ASTM A193 GR. B7 / A194 GR. 2H
GASKET
GSK GASKET ½" 24" RF 150# B 16.20, ANSI B16.5 SS 316 SPIRAL WOUND WITH GRAPHITE FILLER
SPECIAL ITEMS
TSR TEMPERORY STRAINER 1½" 24" RF 150# CONE TYPE MNF'S STD B: A 516 GR. 70, INTERNALS: SS 304
PSR PERMANENT STRAINER ½" 1½" SW 800# Y-TYPE MNF'S STD BODY: A 105, INTERNALS: SS 304
PSR PERMANENT STRAINER 2" 6" BE 150# T-TYPE MNF'S STD BODY: A 234 GR. WPB, INTERNALS: SS 304
PSR PERMANENT STRAINER 8" 24" BE 150# T-TYPE MNF'S STD BODY: A 234 GR. WPB-W, INTERNALS: SS 304


Corr. All. 1.5 MM
TEMP °C 0.00 38.00 50.00 65.00

PRESS.Kg/cm²(g) 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00
UTILITY - PLANT AIR

SERVICE

DRAINS ON LINES ≤ 1½"
VENTS ON LINES ≤ 1½"
TEMP. CONN. 1½" FLANGED.
1 BLIND FLANGES AND SPACER & BLINDS SPECIFIED TO MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR 70 DEG.C AND 7.0 KG/CM²G TO SUIT 150#, FF, 125 AARH, AWWA C207 CL.D FLANGES.
NOTES


Corr. All. 1.5 MM
48
44
42
40
36
34
32
30
26
T 24
T R 22
T R R 20
T P R R 18
BRANCH PIPE NB
T P P R R 16
T P P P R R 14
T P P P P R R 12
T P P P P P R R 10
T P P P P P P R R 8
T P P P P P P P R R 6
5
T P P P P P P P P R R 4
3½
T P P P P P P P R P R R 3
2½
T P P P P P P P P P P R R 2
1¼
¼
¼ ½ ¾ 1 1¼ 1½ 2 2½ 3 3½ 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 30 32 34 36 40 42 44 48
RUN PIPE NB
CODE DESCRIPTION
H H. COUPLING
P PIPE TO PIPE
R REINFORCED
S SOCKOLETS
T TEES
W WELDOLETS


Corr. All. 1.5 MM
DESCRIPTION
PIPE GROUP
PIP PIPE ½" 1½" PE HVY C. WELDED IS-1239-I IS-1239 (BLACK)

PIP PIPE 2" 6" BE HVY C. WELDED IS-1239-I IS-1239 (BLACK)
PIP PIPE 8" 12" BE 6 MM THK WELDED IS-3589 IS-3589 GR.330
NIP NIPPLE ½" 1½" PBE HVY C. WELDED IS-3589 IS-1239 (BLACK)
FITTING GROUP
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW ½" 1½" SW 3000#. R = 1.5D, ASTM A 105 B 16.11 ASTM A 105
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW 2" 24" BE M EQUAL / REDUCING B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR .WPB 4
TEE / RTEE TEE ½" 1½" S.W 3000# EQUAL / REDUCING B 16.11 ASTM A 105
TEE / RTEE TEE 2" 6" BE M EQUAL / REDUCING B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB 4
TEE / RTEE TEE 8" 24" BE M, M CONC. / ECC. B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB-W 4
ERE / CRE REDUCER 2" 6" BE M CONC. / ECC. B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB 4
ERE / CRE REDUCER 8" 24" BE M, M CONC. / ECC. B 16.9 IS-3589 GR. 330 4
SWGC / SWGE SWAGE ½" 3" PBE M, M BS 3799 ASTM A 105 4
CAP CAP ½" 1½" SCRF 3000# B 16.11 ASTM A 105
CAP CAP 2" 24" BE M HALF / FULL B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB 4
CPLH / CPLF COUPLING ½" 1½" S.W 3000# B 16.11 ASTM A 105
UNN UNION ½" 1½" S.W 3000# BS-3799 ASTM A 105
FLANGE GROUP
FLG FLANGE SO 2" 24" RF M 150#, Ra=125 AARH B 16.5 ASTM A 105 4


Corr. All. 1.5 MM
VALVES GROUP
GAT GATE VALVE ½" 1½" SW 800# SW-3000#, B16.11, B:A 105; T:13% Cr; St API 602 / ISO 15761 BODY - ASTM A 105, TRIM: STELLITED, STEM: 13% CR. STEEL
51001
GAT GATE VALVE 2" 24" RF 150# FLG TO B16.5, Ra=125 AARH, B:A 216 GR. API 600 / ISO 10434 BODY - ASTM A 216 GR.WCB, TRIM 13% Cr STEEL 51001
WCB; T:SS 304
GLO GLOBE VALVE ½" 1½" SW 800# SW-3000#, B16.11, B:A 105; T:13% Cr; St BS EN ISO 15761 BODY - ASTM A 105, TRIM: STELLITED, STEM: 13% CR. STEEL
51001
GLO GLOBE VALVE 2" 16" RF 150# FLG TO B16.5, Ra=125 AARH, B:A 216 GR. BS 1873 BODY - ASTM A 216 GR.WCB, TRIM 13% Cr STEEL 51001
WCB; T:SS 304
CHV CHECK VALVE ½" 1½" SW 800# SW-3000#, B16.11, B:A 105; T:13% Cr;St BS EN ISO 15761 BODY - ASTM A 105, TRIM: STELLITED 51001
CHV CHECK VALVE 2" 24" RF 150# FLG TO B16.5, Ra=125 AARH, B:A 216 GR. BS-1868 BODY - ASTM A 216 GR.WCB, TRIM 13% Cr STEEL 51001
WCB; T:SS 304
BAL BALL VALVE ½" 16" RF 150# FLG TO B16.5, Ra=125 AARH, B:A 216 GR. BS EN ISO 17292 BODY ASTM A 105 / A 216 GR.WCB, TRIM13% Cr, BODY SEAT
WCB; T:SS 304 RPTFE 51001
BFLY BUTTERFLY VALVE 3" 24" RF 150# WAFL, FLG TO B16.5, Ra=125 AARH, B:A 216 BS EN 593 BODY- ASTM A 216 GR.WCB, TRIM 13% Cr STEEL 51001
GR. WCB; T:SS 304
BOLT GROUP
BLT STUD BOLT ½" 16" 150# B 18.2.1 / 18.2.2 BOLT: A 193 GR. B7, NUT: A 194 GR. 2H
GASKET
GSK GASKET ½" 24" RF 150# RING, 2 MM B-16.21 - ANSI B 16.5 NON ASBESTOS BS 7531 GR X
SPECIAL ITEMS
TSR TEMPERORY STRAINER 1½" 24" FF 150# CONE TYPE MNF'S STD B:A 285 GR.C; INT: SS 304
PSR PERMANENT STRAINER ½" 1½" SW 800# Y-TYPE MNF'S STD B:A 105; INT: SS 304
PSR PERMANENT STRAINER 2" 6" BE M T-TYPE MNF'S STD B:A 234 GR. WPB; INT: SS 304 4
PSR PERMANENT STRAINER 8" 24" BE M T-TYPE MNF'S STD B:A 234 GR. WPBW; INT: SS304 4

ANSI Class 150 # Pipe Class A1K

Corr. All. 0 MM
TEMP °C 0.00 65.00

PRESS.Kg/cm²(g) 12.00 12.00
FOAM CONCENTRATE
SERVICE

NOTES


Corr. All. 0 MM
48
44
42
40
36
34
32
30
26
T 24
T R 22
T R R 20
T R R R 18
BRANCH PIPE NB
T P R R R 16
T P R R R R 14
T P R R R R R 12
T P R R R R R R 10
T P P R R R R R R 8
T P P P R R R R R R 6
5
T P P P P R R R R R R 4
3½
T P P P P P P R R R R R 3
2½
T P P P P P P P R R R R R 2
1¼
¼
¼ ½ ¾ 1 1¼ 1½ 2 2½ 3 3½ 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 30 32 34 36 40 42 44 48
RUN PIPE NB
CODE DESCRIPTION
H H. COUPLING
P PIPE TO PIPE
R REINFORCED
S SOCKOLETS
T TEES
W WELDOLETS


Corr. All. 0 MM
DESCRIPTION
PIPE GROUP
PIP PIPE ½" ¾" PE 80S SEAMLESS B 13.19 ASTM A 312 TP 304
PIP PIPE 1" 1½" BE 40S SEAMLESS B 13.19 ASTM A 312 TP 304
PIP PIPE 2" 2" BE 40S SEAMLESS B 13.19 ASTM A 312 TP 304
PIP PIPE 3" 8" BE 10S SEAMLESS B 13.19 ASTM A 312 TP 304
PIP PIPE 10" 24" BE 10S E. F. W B 13.19 ASTM A 358 TP 304 CL.1
NIP NIPPLE ½" ¾" PBE 80S SEAMLESS B 13.19 ASTM A 312 TP 304
NIP NIPPLE 1 1½" PBE 40S SEAMLESS B 13.19 ASTM A 312 TP 304
FITTING GROUP
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW ½" 1½" SW 3000# B 16.11 ASTM A 182 GR. F 304
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW 2" 8" BE M R = 1.5D B 16.9 ASTM A 403 GR. WP 304-S 3
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW 10" 24" BE M R = 1.5D B 16.9 ASTM A 403 GR. WP 304-WX 3
TEE / RTEE TEE ½" 1½" SW 3000# B 16.11 ASTM A 182 GR. F 304
TEE / RTEE TEE 2" 8" BE M R = 1.5D B 16.9 ASTM A 403 GR. WP 304-S 3
TEE / RTEE TEE 10" 24" BE M R = 1.5D B 16.9 ASTM A 403 GR. WP 304-WX 3
ERE / CRE REDUCER 2" 8" BE M, M CONC. / ECC. B 16.9 ASTM A 403 GR. WP 304-S 3
ERE / CRE REDUCER 10" 24" BE M, M CONC. / ECC. B 16.9 ASTM A 403 GR. WP 304-WX 3
SWGC / SWGE SWAGE ½" 3" PBE M, M CONC. / ECC. BS 3799 ASTM A 182 GR. F 304 3
CAP COUPLING 2" 24" BE M B 16.9 ASTM A 403 GR. WP 304-S 3
CPLH / CPLF COUPLING RED ½" 1½" S.W 3000# HALF / FULL B 16.11 ASTM A 182 GR. F 304
CPLR STUB. END ½" 1½" S.W 3000# B 16.11 ASTM A 182 GR. F 304
STB STUB. END 2" 8" BE M B 16.9 ASTM A 403 GR. WP 304-S 3
STB STUB. END 10" 24" BE M B 16.11 ASTM A 403 GR. WP 304-WX 3
FLANGE GROUP
FLG FLANGE WN ½" 1½" RF M 150#, Ra=125 AARH B 16.5 ASTM A 182 GR. F 304 3
FLG FLANGE LJ 2" 24" M 150#, STK / MAX 1000 AARH B 16.5 ASTM A 105 3
FBLD FLANGE BLIND ½" 24" RF 150#, Ra=125 AARH B 16.5 ASTM A 182 GR. F 304
FEF FLANGE FIG. 8 ½" 8" FF 150#, Ra=125 AARH B 16.48 ASTM A 182 GR. F 304
FEF SPACER & BLIND 10" 24" FF 150#, Ra=125 AARH B 16.48 ASTM A 182 GR. F 304


Corr. All. 0 MM
VALVES GROUP
GAT GATE VALVE ½" 1½" SW 800# SW-3000#, B 16.11, B:A 105; T:13% Cr; St API 602 BODY - ASTM A 182 GR. F304, TRIM STELLITED, STEM SS 304
51001
GAT GATE VALVE 2" 24" RF 150# FLG TO B 16.5, Ra=125 AARH B:A 216 GR. API 600 BODY - ASTM A 351 GR. CF8, TRIM - SS 304 51001
WCB; T:SS 304
GLO GLOBE VALVE ½" 1½" SW 800# SW-3000#, B 16.11 B:A 105; T:13% Cr; St BS EN ISO 15761 BODY - ASTM A 182 GR. F304, TRIM STELLITED, STEM SS 304
51001
GLO GLOBE VALVE 2" 16" RF 150# FLG TO B16.5, Ra=125 AARH B:A 216 GR. WCB; BS 1873 BODY - ASTM A 351 GR. CF8, TRIM - SS 304 51001
T:SS 304
CHV CHECK VALVE ½" 1½" SW 800# SW-3000#, B16.11 B:A 105; T:13% Cr; St BS EN ISO 15761 BODY - ASTM A 182 GR. F304, TRIM - STELLITED 51001
CHV CHECK VALVE 2" 24" RF 150# FLG TO B16.5, Ra=125 AARH, B:A 216 GR. BS-1868 BODY - ASTM A 351 GR. CF8, TRIM - SS 304 51001
WCB; T:SS 304
BAL BALL VALVE ½" 16" RF 150# FLG TO B16.5, Ra=125 AARH, B:A 216 GR. BS EN ISO 17292 BODY - ASTM A 182 GR. F304 / ASTM A 351 GR. CF8, TRIM
WCB; T:SS 304 SEAT - RPTFE 51001
BOLT GROUP
BLT STUD BOLT ½" 24" 150# B 18.2.1 / 18.2.2 ASTM A193 GR. B8 / A194 GR. 8
GASKET
GSK GASKET ½" 24" RF 150# B-16.21 - ANSI B 16.5 SP. WND SS 316 + GRAFOIL
SPECIAL ITEMS
TSR TEMPERORY STRAINER 1½" 24" RF 150# CONE TYPE MNF'S STD B:A 240 TP 304; INT: SS 304
PSR PERMANENT STRAINER ½" 1½" SW 800# Y-TYPE MNF'S STD B:A 182 GR. F 304; INT: SS 304
PSR PERMANENT STRAINER 2" 8" RF 150# FLGD T-TYPE MNF'S STD B:A 403 GR. WP 304-; INT: SS 304
PSR PERMANENT STRAINER 8" 24" RF 150# FLGD T-TYPE MNF'S STD B:A 403 GR. WP 304-WX; INT: SS 304


Corr. All. 1.5 MM
TEMP °C 0.00 65.00

PRESS.Kg/cm²(g) 16.00 16.00
FIRE WATER
SERVICE

NOTES
2 FOR UNDER GROUND LINES PROVIDE WRAPPING AND COATING AS PER SPECIFICATION.
3 SCHDULE SHALL BE SELECTED WITH RESPECT TO THE PIPE WALL THICKNESS PROVIDED.


Corr. All. 1.5 MM
48
44
42
40
36
34
T 32
T R 30
T R R 26
T R R R 24
T R R R R 22
T R R R R R 20
T R R R R R R 18
BRANCH PIPE NB
T R R R R R R R 16
T R R R R R R R R 14
T R R R R R R R R R 12
T R R R R R R R R R R 10
T P R R R R R R R R R R 8
T P P R R R R R R R R R R 6
5
T R P P R R R R R R R R R R 4
3½
T P R P P R R R R R R R R R R 3
2½
T P P R P P R R R R R R R R R R 2
T T H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H 1½
1¼
T T H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H 1
T T T H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H ¾
T T T T H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H ½
¼
¼ ½ ¾ 1 1¼ 1½ 2 2½ 3 3½ 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 30 32 34 36 40 42 44 48
RUN PIPE NB
CODE DESCRIPTION
H H. COUPLING
P PIPE TO PIPE
R REINFORCED
S SOCKOLETS
T TEES
W WELDOLETS


Corr. All. 1.5 MM
DESCRIPTION
PIPE GROUP
PIP PIPE ½" 1½" PE HVY C. WELDED IS-1239-I IS-1239 (BLACK)

PIP PIPE 2" 6" BE HVY C. WELDED IS-1239-I IS-1239 (BLACK)
PIP PIPE 8" 20" BE 6 MM THK WELDED IS-3589 IS-3589 GR. 410
PIP PIPE 24" 24" BE 8 MM THK WELDED IS-3589 IS-3589 GR. 410
NIP NIPPLE ½" 1½" PBE C. WELDED HVY IS-1239-I IS-1239 (BLACK)
FITTING GROUP
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW ½" 1½" SW 3000# B 16.11 ASTM A 105
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW 2" 6" BE M R = 1.5D B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB 4
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW 8" 24" BE M R = 1.5D B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB-W 4
TEE / RTEE TEE ½" 1½" SW 3000# EQUAL / REDUCING B 16.11 ASTM A 105
TEE / RTEE TEE 2" 6" BE M EQUAL / REDUCING B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB 4
TEE / RTEE TEE 8" 24" BE M EQUAL / REDUCING B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB-W 4
ERE / CRE REDUCER 2" 6" BE M CONC. / ECC. B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB 4
ERE / CRE REDUCER 8" 24" BE M, M CONC. / ECC. MNF'S STD ASTM A 234 GR. WPB-W 4
SWGC / SWGE SWAGE ½" 3" PBE M, M CONC. / ECC. BS 3799 ASTM A 105 4
CAP CAP ½" 1½" SCRF 3000# B 16.11 ASTM A 105
CAP CAP 2" 24" BE M B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB 4
CPLH / CPLF COUPLING ½" 1½" S.W 3000# HALF / FULL B 16.11 ASTM A 105
UNN UNION ½" 1½" S.W 3000# BS-3799 ASTM A 105
FLANGE GROUP
FLG FLANGE SO 2" 24" RF M 150#, Ra=125 AARH B 16.5 ASTM A 105 4


Corr. All. 1.5 MM
VALVES GROUP
GAT GATE VALVE ½" 1½" SW 800# SW-3000#, B16.11, B:A 105; T:13% Cr;St API 602 / ISO 15761 BODY A105, TRIM: STELLITED, STEM: 13% CR. STEEL
GAT GATE VALVE 2" 24" RF 150# FLG TO B16.5, Ra=125 AARH B:A 216 GR. WCB; API 600 / ISO 10434 BODY A216 GR. WCB, TRIM 13% Cr STEEL
T:SS 304
GLO GLOBE VALVE ½" 1½" SW 800# SW-3000#, B16.11, B:A 105; T:13% Cr;St BS EN ISO 15761 BODY A105, TRIM: STELLITED, STEM: 13% CR. STEEL
GLO GLOBE VALVE 2" 16" RF 150# FLG TO B16.5, Ra=125 AARH B:A 216 GR. WCB; BS 1873 BODY A216 GR. WCB, TRIM 13% Cr STEEL
T:SS 304
CHV CHECK VALVE ½" 1½" SW 800# SW-3000#, B16.11 BS EN ISO 15761 BODY A105, TRIM: STELLITED
CHV CHECK VALVE 2" 24" RF 150# FLG TO B16.5, Ra=125 AARH B:A 216 GR. WCB; BS-1868 BODY A216 GR. WCB, TRIM 13% Cr STEEL
T:SS 304
BOLT GROUP
BLT STUD BOLT ½" 24" 150# B 18.2.1 / 18.2.2 BOLT: A193 GR. B7, NUT: A194 GR. 2H
GASKET
GSK GASKET ½" 24" RF 150# RING, 2 MM B-16.21 - ANSI B 16.5 NON-ASBESTOS BS 7531 GR X
SPECIAL ITEMS
TSR TEMPERORY STRAINER 1½" 24" FF 150# CONE TYPE MNF'S STD B:A285 GR. C; INT: SS 304
PSR PERMANENT STRAINER ½" 1½" SW 800# Y-TYPE MNF'S STD B:A105; INT: SS 304
PSR PERMANENT STRAINER 2" 6" RF 150#, FLGD T-TYPE MNF'S STD B:A234 GR. WPB; INT: SS 304 4
PSR PERMANENT STRAINER 8" 24" RF 150#, FLGD T-TYPE MNF'S STD B:A234 GR. WPBW; INT: SS 304 4

ANSI Class 150 # Pipe Class J2A

Corr. All. 0 MM
Base Material CS (Galv.)
TEMP °C 0.00 38.00 65.00

PRESS.Kg/cm²(g) 10.55 10.55 10.55
INSTRUMENT AIR
SERVICE
MAINTAINENCE JOINTS 1.5" & BELOW UNIONS (SCRF) TO BE KEPT MINIMUM

2" & BELOW FLANGED (SCREWED) TO BE KEPT MINIMUM
PIPE JOINTS UPTO 6" SCREWED COUPLING
ON LINES ≥ 2" AS PER P & ID OR 0.75"
VENTS ON LINES ≤ 1½"
ON LINES ≥ 2" AS PER P & ID OR 0.75"
PRESS. CONN. ¾" SCRD NIPPLE WITH VALVE TO SPEC
1 THREADED JOINTS SHALL BE MADE WITH 1" WIDTH PTFE JOINING TAPE.
2 SURFACES WHERE GALVANISING HAS BEEN BURNT OFF SHALL BE WIRE BRUSHED AND COLD GALVANISED WITH ZINC COATING COMPOUND.
NOTES
4 FOR USE BELOW GROUND LEVEL, PIPE THICKNESS TO BE VERIFIED.


Corr. All. 0 MM
48
44
42
40
36
34
32
30
26
24
22
20
18
BRANCH PIPE NB
16
14
12
10
8
T 6
5
T T 4
3½
T T T 3
2½
T T T T 2
T T T T T 1½
1¼
T T T T T T 1
T T T T T T T ¾
T T T T T T T T ½
¼
¼ ½ ¾ 1 1¼ 1½ 2 2½ 3 3½ 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 30 32 34 36 40 42 44 48
RUN PIPE NB
CODE DESCRIPTION
H H. COUPLING
P PIPE TO PIPE
R REINFORCED
S SOCKOLETS
T TEES
W WELDOLETS


Corr. All. 0 MM
DESCRIPTION
PIPE GROUP
PIP PIPE ½" 6" SCRM HVY SCRM, WELDED IS-1239-I IS-1239 (GALV)
FITTING GROUP
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW ½" 1½" SCRF 3000# B 16.11 ASTM A 105 (GALV)
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW 2" 6" SCRF IS-1239-II IS-1239 (PART II) (GALV)
TEE / RTEE TEE ½" 1½" SCRF 3000# EQUAL / REDUCING B 16.11 ASTM A 105 (GALV)
TEE / RTEE TEE 2" 6" SCRF EQUAL / REDUCING IS-1239-II IS-1239 (PART II) (GALV)
SWGC / SWGE SWAGE ½" 3" SCRF M, M CONC. / ECC. BS 3799 ASTM A 105 (GALV) 6
CAP CAP ½" 1½" SCRF 3000# B 16.11 ASTM A 105 (GALV)
CAP CAP 2" 6" SCRF IS-1239-II IS-1239 (PART II) (GALV)
CPLH / CPLF COUPLING ½" 1½" SCRF 3000# HALF / FULL B 16.11 ASTM A 105 (GALV)
CPLR COUPLING RED ½" 1½" SCRF 3000# B 16.11 ASTM A 105 (GALV)
UNN UNION ½" 6" SCRF 3000# IS-1239-II IS-1239 (PART II) (GALV)
FLANGE GROUP
FLG FLANGE SCRB ½" 6" RF 150#, Ra=125 AARH B 16.5 ASTM A 105 (GALV)
FBLD FLANGE BLIND ½" 6" RF 150#, Ra=125 AARH B 16.5 ASTM A 105 (GALV)
FEF FLANGE FIG. 8 ½" 6" RF 150#, Ra=125 AARH B 16.48 ASTM A 105 (GALV)


Corr. All. 0 MM
VALVES GROUP
GAT GATE VALVE ½" 1½" SCRF 800# ENDS TO 3000# AS PER B-16.11, B:A 105; T: API 602 BODY ASTM A 105, STELLITED SEAT, TRIM 13% CR (ASTM A 182
13% Cr; St GR. F6) BB, OS & Y, SOLID WEDGE 51001
GAT GATE VALVE 2" 6" FLG, RF 150# FLG TO B16.5, B:A 216 GR. WCB; T:SS 304 API 600 BODY ASTM A 216 GR. WCB, TRIM 13% CR (ASTM A182 GR. F6),
STELLITED SEAT, BB, OS & Y, FLEXIBLE WEDGE 56301
GLO GLOBE VALVE ½" 1½" SCRF 800# ENDS TO 3000# AS PER B-16.11, B:A 105; BS 5352 BODY ASTM A 105, TRIM 13% CR (ASTM A182 GR. F6),
T:13% Cr; St STELLITED SEAT, BB, OS & Y 51001
CHV CHECK VALVE ½" 1½" SCRF 800# ENDS TO 3000# AS PER B-16.11, B:A 105; BS 5352 VALVE BODY ASTM A105, SEAT & DISC TO ASTM B-62, ,LIFT
T:13% Cr; St TYPE, SUIT FOR HOR. INSTALL, BOLTED CAP
BAL BALL VALVE ½" 1½" SCRF 800# ENDS TO 3000# AS PER B-16.11 B:A 105; T:13% BS 5351 / API 608 BODY ASTM A 105, SS 304 BALL, & 13% CR STEM (ASTM A 182
Cr; St GR. F6), FULL BORE (UPTO 1½") / STANDARD BORE, FLOATING
BALL, PTFE SEAT, BUBBLE TIGHT IN BOTH DIRECTIONS,
COMPLY WITH ANTI-STATIC DEVICE. 56301
BAL BALL VALVE 2" 6" FLG, RF 150# FLG TO B16.5, B:A 216 GR. WCB; T:SS 304 BS 5351 / API 608 BODY ASTM A 216 GR. WCB, SS 304 BALL, STEM: 13% Cr (ASTM
A182 GR. F6), STANDARD BORE, FLOATING / TRUNION BALL,
PTFE SEAT 56301
BOLT GROUP
BLT STUD BOLT ½" 6" 150# B 18.2.1 / 18.2.2 BOLT: A307 GR. B (GALV), NUT: A563 GR. B (GALV)
GASKET
GSK GASKET ½" 6" RF 150# FULL FACE, 2 MM B-16.21 - ANSI B 16.5 BUTYL RUBBER

ANSI Class 150 # Pipe Class J5Y

Corr. All. 0 MM
Base Material Carbon Steel (GALV / CEMENT LINED)
TEMP °C 0 - 38 39 - 90
PRESS.Kg/cm²(g) 18.00 17.90
SERVICE

PIPE JOINTS 1½" AND BELOW NPT
2" AND ABOVE BW
PROCESS VENTS & DRAINS ALL AS PER STD
DRAINS & VENTS OTHER THAN PROCESS ALL AS PER IOTDE STD
RELATED
TEMP. CONN. INSTALLATION AS PER INSTRUMENT ENGG. STD. HOOK UP DWG.
PRESS. CONN. INSTALLATION AS PER INSTRUMENT ENGG. STD. HOOK UP DWG.
1 Pipe joints for cement lined pipes both for underground up to 24" shall be done by collars in general and by flanged fittings in specific cases wherever requirement arises for ease of fabrication, inspection and maintenance.
2 Surfaces where galvanising has been burnt off shall be wire brushed and cold galvanised with zinc coating compound.
NOTES
3 Asbestos free gaskets and stem packing shall be used for all valves.
4 Schedule / thickness shall be selected with respect to the pipe wall thickness provided.
5


Corr. All. 0 MM
48
44
42
40
36
34
32
30
26
24
22
20
18
BRANCH PIPE NB
16
14
12
10
8
6
5
T 4
3½
T T 3
2½
T T T 2
T T T T 1½
1¼
T T T T T 1
T T T T T T ¾
T T T T T T T ½
¼
¼ ½ ¾ 1 1¼ 1½ 2 2½ 3 3½ 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 30 32 34 36 40 42 44 48
RUN PIPE NB
CODE DESCRIPTION
H H. COUPLING
P PIPE TO PIPE
R REINFORCED
S SOCKOLETS
T TEES
W WELDOLETS


Corr. All. 0 MM
DESCRIPTION
PIPE GROUP
PIP PIPE ½" 1½" TBE SCH 80 SEAMLESS B 36.10 API 5L GR. B, GALVANISED
PIP PIPE 2" 2" BE SCH 40 SEAMLESS B 36.10 API 5L GR. B, GALVANISED
PIP PIPE 2½" 4" BE SCH 40 ERW B 36.10 API 5L GR. B, GALVANISED
PIP PIPE 6" 6" BE SCH 40 ERW B 36.10 API 5L GR. B, CEMENT LINED 4.8 MM THK
PIP PIPE 20" 24" BE SCH 10 SAW B 36.10 API 5L GR. B, CEMENT LINED 9.5 MM THK
FITTING GROUP
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW ½" 1½" NPT 3000# LR, SEAMLESS B 16.11 ASTM A105, GALVANISED
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW 2" 4" BW SCH 40 LR, SEAMLESS B 16.9 ASTM A234 GR. WPB, GALV.
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW 6" 6" BW SCH 40 LR, SEAMLESS B 16.9 ASTM A234 GR. WPB, CEMENT LINED 4.8 MM THK
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW 16" 24" BW SCH 10 LR, WELDED B 16.9 ASTM A234 GR. WPB - W, CEMENT LINED 9.5 MM THK
SRE SWAGE NIPPLE ½" 1½" NPT 3000# SEAMLESS B 16.11 ASTM A105, GALVANISED
ERE / CRE REDUCER ECC / CONC. 2" 4" BW M, M SEAMLESS B 16.9 ASTM A234 GR. WPB, GALV. 5
ERE / CRE REDUCER ECC / CONC. 6" 6" BW M, M SEAMLESS B 16.9 ASTM A234 GR. WPB, CEMENT LINED 4.8 MM THK 5
ERE / CRE REDUCER ECC / CONC. 8" 8" BW M, M SEAMLESS B 16.9 ASTM A234 GR. WPB, CEMENT LINED 6.4 MM THK 5
ERE / CRE REDUCER ECC / CONC. 10" 14" BW M, M SEAMLESS B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB, CEMENT LINED 9.5 MM THK 5
ERE / CRE REDUCER ECC / CONC. 16" 24" BW M, M WELDED B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB - W, CEMENT LINED 9.5 MM THK 5
TEE / RTEE TEE EQUAL / REDUCING ½" 1½" NPT 3000# SEAMLESS MSS SP 97 ASTM A105, GALVANISED
TEE / RTEE TEE EQUAL / REDUCING 2" 4" BW M, M SEAMLESS B 16.9 ASTM A234 GR. WPB, GALV. 5
TEE / RTEE TEE EQUAL / REDUCING 6" 6" BW M, M SEAMLESS B 16.9 ASTM A234 GR. WPB, CEMENT LINED 4.8 MM THK 5
TEE / RTEE TEE EQUAL / REDUCING 16" 24" BW M, M SEAMLESS B 16.9 ASTM A234 GR. WPB - W, CEMENT LINED 9.5 MM THK 5
CPLT FULL COUPLING 1½" 1½" NPT 3000# B 16.11 ASTM A 105, GALVANISED
PLG PLUG ½" 1½" NPT 3000# HEXAGONAL HEAD B 16.11 ASTM A 105, GALVANISED
CAP CAP ½" 1½" NPT 3000# B 16.11 ASTM A 105, GALVANISED
CAP CAP 2" 4" BW SCH 40 B 16.9 ASTM A234 GR. WPB, GALV.


Corr. All. 0 MM
FLANGE GROUP
FLG FLANGE ½" 6" NPT SCH 80, 150 # STOCK FINISH B 16.5 ASTM A105, GALVANISED
FLG FLANGE 2" 4" W N, R.F SCH 40, 150 # STOCK FINISH B 16.5 ASTM A105, GALVANISED
FLG FLANGE 6" 6" W N, R.F SCH 40, 150 # STOCK FINISH B 16.5 ASTM A105, CEMENT LINED 4.8 MM THK
FBLD BLIND FLANGE ½" 24" RF 150# STOCK FINISH B 16.5 ASTM A105, GALVANISED
SLB SPECTACLE BLIND (FIG.8) ½" 8" FF 150# STOCK FINISH OT STD ASTM A105
SRB SPACER & BLIND 10" 24" FF 150# STOCK FINISH OT STD ASTM A105
VALVES GROUP
CHV CHECK VALVE ½" 1½" NPT NPT ENDS TO 3000# AS PER B-16.11, B:A 105; BS 5352 VALVE BODY ASTM A105, SEAT & DISC TO ASTM B-62, , LIFT
T:13% Cr;St TYPE, SUIT FOR HOR. INSTALL, BOLTED CAP
CHV CHECK VALVE 2" 24" FLG, RF 150# FLG TO B16.5, B:A 216 GR. WCB; T:SS 304 BS 1868 SWING TYPE, BODY: ASTM A 216 GR. WCB, SEAT & DISC TO
ASTM B-62, BOLTED COVER 51001
BAL BALL VALVE ½" 1½" NPT 800# NPT ENDS TO 3000# AS PER B-16.11 B:A 105; BS 5351 / API 608 BODY ASTM A105, SS 304 BALL, & 13% CR STEM (ASTM A182
T:13% Cr; St GR. F6), FULL BORE (UPTO 1½") / STANDARD BORE, FLOATING
BAL BALL VALVE ½" 1½" FLG, RF 150# FLG TO B16.5, B:A 216 GR. WCB; T:SS 304 BS 5351 / API 608 BODY ASTM A105, SS 304 BALL, & 13% CR STEM (ASTM A182
GR. F6), FULL BORE (UPTO 1½") / STANDARD BORE, FLOATING
BAL BALL VALVE 2" 6" FLG, RF 150# FLG TO B16.5, B:A 216 GR. WCB; T:SS 304 BS 5351 / API 608 BODY ASTM A216 GR. WCB, SS 304 BALL, STEM: 13% Cr (ASTM
A182 GR. F6), STANDARD BORE, FLOATING / TRUNION BALL,
PTFE SEAT 56301
GAT GATE VALVE 2" 24" FLG, RF 150# FLG TO B16.5, B:A 216 GR. WCB; T:SS 304 API 600 BODY ASTM A 216 GR. WCB, TRIM 13% CR (ASTM A182 GR. F6),
STELLITED SEAT, BB, OS & Y, FLEXIBLE WEDGE 56301
BOLT GROUP
BLT STUD BOLT ½" 24" 150# STUD BOLT WITH 2 HEAVY HEX. HEAVY NUTS + B 18.2.1 / 18.2.2 ASTM A193 GR.B7 Galvanised / A194 GR. 2H Galvanised
WASHERS
GASKET
GSK GASKET ½" 24" RF 150# B-16.21 COMPRESSED NON-ASBESTOS 2 MM


Corr. All. 0 MM
TEMP °C 0.00 38.00 65.00

PRESS.Kg/cm²(g) 10.55 10.55 10.55
FOAM SOLUTION AND FIRE WATER SPRAY

SERVICE
MAINTAINENCE JOINTS 1.5" & BELOW UNIONS (SCRF) TO BE KEPT MINIMUM

2" AND ABOVE FLANGED TO BE KEPT MINIMUM
PIPE JOINTS 1.5" & BELOW SCREWED COUPLING / UNIONS
ON LINES ≥ 2" AS PER P&ID OR 0.75"
ON LINES ≥ 2" AS PER P&ID OR 0.75"
PRESS. CONN. ¾" SCRD NIPPLE WITH VALVE TO SPEC
1 THREADED JOINTS SHALL BE MADE WITH 1" WIDTH PTFE JOINING TAPE.
2 SURFACES WHERE GALVANISING HAS BEEN BURNT OFF SHALL BE WIRE BRUSHED AND COLD GALVANISED WITH ZINC COATING COMPOUND.
NOTES
4 FOR USE BELOW GROUND LEVEL, PIPE THICKNESS TO BE VERIFIED.


Corr. All. 0 MM
48
44
42
40
36
34
32
30
26
24
22
20
18
BRANCH PIPE NB
16
14
T 12
T R 10
T P R 8
T P P R 6
5
T R P P R 4
3½
T P R P P R 3
2½
T P P R P P R 2
T T H H H H H H 1½
1¼
T T H H H H H H H 1
T T T H H H H H H H ¾
T T T T H H H H H H H ½
¼
¼ ½ ¾ 1 1¼ 1½ 2 2½ 3 3½ 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 30 32 34 36 40 42 44 48
RUN PIPE NB
CODE DESCRIPTION
H H. COUPLING
P PIPE TO PIPE
R REINFORCED
S SOCKOLETS
T TEES
W WELDOLETS


Corr. All. 0 MM
DESCRIPTION
PIPE GROUP
PIP PIPE ½" 1½" PE HVY WELDED IS-1239-I IS-1239 (GALV)

PIP PIPE 2" 6" BE HVY WELDED IS-1239-I IS-1239 (GALV)
PIP PIPE 8" 12" BE 6 MM THK WELDED IS-3589 IS-3589 GR.410 (GALV)
FITTING GROUP
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW ½" 1½" SCRF HVY IS-1239-II IS-1239 (PART II) (GALV)
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW 2" 6" BE HVY R=1.5D IS-1239-II IS-1239 (PART II) (GALV)
E45LR / 90LR 45° / 90° ELBOW 8" 12" BE M R=1.5D, ASTM A 105 B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB-W (GALV) 6
TEE / RTEE TEE ½" 1½" SCRF HVY EQUAL / REDUCING IS-1239-II IS-1239 (PART II) (GALV)
TEE / RTEE TEE 2" 6" BE HVY EQUAL / REDUCING IS-1239-II IS-1239 (PART II) (GALV)
TEE / RTEE TEE 8" 12" BE M EQUAL / REDUCING B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB-W (GALV) 6
ERE / CRE REDUCER 2" 4" BE M, M CONC. / ECC. B 16.9 ASTM A 234 GR. WPB (GALV) 6
ERE / CRE REDUCER 6" 8" BE M, M CONC. / ECC. MNF'S STD ASTM A 234 GR. WPB-W (GALV) 6
SWGC / SWGE SWAGE ½" 3" TBE M, M CONC. / ECC. BS 3799 ASTM A 105 (GALV) 6
CAP CAP ½" 1½" SCRF HVY IS-1239-II IS-1239 (PART II) (GALV)
CAP CAP 2" 6" BE HVY IS-1239-II IS-1239 (PART II) (GALV)
CPLH / CPLF COUPLING ½" 1½" SCRF 3000# HALF / FULL B 16.11 ASTM A 105 (GALV)
CPLR COUPLING RED (SOCKET) ½" 1½" SCRF HVY IS-1239-II IS-1239 (PART II) (GALV)
UNN UNION ½" 1½" SCRF HVY IS-1239-II IS-1239 (PART II) (GALV)
FLANGE GROUP
FLG FLANGE SCRD ½" 1½" RF 150# 150#, Ra=125 AARH B 16.5 ASTM A 105 (GALV)
FLG FLANGE SO 2" 12" RF 150# 150#, Ra=125 AARH B 16.5 ASTM A 105 (GALV)
FBLD BLIND FLANGE ½" 12" RF 150#, Ra=125 AARH B 16.5 ASTM A 105 (GALV)


Corr. All. 0 MM
VALVES GROUP
GAT GATE VALVE ½" 1½" SCRF 800# END CONNECTION: 3000#, B-1.20.1 B:A 105; IS: 778 CL.2 BODY: IS 318 GR. LTB2 (LEADED TIN BRONZE), TRIM - IS 320
T:13% Cr;St ALLOY HT2 51001
GAT GATE VALVE 2" 12" FLG, RF 150# FLG TO B16.5, B:A 216 GR. WCB; T:SS 304 API 600 BODY ASTM A 216 GR. WCB, TRIM 13% CR (ASTM A 182 GR.
F6), STELLITED SEAT, BB, OS & Y, FLEXIBLE WEDGE 56301
GLO GLOBE VALVE ½" 1½" SCRF 800# END CONNECTION: 3000#, B-1.20.1 B:A 105; IS: 778 CL.2 BODY: IS 318 GR.LTB2 (LEADED TIN BRONZE), TRIM - IS 320
T:13% Cr; St ALLOY HT2 51001
CHV CHECK VALVE ½" 1½" SCRF 800# END CONNECTION: 3000#, B-1.20.1 B:A 105; IS: 778 CL.2 BODY: IS 318 GR.LTB2 (LEADED TIN BRONZE), TRIM - IS 320
T:13% Cr; St ALLOY HT2 51001
BOLT GROUP
BLT STUD BOLT ½" 12" 150# B 18.2.1 / 18.2.2 BOLT: A307 GR. B (GALV), NUT: A563 GR. B (GALV)
GASKET
GSK GASKET ½" 12" RF 150# RING, 2 MM B-16.21 - ANSI B 16.5 BUTYL RUBBER

RAJASTHAN
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-PI-VMS-001 Rev: 00 Date: 03-02-2019
VALVE MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

0 03-02-2019 Issued for Approval JK PP PCS
Page 1 of 61
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 INTRODUCTION
2.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.0 MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION
4.0 BALL, BUTTERFLY & GLOBE VALVE
5.0 GATE VALVE
6.0 CHECK VALVE
7.0 NON-DESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION
8.0 PRESSURE TESTING
9.0 FUNCTION TESTING
10.0 PAINTING
11.0 ENGINEERING DATA REQUIRMENT
12.0 GUARANTEE
13.0 SPARE PARTS
14.0 REFERENCES
Page 2 of 61
RAJASTHAN
Sr. No. Description

15.0 REFERENCE STANDARDS
16.0 ATTACHMENTS – VALVE DATASHEETS
Page 3 of 61
RAJASTHAN
1.0 INTRODUCTION

Chotila, Dist: Pali. The product will be received by Tank wagon ex Essar Oil’s Vadinar
Refinery, the product will be stored in IFR (MS) / CR (HSD) Tanks and the same will be
delivered by Road to Dealers and bulk Customers / Consumers. The nearest railway
station is Kairla.
Approx. 60 acres of land is acquired for setting up of this depot.
The depot shall be designed & constructed for full compliance with OISD 117,118, 244
& other statutory codes & standards as applicable.
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 The valve purchase specifications detailed in this Specification shall be used in
the purchase and specification of new valves. Any substitution to or variance
from this Specification requires written approval from the purchaser before
implementation.
2.1.2 Codes, standards, and specifications referred to in this Specification, in the

valve purchase descriptions, or in any referenced document form a part of the
requirements of this specification in the manner and to the extent specified.
2.1.3 Modifications shall not be performed on a valve to bring it into conformance

with the valve purchase description without the written approval of the
purchaser. Modification to a valve shall maintain the manufacturer’s warranty.
2.2 DEFINITIONS
Manufacturer : The party responsible for making the Valves

Owner : The party who owns the facility wherein the Valves will be used.
Supplier : The party responsible for providing the Valves.
Purchaser : The party who awards the contract to the supplier. The Purchaser may be owner or
the owner’s authorized agent.
Page 4 of 61
RAJASTHAN
2.3 DESIGN
2.3.1 The Purchaser shall supply valve data sheets. They shall provide details of
pressure, temperature and fluids, as well as constructional details of the
valves. Valve design shall conform to the latest revision of the standard noted
in the valve purchase description.
2.3.2 Valve design and pressure ratings shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3 and
standards as stated in the datasheet.
2.3.3 All Ball valves and Butterfly Valves with non-metallic seats or seals intended for
use in hydrocarbon service, Fire water, foam solution and foam concentrate
shall be fire tested and certified in accordance with API 607.
2.3.4 Wherever possible, valves shall be designed so that maintenance can be carried
out without the use of special tools. Where such tools are required, the
Supplier shall provide full details at the time of his quotation.
2.3.5 All carbon steel valve bodies shall be designed with a minimum corrosion
allowance of 1.5 mm.
2.3.6 Valve stems shall be blow out proof, meaning they shall be mechanically
retained within the valve when the bolted or screwed gland is removed. All
stems shall be designed to withstand twice the maximum operating torque.
2.3.7 Manufacturers and sub-suppliers shall have ISO 9000 certification and shall be
regularly assessed in accordance with the Purchaser’s quality assurance
procedures. Manufacture of valves shall be carried out in accordance with an
approved quality plan.
2.3.8 Weld repairs on forgings shall not be permitted.
2.3.9 Flanged and hub ends shall be forged or cast integrally with the valve body.
Page 5 of 61
RAJASTHAN
2.3.10 Casting repairs shall be made in accordance with the ASTM specification to
which the casting was procured. Repair of castings by impregnation with
metallic or non-metallic materials is not permitted. Repairs are not per-mitted
on cast iron, ductile iron, or bronze valves.
2.4 OPERATION
2.4.1 Purchaser data sheets define the standard type of operator for various size
ranges. Where necessary to meet the requirements in 2.4.6, the Supplier may
offer alternative operators; this shall be highlighted at quotation stage for
Purchaser approval.
2.4.2 Quarter turn valves shall be fitted with stops to prevent over travel at both the
fully opened and fully closed positions.
2.4.3 Lever operated valves shall be designed so that the lever is parallel to the pipe
when the valve is fully open. It shall not be possible to assemble the lever in an
incorrect orientation.
2.4.4 Gear operators shall be bevel gear type and shall be enclosed suitable for
outdoor service in a marine environment. Housing material shall be cast steel
or equal. Operation shall be clockwise to close the valve. Gear operators shall
be weather proof.
2.4.5 Where valves are required to be insulated in service, extended stems shall be
provided, and all operating and torque tests shall be carried out with the
extended stems installed. The purchaser shall advise when extended stems are
required and what length of extension is required. The Supplier shall submit
details for approval as part of his vendor drawing submission. Extended stems
for underground valves shall be oil-filled fully enclosed type.
2.4.6 Manually operated valves shall have a maximum lever length of 450mm or a
maximum hand wheel diameter of 750mm. The force required to opening or
closing of the valve with a rim pull shall not exceed 80 pounds (336 N).
Page 6 of 61
RAJASTHAN
2.4.7 Gear operation shall be as under
Valve type Class Size Requiring Gear Intended for Service

Operator
Gate Valve 150 Class 14” and larger Liquid Hydro-carbon
Globe Valve 150 Class 14” and larger Liquid Hydro-carbon
Ball Valve 150 Class 6” and larger Liquid Hydro-carbon and Nitrogen
Butterfly Valve 150 Class 8” and larger Liquid Hydro-carbons, Fire water, foam
solution, waste water etc.
2.4.8 Hand wheel on valves shall be permanently marked with “Open / Close” arrow
indicator.
2.5 END CONNECTIONS
2.5.1 Butt weld ends shall be beveled in accordance with ASME B16.25, unless
otherwise advised by the Purchaser.
2.5.2 Threaded ends shall be in accordance with ASME B16.11. Threading for all male
and female threaded valve ends for connections to piping shall be as per ANSI B
2.1.
2.5.3 Unless otherwise specified in the valve purchase description or purchase order,
the finish for gasket contact faces of flanged ends shall conform to ASME B16.5
/ 16.47 Series A. Scratches or other damage to these surfaces in excess of those
permitted by ASME B16.5 / 16.47 Series A shall not be accepted.
3.0 MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Materials shall be as specified in the valve data sheets. All materials shall be
new and unused.
Page 7 of 61
RAJASTHAN
3.1.2 Substitution
i. Substitution of castings in which pressure-retaining parts have been

specified as forged is not permitted without written authorization from the
purchaser.
ii. Substitution of alternate materials for materials specified on the purchase
order or in the valve purchase description is not permitted without written
authorization from the purchaser.
3.1.3 Where hard facings, nickel plating or overlays are supplied, the material details
and the methods of deposition shall be submitted for Purchaser approval at
quotation stage.
3.1.4 Valve trim materials, seals, packing and gaskets are specified on the data
sheets. Where the Supplier, for reasons of cost, availability or mechanical
strength prefers other materials, the Supplier shall request approval in writing
for the use of the alternative material at the quotation stage. An example of
such substitution might be SS17-4PH in lieu of SS316, which will be acceptable
in some applications but not in others. In all cases, the Supplier shall consider
possible galling and corrosion in his selection of trim materials.
3.1.5 Where valve data sheets call for generic material types such as “Viton”,
“Stellite” or “HNBR”, this does not suggest that all grades of the material
would necessarily be acceptable. The Supplier shall consider all service
conditions on the data sheet and shall select an appropriate grade to suit the
service. Selection shall be subject to approval by the Purchaser at quotation
stage. Rubber and plastic components in contact with process fluid shall be
manufactured from virgin materials. Re-processed materials are not acceptable
and shall be compatible with fluid to be handled.
3.1.6 Material of construction of yoke shall be minimum equivalent to body / bonnet

material.
4.0 BALL VALVE, BUTTERFLY VALVE & GLOBE VALVE
4.1 Where data sheets specify seat-supported design, trunnion-mounted shall be an

acceptable alternative in all cases.
Page 8 of 61
RAJASTHAN
4.2 Reduced bore ball valves shall not be used for sizes 1.50 in. and below unless
otherwise specified. Also, unless otherwise specified in the datasheet, diameter of the
reduced bore for sizes 2” and above shall be one nominal size below the valve size.
4.3 Valves shall be of anti-static design, ensuring electrical continuity between all
metallic components.
4.4 Valves shall be capable of operating and sealing with the full design differential
pressure in either direction.
4.5 Ball valves shall feature automatic body cavity relief by mean of the seat design;
holes drilled in the ball shall not be acceptable. Where double piston effect seats
areas specified, cavity relief shall be ensured by means of a relief valve.
4.6 Hollow ball construction is not permitted.
4.7 The ball of ball valve shall not protrude outside the end flanges of valve.
4.8 As a pre-qualification, fire safe test as per API 607 shall be carried out on soft sealed
ball valves.
4.9 Butterfly valves shall be high performance type with offset disc for hydrocarbon
service.
4.10 Ball / Globe valves shall be set half open for filling and during testing.
5.0 GATE VALVE
5.1 Wedge type gate valves shall have flexible wedge for all sizes and services.
5.2 Valves shall be capable of operating and sealing with the full design differential
pressure in either direction.
5.3 Valves shall be fitted with a back seat, which shall ensure that stem packing is
isolated from the line fluid when the valve is fully open.
Page 9 of 61
RAJASTHAN
5.4 Through conduit gate valves of the solid or expanding slab type are primarily intended
for dirty, sandy or abrasive service and shall be provided with applicable features,
such hard faced lapped seats and gates, seat skirts and body flushing connections.
5.5 Gate valves shall be set half open for filling and during testing.
6.0 CHECK VALVES
6.1 Wafer type check valves and Piston type check valves shall be used for services
provided in the data sheet.
6.2 When fully open, the plates of dual plate type valves shall maintain at least 2 mm all
round clearance with the bore of the mating piping flanges. The Supplier shall state
the minimum permissible pipe bore for his valve design.
6.3 Where spring-loaded piston type check valves are specified on data sheets, spring
loaded ball type shall also be acceptable.
6.4 The hinge and disc of swing check valves shall be arranged so that, when installed in a
vertical line with flow upwards, the disc shall always close by gravity alone when flow
stops.
6.5 Preferred location of check valves are to be installed at discharge of Pumps and near
Tank inlet nozzle.
6.6 The direction of normal flow shall be clearly marked with an arrow on the valve body.
7.0 NON-DESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION
7.1 Valves intended for Hydrocarbon service shall be examined and inspected in
accordance with their referenced manufacturing standard, as a minimum.
7.2 NDE methods, procedures and operator qualifications are subject to Purchaser review
and approval. The requirements in ASME B16.34 annex 1, 2, 3 and 4 shall be minimum
standards.
7.3 NDE shall be carried out after heat treatment and machining.
Page 10 of 61
RAJASTHAN
8.0 PRESSURE TESTING
8.1 All valves shall be pressure tested in accordance with API 598 / ASME B16.34 as
modified by the specific pressures and additional tests shown on the valve data sheet
and this specification. Valves specified to API 602 and API 600 design standard shall be
tested in accordance with API 598.
8.2 During the pressure tests, valve bodies shall not contain any substance other than the
test fluid.
8.3 Hydrostatic test fluid shall be a water solution with wetting agent and pH between 6.0
and 8.0. Where stainless steel valves are tested, the water shall contain less than 30-
ppm chlorides. Pneumatic test fluid shall be dried and filtered air or nitrogen.
8.4 Hydrostatic testing shall be carried out before pneumatic testing. Valves shall be
dried internally immediately after hydrostatic testing is completed. Stem packing
shall be thoroughly dried or replaced before pneumatic testing.
8.5 Butterfly valves shall undergo disc strength tests in accordance with BS6755 part 1
except the test shall be repeated with pressure on the other side of the disc and both
tests shall be recorded.
8.6 Block valves of the ball, gate, and butterfly shall have all seat tests carried out and
certified in both flow directions.
8.7 When valves are used for blocking or isolating the hydro test sections, the differential
pressure across the valve seat shall not exceed the seat test pressure.
Page 11 of 61
RAJASTHAN
8.8 Valves which shall be included in hydro test shall be marked on a list and that list
shall contain the following info
i. Valve Tag No
ii. Location of Valve
iii. Valve PO
iv. Shop Pressure Test Certificate
v. Test medium
vi. Test pressure
vii. Expected duration of valve exposure to test fluid
9.0 FUNCTION TESTING
9.1 All valves shall be subjected to functional tests during the pressure test procedure.
The tests shall involve cycling the valve from fully open to fully closed and back to
fully open before each pressure test.
9.2 Valves shall be torque tested at maximum differential operating pressure to

demonstrate that the operating force is less than the limits specified in section 2.4.6
Where more than one valve of a specific size / rating / model has been purchased in a
batch, one torque test shall suffice to cover all the similar valves.
9.3 Block valves of the ball, gate and butterfly types shall have all torque tests carried
out and certified in both flow directions.
10.0 PAINTING
Carbon and low alloy steel valves shall be painted or coated in accordance with
Oiltanking Building specifications BS-003
11.0 ENGINEERING DATA REQUIRMENT
11.1 DOCUMENTATION
11.1.1 Manufacturer’s complete descriptive and illustrative catalogue / literature.
Page 12 of 61
RAJASTHAN
11.1.2 Detailed dimensioned descriptive cross section drawing with parts / material
List, weight etc.
11.1.3 Drawings for valves with accessories like gear operator, extension bonnet,
extended bonnet, extended stems etc. giving major salient dimensions.
11.1.4 If the valve is regretted or has no deviation, the manufacturer shall write
clearly on valve specification / datasheet as “Regret” or “No deviation”
11.1.5 If there is any deviation, the same shall be listed clause wise.
11.1.6 Vendor shall submit for approval drawings mentioned above before start of
manufacture.
11.1.7 Test report shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per applicable code.
11.1.8 Material Test certificate of the pressure containing parts shall be furnished for
the valves applied. Material test certificates for the other parts also be
furnished for verification during inspection.
11.1.9 Catalogues / Drawings (6 sets) shall be furnished along with delivery for
purchaser’s record for all categories / types of valves.
11.2 WELDING PROCEDURES
11.2.1 Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Records

(PQR) shall be in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section IX.
11.2.2 Individual WPSs and PQRs shall be available for examination by the purchaser
upon request.
11.2.3 If specified on the purchase order, a WPS and a PQR shall be submitted to the
purchaser for approval before the start of manufacturing.
Page 13 of 61
RAJASTHAN
11.3 Material Certification
The following sections apply to all valves with body and bonnet material specified to
an ASME (SA or SB) specification:
11.3.1 Upon request by the purchaser, the supplier shall furnish the manufacturer’s
certificate of compliance with the referenced ASME specification for the body
and bonnet.
11.3.2 The certification shall also state compliance with applicable ASME
specifications for the bonnet bolting.
11.3.3 If required by the purchaser, these documents shall be identified with the
purchaser’s purchase order number and valve tag number and shall be signed
by the manufacturer’s authorized agent.
11.3.4 ASTM materials may be substituted for materials specified as ASME if the ASME
specification is indicated (below the title) to be identical with the
corresponding ASTM specification for the grade, class or type produced.
11.3.5 The manufacturer shall state the dual compliance on the certificate of
compliance.
11.3.6 ASTM specification substitutions shall be submitted for acceptance before

processing the purchase order.
11.4 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
11.4.1 The manufacturer’s instructions for installation, welding, and post-weld heat
treatment for all socket-welding and butt-welding end valves shall be provided.
11.4.2 If required, instructions for disassembly and reassembly of valves shall be

included. If disassembly is required, a list of the manufacturer’s recommended
replacement parts shall be furnished.
11.4.3 If a manufacturer does not require special procedures, a written certification

to this effect shall be provided with the valves.
Page 14 of 61
RAJASTHAN
11.5 OTHER MANUFACTURER DOCUMENTS
11.5.1 For all valves not manufactured in accordance with a national standard, both
the maximum allowable hydrostatic shell and closed- seat test pressures that
valves can be subjected to during field pressure testing shall be furnished.
11.5.2 Upon request by the purchaser, the following procedures shall be furnished:
a. Bolted joint connection (i.e., bolting pattern and torque)

b. Cleaning
c. Field installation
d. Final inspection
e. Heat treatment
f. In-process inspection
g. Marking
h. Non-destructive examination
i. Packing
j. Painting
k. Pressure testing
l. Repair
m. Shipping
n. Supplemental high-pressure testing
o. Tagging
p. Valve assembly
q. Welding
The procedures shall be written such that a person familiar with the type of
work described can complete the task by following instructions in the
document.
11.5.3 If engineering data other than that listed in this Specification is required, a
statement of those requirements shall be included in the request for quotation
and / or purchase order.
Page 15 of 61
RAJASTHAN
11.6 IDENTIFICATION
11.6.1 Manufacturer’s Markings
Each valve shall be marked in strict accordance with ASTM material

specifications, valve design standards, and MSS SP-25. Valves manufactured
with dual-certified materials shall have both material designations shown.
Forgings or castings not marked in accordance with their applicable ASTM
standards shall not be accepted.
11.6.2 Valve Tagging Guidelines
11.6.2.1 Each valve shall be tagged with the purchaser’s valve tag number
that accurately represents the valve.
11.6.2.2 If tagged, valves shall be tagged with a 28-gauge (minimum),

stainless steel tag or a corrosion-resistant tag providing equivalent
visibility and durability. Letter and number heights shall be a mini-mum
of 3/16 inch. Tags shall be attached with 16-gauge (minimum) stainless
steel wire or equivalent. Tags attached to valve handles shall not be
accepted. Tags shall be attached in a manner that does not interfere
with the installation or operation of the valves.
11.6.2.3 Each valve shall be tagged with a separate tag showing the valve
packing material / type.
11.6.2.4 All marking shall be clearly legible.
11.6.2.5 Valves not properly tagged shall not be accepted.
11.7 SHIPPING, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
11.7.1 Valves shall be shipped in a cardboard box, in a wooden crate, or on a wooden

pallet and shall be packed to prevent shifting within the container. Valves shall
be shipped with the correct stem packing installed and the gland follower
tightened.
Page 16 of 61
RAJASTHAN
11.7.2 Gate and globe valves shall be in the closed position for shipment. Plug and ball
valves shall be shipped in the open position. Butterfly valves shall be shipped
with the disc cracked open (i.e., off the seat).
11.7.3 Check valves that have blocking between the seat and piston / disk / ball to
prevent in-transit damage to the seat shall be tagged to indicate that blocking
is installed. The tag shall indicate that the blocking must be removed before
installation. The manufacturer shall be responsible for determining if valves
require blocking.
11.7.4 Threaded or socket-welded openings shall be closed with metal or plastic

protectors to prevent dirt and other foreign matter from entering the interior
of the valve.
11.7.5 Flange facings and butt-welding ends shall be protected over the entire gasket
seating surface or butt-welding end with wood, plastic, or metal covers. The
protection covers shall prevent dirt and other foreign matter from entering the
interior of the valve and damaging the flange facings or butt-welding bevels. If
flange facings or butt-welding bevels are protected with metal covers, a layer
of non-metallic material shall be provided between the valve and the cover.
Tape shall not be used as the sole covering method.
11.7.6 Valves shall be prepared for shipment in a manner that will avoid damage to or
atmospheric corrosion of internal or external surfaces or parts during sheltered
storage and transport.
11.7.7 If necessary, outdoor storage shall be indicated in the valve purchase

description.
11.7.8 Padded slings, cables, chains, or bands shall be used to prevent damage to
valves during handling and transportation.
11.7.9 Unless otherwise specified, machined or threaded surfaces of ferritic valves

shall be coated with an easily removable, rust-preventive compound. Valves
cleaned for special service shall not have a rust-preventive compound applied.
Page 17 of 61
RAJASTHAN
11.7.10 If specified, austenitic stainless-steel valves shall be enclosed by

wrapping in a vapor-proof barrier material.
11.8 EXAMINATION BY PURCHASER
Inspection and / or tests shall be reviewed and / or witnessed by the purchaser / TPI
at the supplier’s or the manufacturer’s facility at a mutually convenient time.
12.0 GUARANTEE
i. All valves and their components shall be guaranteed for trouble-free operation for
a period of 18 months from the date of receipt or 12 months from the date of
commissioning whichever is earlier against the medium as listed in individual
technical specification and the service condition specified in the Pipe Specification
Index enclosed.
ii. Vendor shall guarantee all equipment as being suitable for the design conditions
and service fluids stated in the Piping material Specification for the pipe class
specified in valve data sheets.
iii. Confirmation of suitability shall be stated in the Vendors bid e.g. seats, seals etc.
13.0 SPARE PARTS
Vendor should furnish a complete list of maintenance spares required for two years
trouble free operation along with recommended quantities and quote the price for the
same.
14.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION NAYA-PALI-PI-PMS-001
Page 18 of 61
RAJASTHAN
15.0 REFERENCE STANDARDS
15.1 INTERNATIONAL STANDARD
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)
ASME B31.3 (2006) Process Piping

ASME B31.4 Transportation of Liquid Hydro-carbons through pipelines
ASME B2.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME B16.10 Face-to-face and End-to-End Dimensions of Valves
ASME B16.11 Forged fittings, socket welding and Threaded
ASME B16.20 Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges - Ring Joint, Spiral Wound and Jacketed
ASME B16.21 Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges
ASME B16.25 Butt-Welding Ends
ASME B16.34 Valves Flanged, Threaded and Welding End
ASME B16.47 Large Diameter Steel Flanges
ANSI B18.2.1 Stud bolts
ANSI B18.2.2 Hexagonal Nuts
AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)
API 594 Check Valves: Flanged, Lug, Wafer and Butt-welding

API 598 Valve Inspection and Testing.
API 600 Steel Gate valves, Flanged and Butt-welding Ends, Bolted and Pressure Seal Bonnet
API 602 Compact Steel Gate Valves-Flanged, Threaded, Welding and Extended-Body Ends.
API 607 Fire Test for Soft Seated Quarter Turn Valves
API 608 Metal Ball Valves – Flanged, Threading & Welding Ends
API 609 Butterfly Valves: Double Flanged, Lug and Wafer Type
BRITISH STANDARD
BS 1873 Steel Globe and Globe Stop-Check Valves (Flanged and Butt-Welding Ends) for the
Petroleum, Petrochemical and Allied Industries
BS EN 593 Steel Butterfly Valves for the Petroleum, Petrochemical and Allied Industries
BS 5154 Copper alloy globe, globe stop and check, check and gate valves.
BS EN ISO 17292 Specification for steel ball valves for the petroleum, petrochemical and allied
industries
BS EN ISO 15761 Specification for Steel wedge gate, globe and check valves
Page 19 of 61
RAJASTHAN
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY (MSS)
MSS SP-25 Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions
MSS SP-45 Bypass and Drain Connections
MSS SP-55 Quality Standard for Steel Castings for Valves, Flanges and Fittings and Other Piping
Components – Visual Method for Evaluation of Surface Irregularities.
Page 20 of 61
RAJASTHAN
16.0 ATTACHMENTS – VALVE DATASHEETS
Page 21 of 61
DATA SHEET FOR BALL VALVE (½" - 16")
VENDOR COMPLIANCE
Pipe Material Class: A1A Size Range: ½" - 16" Standard:

Services: As per PMS Standard: BS EN ISO 17292 Mnf's cat / fig:
Design Temperature: As per PMS Corrosion Allowance: 1.5 mm Rating:
Design Pressure: As per PMS End Connection: FLGD TO B-16.5 RF / 125 AARH Ends:
Rating: 150#
Body Forged (upto upto 1½") / Cast (above 1½")

Stem Anti - Blow Out
Ball Solid
CONSTRUCTION
Port Reducing Port

Gland Bolted / Retained By Nut & Washer
Stem Seal Renewable With Valve Open On Stream
Requirement Of Gear Operator Refer General Requirements Clause no. 2.4.7
Requirement Of Radiography Refer Note - 5
Special Service Conditions -
Hydrostatic Test Pressure Body: 450 psig., Seat: 325 psig
Test Pressure With Air 80 psig
Body ASTM A 105 / A 216 Gr. WCB

Stem 13% Cr. Steel / SS316 (No Casting)
Ball 13% Cr. Steel / SS316
Body Seat RPTFE With Secondary Metal To Metal
MATERIAL
Gland ASTM A105

Stem Seal Grafoil / PTFE V-Rings + Grafoil
Body Seal Grafoil / PTFE
Body Stud ASTM A193 Gr. B7
Body Nut ASTM A194 Gr 2H
Spring Inconel X-750
1 This Data Sheet Shall Be Read In Conjunction With Technical Specification For Valves.
2 Bidder Shall Clearly Write All / Any Deviation Against Each Part / Material Of Valve In The Space Provided For. Wherever Bidder Agrees With Spec Bidder Shall Indicate "Agreed".
3 Valves Can Also Be Supplied In Accordance With API-6D. For API 6D Valves, in Body Wall Thickness Shall Be Per ASME B 16.34.
4 5% of Valve Castings shall undergo Radiographic Examination.
NOTES
5 All Valves Shall Be Fire Safe Design. Fire Safe Test Shall Be As Per API 607 IV Edition / BS 6755(Part II) / API RP 6FA.
6 Testing Shall Be As Per API 598.
7 For Trunnion Mounted Ball, Body Seat Shall Be Spring Loaded.
8 All Valves Shall Be Bidirectional.
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-PI-VMS-001 Rev: 00 Page 22 of 61

VENDOR COMPLIANCE
Pipe Material Class: A3A Size Range: ½" - 16" Standard:

Rating: 150#

Ball Solid
CONSTRUCTION
Port Reducing Port

Body ASTM A 105 / A 216 Gr. WCB

Stem 13% Cr. Steel / SS316 (No Casting)
Ball 13% Cr.Steel / SS304 / SS316
MATERIAL
Gland ASTM A105 / 13% Cr Steel / SS 316 / SS 304

Stem Seal Grafoil / PTFE
3 Valves Can Also Be Supplied In Accordance With API-6D. For API 6D Valves, in Body Wall Thickness Shall Be Per ASME B16.34.
NOTES

7 Bidder Shall Certify The Suitability Of Valves For Intended Service Conditions.
8 Radiography Of Valve Castings Not Required.

VENDOR COMPLIANCE
Pipe Material Class: A1K Size Range: ½" - 16" Standard:

Design Temperature: As per PMS Corrosion Allowance: 0 MM Rating:
Rating: 150#

Ball Solid
CONSTRUCTION
Port Reducing Port

Body ASTM A 182 Gr. F304 / ASTM A 351 Gr. CF8

Stem SS304 / SS316 (No Casting)
Ball SS304 / SS316
Body Seat RPTFE with Secondary Metal to Metal
MATERIAL
Gland SS304 / SS316

3 Valves Can Also Be Supplied In Accordance With API-6D. For API 6D Valves, in Body Wall Thickness Shall Be Per ASME B16.34.
NOTES

7 Bidder Shall Certify The Suitability Of Valves For Intended Service Conditions.

DATA SHEET FOR BALL VALVE (½" - 1½")
VENDOR COMPLIANCE
Pipe Material Class: J2A Size Range: ½" - 1½" Standard:

Services: As per PMS Standard: BS 5351 / API 608 Mnf's cat / fig:
Design Pressure: As per PMS End Connection: SCRD (NPTF) TO 3000# AS PER B - 16.11 Ends:
Rating: 800#
Body Forged
Ball Floating Ball
CONSTRUCTION
Port Full Bore

Requirement Of Radiography Not Required
Body ASTM A105

Stem 13% Cr (ASTM A182 Gr. F6)
Ball SS 304
MATERIAL

Gland ASTM A105
3 Testing Shall Be As Per BS 6755 (Part 1) / API 6D.
NOTES

DATA SHEET FOR BALL VALVE (2" - 6")
VENDOR COMPLIANCE
Pipe Material Class: J2A Size Range: 2" - 6" Standard:

Design Pressure: As per PMS End Connection: FLGD TO B - 16.5 RF / 125AARH Ends:
Rating: 150#
Body Cast
Ball Floating Ball
CONSTRUCTION
Port Reducing Port

Body ASTM A 216 Gr WCB

Ball SS304
MATERIAL

Gland ASTM A 216 Gr WCB
Body Stud ASTM A193 Gr. B7 (Galvanised)
Body Nut ASTM A194 Gr 2H (Galvanised)
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE
Pipe Material Class: J5Y Size Range: ½" - 1½" Standard:

Rating: 800#
Body Forged
Ball Floating Ball
CONSTRUCTION
Port Full Bore

Body ASTM A105

Ball SS 304
MATERIAL

Gland ASTM A105
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 150#
Body Forged
Ball Floating Ball
CONSTRUCTION
Port Full Bore

Body ASTM A105

Ball SS 304
MATERIAL

Gland ASTM A105
NOTES

DATA SHEET FOR BALL VALVE (2" - 4")
VENDOR COMPLIANCE
Pipe Material Class: J5Y Size Range: 2" - 4" Standard:

Rating: 150#
Body Cast
Ball Floating Ball
CONSTRUCTION
Port Reducing Port


Ball SS304
MATERIAL

Gland ASTM A 216 Gr WCB
NOTES

DATA SHEET FOR CHECK VALVE (½" - 1½")
VENDOR COMPLIANCE
Pipe Material Class: A1A Size Range: ½" - 1½" Standard:

Design Pressure: As per PMS End Connection: SW 3000# to B - 16.11 Ends:
Rating: 800#
Body Forged
CONSTRUCTION
Cover Bolted
Body Seat Ring Renewable / Non - Renewable
Type Lift Check Type
Body ASTM A 105

Bonnet ASTM A 105
MATERIAL
Disc / Piston Stellited

Body Seat Ring Stellited
Cover Stud Bolt ASTM A193 Gr B7
Cover Nut ASTM A194 Gr 2H
Cover Gasket Spiral Wound SS316 - CA Filler
1 This Valve Data Sheet Shall Be Read In Conjunction With Technical Specification For Valves.
4 Valves Shall Be Of Standard Bore Design.
NOTES

DATA SHEET FOR CHECK VALVE (2" - 24")
VENDOR COMPLIANCE
Pipe Material Class: A1A Size Range: 2" - 24" Standard:

Services: As per PMS Standard: BS 1868 Mnf's cat / fig:
Design Pressure: As per PMS End Connection: FLGD TO B - 16.5 RF / 125 AARH Ends:
Rating: 150#
Body Cast
CONSTRUCTION
Cover Bolted
Type Swing Check Type
Requirement of Radiography Refer Note - 5
Body ASTM A 216 Gr. WCB

Cover ASTM A 216 Gr. WCB
Disc 13% Cr. Steel
Body Seat Ring 13% Cr. Steel
MATERIAL
Disc Hinge 13% Cr. Steel

Hinge Pin 13% Cr. Steel (No Casting)
Cover Gasket Spiral Wound SS 316 - CA Filler / Corrugated Soft Iron
Requirement Of Radiography Refer Technical Notes For Purchase Of Valves.
Washer, Nut, Pin 13% Cr Steel (No Casting) SS 410 / SS 304
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 800#
Body Forged
CONSTRUCTION
Cover Bolted
Body ASTM A 105

Bonnet ASTM A 105
MATERIAL

NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 150#
Body Cast
CONSTRUCTION
Cover Bolted
Requirement of Radiography Not Required

Disc 13% Cr. Steel
MATERIAL

Cover Gasket SP WND SS 316 - CA Filler / Corrugated Soft Iron
Washer, Nut, Pin 13% Cr Steel (No Casting) / SS 410 / SS 304
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 800#
Body Forged
CONSTRUCTION
Cover Bolted
Body ASTM A 105

Bonnet ASTM A 105
MATERIAL

NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 150#
Body Cast
CONSTRUCTION
Cover Bolted

Disc 13% Cr. Steel
MATERIAL

Cover Gasket SP WND SS 316 - CA Filler / Corrugated Soft Iron
Washer, Nut, Pin 13% Cr Steel (No Casting) / SS 410 / SS 304
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE
Pipe Material Class: A1K Size Range: ½" - 1½" Standard:

Design Temperature: As per PMS Corrosion Allowance: 0 mm Rating:
Rating: 800#
Body Forged
CONSTRUCTION
Cover Bolted
Body ASTM A 182 Gr. F304

Bonnet ASTM A 182 Gr. F304
MATERIAL

Cover Gasket SP WND SS 316 - Grafoil Filler
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE
Pipe Material Class: A1K Size Range: 2" - 24" Standard:

Rating: 150#
Body Cast
Cover Bolted
CONSTRUCTION

Requirement of Radiography Refer Note - 5
Requirement of Radiography Refer Technical Notes For Purchase Of Valves

Cover ASTM A 351 Gr WCB
Disc SS 304
Body Seat Ring SS 304
MATERIAL
Disc Hinge SS 304

Hinge Pin SS 304 (No Casting)
Cover Gasket Spiral Wound SS 316 - CA Filler
Washer, Nut, Pin SS 304 (No Casting)
4 10% Valve Castings Shall Undergo Radiographic Examination.
NOTES
5 All Castings Shall Be Solution Heat Treated.

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Design Pressure: As per PMS End Connection: SCRD (NPTF) 3000# as per ANSI B 16.11 Ends:
Rating: 800#
Body Forged
CONSTRUCTION
Cover Bolted
Body Seat Ring Renewable
Body ASTM A 105

Cover ASTM A 105
Disc / Piston ASTM B - 62
MATERIAL
Body Seat Ring ASTM B - 62

Cover Stud Bolt ASTM A193 GR B7 (Galvanised)
Cover Nut ASTM A194 GR 2H (Galvanised)
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Design Pressure: As per PMS End Connection: Flanged, Raised Face a per ANSI B 16.5 / 125 AARH Ends:
Rating: 150#
Body Cast
CONSTRUCTION
Cover Bolted

MATERIAL

Disc Hinge 13% Cr / A 216 Gr. WCB
Hinge Pin ASTM A 182 Gr. F6 / ASTM B - 62
Cover Gasket SS 304 (No Casting)
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Design Pressure: As per PMS End Connection: SCRD (NPTF) 3000# as per ANSI B 16.11 Ends:
Rating: 800#
Body Forged
CONSTRUCTION
Cover Bolted
Body ASTM A 105

Cover ASTM A 105
MATERIAL

NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Design Pressure: As per PMS End Connection: Flanged, Raised Face a per ANSI B 16.5 / 125 AARH Ends:
Rating: 150#
Body Cast
CONSTRUCTION
Cover Bolted

MATERIAL

Disc Hinge 13% Cr / A 216 Gr. WCB
Hinge Pin ASTM A 182 Gr. F6 / ASTM B - 62
Cover Gasket SS 304 (No Casting)
NOTES

DATA SHEET FOR GATE VALVE (½" - 1½")
VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Services: As per PMS Standard: API 602 Mnf's cat / fig:
Rating: 800#
Body Forged
Bonnet Bolted
Stem Rising
Wedge Disc Solid
CONSTRUCTION

Stem Packing Renewable With Valve Open On Stream
Hand Wheel Non Rising
Back Seat & Shoulder Integral
Others O. S & Y.
Body ASTM A 105

Bonnet ASTM A 105
Stem 13% Cr. Steel (No Casting)
Wedge Disc Stellited
MATERIAL

Stem Packing Graphited Asbestos With Sacrificial Corr. Inhibitor. & Inconel Wire Reinforcement
Hand Wheel Malleable Iron / Cast St / Fab.St / Duct. Iron
Bonnet Bolts ASTM A193 Gr B7
Bonnet Nuts ASTM A194 Gr 2H
Bonnet Gasket Spiral Wound SS 316 - CA Filler
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 150#
Body Cast
Bonnet Bolted
Stem Rising
Wedge Disc Solid / Flexible
CONSTRUCTION
Body Seat Ring Renewable / Non-Renewable

Others O.S & Y.
Hydrostatic Test Pressure Body: 450 psig, Seat: 325 psig

Bonnet ASTM A 216 Gr. WCB
Wedge Disc 13% Cr. Steel Facing / 13% Cr. Steel
MATERIAL
Body Seat Ring 13% Cr. Steel Facing / 13% Cr. Steel
Hand Wheel Malleable Iron
Back Seat & Shoulder 13% Cr Steel
Bonnet Gasket Spiral Wound SS 316 - CA Filler / Corrugated Soft Iron
3 Testing Shall Be As Per API 598 For Sizes Upto 24".
4 5% Valve Castings shall be Undergo Radiographic Examination.
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 800#
Body Forged
Bonnet Bolted
Stem Rising
Wedge Disc Solid
CONSTRUCTION

Others O. S & Y.
Body ASTM A 105

Bonnet ASTM A 105
MATERIAL

NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 150#
Body Cast
Bonnet Bolted
Stem Rising
CONSTRUCTION

Others O.S & Y.

MATERIAL
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 800#
Body Forged
Bonnet Bolted
Stem Rising
Wedge Disc Solid
CONSTRUCTION

Others O. S & Y.
Body ASTM A 105

Bonnet ASTM A 105
MATERIAL

NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 150#
Body Cast
Bonnet Bolted
Stem Rising
CONSTRUCTION

Others O.S & Y.

MATERIAL
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 800#
Body Forged
Bonnet Bolted
Stem Rising
Wedge Disc Solid
CONSTRUCTION

Others O. S & Y.

Stem SS 304 (No Casting)
MATERIAL

Bonnet Gasket Spiral Wound SS 316 - Grafoil Filler
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 150#
Body Cast
Bonnet Bolted
Stem Rising
CONSTRUCTION

Back Seat & Shoulder -
Others O.S & Y.
Body ASTM A 351 Gr CF8

Bonnet ASTM A 351 Gr CF8
Wedge Disc SS 304
MATERIAL

Bonnet Gasket SP WND SS 316 - CA Filler / Corrugated SS316
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Services: As per PMS Standard: IS: 778 CL. 2 Mnf's cat / fig:
Design Pressure: As per PMS End Connection: SCRD (F) 3000# as per B1.20.1 Ends:
Rating: 800#
Body Forged
Bonnet Screwed
Stem Non Rising
CONSTRUCTION
Wedge Disc Solid

Others O. S & Y.
Body IS: 318, Gr. 2 (LTB)

Bonnet IS: 318, Gr. 2 (LTB)
Stem IS: 320 Alloy HT2 (HTB)
MATERIAL
Wedge Disc IS: 318, Gr. 2 (LTB)

Body Seat Ring IS: 318, Gr. 2 (LTB)
Stem Packing PTFE
Bonnet Gasket Rubber
3 Testing Shall Be As Per IS: 778 CL. 2.
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Design Pressure: As per PMS End Connection: SCRD (F) 3000# as per B16.11 Ends:
Rating: 800#
Body Forged
Bonnet Screwed
Stem Rising
CONSTRUCTION
Wedge Disc Solid

Others O. S & Y.
Body BODY ASTM A 105

Bonnet BODY ASTM A 105
Stem 13% Cr (ASTM A 182 Gr. F6)
MATERIAL
Wedge Disc ASTM A 105 + 13% Cr facing

Stem Packing Grafoil
Bonnet Gasket Spiral Wound SS 304 + Graphite
3 Testing Shall Be As Per IS: 778 CL. 2.
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 150#
Body Cast
Bonnet Bolted
Stem Non-Rising
CONSTRUCTION
Wedge Disc Flexible


Wedge Disc ASTM A 216 Gr. WCB + 13% Cr Facing
MATERIAL

Back Seat & Shoulder 13% Cr
Wedge Facing Rings & Nut Stellited
Bonnet Bolts ASTM A193 Gr B7 (Galvanised)
Bonnet Nuts ASTM A194 Gr 2H (Galvanised)
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 150#
Body Cast
Bonnet Bolted
Stem Non-Rising
CONSTRUCTION
Wedge Disc Flexible

Position Limit Switches Required (Note - 5)

Wedge Disc ASTM A 216 Gr. WCB + 13% Cr Facing
MATERIAL

Back Seat & Shoulder 13% Cr
Wedge Facing Rings & Nut Stellited
4 Proximity sensor model NJ2-12 of P + F make or equivalent to be used for open and close position of each valve. Switch with proper accessories are duly fitted with valve and with Certified Flameproof
(Gr. IIA, IIB) terminal box with ½ inch NPT cable entry switches.
NOTES

DATA SHEET FOR GLOBE VALVE (½" - 1½")
VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 800#
Body Forged
Bonnet Bolted
Stem Rising
Disc Loose Plug Type
CONSTRUCTION

Hand Wheel Rising
Others O.S & Y.
Body ASTM A 105

Bonnet ASTM A 105
Disc Stellited
MATERIAL

NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Services: As per PMS Standard: BS - 1873 Mnf's cat / fig:
Rating: 150#
Body Cast
Bonnet Bolted
Stem Rising
Disc Loose Plug Type / Ball Type
CONSTRUCTION

Hand Wheel Rising
Others O.S & Y.
Requirement Of Radiography Refer note-5

Wedge Disc 13% Cr. Steel
MATERIAL

4 5% Valve Castings shall be Undergo Radiographic Examination.
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 800#
Body Forged
Bonnet Bolted
Stem Rising
CONSTRUCTION

Hand Wheel Rising
Others O.S & Y.
Body ASTM A 105

Bonnet ASTM A 105
Disc Stellited
MATERIAL

NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 150#
Body Cast
Bonnet Bolted
Stem Rising
CONSTRUCTION

Hand Wheel Rising
Others O.S & Y.

MATERIAL
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 800#
Body Forged
Bonnet Bolted
Stem Rising
CONSTRUCTION

Hand Wheel Rising
Others O.S & Y.

Disc Stellited
MATERIAL

Bonnet Gasket Spiral Wound SS 316 - Grafoil Filler
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 150#
Body Cast
Bonnet Bolted
Stem Rising
CONSTRUCTION

Hand Wheel Rising
Back Seat & Shoulder -
Others O.S & Y.
Body ASTM A 351 Gr. CF8

Bonnet ASTM A 351 Gr. CF8
Wedge Disc SS 304
MATERIAL

Bonnet Gasket SP WND SS 316 - CA Filler / Corrugated SS 316
Back Seat & Shoulder SS 304
NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 800#
Body Forged
Bonnet Bolted
Stem Rising
CONSTRUCTION

Hand Wheel Rising
Others O.S & Y.
Body ASTM A 105

Bonnet ASTM A 105
Stem 13% Cr ASTM A 182 Gr. F6
Disc 13% Cr ASTM A 182 Gr. F6
MATERIAL

NOTES

VENDOR COMPLIANCE

Rating: 150#
Body Cast
Bonnet Bolted
Stem Rising
CONSTRUCTION

Hand Wheel Rising
Back Seat & Shoulder O.S & Y.
Others Refer General Requirements Clause no. 2.4.7

Stem 13% Cr. (ASTM A 182 Gr. F6)
Wedge Disc ASTM A 216 Gr. WCB + 13% Cr. Facing
MATERIAL

Bonnet Gasket Spiral Wound SS 316 - Graphite
NOTES

DATASHEET FOR THERMAL SAFETY VALVES
REV. 00
Project No. Unit

Client Nayara Energy Limited Service MS / HSD
REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By
Client Review
Page 1 of 4
DATASHEET FOR THERMAL SAFETY VALVE
1 Tag No. RFS

GENERAL
2 Line / Equipment no. RFS

3 P & ID No. RFS
4 Function Thermal Safety
5
6 Operating Pressure Barg RFS
7 Fluid Phase RFS RFS
8 Set Pressure Barg RFS
9 Back Pressure RFS
10 Operating temperature Min / Max RFS
SERVICE CONDITION
11 Density RFS
12 Viscosity @ Min Op.Temp RFS
13 Viscosity @ Max Op.Temp RFS
14 Design Pressure RFS
15 Design Temperature °C RFS
16 Allowable Over Pressure % 21%
17 Relieving Capacity RFS
18 Relieving Temperature RFS
19 Cold Bench Test Pressure VTS
20
21 Type Thermal Relief
22 Nozzle Type Modified Nozzle
23 Bonnet Type Closed
24 Conventional / Balanced Bellow / Pilot Operated RFS
25 Inlet Connection Size Rating RF 150#
VALVE
26 Facing Finish RF 125 ~ 250 AARH

27 Outlet Connection Size Rating RF 150#
28 Facing Finish RF 125 ~ 250 AARH
29 Cap Connection type screwed / Belted Bolted
30 Cap Covered Adjustment Bolt Required
32 Lever Plain Required
33 Test Gag Required
34 Body & Bonnet ASTM A105 for Sizes less than 2"
35 Nozzle, Seat & Disc ASTM 316
MATERIAL
36 Spring ASTM 316

37
38
39
40 Code API
41 Calculation Sheet API RP 520
BASIS
42 Basis of Selection Thermal Expansion Due to Temperature Rise / Fire

43
44 Calculated Area m² VTS
45 Actual Flow Capacity VTS
ORIFICE
46 Selected Area VTS

47 Orifice Deisgnation VTS
48 Total Area VTS
49 Radiography 10% of valve casting shall go radiographic examination
50 Calibration Test Required
51 Hydro Test Required
TEST
52 Material Certification Required

53 Dimensional Report Required
54 Type Test Certificate Required
55
56 Manufacturer FAINGER LESER
57 Model Number VTS
MODEL
58 Approval VTS
59 IBR Certificate NA
60
Note For NOTES refer Page 3 of 5. RFS: Refer Follow Sheet, VTS: Vendor to Specify NA: Not Applicable.

DATASHEET FOR THERMAL SAFETY VALVE
Notes
1 Refer Thermal Relief / Pressure Relief valve tag list with process parameters as mentioned in Follow Sheet.
2 Thermal Relief / Pressure Relief Valves shall meet the requirements specified in the Valve Material Specification Doc No. NAYA-PALI-PI-VMS-001 as attached in MR for TRV.
3 Vendor shall refer Piping Material Specification Doc No. NAYA-PALI-PI-PMS-001 as attached in MR for TRV for the other materials.
4 All items as indicated shall be provided with a permanently attached stainless steel tag plate.
5 Mnadatory Spares are part of vendor scope.
6 Vendor to quote 2 YEARS Operation and Maintenace Spare for ordering at later stage by Owner.
7 Commissioning and Consumable spare, Special Tools and tackles are to be supplied by vendor.
8 Each TRV shall be designed for Maximum load

DATASHEET FOR THERMAL RELIEF VALVE
Sr. No. Tag number Service Fluid Phase P & ID No. Valve Type Set press. Oper. Temp. (°C) Design Design Valve Size Make / Remarks
(Barg) Temp. (°C) Press. (Barg) Inlet / Model No.
Outlet
Min Max (Inches)
1 To Wagon Loading Arm HSD Liquid NAYA-PALI-PR-PI-007 Thermal Safety Valve 12 3.9 47.2 65 14 1" X 1.5" VTS
TSV-2101
(HSD)
2 TSV-2201 T-200-A inlet HSD Liquid NAYA-PALI-PR-PI-007 Thermal Safety Valve 12 3.9 47.2 65 14 1" X 1.5" VTS
3 TSV-2202 T-200-B inlet HSD Liquid NAYA-PALI-PR-PI-007 Thermal Safety Valve 12 3.9 47.2 65 14 1" X 1.5" VTS
4 TSV-2203 T-200-C inlet HSD Liquid NAYA-PALI-PR-PI-007 Thermal Safety Valve 12 3.9 47.2 65 14 1" X 1.5" VTS
5 TSV-2301 Add TLF Gantry HSD Liquid NAYA-PALI-PR-PI-007 Thermal Safety Valve 12 3.9 47.2 65 14 1" X 1.5" VTS
TSV-2401
(HSD)
TSV-2402
(HSD)
TSV-2403
(HSD)
TSV-2404
(HSD)
TSV2405
(HSD)
TSV2406
(HSD)
TSV2407
(HSD)
TSV2408
(HSD)
14 To Wagon Loading Arm (MS) MS Liquid NAYA-PALI-PR-PI-008 Thermal Safety Valve 12 3.9 47.2 65 14 1" X 1.5" VTS
TSV1101
15 TSV1201 T-100-A inlet MS Liquid NAYA-PALI-PR-PI-008 Thermal Safety Valve 12 3.9 47.2 65 14 1" X 1.5" VTS
16 TSV1202 T-100-B inlet MS Liquid NAYA-PALI-PR-PI-008 Thermal Safety Valve 12 3.9 47.2 65 14 1" X 1.5" VTS
17 TSV1203 T-100-C inlet MS Liquid NAYA-PALI-PR-PI-008 Thermal Safety Valve 12 3.9 47.2 65 14 1" X 1.5" VTS
18 TSV1301 Add TLF Gantry MS Liquid NAYA-PALI-PR-PI-008 Thermal Safety Valve 12 3.9 47.2 65 14 1" X 1.5" VTS
TSV1401
TSV1402
TSV1403
TSV1404
23 TSV1501 T-100-D inlet MS Liquid NAYA-PALI-PR-PI-009 Thermal Safety Valve 12 3.9 47.2 65 14 1" X 1.5" VTS
24 TSV2501 T-200-D inlet HSD Liquid NAYA-PALI-PR-PI-009 Thermal Safety Valve 12 3.9 47.2 65 14 1" X 1.5" VTS
25 TSV2501 T-200-E inlet HSD Liquid NAYA-PALI-PR-PI-018 Thermal Safety Valve 12 3.9 47.2 65 14 1" X 1.5" VTS

Part - 4.5
Supply, Fabrication, erection of all MS Structural works
including Pipe racks, Dyke Wall, Pipe Supports, Operating
platforms, Manifold platforms, Access platforms, Gangways
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
Dyke Wall and Fire Wall
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
Pipe Bridge
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
Pipe Support
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
Crossovers / Platforms
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
Typ. standard details for crossovers / platforms (4 nos.) ‐as per Drg No.‐NAYA‐PALI‐CV‐GA‐026
BILL OF MATERIAL FOR ONE PLATFORM WT. KGS FOR 01 WT. KGS FOR 04

NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. MATERIAL MATERIAL NO. NOS. REMARKS
1 BASE PLATE 4 SA‐36 / SA ‐ 283 GR. C 10 THK. X 150 X 150 17.66 70.64
2 PLATFORM SUPPORT 4 SA‐36 / SA ‐ 283 GR. C 100 X 50 X 6 THK. X ~ 1800 LONG 156.3 625.2
5 HANDRAIL PIPE 1 GAVL. 50 NB X SCH80 ~ 11000 LONG 89.76 359.04
6 VERTICAL POST 12 GAVL. 50 NB X SCH80 ~ 11000 LONG 73.13 292.52
7 MIDRAIL FLAT 1 SA‐36 / SA ‐ 283 GR. C 50 X 6 THK. X ~ 11000 LONG 28.26 113.04
8 TOE GUARD FLAT 1 SA‐36 / SA ‐ 283 GR. C 100 X 6 THK. X ~ 11000 LONG 56.52 226.08
9 HANDRAIL PIPE 1 GAVL. 50 NB X SCH80 ~ 12444 LONG 95.08 380.32
10 VERTICAL POST 8 GAVL. 50 NB X SCH80 ~ 11000 LONG 49.15 196.6
11 MIDRAIL FLAT 4 SA‐36 / SA ‐ 283 GR. C 50 X 6 THK. X ~ 2705 LONG 25.5 102
12 STEP (CHEQUERED PLT.) 18 SA‐36 / SA ‐ 283 GR. C 800 X 220 6 THK. 149.2 596.8
13 UPN ‐ 150 1 SA‐36 / SA ‐ 283 GR. C 150 X 75 X 6 THK. X ~ 11384 LONG 191.25 765
14 CHEQUERED PLATE 1 SA‐36 / SA ‐ 283 GR. C 400 X 2000 X 6 THK. 376.8 1507.2
FOR 04 NOS 5976.76
Manifold Platforms
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
4.6
Supply, Installation, Testing and
Commissioning of Electrical
Equipment along with associated works
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
RAJASTHAN
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Page 1 of 2
RAJASTHAN
LIST OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description of Document Document No. Rev. No.
1. Electrical Scope of Works NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-043 00
2. Specification of HT VCB NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-022 00
3. Specification of Transformer NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-023 00
4. Specification of DG NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-024 00
5. Specification of UPS NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-025 00
6. Specification of LV Switchgear NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-026 00
7. Specification of Battery Charger NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-027 00
8. Specification of VFD NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-028 00
9. Specification of Lighting Transformer NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-029 00
10. Specification of Distribution Boards NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-030 00
11. Specification of Busduct NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-031 00
12. Specification of HV/LV Cables NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-032 00
13. Specification of High-mast NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-033 00
14. Specification of APFC NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-034 00
15. Specification of Earthing & Lightning 00
NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-035
Protection
16. Specification of LCS NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-036 00
17. Specification of Lighting System NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-037 00
18. Specification of Cable Tray NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-038 00
19. Specification of Flameproof Items NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-039 00
20. Specification of Plant Communication 00
NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-040
System
21. Specification of Walkie Talkie NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-041 00
22. Specification of Telephone NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-042 00
23. Specification of Double Pole Structure NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-045 00
RAJASTHAN
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-043 Rev: 01 Date: 08-04-2019
ELECTRICAL SCOPE OF WORKS

0 08-04-2019 ISSUED FOR REVIEW PBS PBS SKJ
Page 1 of 6
RAJASTHAN
1.0 PROJECT INFORMATION

Chotila, Dist: Pali. The product will be received by Tank wagon Nayara Energy’s
same will be delivered by Road to Dealers and bulk Customers / Consumers. Approx.
60 acres of land is acquired for setting up of this depot.The depot shall be designed &
constructed for full compliance with OISD 117,118, 244 & other statutory codes &
standards as applicable.
The Current through put is expected to be in range 65,000 KL/Month and likely to be
1,50,000 KL/Month in next 25 Years. It has been considered to have a Tankage of 7500
KL of MS and 21000 KL of HSD and a full Tank wagon Rake Capacity siding to meet the
requirement of current and near future requirement. It is also proposed to have Fire
Fighting facility which would require 610 KL/ Hr pumping and Fire water storage of
4000 KL.
It is also proposed to consider future expansion with double the Tankage of MS (15000
KL), HSD (42000 KL), Ethanol (20 % dosing), Bio Diesel (2000 KL) and ATF (4000 KL-
considering PLT parcel receipt or a half rake ATF). To meet the thus enhanced
capacities, provision of 2 x 3000 Kl of additional water tank in future; has been kept.
This document describes the design basis for electrical engineering to be adopted for
the project. The design of equipment shall meet the requirements of the applicable
codes and the technical specifications corresponding to each equipment.
2.0 SCOPE OF WORKS

1. Bidder shall supply the electrical items as per specifications attached in this
document.
2. This tender document covers specification for Electricals including supply of material
and bought out items / equipment including supply of erection & commissioning
spares, mandatory spares & tools /tackles as listed in specification / data sheets.
3. The scope includes works / services like handling at site, fabrication, testing,
inspection & testing, erection / installation, Site Acceptance test, field trials,
performance tests, mechanical completion, calibration as required, commissioning,
pre-commissioning, obtaining approvals from statutory bodies / other agencies,
Page 2 of 6
RAJASTHAN
performance test runs, rectification of any defect and handing over the package /
equipment as per data sheets and specification to the complete satisfaction of the
Engineer-In-Charge including supply of all labours, consumables & hardware etc. as
required, for the scope of work.
4. Third party inspection for all supply items. Third party inspection prices are included
in the supply price. Contractor to appoint Third Party Inspection Agency (TPIA) from
the Nayara Energy approved vendor list for carrying out various stage-wise and final
inspection. The scope includes preparation of as-built drawings.
5. Bidder shall submit all the relevant drawings and approvals as per the requirement of
individual specifications within 1 month from the placement of order. Bidder shall not
start fabrication / manufacturing unless the drawings and documents are approved by
the purchaser. Any manufacturing done prior to the drawing/document approval from
the purchaser shall be rejected.
6. Scope of work also includes preparation of electrical equipment and cable route
layout from MCC room to equipments, lighting layouts, primary and secondary
earthing layouts, cable schedules, interconnecting schedules, lightning protection
drawings, vendor drawings, datasheets, and design calculations of equipments.
7. Scope of Work also includes obtaining statutory approvals as required for electrical
installation of the plant. All equipment not mentioned but required for satisfactory
operation of the plant and to meet desired intent of specification shall be included in
the scope of supply of bidder. Such equipment if noticed during detail engg shall be
supplied by bidder without any implication of bidder. Make of equipment shall be
subjected to purchaser’s approval.
Any other work not mentioned specifically above but required to complete the
job.
satisfaction of the Nayara Energy/ DEC or if any damage due to bad workmanship is
found within warrantee period, cost of rectification of the damaged portion shall be
recovered from Security Deposit against warrantee of work done by contractor.
Page 3 of 6
RAJASTHAN
The complete work shall be done as per attached Standard Specifications, Drawings and
instructions of Engineer in Charge.
3.0 SITE DATA
Climatic Data & Meteorological Data

Minimum 5 °C
Seismic Zone II
4.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
OWNER’S SCOPE OF SUPPLY - NIL
CONTRACTOR’S SCOPE OF SUPPLY:-
All materials and consumables required for satisfactory completion of the job shall be
supplied by contractor. Contractor’s scope shall also include arranging of all tools,
tackles, equipments, machinery and labour required for satisfactory completion of the
job.
5.0 POWER, WATER & OTHER FACILITIES
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to provide within the scope of work all
facilities, consumables and utilities necessary for performance of the work including
(but not limited to) water, power, transportation, labour, tools, construction and
testing equipment, machinery and land at or about the job site(s) for the
CONTRACTOR’s field offices, stores; residential accommodation for CONTRACTOR’s
staff; quarry rights and borrow areas and making access roads to or about the job
site(s) and CONTRACTOR’s offices, stores, accommodation, borrow areas.
The OWNER does not warranty or undertake the provision of any facility, consumable
or utility whatsoever to the CONTRACTOR.
Any assistance which the OWNER renders to the CONTRACTOR in terms hereof or otherwise
Page 4 of 6
RAJASTHAN
relative to the work by provision of any facility, utility, consumables for the performance of
any of his obligations under the Contract, shall not be a ground for extension of time for
completion or other claim whatsoever.
6.0 CONSTRUCTION POWER
The contractor has to arrange construction power connection with his own DG sets at no extra
cost. Alternatively, contractor may directly arrange construction power from the existing sub-
station/ LT line of State Electricity Board and make necessary arrangement (supply , laying of
cables, etc.) for distribution to his job site/s by his own effort and cost.
All the works will be done as per IEA regulations and passed by the Engineer-In-Charge. The
temporary lines will be removed forthwith after the completion of the work or if there is any
hindrance caused to the other works due to the alignment of these lines, the contractor will
reroute or remove the temporary lines at his own cost. The cost of power supply shall be
payable to SEB directly. The owner shall not, however, guarantee the supply of electricity and
no compensation for failure or short supply of electricity will be entertained.
7.0 CONSTRUCTION WATER
Contractor will have to make his own arrangements for supply of water to his labour
camps, residential accommodation of staff and for the works. All pumping installation,
pipe net wok and distribution system will have to be carried by the contractor at his
own cost.
The owner shall not take any guarantee for the supply of water and will not relieve
the contractor of his responsibility in making his own arrangement and for the timely
completion of the various works as stipulated.
8.0 LAND
The OWNER may at his discretion and convenience, if it has sufficient available land
at its disposal, provide land to the CONTRACTOR near or about the job site, for the
construction of the CONTRACTOR’s field office(s), stores and Yard required for or in
connection with the execution of the work(s). Such land shall be utilized by the
CONTRACTOR only for the purpose of the contract and for the duration of the
contract.
The CONTRACTOR shall at his own cost and initiative construct temporary buildings or
other accommodation necessary for the purpose and make suitable arrangements for
water and power supply and for provisions of drainage and dewatering arrangements
thereof in accordance with plans / designs / layouts previously approved by the Site
Engineer in this behalf.
Page 5 of 6
RAJASTHAN
9.0 ACCESS TO SITE
The CONTRACTOR shall construct, if necessary at his own cost and initiative, temporary
access road to the site from the main public feeder road(s) and from borrow areas and shall so
align such roads or ways so as not to interfere with the construction of the site or hamper
construction of pavement roads by or on behalf of the OWNER or other CONTRACTORS
operating at or about the job site.
The CONTRACTOR shall, if so required or relative to the performance of any other

work at the site or construction of permanent roads, suspend, discontinue use of and
/ or re-route any access road constructed by him. No suspension, discontinuance or
re-routing as aforesaid shall form the basis of any claims by the CONTRACTOR against
the OWNER for compensation of damages or ground for extension of time for
10.0 SPECIAL INFORMATION
The tenderer shall before tendering and shall be deemed before tendering to have
undertaken a thorough study of the proposed work, the job site(s) involved, the site
conditions, soil conditions, the terrain, the climatic conditions, the labour, power,
material and equipment availability and transport and communication facilities, the
availability and transport suitability or borrow areas, the availability of land for right
of way and temporary office and accommodations, quarters, and all other facts and
facilities necessary or relevant for the formulation of the tender, supply of materials
and the performance of the work. Without prejudice to the foregoing, the tenderers
may be allowed access to any information regarding the site of the work, the
investigations conducted relative thereto, such as soil investigation etc. But, these
shall be only indicative in nature and the tenderers are expected to collect their own
data for preparation and submission of their tender. Any claim at a later date based
on either incorrectness or inadequacy of the information/data made available by the
OWNER/consultant to a tenderer shall not be entertained. The OWNER/Consultant
shall be fully absolved of any and all liabilities in this regard.
Page 6 of 6
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR HV VCB

0 21-12-2018 Issued for Approval PBS PBS SKJ
Page 1 of 23
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 GENERAL
3.0 OPERATING CONDITIONS
4.0 DESIGN AND OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
5.0 SWITCHBOARD COMPONENTS
6.0 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
8.0 INFORMATION REQUIRED WITH THE OFFER
9.0 PACKING & DISPATCH
10.0 DRAWING APPROVAL
11.0 WARRANTY
Page 2 of 23
RAJASTHAN
ANNEXURES
Annexure No. Description

I DOCUMENTATION FOR HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS
II LIST OF SPARES
Page 3 of 23
RAJASTHAN
1.0 GENERAL
Scope
The scope of this specification includes technical requirements of design,

manufacture, testing, packing and dispatch of HV, indoor, drawout type, 11kv
switchboards, incorporating Vacuum circuit breaker, which shall be installed in the
Petroleum Storage Terminal Project of NAYARA ENERGY Ltd. (NEL), Pali,Rajasthan.
The equipment shall comply with the requirements of latest revision of following
standards issued by BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards) unless otherwise specified:
IS: 613 Specification for copper rods and bars for electrical purposes
IS: 694 PVC insulated cables for working voltages up to and including 1100 V
IS: 1248 Electrical indicating instruments
IS: 2071 Methods of high voltage Testing
IS: 2544 Porcelain post insulators for systems with nominal voltage greater than 1000 V
IS: 2705 Current Transformer
IS: 3082 Material or data for aluminium bus bars
IS: 3156 Voltage Transformer
IS: 3231 Electrical relays for power system protection
IS: 3427 Metal Enclosed Switchgear
IS: 4691 Degree of protection provided by enclosure
IS: 5578 Guide for marking of insulated conductors
IS:6875 Control Switches
IS:8530 AC electricity meters
IS: 9046 AC Contactors of voltage above 1000 V upto and including 11000 V.
IS: 9385 High voltage fuses
IS: 9920 Switches and switch isolators for voltages above 1000 V
IS: 9921 AC disconnectors (isolators) and earthing switches for voltage above 1000 V
IS: 11353 Guide for uniform system of marking and identification of conductors & apparatus terminals
IS: 12729 General requirements for switchgear and control gear for voltages exceeding 1000 V
IS: 13118 Specification for High voltage Alternating Circuit Breakers
IS: 13703 Low voltage fuses for voltages not exceeding 1000 V ac or 1500 V dc.
IS: 13947-1 Degree of protection
Page 4 of 23
RAJASTHAN
• The equipment shall also conform to the provisions of Indian Electricity rules and
other statutory regulations currently in force in the country.
• In case Indian standards are not available for any equipment, standards issued by
IEC / BS / VDE / IEEE / NEMA or equivalent agency shall be applicable.
• In case of any contradiction between various referred standards / specifications /
data sheet and statutory regulations for following order of priority shall governs:
o Data sheets
o This specifications
o Codes and standards
o Statutory regulations
Ambient Conditions
Equipments shall be suitable for operating in humid & corrosive atmosphere found in
petrochemical plants. Service conditions shall be defined as
Maximum ambient temperature: 47 °C.

Minimum ambient temperature: 5 °C.
Relative humidity: 50 - 60%.
Wind speed:
5.5-6.0 m/s
Elevation: 183 mtrs above MSL
4.1 ENCLOSURE AND PROTECTION
1. The High Voltage VCB shall be metal-enclosed and shall comprise of standard pre-
fabricated, cold-rolled sheet steel units, assembled to form a rigid, free-standing,
dead-front structure. Hot rolled sheet steel is, however, acceptable for inter-panel
partitions, barrier sheets and shutters. As a minimum, 2 mm (14 SWG) sheet steel
shall be used for all front doors and covers, and 2 mm sheet steel for inter-panel
partitions. Wherever required, stiffeners shall be provided to increase stiffness of
large size doors and covers.
Page 5 of 23
RAJASTHAN
2. Vertical panels shall be assembled to form a continuous line-up of uniform height.

Panel shall be compartmentalized with single front construction and protection
degree IP 4X.
3. Fault level of 11kv VCB shall be 25 kA for 3 secs and in panel rating shall be 630 A.
4. The switchboards shall be totally enclosed and vermin-proof. If necessary,
openings for natural ventilation shall be provided. These shall be louvered and
provided with wire mesh having opening less than 1mm. The enclosure shall have
complete protection against approach to live parts or contact with internal moving
parts as per IS: 3427. The switchboard enclosure shall have IP4X protection as per
IEC 529 or IS 12063.
5. All openings, covers and doors shall be provided with suitable 1” x ¼” thick
neoprene gaskets.
6. Each unit of the switchboard shall have necessary internal sheet metal barriers to
form separate compartments for circuit breaker, bus bars, instruments and relays,
cable connections, etc. Compartments for cable connections shall allow cable
termination and connection work with the switchgear energized.
7. Suitable arc propagation barrier shall also be provided in the bus bar compartment
at every junction between two adjacent cubicles. Independent pressure relief
devices shall be provided for all HV compartments, i.e. bus bar, cable and breaker
compartment and each compartments shall be tested for internal arc fault.
8. All identical equipment and corresponding parts shall be fully interchangeable.
9. Safety barriers / shutters shall be provided for all HV compartment with the bus
bars energized.
10. It shall be possible to extend the switchgear in either direction at a later date.
Ends of bus bars shall be suitably drilled for this purpose. Panels at extreme ends
shall have openings which shall be covered with plates screwed to the panel.
Details of drilled holes in bus bar and openings in the panels, provided for future
extension shall be clearly shown in vendor drawings.
11. The draw out carriage on the switchboard shall have three positions: “Service”,
“Test”, and “Draw-out”. Automatic safety shutters shall be provided to ensure the
inaccessibility of all live parts fire retardant the breaker is drawn out. The breaker
feeder trolley / cassette shall remain inside the cubicle even in the “Test”
position. There shall be distinct overall door for the breaker compartment, which
can be closed with breaker in test position and it shall be lockable type.
All circuit breakers modules of the same rating shall be inter-changeable. Suitable
interlocks shall be provided to prevent the following operations:
Page 6 of 23
RAJASTHAN
• “Plugging in” or “drawing out” of a closed breaker.

• “Plugging in” a breaker with the earthing isolator closed.
• “Closing” of the earthing isolator with the breaker “plugging in”.
• Pulling out the auxiliary circuit plug with the breaker in the service position.
• Pushing in the breaker to the service position, with the auxiliary circuit
plugging not in position.
12. All hardware shall be corrosion-resistant. All joints and connections of the panel
members shall be made by zinc-passivated, or cadmium plated, high quality steel
bolts, nuts and washers, secured against loosening. Star washers shall be provided
to ensure effective continuity.
13. Suitable removable type eye bolts shall be provided for the lifting of the panel /
shipping section. These bolts, when removed shall not leave any opening in the
panels.
14. The Switchboards shall be provided with front access with hinged doors and rear
access with bolted cover.
15. Paint Shade shall be RAL-7035.
16. All Flameproof equipment being used shall be approved by CMRI, Dhanbad and
CCOE / PESO, Nagpur for use in hazardous area.
4.2 ACCESSIBILITY
1. All relays, metering, and control components shall be mounted on the panel front
only.
2. Checking and removal of components shall be possible without disturbing adjacent
equipment. All equipment shall be easily accessible. It shall be possible to set all
measuring relays without de-energising the switchboard. All mounted equipment
shall have identification tags of self-sticking PVC tapes at the rear also. In
addition, identifications numbers shall be painted on the panel to give a
permanent identification mark. Mounting of relays for a particular breaker feeder
panel shall be limited to that particular feeder only.
3. All terminals shall be shrouded with plastic covers to prevent accidental contact.
4.3 BUS BAR
1. The switchboard shall comprise of 3-phase Electrolytic grade Aluminium bus bar
which shall extend through all units of the switchgear line-up. The main bus bars
Page 7 of 23
RAJASTHAN
shall have uniform cross-section throughout their length, and shall be sized to
carry continuously the current specified in the data sheet. Bus bars shall be housed
in a separate chamber and shall be accessible for inspection wire guards or mesh
shall be provided inside the enclosure to allow visual inspection of bus bars, to
avoid accidental contact when the cover is removed.
2. Bus bars shall be insulated by using heat-shrinkable PVC sleeves. The sleeves shall
be rated to withstand the system. This shall be verified by a type test in which the
line voltage will be applied between the sleeved main bus bar and an aluminium
foil wrapped closely around the insulation over a length of at least 500mm. All bus
bar joints and all tap-off connections from the main horizontal bus bars shall be
provided with removable FRP shrouds.
3. Bus bars shall be supported at regular intervals on epoxy resin Insulators made of
non-hygroscopic, non-inflammable material with tracking index equal to or more
than that defined in Indian Standard. Both bus bars and the supports shall be
adequately sized and braced to withstand the specified short-circuit current for 1
second. Dynamic stresses shall be calculated on the basis of the specified peak
short-circuit current. All bus supports shall be of non-carbonising material,
resistant to acids and alkalies.
4. Bus bars shall be prominently marked with Red, Yellow and Blue colour rings for
easy phase identification at regular interval and at every power tap off point.
5. The thermal design of the bus bars shall be based on installation of the switchgear
in poorly ventilated conditions. The cooling air volume shall take into account only
the bus bar enclosure. The hot spot temperature for aluminium bus bars including
joints at design ambient temperature shall be as per IS: 12729
6. Bus bar shall be located in separate compartment and with bolted cover, and with
caution sign.
7. All the busbar joints shall have silver plating at the joints. The thickness of silver
plates shall not be less than 5-micron.
8. Busbar short time rated withstand current and time: 40 kA for 3 sec.
4.4 HV POWER CONNECTION
1. The incoming power connection shall be through XLPE cables and outgoing power
connection shall be through XLPE cables, as indicated in the data sheet. Ample
space for connection these cables shall be provided at the rear of the
switchboards. In order to avoid accidental contact in the cable compartment while
carrying out inspection by opening the rear cover, a removable expanded metal
barrier shall be provided in the cable compartment. Unless otherwise specified,
Page 8 of 23
RAJASTHAN
the power cable shall enter the switchboard from the bottom. Non magnetic cable
gland plates shall be provided for feeders wherever single core cables are used.
2. The switchboard shall be supplied complete with supports for clamping outgoing
and incoming cables. The head-room available between cable gland plate and
terminal lugs shall not be less than 900 mm for 11 KV cables.
3. In case the standard panel depth cannot accommodate the specified no. of cables,
a rear extension panel of uniform height shall be provided. An earth strip shall also
be brought to this extension panel.
4. Unless otherwise specified, all power cables shall enter the switchgear from the
bottom.
5. The terminating kits of Cable shall preferably be with suitable heat shrinkable kit.
4.5 AUXILIARY WIRING AND TERMINALS
1. Inside the cubicles, the wiring for control, signaling, protection and instrument
circuits shall be done with BIS approved, PVC insulated, flame retardant type,
copper conductor, wire. The insulation grade shall be 650 V, the wiring shall
preferably be enclosed in plastic channels or neatly bunched together, wiring
between HV breakers or cable compartment to relay and metering compartments
shall be routed through flexible conduits.
2. 10% spare terminals shall be provided on each terminal block. Conductors shall be
terminated with adequately sized compression type lugs for connection to
equipment terminals and strips, stranded conductors shall be soldered at the ends
before connection are made to the terminals. Sufficient terminals shall be
provided at each terminal block to ensure that not more than one outgoing wire is
connected per terminal. Terminal strips shall preferably be separated from power
circuits by metals barriers or enclosures. All spare contacts of auxiliary relays,
timers, etc. shall be wired up to the terminals.
3. Each wire shall be identified at both ends by correctly sized PVC ferrules, Shorting
links shall be provided for all CT terminals.
4. CT secondary wiring shall be done with 2.5 mm² copper conductors. Other control
wiring may be with 1.5 mm2 copper conductors for 1.1 V.
5. Control cables shall enter the switchgear from bottom.
6. Requisite cable glands and tinned copper cable lugs shall be supplied along with
the switchboard. The cable glands shall be of nickel-plated brass, double-
compression-type. Supporting facilities shall be provided for clamping the control
cables. All control cabling shall be with 2.5 mm² copper conductors for 1.1 V.
Page 9 of 23
RAJASTHAN
7. All inter panel control wiring within each shipping section shall be by switchgear
vendor. The inter panel wiring shall be taken PVC sleeves or suitable grommets.
For inter panel wiring between the shipping sections, wires in rolls of the required
length, connected at one point, and shall be supplied with the connection at site.
4.6 CONTROL AND INDICATION
1. Breaker tripping, closing and spring charging devices shall be fed with DC control
power supply. DC power available at site (Class – 1 power) 110 V DC with quantity
backup. 110 V DC supply of required capacity would be provided at a single point.
Further distribution of DC supply is in the scope of vender. The rated DC voltage
shall be as specified in the data sheet. The power supply for breaker opening,
closing and indication devices shall be arranged as follows.
2. One DC feeder shall be provided for each bus.
3. One separate, single phase power supply shall be provided for each bus section for
feeding space heaters, etc, unless otherwise specified.
4. Metering shall be provided as below:
a. Ammeters in all the three phases with selector switch
b. Voltmeter with selector switch
c. kWh meter
d. Power factor meter
5. Breaker positions (CLOSE, OPEN, Spring-Charged, test position, service position)

shall be indicated mechanically, Electrical indications, with colours as given
below, shall also be provided.
Breaker “Close”: Red lamp

Breaker “Open “: Green lamp
Breaker auto-trip: Amber lamp
Trip circuit healthy: White lamp
Spring Charging: Blue lamp
A common DC control supply fail indication shall be provided for each bus section with
a blue coloured lamp.
Page 10 of 23
RAJASTHAN
4.7 EARTHING CONNECTIONS
All cubicles shall be connected to an earth bus bar running throughout the length of
the switchboard. All doors and movable parts shall be connected to the earth bus with
flexible copper connections. Provision shall be made to connect the earthing bus bar
to the plant earthing grid at two ends. All non-current carrying metallic parts of the
equipment and components shall be earthed. The earth bus shall be brought back to
the cable compartment, and earthing bolts shall be brought back to the cable
compartment, and earthing bolts shall be provided to ground cable armour. The
mating surfaces of all bolted parts shall be specially zinc passivated to ensure
continuity between them.
4.8 SPACE HEATERS
The panels shall be provided with space heaters to prevent moisture condensation,
and maintain cubicle temperature 50 °C above the ambient. The space heaters shall
be located at the bottom of the panel, and shall be controlled through a MCB and a
thermostat with an adjustable setting. The thermostat shall preferably be located in
the metering or relay chamber. Space heater ‘ON’ indication shall be provided on the
panel.
4.9 PANEL SUPPORTING FRAME
The panel shall be suitable for installation on panel supporting frame of 3 - 4 mm

thickness, to be supplied by others. The panels shall be suitable for tack welding,
directly to this frame.
4.10 NAMEPLATES
A nameplate with the switchboard designation shall be fixed at the top of the central
panel. A separate nameplate giving feeder details and a danger plate (Red) shall be
provided at the front and rear for each panel also.
Nameplates shall be provided for each equipment (lamps, push buttons, switches,
relays, auxiliary contactors, etc.) mounted on the switchboard. Special warning plates
shall be provided on all removable covers or doors giving access to high voltage cables
Page 11 of 23
RAJASTHAN
or bus bars. Special warning labels shall be provided inside the switchboard also
wherever considered necessary. Identification tags shall be provided inside the panel
matching with those shown on the circuit diagram. Blank name plate shall be provided
for spare feeders.
Engraved nameplates shall be aluminium. However, black-engraved perspex sheet

nameplates will also be acceptable. Hard paper nameplates will not be acceptable.
Nameplate shall be fastened by screws and not by adhesives.
4.11 PAINTING
All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and de greased to remove mill scale,
rust, grease and dirt. Fabricated structures shall be pickled and then rinsed to remove
any trace of acid. The under surface shall be prepared by applying a coat of
phosphate paint and a coat of yellow zinc chromate primer. The under surface shall
be made free from all imperfections before undertaking the finishing coat.
After preparation of the under surface, the switchboard shall provided with epoxy
based powder coating. The colour shade of the final paint shall be as manufacture’s
standard, unless otherwise specified. Panel finish shall be free from imperfections like
pinholes, orange peels, run-off paint, etc.
All unpainted steel parts shall be zinc passivated, cadmium plated or suitably treated
to prevent rust and corrosion. If these parts are moving elements, then these shall be
greased. Vendor has to furnish complete details of painting procedure and painting
facilities available along with the offer.
5.0 SWITCHBOARD COMPONENTS
5.1 BREAKERS
1. Vacuum circuit breakers shall be used in the switchboard. The exact type and
ratings shall be as indicated in the data sheet/SLD. Breaker transport trolleys
required for cassette mounted breakers shall be provided for each switchboard. No
of trolleys to be provided shall be as per data sheet. VCB shall be fully horizontally
drawout type.
Page 12 of 23
RAJASTHAN
2. Vacuum circuit breakers shall be designed with low switching over voltage levels
and with a long switching life. The interrupter shall be leak-free, with a target
value of vacuum life of 20 years.
3. The breakers shall have at least 8 normally open (NO) and 8 normally closed (NC)
spare auxiliary contacts. If these are not available, an auxiliary relay shall be used
to multiply the auxiliary contacts of the breakers. All auxiliary contacts shall be
wired to the terminal block. Auxiliary contacts and limit switches shall be in dust-
tight enclosures.
4. The breakers shall have a motor-operated, spring-charged mechanism. It shall also
be possible to charge the springs manually. The closing spring shall get re-charged
(for subsequent closing) soon after a closing shot and prior to breaker tripping. In
case the limit switch fails to cut out the spring charging motor with the springs
fully charged, the motor shall be automatically de-coupled. The control circuit
shall be suitable for local as well as remote control. Breakers shall be trip-free and
shall have an anti-pumping device.
5. Line PT shall not be mounted in the breaker carriage. In case of truck mounted
breaker, line PT shall be provided in a separate panel.
6. Surge suppressors shall be provided with mechanically operated emergency trip
device. This device shall be available on the front of panel. Mechanically operated
‘closing’ device shall be provided for all breakers.
7. The complete breaker assembly should have inter-changeability with breakers of
identical ratings. Each breaker shall be provided with an operation counter.
8. An integral earthing system, or a separate earthing carriage/truck, shall be
provided. In case of a separate earthing carriage, the necessary trolleys for bus-
side and cable-side earthing shall be supplied. After withdrawing the circuit
breaker, this can be inserted to facilitate earthing of cables and bus bars. Earthing
truck shall be complete with the PT and voltmeter, giving audio-visual indication
and solenoid interlock to prevent closing of bus side earthing truck on live bus
bars. Earthing truck operation with door open is acceptable.
5.2 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
Current and voltage transformers shall be cast-resin insulated. The primary and
secondary terminals shall be marked indelibly and easily approachable for termination
and testing etc. The CT shall be suitable for 11 KV systems.
Page 13 of 23
RAJASTHAN
5.3. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CT)

Current transformers shall conform to IS: 2705. The short time rating shall be equal to
that of the switchboard. They shall be mounted on the stationary part of the
switchboard. The CT ratings shall be as shown in the data sheet. Protective CTs shall
have an accuracy class of 5P and an accuracy limit factor of 15. Low reactance CT’S
shall be used for protection. CTs for instruments shall have an accuracy class of 1.0
and an accuracy limit factor less than 5.0. One leg of the CTs shall be earthed.
Separate CTs shall be provided for differential protection. All CTs shall be star
connected. Interposing CT (ICT) shall be provided for differential protection of
transformers having star-delta connection.
Access to each set of CTs shall be provided for repair / Maintenance.
5.4 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS (VT)
The voltage transformers shall conform to IS: 3156. The voltage transformers shall be
of draw out-type and shall be provided with fuses on primary side and a 4-pole
miniature circuit breakers with auxiliary contacts on the secondary side.
The draw out mechanism shall disconnect the V. T. from the bus bars. The primary
connection shall be disconnected before the V.T. or its primary fuses become
accessible. Neutral point of the star connected VTs both on the primary and secondary
side shall be earthed.
The VTs shall have an over voltage factor of 1.9 for 30 seconds, and an accuracy class
of 1.0 from 10% to 120% of normal voltage. VT selected shall be compatible with
system grounding i.e. solidly or resistance grounding.
The primary rated voltage shall be equal to V/√3, if the VT is connected between
phase and neutral.
If not otherwise specified, the secondary voltage shall be 110/√3 V. The burden and
class of accuracy shall be as specified in data sheets. For numerical l relays, either a
3-phase 5-limb VT, or 3 single phase VTs with secondary windings connected in open
delta shall be provided.
Page 14 of 23
RAJASTHAN
5.5 KW / KWH METERS
The kW meters shall be suitable to measure unbalanced loads on a 3-phase, 3 wire

system. The kW meters shall operate on a VT secondary voltage of 110 V. The kWh
meters shall be suitable for operation on a 3-phase, 3 wire system.
5.6 FREQUENCY METERS
These shall be of direct-reading or digital type, and shall operate on a VT secondary

voltage of 110 V. The standard range shall be 45-50-55 Hz.
5.7 POWER FACTOR METERS
Power factor meters shall operate on a VT secondary voltage of 110 V. The CT

secondary current shall be shown on the relevant drawings. The standard range shall
be 0.5 lead - 1 and 0 - 0.5 lag.
6.0 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
6.1 AUXILIARY RELAYS AND CONTACTORS
Auxiliary relays and contactors shall generally be used inter-locking and multiplying
contacts. Auxiliary contacts shall be capable of carrying the maximum anticipated
current.
6.2 TRIPPING RELAYS

All tripping relays shall be of lockout type with hand-reset contacts, and shall be
suitable to operate on the specified DC voltage. These relays shall have self-coil cut-
off contacts and shall be provided with hand-rest operation indicators. Tripping relays
will be acceptable in non-drawn out cases. The number of contacts shall be as shown
on the approved schematic drawings.
6.3 PROTECTIVE RELAYS
All protective relays shall be back-connected, of draw-out type, suitable for flush
mounting, and fitted with dust-right covers. Alternatively, “plug in”, type relays will
also be acceptable. The relay cases shall have a provision for insertion of a test plug
at the front for testing and calibrations using an external power supply without
Page 15 of 23
RAJASTHAN
disconnecting the permanent wiring. It shall be possible to short the CTs through the
test plug. Auxiliary relays are acceptable in fixed execution.
All relays shall be mounted on the panel front unless otherwise specified.
Protective relays shall have hand reset facilities and clear operating indication, e.g.
flags for mechanical type relays or light emitting diodes for type relays. It shall be
possible to reset the flag without the relay case.
Anti-fungus treatment shall be provided for all relays.
Microprocessor based relays shall be acceptable, provided specific approval for make
and model is obtained from consultant / Owner before placement of switchboard
order.
Type of relay i.e. electromechanical static or numerical shall be as defined in data

sheet / job specification.
Following protections shall be included in the panel
• Over current protection (50, 51)

• Earth fault protection (51N)
• PT fuse failure
• Lockout relay (86)
• Under voltage protection (27)
• Over voltage protection (59)
6.4 CONTROL SWITCHES
All control switches shall be rotary, rear connected type having a cam operated
contact mechanism. Phosphor bronze contacts shall be used on the control switches.
Unless otherwise stated, circuit breaker control switches shall be 3-position CNT,
spring return to neutral from both close and trip positions. They shall have pistol-grip
handles. Number of ways, locking system, lost motion device, etc, if required, shall be
shown on the relevant schematic drawings. Two spare ways shall be provided on these
switches.
Page 16 of 23
RAJASTHAN
Ammeter selector switches shall have a make-before-break feature on its contacts.

The selector switch shall generally have four positions: three for reading 3-phase
currents and the fourth for the OFF position. The voltmeter selector switch shall also
have four positions: three shall be used to measure phase-to-phase voltages, and the
fourth shall be for the OFF position.
6.5 INDICATING LAMPS
Switchboard type, low power consumption, indicating lamps shall be used. Lamps shall
be supplied complete with the necessary current-limiting resistor duly tested for its
rating. Ageing test for the resistors should have been carried out. Lamps shall be
provided with translucent lamp covers to diffuse light. Alternatively, clustered light
emitting diode (LED) with minimum 10 mm diameter may be provided.
During fabrication, the switchboard shall be subjected to inspection by Owner / PMC /

Contractor to assess the progress of work, as well as to ascertain that only quality raw
material is used. The manufacturer shall furnish all necessary information concerning
the supply to Owner’s inspectors.
All routine & acceptance tests shall be carried out at manufacturer’s work under his
care & expense.
Type tests if asked shall be performed. Short circuit test shall be performed at CPRI
and heat run test may be performed at manufacturer’s works. However, certificates
for the switchgear panel and circuit breakers, from a recognised testing organization,
shall be furnished along with the bid.
In addition, acceptance tests shall be conducted as follows to check mechanical and

electrical operation and switchboard wiring to specifications and approved schematic
drawings.
Type & shop test shall be witnessed by an inspector of PMC / Owner or an agency
authorized by the owner. Prior notice of minimum 4 weeks shall be given to inspector
for witnessing the tests
Page 17 of 23
RAJASTHAN
Acceptance tests shall be as follows:
A general visual check shall be carried out. This shall cover measurement of overall
dimensions, location, number and type of devices, terminal boxes, location and
connection of terminals etc.
Manual and electrical operation of Circuit breakers / Relays shall be checked under
worst conditions of auxiliary supply voltage.
Dry insulation test with power frequency voltage shall be conducted for the main and
auxiliary circuits.
Insulation resistance of the main and auxiliary circuits shall be checked before and
after the high voltage withstand test.
Operation check shall be carried for every control function as per the schematic
diagram by manually simulating fault condition and operation of control switches,
relays etc.
For equipment bought from other sub-suppliers, certified test reports of tests carried
out at the manufacturer’s works shall be submitted. Normally all routine tests as
specified in the relevant standards shall be conducted by the sub-supplier at his
works.
Sheet Thickness, Material Test Certificate:
1. Calibration Certificate of CTs, PTs, Relay for protection, indicating meter etc.
2. Test certificate from Government approved Lab.
a. Electrolytic grade Al - Chemical

- Mechanical
- Physical etc.
3. Silver plating thickness.

4. Tank Certificate.
5. Heat shrinkable sleeve certificate.
6. Paint thickness, Dimensional thickness test
Page 18 of 23
RAJASTHAN
7. Type test certificate test:
a. Ingress protection
b. Shunt circuit test
c. Peak current test
8. Factory test:
I.R, HV, logic test by simulation, Interlock test, main contact Mv drop test, closing
time, Tripping time, bouncing time of contact
9. Control circuit test – I.R, H.V

10. Heat run test under simulated condition.
11. Alarm test and Annunciator test shall be done for HT switchboard.
1. Bill of quantity.
2. Bidder shall clearly specify the deviation taken w.r.t specification and datasheet.
Unless otherwise specifically mentioned it will be understood and agreed that offer
is based on strict conformance to this specification in all respect.
3. All the necessary datasheets and drawings as applicable.
4. List recommended of spare for 5 years trouble free operation.
1. All the equipment shall be divided into several sections for protection and ease of
handling during transportation.
2. The equipment shall be properly packed for transportation by ship / rail or trailer.
The equipment shall be wrapped in polythene sheets before being placed in crates
/ cases to prevent the damage to finish.
3. Crates / cases shall have skid bottom for handling. Special notations such as
‘Fragile’, ‘This side up’. ‘Centre of gravity’, ‘Weight’, ‘Owner’s particulars’, ‘PO
no’ etc shall be clearly marked on the package together with other details as per
purchase order.
Page 19 of 23
RAJASTHAN
4. The equipment may be stored in outdoors for long periods before installation. The
packing shall be completely suitable for outdoor storage in areas with heavy rains /
high ambient temperature, unless otherwise agreed.
Manufacturer shall have to take approval of relevant drawings and data from Owner /
Consultant in writing prior to manufacture.
Any manufacture done prior to the approval of drawings / datasheets shall be

rectified as per the approved drawings / data by the manufacturer at his own cost and
the equipment shall be supplied within the stipulated period.
All the make of components, equipment, sub-vendors is subjected to owner /

consultant’s approval.
11.0 WARRANTY
Bidder shall have final and total responsibility for the design and performance of all
equipment supplied under this specification. The equipment and the system shall be
guaranteed for troubles free operation for a period of 12 months from the date of
commissioning. Any defects discovered during this period shall be rectified free of
charge.
Page 20 of 23
RAJASTHAN
ANNEXURE - I
DOCUMENTATION FOR HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS
Sl. No. Description Documents Required (Y / N)

With Bid For Approval Final
1. Specification Sheets, duly completed Y Y Y
2. Technical Particulars, duly filled-in Y Y Y
3. Feeder Details Y Y Y
4. General arrangement and Foundation Y Y Y
Drawings
5. Schematic/Wiring Diagrams N Y Y
6. Calculation for Bus-bar sizing Y Y N
7. Terminal Arrangement Drawings N Y Y
8. Illustrative and Descriptive Literature Y N Y
9. Catalogues for bought out accessories Y N Y
10. Installation, Operation and maintenance N N Y
manual
11. Test Certificates
i. Type - Switchboard Y N N
- Circuit Breaker Y N N
- MCB Y N N
ii. Routine N N Y
12. Guarantee Certificates N N Y
13. Spare Parts List Y N Y
Note:
1. 4 hard copies & 1 soft copy shall be supplied with bid.

2. 4 hard copies & 1 soft copy shall be supplied for approval after order within 4 weeks from
the date of LOI.
3. 8 hard copies & 2 soft copies in CD shall be submitted as final documents prior to
dispatch of the equipment. These shall be made in sets and supplied in fine plastic-
coated folder.
Y - Yes, N - No
Page 21 of 23
RAJASTHAN
ANNEXURE - II
LIST OF SPARES
The following spare parts shall be quoted along with the offer:
A. BREAKERS (OF EACH RATING)
i. Trip bar spring and any other spring used in the circuit breaker
ii. mechanism
iii. Shunt trip coil
iv. Closing coil
v. Diodes, if used
vi. Secondary Isolating contact blocks
vii. Release devices, if any
viii. Any other spares recommended for VACCUM/SF6 circuit breakers
B. CONTROL SWITCHES
i. Trip-Neutral-Close Control Switch

ii. Local-Remote Selector Switch
iii. Thermostat
iv. Ammeter Selector Switch
v. Voltmeter Selector Switch
vi. Push Button Element
vii. Push Button Actuator of each type
C. MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER (OF EACH RATING)

D. RELAYS
i. Relays of each type
E. METERS
i. Ammeter
ii. Voltmeter
iii. KWh Meter
Page 22 of 23
RAJASTHAN
F. INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
G. FUSES (OF EACH RATING)
i. Fuse link
ii. Fuse fittings
H. MISCELLANEOUS
i. Alarm bell
ii. Alarm buzzer
Page 23 of 23
DATA SHEET FOR HT VCB
REV. 00
Project No. Unit

Location Pali, Rajasthan Document No. NAYA-PALI-EL-DS-022
REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0
Date 21/12/2018
Prepared By PBS
Checked By PBS
Approved By SKJ
Client Review
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-EL-DS-022 REV :00 Page 1 of 4

Sr. No. PARTICULARS OF EQUIPMENT UNITS New Technical Requirement VENDOR'S DATA
1.1 Location - Outdoor/Indoor *
1.2 Ambient Air Temperature (Max. / Min.) deg.C 47 / 5 *
1.3 Design ambient Temperature deg.C 65 *
1.4 Humidity % 50% to 60% *
1.5 Climate - Dry *
1.6 Altitude Mtr. 183
1.6 Seismic Zone - II *
2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 System Voltage Volt 11 ± 10% *
2.2 System Frequency Hz 50 ± 5% *
2.3 Combined Variation % ± 10% *
2.4 Phase / Wire - 3 Phase / 3 Wire *
2.5 Neutral Earthing - Solidly Earthed *
2.6 Fault Level kA/Sec 25 kA for 3 Sec *
3 CIRCUIT BREAKER Construction as per IEC 62271-200
3.1 Make - - *
3.2 Type & Model of Circuit Breaker - Vacuum Circuit Breaker *
3.3 Rated Voltage kV 12 *
3.4 Rated Normal Current for LI-LO VCB Amp 630A *
3.6 Inpanel (Current) rating as per Site Condition Amp VTA *
3.7 Temp. rise Deg.C As per IEC 62271-200 *
3.8 Insulation Level
a 1 Min. power frequency withstand test voltage kV (RMS) 28 KV *
b Impulse withstand test voltage kV (Peak) 75 KV *
3.9 Rated Short Circuit Breaker Current kA 25 *
3.1 Rated Duration of Short Circuit Sec. 3 *
3.11 Rated Short Circuit Making Current KA VTA *
3.12 Operating Sequence - O - 3 min - CO-3 min - CO *
3.13 Operation Mechanism - Mechanically and Electrically trip free and antipumping feature shall *
be built in or separate antipumping relay to be provided
3.14 Spring Charging Motor with Limit Switch
a Type - Universal *
b Supply Voltage Volts 110 V DC *
3.15 Closing Coil Volts 110 V DC *
3.16 Tripping Coil Volts 110 V DC *
3.17 Wattage Required For Motor Operation VA VTA *
3.18 Wattage Required For Closing Coil VA VTA *
3.19 Wattage Required For Trip Coil VA VTA *
3.2 No. of Breaker Aux. Contact - Spare Contacts - 6 NO + 6 NC + 64 pin socket *
3.21 Rated Operating time / Breaking time / closing time Sec. < 80 ms *
3.22 Antipumping Feature - Required *
3.23 Operation Counter - Required *
3.24 Min. Clearance in Air Between Poles mm 130 *
3.25 Min. Clearance in Air Between Poles to Earth mm 80 *
3.26 Mechanical Life / Electrical Life Hrs. VTA *
3.27 Test Position in addition to Fully Drawn out and IN Positions Yes
3.28 Manual Spring Charging Provision under power Failure condition. Yes
4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENT
4.1 Type - Free Standing, Floor Mounted, CRCA Sheet steel enclosure, Indoor *
Type, Compartmentalized, Partitions Metallic (PM), Draw out type
as per IEC 62271-200 loss of service continuity LSC 28, Internal arc
classification IAC A FLR
4.2 Degree of Protection - IP 42 *
4.3 Minimum thickness of CRCA Sheet matel Enclosure mm 2.5 *
4.4 Front Access - YES *
4.5 Rear Access - YES *
4.6 Extension Provision for Future - NA *
4.7 Overall Dimension (W x D x H) mm VTA *
4.8 Dimension of Each Compartment i.e. VCB, I/C cable chamber, O/G mm VTA *
Cable Chamber. (W x D x H)
4.9 Line PT Draw out type, Mounted on VCB Trolley *
4.1 Minimum clearance / space required at
a Front for breaker withdrawal mm VTA *
b Rear mm VTA *
4.11 Material of Construction for Cable Gland Plate
a Incomer cable chamber with 3 Core Al. XLPE cables - 3 mm CRCA Sheet steel *
b Outgoing Cable Chamber with 3 core Al. XLPE cables - 3 mm CRCA Sheet steel *
c Cable Entry for Power & Control Cables - Bottom *
4.12 Paint - Epoxy Powder Coated *
4.13 Inside Shade - VTA *
4.14 Outside Shade - RAL 7035 *
4.15 Name Plates - Aluminium Anodised with letters engraved in White color *
4.16 Provision of manual spring charging - Required *
4.17 Mechanical trip PB - Required *
4.18 Mechanical Close PB - Required *
4.19 Mechanical ON / OFF indicator - Required *
4.2 Mechanical Number of operation indicator - Required *
4.21 Current Transformer
a Type - Wound type, EPOXY CAST RESIN *
b Class of Insulation - CLASS B Min. *
c Insulation Level KV (rms) / 28KV / 75KV *
KV (peak)
d Short time Withstand current KA/Sec. 25 KA / 3 Sec. *
e Metering CT - √ *
f i) Class 1 *
ii) Burden VA 15 *
iii) CT ratio As per SLD *
g Protection CT √ *
i) Class 5 P20 *
ii) Burden VA 15 *
iii) CT ratio As per SLD *
4.22 Voltage Transformer
a Type - 2 Core EPOXY CAST RESIN *
b Class of Insulation - CLASS B Min. *
c VA Burden VA 100 *
4.23 BUS PT kV NA *
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-EL-DS-022 Rev: 00 Page 2 of 4

4.24 LINE PT kV (11/√3) KV / (110/√3) V / (110/√3) V *

4.25 PROTECTION RELAYS
a Type - Numerical Type with communication facility. *
i) For LI-LO Feeder - Refer SLD for PCC: *
b AUXILIARY RELAYS (For LI-LO Transformer Feeders only) - Electro Mechanical
i) WTI Trip Required
ii) OTI Trip Required
iii) Buchholz Trip Required
iv) PRV Trip Required
v) WTI Alarm Required
vi) OTI Alarm Required
vii)Buchholz Alarm Required
viii) MOLG Alarm Required
c Trip Circuit Supervision Relay (95) Electro Mechanical
d Master trip relay ,High Speed Relay (86) Electro Mechanical
4.26 METERING REQUIREMENT

a Digital Multifunction Meter (with communication facility) - Load Manager / Multifunction Meter having Voltage, Current, PF,
KW, KWH & KVA compitable with Profibus / Ethernet / Mobus
i) For LI-LO Feeder - Required *
4.27 Hooter 110 V DC - Required (96 x 96 mm) *
4.28 INDICATING LAMPS Cluster LED Type
a Phase Indication (L1, L2, L3) (Only at incomer) RED, YELLOW, BLUE
b ON - RED *
c OFF - GREEN *
d TRIP - AMBER *
e TCH, Test Position & Service Position - WHITE *
f SPRING CHARGE - BLUE *
g DC SUPPLY FAILURE - BLUE *
4.29 TEST TERMINAL BLOCK - With Shorting link Facility - Required for LI - LO Feeder *
4.3 SWITCHES
a Circuit Breaker Control Type - TNC Spring Return to Normal - with 2 Trip & 2 Close Contacts *
b Type of Handle - Pistol Grip *
4.31 Control Section Illumination
a Type CFL or LED lights Fitting *
b Location Of Lamp LT Chamber *
c Control/ Protection Of Lamp Door Limit Switch and Fuse *
4.32 Sockets For maintainance
a Rating 15 Amps *
b Location LT chamber *
c Control / Protection Switch + Fuse *
5 BUS BARS
5.1 Continuous Current Rating Amp. 630A *
5.2 Short Time Withstand Current KA/Sec. 25 kA / 3 Sec *
5.3 Material - Power - Electrolytic grade Aluminium *
Control & Earth - Copper
5.4 Cross sectional Area (L x W) mm² VTA *
5.5 Current density A/mm² 1.0 for Cu. *
5.6 Earth Bus Cross sectional Area (L x W) mm² VTA - Suitble for fault level as mentioned above *
5.7 Minimum Clearance in Air
a Phase To Phase mm VTA *
b Phase To Earth mm VTA *
5.8 Heat Shrinkable type sleeve - Required Material : Thick extruded polyolefin sheet *
5.9 Shrouded Joints - Required *
i) Material of Shroud - FRP *
5.1 Max. Temp. Rise of Main Bus bar over 50 deg. C Deg.C As per IEC 62271-200 *
5.11 Jointing Temp
a Plain or Tinned Bus bar Joints Deg.C As per IEC 62271-200 *
b Silver Plated Joints Deg.C *
c Breaker Sliding Contact Deg.C *
5.12 Minimum Power Frequency Withstand Test kV 28 KV *
5.13 Impulse Withstand Test Voltage kV (Peak) 75 KV *
5.14 Bus bar Support Insulator - Voltage Class kV 12 KV *
5.15 Earthing Bus bar Material - Copper *
5.16 Earthing Bus bar Short Time Withstand Current kA/Sec. VTA *
6 AUXILIARY SUPPLY
6.1 TRIP COIL Volts 110 V DC *
6.2 CLOSING COIL Volts 110 V DC *
6.3 POTENTIAL INDICATING LAMP Volts 110 V DC *
6.4 OTHER INDICATING LAMP Volts 110 V DC *
6.5 MOTOR FOR OPERATING MECHANISM Volts 110 V AC *
6.6 METER AUXILIARY SUPPLY Volts 110 V DC *
6.7 RELAY AUXILIARY SUPPLY Volts 110 V DC *
6.8 SPACE HEATER Volts 240 V AC *
7 Space Heater Details
7.1 Type (For Each Panel) Fuse / MCB / Thermostate Controlled Space Heater *
7.2 Location Cable chamber, LT chamber *
7.3 Power Supply 240 V, 1 PH, AC. *
8 CABLE EARTHING TRUCKS (CET) - 1 No. Required *
9 SPECIAL TOOLS AND TACKLES
9.1 Spring Charging Handle No Required *
9.2 Panel Key No Required *
9.3 Breaker Racking Handle No Required *
9.4 HT Fuse Puller No Required *
10 Make of Various Items
10.1 CT / PT VTA / As per approved make list *
10.2 Analogue Meters *
10.3 Numerical Protection Relays *
10.5 Protective / Auxiliary Relays *
10.6 Lock Out Relay *
10.7 Digital Meters *
10.8 Push button / LED Indication *
10.9 Test Terminal Block *
10.1 Control Switch *
10.11 Power Receptacles *
10.12 Breaker Control Switch *
10.13 Control Fuse *

VTA / As per approved make list
10.14 Terminals *
10.15 Colour of Earthing Wire *
11 Miscellaneous
11.1 Control Wire Size
a CT Circuit 2.5 sqmm Red, Yellow, Blue, Black *
b PT Circuit 1.5 sqmm Red, Yellow, Blue, Black *
c VCB to X2 Terminals 1.5 sqmm Grey *
d Control / Annunciation Circuit 1.5 sqmm Grey *
e Auxiliary Bus Wire 2.5 sqmm Grey for DC, RED and BLACK for AC *
11.2 Control Terminals for CT Disconnecting Type *
11.3 Terminals for PT and control circuit Screw Type *
11.4 Terminal size minimum 6 sqmm *
11.5 Arrangement for connection to external earthing grid One hole with nut bolt washer on earth bus bar at each end of the *
panel
11.6 Material of Earth bus bar Copper *
NOTES:
1 Wherever marked "*", Data to be filled in / Confirmed by vendor.

2 Vendor to submit dully filled in signed & stamped data sheet as a part of offer.
3 If there are any deviations, it must be clearly mentioned on respective documents.
4 "VTA" - Vendor To Advise, "NA" - Not Applicable.

RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER

Page 1 of 14
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 INTRODUCTION
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
3.0 SITE CONDITION:
4.0 POWER SYSTEM DETAILS
5.0 BASIC CONSTRUCTION
6.0 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
7.0 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS
8.0 INSPECTION, TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
9.0 PACKING AND DISPATCH
Page 2 of 14
RAJASTHAN
ANNEXURES

I DOCUMENTATION FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
Page 3 of 14
RAJASTHAN
1.0 INTRODUCTION

4000 KL.
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
This specification defines the minimum requirements for design, engineering,

materials, manufacturing, assembly, inspection and testing of Distribution
Transformer. This document shall be read in conjunction with corresponding data
sheet.
2.1 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS, CODES & STANDARDS
The design, manufacturing, testing and performance of equipment shall comply with
all currently applicable statutory act, regulations and safety codes in the locality
where the equipment will be installed. Nothing in this specification shall be construed
to relieve vendor of his responsibility.
Unless otherwise specified. The Dry Type Transformer shall comply with the
applicable relevant Indian Standards
IS 2026 Specification for Transformers

IS 10028 Selection, installation and maintenance of Transformers
IS 1271 Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation
IS 5 Colors for ready mixed paints and enamels
IS 2165 Insulation coordination
Page 4 of 14
RAJASTHAN
IS 3716 Application guide for insulation coordination

IS 3639 Fittings and accessories for transformers
IS 12063 Degree of Ingress Protection for control gear
IS 2705 Current transformer
IEC 60076 Power transformers
CBIP Manual, Test report (latest)
In case of any contradiction between various referred standards/specifications/data

sheets and statutory regulations, the following order of priority shall be given:
1) Data sheets
2) This Specification
3) Codes & Standards
4) Statutory regulations
Transformer shall also conform to the provisions of the latest revisions of Indian
Electricity rules & any other statutory regulations currently in force.
2.2 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
The offered equipment shall be brand new with state-of-the-art technology and
proven field track record. No prototype equipment shall be offered.
Vendor to ensure availability of spare parts and maintenance support services for the
offered equipment at least for 15 years from the date of supply
Vendor shall give a notice of at least one year to the end user of equipment before
phasing out of product / spares to enable the end user for the placement of order for
spares & services.
Vendor shall be responsible for design, engineering and manufacturing of the

equipment to fully meet the intent and requirements of this specification and data
sheets.
All equipment and accessories required for completeness of the equipment, whether
specifically mentioned or not, but considered essential for satisfactory performance
shall be included as a part of the offered equipment.
Page 5 of 14
RAJASTHAN
3.0 SITE CONDITION:
The Transformer shall be suitable for indoor installation and satisfactory operation in
salt laden, humid and corrosive atmosphere. Seismic requirements shall be as
specified on data sheet.
The following conditions apply, unless otherwise specified in the data sheets:
Parameters Description
Altitude from above Sea Level 183 Meter Average Ambient Temperature (Min. / Max.) 5 / 47
°C
Design Ambient Temperature 65 °C
Annual average Rainfall 465 mm
Maximum rainfall (in mm) per 24 hours 250 mm
Seismic Zone Category ZONE-II
Environment Dry
Main Grid Supply 11kV, 50Hz, 3-Phase, 3 wire (Provided by Rajasthan

Electricity Board
Distribution Supply 415V, 3-Phase Supply
240V, 1-Phase Supply
Voltage tolerance ± 10%
System Frequency 50Hz
Frequency tolerance ± 1%
System Power Factor 0.8 (Assumed)
Design Fault Level: 11 kV (Max.) System 25 kA for 3 Sec.
Design Fault Level: 415V System 50 KA for 1 Sec.
System Earthing: Transformer: (LV secondary) Solidly Earthed Neutral
Page 6 of 14
RAJASTHAN
5.0 BASIC CONSTRUCTION
5.1 The transformer shall be dry type, ANAN cooled suitable for indoor/outdoor
installations. Transformers shall be housed in freestanding enclosures of welded sheet steel
frames with expanded metal screens of suitable size or louvers backed by wire mesh.
Transformer and the enclosure shall be suitably reinforced to prevent distortion during
handling. Base channels shall be provided with skids and pulling eyes to facilitate handling.
5.2 The transformer shall be double wound core type with cold rolled grain oriented
silicon steel sheet laminations perfectly insulated and clamped to minimize vibrations and
noise. Core fastening bolts shall be insulated to reduce losses and to avoid hot spots. All
parts of the magnetic circuit shall be effectively connected to earth system.
5.3 The winding shall be of copper and shall be designed for full load current and to
withstand the thermal and electromagnetic stresses arising due to through fault current. The
current carrying winding joints shall be electrically brazed.
5.4 Vector group of transformer shall be as specified in Data sheet. The windings shall be
provided with Class - H insulation.
5.5 Different parts of transformers shall be connected by copper flexible for earth
continuity purpose. All the fasteners and bolts shall be hot dip galvanized as per IS 802 or
zinc passivated.
5.6 TERMINALS
5.6.1 The terminal arrangement shall be so designed as to permit easy disconnection and
removal of transformers without disturbing the incoming and outgoing cable
connections of any type.
5.6.2 The detachable type cable end box shall be self-supporting, weather-proof, air filled
type, complete with all hardware such as gland plate, double compression brass glands,
crimped type tinned copper lugs, armour clamps etc.
Page 7 of 14
RAJASTHAN
5.6.3 The transformer H.V. terminals shall brought out through side wall mounted bushings
to the cable end box with disconnecting chamber for termination of HV XLPE insulated
aluminium conductor cables.
5.6.4 The L.V. winding terminals (phases & neutral) shall be brought out through side wall
mounted bushings to a cable end box with disconnecting chamber for terminating PVC
insulated aluminium conductor cables/ Bus-duct arrangement.
5.6.5 A separate L.V. neutral bushing shall be provided for connection to station ground
mat. The neutral CT shall be mounted before bifurcation of the neutral.
5.7 BUSHINGS
5.7.1 All bushings shall conform to the requirements of latest revisions of the applicable
I.S. Standard.
5.7.2 The bushings shall be located so as to provide necessary minimum electrical

clearances between phases and also between phase and earth as per the conforming
standard.
5.7.3 The HV bushings shall be plain porcelain type and shall be furnished complete with
studs of adequate capacity.
5.8 MARSHALLING BOX
5.8.1 A sheet steel weatherproof marshalling box with glass windows suitable for semi-
outdoor use shall be provided. The box shall contain all auxiliary devices except those, which
must be located directly on the transformer.
5.8.2 Cubicle illumination lamp with door switch and space heater with thermostat and
ON-OFF switch shall be provided.
5.8.3 The marshalling box shall be provided with removable bottom gland plate, double
compression brass glands, crimped type copper lugs etc. for control cable entry.
5.8.4 All controls, wiring, indication and relaying devices provided with the transformer
shall be wired up to the terminal blocks.
Page 8 of 14
RAJASTHAN
5.9 NAME PLATE
The transformer shall be provided with a nameplate of weatherproof material fitted in a

visible position showing the items as per relevant clause of I.S.
5.10 OFF CIRCUIT TAP CHANGER
5.10.1 Off-circuit taps as specified shall be provided on the high voltage winding.
5.10.2 The transformer shall be capable of operation at its rated KVA at any tap provided
the voltage does not vary by more than +/- 10% of the rated voltage corresponding to the
tap.
5.10.3 The winding including the tapping arrangement shall be designed to maintain
electromagnetic balance between HV and LV windings at all voltage ratios.
5.10.4 The off-circuit tap changing shall be affected by change of links. The arrangement
shall be such that the same can be operated at standing height from ground level.
5.10.5 The design shall be such as to ensure that same tap is set on all three phases at a
time.
5.10.6 All contacts shall be silver plated and held in position under strong contact pressure
to ensure low contact drop and avoid pitting.
5.10.7 The OCTC mechanism shall also be suitable for withstanding short circuit fault of the
transformer.
5.11 TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
5.11.1 One (1) set of winding temperature indicator (WTI) shall be fitted locally in the
marshalling box of the transformer so as to be readable at a standing height from the ground
level.
5.11.2 Each WTI shall be provided with necessary contacts for alarm on a high set point and
for trip on a higher set point. The contacts shall have adequate rating, if used directly in the
control circuit, otherwise auxiliary relay shall be provided for the same.
Page 9 of 14
RAJASTHAN
5.12 NOISE
Audible Noise level shall not exceed the limits indicated in CBIP manual
5.13 GROUNDING
5.13.1 Two grounding pads, on the opposite sides of the tank, shall be provided for station
grounding mat.
5.13.2 Grounding pad shall have clean buffed surface with two tapped holes, M10 GI bolts
and spring washers for connection to 50 x 6 mm GI flat.
5.13.3 Ground terminals shall be also provided on marshaling box to ensure its effective
earthing. All cable end boxes shall have independent earthing terminals.
5.14 PAINTING
5.14.1 All steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by sand blasting or chemical agents as
required to produce a smooth surface free of scale, grease and rust.
5.14.2 The external surfaces., after cleaning, shall be given a coat of high quality red oxide
or yellow quoted primer, followed by filler coats.
5.14.3 The transformer shall be finished with two coats of synthetic enamel paints of color
shade 631 as per IS: 5. sufficient quantity of touch-up paint shall be furnished for application
at site.
6.0 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
6.1 The transformer shall be equipped with fittings and accessories as listed below: -
a. Rating plate.
b. Terminal marking plate.
c. Two earthing terminals.
Page 10 of 14
RAJASTHAN
d. Dial type winding temperature indicator with maximum reading pointer and
electrically separate set of contact with adjustable setting for alarm & trip.
e. Thermometer pocket
f. Dial type thermometer with contact for WTI
g. Cover lifting eyes.
h. Jacking pads.
i. Hauling and lifting lugs.
j. Bi-directional flanged wheels.
k. Skids.
l. Weather proof marshalling box (IP-55) for Control equipment and terminal
connection.
m. Off Circuit Tap Changer and associated Local, Manual control.
n. Detachable type cable-end box for connecting XLPE cables complete with
HV bushing and terminal connectors on Primary side.
o. Detachable type cable-end box for connecting PVC cable / Bus duct complete
with L.V. and Neutral bushing and terminal studs on secondary side.
p. Inspection-hole of sufficient size
7.1 Along with the Tender
a) Proposed typical G.A. drawing showing constructional features of: -
i) Cable termination arrangement
Page 11 of 14
RAJASTHAN
ii) Wheel base dimension & details.

b) Type test certificates of similar transformers as quoted.
7.2 After Award of Contract

Following drawings/schematic shall be furnished in five (5) copies for approval.
a) Outline dimensional drawing showing the general arrangement and indicating

the space required for: -
i) Detachable type cable-end box
ii) Wheel base dimension & detail
b) Foundation plan & load data.
c) Control schematic & Interconnection diagram for OCTC
d) The routine & type test certificates of the transformer
8.1 Routine Tests
After completion of manufacture, the transformer shall be subject to the routine tests
as laid down in the latest revision of relevant IS, in presence of the Owner’s/SAGA
representative.
In addition, the following tests shall be witnessed by the Owner/SAGA: -
All switching apparatus of off-circuit tap changer when completely assembled shall be
operated forty (40) times in normal manner through the complete cycle when the
transformer is unexcited, followed by ten (10) operations in normal manner through
the complete cycle when the transformer is charged with rated volts on open circuit
to the satisfaction of the purchaser.
8.2 Type Tests
The type tests shall be carried out by the manufacturer on the transformer in
accordance with the applicable IS and the documents shall be forwarded to the
purchaser for approval, prior to giving call for witnessing the routine tests at
manufacturer works.
8.3 Performance Guarantee
Page 12 of 14
RAJASTHAN
The performance figures quoted on contractor's data sheets shall be guaranteed

within the tolerances permitted by relevant IS except, otherwise, stated and shall
become a part of the contract with the successful contractor.
9.0 PACKING AND DESPATCH
The equipment shall be properly packed for the selected mode of transportation i.e.
by ship /rail or trailer. The equipment shall be wrapped in polythene sheets before
being placed in crates/cases to prevent damage to finish. Crates /cases shall have
skid bottom for handling. Special notations such as `Fragile', `This side up', `Center of
gravity’, `Weight’, Owners particulars, PO nos. etc., shall be clearly marked on the
package together with other details as per purchase order.
The equipment may be stored outdoors for long periods before installation. The
packing shall be suitable for outdoor storage in areas with heavy rains/high ambient
temperature unless otherwise agreed.
Page 13 of 14
RAJASTHAN
ANNEXURE – I
DOCUMENTATION FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
Sl. No. Document Description Documents Required (Y / N)

1. Specification Sheet, duly completed Y Y Y
3. Dimensional drawing with terminal Y Y Y
arrangement details
4. Illustrative and descriptive literature Y N Y
manual
6. Test Certificates N N Y
7. Guarantee certificate N N Y
8. Spare parts list with identification marks Y N Y
Note:

the date of LOI.
despatch of the equipment. These shall be made in sets and supplied in fine plastic-
coated folder.
Y - Yes, N - No
Page 14 of 14
DATA SHEET FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
REV. 00
Project No. Unit

REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0
Date 21/12/2018
Prepared By PBS
Checked By PBS
Approved By SKJ
Client Review
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-EL-DS-023 REV:00 Page 1 of 4

Sl. No. PARTICULARS OF EQUIPMENT UNIT PURCHASER'S REQUIREMENT
A GENERAL
1 Tag No. : TR-01
2 Quantity No. : One (01)
3 Manufacturer : #
4 Model No. : #
5 Applicable Standard : As per Doc. No.NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-023 Specification for Distribution
Transformer
B SITE CONDITION
1 Design Ambient Temperature °C : 65
2 Average Ambient Temperature (Min. / Max.) °C : 05/47
3 Average Relative Humidity : 60%
4 Altitude from above Sea Level Meter : 183
5 Seismic Zone : ZONE-II
6 Environment : Dry
7 Area Classification : Safe Area
8 Degree of Protection (IP) : IP 55
9 Enclosure : Hermetically sealed type
10 Location : Indoor
C SYSTEM PARAMETERS
1 Primary System
1.1 Rated Voltage V : 11000 V AC +/- 10%
1.2 Frequency Hz : 50 Hz +/- 1%
1.3 Number of phase : 3-Phase, 3 Wire
1.4 Rated Power Factor : 0.96
1.5 Design Fault Level : 25 kA for 3 Sec. (Max.)
2 Secondary System
2.1 Rated Voltage V : 415 V AC +/- 10%
2.2 Frequency Hz : 50 Hz +/- 1%
2.3 Number of phase : 3-Phase
2.4 Rated Power Factor : 0.8 (Assumed)
2.5 Design Fault Level : 50 KA for 1 Sec.
D TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
1 Rating : 1600 KVA
2 No. of Phase : 3 Phase
3 Voltage Ratio (Primary / Secondary) : 11000 V / 433 V
4 Duty : Continuous
5 Vector Group : Dyn 11
6 Type of cooling : ANAN
7 % Impedance on ONAN basis : 6%
8 Oil Type/ Dry Type : Dry Type
9 Temperature rise winding °C : 60 (As per IEC-60076-2)
10 Paint shade : (Manufacturer's standard / Epoxy RAL 7035)
11 Noise level limit : Not exceed 80 dB (A) at 1 Meter
12 No. of windings No. : 2
13 Insulation class : A
14 Winding insulation: Primary & Secondary : Uniform
15 Basic Insulation Level
a) 1.2 / 50 μs. Impulse withstand voltage (KVP) : 75 kV
b) Power frequency one minute withstand voltage (RMS) : 28 kV
16 Transformer Neutral Earthing
a) Primary : Not Applicable
b) Secondary : Solidly earthed
17 HV phase sequence : UVW
18 LV phase sequence : To match LV switchgear
19 Clearances
a) Phase to Phase : As per IEC-60076
b) Phase to Neutral : As per IEC-60076
20 Power flow : Unidirectional
21 Normal load : 70 to 80 % of ANAN rating
22 Guaranteed efficiency : Minimum 99.5 % at 70 to 80% loading & power factor of 0.8 (Inclusive
of all tolerances)
23 Neutral CT: Secondary side : Earth Fault 51G: CT ratio_@____ , 15VA, 5P10
E TERMINATION &TERMINAL DETAILS
1 Terminal Location
a) HV Side : On small side of tranformer
b) LV side w.r.t HV : On top, at right angle to HV terminals
c) Auxiliary Terminal Box : Required
2 Termination at Primary side : XLPE Cable
Cable Size & Type : $
3 Termination at Secondary side : Busduct
F ACCESSORIES
1 Rating plate : Required
2 Terminal marking plate : Required
3 Two earthing terminals : Required
4 Dial type winding temperature indicator with maximum reading pointer and : Required
electrically separate set of contact with adjustable setting for alarm & trip
5 Thermometer pocket : Required
6 Dial type thermometer with contact for WTI : Required
7 Cover lifting eyes. : Required
8 Jacking pads : Required
9 Hauling and lifting lugs : Required
10 Bi-directional flanged wheels : Required
11 Weather proof marshalling box : Required
12 Off Circuit Tap Changer : Required

Sl. No. PARTICULARS OF EQUIPMENT UNIT PURCHASER'S REQUIREMENT
13 Detachable type cable-end box for connecting XLPE cables complete with : Required
HV bushing and terminal connectors on Primary side
14 Detachable type cable-end box for connecting PVC cable / Bus duct : Required
complete
15 Rollers : Required
16 Lugs for lifting : Required
G TAP CHANGER (AT PRIMARY SIDE)
1 Type : Off circuit tap changer (OCTC)
2 Tapping Range : ± 5 %, each step of 2.5% (+ 5%, +2.5%, 0, -2.5%, -5%)
3 Position Nos. : 5
G AUXILIARY SUPPLY
1 Control supply : 230 V +/- 10% AC TPN & 110 V DC (FOR OTI & WTI)
NOTES:
1 $: To be provided later.
2 #: Vendor to provide.
3 The supplier shall return a completed Filled In and signed copy of this Data sheet with his offer.
4 This Data Sheet shall be Read / Refer In Conjunction with Specification for Distribution Transformer.
5 Vendor to Furnish Catalogues / Type / Make Details for All the Components.
6 Transformer marshalling box shall have branch circuit protection, lamp, space heater & socket.
7 Transformer marshalling box shall have canopy.

TRANSFORMER MANUFACTURER'S DATA (TO BE FILLED BY VENDOR ALONG WITH BID QUOTATION)
A MAKE / RATING :
B PERFORMANCE (Losses shall be inclusive of positive tolerance and shall be at
nominal tap)
1 No load losses At 90% V : KW
At 110% V : KW
2 F. L. Copper losses at 75 °C : KW
3 Auxiliary losses : KW
4 No load current At 90% V : A
At 110% V : A
5 Efficiency at full load at At 0.8 Power factor : %
75°C At 1.0 Power factor : %
6 Efficiency at 1/2 load at At 0.8 Power factor : %
75° C At 1.0 Power factor : %
7 Percentage regulation at At 0.8 Power factor : %
75°C At 1.0 Power factor : %
8 Load at which max. efficiency occurs : MVA
9 guaranteed efficiency : Minimum 99.5% at 70 to 80 % loading and power
factor
10 Rated primary & secondary current : A
11 Maximum Flux density at rated voltage and at 110% of rated voltage: :
12 Current density of windings at rated current :
13 Short circuit withstand time :
14 Allowed % overloading for continuous operation :
15 Zero Sequence Impedance :
16 Winding temperature rise :
C CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
1 Location of Terminal Primary :
Secondary :
Neutral CT (HOLD) :
2 Transformer bottom support member :
3 Radiator construction material :
4 Bushing material :
5 Bushing connection (Stud / weld type) :
6 Type and material of gaskettes :
7 Valve construction material :
8 Vacuum withstand capacity of main tank :
9 Pressure to be maintained in conservator air bag :
10 Type & Construction material of neutral CT :
11 Ladder for climbing : YES / NO
D MECHANICAL DATA
1 Dimensions (H x W x D) : mm
2 Core & Winding Weight : Kg.
3 Tank & Fittings Weight : Kg.
4 Radiator without oil Weight : Kg.
5 Total Transformer Weight : Kg.
6 Total quantity of Oil : Ltrs.
7 Shipping Dimensions (H x W x D) : mm

RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR DIESEL GENERATOR SET

Page 1 of 29
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 INTRODUCTION
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
3.0 SITE CONDITION
6.0 EQUIPMENT / ACCESSORIES
7.0 STARTING SYSTEM:
8.0 FUEL SYSTEM
9.0 LUBRICATION SYSTEM
10.0 COOLING
11.0 AIR INTAKE / VENTILATION
12.0 CONTROL PANELS FOR D.G. SETS
13.0 CABLES
14.0 INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL
Page 2 of 29
RAJASTHAN
Sr. No. Description

15.0 NAME PLATES
16.0 PAINTING
17.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING
19.0 INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
20.0 STATUTORY APPROVAL
22.0 WARRANTY
Page 3 of 29
RAJASTHAN
ANNEXURES

I LIST OF SPARES
II DOCUMENTATION FOR DIESEL GENERATOR SET
Page 4 of 29
RAJASTHAN
1.0 INTRODUCTION

4000 KL.
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
This specification covers the technical requirements for the design, engineering,
manufacture and factory testing, packaging & supply to site & supervision of erection
and commissioning, documentation of Diesel Generator Set along with Acoustic
enclosure and all other related accessories with AMF cum synchronizing Panel.
3.0 SITE CONDITIONS

Design Temperature: 65 °C
Minimum ambient temperature: 5°C.
Altitude: 183 m from Mean Sea Level
Relative humidity: 50% - 60%
Wind Speed: 5.5 - 6.0 m/s
Seismic Zone: Zone II (low Damage Risk Zone)
Annual Rainfall for design: 465 mm
Page 5 of 29
RAJASTHAN
to relieve vendor of his responsibility. DG should meet the latest CPCB norms.
Unless otherwise specified. The Diesel Generator shall comply with the applicable
relevant Indian Standards.
IS 4722 Rotating Electrical Machines

IS 4728 Terminal marking and direction of rotation for rotating electrical Machinery
IS 4889 Methods of determination of efficiency of rotating electrical machines
IEC 60034 IEC Standard Voltages
IEC 60529 Degree of Protection provided by Enclosure (IP Code)
IS 4729 Measurement of vibrations of rotating electrical machines
IS 12065 Permissible limits of noise levels for rotating electrical machine
IS 12075 Mechanical vibration of rotating electrical machines
IS 12082 Temperature rise measurement of rotating electrical machines
BS 649 Performance of reciprocating compression ignition Diesel Engine
BS 4999 General requirements for Rotating Electrical Machines
BS 5000 Specification for Rotating Electrical Machines of particular types or for particular applications
BS 6121 Mechanical cable glands
In case of any contradiction between various referred standards/specifications/data

sheets and statutory regulations, the following order of priority shall be given: -
1. Statutory regulations
2. Data sheets
3. This Specification
4. Codes & Standards
Diesel Generator Set shall also conform to the provisions of the latest revisions of
Indian Electricity rules & any other statutory regulations currently in force.
1. The offered equipment shall be brand new with state-of-the-art technology and
Page 6 of 29
RAJASTHAN
2. Vendor shall be responsible for design, engineering and manufacturing of the

equipment to fully meet the intent and requirements of this specification and
attached data sheets.
3. The diesel generator set shall be rated at site ambient temperature &
environmental conditions. Diesel generators shall be provided at the Nayara Energy
Pali petroleum storage terminal.
4. Terminal to facilitate supply to certain essential / emergency loads during periods
of non-availability utility supply for the units and supply critical station auxiliaries
during prolonged shutdowns.
5. The D.G. Set shall be capable of delivering rated power continuously at the
generator terminals, at 0.8 p.f. lag, when operating under the site and ambient
conditions.
6. D.G. Set shall be capable of satisfactorily providing an output 10 % in excess of the
rated output at the same speed for one hour in 12 hours continuous running.
7. The design parameters of the generator and excitation system shall be so chosen
that the D.G. set is stable while running at any load between no-load and full load,
sudden loss of load and also during starting of motors.
8. Self-excited, self-regulated excitation system along with fast response governor
shall ensure that the set comes to full speed & delivers rated output within 10
second after getting starting signal.
9. Under transient operating condition, the time of return to within ± 3% of steady
state voltage when permitted step down load is suddenly applied shall be less than
one second (assuming speed to be constant). Further the speed droop due to such
loading shall be corrected to ensure 50 Hz ±1% Hz within less than 3 seconds
(momentary fluctuation in frequency shall be less than ±1 Hz). Governing system
shall ensure minimum fluctuation during load changes. Inertia constant of the
rotating system shall aid the governing system. Class A1 governing system
preferably using Woodward PSG governor shall be offered. Speed droop shall be
continuously adjustable.
10. Motors re-acceleration schemes are not envisaged in case of Grid power failure &
motors will be started again after starting of D.G. set.
11. D.G. set shall meet the DOL / Soft starter / VFD starting requirement of induction
motors. kW ratings of motors that can be started DOL / Soft starter / VFD shall be
indicated under following conditions:
a. Step load BHP prime mover engine can take (transient voltage dip for above
conditions shall be furnished).
Page 7 of 29
RAJASTHAN
b. Transient voltage dip limited to 20 %.
12. The diesel engine set shall be provided in an acoustic enclosure as per norms laid
down by Pollution Board / statutory authorities. The enclosure shall be suitable for
the environmental conditions at site and shall be designed to prevent the ingress
of dust, sand and moisture.
13. All Flameproof equipment being used shall be approved by CMRI, Dhanbad and
CCOE / PESO, Nagpur for use in hazardous area.
14. DG System Operation
1. When incoming grid supply fails then “Diesel Generator EDG” shall be Auto
started on under voltage signal from Line PT of EDG Incomer. Once EDG
develops the required voltage, all the emergency loads on ESB shall be fed from
“Emergency Diesel Generator”.
2. During power grid failure if apart from Emergency loads if loads on PMCC has to
be started DG-1 has to be started manually. EDG to be auto stop while running
DG1
3. When the load on DG1 exceeds more than 75% of its rating DG 2 shall be started
through synchronization and both the DG shall share equal load.
4. When DG1 is started/running then interlock shall be provided between both
DG1 and DG2 so that DG2 should not start at first. If DG1 fails to start then DG2
shall be started auto/manually.
5. After the DG1 or DG2 is started all the loads connected to the PCC shall be
switched on manually in a pre decided sequence.
6.0 EQUIPMENT / ACCESSORIES
DG Sets shall comprise of following Main Equipment / Accessories. Vendor shall also
include any other Accessories / Equipments required for the satisfactory operation of
DG Set as mentioned above.
6.1 DIESEL ENGINE
1. The diesel engine shall be multi cylinder, four stroke, totally enclosed, prime
rating, direct fuel injection, turbo charged, compression ignitions and closed
circuit water cooled.
2. One common base frame shall be provided for mounting the engine, with fly
wheel and alternator, complete with foundation bolts, leveling screws, anti-
Page 8 of 29
RAJASTHAN
vibration pads.
3. The normal speed of the engine shall preferably be 1500 RPM and the direction of
rotation shall be clearly marked on the set.
4. The engine shall run steadily at any load to full load within its rated load.
5. The engine shall have 120% over speed withstanding capability & over speed trip
shall be set at 115% of rated speed.
6. The engine shall be fitted with an exhaust gas driven turbo charger, complete with
its own self-contained lubricating system. The turbo charger shall be positioned at
the free end of the engine.
7. A complete water washing system for turbocharger compressor and turbine shall be
provided if required.
8. The engine shall be fitted with a charge air intercooler of the air to water type. Air
from the turbocharger compressor passes to the inter cooler, and then to the
engine manifold. The intercooler shall be of tubular construction, with aluminium
bronze tubes, mild sheet steel and cast-iron water headers.
9. Vendor shall supply all necessary equipment & accessories for satisfactory
operation of diesel engine.
6.2 GOVERNING SYSTEM
1. Automatic speed governing system shall be provided using electronic governor. The
governor shall be driven by camshaft drive gear.
2. Zero percent (isochronous) to four percent droop, externally adjustable with
synchronizing motor for remote speed control.
3. A mechanical over speed trip device along with annunciation shall be provided to
automatically shut off fuel in case the speed exceeds the prescribed limit of
115%of rated speed.
6.3 FLYWHEEL
Flywheel shall be solid disc type with guard and shall be accurately balanced under
dynamic condition as rated speed. Certificate shall be submitted for purchaser’s
approval.
Page 9 of 29
RAJASTHAN
6.4 ALTERNATOR:
1. Alternators shall be industrial type, provided with insulation Class of ‘H’ with
temperature rise limited to class ‘F’ and Degree of protection of enclosure shall be
IP 23. Type test certificate for IP 23 shall be submitted for purchaser’s approval.
2. The alternator shall be mounted on common base frame together with the engine.
No external supply shall be required during starting & running of generator.
Alternators shall be provided with followings:
6.4.1 Terminal Box
1. The stator winding shall be star connected and all windings shall be brought
out to (3 + 3) insulated terminals in a terminal box with provision of CTs.
2. Current transformers shall be accommodated in neutral side terminal box of
the generator for providing protection to the generator. The number and
type of CT’s to be accommodated in neutral terminal box shall be decided
by vendor. The neutral terminal box shall be spacious enough for
accommodating CT’s. CT test reports shall be submitted for purchaser’s
approval.
3. In case, additional extension box is required, the same shall also be
provided.
4. Terminal Box shall be suitable for terminating through cable. It shall be well
sized and easily accessible, suitably situated on the generator top part.
Degree of protection for the terminal boxes shall be IP55.
6.4.2 Excitation
The alternator shall have brushless self-exciter mounted on the same shaft.
a. Voltage Regulation:
1. ±0.5% regulation (steady state) shall be performed by a solid-state type

AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator). The response of regulator shall be
such that the generator voltage is recovered to set value on application
or rejection of rated load at rated PF within a period of 0.5 sec.
2. Further adjusting the set voltage up to ± 5% of rated voltage shall be
possible by the potentiometer provided for the purpose. Test reports for
Page 10 of 29
RAJASTHAN
voltage regulation shall be submitted for purchaser’s approval.
b. Short circuit current:
The Generator shall withstand short circuit current equivalent to its sub
transient reactance for 3 sec. The Excitation System shall be designed to
maintain this short circuit current. Test reports for short circuit current
shall be submitted for purchaser’s approval.
6.4.3 Overload Capacity
The Generator & its excitation system shall withstand the 10% overloads for 1
hour in 12-hour intervals. The stator winding withstands even higher overloads
for short duration such as 1.5 times rating for 30secs and also withstands the
stresses caused by the maximum asymmetrical short circuit current. Generator
& its excitation system shall withstand over speed of 120%.
6.4.4 Voltage Waveform
The Generators meet the following requirements at no-load and all symmetrical
loads:
a. The Distortion Factor ≤ 5% for line to line voltage

b. The THF Factor ≤ 3% at nominal voltage and frequency
Testing reports for voltage waveform shall be submitted for purchaser’s

approval.
6.4.5 Radio Interference
This shall be within the limits defined by applicable standards.
6.4.6 Unbalance load
The generator shall operate with the asymmetric loads of the phase current not
exceeding the nominal current.
Page 11 of 29
RAJASTHAN
6.4.7 Thermal Detection
Generator Winding RTD’s (6 Nos. - 2 Nos. per phase) and Bearing RTD’s (2 Nos.)
to be provided, 8-point Temperature Scanner for these RTD’s shall be provided
in Generator protection & metering Panel. Contact of Temperature Scanner will
be used for tripping Generator Breaker. These RTD’S shall be suitable for early
warning (alarms) and tripping stages. The scanner shall have built in
programming facility.
6.4.8 Space Heaters
Space Heaters suitable for 240V AC shall be built-in inside the Generator. This
shall be wired to separate terminal box.
6.5 EXHAUST
1. Exhaust system shall consist of Expansion Bellows, insulated exhaust manifold,

silencers and other miscellaneous piping materials as required. Supply of total
exhaust system inclusive of chimney as required by Pollution Board.
2. The exhaust system shall be so designed to maintain back-pressure within
permissible limits. The exhaust outlet shall be outside the yard and at a height
stipulated by Pollution Control Board. Necessary information from Pollution Control
Board for Exhaust outlet height shall be obtained by vendor. Emission to air should
be within permissible limits of pollution control board.
a. Flexible exhaust bellows shall be supplied to compensate for the expansion of

exhaust pipe & to prevent transmission of engine vibration through the pipe
system.
6.6 COUPLING
The Engine and the Alternator shall be coupled with a fully flexible power coupling
with suitable coupling guard. Coupling should withstand wide temperature range and
should ensure constant alignment.
Page 12 of 29
RAJASTHAN
6.7 ACOUSTIC ENCLOSURE
1. The acoustic enclosure shall be free standing, floor mounting type, independent of
DG set. The acoustic enclosure will be modular in construction consisting of
acoustically treated panels from all the four sides and top. All the panels will be
jacket filled with glass wool & covered with perforated sheet inside. The outside
fabrication will be made out of 16 SWG MS CRCA sheet metal. Certificate for sheet
metal shall be submitted for purchaser’s approval. A free distance of 1.5 m to be
kept between DG set and the acoustic enclosure on all sides. The doors shall be
hinged lockable on either side. Ventilating louvers shall be provided at Engine side
and Alternator side for fresh air entry and for hot air exhaust. The acoustic
enclosure / canopy can be easily assembled at the site on the leveled surface
capable of withstanding the DG weight without any civil works.
2. The enclosure shall be designed for installation in open air conditions and should
have aesthetic looks.
3. Suitable acoustic enclosure / insulation with forced ventilation shall be provided
for maintaining the sound level. Maximum level of sound at 1metre from
generating source shall be 75 dB(A) or as per the norms laid down by statutory
authorities. This enclosure shall conform to the requirement of the pollution
control norms of respective locations. Lighting arrangement inside the enclosure
shall be provided.
4. Vendor shall submit the General Arrangement Drawing showing the position of the
DG set and the acoustic enclosure.
6.8 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
Comprising of bearing (base) plates and shims for setting up the DG Set on foundation,
ladders, railing, brackets, piping holders, protection around flywheel & coupling and
other required materials. Anti-vibration pads shall be provided on base plate. DG sets
and DG exhaust piping system foundation and civil works is in the scope of bidder.
7.0 STARTING SYSTEM
1. Electrical starting system shall be provided for the engine. Battery of adequate
capacity shall be provided with all necessary hardware and accessories. Battery
charger with float and boost charging facility shall be provided in the control panel
and shall have adequate capacity of giving 4 consecutive start up kicks with
voltage monitoring and alarm devices. The battery charging circuitry shall be such
Page 13 of 29
RAJASTHAN
that when engine is running, the engine mounted dynamo charges the battery and
when engine is not running, the battery charger, charges the battery.
2. Necessary changeover scheme shall be employed in the control panels.
3. Necessary mechanism shall be provided for automatic starting of engine in
conjunction with the fuel oil, lube oil and cooling system. Auto-start is desirable
for emergency DG only. The starting solenoid valves shall be provided with manual
bypass valve for local starting.
8.0 FUEL SYSTEM
1. Engine shall be suitable for HSD fuel as per IS 1460: 2000. Fuel system of each D.G.
Set shall be equipped with the following:
i. Fuel Oil Day Tank
1. Fuel oil day tank shall be sized to house fuel for eight hours.
2. The day tank shall be equipped with fuel return connection, vent, sight
glass, level switch for transfer pump control, overflow line and drain valve.
3. All necessary fuel line pipes, valve and other misc. piping materials from
Day Tank to engine is in vendor’s scope. Alarm shall be given for fuel low
level and fuel high level in Day tank.
4. Day tank shall have facility for refilling fuel directly from tanker.
ii. Filter:
1. A filter of suitable type & capacity to supply fuel oil at rated output (Duplex
filter preferred).
2. Fuel pump engine driven.
3. Fuel injection and control system for compression ignition.
2. In addition to above, Vendor shall supply all necessary Accessories and Equipment
for the satisfactory operation of the fuel system.
9.0 LUBRICATION SYSTEM
1. Force Feed Lubrication System by means of engine driven oil pump, replaceable,
suitable type full flow oil filter and automatic lube oil temperature control shall be
included for lubrication of engine. The oil service tank shall be provided. Hand
Page 14 of 29
RAJASTHAN
pump shall be included to enable oil to be supplied to all parts before starting the
engine.
2. The lube oils used will generally comply with the additive class HD Supplement 1,
Classification API and Viscosity Class SAE 20 / 40.
3. The Lubricating System shall be equipped with one gear pump driven by crankshaft
delivering lube oil from service tank via relief valves, oil cooler and through system
of coarse and fine filters to the engine. Filters shall be replaceable while engine is
in operation.
4. When engine is stopped for reasons whatsoever the hand priming pump need not
be started. The coast down tank shall take care of heat removal.
5. Vendor shall supply all necessary auxiliary equipment for the satisfactory operation
of the lubrication system.
10.0 COOLING
1. Engine shall be Radiator cooled type. The jacket cooling water shall be circulated
by engine / electric motor driven pump. One standby pump shall also be provided
in the case of electric motor driven pump.
2. The cooling water system shall comprise heat exchanger, make up tank with filling
vent, drain connection, isolating valve, gauge glass and low level alarm device,
pumps, flow indicator, etc.
3. Make up cooling water temperature shall be 35 °C.
4. All accessories required in the internal cooling water circuit like pipes, valves,
flanges, supports, etc. shall be provided by vendor.
11.0 AIR INTAKE / VENTILATION
1. Vendor to offer an arrangement so that clean and cool charge air is available near
the turbochargers. The various auxiliaries like air intake silencer, filters, dry type
air cleaners and fans which are required shall be included.
2. An efficient air intake silencer shall be provided for reducing in take noise to
acceptable levels.
Page 15 of 29
RAJASTHAN
12.0 CONTROL PANELS FOR D.G. SETS
1. Each Control Panel be extendable, freestanding & provided with followings:
• Degree of protection IP-42(Certificate shall be for IP-42 submitted for

purchaser’s approval)
• Earth bus complete with earthing terminals
• Epoxy painted with paint shade Silver Grey No. 628 (IS-5)
• Space heater & illumination lamp in each panel.
• Cable Entry from Bottom
• Potential transformers & Current transformers as required. (CT internal wiring
shall be connected to terminal block for external connection)
• Indicating (LED) lamps, Pushbuttons, TNC Switches, Selector switches Relays,
• Timers, contactors, etc. as required.
• Each Control panel should have provision of potential free contacts for taking
various feedback of DG set operation to integrated with Terminal Automation
System for operation control.
12.1 AMF PANEL
1. Circuitry for AMF shall be integral part of Main Control and protection Panel (MCP)
for auto start of diesel Generator. No separate AMF Panel for DG Sets shall be
provided.
12.2 MAIN CONTROL AND PROTECTION PANEL (MCP)
1. Protections
i. Relays shall be numerical type.

ii. 50, 50N,51, 51N, 87
2. Metering with accuracy class 1
• One - Voltmeter (144 Sq.mm) with selector switch (4 position). Range 0 - 500 V
and resolution of 2 V
• One - Ammeter (144 Sq.mm) with selector switch (4 position).
• Range 0 – 2500 Amp & resolution 1 Amps
Page 16 of 29
RAJASTHAN
• One - Frequency meter with resolution 0.5 Hz (45 Hz. To 55Hz.)

• One - Power Factor Meter with resolution 0.1 (0.5 lag to 0.5 lead)
• One - KW Meter suitable for 3 phase, 4 wire with range 0-2000KW and
resolution 1KW
• One - KWH Meter suitable for 3 phase, 4 wire with range 0-1500KWH and
resolution 1KWH
• One - KVA Meter suitable for 3 phase, 4 wire with range 0-2000KVA and
resolution1KVA
• One - KVAR Meter with range 0-500KVAR and resolution 1KVAR
• One - Hour meter with range 0-1000HM with reset
• One - Tachometer for speed measurement with range 0-3000RPM and resolution
1RPM
• Alternatively, Multifunction digital meter can be offered.
12.3 ENGINE PANEL & ENGINE CONTROL & MONITORING PANEL
1. Engine shall be provided with two Panels. One Control Panel shall be fitted on the
Engine with hand stop control of engine, thermometers for water, oil, fuel, air
temperature, necessary gauges for measurement of water / lube oil / fuel
pressure, one electrical stop indication / control, etc. i.e. this Panel shall be with
minimum controls which has to be done from Engine. Breaker Status Indication
Lamps (‘ON’, ‘OFF’ and ‘Trip’) shall be provided on this Engine Panel.
2. Second Panel shall be Engine Control and Monitoring Panel (ECMP) with Digital
Indicators, Analogue Gauges, Engine Status Indications, Alarm Conditions, Engine
Stop / Trip Conditions, speed indications, Engine Controls. Engine starting /
stopping shall be possible from this Control Panel in remote mode of operation.
3. 2 Nos. Engine trouble contact potential free shall be given from ECMP for
Purchaser’s use (Annunciation, etc.)
12.4 BATTERY & BATTERY CHARGER PANEL
1. Individual Battery & Battery charger system shall be provided for D.G. Set start up
system.
2. Batteries shall be of 24 V lead acid battery (plant type) / bank of adequate ampere
hour capacity for each DG set (at 10 hours discharge rate for supplying control
power to control panel and starting power to engine starting motor) complete with
connecting leads first charging and routine check, instruments including
Page 17 of 29
RAJASTHAN
hydrometer and cell tester, teak wood stand, floor insulators, cell supporting
insulators, etc. It shall be possible to start the engine 4 times in immediate
succession without appreciable drop in DC Voltage. The battery shall have a
sufficient capacity to start the engine more than 4 times consecutively with
minimum temperature of -2 °C.
3. Battery charger unit shall be complete with unit transformer / rectifier with surge
protection, DC ammeter, Voltmeter, Charge rate selector etc. suitable for quick
and trickle charging of batteries. DC voltmeters, centre zero ammeters, protective
fuses shall be provided. Charger shall give constant DC output voltage irrespective
of incoming voltage variation specified.
Ampere hour of the battery shall be selected as per IEEE 485:
1. Minimum site ambient temperature of +2°C or as defined in data sheet

2. Discharge duty cycle
3. Ageing factor of 125% of the design capacity
4. Design margin of 10%
5. Temperature correction factor
12.5 EXCITER PANEL
AVR can be part of Exciter panel. However, Exciter Panel complete with motorised
potentiometer, PF control circuit, provision for remote control of voltage (raise /
lower) in case of synchronising and required DC Metering (Field Current and Field
Voltage monitoring) shall be provided by DG Vendor.
13.0 CABLES
1. Power cables shall be 1.1kV grade, XLPE insulated, aluminium conductor, multi
core, steel strip / wire armoured, Extruded PVC inner sheathed & Extruded FRLS
PVC outer sheathed confirming to IS 7098 (Part-1).
2. Control cables shall be 2.5 Sq.mm Multi stranded copper conductor, PVC insulated
with extruded PVC inner sheathed, extruded FRLS PVC outer sheathed confirming
to IS 1554 (Part-1).
3. Control cables with furrule at both the end of cable.
4. TB Details shall be provided.
Page 18 of 29
RAJASTHAN
14.0 INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL
1. The measurement and controls shall be provided for efficient operation of the
process as well as for safety of equipment and operating personnel. The equipment
shall be provided with all instruments necessary for checking the performance
continuously. All meters shall be fixed on a common instrumentation panel
mounted directly on the engine frame. Instrument system shall include all standard
instruments coming as a part of engine.
2. Measurements and controls required for smooth and efficient operation of the DG
set including but not limited to the following:
a. Protection devices
For the safety of each DG set following annunciation and tripping scheme shall
be provided. Audio visual alarm only, for the fault conditions in case of:
• Fuel oil tank level low.

• Lubricating oil pressure low.
• Fuel oil pressure low.
• Lube oil temperature high.
• Exhaust gas temperature high.
• Fuel oil day tank level high.
• Lube oil sump tank level low.
• Diesel engine start failure.
b. Audio visual alarm followed by tripping in case of:
• Lubricating oil pressure too low.

• Crank case oil mist high.
• Over speed.
• Starting fault,
• Charge air temperature too high.
• Emergency stop (manual)
• Alternator fault
• Low DG voltage
• Further fault if any shall also be included as per Mfg, Standard
Page 19 of 29
RAJASTHAN
Solid state annunciator shall be provided with features such as test, accept, reset
push button, lamp flashing, audible annunciation etc. Window inscription shall be
arranged in a logical manner to segregate engine faults and alternator faults etc. 20%
spare windows shall be available.
15.0 NAME PLATES
1. Permanent non-corrosive nameplate with engraved white letters on black

background indicating the 415V D.G. Set designation shall be fixed at the top of
the central panel.
2. Name plates shall contain the following information:
a) Manufacturer
b) Basic technical data such as rated voltage, rated current, RPM etc.
c) Country of origin.
d) Certification data such as UL certificate number etc.
3. Nameplates shall be provided for each Accessory with 415V D.G.Set. Warning
plates shall be provided on all removable covers or doors giving access to high
voltage cables and inside the switchgear wherever considered necessary. Danger
labels shall have black letters on a yellow background.
4. Internal labels and components identifications shall correspond with identities or
circuit references as shown on the schematic diagrams. All external labels shall be
attached by screws or rivets only and not by adhesive.
16.0 PAINTING
1. All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased, pickled and
phosphatised. Thereafter, a coat of phosphate paint and a coat of zinc chromate
primer shall be applied. After removing all imperfections, all metal surfaces shall
be sprayed with two coats of final paint as per the below mentioned shades.
a) Engine & Alternator: Smoke grey No. 692 (IS-5)

b) Coupling Guard: Satin Blue No. 177 (IS-5)
c) Electric Panel: Silver grey No. 628 (IS-5)
d) Fuel tank & lines: French Blue IS No. 166 (IS-5)
e) Radiator: Jet black
f) Exhaust Piping: Aluminium
Page 20 of 29
RAJASTHAN
g) Exhaust Piping Supports: Smoke grey No. 692 (IS-5)
2. Final coat shall be of epoxy based. All unpainted parts shall be plated to prevent
corrosion.
3. Painting shall be done by using 7 tank process.
1. The responsibility for inspection, certification, etc. of all materials, parts lies with
the Vendor. The Vendor shall specify all of the inspection and testing requirements
in the quality plan which shall identify the activities requiring the Owner’s
approval, review, witnessing etc. Inspection and testing requirements shall be in
accordance with this specification, other applicable standards as listed in this
specification and the data sheets.
2. All Equipment shall be inspected for compliances with:
a) Requirement of Owner’s specification & correspondence, therefore.

b) Applicable codes, standards and specifications, which shall also include sub-
referenced standards therein.
c) Test and Inspection Plans produced by the vendor.
3. Inspectors have the right to request additional inspections or tests to ensure that
the equipment complies with the specification and all relevant codes & standards.
Test certificate for all brought out item shall be submitted for approval.
4. Manufacturer shall furnish valid Type Test Certificates of similar models along with
the offer. Fresh type tests for the equipment are not needed, provided the
Manufacturer can submit certificates that the equipment complies with all type
tests as prescribed by IEC/IS Standard specifying the test requirements for that
equipment.
5. Type Test certificate shall not be prior to 7 years on the date of bid.
6. Routine tests on the equipment shall be carried out as per the relevant IEC/IS.
Equipment offered for final inspection shall be complete and ready for shipment,
with the possible exception of the final paint finish.
7. Routine Test certificates to be submitted for Equipment and its all auxiliaries.
8. Vendor to furnish required copies of test certificates, Ref Documents, Drawings,
and Instruction Manuals before equipment are dispatched.
9. Factory acceptance test (FAT) is required to be done at no extra cost to the
purchaser. The purchaser or his representative shall be advised of the tentative
Page 21 of 29
RAJASTHAN
date for FAT at least 3 weeks in advance prior to the test date. For factory
acceptance test (FAT) and site acceptance test (SAT), vendor shall consider
maximum 4 hours of DG (at 100% load) set running for these testing.
10. Any defects found by the TPI or the Owner’s appointed Inspector shall be rectified
in his presence. Where this is not possible or practical, check lists shall be
prepared and signed by the Third-Party Inspector stating all “pending items”.
Copies of these lists shall be sent to the Owner to enable their subsequent
checking. The equipment shall not leave the Vendor factory before all defects
have been rectified and without the written permission of the Owner.
11. All recommended spare parts shall be subjected to the same inspection standards
and full material certification as the main order.
12. The equipment shall not leave the Vendor / Sub-Vendor’s factory before all
discovered defects have been rectified and without the written permission of the
Owner / Purchaser.
13. Any acceptance or release of equipment following an inspection or test activity
shall in no way relieve the Vendor of his contractual responsibility to provide
guarantees as to the suitability of the materials, workmanship and performance of
the equipment in accordance with this specification.
14. Owner / Consultant reserves the right to waive the inspection at any stage.
Inspection shall be carried out only on receipt of Vendor's internal test report of
the equipment offered and scrutiny of the same. In the event, on receipt of
inspection call, the Owner / Consultant’s representative reaches the Vendor's
works and finds the material not ready for inspection / incomplete / has short
supply, the inspector will return to his base station and all expenses incurred by
the inspector including to and from traveling expenses from his base station to
place of inspection, boarding and lodging etc. shall be reimbursed by Vendor.
Bidder shall submit following drawings and documents for approval.
18.1 DATA / DRAWINGS WITH THE BID (1 COPY EACH)
1. All information listed here is to be furnished along with the offer as a minimum.
a. Guaranteed Technical Particulars with sub-transient reactance value.

b. General Arrangement Drawing showing weights, front view of all panels
supplied by DG vendor. The plan showing the position of the DG set and the
Page 22 of 29
RAJASTHAN
acoustic enclosure.
c. Dimensional and cross-sectional drawings & Foundation Plan for D.G. Set
d. Suggested layout of D.G. Yard with all accessories and maintenance space
e. Bill of Materials for D.G. Set, Fuel & lube oil system, Cooling water system,
electrical system engine and alternator control system.
f. Test Certificates and technical catalogues for bought out items and D.G. Set.
g. Technical Catalogues of Engine, Alternator, Governor, etc.
18.2 DATA / DRAWINGS AFTER THE ORDER (3 COPY EACH)
a. Detailed Cable and interconnection schedule for auxiliary Power & Control Cables
for D.G. Package.
b. P & I Diagrams for fuel oil system, lube oil system, Air starting system, Cooling
water System, Exhaust System
c. List of fittings & accessories with Makes.
d. List of recommended spares for two years normal operation with item wise rates.
e. Type test certificates.
f. List of clientele for similar equipment in last 5 years.
g. Complete list of special tools (if required)
19.0 INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING:
1. Scope work under this section includes site work of installation & commissioning of
engine, generator assembly, electrical panels, battery station, associated cabling,
earthing, piping, fuel pumps, fuel tanks, safety appliances (like rubber mats, first
aid boxes, fire extinguishers etc.). Necessary erection materials such as cable
racks, trays, angles, chemicals etc. required DG Set & necessary statutory
approvals are included in the scope of work.
2. The installation shall comply with relevant Indian Standards, Indian Electricity
Rules and statutory regulations that are in force in the place of installation.
3. Vendor shall dispatch Installation and Commissioning instructions at least 2 weeks
before the arrival of the equipment.
4. Equipment erection, including acoustic enclosure testing and commissioning shall
include following activities:
a. Removal of packing material and clearance, removal of blocking devices

provided for safe shipment.
b. Physical inspection, preparation of defect lists.
Page 23 of 29
RAJASTHAN
c. Assembly of shipping sections.

d. Civil work involved in grouting the equipment base frames, concrete chipping,
grouting for wall, roof, floor supports wherever required for piping, cabling etc.
e. Tack welding of equipment, panels etc., to floor inserts wherever provided and
providing floor inserts wherever required for erection work.
f. Applying touch paints for finish painted equipment’s and finish painting of site
fabricated steel work after pre-treatment like de-rusting, degreasing, primer
coating etc.
g. All pre-wired panels shall be checked for correctness as per final approved
wiring diagrams.
h. Trouble free mechanical operation and site testing of relays, contactors,
timers, breakers and free rotation of all drive motors be checked.
i. Tightness of all bolts joints in busbars, motors, generator, engine etc., shall be
checked.
j. Insulation resistance of all electrical equipment’s shall be measured and
improved by cleaning and drying. Space heaters shall be provided and kept
energized during the entire period of erection to prevent deterioration of
insulation resistance below permitted values.
k. Duplicate earthing shall be provided for all electrical equipment’s, cable
glands, tanks, and vessels etc. as per statutory regulations.
l. Generator neutral shall be directly connected to pipe / plate electrode using
insulated cable. Earth ring inside DG Set shall be formed and connected to
plant earth grid at minimum two points for DG Set to be provided by the
contractor as per IS 3043.
5. DG set consisting of diesel engine and AC generator mounted on common base

frame with acoustic enclosure shall be erected on civil foundation with correct
orientation details. Engine control panel, battery station, charger units shall be
erected within Acoustic enclosure. Supplier shall furnish detailed layout drawing
for the DG Yard.
6. All the piping to the engine shall be done strictly as per manufacturer’s drawings.
Wherever piping involves joining by welding the same shall be as per relevant
statutory regulations (compressed air lines etc.). Unions / couplings of pipelines
shall be done as per manufacturer’s instruction / drawings, wherever welding is
not preferred or permitted. All piping shall be checked for leak proof by
conducting tests as per instruction manuals of manufacturer.
7. Coupling of the engine and alternator shall be done after checking and correcting
alignment of shaft axes within permitted tolerances. Shaft levels shall be checked
Page 24 of 29
RAJASTHAN
and adjusted to be within permitted tolerances.

8. All the auxiliary power cables between equipment supplied by DG vendor and
control cables to start and shut-off solenoids, temperature switches; level switches
etc., shall be separately installed and terminated with ferrule numbers as per
manufacturer’s wiring diagrams. Wherever control cables have to run near engine
casing thermal insulations shall be used to prevent damage due to excess
temperature. Flexible conduits shall be used to protect control cabling near the
engine. All the power and control cables shall be laid separately and in cable
trenches / cable channels between generator and DG Control panel in the yard as
per approved drawing. Vacant spaces in used and unused conduits should be
plugged using M-seal monoplast filling compound. All cables shall be neatly dressed
and clamped in fabricated cable trays.
9. DG set auxiliaries like lube oil prime pump, fuel oil pump, fuel transfer pumps,
shall be run and checked using grid supply. Similarly, batteries shall be charged
through charger installed, using grid supply. First filling of lubrication oil, grease,
fuel oil (into tank) etc., shall be done by the contractor as per manufacturer’s
instructions
10. All DG set instruments shall be tested / calibrated and set at values recommended
by the manufacturer, Inscriptions on windows shall be checked. Overload relay for
alternator protection shall be tested and set at values recommended. Calibration
certificate for the instruments used for testing shall be submitted for purchaser’s
approval.
11. Installation of safety appliances like rubber mat, carbon dioxide fire extinguishers,
first aid box etc., shall be done.
12. When installation is completely ready for starting, following tests shall be done in
addition to all test prescribed by the manufacturer / I.S. Standards.
a. Starting of engine manual mode / simulated DG Control condition.

b. Shut-off of the engine-manual mode / electrical mode simulated faults of the
alternator and engine.
c. Over speed test.
d. Interlock between DG breaker and grid supply.
e. Governor speed control electrical / mechanical.
f. Minimum time in seconds required by the set to deliver power at desired
voltage and frequency starting from standstill condition
g. Matching the DG phase sequence with grid supply phase sequence is only
required for emergency DG.
h. Checking annunciator windows for all the faults simulated during testing.
Page 25 of 29
RAJASTHAN
i. Continuous full load test as specified, by starting all the motor loads direct on
line sequentially.
j. Paralleling with Grid (Wherever applicable).
k. Tabulation of all results in the mutually agreed format.
13. Vendor shall provide qualified personnel for installation and carryout site testing
and commissioning of all equipment supplied under this contract.
14. Important notes
a. Successful commissioning of DG set is contingent upon satisfactory working of

all the units, meeting fully the requirements of the specification and
performance guarantees offered by the manufacturer.
b. It shall be contractor’s responsibility to replace all defective / inferior
materials revealed during preliminary acceptance and final acceptance tests
(P.A.T and F.A.T) at his own expense, without affecting completion milestones.
c. Contractor shall ensure that no tests are applied which may stress the
equipment above the limits recommended for field testing, by the
manufacturer.
d. Contractor shall be responsible for any damage that may occur to personnel /
equipment resulting from improper testing procedures.
e. Contractor scope in testing of DG Set includes supply & filling sufficient
quantities of consumables like high speed diesel, lube oil, greases etc.,
necessary for carrying out all trial runs, during preliminary acceptance tests
(PAT) and final acceptance tests (FAT).
Each DG system along with associated accessories and layout shall be acceptable to
statutory bodies like Electrical Inspector, Tariff Advisory Committee, Electricity
Board, Pollution Control Board etc. Any Changes required by them shall be carried out
by Vendor without additional cost. Getting the approvals is in Vendor’s scope.
Statutory fees will be paid by Purchaser.
Page 26 of 29
RAJASTHAN
2. The equipment shall be properly packed for transportation by ship / rail or trailer.
The equipment shall be wrapped in polythene sheets before being placed in crates
/ cases to prevent the damage to finish.
no’ etc. shall be clearly marked on the package together with other details as per
purchase order.
packing shall be completely suitable for outdoor storage in areas with heavy rains /
22.0 WARRANTY
Bidder shall have final and total responsibility for the design and performance of all
equipment supplied under this specification. The equipment and the system shall be
guaranteed for troubles free operation for a period of 24 months from supply or 12
months from the date of commissioning. Any defects discovered during this period
shall be rectified free of charge.
Page 27 of 29
RAJASTHAN
ANNEXURE – I
LIST OF SPARES
I. The spare parts as listed below shall be quoted for the D.G. set along with the offer with
item wise unit prices:
1. Rings of various types and sizes.

2. Bearings of various types and sizes.
3. Gaskets of various sizes and types.
4. Lube oil filters.
5. Solenoids of various types and sizes.
6. Electrical actuator of various types and sizes.
7. Circuit breaker arcing and fixed contact assembly.
8. Excitation system diodes.
9. Fuses of all ratings.
II. Any other spare parts, not covered but, required shall also be quoted.
III. All spare parts shall be identical to the parts used in the D.G. Set.
Page 28 of 29
RAJASTHAN
ANNEXURE – II
DOCUMENTATION FOR DIESEL GENERATOR SET

3. General arrangement and foundation drg. for Y Y Y
all the equipment.
4. Civil scope drawings N Y Y
5. Earthing layout N Y Y
6. Terminal arrangement drg. and N Y Y
Interconnection.
7. Sectional view of D.G. Set N N Y
8. Illustrative and descriptive literature. Y N Y
9. Catalogue for bought out accessories. Y N Y
10. Installation operation & maintenance manual N N Y
11. Type test certificates for engine, alternator Y N Y
and circuit breaker
13. Spare parts list with identification N N Y
14. Calculations for justifying DG set size offered Y N Y
with respect to load and starting of largest
load.
Note:

the date of LOI.
coated folder.
Y - Yes, N - No
Page 29 of 29
DATA SHEET FOR DIESEL GENERATOR SET
REV. 00
Project No. Unit

REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0
Date 21/12/2018
Prepared By PBS
Checked By PBS
Approved By SKJ
Client Review

SL. No. PARTICULARS OF EQUIPMENT UNIT PURCHASER'S REQUIREMENT
A GENERAL
1 Manufacturer : #
2 Model Number : #
3 Quantity No. : 3
4 Tag. No. : DG-01& 02& EDG
5 Applicable Standard : As per Doc. No.NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-024 Specification for Diesel
Generator Set
B SITE CONDITION
3 Average Relative Humidity : 50%-60%
5 Seismic Zone : ZONE-II
6 Degree of Protection (IP) : IP-55
7 Environment : Dry
9 Location : Outdoor
C GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
1 Diesel engine Model,Manufacturer and Rated power : #
2 Rated Voltage Volts : 415 V +/- 10%
3 Frequency Hertz : 50 Hz +/- 1%
4 Number of phase : 3
5 Rated Power Factor : 0.8 Lag
6 System Earthing : Solidly earthed
7 Duty : Standby
1 Prime Rating (PRP) as per ISO: 8528_(At accounting for Engine Deration for KVA : $
Site conditions & Alternator Efficiency with Engine Driving all its Auxiliaries)
2 Synchronous speed : 1500

3 Overload capability for One (1) hour in Twelve (12) consecutive hours of : 10%
operation
4 Insulation class : F
5 Temperature rise class : B
6 Winding : Copper
7 Winding connection : Star connection
8 Rated Voltage : 415 V
9 Rated Frequency : 50 Hz
10 Method of Neutral Grounding : Solidly Earthed
11 Engine Starting System : Electric
12 Battery and Battery Charger : Required
13 Noise Level : 80 dBA at 1m in any direction
14 Containerised Enclosure : Acoustic
E ENGINE TECHNICAL DATA
1 Engine Make : #
2 Engine Model : #
3 Governing Type / Class : Electronic
4 Cycle : 4 stroke
5 Number of Cylinders : #
6 Cooling System : Water - cooled
7 Rotation : Anti-clockwise, viewed from flywheel
F FUEL OIL SYSTEM
1 Type : Engine driven fuel lift pump, fuel oil injection pumps
2 Fuel Tank : Daily service fuel tank (Fuel Oil Day Tank)
3 Capacity of Fuel Oil Day Tank Litres : #
4 Fuel Piping & Fitting Accessaries
4.1 Fuel Piping from Daily Tank to Engine : Required
4.2 Inspection and cleaning Hole for Fuel Tank : Required
4.3 Level Switch in Fuel tank (For Low Alarm) : Required
4.4 Level gauge with isolating and drain valve : Required
4.5 Drain connection with isolating valve : Required
4.6 Manhole with cover for maintenance purposes : Required
4.7 Strainers : Required
G LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEM
1 Type : Full flow oil filter, oil cooler type including Valves, oil Pump, Piping
etc.
H AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST SYSTEM
1 Suction Air Filter : Required
2 Inlet & Exhaust Silencer : Required
3 Inlet & Exhaust Ducting / Piping / Manifolds : Required
4 All Supports & Hangers : Required
I ALTERNATOR
1 Make : #
2 Model : #
3 Output rating : $
4 Power Factor : 0.8
5 Rated Generating Voltage : 415 V with voltage regulation +/- 1%
6 Frequency : 50 Hz
7 Speed : 1500
8 Class of Insulation : H
9 Bearings : Long life Double Bearing
10 Overload Capacity : 10% for one hour in any 12 hours of operation without exceeding
temperature rise limits
11 Ventilation : Self ventilated

12 Excitation System : Self excited, self-regulated, self-ventilated brushless design

provided with suitable automatic regulator for rated output at site
conditions.
13 Enclosure : Drip Proof & Screen Protected IP-23 with Acoustic
14 Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) : Voltage Regulations shall be limited to +/- 1% of nominal voltage
under no load to full load with power factor of 0.8 lag to unity &
speed drop to 3% of nominal speed.
J POWER & CONTROL CABLES
1 Power Cable Details : $
2 Power Cable Entry : Bottom
3 Control Cable Details : Min 2.5 Sq.mm FRLS PVC Outer sheath
4 Cable Glands : Required
5 Type of Cable glands : $
K BATTERY & BATTERY CHARGER
1 Type of Starting : Battery started
2 Type Of Starting Battery : Sealed valve regulated lead acid maintenance free
3 No. of Consecutive Starts : Maximum Six Consecutive Repeat Start Impulses at 10 Sec. interval
(Vendor to confirm)
L CONTROL PANEL (AMF)
1 Type Of Mounting : Floor Mounted
2 Access : Front
3 Starters For Auxiliary Motors : Required
4 Internal lights and anti condensation heaters : Required
5 Local / remote start / stop push buttons : Required
6 Synchronizing Equipment : Required
7 Emergency Shut Down Push Button With Guard Ring : Required
8 Individual alarm and fault indicators for each protective function : Required
M INDICATION & METERING
1 Ammeter with slector switch : Required
2 Voltmeter with slector switch : Required
3 KWH meter : Required
4 Open, Closed And Trip Status Lamps for Generator Circuit Breaker : Required
5 Overvoltage trip indication : Required
6 Overcurrent trip indication : Required
7 Earth fault indication : Required
8 Engine Fail to start indication : Required
9 Fuel Oil Indication : Required
M PROTECTION
1 Overcurrent Protection : Required
2 Ground fault Protection : Required
3 Under / Over Voltage Protection : Required
4 Thermal Overload Protection : Required
5 Over / Under Frequency Protection : Required
6 Short-Circuit Protection : Required
N ANNUCIATION
1 Excitation fail : Required
2 Over Voltage : Required
3 Under voltage : Required
4 Over frequency : Required
5 Under frequency : Required
6 Engine fail to start : Required
O ACCESSORIES
1 Rating Plate : Required
2 Terminal Marking Plate : Required
3 Earthing Bosses (2 Nos.) : Required
4 Lifting Hooks : Required
5 Warning Plates : Required
6 Brass Metal, Ni-Plated Cable Glands : Required
7 Cable Lugs (Copper) : Required
8 Flywheel with Barring Device : Required
9 Guards for Moving Parts : Required
10 Coupling (s) for Engine - Driven equipment : Required
11 Common Base Plate for Engine - Driven equipment : Required
12 Foundation / Anchor Bolts as required. : Required
13 Acoustic enclosure with ventilation system : Required
14 Anti Vibration Pads : Required
15 First Fill of Lubricating Oil and fuel : Required
16 Quotation for 2 years’ spares parts for Normal Operation and Maintenance : #
along with unit prices

DIESEL ENGINE DRIVEN GENERATOR MANUFACTURER’S DATA (TO BE FILLED BY VENDOR)
GENERATOR
1 Make :
2 Type / Designation/ Manufacturing Standard :
3 Country of Manufacturing :
4 Nearest service centre from site location :
5 Serial No :
6 Frame Designation :
7 Mounting :
8 Rated Output :
9 Output at site condition :
10 Terminal Voltage :
11 Rated P.F. :
12 Phases :
13 Winding Connection :
14 No. Of Terminals :
15 Full Load Current : Amp
16 Max. Continuous negative sequence current :
17 Speed : RPM
18 Direction Of Rotation (Viewed From Driving End) :
19 Cooling System :
20 Cooling Class (IEC 60034) :
21 Excitation System :
22 Three Phase Short Circuit Current :
23 Three Phase Short Circuit Withstand Time :
24 Temperature Rise At Max Ambient (At Full Load) :
25 Time from starting initiation to acceptance of load :
26.a Efficiency (Rated Pf) 100% Load : %
26.b 75% Load : %
26.c 50% Load : %
27.a Reactance Direct axis synchronous saturated (Xd) : p.u
27.b Direct axis transient saturated (X'd) : p.u
27.c Direct axis sub transient saturated (X"d) : p.u
27.d Negative sequence (Saturated / Unsaturated) : p.u
(X2)
27.e Zero sequence (Saturated / Unsaturated) (X0) : p.u
28.a Resistance Resistance of Armature At 25 ° C : Ohm/phase
28.b Resistance of Armature At 100° C : Ohm/phase
28.c Negative sequence resistance (R2) : Ohm/phase
28.d Zero sequence resistance (R0) : Ohm/phase
29.a Time constants Direct axis transient short circuit (T'd) : Sec
29.b Direct axis sub transient short circuit (T"d) : Sec
29.c Armature short circuit (Ta) : Sec
29.d Short Circuit Ratio (SCR) :
30.a Moment of Inertia Generator : Kg-M²
30.b Engine : Kg-M³
31 Maximum frequency variation while imposing block load :
32 Weight Of Generator & Rotor : Kg.
33 Overall dimension of the generator (L X W X H) : mm
34 Critical Speed :
35 Noise Level :
36 Vibrations :
37 Fuel consumption at rated output :
38 EXCITATION
a) Make :
b) Type :
c) Serial No :
d) Exciter Output :
e) Exciter Voltage at Rated Output :
f) Exciter Current at Rated Output :
g) Voltage adjustment range with minimum step :
h) Exciter Type (IEEE) :
39 AVR
a) Make :
b) Type :
c) Steady State Accuracy :
d) Response Time :
e) Adjustment Range :
f) Voltage Variation :
g) AVR Model Type (IEEE) :
h) Bearing No. of Bearing :
i) Bearing Type (Drive & Non-Drive End) :
j) Bearing Manufacturer :
k) Bearing Lubrication :
l) Bearing Insulation (Drive & Non-Drive End) :
40 ATS (Automatic Transfer Switch)
a) Make :
b) Type :
c) Rating :
d) No. of Poles :
e) Short Circuit Withstand current rating :
f) Enclosure Protection :
41 DG CONTROL PANEL (AMF)
a) Make :
b) Type / Designation / Manufacturing Standard :
c) Country of Manufacturing :
d) Control Supply Details :
e) Dimensions :

DIESEL ENGINE DRIVEN GENERATOR MANUFACTURER’S DATA (TO BE FILLED BY VENDOR)
f) Weight :
42 ENGINE STARTING BATTERY
a) Make :
b) Designation / Manufacturing Standard :
c) Battery Type :
d) Nominal Voltage :
e) No. Of Cells :
f) AH Capacity :
g) Type Of Mounting :
h) Dimensions Of Battery :
43 BATTERY CHARGER
a) Make :
b) Designation / Manufacturing Standard :
c) Input Voltage :
d) Output Float Charge Voltage :
e) Float Charge Current :
44 AUXILIARY MOTORS
a) Make :
b) Type :
c) Starter Type :
d) Rating :
e) Insulation Class :
NOTES:
4 This Data Sheet shall be Read / Refered In Conjunction with Specification for DG Set.
5 Vendor to furnish Routine Test Certificates for the offered DG Set.
6 Vendor to Furnish Catalogues / Details for All the Components.
7 All Instruments to be connected to junction boxes on skid and consoles.
8 All Tubings, pipings, wiring between instruments and junction boxes and local panels to be supplied by vendor.
9 Instruments, safety and control devices specified herein are minimum required by customer. In case, in the opinion of vendor, additional devices are required, vendor
shall specifically state so and include the same in his scope of supply.
10 All switching devices (hardware / software) for prealarms, trips, trip alarm, and interlocking shall be in the vendor's scope.
11 The sizing and installation of DG exhaust pipe (chimney) shall be in Vendor scope.

RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR AC UPS

Page 1 of 18
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 SCOPE
2.0 STANDARDS TO BE FOLLOWED
4.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS
5.0 COMPONENT DETAILS
6.0 PAINTING
7.0 TESTS AND INSPECTION
8.0 DRAWINGS & DOCUMENTS
9.0 SPARES
10.0 PACKING
11.0 DEVIATIONS
Page 2 of 18
RAJASTHAN
ANNEXURES
Annexure. No. Description

I DRAWINGS & DOCUMENTS
II METERING INDICATIONS AND ALARM SCHEDULE
III SPARES
Page 3 of 18
RAJASTHAN
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 The specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at works and dispatch in
well packed condition of AC UPS required to supply UPS power for computers.
1.2 The scope shall include the following:
i. Full wave-controlled rectifier

ii. Inverter
iii. Static switches
iv. Storage battery
v. Constant Voltage Transformer for bypass supply
vi. Manual bypass switches
vii. Isolation / output transformer to achieve desired output voltage
viii. SNMP Card and its logic
ix. UPS Distribution Boards
x. Interconnecting cabling between various units of UPS
xi. All other items required, but not specified for safe and reliable operation of UPS
system.
2.1 The equipment shall conform to the latest issue of the following and relevant Indian
Standard specifications or equivalent specification of the country of origin or IEC
specifications.
IS-13314 Solid state inverters run from storage batteries

IS-11260 Stabilized power supplies AC output
IEC-146 Solid state inverters
2.2 The equipment shall also conform to the provision of Indian Electricity Rules, Indian
Supply Act and any other statutory regulations in force from time to time.
Page 4 of 18
RAJASTHAN
3.1 The UPS unit and its associated equipment shall be suitable for operating at the
specified rating continuously with the specified voltage and frequency variations
under the ambient conditions indicated in specification sheet without exceeding the
temperature rise limits specified in relevant standards and without any detrimental
effect on any part.
3.2 The UPS system shall be based on latest generation of IGBT based, pulse width
modulated (PWM) design with proven performance.
3.3 Redundant / Non-redundant scheme with by-pass
3.3.1 Non-redundant scheme with by-pass
Under normal operating conditions, inverter should supply uninterrupted stable

A.C. power to load. On failure of inverter, a no-break load transfer to standby
power supply shall take place through static switch.
3.3.2 Redundant scheme with by-pass
Under normal operating conditions, both inverter units should run in parallel sharing
50% load in synchronism with by-pass power and supply uninterrupted A.C. power to
load. On failure of one of these inverters, the faulty inverter should get automatically
disconnected from the load and healthy inverter should supply 100% load in
synchronism with by-pass supply. In the event of second inverter also developing a
fault, a no-break load transfer to standby power supply should take place through
static switch.
Page 5 of 18
RAJASTHAN
3.4 Output frequency of the inverters must remain synchronised to one another which in
turn shall be synchronised to the standby power supply frequency provided the latter
does not vary by more than +3% to -5%. It should be possible to change the setting of
frequency range of synchronism between above limits by frequency selector switch.
Outside these limits inverter should desynchronise with the bypass and run at its own
frequency. When running at its own frequency, frequency variation shall be
maintained less than ±1.0%. Resynchronisation with bypass power supply must take
place automatically with some time delay when frequency comes back to +3% to -5%
range. Changeover from inverter to bypass or bypass to inverter shall also be possible
in desynchronised mode of operation. Change-over time in both synchronised and
desynchronised mode operation shall be indicated.
3.5 The UPS unit shall be suitable for 0.7 lagging to unity power factor. The overall power
factor may be taken as 0.8 lagging unless indicated otherwise in specification sheet.
3.6 The maximum waveform distortion of the output voltage shall not exceed 5% r.m.s.
for linear loads and 10% r.m.s for non-linear loads. The UPS unit shall be suitable for
operation for non-linear loads having crest factor of 3.
3.7 The inverter steady state output voltage and frequency (free running) variation shall
not exceed ±1% for specified input power supply condition and no-load to full load
condition.
3.8 Voltage dip / rise on sudden application / throw of 100% load or on changeover from
inverter to bypass or vice versa shall not exceed 15% and shall be recovered within
100 m.sec. to rated voltage.
3.9 UPS shall be designed for overload of 125% for 10 min. and 150% for 10 sec. after
which drooping characteristic shall come into operation.
3.10 On failure of the main supply, inverter unit shall continue to supply rated load from
the battery bank for an hour duration.
3.11 Charger shall simultaneously supply entire power necessary for inverter and to keep
the battery of required capacity in fully charged condition. Provision for automatic
charging in both float and boost shall be made.
Page 6 of 18
RAJASTHAN
3.12 Battery shall be VRLA type. The battery capacity shall be decided considering load
power factor as 0.8, derating factor for ageing 0.8 and derating for minimum ambient
temperature as applicable.
3.13 The ventilation fans, if provided shall be fully redundant and connected to the output
from the inverter and an audio-visual alarm shall be provided on its failure. It shall be
possible to operate inverter for about half an hour even after the failure of the fan
without temperature rise inside the inverter cubicle exceeding the safe operating
temperature limits.
3.14 In case of inverter failure due to any reason or overload, affected unit shall be
isolated and changeover to other inverter or to bypass shall take place automatically.
3.15 Noise level at a distance or 1m from UPS panels shall not exceed 60 dB.
3.16 UPS system shall be provided with necessary control, protection, metering, indication,
alarm & annunciation for reliable and safe operation of the system. The suggestive list
is indicated in Annexure-II.
3.17 All semi-conducting devices shall be protected by fast acting semi-conducting fuses.
These fuses shall be co-ordinated with load side HRC fuses.
3.18 The battery may be taken out of service for maintenance during which period it shall
be possible for the inverter to continue operation taking power from the rectifier. The
input filter of the inverter shall be suitably designed to take care of this operational
requirement.
3.19 It shall be possible to vary the output voltage steplessly within ±5% of the specified
output voltage. This adjustment shall be possible to be made when UPS is in
operation.
3.20 UPS system shall be suitable for both floating output or earthing of one leg in case of
single-phase system / star-point in case of three phase system.
3.21 The UPS system shall have very high system of reliability having minimum MTBF of
50,000 hrs. Vendor shall furnish the value of MTBF, MTTR & availability factor.
Page 7 of 18
RAJASTHAN
4.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS
4.1 The equipment shall preferably be supplied in enclosed, dust & vermin proof, floor
mounted, sheet steel enclosure. In case, it is necessary to provide opening for
ventilation, this should be closed by fine mesh. Minimum degree of protection for
enclosure shall be IP-43 as per IS-13997.
4.2 Enclosure shall be fabricated with cold rolled sheet annealed steel of minimum
thickness 2.0 mm.
4.3 The door hinges shall be concealed type. The doors and the removable covers shall be
provided with non-deteriorating neoprene gaskets without any discontinuities. Gaskets
shall be held in position in groove in shaped sheet steel work or these shall be of U
type.
4.4 All external hardware shall be cadmium plated steel. Hardware for fixing the
removable parts shall be provided with retaining devices.
4.5 Panels shall be liberally designed. All components shall be so mounted that they are
easily accessible for inspection and maintenance.
4.6 UPS unit shall preferably have separate panels for each rectifier inverter units, bypass
supply, distribution boards etc. Various panels of UPS except distribution boards shall
be mounted side-by-side & bolted together to form compact assembly.
4.7 Distribution boards shall be of fixed type single front execution in fully
compartmentalised design and divided into distinct panels each comprising of bus-bar
chambers, individual feeder modules and vertical cable alley.
4.8 Mounting height of components requiring operation and observations shall not be
lower than 300 mm and higher than 1800 mm.
4.9 All the live parts which are accessible after opening the front cover / back cover shall
be properly insulated or provided with insulating barrier to prevent accidental
contact. Bus bars of distribution boards shall be PVC sleeved.
Page 8 of 18
RAJASTHAN
4.10 Nameplate consisting of black perpex with white engraving shall be provided for each
panel and for each equipment mounted on the front of the panel. Suitable label
identification for each component mounted inside the panel shall also be provided.
4.11 All the wirings shall be properly laid and ferruled at both ends. PVC channels may be
used for wiring. For control wiring, minimum 1.5 sq.mm copper conductor shall be
used.
4.12 The power connections shall be made by PVC insulated flexible copper cables or taped
copper / aluminium strip.
4.13 All power & control cables shall enter from the bottom unless otherwise specified in
the specification sheet.
4.14 Removable bolted aluminium gland plate, heavy duty compression type rolled
aluminium cable glands, crimping type aluminium cable lugs for Al. cables and copper
cable lugs for Cu. cables, pressure clamp / bolted type terminals etc. shall be
provided for each incoming and outgoing cable.
4.15 Terminal blocks shall be grouped according to circuit functions and suitably
numbered. 20% extra terminals shall be provided in the terminal block.
4.16 A suitably sized earth bus shall be provided at the bottom of panel with provision for
earth connection at both ends to purchaser’s earth grid.
4.17 All panels shall be of same height so as to form a bank which shall give good aesthetic
appearance.
5.0 COMPONENT DETAILS
5.1 All components shall conform to relevant IS/IEC standards and shall be of reputed
make. Makes of all components shall be subject to purchaser’s / consultant’s
approval.
Page 9 of 18
RAJASTHAN
5.2 Thyristors, diodes and transistors
The thyristors, diodes and transistors shall have adequate safety margins to withstand
specified operating conditions. A factor of safety of minimum 4 shall be taken against
voltage surges.
5.3 PCBs
All electronic control & monitoring printed circuit cards shall preferably be modular
plug in type. Monitoring points shall be provided in each of the PCB, PCBs shall be
firmly clamped in position so that vibration or long usage do not result in loose
contacts. Failure of each PCB shall be indicated by visual alarm and indication. The
visual fault diagnostic shall preferably indicate fault into various sections of the card.
5.4 Transformers and Chokes
All transformers and chokes shall be of dry type and air cooled. This shall be class ‘H’
insulated, vacuum impregnated. Class B insulated cast resin transformers and chokes
shall be also acceptable.
5.5 Electrolytic Capacitors
These shall be polarised aluminium type I, suitable for long life and category I, as per
IS-4317 or equivalent IEC. The capacitor shall preferably be self-healing type. These
shall be so located in inverter panels that the operating temperature does not exceed
65 ºC maximum.
5.6 Instruments
Ammeters & voltmeters shall be moving coil type of class 1.5 accuracy as per IS-1248.
These shall be flush mounting type of minimum size of 96 mm x 96 mm and shall have
taut band scale of 240º. Frequency meter shall be of reed type having range of 45 Hz
to 55 Hz.
Page 10 of 18
RAJASTHAN
5.7 Static Switches
Static switches shall be naturally commutated type with parallel inverse connected
thyristors. These shall be rated for continuous duty for 100% load. Short time rated
static switches are not acceptable.
5.8 Constant Voltage Transformer
CVT shall be Dry type, Air cooled, Class F insulated, vacuum impregnated, Dyn11.
CVT shall be epoxy cast. The rating of CVT shall be twice the hold on VA of all
contactors/relays or 160VA, whichever is higher.
Constant Voltage Transformer shall be static type and shall satisfy the following
requirements:
i. Maximum output voltage variation under steady state condition shall be ±3%.
ii. Maximum harmonic distortion shall be less than 5%.
iii. The output voltage shall be restored within ±2% of nominal value in less than 2
secs.
5.9 Battery
Battery along with accessories shall conform to Engineering Standard ES-8142.

Battery backup time shall be 120Minutes (2 Hours) for the complete TAS system ( 60
minutes with each battery bank) and 60Minutes (1 Hour) for Admin Block (30 minutes
with each battery bank).
5.10 Indication Lamps
All indication lamps shall be of LED type suitable for the specified control voltage,
having minimum illumination of 40 millicandella. The colour of the LEDs shall be as
follows:
ON : Red
OFF : Green
FAULT : Yellow
5.11 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Page 11 of 18
RAJASTHAN
For isolating devices of various equipment, moulded case circuit breakers shall be
used. These shall be provided with overload and short circuit protective devices and
shall conform to IS-2516.
6.0 PAINTING
6.1 The enclosure after suitable pre-treatment, shall be painted with two coats of anti-
rust paint followed by two coats of anticorrosive paint.
6.2 All paints shall be carefully selected to withstand tropical heat and extremes of
weather. The paint shall not scale off, crinkle or be removed by abrasion due to
normal handling.
6.3 Unless otherwise specified, the finishing shade shall be light grey shade no.631 as per
IS: 5.
6.4 Electrostatic powder paint shall be preferred.
7.1 The UPS units shall be subjected to test as per relevant standards. The test shall
include, but not limited to the following:
i. Rectifier & inverter soft starting

ii. Regulation test
iii. Heat run test for 8 hours
iv. Overload test
v. Test for changover time in synchronised and desynchronised mode.
vi. Test for dynamic response and transient performance
vii. Sequence & transfer test
viii. Noise level measurement
ix. Test to check the selectivity of protective devices
x. Alarm test (simulation of various fault conditions)
xi. Measurement of harmonic distortion
xii. Ventilation test (operation without fan)
xiii. Insulation test
xiv. Current division in parallel UPS
Page 12 of 18
RAJASTHAN
7.2 All the above tests shall be carried out in presence of purchaser’s representative. In
addition, the equipment shall be subjected to stage inspection during process of
manufacture at works and site inspection.
7.3 These inspections, shall, however, not absolve the vendor from his responsibility for
making good any defects which may be noticed subsequently.
8.0 DRAWINGS & DOCUMENTS
8.1 Drawings and documents as per Annexure-I shall be supplied.
8.2 All drawings and documents shall have the following description written boldly.
• Name of client
• Name of consultant
• Enquiry / order number
• Code no. & Description
9.0 SPARES
9.1 Item wised unit prices for spares parts as listed in Annexure - III shall be offered along
with main equipment with recommended quantity for the period as indicated in
specification sheet.
9.2 Any other spares required, but not specified shall also be offered.
10.0 PACKING
10.1 The board shall be properly packed before dispatch to avoid damage during transport,
storage and handling .
10.2 The packing box shall contain a copy of the installation, operation and maintenance
manual.
10.3 A sign to indicate the upright position of the panels to be placed during transport and
storage shall be clearly marked. Also, proper arrangement shall be provided to handle
the equipment.
11.0 DEVIATIONS
Page 13 of 18
RAJASTHAN
11.1 Deviations, if any, from this standard shall be clearly indicated in the offer with
reasons thereof.
ANNEXURE - I
DRAWINGS & DOCUMENTS
Following drawings and documents for all equipment of UPS system shall be supplied
Sl. No. Description With BID After Order

For Approval Final
No. of copies No. of copies No. of weeks No. of copies
1. Specification sheet 4 4 6 9
2. Technical Particulars 4 4 6 9
3. Block Diagram 4 4 6 9 + 1R
4. General Arrangement 4 4 6 9 + 1R
drawings and foundation plan
5. Calculation for battery sizing 4 - - -
6. Feeder Details for Distribution 4 4 6 9 + 1R
Boards
7. Descriptive literature and 4 - - 9
catalogues
8. Bill of materials - 4 8 9 + 1R
9. Schematic & Wiring Diagram - 4 8 9 + 1R
10. Installation, operation & - - - 9
maintenance manual
11. Spare parts list with 4 - - 9
identification
12. Test Certificates - - - 9
13. Guarantee certificates - - - 9
Note:
1. R- Reproducible.
2. Period of submission of drgs. for approval shall be counted from the date of LOI.
3. All final documents shall be submitted prior to dispatch of equipment. These shall made
in bound sets.
Page 14 of 18
RAJASTHAN
ANNEXURE – II
METERING INDICATIONS AND ALARM SCHEDULE
A. METERING
1. Incoming Voltmeter with selector switches for each incomer

2. Ammeter with selector switches for each incomer
3. Ammeter & Voltmeter at each inverter output and bypass output.
4. Frequency meter & power factor meter at one common point of output
5. Ammeter & Voltmeter at incoming of each UPS distribution boards
6. Ammeter at each rectifier output
7. Battery charge / discharge meter
B. LED INDICATION
1. A.C. Mains ‘ON’

2. Rectifier output ‘ON’
3. Load on inverter
4. Load on bypass
5. Inverter synchronised to mains
6. Battery on float
7. Battery on boost
8. Fault (one lamp for all types of fault)
Page 15 of 18
RAJASTHAN
C. AUDIO-VISUAL ALARM (with Accept, Reset & Test facilities)
1. Mains failure
2. Rectifier failure
3. Inverter output overvoltage
4. Inverter output undervoltage
5. Inverter fuse failure
6. Rectifier fuse failure
7. Fan failure
8. Inverter temperature high
9. Static switch failure
10. Bypass input failure
11. Inverter desynchronised
Page 16 of 18
RAJASTHAN
ANNEXURE – III
The following spare parts shall be quoted along with the offer.
A. OPERATIONAL & MAINTENANCE SPARES
1. Ventilation fan
2. One of each type of PCBs
3. One of each type of thyristors, diodes & transistors
4. One of each type of capacitors, resistors & chokes
5. Semiconductor fuses & HRC fuse links of each rating 50%
6. MCCB & control switches one of each rating
7. Signal lamps 50%
8. Battery cells 2 nos.
9. Electrolyte 10%
10. Any other item not indicated but considered necessary
B. COMMISSIONING SPARES
Recommended commissioning spares shall be quoted.
Page 17 of 18
RAJASTHAN
Page 18 of 18
DATA SHEET FOR AC UPS SYSTEM
REV. 00
Project No. Unit

REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0
Date 21/12/2018
Prepared By PBS
Checked By PBS
Approved By SKJ
Client Review

A GENERAL
1 Manufacturer : #
2 Model Number : #
3 Quantity No. : 2
4 Type : Parallel Redundant with static by pass supply
5 Configuration : 2 x 100% (Including battery will be 2 x 100%)
6 Power rating at load PF 0.8 lagging KVA : $
7 Method of energy storage : Battery Back-up (120 Minutes for TAS UPS and 60min for Admin UPS)
8 Applicable Standard : As per Doc. No.NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-025 Specification for AC UPS

System.
B SITE CONDITION
3 Average Relative Humidity : 50-60%
5 Minimum Temperature for battery sizing °C : 10
6 Seismic Zone Category : ZONE-2
7 Environment : Dry
8 Location : Indoor Switchgear room
C UPS SYSTEM PARTICULARS
1 Input system
1.1 Voltage and Frequency : 415 V, 3 Phase + 1 Neutral (4 Wire), 50 Hz
1.2 Allowable Variation Voltage : ± 10%
1.3 Frequency : ± 1%
2 Output system Output Voltage : 240 V AC, 1 Phase + 1 Neutral (2 wire)
Frequency : 50 Hz ± 1%
3 System Earthing : Solidly Earthed
4 Space heater : Required (240 V, 1-Phase)
5 Method of changeover to bypass : Automatic
D RECTIFIER
1 Ractifier Type : Three phase Full wave 6 pulse IGBT based
2 Parallel operation : Required
3 Recharge time on battery boost charge : As per Battery manufacturers standard
4 Ripple content in DC output with battery : <1%
5 Ripple content in DC output without battery at charger output : <1%
E INVERTER
1 Inverter Type : IGBT based PWM technology
2 AC output voltage : 240 V AC
3 Rating : 40KVA and 15KVA
4 AC output voltage regulation : ± 1%
5 Range of adjustment output voltage : ± 10 % at rated load
6 Frequency : 50 Hz
7 Frequency regulation : ± 0.1 Hz
8 Total harmonic content at 100% non-linear load : <5%
9 Overload capacity
(a) For 10 Min. : 125%
(b) For 1 Min. : 150%
10.1 Synchronising Between Inverters : Required
10.2 Between inverters and standby supply : Required
10.3 Parallel Operation : Required
11 Power walk in time : 15 sec
F BATTERY
1 Type : sealed valve regulated lead acid maintenance free
2 Battery backup time : 120Minutes & 60 minutes
3 End Cell Voltage : 1.05 V / Cell
4 Undervoltage sence : Required
5 Recharge time for Battery : Maximum 10 Hrs.
6 Mounting arrangement : Single tier / Multi tier
G STAND BY (BY-PASS) SUPPLY
1 Constant Voltage Transformer (CVT)
1.1 Rating of CVT : #
1.2 Input supply to CVT : 415 V± 10%, 3-Phase, 50Hz± 1%
1.3 Output of CVT : 240 V± 10%, 1 Phase
1.4 Input / Output voltage of CVT : 240 V / 240 V, 1 Phase
1.5 Accuracy of CVT : ± 1%
2 Maintenance bypass : Required
H STATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
1 Type : ± 5%
2 Transfer Time : < 4 msec
3 Overload capacity
(a) For 10 Min. : 125% (Voltage Regulation maintained)
(b) For 1 Min. : 150% (Voltage Regulation maintained)
I AC & DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
1 Type : Compartmentalised
2 Outgoing Feeders : $
3 Mounting : Floor/Wall Mounted
4 Total weight of AC-DC Distribution Board : #
5 Panel Lifting points : Required
J CONSTRUCTIONAL / GENERAL DETAILS
1 Enclosure Protection : IP-42
2 Mounting / Installation Arrangement : Floor Mounted
3 Cable Entry (for Incoming and Outgoing) : Bottom
4 interconnected cables between the panels : Cu / XLPE Cables Supply by Vendor

5 Separate Bolted removable Gland Plate : Required

6 Color shade exterior : Epoxy RAL-7035
7 Dimention of UPS mm : # (W X D X H)
8 Total weight of UPS Kg. : #
9 Dimention of AC-DC Distribution Board mm : # (W X D X H)
10 Audible noise at 1 Meter Distance : 75 db (A)
11 Fault Diagnostic Unit (FDU) : Required
12 FDU-Fault Communication type : RS-485 for remote connection
: RS-232 for PC / LAPTOP connection
13 Battery purchase scope : UPS manufacturer
14 Circuit Breaker & Load Type : MCCB
15 Break Switch Rating :

AC UPS SYSTEM STATION MANUFACTURER'S DATA (TO BE FILLED BY BIDDER)
A UPS SYSTEM (GENERAL)

1 Make :
2 Type / Designation :
3 Tag No. :
4 Degree of Protection :
5 Output Rating (KVA at 0.8 p.f) :
6 Mode of Operation :
7 Type of cooling :
8.a Transient Response For 50% step load :
8.b Conditions For 100% step load and unload :
8.c Load Transferred to bypass line :
8.d When one inverter gets faulty and load :
transferred to healthy inverter
9 Noise Level :
10 Dimensions of UPS except AC/DC Board and Battery : mm (L X D X H)
11.a Overall efficiency At 100% Load :
11.b (insynchronizing mode) At 75% Load :
11.c At 50% Load :
B ENCLOSURE
1 Sheet Material :
2 Cable Entry :
3 Enclosure Ingress Protection (For AC & DC DB) :
4 Noise level :
5 Paint shade :
C RECTIFIER
1 Rectifier Unit :
2 DC Voltage (Nominal Voltage) :
3 Voltage range :
4 Float Voltage :
5 Boost Voltage :
6 Charging Type :
7 Voltage Regulation :
8 Ripple with batteries :
9 Ripple without batteries :
10 Rectifier Rating :
11 Power walk in time :
D INVERTER
1 Inverter type :
2 Rating(at specified ambient) :
3 Output voltage/No. of Phase :
4 Voltage Regulation :
5 Frequency Regulation :
6 Synchronizing Range :
7 Inverter Efficiency :
8 Harmonic Distortion at rated load :
9 Overload capacity 125% for 10 Min. :
10 150% for 1 Min. :
11 Load Crest Factor :
E BATTERY
1 Make / Model :
2 Battery Type :
3 Capacity (AH Rating) :
4 No.of cell : Nos.
5 Nominal cell voltage :
6 End cell voltage :
7 Back-up Time : Minutes
8 Under Voltage sence :
9 Battery Rack Dimensions : mm (L X D X H)
F STATIC SWITCH
1 No.of Static switch :
2 Type of static switch :
3 Current rating at specified ambient :
4 Transfer Time in synchronous mode :
5 Transfer Time in Asynchronous mode :
6 Overload capacity 125% for 10 Min. :
7 150% for 1 Min. :
8 Short circuit capacity and duration :
G BYPASS TRANSFORMER WITH CONSTANT VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
1 Make / Model :
2 Rating : KVA
3 Constant Voltage Transformer Voltage Ratio / Frequency :
4 Input / Output Voltage :
5 Stabiliser accuracy :
6 Stabiliser Rating : KVA
H MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH
1 Make / Model :
2 Type :
I AC & DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
1 Type :
2 Rating of Board :
3 No. of Outgoing Feeders :
4 Operation (Single Front / Double Front) :
5 Ingress Protection :

AC UPS SYSTEM STATION MANUFACTURER'S DATA (TO BE FILLED BY BIDDER)
6 Total weight of AC & DC Distribution Board : Kg.

7 Panel Lifting points :
8 Dimensions of AC & DC Distribution Board : mm (L X D X H)
J BATTERY STAND
1 Type :
2 No.of tires per rack :
3 No. of racks per system :
4 Paint :
5 Dimension : mm
6 Weight : Kg.
7 Maximum Height : mm
SPARES:
1 Control Cards.
2 Printed circuit boards of each type used.
3 Discrete components like SCRs, diodes, capacitors, resistors, etc.
4 Switches, MCCBs, MCBs etc.
5 Power / auxiliary / DC contactors, contactor coils and contact kits.
6 Fuses and fuse base (power and control) / Trip indicating fuses.
7 Indicating lamp assembly / bulbs / LEDs.
8 Toggle switch / push buttons, etc.
9 Annunciator, relays etc.
10 Spares for battery.
NOTES:
4 This Data Sheet shall be Read/Refer In Conjunction with Specification for AC UPS.
5 Cable details shall be furnished during post order document review.
6 Design margin of 20% shall be considered for battery sizing.
8 Vendor shall furnish list of recommended commissioning spares (if any) with separate prices.
9 All the interconnected cables between the panels shall be supplier's responsible.

RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR LV SWITCHGEAR

Page 1 of 45
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 GENERAL
2.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY AND SERVICES
5.0 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS
6.0 SWITCHGEAR DESIGN CRITERIA
7.0 CONSTRUCTION
8.0 MOTOR STARTER
9.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF PMCC, MCC, ESB, MLDB, EMLDB & MPDB
10.0 ROUTINE TEST
12.0 WARRANTY
14.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE
15.0 LIST OF SPARES
Page 2 of 45
RAJASTHAN
1.0 GENERAL
The scope of this specification is to define technical requirements of design,

engineering, fabrication, manufacture, assembly, inspection, testing, shop painting,
packing, transportation, delivery, erection, testing and Commissioning of 3 phase, 415
V, 50 Hz LV Drawout Type Switchboard consisting of PMCC, Emergency Switchboard
(ESB), Main Lighting Distribution Board (MLDB), Emergency Main Lighting Distribution
Board (EMLDB), Main Power Distribution Board (MPDB), with all the accessories which
shall be installed in the Petroleum Storage Terminal Project of Nayara Energy Ltd.
(NEL), Pali, Rajasthan.
2.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY AND SERVICES
2.1 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
1. Design, Engineering, Manufacture, fabrication, assembly, inspection, testing at

manufacturer’s works / test lab, shop painting, supply and delivery, properly
packed, transportation and delivery, erection, testing and commissioning of Low
Voltage switchgear including all the auxiliary equipment, hardware and accessories
as specified in this specification and Annexure, Bill of quantity
2. All relevant drawings, data and instruction manuals
2.2 SCOPE OF SERVICES
1. The scope of work shall also include, at the option of the purchaser, the services
of a senior engineer for
i. Complete checking of materials at site and advising the purchaser of any

discrepancy thereof
ii. Advice on procedure of erection to be followed
iii. Supervision of erection, testing, commissioning and putting into successful
commercial operation
iv. Configuration and testing of protection relays. Vendor’s engineer shall bring the
necessary test kits
Page 3 of 45
RAJASTHAN
2.3 TERMINAL POINTS AND EXCLUSIONS
2.3.1 Terminal points
1. Purchaser’s cable / bus duct for power and control termination
The equipment shall meet the requirements of Indian Electricity rules. Materials,
equipment and methods used in the manufacture shall conform to the latest edition of
IS and IEC standards, including the following.
IS: 5 Colours for Ready Mixed Paints and Enamels

IS: 613 Copper Rods and Bars for electrical purposes
IS: 772 AC Electricity Meters: Part-1 general requirements and tests Part-1
IS: 1248 Direct Acting electrical indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their
accessories
IS: 2705 Current Transformer specification
IS: 2824 Method of determining the comparative tracking index of solid insulating materials under
moist conditions
IS: 3156 Voltage Transformer specification
IS: 3231 Electrical relays for power system protection
IS: 3618 Phosphate treatment of iron and steel for protection against corrosion
IS: 3082 Material data for aluminium bus bars
IS: 5578 Guide for marking of insulated conductors
IS: 6005 Code of practice of Phosphate of iron and steel
IS: 6865 Control switches (switching devices for control and auxiliary circuits including contactor
relays) for voltages up to and including 1000 V AC and 1200 V DC
IS: 8623 Factory built assemblies of switchgear and control gear for voltage upto and including 1000 V
AC and 1200 V DC.
Part-II particular requirements for busbar trunking systems (bus ways)

IS: 8686 Static protective relays
IS: 10118 Code of Practice for Selection, Installation and Maintenance of Switchgear and Control gear
IS: 11171 Specification for Dry Type Power Transformer
IS: 11353 Guide for uniform system of marking and identification of conductors & apparatus terminals
IS: 12021 Specification for Control Transformers for Switchgear and Control gear for Voltages not
Exceeding 1000 V ac
IS: 12784 Electrical measuring transducers for converting ac electrical quantities into dc electrical
quantities
IS: 13703 LV Fuses for voltage not exceeding 1000 V ac or 1500 V dc
Page 4 of 45
RAJASTHAN
IS: 13947 LV Switchgear and control gear

IEC: 60947-1 Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear - General Rules
IEC: 60947-2 Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear - Circuit breakers
IEC: 60947-4 Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear - Contactors and Motor Starters
IEC: 61643 Low-voltage surge protective devices
• The equipment shall also conform to the provisions of Indian Electricity rules and
data sheet and statutory regulations for following order of priority shall governs:
o Statutory regulations
o Data sheets
o This specification
o Codes and standards
Site Data
Maximum ambient Temperature: 47 °C.

Relative humidity: 50 - 60 %.
Wind speed: 5.5-6.0 m/s
Elevation: 183 mtr above MSL
5.0 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS
5.1 FOR PMCC / ESB
1. Rated operational voltage Ue 415 V ±10%

2. Rated insulation voltage Ui 1000 V ac rms
3. Rated frequency 50 Hz (+3%, -5%)
Page 5 of 45
RAJASTHAN
4. Rated Normal Current Refer SLD

5. Temperature rise The maximum value of temperature shall be as per Table-2
and Table-3 of IEC 60947-1 at the maximum specified ambient
air temperature
6. Rated short time withstand current 50 kA rms
7. Rated duration of short time 1 Sec
withstand current
8. Rated impulse (1.2 / 50 µs) withstand 6 kV peak (as per IEC 60947-1 Table H.1)
voltage
9. Control voltage for Breaker Module Contactor Module
i. 110 Vdc/240 Vac (85% - 240 Vac ±10%
110%)
ii. Max short circuit current
of 50 kA
10. Service supply for heating, lighting 240 Vac ±10%, 50 Hz (+3%, -5%)
and power sockets
11. System neutral earthing Effectively earthed
12. Number of phases Three-phase + Neutral
13. Paint shade RAL 7032 for complete panel
6.0 SWITCHGEAR DESIGN CRITERIA
6.1 FOR PMCC, ESB, MLDB, EMLDB & MPDB
1. Service Indoor
2. Type Metal enclosed, fully compartmentalized
3. Mounting Floor (Free standing)
4. Connections Cable entry – Bottom, Bus duct entry – Top
5. Configuration Single front
6. Panel height Preferably <= 2500 mm
7. Working height from ground >= 300 mm and <= 1950 mm
8. Enclosure degree of protection IP 42
9. Enclosure Material CRCA sheets
10. Enclosure Sheet Thickness i. Minimum 2.0 mm for load bearing members
ii. Minimum 1.6 mm for doors and covers
iii. Minimum 3.25 mm for integral base frame
11. Compartmental design i. Separate compartments for Bus bar, Circuit Breaker,
MCCB, cables, PT, LV instruments and relays
ii. The design shall be such that the failure in one
compartment does not affect the adjacent
compartments.
iii. Horizontal wire way shall be provided extending the
Page 6 of 45
RAJASTHAN
entire length at the top of each panel for inter-panel

wiring
iv. Only one ACB permitted in each vertical section
12. Doors and Covers i. Bolted covers for bus bar chamber and cable chamber
(preferably with captive screws)
ii. Hinged door for cable alley
iii. Hinged door for circuit breaker compartment
iv. Non-deteriorating neoprene gaskets shall be provided for
the doors and removable covers.
13. Dummy panels Dummy panels, if required, will have similar construction as
the main panels and shall be flushed at the front with
adjacent panels
14. Short circuit withstand i. All bus bars and bus connections shall be supported and
braced to withstand the stresses due to maximum short
circuit current and also to take care of any thermal
expansion
ii. The offered design should have been type tested for the
Rated short time withstand current and Rated duration
mentioned in Technical parameters
15. Internal Arc Type of Panel offered, along with its doors and covers should
have preferably been type tested for an internal arc test
according to IEC 61641
16. Neutral bus bar Shall be sized not less than half of phase bus bar
17. 110 V dc /240Vac Single point 110V dc /240 Vac supply shall be provided.
Further distribution shall be in bidder scope.
18. Power Cable Termination i. Suitable for XLPE insulated, armored, PVC sheathed cable
with stranded aluminum conductor
ii. Size of cable shall be finalized by purchaser during
detailed engineering and design shall be adequate
iii. Cable termination height ≥ 650 mm for circuit breaker
panel
19. Breaker / draw-out module i. Distinct Service, Test and Isolated positions
ii. Same position of Test and Isolated is also acceptable if it
is the manufacturer’s standard
iii. It shall be possible to lock the circuit breaker at Isolated
position
iv. It shall be possible to shut the door with the breaker in
Isolated position
v. Feeder modules shall be of fixed type
20. Position / cell switch, one each for As per scheme requirement with minimum 2 NO + 2 NC
TEST and SERVICE position contacts for TEST and SERVICE position of circuit breaker
21. Automatic safety shutters i. Lockable shutters to fully cover live parts when the
breaker is withdrawn to TEST
ii. Labels to be provided for bus side and cable side shutters
Page 7 of 45
RAJASTHAN
iii. Label on shutters of incomers “Isolate elsewhere before

earthing”
22. Mechanical safety interlocks i. When breaker is in closed It shall not be possible to rack
position in or rack out the breaker
ii. When the breaker is in It shall not be possible to
Service position open the breaker
compartment door
23. Local operation Closing of breaker / contactor from switchgear shall be
possible only under Test condition
24. Equipment mounting in Auxiliary i. Relays, meters, Control switches, Selector switches and
compartment indicating lamps shall be flush mounted on the front of
the cubicle. They shall have touch proof terminals
ii. Auxiliary relays, Supply isolation switches, cubicle lamp
and spring charging motor circuit shall be located inside
the compartment
25. Accessibility All equipment mounted inside the panels shall be so located
that their terminals and adjustments are readily accessible
for inspection or maintenance
26. Schemes Detailed requirements shall be intimated later to the
successful bidder, who shall develop and furnish the schemes
for approval
27. Ratings Shall be as per SLD
28. Feeder selection Shall be as per SLD
29. Cable alley i. Full height vertical cable alley of minimum 300mm width
shall be provided for power and control cables
ii. Shrouding arrangement shall be provided over the cable
terminations
iii. Insulating barriers will be furnished to isolate all main,
vertical or horizontal bus bar sections from the cable
entrance and wiring compartments
30. Spare feeder i. 20% spare outgoing feeders for each type and rating,
subject to minimum one number
ii. The spare feeder shall be fully equipped
31. Busbar and bus coupler sizing Shall be sized for continuous in-panel current rating equal to
incomer rating
32. Feeder sizing i. Continuous in-panel rating of feeders and their associated
electrical equipment’s shall be their actual rating plus
10% margin, rounded off to the next higher standard
rating
ii. All motor feeders shall be continuously rated to their
name plate rating
33. Minimum clearance in air i. 25 mm between poles and between pole and earth for the
entire run of horizontal and vertical bus bars
ii. 10 mm between two live parts, a live part and an earthed
Page 8 of 45
RAJASTHAN
part for all other components

iii. 10 mm for isolating distance for circuit breakers and
modules in TEST position
34. Control transformer i. Minimum 160 VA control transformer shall be provided for
each bus section for motor control circuit voltage and
each transformer shall be sized for entire switchboard.
For PMCC / MCC having two bus sections and coupled by a
bus coupler shall have an auto changeover scheme for the
control transformer.
35. Future Expansion i. PMCC, MCC, MLDB & MPDB shall be expandable from both
ends
7.0 CONSTRUCTION
7.1 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
1. Type Air break with stored energy, single break, horizontal

isolation and horizontal draw-out type
2. Number of poles For incomers and bus couplers Four-pole
of PMCC /ESB
For all other outgoing feeders Three pole and TPN
(to Motors or to Line)
3. Rated Current As per SLD
4. Rated Short Circuit Breaking Current 50 kA rms
5. Rated Short Circuit Making Current 105 KA peak
6. Auxiliary Voltage i. Closing 110 V DC /240 VAC (85% -
110%)
ii. Tripping 110 V DC /240 VAC(70% -
110%)
iii. Spring Charging 240 V AC (85% - 110%)
7. Operating Mechanism i. Automatic motor wound Spring charging mechanism, with
manual charging facility
ii. Trip-free feature
iii. One O-CO operation after failure of charging motor
iv. Spring-charged limit switch shall have minimum 4 NO + 4
NC contacts
8. Other provisions i. An emergency manual trip
ii. Mechanical ON-OFF, indication
iii. Operation counter
iv. Spring charged / discharged indicator
v. Electrical and Mechanical anti-pumping feature
9. Auxiliary switch, mounted on the As per scheme requirement with minimum 6 NO + 6 NC
Page 9 of 45
RAJASTHAN
breaker trolley contacts

10. Auxiliary switch mounted on the i. Operated mechanically by the breaker operating
stationary portion of the switchgear mechanism
ii. Alternatively, electrically reset type latching relay may
be used for the purpose
iii. As per scheme requirement with minimum 6 NO + 6 NC
contacts
11. Switches i. Auxiliary / limit switches shall be field convertible from
NO to NC and vice-versa
ii. Contacts shall be silver surfaced with conventional
enclosed thermal current of 10 A
12. Inter-changeability CBs of identical rating shall be physically and electrically
interchangeable
13. Remote Start / stop Provision for remote start and stop shall be provided
7.2 CONTACTOR
1. Type Mechanically latched, triple pole, air break type with non-
bouncing silver / silver alloy contacts
2. Rated Duty Class-3
3. Utilization Category according to IEC i. AC3 for unidirectional motors
60947-4-1; Table-1 ii. AC4 for reversible motors
4. Rated operational current (Ie) Refer SLD
5. According to IEC 60947-4-1 Table-7 AC3 AC4
Making capacity 10 x Ie 12 x Ie
Breaking capacity 8 x Ie 10 x Ie
6. Number auxiliary contact 4 NO + 4 NC
7. Auxiliary Contact rating 10 Amp at 240 V AC and 2 A for 110 v dc
8. Permissible voltage Capable of pull-in at 85% of rated voltage and shall not drop
out at 70% of rated voltage or greater
9. Interlocking provision Contactors for forward and reverse direction of reversible
drives shall preferably be mechanically interlocked
10. Accessibility Both fixed and moving contacts shall be accessible for
inspection or replacement without disturbing the terminal
wiring
7.3 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
1. Type Three elements positive acting, ambient temperature
Page 10 of 45
RAJASTHAN
compensated with adjustable settings.

2. Single phase preventer Shall be provided as and inbuilt feature of thermal overload.
3. Resetting Manual reset type with one changeover contact. Resetting of
relays shall be possible with compartment door closed.
4. CT provisions i. Relays may be direct acting or CT operated, depending on
current rating
7.4 BUS AND BUS TAPS
1. Material i. High conductivity electrolytic grade aluminium for ratings

above 100 A and ≤100 A shall be electrolytic grade copper
2. Bus bar i. Size shall be maintained for the length of the switchgear
ii. Bus bars and conductors in feeder compartments shall be
colour coded with heat resistant colour tapes
iii. Bus shall be corona-free, at rated voltage
3. Continuous current rating of Vertical i. Vertical Bus bars in ACB panels shall be sized equal to the
bus bar / dropper rating of circuit breaker
ii. For non-ACB panels, uniform cross section and rating shall
be used in each vertical section
4. Bus connections i. Shall be silver plated. Adequate contact pressure shall be
ensured
ii. Bimetallic connectors shall be provided, as necessary
iii. Length of overlap shall be more than the width of Busbar
iv. Approved contact grease shall be used at joints
v. Only zinc passivated, or cadmium plated high tensile
strength steel bolts, nuts and washers shall be used for all
busbar joints and supports.
5. Insulation i. Bus bar shall be provided with Black colour PVC insulating
heat shrinkable sleeves rated for maximum operating
voltage
ii. Joint shall be provided with Insulating shroud
6. Bus insulator Non-hygroscopic, Flame retardant, Track resistant type with
high creepage surface (25 mm/kV), epoxy resin insulators
7. Phase sequence shall be RYB i. Left to Right, when viewing from Front
ii. Top to bottom
iii. Front to rear
8. Auxiliary Busbar chamber i. Auxiliary Busbar chamber shall be completely segregated
from main horizontal and vertical Busbar compartment.
ii. AC / DC Control bus with Aluminium / Copper Busbar of
adequate size shall be located in Auxiliary Busbar
chamber
9. Neutral link Bolted disconnecting links shall be provided for all incoming
and outgoing feeders for isolation of neutral, if necessary
Page 11 of 45
RAJASTHAN
7.5 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
1. Type Cast-resin type, Class-E insulation, rated for 120% current

continuous
2. CT parameters Shall be as per SLD
3. Secondary current Shall be 1 Amp
4. Burden Bidder shall calculate the required burden and indicate the
same in the bid. Burden shall not be less than 10 VA
5. ISF For metering CTs, ISF shall be coordinated with connected
devices as specified under the section: Meters / Transducers
6. Accuracy class i. General protection Class 5P10
ii. General metering Class 1.0
7. Secondary connections All S1 / S2 to be brought out to terminal blocks
7.6 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
1. Type Single phase, Cast-resin, independent draw out type, Class-E

insulation
2. VT parameters i. Shall be as per SLD
ii. Bidder shall calculate the required burden and indicate
the same in the bid. Burden shall not be less than 50 VA
3. Over voltage factor i. 1.9 for 30 seconds
4. Protection i. Primary wdg protected by current limiting fuses
ii. Secondary winding fuses, sized to prevent overload shall
be installed in all ungrounded secondary leads.
7.7 CONTROL TRANSFORMER
1. Type Dry type, Air cooled, class F insulated, vacuum impregnated,

Dyn11
2. Make i. Epoxy Cast transformer shall be preferred
ii. It shall be free from hum and rigidly mounted
3. Rating i. The rating of control transformer shall be twice the hold
on VA of all contactors / relays or 160 VA, whichever is
higher
4. Control Supply i. Control Supply shall be provided with 2 x 100% 415 / 110
V control transformers with 10% design margin for PMCC
/ESB.
ii. In case of failure of one control transformer, another
shall start feeding entire load with the help of suitable
Page 12 of 45
RAJASTHAN
auto changeover arrangement.

iii. Sufficient contact shall be made available for remote AC
fail alarm / annunciation
7.8 RELAY
1. Type Multifunction, Numerical, Drawout type

2. Voltage, Current rating 240 V AC secondary voltage and 1Amp secondary current
3. Measurement Continuous measurement of parameters as specified in SLD
4. Monitoring i. Self-diagnosis and alarm, PT fuse fail monitoring
ii. Trip circuit monitoring (including pre-close)
5. Recording Disturbance record, Sequence-of-event record with time
stamping and at least 1 mS resolution
6. Data storage Relevant data including Setting parameters, Disturbance
records and Sequence-of-event records shall be stored in non
volatile memory / backed up by battery
7. Front panel user interface i. Large LCD display and Keypad
ii. A minimum of 6 LEDs shall be provided and shall be freely
programmable
8. Remote communication i. Relay shall have a RS-485 port for serial communication
with protocol to be approved by purchaser after order
9. Programming All functions and settings including protection, automation,
communication, LEDs and binary inputs and outputs shall be
programmable / modifiable from front panel user interface,
from local Laptop, as well as from Remote
10. Setting parameters Multiple setting group, password protection
11. IED logic Logic function of the IED may be used as required. The logic
shall be subject to purchaser’s approval
12. Binary input and outputs i. Input and Output shall be freely programmable, and shall
be optically isolated. Outputs shall be self-reset
ii. Relay contacts shall be rated to directly operate the close
coil and trip coil of the switching device
iii. Quantity and rating shall be as per scheme requirement
13. Contact rating i. The contacts shall be rated as per scheme requirement,
subject to the minimum stated below
ii. Maximum system voltage 110 Vdc
iii. Current carrying capacity 5 Adc continuous, 30 Adc for
0.2 sec
14. Relay configuration IEDs shall be factory-configured to meet the requirements of
protection and interlock schemes
15. Relay characteristics Integrated protection, with Multiple characteristics like IDMT,
DMT, instantaneous with compatible choices of time delays
and multiple settings for multiple functions like over current,
Page 13 of 45
RAJASTHAN
earth fault etc

16. Time synchronisation i. The IED shall be time synchronized
ii. Bidder shall supply all other necessary hardware
17. Co-ordination The Bidder shall coordinate all relays to suit the requirements
of protection and interlock. Overload and short circuit
tripping of the circuit breakers shall be fully co coordinated
with upstream and downstream breakers / fuses / motor
starters to provide satisfactory discrimination
18. Auxiliary Voltage 110 V DC (70% - 110%)
19. Numerical Motor protection relays All motors rated ≥75 KW shall be provided with
microprocessor based numerical motor protection relays. The
relay used for motor protection shall have following minimum
built-in protection but not limited to;
i. Thermal overload
ii. Over current
iii. Under voltage
iv. locked rotor
v. Thermister
vi. Earth fault, Phase fault
vii. Negative sequence unbalance
Selection of component for motor starters shall comply with

type-II coordination as per IS-13947 / IEC-60947.
7.9 AUXILIARY RELAYS AND TIMERS
1. Type i. Auxiliary relays shall be Air-break, electromagnetic type

ii. Timers shall be solid-state or electronic
Maximum system voltage 110 Vdc

3. Contacts i. Silver plated / silver cadmium oxide faced
ii. Quantity shall be as per scheme requirement
4. Contact latching i. Latched-type, hand-reset auxiliary relays shall be
provided for Transformer mechanical trip and alarm
functions
ii. Latched-type electrically reset (bi-stable) auxiliary relays
shall be provided for CB contact multiplication functions
iii. Unlatched auxiliary relays shall be provided for other
auxiliary functions
5. Status indication Operation-indicator flags or LEDs
Page 14 of 45
RAJASTHAN
7.10 LOCKOUT RELAYS
1. Type Latched type, high speed relay for tripping duty (of circuit
breakers)
2. Coil High burden type
3. Operation indicator Mechanical flag, with hand reset
ii. Maximum system voltage 110 v dc
Current carrying capacity 5A DC continuous, 30A DC for 0.2

sec
7.11 TRIP COIL SUPERVISION RELAYS
1. Type i. Very low burden type

ii. Continuous pre and post close supervision of trip circuit
2. Operation indicator Flag or LED
ii. Maximum system voltage 110 vdc
iii. Current carrying capacity 5 Adc continuous, 30 Adc for
0.2 sec
7.12 METER / TRANSDUCERS
1. Energy meters i. All the meters shall be provided as per SLD

ii. Shall be multifunction, digital type, 3 P4W, 1 Amp, 110 V
iii. Accuracy class 1.0
iv. Display A, V, pF, kW, kVAR, kVA
v. Record and display kWh, kVARh, Power Down Time, Date
and Time, Tamper Events and peak kVA (including Phase-
wise kW, kVAR and V)
vi. Programmable CT / PT ratios
vii. Shall have data storage capacity for at least 35 days in a
non-volatile memory
viii. Energy meter shall be powered by respective PT supply
Page 15 of 45
RAJASTHAN
ix. Energy meter shall have a facility to download the

parameters through a meter-reading-instrument
2. Transducer i. Shall be of low burden type having linear 4-20 mA DC
galvanically isolated output rated for connected burden
of 750 Ohm
ii. It shall be dual channel type
iii. Accuracy 1%
iv. Rated for operation on 110V secondary voltage and 1 A
secondary current
3. Ammeter i. Flush mounted, 96 x 96 mm size, with 90° scale, anti-
glare glass
ii. Each meter shall have zero adjuster on the front
iii. Taut band, moving iron type
iv. Accuracy class 1.0
v. Motor ammeter shall have extended suppressed end-scale
range to indicate starting current (6-8 times full load)
vi. Even though microprocessor based relays have built-in
metering facility, the incomer feeders shall be provided
with analogue type ammeter / voltmeter as per the
requirement mentioned in SLD.
vii. Separate analogue meters shall be provided, if shown in
the single line diagram.
viii. Ammeters if required for motor feeders shall be
intimated during detail engg.
4. Voltmeter / Double Voltmeter i. Flush mounted, 96 x 96 mm size, with 90° scale, anti-
glare glass
ii. Each meter shall have zero adjuster on the front
iii. Accuracy class 1.0
5. Double Frequency Meter i. Flush mounted, 96 x 96 mm size, anti-glare glass
ii. Display: Vibrating reeds (2x13 nos) or LED type
iii. Nominal voltage 110Vac
iv. Measuring range shall be 2x 45Hz – 55Hz
v. Accuracy class 1.0
6. Power factor meter Power factor meters shall operate on a VT secondary voltage
of 110 V. The CT secondary current shall be as shown on the
relevant drawings. The standard range shall be 0.5 lead – 1.0
– 0.5 lag.
7. ISF coordination The offered meters / Transducers / Energy meters shall be
capable of withstanding a secondary current corresponding to
the ISF of the Metering CT, for the specified Rated duration of
short circuit
Page 16 of 45
RAJASTHAN
7.13 SWITCH DISCONNECTOR (IF APPLICABLE)
1. Type i. Triple / double pole, air break type, double break per
pole
ii. Motor duty switch disconnector shall be capable of safely
making and breaking the locked rotor current of the
associated motor circuit
2. Insulation level 2.5 kV (rms)
3. Through fault current Capable of withstanding the let-through fault current of back-
up fuses or circuit breakers
4. Mechanism i. Quick-make, quick-break mechanism operated by a
suitable external handle, complete with position indicator
ii. Shaft of the operating handle shall be fully insulated
5. Auxiliary contact 1 NO + 1 NC
6. Utilization category i. Power feeder AC22A
ii. Motor feeder AC23A
7. Mechanical safety Interlocks i. Provision of padlocking Provided in ON and OFF
position.
ii. Compartment door Can-not be opened unless
opening switch is in ‘OFF’ position.
Can be defeated also
iii. Castle key interlock Two out of three logic for
incomer / bus coupler
applications
7.14 MCCB
1. Type As per SLD

2. Number of Poles
3. Rated Current
5. Rated Short Circuit Making Current 125 KA peak
6. Operating Mechanism i. Trip-free feature
ii. Quick make / break
7. Other provisions ON-OFF and TRIP indications
8. Suitability for isolation Positive isolation
9. Utilization Category i. Power feeder AC22A
ii. Motor feeder AC23A
10. Protection Type i. Overload protection
ii. Short-circuit protection
iii. Earth fault
Page 17 of 45
RAJASTHAN
7.15 MCB
1. Application Shall be used only in Lighting circuits, downstream of lighting

transformer
2. Type As per SLD
3. Number of Poles
4. Rated Current
6. Operating Mechanism i. Trip-free feature
ii. Quick make / break
7. Protection Type i. Overload protection
ii. Short-circuit protection
7.16 LAMPS, SWITCHES, PUSHBUTTONS AND FUSES
1. Lamps i. Shall be clustered type LED module pilot lights in

thermoplastic enclosure with polycarbonate lens and
diffuser
ii. LED shall be protected by in-built fuse with surge
suppressor and leakage voltage glow protection
iii. Lamp and lens shall be replaceable from front
2. Local Remote switch Shall be lockable stay-put type with pistol grid handle and key
interlock
3. TNC switch Shall be multistage, spring return to normal, with lost motion
device, pistol grip handle
4. Meter selector switch i. It shall be four position, maintained contact and stay put
type, with knob handle
ii. Ammeter selector switches shall have make before break
contacts, to prevent open circuiting of CT secondary
5. Switch details Dust protected, heavy duty, switchboard type, complete with
escutcheon plate
6. Push button i. Shall be heavy duty, shrouded
ii. Push to actuate type with coloured button and inscription
plate
iii. 2 NO + 2 NC contacts
iv. Emergency STOP push buttons shall have mushroom head
actuator with press to latch and key to release feature.
Other push buttons shall be of spring-return-to-normal
type
v. Colour Shade for Push buttons shall be as below:
a. Start / Close: Green

b. Reset / test – Yellow / Black / White
Page 18 of 45
RAJASTHAN
c. Stop / Emergency – Red

7. Contact details i. Contacts shall be silver surfaced with conventional
enclosed thermal current of 10A
ii. Utilization category AC15, 3A rated operational current at
240Vac
8. Fuses for Control / PT circuits i. Shall be HRC, indicating type and complete with fuse
bases
ii. Minimum interrupting capacity of fuse shall be equal to
the maximum short circuit current
iii. Control fuses shall be sized to have selective clearance
between main and sub-circuit
iv. PT fuses shall be sized to prevent overload and shall be
installed in all unearthed secondary leads
v. Fuse rating and designation shall be marked on the base
and fuse carrier
vi. Fuses shall be suitably located to permit easy
replacement while the switchgear is energized
vii. MCBs shall not be used
9. Fuse for Motor feeder i. Fuse characteristics and ratings shall be chosen to ride
over starting period without blowing
ii. Fuse selection shall be based on Type “2” co-ordination
as per IEC 60947-4-1
7.17 CONTROL AND INDICATION
1. Control i. All 415V drives and breaker-operated incomers, bus

couplers and feeders shall be operable from remote PLC /
MCC / PMCC
ii. Interfacing with remote commands shall be achieved
through interposing relays
2. Interposing Relay i. 24 Vdc for PLC control
ii. Shall be mounted in the respective PMCC/MCC
3. Indicating Lamps As per SLD
4. Colour Shade ON indicating lamp: Red
OFF indicating lamp: Green
TRIP indicating lamp: Amber
PHASE indicating lamp: Red, Yellow, and Blue
Spring Charged: Blue
DC Control supply fail: Blue
Page 19 of 45
RAJASTHAN
7.18 WIRING OF AUXILIARY AND CONTROL CIRCUITS
1. Wire i. Flexible, 650 V grade, PVC insulated, with stranded

copper conductors
ii. 2.5 mm² for CT circuits
iii. 1.5 mm² for control and voltage circuits
iv. 6 mm² Bus wire for 415 Vac Service power
v. 4 mm² Bus wire for 110 Vdc, 110 Vac and 240 Vac
2. Colour coding i. DC wiring shall be grey
ii. CT / PT wires shall be colour coded, as per phase
iii. Earth wires shall be Green and Neutral wires shall be
Black
3. Termination and identification i. Each wire shall be identified, at both ends, with
interlocking type permanent markers bearing wire
numbers (one additional red colour ferrule for all wires in
trip circuit)
ii. Wire termination shall be made with crimping type
connectors with insulating sleeves. Wires shall not be
spliced between terminals
iii. Each group shall be adequately supported along its run to
prevent sagging or strain on the termination
iv. Adhesive type support are not accepted
v. No of wires per terminal shall be limited to two (2)
4. Spare contacts All spare contacts of relays, timers, auxiliary switches shall
be wired up to the terminal block
5. Raceway i. Separate raceways shall be provided for all factory and
field wiring
ii. Raceways for factory wiring shall be so sized so that the
fill does not exceed 30%. Raceways for field wiring shall
be twice as large
iii. Raceways shall be plastic wiring duct with covers
6. Inter panel wiring Wires with ferrule to be terminated in the adjacent shipping
section will be supplied with one end terminated and the
other end bunched and coiled.
7.19 TERMINAL BLOCK
1. Terminal block i. Shall be segregated for CT, PT, Control and for AC, DC
Power circuits
ii. Terminal blocks shall be located to allow easy access
iii. Wiring shall be so arranged that individual wires of an
external cable can be connected to consecutive terminals
iv. 650 V grade, with insulating cover complete with
Page 20 of 45
RAJASTHAN
mounting channel, binding screws and washers

v. Marking strip for circuit identification shall be provided
for terminating the panel wiring
vi. TBs shall be stud type for all CT, PT and 110 V dc control
circuits
2. Terminals for CT secondary leads Shall have provision for shorting and earthing
3. Control Terminals Suitable for 2 nos. 2.5 mm2 stranded copper conductor
4. Power terminals (AC and DC Sources) Suitable for one 10 mm2 stranded aluminium conductor
5. Spare terminals Equal to 20% of active terminals shall be provided for each
Terminal Block
6. TB shrouds and separators Moulded non- inflammable plastic material
7. AC / DC terminals block Separate terminal blocks shall be used for AC / DC wiring
termination
8. Clearance i. Between 2 rows of Terminal Box 100 mm
ii. With cable gland plate 250 mm
iii. Between AC / DC set of Terminal Box 100 mm
7.20 CABLE TERMINATION
1. Cable entry As specified in Design criteria

2. Power cable details i. Cable size will be finalized during detailed engineering
3. Gland plate and supports i. Removable, 3 mm thick CRCA sheet steel for multi core
cables
ii. Removable, 5 mm thick Aluminium for single core cables
4. Nut bolt and washer Cadmium plated Nut bolt and washer set for terminal bus bars
in cable compartment of each panel
7.21 BUS DUCT TERMINATION
1. Rating All connecting bus work shall have the same continuous rating
as associated PMCC bus and shall be fully braced for the LV
system short circuit current
2. Bus duct entry As specified in Design criteria
3. Bus duct details Will be finalized during detailed engineering
4. Provision of earth connection to the i. Switchgear vendor shall extend the switchgear earth bus
bus duct up to the bus duct terminal flange, for connection to the
bus duct earth bus
ii. The extended earth bus shall be properly supported
Page 21 of 45
RAJASTHAN
7.22 EQUIPMENT EARTHING
1. Earth bus i. Shall extend for the full length of the switchgear
ii. Shall also be extended to each bus duct terminal flange,
for connection to the bus duct earth bus
iii. Rated to carry Rated short circuit withstand current for
rated duration of short circuit
iv. Bidder shall submit the sizing calculation
v. Provided with two holes with G.I. bolts and nuts at every
end to receive external earth conductor
2. External earth conductor i. 40 x 5 mm G.I. flat (For all panels)
ii. 8 SWG GI wire (For LPBS)
3. Each stationary unit Shall be connected directly to the earth bus
4. Frame of each CB and draw out Shall be earthed through heavy multiple contacts at all times
modules
5. Earth connection of meters / relays With two distinct connections
6. Hinged door Earthed through flexible insulated copper braid
7. CT and PT neutral Earthed at one place at the terminal blocks through links so
that earth of one circuit may be removed without disturbing
other.
7.23 AC / DC POWER SUPPLY
1. AC Service supply 240 V AC

2. AC Control supply 240 V AC
3. DC Control supply 110 V DC
7.24 NAMEPLATE AND WARNING BOARDS
1. Location of nameplates i. Switchgear nameplate at the front

ii. Feeder nameplate at the front and rear. This is to be
fixed on the frame and not on the removable covers
iii. Instruments and devices nameplate at the front and rear
2. Directory plate for LDB i. To be fixed on inside of the front cover
ii. It shall contain details of the Lighting Panels being fed
from the Distribution Board including their designation,
location, loading etc
iii. The details of the same shall be given during detailed
engineering
iv. It shall be subject to the purchaser’s approval
3. Warning symbol for dangerous On shutters and removable covers
voltages as per IS 8923
Page 22 of 45
RAJASTHAN
4. Danger Sign Board as per IS 2551 On all four sides of switchgear

5. Material, text and size Anodized aluminium, Subject to approval during detailed
engineering
6. Engraving With white letters on black background
7.25 MIMIC DIAGRAM
1. Location Front face of the panel

2. Mimic Buses Shall be at least 3 mm thick and 10 mm in width
3. Status indication Status of circuit breakers shall be indicated with Red / Green
/ Amber Indication lamps
4. Mimic shade i. For 415 V level – Dark violet shade 796 of IS 5
7.26 SPACE HEATERS, POWER SOCKET AND ILLUMINATION
1. Panel space heater i. Non-exposed type, thermostat controlled

ii. To be provided to each cubicle, CB chamber and cable
alley
iii. Shall maintain the enclosure at a temperature above the
dew point
iv. Shall be mounted on insulator base
2. Motor space heater supply i. 240 V AC
ii. Wired-up for feeding the motor space heater through
auxiliary contactor when the breaker / main Contactor is
off or isolated.
3. Power socket and Lighting Shall be provided in Auxiliary compartment and cable alley (3
pin plug socket preferred)
7.27 PAINTING AND TROPICAL PROTECTION
1. Surface preparation Surface shall be sand blasted, pickled and ground as required
to produce a smooth, clean surface free of scale, grease and
rust
2. Painting The surface shall be given a phosphate coating followed by 2
coats of high-quality primer. The coating shall be done
electro-statically followed by stoving
3. Tropical protection Shall have fungus protection, involving special treatment of
insulation and metal against fungus, insects and corrosion
4. Suitability i. Shall withstand heat and weather conditions.
ii. Shall not scale - off or crinkle or get removed by abrasion
due to normal handling
Page 23 of 45
RAJASTHAN
7.28 PACKING AND SHIPPING
1. Packing Protection Protection against corrosion, dampness, heavy rains,

breakage and vibration
2. Packing for accessories and spares Robust wooden non-returnable packing case
3. Packing Identification Label on each i. Individual serial number
case with details as listed ii. PO number (along with SAP item code, if any) and date
iii. Equipment Tag no. (if any)
iv. Manufacturer / Supplier’s name and address
v. Description and Quantity
vi. Month and year of Manufacturing
vii. Case measurements
viii. Gross and net weights in kilograms
ix. All necessary slinging and stacking instructions
4. Improper packing The seller shall be responsible for all transit damage due to
improper packing
5. Shipping Limitations Any transport limitations such as weights, dimensions, road
culverts, overhead lines, free access etc. from the
manufacturing plant to the project site shall be informed to
the purchaser well in advance.
6. Lifting lugs 4 nos. of lifting lugs shall be provided for each shipping
section
7. Shipping length Shall be limited to 2700 mm
8.0 MOTOR STARTER
Motor starters shall generally be Direct on line (DOL) starter for motor rating up to
and including 18.5KW, Soft starter for motor rating 22kw to 45 kw and VFD for motor
ratings above 45KW unless specifically indicated otherwise in the data sheets or SLD.
Each motor starter unit shall be contained within a separate compartment.
Starters shall as a minimum comprise the following:
• MCCB, thermal overload relay and air break contactors coordinated in accordance
with IEC 60947 Type 2 for motors up to 55 kW. Alternatively, MCP and air break
contactor coordinated in accordance with IEC 60947 type 2 can be offered. The
motor circuit protectors (MCP) shall be with interrupting capacity as indicated in
the Data Sheets and adjustable overcurrent magnetic trips. The MCP trip
Page 24 of 45
RAJASTHAN
characteristics will be suitable for high efficiency (Efficiency class IE2 as per IEC),
high inrush motors.
• Stop (stay put type), test start and manual reset push buttons, with pilot lights
• and wire terminal blocks outside each door. Contactors will be magnetically
operated and powered from control transformer.
• At least 2 NO and 2 NC, spare auxiliary contacts, rated 10 A at 240V AC, wired to
an isolated section of the starter's terminal block.
• The following are the minimum control and indication devices requirements for
each starter:
o One (1) red STOP pushbutton.

o LOCAL / REMOTE mode will be selected from LCS.
o One (1) pilot light (Green) to indicate motor RUN status.
o One (1) pilot light (Red) to indicate the STOP status.
o One (1) pilot light (Amber) to indicate the FAULT status.
• In addition, the fixed part of the motor starter compartments will have:
o Three (3) Protection Class current transformers

o One (1) Metering Class current transformer on Phase B
o One (1) Core Balance current transformer (ground fault sensor) Metering &
Protection CT are combined connected.
• If the unit is equipped with ground fault protection, provide LED amber pilot light
indicating “ground fault” condition.
8.1 SOFT STARTER
The soft starter shall apply a slowly increasing voltage to the motor, providing smooth acceleration whilst
drawing the minimum necessary starting current.
8.1.1 A microprocessor-based circuit shall control the starter, providing stable & repeatable performance in
both 3 wire and 6 wire (inside delta) motor connections, with and full control, status and diagnostic
information clearly displayed using LED indicators.
8.1.2 In each phase the power module shall comprise two back-to-back SCRs with integral semiconductor
fuses incorporated onto the input busbar. Phase modules shall be interchangeable between phases
within the starter, and between starters of the same rating without the need for calibration or adjustment.
The low voltage control circuitry shall be shall be isolated from the SCR assembly, and employ pulse
transformers to carry the SCR firing signals. Metal Oxide Varistors and RC snubber networks shall be
used to provide transient and false firing protection.
Page 25 of 45
RAJASTHAN
8.1.3 The soft starter shall provide the following (but not limited to) range of adjustments as applicable:
- Ramp up time: 1-60s
- Ramp down time: 1-120s
- Pump Control Ramp adjustable pump stop profile
- Current Limit (Starting): 200-450% In
- Pulse start: 450% current for 0.5-2.0s
- Motor FLC: 50-100% of starter FLC
8.1.4 The soft starter shall protect against the following (but not limited to) as applicable:
- Phase imbalance
- Phase reversal
- SCR faulty or shorted SCR
- Motor Thermal Overload
- Soft Start thermal overload
- Over voltage
- Under voltage
- Locked Rotor
- Excessive Starts per hour
- Phase loss input / output
- Motor output loss
8.1.5 The soft starter shall provide the following indications (but not limited to) as applicable:
- Line failure
- Phase imbalance
- Over temperature – motor
- Over temperature – Soft Starter
- Shorted Thyristor
- Open Thyristor
- Locked Rotor
- Overload / Underload
- Motor output loss
- Phase imbalance
- Over voltage
Page 26 of 45
RAJASTHAN
- Under voltage
- Excessive Starts
- Phase reversal
8.1.6 L. V. CONTROL
Each starter shall have a separate, completely isolated, front accessible, L.V.
compartment. The L.V. Compartment shall include at least the following components:
1. Soft starter Control Module, with fiber option wires.

2. Selector Switch Local / Remote (for door mounted Start / Stop buttons or Remote
by hard wires)
3. Selector switch Soft Starter / DOL starting (enabling DOL starting in case of a fault
in the soft starter)
4. Three interposing relays for starters’ output relays
5. Holding relay when external Start / Stop push buttons are used.
6. All control components mounted in the L.V. compartment shall be wired to
terminal blocks, which shall be wired to Customer Terminal blocks.
8.1.7 POWER CABLE ENTRY

Cable access shall be from bottom with a minimum of 50 cm empty space for cable
connections.
1. Control wires shall be insulated (FRLS outer sheathed), flexible stranded copper
wire supported and neatly bundled.
2. Control wires shall be isolated from high voltage components (whenever possible)
in the power cell. Each wire shall be marked with wire tube markers, numbered
according to the electrical diagram.
3. Control wire terminations shall be screw-type, copper compression type, Non-
insulated, locking type, fork tongue lugs shall be provided on the current
transformers. Whenever 2 wires are connected to the same terminal, they shall be
crimped together.
4. Customer connection terminal blocks shall be located in the medium voltage
section. Remote control cables shall be from the top or bottom of the structure.
5. Control cable inputs and outputs shall be through removable entry plates on top or
bottom of the structure.
Page 27 of 45
RAJASTHAN
8.1.8CABINET LIGHT
PL-13 watt protected lamp shall lit when opening the LV. door, supplied from a
dedicated miniature C/B. Cabinet Heater (When shown on the drawing)
A 60 W heater with humidity control, supplied from a dedicated miniature C/B.

Exhaust fan (When shown on the drawing)
An exhaust fan, in suitable dimensions, shall be installed on top of LV. cabinet with air
inlet at bottom with filter, supplied from a dedicated miniature C/B.
8.1.9 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF SOFT STARTER

Following tests are to be conducted for the following:
1. IR test for both power and control circuit
2. HV test for both power and control circuit
3. Functional test (with ramp consideration)
4. Visual check of electronic PCBs, control wiring
5. Paint thickness test (Requirements are: for interior: 30-micron epoxy coating by
electrostatic process and for exterior: 50 microns and paint shade is RAL 7032)
Calibration certificated is to be provided for the following protection features of

controller:
1. Motor thermal overload
2. Soft start thermal overload
3. phase imbalance
4. phase reversal
5. over voltage
6. under voltage
7. locked rotor
8. no of starts per hour
Calibration certificate is also required for all indicating instruments.

Accept and reset functions need to be verified with respect to annunciation circuits.
SCR fuse failure indication needs to be checked. Also, Bypass operation of soft starter
to be checked by vendor. Provision for remote and local start and stop to be checked.
Page 28 of 45
RAJASTHAN
8.2 VFD
8.2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
• The system shall be energy efficient, and shall provide very high reliability, high
power factor, low harmonic distortion and vibration / noise. It shall be easy to
install in minimum time and expense and no special tools shall be required for
routine maintenance.
• The system shall be designed to deliver the motor input current & torque for the
complete speed torque characteristics of the load, with input supply voltage
variation of +/- 10% & frequency variation of +/- 1%.
• The VFD shall be capable of producing a variable AC voltage/ frequency output to
provide continuous operation over the normal system 30-100% speed range. The
VFD must be capable of sustained operation at 1/10 speed to facilitate checkout
and maintenance of the driven equipment. As a commissioning and
troubleshooting feature, The VFD power circuit shall be capable of operating
without a motor connected to the VFD output. VFD shall be capable of operating
any standard AC motor of equivalent rating (horsepower and speed) over the
specified speed range.
• The drive system shall be designed to operate in one or more of the following
operating modes:
o Variable torque changing as a function of speed i.e. Speed squared

o Constant torque over a specific speed range
o Constant power over a specific speed range where the torque decreases
when speed increases
• The total harmonic distortion (THD) of the voltage & current at inverter output
shall be as per IEC 61800-4 and same shall be considered in the design of the
motor.
• Harmonic at the supply side of the drive system at PCC (point of common coupling)
shall be restricted within the maximum allowable levels of current and voltage
distortion as per recommendations of the latest edition of IEEE-519.
• The controller output overload capacity shall be 150% of rated current of motor for
one minute for constant torque applications, and 110% of rated current for one
minute for variable torque application at the rated voltage. If the motor load
exceeds the limit, the drive shall automatically reduce the frequency and the
Page 29 of 45
RAJASTHAN
voltage to the motor to guard against overload. If load demands exceed the
current limit for more than 1 minute, the drive shall shut down to prevent
overheating of the motor and damage to the drive.
• VFD output waveform shall be suitable for operating a squirrel cage induction
motor without derating or requiring additional service factor. To ensure that there
are no problems with motor heating. VFD output current waveform, as measured
at the motor, shall be inherently sinusoidal at all speeds, with a total harmonic
current distortion not exceeding 3% referenced to the full load current
fundamental between 10% and 100% speed. VFD’s utilizing output transformer is
not acceptable.
• VFD shall inherently protect motor from high-voltage δv/ δt stress. Independent of
cable length to motor. VFD shall not require nonstandard systems or insulation
ratings above the VFD output voltage rating. The VFD system shall be designed to
produce no standing waves or over voltage conditions based on the cable length of
at least 2000 ft (~600 m). This is typical length which will cover most application
requirements and allow for potential future cable run changes from VFD to motor.
If the VFD requires an output filter to meet this requirement. It shall be an integral
part of the VFD system included within the VFD enclosure.
• Drive shall trip in case the speed exceeds 105% of the maximum operational speed
and / or reduce to 95% of the minimum operational speed for more than 10
seconds.
• Maximum noise level from the drive at 1-meter distance, under rated load with all
normal cooling fans operating shall not exceed 85 dB(A).
8.2.2 CONTROL REQUIREMENT
• The system shall operate on constant v/f supply with required voltage boost
capability in low frequency mode of operation.
• The system shall be suitable for number of starts as per LV motor specification.
• It shall be possible to vary the speed of the drive in either manual or auto mode.
Auto/manual selection shall be from VFD Panel unless otherwise specified.
• With the selector switch in “manual” mode, the operator shall be set the speed
through key pad (mounted on front of the drive panel) or from speed increase /
decrease push button (from the field).
• With the selector switch in “auto” mode, speed of the motor shall be controlled
from 4-20 mA signals, from PLC / SCADA (process control) system. Necessary
equipment required for interfacing with PLC / SCADA shall be provided in the PMCC
Page 30 of 45
RAJASTHAN
Panel
• The required provision for the interface with PLC / SCADA (located at remote
control room) including the details of communication module & data transfer
facility, I/O details shall be furnished. The communication interface shall be via
serial communication link with industry standard open protocol i.e. MODBUS /
Profibus. & same shall be coordinated with the interfacing equipment.
8.2.3 PANEL CONSTRUCTION
8.2.3.1 The Panel shall include suitable isolating device (i.e. Circuit breaker /
MCCB / Switch Fuse) for main supply, contactors, semi conducting power
devices (Diodes / IGBT) modules with protective devices, reactors, filters,
output isolating devices, control circuit, bypass futures, control accessories,
indication & annunciation etc.
8.2.3.2 Main isolating device shall function as a manual disconnect & shall be an
AC thermal magnetic circuit breaker or a fused switch with dual element fuse to
trip automatically on fault currents, as specified in datasheet. Device shall
lockable in the open position and shall have a minimum interrupting capacity as
specified in Data Sheet. Interlock shall be provided between the doors, so that
door cannot be opened unless the breaker / switch are open
8.2.3.3 The drive shall be suitably housed in sheet steel panels and shall be
fabricated with 2 mm thick cold rolled sheet steel. The panel shall be free
standing with degree of protection as IP-42.
8.2.3.4 Bolted undrilled gland plate shall be provided at bottom with double
compression type cable gland. Minimum space for power cable termination shall
be 300 mm.
8.2.3.5 Bus bars shall be electrolytic copper, color coded. All the live parts shall
be sleeved to ensure complete safety to personnel intending to carry out routine
inspection by opening the panel doors. All wires shall be ferrules & terminals
shall be properly numbered, minimum 20% spare terminal shall be provided.
8.2.3.6 Each panel shall be provided with illuminating lamp / 11 W CFL / LED
with switch & fuse.
Page 31 of 45
RAJASTHAN
8.2.3.7 Copper Earth bus of Min. 30 x 6 mm size shall be provided at the

bottom of the panel extending outside the panel on both sides.
8.2.3.8 All control wiring shall be enclosed in plastic channel. Each wiring shall
be identified at both ends by PVC ferrules. Power & Control wiring shall
be IEC approved, XLPE / PVC insulated, and fire retardant, copper conductor
wire.
8.2.3.9 All electronic modules & components shall be accessible from front of
panel only. All panels shall be of same height so as form a uniform line-up,
to give good aesthetic appearance.
8.2.4 EQUIPMENT / COMPONENT SPECIFICATION
8.2.4.1 Converter Transformer (If required)
The converter transformer shall be dry type, the impedance of transformer

with two secondary windings for 12-pulse system shall be selected to ensure
equal load / current sharing between the two secondary windings, the
converters and the motor winding under all operational conditions including
starting and restating. The transformer shall be provided with +/-5% off circuit
taps insteps of +/- 2.5%.
8.2.4.2 Power Converter
The static power converter shall consist of a line side power converter for
operation as a rectifier and a load side power converter for operation as a fully
controlled inverter.
Normally, for all output short circuits, the inverter shall interrupt the current
before any semi-conductor fuse blows. For internal short circuits, semi-
conductor fuse protection shall be provided, and for faults upstream of semi-
conductor fuses, the converter shall be able to withstand a three-phase short
circuit current until interrupted by normal breaker operation.
The current rating of the converter’s semi-conductor components shall not less
Page 32 of 45
RAJASTHAN
than 120% of the normal current flowing through the elements at full load of
the VFD through the whole speed range.
All power diodes shall be silicon type with minimum rating as 2.5 times the
rated operating voltage.
The conversion devices and associated heat sinks shall be assembled such that
individual devices can be replaced without requiring the use of ant special
tools.
All the power transistors, Thyristor and diodes shall be protected with high-
speed semiconductor grade fuse.
8.2.5 DC LINK / AC LINE REACTOR
8.2.5.1 Smoothing reactors for the DC link shall be designed to sufficiently

decouple the rectifier and inverter portion of the converter and to limit fault
currents in the circuit. AC line reactors, if provided as per standard vendor
design, shall be suitable for harmonic suppression and fault current limitation.
8.2.5.2 The reactor shall be dry type, air cooled or fan cooled type located
within the panel. In case of fan cooled type operation of fan cooled type,
operation of fans shall be monitored.
8.2.5.3 Reactor shall be suitable for operation with the non-sinusoidal current
wave shapes and DC components under all operational conditions of the system
without exceeding its temperature limits
8.2.6 OUTPUT FILTER
8.2.6.1 VFD output current waveform shall be inherently sinusoidal at all speeds,
with harmonic limits as per IEEE-519. Output filter capacitors shall be provided
with discharge circuit to ensure that all residual stored charge is reduced to
less than 50V DC within 60 seconds after loss of AC voltage.
8.2.6.2 Output filter shall be an integral part of the VFD system and included
within the VFD enclosure.
Page 33 of 45
RAJASTHAN
8.2.7 PROTECTIVE FEATURES
The system offered shall incorporate adequate protective features, properly

coordinated for the drive control and for motor but not limited to the following:
a. Incoming line surge protection

b. Under / Over voltage protection
c. Phase loss, Phase reversal protection
d. Programmable Overcurrent protection
e. Over frequency / Over current protection
f. Specific motor protection
g. System Earth fault protection
Alarms
The system shall be incorporate protection alarms, required for various fault
conditions, for the drive motor, supply cables, converter transformer, DC reactor and
the converter.
Control
The following controls shall be provided as a part of the Panel:
a. Start / Stop
b. Speed Control (Raiser / Lower)
c. Forward / Reverse
d. Auto / manual mode
e. Local / Remote
f. Emergency Stop
g. Start / Stop for by pass starter
Indication
The following Indication shall be provided as a part of the Panel:
a. Motor Running
b. Motor Stopped
c. VFD System Fault
Page 34 of 45
RAJASTHAN
d. System Ready to Start

e. AC mains ON
f. Motor Over Speed
g. Drive “ON”
h. Motor zero speed
Potential free contacts of items a)-d) shall be wired separately for indications in PLC /
SCADA.
Metering
Digital display of the following parameters shall be as a part of the panel, selectable
by the operator.
a. Input AC Voltage
b. Input AC Frequency
c. Input AC Current
d. Output Voltage
e. Output current VFD/Bypass
f. Output Frequency
g. Motor Speed
h. Motor Energy Meter
Necessary transducer shall be provided with 4-20mA output for indicating motor speed
& motor current in PLC/SCADA.
Annunciations
Potential free contacts shall be provided for following annunciations and shall be
wired up to terminal block for owner’s use for remote monitoring:
a. Rectifier Fuse Failure / Drive Fault

b. Main AC failure
c. Inverter fuse failure / Drive Fault
d. Inverter Overload
e. Inverter High Temperature
f. Motor fail to Start
Page 35 of 45
RAJASTHAN
9.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF PMCC, ESB, MLDB, EMLDB, & MPDB
Following tests shall be conducted
1. Type test certificates shall be provided by vendor from govt approved agency for
following tests:
a. IP
b. Breaking capacity
c. peak current withstand capacity
d. lighting impulse withstand test 1.2/50µs
2. Routine tests for power circuit
a. Interlock testing & functional testing

b. IR value
c. HV test
d. Opening & closing of breaker (1 sec)
e. Bouncing time
f. mV drop test at 100A dc (1 sec)
g. Heat run test (110% of rated current)
3. Routine tests for control circuit
a. IR
b. HV
4. Physical dimension check

5. Paint thickness test
6. Conductivity test for busbar & breaker contacts (certificate to be provided by
vendor)
7. Test certificate for protection relays, CTs, indicating meters, etc. to be submitted
for verification.
8. All interlocks including anti-pumping, breaker, position interlocks, putting on
breaker from test position, etc. shall be carried out.
9. CMRI Certification in case of Flame proof equipments
10. In addition to above, tests shall be followed as per below mentioned standards:
Page 36 of 45
RAJASTHAN
10.0 ROUTINE TEST
10.1 ROUTINE TESTS OF SWITCHGEAR / PANELS
1. The switchgear shall be fully assembled, wired and tested at the factory. Routine
tests shall be performed in accordance with IEC60439-1 and as provided below
2. The switchgear shall be operated under simulated service condition to
demonstrate accuracy of wiring, correctness of control scheme and proper
functioning of the equipment
3. Primary current and voltage shall be applied to all instrument transformers and
verified in all secondary devices like meters and relays
4. Interlocks shall be demonstrated
5. Verification of dimensions and clearances shall be demonstrated
10.2 ROUTINE TESTS OF EQUIPMENT
Routine test shall be carried out on all equipments such as circuit breakers,
contactors, instrument transformers, relays, meters and transducers according to
standards as specified below
1. Routine tests of circuit breakers As per IEC60947-2, clause 8.4

2. Routine tests of Contactors As per IEC60947-4 clause 9.1.3
3. Routine tests of Current transformers As per IEC60044-1 clause 8, 11.5, 12.6, 14.4
4. Routine tests of Voltage transformers As per IEC60044-2 clause 9, 12.4, 13.7
5. Routine tests of relays As per IEC60255
6. Routine tests of transducers Accuracy at 100% of rated connected burden
7. Routine tests of meters As per IEC62053
8. Routine tests of Lighting transformers As per IS11171, clause 13.2
10.3 TYPE TEST
Type tests reports as listed below shall be submitted with the bid, and not be older
than 5 years on the date of submission
1. Assembled switchgear Temperature rise Test As per IEC60439-1, 8.2.1

2. Assembled switchgear Dielectric tests on Main, Auxiliary and As per IEC60439-1, 8.2.2
Control circuits
3. Assembled switchgear Verification of short circuit withstand As per IEC60439-1, 8.2.3
Page 37 of 45
RAJASTHAN
strength
4. Assembled switchgear Test for Internal arc classification As per IEC61641
(preferable)
5. Assembled switchgear Verification of the degree of As per IEC60439-1, 8.2.7
protection
6. Circuit breakers Verification of rated making and As per IEC60947-2, 8.3.2.6
breaking capacities
7. Contactors Verification of rated making and As per IEC60947-4-1, 9.3.3.5
breaking capacities
8. Contactors Coordination with fuse As per IEC60947-4-1, 9.3.4.2
9. Contactors Ability of contactors to withstand As per IEC60947-4-1, 9.3.5
overload current
10.4 TEST WITNESS
1. At least 14 days’ advance notice shall be given to the Purchaser / Owner to enable
them to witness the test, at their discretion
2. All Routine tests on Switchgear will be fully witnessed
3. Routine tests of Equipment shall be witnessed on sample basis (One sample for
each complete bus). Manufacturer shall however conduct tests (at the sub vendor’s
works, if applicable) on all items and submit reports
10.5 TEST REPORTS / CERTIFICATE
1. Routine Tests: Certified reports to be submitted for approval. The equipment shall
be dispatched from works only after the Purchaser’s written approval is received
2. Tests reports shall be furnished for the Type tests, as specified. Otherwise, the
bidder shall get the equipment Type-tested to prove the design at his cost
11.1 PROPOSAL DATA
1. The proposal data sheets annexed to this specification shall be typed in without
ambiguity
2. These pages must be signed by the authorised representative of the Bidder as
verification of the data and submitted along with the bid to form part of the
Bidder’s formal proposal
Page 38 of 45
RAJASTHAN
11.2 DRAWINGS AND ANNEXURES
1. All drawings and annexures appended to this specification shall form a part of this
specification and supplement the requirements specified herein
2. This specification shall be read and construed in conjunction with the drawings and
annexures to determine the scope of work and terminal points
3. The quantities shown on drawings and annexures are tentative for bidding purpose
only.
Any variation arising during detailed engineering stage will be taken into account for
adjustment of contract price based on unit rates quoted in Schedule, Price Schedule
of the bid.
11.3 COMPLETENESS OF SUPPLY
1. It is not the intent to specify completely herein all details of the equipment.
Nevertheless, the equipment shall be complete and operative in all aspects and
shall conform to highest standard of engineering, design and workmanship and be
capable of performing in continuous commercial operation up to the guarantees in
a manner acceptable to the purchaser, who will interpret the meaning of drawings
and specifications and shall be entitled to reject any work or material which in his
judgment is not in full accordance therewith
2. Any material or accessory which may not have been specifically mentioned but
which is necessary or usual for satisfactory and trouble-free operation and
maintenance of the equipment shall be furnished without any extra charge.
3. The bidder shall supply all brand-new equipment and accessories as specified
herein with such modification and alteration as agreed upon in writing after
mutual discussion
11.4 GUARANTEED PERFORMANCE
1. The performance figures quoted in Schedule, Technical Particulars shall be

guaranteed within the tolerance permitted by relevant standards. In case of failure
of the equipment to meet the guarantee, the equipment may be liable for
rejection
Page 39 of 45
RAJASTHAN
11.5 DEVIATION
1. Should the Bidder wish to deviate from this specification in any way, it shall be
clearly mentioned in Schedule, Technical Deviation with reference to the
respective clause of the specification
2. Unless such deviations are recorded as above and submitted with the offer, it will
be taken for granted that the offer is made in conformity with this specification in
all respects
1. Before starting manufacture of any equipment, the bidder shall have to take
approval of the relevant drawings, data sheet and Quality Assurance Plan from
Purchaser in writing
2. Any manufacture done prior to the approval of drawings / data shall be rectified in
accordance with the approved drawings / data by the Bidder at his own cost and
the equipment shall be supplied within the stipulated period
3. The make and type of Numerical Devices shall be subject to approval by the
purchaser. Bought-out items are also subject to approval
11.7 DOCUMENTATION
The bidder may note that the drawings, data and manuals listed herein are minimum
requirement only. The bidder shall ensure that all other necessary write-up,
information, etc. required to fully describe the equipment are to be submitted.
The manual shall clearly indicate in English the installation and connection method.
Check-up, maintenance and calibration method shall also be provided in the manuals.
S. No. Documents to be Submitted With the Bid After award (3 copies each)
(1 copy each) For approval For
reference
1. Type test reports and certificates for the specified ✓
type tests
2. Leaflets on equipment and other accessories ✓
explaining their constructional details, principle of
operation, special features. Components data on all
electrical and control devices being provided,
including electrical rating
Page 40 of 45
RAJASTHAN
3. Typical general arrangement drawing of the ✓ ✓

equipment and foundation plan / Loading including
Breaker Section Plan View Outline-General
Arrangement, Centre of Gravity, Weight, Cable
Opening Size and Locations, Mounting Details, and
Cable Entry Area and Door Swing Requirement
4. Details of protective relay offered for each function, ✓ ✓
including make, type, model number and pamphlet.
Details of Lockout relay, Trip circuit supervision

relay, Synchronizing relay, including make, type,
model number and pamphlet
5. Coordination report for Contactor starter to ✓ ✓
demonstrate proper coordination between fuse/MCCB
and relay
6. Feeder List filled in with Ratings and Quantities ✓ ✓
7. Proposal sheets (Schedules) duly filled in ✓ ✓
8. Bill of material with make / type of all components ✓ ✓
9. CT Magnetizing curve ✓
10. Sizing calculation of Bus bar and Earth bus ✓
11. Short circuit withstand calculation ✓
12. Sizing calculation of CT and PT and also ISF ✓
coordination between CT and connected meters
13. Quality assurance plan ✓
14. Board wise Single Line Diagram ✓
15. Control schematics ✓
16. Component selection chart for motor starters ✓
17. Certified reports of Routine tests, prior to dispatch ✓
18. Final shop Test reports ✓
19. Any other relevant drawings, data and manuals ✓
necessary for satisfactory installation, operation and
maintenance.
20. Wiring diagrams ✓
21. Instruction manuals of Circuit breakers and ✓
Contactors (Erection and Commissioning, Operation
and Maintenance)
22. Instruction manuals of all Relays and Meters ✓
23. Manufacturer’s instruction for transport, storage and ✓
installation including unpacking, lifting, assembly,
mounting and connections prior to dispatch
✓: Applicable
Page 41 of 45
RAJASTHAN
Quantity and Mode of submission / approval are specified in the General Conditions of
Contract.
Bidder may note that the drawings, manuals listed herein are minimum requirements
only. Bidder shall ensure that other necessary write-ups, curves and information
required to fully describe the equipment are submitted along with this bid.
Drawing submission shall be within 1 month from kick off meeting (KOM). Bidder shall
not start manufacturing unless manufacturing clearance is provided by Owner /
Consultant in writing.
12.0 WARRANTY
Bidder shall have final and total responsibility for the design and performance of
charger, battery and DCDB supplied under this specification. The equipment and the
system shall be guaranteed for troubles free operation for a period of 12 months from
the date of commissioning. Any defects discovered during this period shall be rectified
free of charge.


Manufacturer shall follow his standard procedures for quality assurance and control.
However, the standard procedures shall be submitted to the Owner in event of order.
Page 42 of 45
RAJASTHAN
Bidder shall submit the QAP for Owner’s approval prior to dispatch at supplier’s works
and during commissioning at site.
The procedures shall be in such a form as to clearly delineate the manufacturing

sequence and major inspection points and to reference manufacturer’s test and
inspection procedures.
The Owner will inform the manufacturer as to which of the inspection points and tests
will be witnessed.
15.0 LIST OF SPARES
A. Panels with Bus-bars.

B. Modules of various motor ratings and types of outlets.
C. BREAKERS (OF EACH RATING)
i. Fixed Arcing Contact Assembly

ii. Moving Arcing Contact Assembly
iii. Mechanism Reset Spring
iv. Trip bar spring and any other spring used in the circuit breaker mechanism
v. Cluster Contacts
vi. Arc Chute Assembly
vii. Shunt trip Coil
viii. Closing Coil
ix. Motors for MWS operated breakers
x. Secondary Isolating Contact Blocks
xi. Release Devices, if any
xii. Shutter Assembly
D. SWITCHES (OF EACH RATING)
i. Assembled Switch in Open Execution

ii. Single Pole moving Blade Assembly
iii. Single Pole Base Assembly
Page 43 of 45
RAJASTHAN
E. FUSES (OF EACH RATING)
i. Fuse Link
ii. Fuse Fittings
F. CONTROL SWITCHES
i. Trip-Neutral-Close Control Switch

ii. Local-Remote Selector Switch
iii. Thermostat
iv. Ammeter Selector Switch
v. Voltmeter Selector Switch
vi. Push Button Element
vii. Push Button actuator of each type
G. CONTACTOR (OF EACH RATING)
i. Contactor with Auxiliary Contacts

ii. Operating Coil
iii. Auxiliary Contact Block
H. RELAYS
i. Relays of each type

ii. Glass cover of each case.
I. INDICATION LAMPS
i. Indicating Lamp Globes of each colour.

ii. Indication Lamp Fittings
iii. Indicating Lamp Bulbs
J. METERS
Page 44 of 45
RAJASTHAN
i. Ammeter
ii. Voltmeter
K. TRANSFORMERS
i. Current Transformer of each rating.

ii. Potential Transformers
L. MCB (OF EACH RATING)

M. MISCELLANEOUS
i. Alarm Bell
ii. Alarm Buzzer
Page 45 of 45
DATA SHEET FOR LV SWITCH GEAR
REV. 00
Project No. Unit

REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0
Date 21/12/2018
Prepared By PBS
Checked By PBS
Approved By SKJ
Client Review

DATA SHEET FOR LV SWITCHGEAR
A GENERAL
1 Tag No. : PMCC
2 Quantity No. : 1
3 Manufacturer : #
4 Model No. : #
5 Applicable Standard : As per Specification for LV Switchgear NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-026
B SITE CONDITION
3 Average Relative Humidity : 50%-60%
5 Seismic Zone : ZONE-2
6 Environment : Dry
8 Degree of Protection (IP) : IP 42
9 Location : Indoor
C OPERATING CONDITION
1 Rated Voltage V : 415 V AC +/- 10%
2 Frequency Hz : 50 Hz +/- 1%
3 Number of phase : 3-Phase Neutral & PE
4 Rated Power Factor : 0.8 (Assumed)
5 System Fault Level : 50 kA
7 Auxiliary Supply AC Supply V : 240 V AC +/- 10%, 1 Phase, 50 Hz. (Through Control Transformer)
DC Supply V : 110 V DC /240 AC
8 Power supply for Spring Charging Motor V : 110 V DC /240 AC
D CONTROL / AUXILIARY SUPPLY
1 Air Circuit Breker :
1.1 Spring charging motor V : 110 V DC /240 AC
1.2 Closing coil V : 110 V DC /240 AC
1.3 Shunt (Tripping) coil V : 110 V DC /240 AC
1.4 Under voltage coil V : 110 V DC /240 AC
2 Motor Feeder
2.1 Equipment rating : As per Single Line Diagram
2.2 Contactor coil V : 240 V AC
3 Indicating lamps V : 240 V AC
4 Space heaters V : 240 V AC
E CONSTRUCTION
1 Type : Compartmentalised, Form 3b Type 2
2 Type of Feeders Circuit Breaker Feeder : Fully Drawout
All other Feeders : Non Drawout
3 Feeder Arrangement : Single Front
4 Cable entry Incoming Power entry : Busduct
Incoming & Outgoing Cable : Bottom entry
5 Base Frame : ISMC 75
6 Floor fixing : Integral base frame and tack welding to the floor channel
7 Color Shade : Epoxy RAL 7032
F CIRCUIT BREAKER
1 Type of Circuit Breaker : Air Circuit Breaker (ACB)
2 Poles : 3 Pole / 4 Pole
3 Voltage V : 415 V AC +/- 10%
4 Short Circuit withstand capability kA : 50 kA
5 System Breaking capacity kA : #
6 System Making capacity kA : #
7 Breaker Rating A : As per Single Line Diagram
8 Spare Auxiliary contact of breaker for Purchaser's use : 6 NO + 6 NC
9 Duty cycle of breaker : O-3Min-CO-3Min-CO
G COMPONENTS
1 Main Busbars (Phase & Neutral) :
1.1 Material : Tin plated, Hard drawn high-conductivity fully insulated copper
1.2 Current rating inside panel at specified ambient temperature A : As per Single Line Diagram
1.3 Main Busbar Position : Top (Including Neutral and Control Busbar)
2 Earth Bus :
2.1 Material : Aluminum
2.2 Location of earth bus : Bottom
3 C. B. Operating Mechanism :
3.1 CLOSING : Independent Manual Spring Closing (IMS)
3.2 : Motor Wound Stored Charged Spring Closing (MWS)
3.3 TRIPING : Shunt Trip / Manual Trip
4 Door interlocking mechanism : Required
5 Accuracy class of Instruments :
5.1 Ammeters : 1
5.2 Kwh meters : 1
6 Space heater : Required
7 CONTACTORS :
7.1 Type : Air Break
7.2 Duty class : AC3 / AC4
7.3 Rating : As per Single Line Diagram
7.4 No. of Auxiliary contact : 2 NO + 2 NC
8 Minimum Motor starter module size : As per Manufacturer's Standard
9 Minimum switch-fuse module size : As per Manufacturer's Standard
10 Marshalling Compartment : For each shipping section

LV SWITCHGEAR MANUFACTURER'S DATA (TO BE FILLED BY VENDOR ALONG WITH BID)
A LV SWITCHGEAR
1 Tag No. :
2 Make :
4 Manufacturer's Country of origin :
5 Degree of Protection :
6 Paint shade :
7 Overall Weight of Circuit breaker panel :
8 Overall dimentions of Circuit breaker panel :
9 Overall Dimensions :
9.1 LV Switchboard (L X D X H) :
9.2 LV MCC (L X D X H) :
10 Recommended clearance for each Switchboard :
10.1 Rear :
10.2 Front :
10.3 Above :
11 Maximum amd Minimum mounting height of opearating: :
12 Overall heat dissipation of panel in no load :
13 Overall heat dissipation of panel in full load :
14 Maximum temperature rise at full load :
15 Maximum temperature rise under short circuit :
16 Max size / No. of XLPE Insulated YWY cables that can be terminated :
16.1 with rear extensions :
16.2 Without rear extension :
16.3 Size of rear extension panel :
17 Clearance in Air :
17.1 Phase to Phase (min) :
17.2 Phase to earth (min) :
18 Main Horizontal Bus bar :
18.1 Bus bar current rating at design Ambient Temp. : A
18.2 Main Bus bar size for Phase / Neutral :
18.3 Main Bus bar location : Top / Bottom
18.4 Insulating material :
18.5 Insulating material voltage class :
18.6 One minute power frequency withstand :
18.7 Impulse with stand :
18.8 Creep age distance :
18.9 Maximum distance between adjacent insulator support :
18.10 Bus bar joints :
19 Vertical Bus bar :
19.1 Bus bar current rating at design Ambient of 40 °C: :
19.2 Bus bar size for Phase / Neutral :
19.3 Bus bar material :
19.4 Insulation material :
19.5 Insulating material voltage class :
19.6 One minute power frequency withstand :
19.7 Impulse with stand :
19.8 Bus bar Location :
20 Earth bus size / material :
21 Earth bus Short circuit withstand capacity (1 Sec) :
22 Power frequency voltage (1 minute) : kV
23 Short Circuit withstand capacity (1 sec) : kA
24 Peak Dynamic withstand capacity : kA
25 Safety shutters provided for test and draw-out positions : Yes / No
B AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
1 Make :
2 Type designation :
3 Type of mounting :
4 No of poles / phases :
5 Nominal current rating (in free air) : A at °C
6 Location of earth bus :
7 In panel current rating at site conditions : A
8 Breaking capacity : kA
9 Short time rating (1 sec) : kA
10 Peak making current : kA
11 1 min dry withstand volt (power frequency) : kV
12 Total opening time : msec
13 Total closing time : msec
14.1 Spring charging mechanism Rated Votage : Volts
14.2 Speed : RPM
14.3 Power required for spring charging motor : W / VA
14.4 Class of Insulation :
15 Power required for opening : W / VA
16 Power required for closing : W / VA
17 Breaker is trip free : Yes / No
18 Closing mechanism :
19 Provision for manual spring charging : Yes / No
20 Time taken for spring charging : sec
21 Tripping mechanism :
22 Mechanical trip PB provided : Yes / No
23 Mechanical ON / OFF indicator provided : Yes / No
24 No. of auxiliary contacts : NO + NC
C Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)

1 Make :
2 Type :
3 No. of Poles :
4 Nominal current rating (in free air) : A at °C
5 In panel current rating at site conditions : A
6 Rated operating duty :
8 Short time rating (1 sec) : kA
9 Peak making current : kA
10 Tripping mechanism :
11 Breaker is trip free : Yes / No
12 Inbuilt protection type :
13 Thermal Overload setting range :
14 Short circuit setting range :
15 Earth leakage provided : Yes / No
16 No. of auxiliary contacts : NO + NC
17 Type-2 co-ordination for Motor Starter : Yes / No
D CONTACTOR
1 Make :
2 Type of designation :
3 Rated voltage :
4.1 Rated current for AC-3 duty :
4.2 AC-4 duty :
5 Thermal rating : A
6 Making capacity : kA
8 Switching frequency : Operations / hour
9.1 Life Electrical : Operations (at rated Voltage)
9.2 Mechanical : Operations
10 Rated coil voltage :
11 Coil consumption – Pick up @rated voltage : W/VA
12 Coil consumption – Hold on @rated voltage : W/VA
13 Closing time : Sec
14 Opening time : Sec
15 No. of aux. contacts : NO + NC
E Thermal Overload Relay
1 Make :
2 Type :
3 Setting range : A
4 Single Phasing preventer : Integral / Separate
5 Type of operation : Direct / CT Operated
6 Provision of change over type contact : Yes / No
7 Trip class :
8 Reset facility :
F Protection Relay
1 Make :
2 Type : Electronic Static / Numerical
3 Input power supply :
4 Current operated relay with 50, 51, 50N, 51G Protection and Metering :
function
5 Comprehensive numerical protection relay with 50, 51, 50N, 51G Protection :
and Metering functions
6 Voltage operated relay with 27 Protection and Metering :
7 Built in digital inputs / outputs :
8 Serial communication ports at front / back :
G Auxiliary equipment and Accessories
1 Anti-condensation heater with thermostate in each panel. :
2 Heater supply Voltage : Watt
3 Heater power at rated voltage :
4 Maintenance plug & socket :
5 Current rating of plug & socket :
6 Panel Illumination lamp :
7 Lamp supply voltage :
8 Lamp rated power : Watt
9 Provision for Padlocking of Circuit Breaker :
10 Set of special tools for erection,testing and maintenace of switchboard. :
11 Circuit breaker lifting device :
H Name plates
1 Lamicoid white face, black letters :
I Construction details
1 Construction Material for Door / Frame :
2 Thickness of door / Frame :
3 Construction material of gland plate :
4 Thickness of Gland plate :

A Variable Frequency Drive

1 Variable Frequency Drive
2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3 Duty Continuous
4 Input Isolator (SFU/MCCB) Yes / No Yes
5 Input Contactor *
6 Output Contactor VTA
7 Input Line harmonic filters Yes / No As Required (VTA)
8 Input power factor correction unit Yes / No As Required (VTA)
9 Input RFI filter Yes / No As Required (VTA)
9.1 Output filter Yes / No As Required (VTA)
9.2 VFD Bypass DOL starter Yes / No *
10 Continuous power output kW *
10.1
10.2 PERFORMANCE :
10.3 Rating kW VTA
11 Rated input current A VTA
12 Rated output current A VTA
13 Overall efficiency at 100/75/50% rated load VTA
14 Input power factor at at 100/75/50% rated load VTA
15 Input total harmonic voltage distortion % VTA
16 Input total harmonic current distortion % VTA
16.1 Maximum Input Current Harmonic Content :
16.2 2nd % VTA
16.3 3rd % VTA
17 4th % VTA
17.1 5th % VTA
17.2 7th % VTA
18 11th % VTA
18.1 13th % VTA A
18.2 17th % VTA
18.3 19th % VTA Top / Bottom
18.4 Speed Range rpm VTA
18.5 Speed regulation (without tachometer) +% VTA
18.6 Maximum overload capability and duration % / min VTA
18.7 Soft start feature Yes / No *
18.8 Maximum allowable input voltage unbalance % VTA
18.9
18.10 RECTIFIER :
19 Manufacturer VTA
19.1 Model number VTA
19.2 Type *
19.3 Rated input voltage V AC 415
19.4 Rated input frequency Hz 50
19.5 Number of phases 3
19.6 Rated input current A VTA
19.7 Input inrush current A VTA
19.8 Maximum input earth leakage current A VTA
20 Maximum input current A VTA
21 Nominal output voltage VDC VTA
22 Output Voltage Regulation ±% VTA kV
23 Maximum output voltage ripple ± % rms * kA
24 Rated output current A VTA kA
25 Rectifier power efficiency 100%/75%/50% rated output % VTA Yes / No
B :
1 INVERTER :
2 Manufacturer VTA
3 Model number VTA
4 Type *
5 Inverter rating kVA VTA A at °C
6 Rated input voltage V DC VTA
7 Input voltage range for rated output ±% VTA A
8 Rated input current A VTA kA
9 Input inrush current A VTA kA
10 Nominal output voltage VAC VTA kA
11 Output voltage tolerance ±% * kV
12 Number of phases * msec
13 Inverter output voltage setting range % VTA msec
14.1 Nominal output frequency Hz 50 Volts
14.2 Output frequency tolerance ±% * RPM
14.3 Output frequency setting range % VTA W / VA
14.4 Total Harmonic Distortion of output current (At rated Output) % *
15 Inverter power efficiency 100%/75%/50% rated output % VTA W / VA
16 : W / VA
17 TRANSFORMER : Yes / No
18 Manufacturer VTA
19 Model number VTA Yes / No
20 Type Dry sec
21 Duty Converter
22 Voltage ratio V * Yes / No
23 Tapping range VTA Yes / No
24 Winding connection VTA NO + NC
C Rated power VA VTA

1 Rated impedance vVoltage % VTA

2 Number of output phases VTA
3 Cooling method VTA
4 Full load losses kW VTA A at °C
5 Efficiency at 100%/75%/50% rated output % VTA A
6 :
7 ISOLATION SWITCHES / CONTACTORS : kA
8 Manufacturer : VTA kA
9 Model number : VTA kA
10 Type : *
11 Rated voltage V * Yes / No
12 No of poles A VTA
13 Rated continuous current A VTA
14 Rated short-circuit making capability kA VTA
15 Rated short-circuit breaking capability kA VTA Yes / No
16 Rated short time withstand current (Icw), duration A, sec * NO + NC
17 Rated power frequency withstand voltage for 1 minute kV (rms) * Yes / No
D Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage kV (peak) *
1 Rated Duty : *
2 Operation : Manual / Electric
3 Co-ordination between protective devices and starter Type 2
4.1 Utilisation category : VTA
4.2 :
5 SYSTEM AND CONTROL : A
6 Auxiliary supply for contactor control, indications : Voltage V 240 VAC (Internal) kA
7 Power consumption W VTA kA
8 Auxiliary supply for VFD control and indication : Voltage V 240V AC, 1-ph, 50Hz (UPS, Operations / hour
External)
9.1 Power consumption W VTA Operations (at rated Voltage)
9.2 Cooling fans : Voltage V 415V AC, 3PH, 50 Hz Operations
(Internal)
10 Power consumption W VTA
11 Communication with DCS/PLC Yes / No Yes, Ethernet W/VA
12 Remote control unit hardwired interface Yes / No Yes W/VA
13 Remote control, alarm and monitoring (DCS/PLC) hardwired interface Yes / No Yes Sec
14 Port for programming Yes / No Yes Sec
15 No. of aux. contacts : NO + NC
E Thermal Overload Relay
1 Make :
2 Type :
3 Setting range : A
4 Single Phasing preventer : Integral / Separate
5 Type of operation : Direct / CT Operated
6 Provision of change over type contact : Yes / No
7 Trip class :
8 Reset facility :
F Protection Relay
1 Make :
2 Type : Electronic Static / Numerical
3 Input power supply :
4 Current operated relay with 50, 51, 50N, 51G Protection and Metering :
function
5 Comprehensive numerical protection relay with 50, 51, 50N, 51G Protection :
and Metering functions
6 Voltage operated relay with 27 Protection and Metering :
7 Built in digital inputs / outputs :
8 Serial communication ports at front / back :
G Auxiliary equipment and Accessories
1 Anti-condensation heater with thermostate in each panel. :
2 Heater supply Voltage : Watt
3 Heater power at rated voltage :
4 Maintenance plug & socket :
5 Current rating of plug & socket :
6 Panel Illumination lamp :
7 Lamp supply voltage :
8 Lamp rated power : Watt
9 Provision for Padlocking of Circuit Breaker :
10 Set of special tools for erection,testing and maintenace of switchboard. :
11 Circuit breaker lifting device :
H Name plates
1 Lamicoid white face, black letters :
I Construction details
1 Construction Material for Door / Frame :
2 Thickness of door / Frame :
3 Construction material of gland plate :
4 Thickness of Gland plate :

NOTES:
3 This Data Sheet shall be Read / Refer In Conjunction with Specification for LV Switchgear & supplement to Single Line
5 Switchgear offered shall be of proven design and shall have been successfully type tested. Type test certificates for an
exactly identical design of offered switchboard shall be furnished by bidders. These test reports shall be not more than
5 yeas old, as on the final bid due date. In case these type tests have not been conducted during the last 5 years bidder
shall conduct these type tests on the offered design of switchboard before despatch without any extra cost and delivery
impact.

RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR BATTERY, BATTERY CHARGER

AND DCDB SPECIFICATION

Page 1 of 28
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 SCOPE
4.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
5.0 BATTERY CHARGER
6.0 BATTERY
10.0 WARRANTY
13.0 LOAD CYCLE FOR 110 V DC SYSTEM
14.0 LIST OF SPARES
Page 2 of 28
RAJASTHAN
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the design, engineering, fabrication, manufacture, assembly,

inspection, testing at manufacturer's works, packing and supply to site, installation
and commissioning at site of Battery, Battery Chargers and Distribution Boards for 110
V dc.
1 set of 110 V D.C. system (Battery, Battery Charger & DCDB) in accordance with this
specification, standards stated herein and datasheet enclosed herewith, shall
comprise of the following:
a. One NO. VRLA Lead Acid Battery complete with racks & accessories.
b. One No. Float charger.
c. One No. Float cum Boost charger
d. One NO. DCDB
All equipment supplied shall be new and best of their respective kinds and shall be of
the class most suitable for the purpose for which they are intended.
Modification / changes in components, if any suggested during scrutiny / approval of

drawings and execution of work shall be carried out by successful bidder at no extra
cost.
The equipment shall comply with the requirements of latest revision of the following
standards issued by BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards), unless otherwise specified:
IS 5 Colours for ready mixed paints and enamels

IS 1248 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and Accessories
(Parts - 1, 2, 8, 9)
IS 3700 Essential rating and characteristics of semi-conductor devices (Parts - 1 to 11)
IS 3715 Letter symbols for semi-conductor devices. (Parts - 1 to 4)
IS 4411 Code of designation of semi-conductor devices
IS 5001 Guide for preparation of drawings for semi-conductor devices and integrated circuits
(Parts - 1, 2)
IS 5469 Code of practice for the use of semi-conductor junction devices (Parts - 1 to 3)
Page 3 of 28
RAJASTHAN
IS 6619 Safety code for semiconductor rectifier equipment

IS 7204 Stabilised power supplies dc output (Parts - 1 to 4)
IS 12021 Control transformers for switchgear and control gear for voltages not exceeding 1000
VAC.
IS 13703 Low voltage fuses for voltages not exceeding 1000 V AC or 1500 V DC (Parts - 1 to 4)
IS 13947 Low voltage switchgear and control gear (Parts - 1, 3, 4, 5)
IEC 60146 Semiconductor converters.
IEC 60896-2:1995 Stationary lead acid batteries - general requirements and methods of test - part 2:
valve regulated type
BS 6290-4:1997 Lead Acid stationary cells and batteries specification for classifying valve regulated
type
IEEE 1188-2005 Requirements and battery tester capability
IEEE 485 IEEE Recommended Practice for Sizing Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications
IS 1146 Rubber and plastic containers for lead-acid storage batteries
In case of imported equipment, the standards of the country of origin shall be

applicable if these standards are equivalent or more stringent than the applicable
Indian standards.
The equipment shall also conform to the provisions of Indian Electricity Rules and
In case Indian standards are not available for any equipment, standards issued by IEC /
BS / VDE / IEEE / NEMA or equivalent agency shall be applicable.
In case of any contradiction between various referred standards! Specifications / data

sheets and statutory regulations, the following order of decreasing priority shall
govern:
 Data sheets
 This specification
 Codes and standards
 Statutory regulations
i. The offered equipment shall be brand new with state-of-the-art technology and a
Page 4 of 28
RAJASTHAN
ii. Bidder shall ensure availability of spare parts and maintenance support services for
the offered equipment for at least 15 years from the date of supply.
iii. Bidder shall give a notice of at least one year to the end user of equipment and
owner before phasing out the product / spares to enable the end user to place
order for spares and services.
iv. The Battery Charger system shall be an integrated system comprising of static
rectifiers, DC Distribution Board, VRLA battery bank, isolating and protection
devices and all other equipment / accessories required for completeness of the
system whether specifically mentioned herein or not, but necessary for
completeness and satisfactory performance of the system. The Battery Charger
equipment shall be properly coordinated with the selected Battery to ensure
complete compatibility.
v. All equipment and components shall be of excellent quality and reliability for
providing secure DC power required for vital equipment performance, controlling,
monitoring and safeguarding functions in continuously operating process units and
utility installations of petroleum refineries, petrochemical and gas processing
facilities and other industrial plants. Components shall be capable of withstanding
the thermal and dynamic stresses resulting from internal and external short
circuits and circuit switching operations etc. The design of the equipment shall be
such as to minimise the risk of short circuits and shall ensure personnel and
operational safety.
vi. The bidder shall be responsible for design, engineering and manufacturing of the
complete system to fully meet the intent and requirements of this specification
and attached data sheets.
3.1 SITE CONDITIONS
Service conditions shall be defined as
Maximum ambient temperature: 47 °C

Minimum ambient temperature: 5 °C
Relative humidity: 50 - 60 %
Wind speed: 5.5-6.0 m/sec
Page 5 of 28
RAJASTHAN
4.1 INPUT POWER SUPPLY
i. The Battery Chargers shall be suitable for input power supply as defined in the
data sheet. If not specified therein, they shall be suitable for the following input
power supply:
Voltage 415 V ± 10%

Frequency 50 Hz ± 5%
ii. In addition to the above variations, the input voltage may be subject to transient
variations comprising of voltage dips up to 20% of normal voltage during motor
start-up, voltage interruptions during short circuits as well as frequency variations
due to large motor start –up. The Battery Chargers shall operate satisfactorily with
a total harmonic distortion of up to 3 % in the input power supply.
iii. The Battery Chargers shall also be designed to operate satisfactorily while drawing
input power from an emergency diesel generator set.
iv. The incoming power supply to the Battery Charger system shall be provided by two
feeders. Each feeder shall supply power to two rectifiers for each of 110 V DC.
5.0 BATTERY CHARGER
5.1 DESIGN BASIS
i. The Battery Charger system shall have two chargers i.e Charger - 1 & Charger - 2 of
2 X 100% capacity. Both chargers shall be of identical design and rating. The
battery to be connected to the chargers shall be of VRLA type as indicated in the
data sheet. Battery Chargers for VRLA battery shall be sized to provide quick
charging of the battery up to 90 % of rated Ampere hours within duration of 24
hours and to 100% within 4 days. Each charger shall be sized for the most stringent
of the following duty conditions, whichever is higher:
a. 110 V online charger shall be designed for supplying continuous critical load and
boost charging current as per recommendation of battery manufacturer. The
charger shall also be designed for float charge and charge equalizing condition.
Page 6 of 28
RAJASTHAN
b. Initial charging of the uncharged battery assembly to fully charged condition.
ii. Each charger shall have a 3-phase full wave, controlled rectifier bridge with
protective devices. However, bidder shall specify the no. of pulses at rectifier end.
iii. Independent current limits shall be provided for charger load current and battery
charging current. Subsequent to a discharge cycle and completion of quick
charging, when battery is connected to charger under float mode, the battery
current shall be monitored, controlled and limited to set value automatically
irrespective of the value of load current. Fast acting semi-conductor fuses shall be
provided for protection against internal short circuits. In case of external short
circuits, the chargers shall be protected by rapid shutdown of the semi-conducting
power devices. The high-speed semi-conductor fuses used for rectifier protection
shall be complete with trip indication. R-C snubber shall be provided across each
power semiconductor device for dv / dt protection.
iv. Filter circuits consisting of smoothing choke and condenser, complete with
protection to limit the ripple content at the output, shall be provided.
v. Silicon blocking diodes shall be provided in the charger output circuit to prevent
back-feed from battery into the charger and filters.
vi. Protection against reverse battery connection and DC earth fault relay for earth
leakage protection shall be provided.
vii. Silicon blocking diodes (min. 4 nos.) connected to 80% tap of the battery bank shall
be provided to maintain continuity in the DC supply to the load.
viii. Internal cooling of the charger unit shall preferably be by natural ventilation. If
forced air cooling is necessary, a redundant air-cooling fan shall be provided for
each service. The charger components shall be capable of delivering their rated
output with one forced air-cooling fan out of service. Under this condition,
maximum continuous temperature of components shall not exceed the permissible
limits. In case of chargers with forced cooling, loss of ventilation alarm / trip with
override facilities shall be provided.
ix. Selection, sizing and suitability of all components used for various applications
shall be bidder’s responsibility and the rating of components shall be increased, if
required, to suit associated components during execution of the order without any
claim for extra price or time. All electronic power devices including thyristors,
transistors, diodes etc. shall be rated under operating conditions for at least 150%
of the maximum current carried by the device. All electrical components such as
transformers, reactors, contactors, switches, busbars etc. shall be rated for at
least 125 % of the maximum required rating. No electronic device shall experience
a PIV greater than 50% of its rated value.
Page 7 of 28
RAJASTHAN
x. The DC system shall be unearthed, unless mentioned otherwise in the data sheet.
However, a high impedance earth fault relay shall be provided for the protection
of the battery.
xi. Each charger shall be galvanically isolated from the input power supply by
providing a double wound transformer at its input. The transformer shall be
natural air cooled, dry type suitable for location inside a panel.
xii. Suitable protection shall be provided in the control circuits to guard against the
instability of the controlled rectifiers due to electrical oscillations which may be
present in the input supply as used by an emergency DG set.
xiii. An R. F. I. filter shall be provided to suppress the radio frequency interference to
permissible limits. The production of radio frequency interference voltages shall
not exceed the value of suppression grade N’ as defined in VDE-0875. The
performance of the Battery Charger system shall not get affected or in any way be
degraded by the use of portable radio transmitter receivers in the vicinity of the
chargers.
xiv. Transient / surge protection devices shall be provided in the input circuit of
chargers to protect them against surges & voltage spikes.
xv. The Chargers shall be designed to draw power from mains supply at a minimum
power factor of 0.85 lag while sharing the rated load in normal operating
configuration.
xvi. The chargers shall be designed to ensure that the harmonic component in the input
currents is <1% RMS limited so as not to cause undue harmful effects on other
sensitive equipment operating on the same supply bus. Suitable filters / harmonic
traps shall be provided, as required, for this purpose.
xvii. All breakers shall be adequately rated for the required continuous rating and
breaking capacity as applicable. Paralleling of breaker / switch / contactor poles
to achieve the required current rating is not acceptable. All output isolating
devices shall be double pole type. The DC contactors shall be operated with a DC
control supply using ON / OFF selector switches and not push buttons. All DC
contactors must have a tested / published DC rating equal to or exceeding the
most stringent current carrying and breaking requirements while considering
adequate design margins.
xviii. All the thyristors, diodes and other power electronic devices shall be protected
with high speed semiconductor fuses. I squared t co-ordination between fuse and
semi-conducting power devices shall be ensured.
xix. The Battery Chargers shall be specifically designed to limit float and quick charging
voltages to the battery to limits recommended by the battery manufacturer.
Page 8 of 28
RAJASTHAN
Output voltage shall be limited to maximum + 10% of nominal system voltage when
the battery is float charged while feeding the load.
xx. Bidder shall specifically ensure that the charger output voltage does not exceed
the recommended limits of operation under any conditions of internal / external
fault or operation, including:
 Filter capacitor fuse failure of either charger

 DC output switch OFF of either charger
 DC output fuse blown of either charger.
xxi. Other specific current / voltage limits during normal charging/ operation of the
chargers shall also be incorporated in the design of the chargers.
5.2 OPERATION
i. Normal operation requires that the battery assembly shall be float charged
simultaneously by both chargers-1 & 2 while feeding the DC load, the chargers thus
operating in parallel and equally sharing the total load.
ii. However, in case of failure of either of the chargers, the other charger shall float
charge the battery while feeding the complete DC load. Faulty charger shall
automatically get disconnected from the healthy system.
iii. In case of AC mains failure, the battery shall continue to supply the load.
iv. The process of changeover from float to quick charging and reverting from quick to
float charging shall be selectable in Automatic or Manual mode by means of an
Auto / Manual selector switch. In Automatic mode, the changeover from float to
quick charging shall be initiated through a current sensor, set at a preset value.
Similarly, the changeover from quick to float charging shall also be automatic
based on current sensing. In Manual mode, both changeovers from float to quick
charging and from quick to float charging shall be performed manually using push
buttons. When quick charging mode is selected, the battery charger shall initially
charge the battery under constant current mode followed by constant voltage
(finishing charging) mode or as per the battery manufacturer’s recommendation.
Changeover from constant current to constant voltage (finishing charging) mode
shall be fully automatic. A backup synchronous or digital timer shall also be
provided for initiating the changeover to float mode by default after a preset time
period. The timer range shall be 0 to 24 hours or the nearest available as per
manufacturer’s standard range.
Page 9 of 28
RAJASTHAN
v. In the event of failure of the charger feeding the load, when battery is being quick
charged by the other charger, continuity in DC supply shall be maintained from the
battery to the load through 80% tap of the battery bank followed by full battery
supplying the load.
vi. The chargers shall have facility for manual mode of operation in the event of
failure of controller under closed loop control. The selection shall be done through
Auto / Manual selector switch.
vii. Facility for initial charging of the uncharged battery shall also be provided.
5.3 PERFORMANCE
i. Both chargers shall be of solid-state design, constant voltage and current limit
type. The output voltage shall be stabilized to within ± 1 % of set value in float
charging mode for mains steady state voltage and frequency variation of ± 10% and
±5 % respectively, and load variation of 10 to 100 % at any temperature up to the
design ambient temperature specified in the data sheet. However, the variation in
output voltage can be up to ±2 % for chargers with rated output voltage 110 V.
ii. Under constant current boost charging condition, the DC output current shall be
maintained within ±2% of set value.
iii. The output voltage dynamic response of the charger unit with battery
disconnected shall not vary more than ± 10% of nominal output voltage in the
event of step load of up to 50 % of the rated output. The output voltage shall be
restored to a value within the steady state limits within 250 msec. Voltage
feedback shall generally be derived from charger output while current feedback
from the DC ammeter.
iv. The maximum allowable RMS ripple voltage, with battery disconnected, shall be
equal to or less than 3 % of the nominal output voltage or as recommended by the
battery manufacturer.
v. The maximum noise level from the chargers measured at 1-meter distance in any
position, at any load between 0- 100% with all normal cooling fans running shall
not exceed 75 Db(A).
5.4 CONTROLS
Controls shall include but not be limited to the following:
a. ON / OFF control switch for AC supply to charger (push buttons are not acceptable)
b. Push buttons for float / quick charging mode selection
Page 10 of 28
RAJASTHAN
c. Potentiometers under float mode for voltage and current adjustment

d. Potentiometers under quick mode for voltage and current adjustment
e. Auto / Manual selector switch to select mode of operation
f. Others as required.
5.5 PANEL METERING AND INDICATION
These shall include but are not limited to the following:
A. Meters
1. Charger - 1
 AC input Voltmeter with selector switch

 AC input Ammeter with selector switch
 DC output Voltmeter
 DC output Ammeter
 DC Voltmeter with selector switch (battery voltage)
 DC Ammeter (battery)
 DC Earth Leakage Ammeter (mA).
2. Charger - 2
 AC input Voltmeter with selector switch

 AC input Ammeter with selector switch
 DC output Voltmeter
 DC output Ammeter.
3. DC Distribution Board
 DC Voltmeter
 DC Ammeter.
B. Lamps
Page 11 of 28
RAJASTHAN
1. Chargers - 1 & 2
 AC power ON (1 lamp for each phase)

 Float charger ON
 Quick charger ON
 Charger fault.
2. DC Distribution Board
 DC power ON
 Outgoing feeder ON (for each outgoing feeder).
All indicating lamps shall be provided with series resistors. Clustered Jumbo LEDs of
minimum 10 mm diameter may be provided in place of lamps subject to their having
at least equal ilIuminance.
5.6 ANNUNCIATION
Static type audio-visual annunciator with annunciation windows, acknowledge, test

and reset push buttons and hooter shall be provided on each charger for the following
annunciations. Any additional relays / components, including DC under voltage relay
and current sensors, required for this purpose shall be provided in the chargers.
Facility for bypassing the audio alarm on each charger shall also be provided.
a. DC under voltage
b. DC overvoltage
c. DC earth leakage
d. A C incoming power supply failure
e. AC input fuse blown-off
f. DC output fuse blown-off
g. DC battery fuse blown-off
h. Filter Capacitor fuse blown-off
i. Load on Battery (using current direction sensing with time delay)
j. Battery under voltage / Disconnected during discharge (using zero current sensing)
k. Cubicle fan failure and back protection for cubicle temperature high (for chargers
with forced cooling).
Page 12 of 28
RAJASTHAN
One summary alarm potential-free contact each for Battery, Charger - 1 and Charger -
2 shall be wired to terminal block for remote annunciation. Each rectifier power
device shall have over temperature trip features by thermostat.
5.7 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS (PCBS)
PCBs used in the chargers shall be made of glass epoxy material. Components shall be
properly mounted without undue stress, torsion, bends, twists etc. All PCBs shall be
provided with a transparent epoxy coating on both sides for environmental / Anti –
fungus protection and tropicalisation. Industrial grade components shall be used in the
PCBs and electronic circuits. PCBs shall preferably be wave soldered. Copper strips /
prints on PCBs shall have smooth edges free from hair line cuts and shall be provided
with tin coating. Plug-in PCBs shall preferably be mounted in a standard rack and shall
be suitable for easy replacement. They shall be located away from heat sources. The
rack shall have PCB guides which shall allow the insertion of PCBs smoothly without
requiring undue force. The rack shall be mounted on hinged pivots to enable it to be
turned for access to the back-side terminals. The PCBs shall be firmly clamped in
position so that vibration or continued usages do not result in loose contacts. All PCBs
shall be fitted in a manner to avoid replacement of a PCB by a wrong spare card. The
PCBs shall be provided with visual light emitting diode (LED) status indications,
monitoring points test connections and setting potentiometers in a readily accessible
location which is visible without removing the PCBs. Visual fault diagnostics shall
preferably identify faults up to various sections in the card.
Bidder shall provide adequate protection to the system, even if not specifically
mentioned.
5.8 CONSTRUCTION OF CHARGERS / DISTRIBUTION BOARD
i. Each Battery Charger and DC distribution board shall be housed in a separate free-
standing cubicle. All panels shall be of the same height so as to form a panel lineup
which shall have good aesthetic appearance. Chargers- 1 & 2 shall be installed side
by side whereas DCDB may be located separately and interconnected to the
charger through cables. The DC DB shall accommodate outgoing feeders as
specified in the data sheet. Each panel shall be provided with an 11 W CFL light
with a door operated switch and a thermostatically controlled MCB protected
space heater.
Page 13 of 28
RAJASTHAN
ii. Unless specified otherwise in the data sheet, the DC DB shall be

compartmentalized with each outgoing feeder housed in a separate compartment.
Cable alley of minimum 200mm width with suitable supports shall be provided for
the termination of cables for each vertical arrangement of outgoing feeders in
DCDB.
iii. The Chargers, DCDB enclosures shall be fabricated from structural / CRCA sheet
steel. The frames shall be fabricated by using minimum 2mm thick CRCA sheet
steel while the doors and covers shall be made from minimum 1.6 mm thick CRCA
sheet steel. Wherever required, suitable stiffeners shall be provided. The panels
shall be provided with suitable leveled for ventilation backed by wire mesh. They
must be suitable for use in a tropical climate. Hinged doors shall be provided at
the front and back as required. Inter panel sheet steel barriers shall be provided.
iv. The charger panels and DC distribution board shall be provided with minimum IP-31
degree of ingress protection as per IS-13947 (Part-I).
v. Bus bars shall be colour coded and live parts shall be shrouded to ensure complete
safety to personnel intending routine inspection by opening the panel doors. All
the equipment inside the panel and on the doors shall have suitable nameplates
and device tag numbers as per the schematic diagram. All wires shall be ferruled
and terminals shall be numbered.
vi. The DCDB incomer and main busbars shall be rated based on the maximum load
current considering an additional 10% design margin for contingencies. The rating
shall be selected from standard available ratings and shall be adequate for the
expected short circuit current. The busbar voltage shall be higher than the
recommended boost voltage for the system. The insulation for all equipment
where provided shall be heat resistant, moisture proof and tropicalised.
vii. All power and control switches shall be rotary cam operated type. All power
switches shall be air insulated load break type. Bidder shall ensure that all
equipment / components such as incomer switches, outgoing DC switches, MCCBs,
push buttons, indicating lamps, charger mode selector switches, voltage control
switches, annunciator windows etc. are suitably located on the charger and
distribution board door such that they can be operated without opening the front
door. Power switches shall be provided with a door interlock. In case of difficulty
in installation on the charger front panel door, the AC incoming power switches,
DC outgoing switches and MCCBs may be installed within the panel provided that
they are operable after opening the front panel door.
viii. However, all other selector / control switches, push buttons, indicating lamps,
annunciators, meters etc. shall necessarily be installed on the front panel door as
specified above.
Page 14 of 28
RAJASTHAN
ix. All instruments shall be switchboard type, back connected and 72 x 72 mm square
size. Accuracy class of all meters shall be 1 %. Digital meters capable of displaying
different parameters can be considered subject to Owner’s / his representative
approval. Analogue instrument scales shall have a red mark indicating maximum
permissible operating rating.
x. All fuses shall be link type and shall be located inside the panel. Diazed fuses shall
not be accepted.
xi. All power and control wiring connections within the panels shall be carried out
with 660 V grade, PVC insulated, BIS marked wires having stranded copper
conductors. However, copper strip connections shall preferably be used for
currents exceeding 100A. Wires of 1.5 sqmm size shall normally be used for control
circuits with fuse rating of 10 Amps or less. For control circuits with fuse of 16
Amps. Or more, 2.5 sqmm size wire shall be used. Control wiring for electronic
circuits/ components shall be through flat ribbon cable or copper wire of minimum
0.5mm diameter. All control wiring shall be enclosed in PVC channels or otherwise
neatly bunched together. Each wire shall be suitably identified at both ends by
PVC ferrules. Ferruling of wires shall be as per relevant IS.
xii. For all cabling external to panels, power cables shall be with aluminum / copper
conductors and control cables shall be with copper conductors. All cable
connections shall be from the bottom of the panel, unless specified otherwise in
the data sheet. Removable bolted undrilled gland plates shall be provided along
with single compression type nickel plated brass cable glands for all external cable
connections. Clamp type terminals shall be used for connection of wires up to 10
mm2 Bolted type terminals suitable for cable lugs shall be provided for wire sizes
above this. Separate test terminals shall be provided for measuring and testing the
equipment to check performance. All panels shall be supplied complete with
tinned copper cable termination lugs.
xiii. All potential free metallic parts shall be earthed using soft drawn copper
conductor wire (8 SWG). A suitably sized earth bus shall be provided at the bottom
of the panels running through the panel lineup with provision for earth connections
at both ends to owner’s main earth grid. The minimum size of earth bus shall be 40
x 5 mm2 GI strip. All potential free metallic parts of equipment shall be suitably
earthed to ensure safety.
xiv. The maximum height of the operating handles/ switches shall not exceed 1800 mm
and the minimum height shall not be below 300 mm.
xv. All components/ devices/ feeders shall be provided with screwed nameplates.
Nameplates shall be 3 ply white-black-white 2 colour laminated plastic type.
Lettering shall be of minimum 6 mm height and edges shall be leveled at 45°.
Page 15 of 28
RAJASTHAN
xvi. The sheet steel used for fabrication shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased to
remove mill scale, rust, grease and dirt. Fabricated structures shall be pickled and
then rinsed to remove any trace of acid. The under-surface shall be prepared by
applying a coat of phosphate paint and a coat of zinc oxide/ phosphate primer.
The under-surface shall be free from all imperfections before undertaking the
finishing coat. After preparation of the under-surface, the panels shall be either
spray painted with two coats of epoxy paint or epoxy powder coated to a uniform
thickness suitable for rugged industrial use.
xvii. Colour of final paint shall be RAL 7032, unless specified otherwise. The finished
panels shall be dried in stoving ovens in dust free atmosphere. Panel finish shall be
free from imperfections like pinholes, orange peels, run off paint etc. All
unpainted steel parts shall be cadmium plated or suitably treated to prevent rust
corrosion.
5.9 RELIABILITY
i. All necessary care shall be taken in selection, design, manufacture, testing and
commissioning of the equipment for ensuring high system reliability. The following
design considerations shall be taken into account to ensure maximum availability
of the system.
ii. There shall be no common device between the two units, the failure of which
could cause shutdown of more than one charger.
iii. It shall be possible to attend to any individual power circuit for maintenance
without affecting the total DC supply.
iv. Series-parallel combination of smaller devices to achieve specified rating shall not
be acceptable. All the components used shall be time tested and standardized.
Bidder shall state the safety factors used in selecting such items as semi-
conductors, electrolytic capacitors, transformers etc.
6.0 BATTERY
i. VRLA battery (1 X 100%) shall be suitable for float duty operation at constant
voltage permanently applied to its terminals is sufficient to maintain it in state
close to full charge and shall be designed to supply load in the event of normal
power supply failure. Type of plate construction for batteries shall he as per
project data sheet.
Page 16 of 28
RAJASTHAN
ii. The rated ampere hour capacity of the cell / battery shall be at reference
temperature of 27 °C, constant current discharge at 10 hours rate (C10) and end
cell voltage of 1.75 V / cell.
iii. Ampere hour of the battery shall be selected as per IEEE 485:
a. Minimum site ambient temperature of +2°C or as defined in data sheet

b. Discharge duty cycle
c. End cell voltage upto 1.75V
d. Ageing factor of 125% of the design capacity
e. Design margin of 10%
f. Temperature correction factor
iv. Number of cells and end cell voltage shall be decided by the bidder on the basis of
maximum permissible voltage to the load when batteries are float charged while
feeding the load and minimum DC system voltage. However, the number of cells
and end cell voltage shall be as per project data sheet unless otherwise specified.
v. The battery shall be suitable for being boost charged to fully charged condition
from fully discharged condition within 10 hours unless other-wise specified.
vi. Battery assembly shall be supplied in dry and uncharged. Dry electrolyte and
required quantities of electrolyte liquid with 10% extra shall be delivered with the
battery in suitable non-returnable sealed containers unless otherwise specified.
vii. Each cell shall have separate container. The cell container shall be of high strength
alkali resistant translucent material and designed to withstand mechanical
stresses, shocks and vibrations.
viii. The components such as containers, lids / covers and seals used in manufacture
shall meet the Fire, flame and smoke resistance rating as defined in ANSI / UL94
and have an oxygen Index of at least 28 in accordance with ASTM D-2863.
ix. The terminal posts shall be of nickel-plated steel. The terminals shall be suitable
for short circuit current and specified discharge current without damage to cell as
a result of terminal heating.
x. Flame arrestor shall be mounted on the cell so that all the vented gasses diffuse
through the arrestor to the outside environment. The construction of the arrestor
shall be such that hydrogen burning on the external surface of the arrestor shall
not propagate back in to the cell to cause explosion.
xi. The following information shall be permanently marked on the cell.
 Nominal voltage
 Name of manufacturer / model reference
Page 17 of 28
RAJASTHAN
 Rated capacity in ampere hours (Ah) with End Cell voltage (C10)
 Voltage for float operation of 27 ºC with tolerance of ± 1 %
 Month and year of manufacture
xii. Each set of battery shall be supplied with all accessories including but not limited
to the following:
a. Battery stands in formation as per enclosed data sheet. Mild steel stand
pretreated, and epoxy painted / PVC coated.
b. Inter cell, inter row and interbank connectors and end take offs. These shall be
of tin-plated copper.
c. Cell insulator
d. Stand insulator
e. Cell number plates and fixing pins, Lugs fur cable termination as required.
f. Other accessories and their quantity as per data sheet.
6.2 PERFORMANCE
VRLA batteries shall have been type tested to meet the performance requirements for
each design and AH rating of cells as per IS-10918.
7.1 BATTERY CHARGER
i. During fabrication, the equipment shall be subjected to inspection by Owner or his

representative. Manufacturer shall furnish all necessary information concerning the
supply to Owner’s or his representative inspector. Tests shall be carried out at
manufacturer’s works under his care and expense.
ii. Each Battery Charger and DCDB shall be tested in accordance with applicable
standards.
iii. The following acceptance tests shall be performed on each Battery Charger and
DCDB as a minimum. Detailed test schedule and procedures shall be formulated by
the bidder and submitted for Owner or his representative approval. Bidder shall
indicate the maximum allowable tolerance against each test parameter in line with
applicable standards. All tests shall be witnessed by owner or his representative
Page 18 of 28
RAJASTHAN
and 4 weeks prior notice shall be given before the date of commencement of tests.
In case the equipment fails to meet any requirements of the specifications,
necessary modifications/ corrections shall be made by the bidder to ensure
compliance to the specifications, and the equipment shall be retested before
acceptance. Test certificates indicating the test results shall be submitted to
owner.
7.2 INSULATION TESTS
Insulation tests shall be performed as per IEC 60146-1-1 at 500 Vdc.
High voltage test (AC) shall be carried out at 2.5 Kv, 50 Hz for one minute.
7.3 HEAT RUN TEST
Prior to execution of functional tests, one of the two chargers of each Battery Charger
set shall be subjected to a Heat Run test performed at rated load and voltage for a
period not less than 8 hours.
The other charger of the set shall be energized under zero load current condition
throughout the test period. The temperature of electronic power devices shall be
measured and the device junction temperature shall be calculated. The calculated
value shall be at least 10-20°C lesser than the maximum rated junction temperature
of the device with proper ambient temperature correction applied.
7.4 FUNCTIONAL TESTS
Functional tests shall be performed on each charger. If during execution of functional

tests, an electronic component of the charger is required to be replaced, e.g. due to
charger malfunction or failure of the unit to fulfill the performance requirements of
the specification, then the heat run test shall be repeated at rated current following
which functional tests shall be carried out.
7.5 CHARGER TESTING AT CONSTANT OUTPUT VOLTAGE
Measurements shall be carried out in the float charging mode and in the quick
charging mode. In each mode, measurements shall be carried out at nominal AC input
voltage and at zero, 50% and 100% of rated output current. Measurements at 100%
Page 19 of 28
RAJASTHAN
rated load current shall be repeated at 90% and 110% of nominal AC supply voltage.
Measurements shall include input AC phase voltage, frequency, current and power and
DC output voltage, current and output voltage ripple.
7.6 CHARGER TESTING AT CONSTANT OUTPUT CURRENT LIMIT
Measurements shall be carried out both in the float charging and quick charging mode.
In each mode, measurements shall be carried out when the charger is operating under
DC current limiting conditions with DC output voltage between zero and set value
corresponding to constant voltage operation. Measurements shall include DC output
voltage and current.
7.7 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL CIRCUIT TESTS
The correct functioning of all measuring instruments, alarms, indications, protections

and controls mentioned in the specification shall be verified.
7.8 PARALLEL OPERATION
Parallel operation of both chargers, sharing of the load and automatic isolation of
faulty charger shall be checked.
7.9 CHARGER EFFICIENCY
This shall be determined by measurement of the active power input and output at
50%, 75 % and 100% load.
7.10 AUDIBLE NOISE TEST
Audible noise shall be measured around each charger at 1-meter distance in at least 4
to 5 positions and its value shall be within the permissible limits.
7.11 OTHER ROUTINE AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
Page 20 of 28
RAJASTHAN
In addition to above mentioned test, following tests shall be carried out as per
relevant standard, if not specifically mentioned. The tests shall include but not
limited to:
a. No load and SC test on transformers, inductors, chokes

b. Relay pickup and drop out test
c. No load, full load and short circuit test on battery charger
d. Dielectric test
e. Ripple content measurement
f. Complete physical examination, dimensional checks, door alignment, gaskets
g. Name plates and identification marks
h. Paint checks- DFT, shade, surface finish and adhesion
i. Checking of proper operation of annunciation system
7.12 SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST
The Battery Chargers, DCDB shall be tested at site along with the battery. Bidder
shall furnish a Site Acceptance Test (SAT) procedure for owner’s approval and all tests
shall be performed as per the approved SAT procedure. Calibration certificate for the
instruments used for testing shall be submitted for purchaser’s approval. C10 capacity
at site and discharge load to be added by the bidder.
7.13 BATTERY
Batteries shall be subject to inspection by Owner or his representative, to assess the

progress of work. The manufacturer shall furnish all necessary information concerning
the supply to Owner or his representative. Owner or his representative shall be given
free access in the work” from time to time fur stage wise inspection and progress
reporting. Four weeks advance notice shall be given to witness the final routine test
and other test as agreed upon.
Following routine tests shall be carried out as a minimum as part of acceptance tests
for each AH rating of cells / battery. For long duration type tests, type test
certificates of identical ampere hour rating shall be furnished.
a. Physical examination
b. Polarity and absence of short circuit
c. Marking and packing
Page 21 of 28
RAJASTHAN
d. Verification of dimensions
e. Verification of marking
f. Air pressure test
g. Test for voltages during discharge
h. AH and watt hour efficiency test
i. Test for AH capacity
j. Test for charge retention if specified in the data sheet.
k. Insulation resistance
Tests for container:
a. High voltage test

b. Drop ball test
c. Acid resistance test
d. Plastic yield test
Battery duty cycle test to meet the load cycle requirement shall also be performed at
site after installation as part of commissioning unless otherwise defined in project
data sheet.
7.14 DCDB
a. IR value test: IR value at 1000V dc between the busbars and between each busbar
to enclosure before and after HV test.
b. HV test: At 2.5KV AC 50 Hz for 1 minute
All the equipment shall be divided into several sections for protection and ease of
handling during transportation. The equipment shall be properly packed for
transportation by ship / rail or trailer. It shall be wrapped in polythene sheets before
being placed in crates / cases to prevent damage to finish. The crates / cases shall
have skid bottoms for handling. Special notations such as ‘Fragile’, ‘This side up’,
‘Center of gravity’, ‘Weight’, ‘Owner’s particulars’, ‘PO no.’ etc., shall be clearly and
indelibly marked on the packages together with other details as per purchase order.
Page 22 of 28
RAJASTHAN
The equipment may be stored outdoors for long periods before installation. The
packing shall be completely suitable for outdoor storage in areas with heavy rains and
high ambient temperature unless otherwise agreed.
i. Charger rating calculation based on dc load cycle

ii. Battery charger GA drawing with dimensions and weight
iii. Battery layout drawing with dimensions
iv. Battery sizing calculation in the format of IEEE 485.
v. Technical datasheet
vi. Type test certificate of similar rated battery charger
vii. Make of bought out items
viii. QAP
ix. Bill of materials
x. Technical write-ups / leafups on various pieces of equipment offered
i. Guaranteed Technical Particulars / datasheet

ii. Charger sizing calculation
iii. Battery sizing calculation
iv. Fault current calculation of battery charger and battery
v. General Arrangement drawings for battery charger, battery and DCDB
vi. Charger foundation plan and loading
vii. C10 capacity test certificate
viii. Charger schematic diagram along with write-up and wiring diagrams, etc.
ix. Battery connection details
x. Quality assurance plan (QAP) for purchaser’s approval prior to dispatch at
supplier’s works and during commissioning at site
xi. Field quality plan
xii. Descriptive literature and catalogues on various pieces of equipment offered
xiii. Detailed Bill of Materials/Quantities
Page 23 of 28
RAJASTHAN
xiv. Installation, operation and maintenance manual

xv. Spare parts list with identification
xvi. Certified Test Certificates and Test reports (not older than 5 years)
xvii. Guarantee Certificates
xviii. Rating and diagram plate
xix. Recommended erection sequence in detail
xx. As built drawings
xxi. Foundation plan and loading data
Bidder shall not start manufacturing unless manufacturing clearance is provided by

Owner / Consultant in writing.
10.0 WARRANTY
charger, battery and DCDB supplied under this specification. The equipment and the
system shall be guaranteed for troubles free operation for a period of 12 months from
the date of commissioning. Any defects discovered during this period shall be rectified
free of charge.


Page 24 of 28
RAJASTHAN

sequence and major inspection points and to reference manufacturer’s test and
will be witnessed.
13.0 LOAD CYCLE FOR 110 V DC SYSTEM
Page 25 of 28
RAJASTHAN
Note:
1. Bidder to co-ordinate with battery manufacturer for the estimation of output

current rating of 110 V dc system.
2. Bidder to submit the battery sizing calculation as per IEEE 485.
Page 26 of 28
RAJASTHAN
14.0 LIST OF SPARES
Float Boost
i. Fuse links and fuse bases of each type & rating
a. AC Input HRC fuses -- 3 Nos. 3 Nos.

b. Semiconductor fuse -- 6 Nos. 6 Nos.
c. Filter condenser fuse -- 1 No. 1 No.
d. DC Output HRC fuse -- 2 Nos. 2 Nos.
e. Control fuse -- 5 Nos. --
ii. Contactor coils of each type & rating
a. AC Input mains contactor coils -- 1 No 1 No

b. Aux. Contactor coils -- 1 No 1 No
c. DC Contactor coil -- 1 No. --
iii. Control Switches of each type
a. AC Voltmeter switch -- 1 No
b. AC Ammeter switch -- 1 No
c. AC Input switch -- 1 No
d. DC Output switch -- 1 No
e. Triple pole switch common for all chargers -- 1 No
iv. Push button element with actuator -- 1 No

v. Indicating lamps
a. AC Input lamp -- 3 Nos. 3 Nos.

b. DC Output lamp -- 1 No 1 No
vi. Globes of Indication lamps
(1 No. of each colour) -- 3 Nos.
vii. PCB’s of each type -- (1Set)
a. DC U/V -- 1 No. 1 No.

b. DC O/V -- 1 No. 1 No.
Page 27 of 28
RAJASTHAN
c. Battery earth fault -- 1 No

d. HV/Phase fail/Reversal -- 1 No. 1 No.
e. SCR Controller card -- 1 No. 1 No.
viii. SCR of each type -- 3 Nos. 3 Nos.

ix. Diode of each type -- 3 Nos. 3 Nos.
x. Tap Diode -- 1 No
NOTE: - All spare parts shall be identical to those used in the equipment offered.
Page 28 of 28
DATA SHEET FOR BATTERY CHARGER SYSTEM
REV. 00
Project No. Unit

REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0
Date 21/12/2018
Prepared By PBS
Checked By PBS
Approved By SKJ
Client Review

A GENERAL
1 Manufacturer : #
2 Model Number : #
3 Quantity No. : 1
4 Method of energy storage : Battery Back-up ( 60 Minutes)
5 Applicable Standard : As per Doc. No.NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-027 Specification for Battery
Charger System.
B SITE CONDITION
5 Minimum Temperature for battery sizing °C : 10
7 Environment : Dry
8 Location : Indoor Switchgear room
C UPS SYSTEM PARTICULARS
1 Input system
1.1 Voltage and Frequency : 415 V, 3 Phase + 1 Neutral (4 Wire), 50 Hz
1.2 Allowable Variation Voltage : ± 10%
1.3 Frequency : ± 1%
2 Output system Output Voltage : 110 V DC
Frequency : 50 Hz ± 1%
4 Space heater : Required (240 V,1-Phase)
D RECTIFIER / CHARGER UNIT
1 Nominal output voltage : 110 V DC
2 Max. Output Voltage variation : ±5 %
3 Battery charger configuration : Dual, Parallel, Each charger rated for 100%
4 Rated output current : $
5 Earthing : Isolated DC system
6 Mounting : Floor
7 Access : Front & Rear
8 Cable entry : Bottom
9 Type of cooling : Natural Air cooled
10 Incoming cable detail : $
11 Power supply detail for anti-condensation Heater & socket outlet : 240 V AC ± 10%, 50 Hz, 1 Ph, 2 W
E BATTERY BANK
1 Nominal output voltage : 110 V DC
2 Design temperature for battery : 10 °C
3 Location : Separate well ventilated room
4 Type of battery : sealed valve regulated lead acid maintenance free
5 Autonomy period : 60 Minutes
6 Battery configuration : Single 100%
7 Flame arrestor : Required
8 Aging factor : 1.25
9 Battery design margin : 20%
F DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
1 Nominal voltage : 110 V DC
2 Rated Current : $
3 Mounting : Floor
4 Access : Front Only
5 Cable Entry : Bottom
6 Incoming cable detail : To be suggested by vendor
7 Cable to DCDB : To be Provided by vendor
8 Power supply detail for anti-condensation Heater & socket outlet : 240 V AC ± 10%, 50 Hz, 1 Ph, 2 W
9 Out-going feeder details : $
G ENCLOSURE DETAILS (RECTIFIER & DCDB)
1 Installation : Free Standing, Self supporting steel cabinet
2 Mounting Arrangement : On Channel
3 Degree of Protection : IP 42
4 Thickness
a) Charger & DCDB Enclosure’s frames : 2 mm CRCA Sheet
b) Doors, covers & gland plates : 1.6 mm CRCA Sheet
5 Hinged Doors : Front and back with dust tight gaskets
6 Operating Height
a) Maximum Height : 1800 mm
b) Minimum Height : 300 mm
7 Front Access : Required
H DEVICE & ACCESSORIES
1 Rating Plate : Required
2 Earthing bosses : Required
3 Lifting Lugs : Required
4 Anti condensation heater : Required
5 Manufacturer Name plate : Required
6 Panel Illumination Lamps : Required
I SPARES
1 Control cards : Required
2 Printed circuit boards of each type used : Required
3 Discrete components like SCRs, diodes, capacitors, resistors, etc. : Required
4 Switches, MCCBs, MCBs etc : Required
5 Power / auxiliary / DC contactors, contactor coils and contact kits : Required
6 Fuses and fuse base (power and control) / Trip indicating fuses : Required
7 Indicating lamp assembly / bulbs / LEDs : Required

8 Toggle switch / push buttons, etc. : Required

9 Annunciate relays etc. : Required
10 Spares for battery : Required
J ACCESSORIES REQUIRED WITH EACH BATTERY SET
1 Cell testing voltmeter (3V-0-3V) Complete with leads : 1 No.
2 Rubber gloves : 4 Pairs
3 Spanner : 1 No.
4 Rubber Apron : 1 No.
5 Vent plug thermometer & pocket thermometer : 1 No.

DC UPS SYSTEM STATION MANUFACTURER'S DATA (TO BE FILLED BY BIDDER)
A BATTERY
1 Manufacturer's name :
2 Design / Manufacturing standard :
3 Type and catalogue no. of cell :
4 Battery Sizing Calculation :
5 Temperature Derating factor :
6 Ampere hour capacity (AH) :
7 No. of cells :
8 Nominal cell voltage :
9 Cell voltage at the end of full discharge at 10 hours rate :
10 Specific gravity of electrolyte at the end of full charging :
11 Specific gravity of electrolyte at the end of full Discharge at 10 hours rate :
12 Quantity of electrolyte per cell (liters) :

13 Weight of each cell with electrolyte (kg) :
14 Rapid charging voltage per cell :
15 Quick charging voltage per cell for constant Voltage finishing charging :
16 Max. rapid charging voltage per cell :
17 Rapid charging current :
18 Max. safe rapid charging rate (amperes) :
19 Suggested rapid charging rate (amperes) :
20 Permissible ripple content :
21 Float charging voltage per cell :
22 Float charging current :
23 Float charging current range (amperes) :
24 AH efficiency at 10 hours/ 5 hours rate :
25 Short circuit current of the battery bank :
26 Short circuit withstand time (sec.) :
27 Max. Allowable temp. of electrolyte which the cells can withstand without :
injurious effects
27.a Continuously :
27.b For short periods :
28 Type of positive plate :
29 Type of negative plate :
30 No. of positive plates per cell :
31 No. of negative plates per cell :
32 Material and thickness of separators :
33 Ampere-hour capacity at min. ambient temperature :
34 Dimensions of each battery rack :
35 Container type :
36 No. of recommended air changes / hour for battery room :
B BATTERY CHARGER
1 Make & Model No of Rectifier :
3 Type of Charger :
4 Current rating :
5 Battery charger Output Voltage :
6 Output Voltage accuracy under specified input :
7 Charger / rectifier input power factor :
8 Output voltage under float / rapid charging condition :
9 Protections Provided :
10 Maximum ripple content on DC side with battery connected / disconnected :
11 Maximum harmonic content in input current :

12 Input transformer rating :
13 Incomer switch rating :
14 Efficiency at rated load :
15 Method of voltage control in float / rapid charge mode :
16 Method of battery current control in float / rapid charge mode :
17 Battery charger dimension :
18 Total weight :
19 Max. Heat loss :
20 IP protection for enclosure :
21 Noise level at rated load : 70 dB(A) at 1 Meter Distance
22 Earth bus size :
23 Max. & Min. operating height :
24 Minimum operating clearances on front rear & sides :
25 Input power factor at rated load. :
26 Battery charger transient response for 100%: load application / Rejection :
with maximum permissible voltage and frequency variation.
27 Time required to fully charge the completely: discharge battery in rapid :
mode of charging.
28 Maximum temperature rise :
29 Transformer details such as type, insulation class, voltage ratio etc: :
30 Provision of AVR, Current limiting & smoothening feature. : YES NO
31 Protections Provided : YES NO
32 Provision of blocking diode & its details : YES NO
33 Provision of manual voltage adjustment: YES NO in rapid charging mode. : YES NO
34 FRLS internal wiring considered : YES NO
C CONTROLS
1 Input circuit breaker on / off switch : YES NO
2 Auto / manual selector switch : YES NO
3 Rectifier on / off control switch : YES NO
4 Rapid charging selector switch : YES NO
5 Charging selector switch : YES NO
6 Voltage adjustment for rapid charging mode : YES NO
7 Current adjustment for rapid charging mode : YES NO

8 Voltage adjustment for float charging mode : YES NO

9 Current adjustment for float charging mode : YES NO
10 Battery isolating circuit breaker : YES NO
11 Rapid / float charging duration timer : YES NO
12 On-line facility for testing battery capacity : YES NO
D BATTERY STAND
1 Type :
2 No.of tires per rack :
3 No. of racks per system :
4 Paint :
5 Dimension :
6 Weight :
7 Maximum Height :
E DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
1 Manufacturer's name :
3 DCDB dimension :
4 Total weight :
5 IP protection for enclosure :
6 Earth bus size :
7 Max. & Min. operating height :
8 Main bus bar sizes. :
9 Minimum operating clearances on front side :
10 Protections provided : YES NO
11 FRLS internal wiring considered :
F PROTECTION
1 AC input phase under voltage :
2 Rectifier Failure :
3 DC Over Voltage :
4 DC Under Voltage :
5 Charger Failure / battery discharging :
6 Cubicle Fan failure :
7 Cubicle temperature high :
8 Battery temperature high :
G INDICATIONS – RECTIFIER / CHARGER
1 AC input supply on : YES NO
2 Rectifier / charger on : YES NO
3 Battery on quick / Initial charge : YES NO
4 Battery on float charge : YES NO
5 Battery feeding load : YES NO
6 Battery temperature for battery : YES NO
7 Rectifier Fuse Fail : YES NO
8 Charge Fault / DC bus fail : YES NO
H INDICATIONS – DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
1 DC supply on : YES NO
2 Outgoing feeder on : YES NO
3 Main Incomer Trip : YES NO
I METERING
1 AC ammeter with selector switch : YES NO
2 AC Voltmeter with selectoe switch : YES NO
3 DC output voltmeter : YES NO
4 DC output ammeter : YES NO
5 DC voltmeter for battery voltage : YES NO
6 DC ammeter for battery : YES NO
7 AH available : YES NO
J ALARAMS & ANNUNCIATION
1 Overload on battery : YES NO
2 Battery under voltage : YES NO
3 Battery disconnected : YES NO
4 DC Over voltage : YES NO
5 DC under voltage : YES NO
6 Rectifier failure : YES NO
7 High ripple voltage : YES NO
8 Main Incomer 1, 2 Breaker Trip : YES NO
9 Main Supply Fail : YES NO
10 Battery Isolation switch open : YES NO
11 Over Temperature : YES NO
12 Common Alarm : YES NO

SPARES:
1 Control Cards.
2 Printed circuit boards of each type used.
3 Discrete components like SCRs, diodes, capacitors, resistors, etc.
4 Switches, MCCBs, MCBs etc.
5 Power / auxiliary / DC contactors, contactor coils and contact kits.
6 Fuses and fuse base (power and control) / Trip indicating fuses.
7 Indicating lamp assembly / bulbs / LEDs.
8 Toggle switch / push buttons, etc.
9 Annunciator, relays etc.
10 Spares for battery.
NOTES:
4 This Data Sheet shall be Read / Refer In Conjunction with Specification for Battery Charger.
5 Cable details shall be furnished during post order document review.
6 Design margin of 20% shall be considered for battery sizing.
7 Normally open (NO) potential-free contacts shall be wired up to terminal strip for connection for owner’s interface, for the following conditions:
Charger Failure.
Inverter Failure.
Battery Discharged.
Battery Isolated.
Serial Interface with data concentrator shall also be provided.

RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTING TRANSFORMER

Page 1 of 11
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 INTRODUCTION
2.0 SCOPE
4.0 OPERATING REQUIREMENTS
5.0 GENERAL DESIGN FEATURES
6.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
7.0 FITTINGS
8.0 PAINTING
11.0 SPARES
12.0 PACKING
Page 2 of 11
RAJASTHAN
ANNEXURES

I DOCUMENTATION FOR LIGHTING TRANSFORMERS
Page 3 of 11
RAJASTHAN
1.0 INTRODUCTION

4000 KL.
2.0 SCOPE
2.1 This standard covers the technical requirements of design, manufacture, testing at
works and dispatch in well packed condition of lighting transformers.
2.2 This standard shall be applicable for 3 phase / single phase, separate winding
transformers of rating below 315 KVA used for lighting.
3.1 The design, manufacture and testing of the equipment covered by this standard shall
comply with the latest issue of following Indian Standards. Equipment complying with
equivalent IEC standards shall also be acceptable.
IS: 1180 Part - 1 & 2 Outdoor type 3 phase distribution transformers up to and including 100 KVA
IS: 2026 Power transformers
IS: 11171 Dry type power transformers
3.2 The design and operational features of the equipment offered shall comply with the
provisions of the latest issue of the Indian Electricity Rules and other relevant
statutory acts and regulations. The supplier shall, wherever necessary, make suitable
modifications in the equipment to comply with the above.
Page 4 of 11
RAJASTHAN
3.3 Wherever any requirement, laid down in this standard, differs from that in Indian
Standard Specifications, the requirement specified herein shall prevail.
4.0 OPERATING REQUIREMENTS
4.1 The transformer shall be suitable for operating at the rated capacity continuously at
any of the taps, under the ambient conditions and with the voltage and frequency
variations as indicated in specification sheet without exceeding the permissible
temperature and without any detrimental effect on any part.
5.0 GENERAL DESIGN FEATURES
5.1 RATED VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY
415V and 50Hz.
5.2 PHASE CONNECTIONS
5.2.1 Three phase transformer
The primary winding shall be connected in delta and secondary winding in star
with neutral point earthed (Vector group Dyn-11)
5.2.2 Single phase transformer
Primary winding shall be connected between two phases of a 3-phase system or

to the three phases in open delta execution as specified in specification sheet
and secondary single-phase winding shall have one terminal earthed with the
tank through link inside the secondary terminal box.
5.3 TAPPING
5.3.1 The transformers shall be provided with off circuit tap changer with tapping of
±2.5% and ±5%.
5.3.2 For transformers having primary 415 V and below, tap changing shall be
effected by means of links in the terminal chamber on the primary side.
Page 5 of 11
RAJASTHAN
5.4 IMPEDANCE VOLTAGE
The impedance voltage of the transformer at 75 ºC shall be 4% unless indicated

otherwise in specification sheet.
5.4.1 Losses
The losses shall be indicated by the vendor and shall be guaranteed, within
tolerable limits specified in IS: 2026 at rated voltage and frequency.
5.4.2 Terminal Arrangement
The primary and secondary side terminals shall be brought outside the tank
through porcelain bushing in dust and weather proof terminal boxes, with links
for tap changing where required and suitable heavy-duty double compression
type aluminum cable glands and cable lugs for receiving cables as indicated in
specification sheet. The neutral point of the secondary winding shall be brought
out separately and earthed to the transformer body through test link. Terminal
board for the primary and the secondary winding shall be amply sized and made
of Synthetic Resin Bonded paper (SRBP) / Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP)
materials.
5.4.3 Resistance to short circuit
The transformers shall be able to with stand electrodynamic stresses due to

terminal short circuit of the secondary assuming primary side fed from the
infinite bus.
5.4.4 Cooling System
Transformers rated up to 50 KVA shall be natural air-cooled type and above 50

KVA shall be natural oil cooled / natural air-cooled type.
Page 6 of 11
RAJASTHAN
6.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
6.1 CORE
The transformer core shall be of high-grade non-ageing electrical silicon cold rolled
magnetic sheet steel of low hysteresis loss and high permeability. The maximum flux
density in any part of the core and yoke at rated voltage and frequency shall not
exceed 1.7 Tesla for oil cooled transformers and 1.3 Tesla for air cooled transformers.
6.1.1 The tank for oil cooled transformer shall be made of mild steel plate of
adequate thickness. Cooling tubes, where necessary, shall be provided.
6.1.2 Air cooled transformer shall be sheet steel enclosed having minimum thickness
of 2.0 mm and shall be provided with suitable reinforcement as required. The
minimum degree of protection for the enclosure shall be IP: 31. Ventilating
louvers, if provided, shall be covered by fine wire mesh.
6.1.3 All external hardware shall be cadmium plated.
6.2 WINDINGS
6.2.1 Coil shall be made out of electrolytic grade copper conductor.
6.2.2 Class-F / class-H insulating material shall be used for air cooled transformers.
6.2.3 For oil cooled transformer class-A insulating material shall be used. Mineral oil
shall comply with IS: 325. 10% extra oil shall be supplied along with transformer
in non-returnable drums.
6.2.4 Winding assembly shall be dried and impregnated in vacuum with tested
insulating oil / varnish.
6.3 BUSHING
The bushing insulators shall be rated for the maximum system voltage and shall
comply with the requirement laid down in IS: 2099 / IS: 7421. The minimum current
rating shall be 250A.
Page 7 of 11
RAJASTHAN
7.0 FITTINGS
7.1 Following fittings shall be provided for air cooled transformers.
i. Rating and diagram plate

ii. Lifting lug
iii. Primary and secondary cable boxes with heavy duty double compression type
aluminum cable glands and lugs.
iv. Earthing terminals
v. Rollers (for 25 KVA and above)
7.2 In addition to the above following fittings shall be provided for oil cooled transformer.
i. Oil conservator complete with drain plug, oil filling hole with cover and oil level
indicator with minimum marking.
ii. Silica gel breather
iii. Dial type thermometer
iv. Oil sampling cum drain valve
v. Explosion vent
vi. Air release plug
7.3 Any other fittings which may be necessary for satisfactory operation of the
transformer shall also be provided.
7.4 All fittings shall conform to relevant Indian Standards.
8.0 PAINTING
8.1 The surface shall be painted after removing all dust, scale and foreign adhering
matter. All traces of oil and greases should be removed by suitable treatment.
8.2 All steel surfaces in contact with insulating oil shall be painted with heat resistant oil
insoluble insulating varnish.
8.3 All steel surfaces exposed to outside shall be painted with suitable anti rust and anti-
corrosive paints. Epoxy paints shall be used, if indicated in specification sheet.
Page 8 of 11
RAJASTHAN
8.4 All paints shall be carefully selected to withstand tropical heat and extremes of
weather. The paint shall not scale off, crinkle or be removed by abrasion due to
normal handling.
8.5 Unless otherwise specified, the finishing shade shall be light grey shade no. 631 as per
IS: 5.
8.6 1-litre paint per air / oil cooled transformer shall be supplied for touch up at site.
9.1 All transformers shall be routine tested as per IS: 2026.
9.2 Additional tests, wherever specified, shall be carried out on one transformer of each
rating.
9.3 All the above-mentioned tests shall be carried out in the presence of purchaser’s
representative. In addition, the transformer shall be subjected to stage inspection at
works and inspection at site for final acceptance.
9.4 These inspections shall, however, not absolve the vendor from his responsibility for
making good any defect which may be noticed subsequently.
10.1 The drawings and documents as per Annexure-I shall be supplied, unless otherwise
specified.
10.2 All drawings and documents shall have the following descriptions written boldly.
• Name of client
• Name of Consultant
• Enquiry / Order No. with plant / project name
• Equipment Code no. and Description
Page 9 of 11
RAJASTHAN
11.0 SPARES
11.1 SPARES FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Item wise unit prices of following items as applicable shall be offered along with the
main equipment with recommended quantity for a period as indicated in specification
sheet.
i. Bushing with accessories for all voltage grades

ii. Complete set of gaskets
iii. Oil level gauge (for oil cooled transformer only)
iv. Complete charge of silica gel with glass container (for oil cooled transformer only)
v. Gland packing / O-ring for every valve (for oil cooled transformer only)
11.2 COMMISSIONING SPARES
Commissioning spares, as required, shall be supplied with the main equipment. Item
wise list of recommended commissioning spares shall be furnished for approval
11.3 Any other spare parts not specified, but required, shall also be quoted along with the
offer.
11.4 All spare parts shall be identical to the parts used in the equipment.
12.0 PACKING
12.1 The transformers shall be suitably packed in wooden crates to avoid damage in
transit. Oil cooled transformers shall be properly sealed so as to completely exclude
oxygen and moisture from coming in contact with oil.
12.2 The packing box shall contain a copy of the installation, operation and maintenance
manual.
Page 10 of 11
RAJASTHAN
ANNEXURE – I
DOCUMENTATION FOR LIGHTING TRANSFORMERS

3. Dimensional drawing with terminal Y Y Y
arrangement details
4. Illustrative and descriptive literature Y N Y
manual
6. Test Certificates N N Y
8. Spare parts list with identification marks Y N Y
Note:

the date of LOI.
coated folder.
Y - Yes, N - No
Page 11 of 11
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR SUB DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

Page 1 of 19
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 SCOPE
2.0 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
3.0 SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
4.0 WIRES
5.0 CONDUITS
6.0 LIGHTING AND POWER WIRING
7.0 TELEPHONE & COMPUTER
Page 2 of 19
RAJASTHAN
1.0 SCOPE
This standard covers the technical requirements of design, manufacture, testing at

works and delivery in well packed condition of distribution boards.
2.0 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

2.1 AC DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
2.1.1 General
a. Distribution boards shall comprise factory assembled and wired, totally

enclosed, metal clad fabricated from 14-gauge M.S. sheet with gasket at all
points or shall be readymade as specified in the material list.
b. It shall be of double door type with hinged (lockable if required) door
suitable for recessed mounting in wall. Distribution boards shall be epoxy
powder coated with minimum 7-tank process application for de-rusting, de-
greasing, rinsing, phosphate etc.
c. The distribution boards shall be provided with phase barriers, wiring
channels to accommodate wires and individual per phase neutral links.
There shall be separate or individual earth link as per requirement. Proper
arrangement shall be made for mounting of MCCB’s / MCB’s and other
accessories.
d. Distribution boards shall meet with the requirements of IS: 2675 and
marking arrangement of bus bars shall be in accordance with I.S. relevant
standards. Updated and current Indian Standard Specifications codes of
practice will apply to the equipment and the work covered by the scope of
this contract.
Page 3 of 19
RAJASTHAN
e. In addition, relevant clauses of the Indian Electricity Act 1910, Indian

Electricity Rules 1956, National Building Code 2007, National Electric Code
2011, Codes of Practice for Fire Safety of Building (general): General
principal and Fire Grading – IS 1641 – 1988 as amended up to date shall also
apply. Wherever appropriate Indian Standards are not available, relevant
British and / or IEC Standards shall be applicable.
Miniature Circuit Breakers for AC circuits IS 8828 – 1996 and IEC 947
Residual current operated circuit breakers IS12640 – 1988
Low voltage switch gears and control gear part-II IS 13947 – 1993
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for low IS 10118 – 1982
Voltage switchgear
General requirements for switchgear and control gear IS 4237 – 1982
For voltages not exceeding 1000 volts
2.1.2 Bus Bar
a. Bus bars shall be suitable for the incoming switch rating and sized for a
temperature rise of 40 °C over the ambient temp of 50 °C. Each board shall
have two separate earth terminals. Circuit diagram indicating the load
distribution shall be pasted on the inside of the DB as instructed. One earth
terminal for single phase and two terminals for 3 phase DB’s shall be
provided with an earth wire as per table 250.122 of NEC 2008 connecting
the studs and the outgoing ECU earth bar. The degree of protection for the
distribution board should be IP 42.
b. The bus bars shall be supported on non-breakable, non-hygroscopic epoxy
resin or glass fiber reinforced polymer insulated supports able to withstand
operating temperature of 110°C at regular intervals, to withstand the forces
arising from a fault level of 16 / 10kA as stipulated in SLD. The bus bar shall
be hard drawn annealed tinned ETP grade copper.
c. The top and the bottom faces of the D.B. shall be provided for conduit entry
of minimum 20 mm. dia. The faces if asked shall be kept detachable.
Page 4 of 19
RAJASTHAN
d. All outgoing feeders shall terminate on a terminal strip which in turn is

interconnected to the MCB / Fuse base by means of insulated multi strand
copper conductor, FR PVC insulated copper wires as follows
Up to 15 A 2.5 sq. mm.

25 A 4.0 sq. mm.
32 A 6.0 sq. mm.
40 A 10 sq. mm.
63 A 16 sq. mm.
e. Each DB shall have indicating lamps preferably neon type denoting power
availability in the board after the switch, indicating lamps shall be complete
with fuses.
2.1.3 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
I. General
a. Moulded-Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB) shall comply with IS 13947: 1993

standards.
b. They shall be of utilization category A on all the operational voltage
range – till 250 A and category B on all the operational voltage range –
for any rating with adjustable short time delay (if specified) with a rated
service breaking capacity (Ics) equal to the ultimate breaking capacity
(Icu) up to 500 V for the greater ratings
c. They shall have a rated operational voltage of 690 V AC (50 Hz)
d. They shall have a rated insulation voltage of 800 V AC (50 Hz)
e. They shall be suitable for isolation, as defined by IS 13947: 1993 for the
Overvoltage Category IV for a rated insulation voltage up to 690 V.
f. MCCBs shall be designed according to Eco-design complying with ISO
14062 Especially MCCB’s materials shall be of halogen free type. They
shall be supplied in recyclable packing complying with European
Directives.
g. The manufacturer shall implement non-polluting production processes
that do not make use of chlorofluorocarbons, chlorinated hydrocarbons,
ink for cardboard markings, etc.
Page 5 of 19
RAJASTHAN
h. MCCBs shall be available in plug-in versions in 3-pole and 4-pole versions.

A safety trip shall provide advanced opening to prevent connection and
disconnection of a closed-circuit breaker
i. MCCBs shall be designed for both vertical and horizontal mounting,
without any adverse effect on electrical performance. It shall be possible
to supply power either from the upstream or downstream side MCCBs
shall provide class II insulation between the front and internal power
circuits.
j. Rated short circuit (breaking capacity) shall be 50kA and making capacity
shall not be less than 105kA.
II. Construction, Operation, Environment
a. For maximum safety, the power contacts shall be insulated in an

enclosure made of a thermosetting. material from other functions such
as the operating mechanism, the case, the trip unit and auxiliaries
b. All poles shall operate simultaneously for circuit breaker opening, closing
and tripping.
c. MCCBs shall be actuated by a handle that clearly indicates the three
positions: ON, OFF and TRIPPED.
d. In order to ensure suitability for isolation complying with IS 13947: 1993:
• the operating mechanism shall be designed such that the toggle or

handle can only be in OFF position (O) if the power contacts are all
actually separated
• in OFF position, the handle shall indicate the isolation position.
e. Isolation shall be provided by a double break on the main circuit.

f. MCCBs shall be able to receive a device for locking in the “isolated”
position, with up to 3 padlocks, O8 maximum.
g. MCCBs shall be equipped with a “push to trip” button in front to test
operation and the opening of the poles.
h. MCCB rating, “push to trip” button, performances and contact position
indication must be clearly visible and accessible from the front, through
the front panel or the door of the switchboard.
III. Current Limitation, Discrimination, Durability
Page 6 of 19
RAJASTHAN
a. All the MCCBs shall be equipped with a tripping unit type.

b. MCCBs shall comprise a device, designed to trip the circuit-breaker in
the event of high-value (50 kA) short-circuit currents. This device shall
be independent of the thermal-magnetic or electronic trip unit.
c. MCCBs, the current ratings of which are identical with the ratings of
their trip units, shall ensure discrimination for any fault current up to at
least 25 kA rms, with any downstream circuit-breaker having a current
rating less or equal to 0.4 times that of the upstream circuit-breaker.
d. The electrical durability of MCCBs shall be as defined by IS 13947: 1993
standard.
e. MCCBs shall be equipped with a self-test of the connection between the
electronic trip unit, the current transformers and the actuator, that will
not cause the circuit breaker to trip. The self-test will be of positive
logic and visible through the flashing of a green LED in case the self-test
occurred correctly and the extinction of the LED in case the self-test
failed.
f. The MCCB shall trip in case the environmental conditions of the circuit-
breaker get out of their specified range. However, it will be possible to
overrule this feature.
IV. Auxiliaries and Accessories
a. Closing shall take place in less than 80 ms.

b. Following tripping due to electrical faults (overload, short-circuit, earth
fault if mentioned in SLD), remote reset shall be inhibited.
c. It shall however be possible if opening was initiated by a voltage release.
d. The operating mechanism shall be of the stored-energy type only
e. The addition of a motor mechanism or a rotary handle shall in no way
affect circuit breaker characteristics:
• Only three stable tripping mechanism positions (ON, OFF and

TRIPPED) shall be possible with the motor mechanism
f. MCCBs shall be designed to enable safe on-site installation of auxiliaries

indication switches as follows:
i. They shall be separated from power circuits
Page 7 of 19
RAJASTHAN
ii. All electrical auxiliaries shall be of the snap-in type and fitted with
terminal blocks
iii. All auxiliaries shall be common for the entire range
iv. Auxiliary function and terminals shall be permanently engraved on
the case of the circuit breaker and the auxiliary itself.
v. The addition of auxiliaries shall not increase the volume of the circuit
breaker.
g. The addition of a motor mechanism module or a rotary handle, etc.,

shall not mask or block device settings. It shall be possible to assemble
earth fault protection moulded-case circuit breakers.
i. Be capable of working normally down to -25 °C ambient temperature

ii. ii. Operate without an auxiliary power supply, i.e. it shall be capable
of operating normally on any 2-phase or 3-phase power network with
a voltage between 200 V and 440 V, and of tripping the circuit-
breaker even in the event of voltage dips down to 80 V
h. It shall be possible to equip MCCBs with devices indicating faults without

tripping the circuit breaker
V. Protection Functions
A. General Recommendations
i. MCCBs with ratings up to 160 A shall be equipped with fully

interchangeable trip units in order to ensure the protection against
overload and short-circuit. The trip units shall be microprocessor-
based release without earth fault / with external earth fault module,
wherever specified in SLD / BOQ.
ii. MCCBs with ratings 160 A and above shall be equipped with
microprocessor-based trip units with protection against overload and
short-circuit & inbuilt earth fault and shall be plug in type.
B. Common Features
i. Electronic trip units shall be adjustable and it shall be possible to fit

lead seals to prevent unauthorized access to the settings
Page 8 of 19
RAJASTHAN
ii. Electronic trip units shall comply with IS 13947: 1993 standard
(measurement of rms current values, electromagnetic compatibility,
etc.)
iii. Protection settings shall apply to all circuit breaker poles. The trip
units shall not augment overall circuit breaker volume. All electronic
components shall withstand temperatures up to 125 °C.
C. Characteristics
i. Long time protection (LT)

ii. Selectable Ir threshold settings from 40 % to 100 % of the trip unit
rating
iii. Short time protection (ST)
iv. Isd threshold shall be adjustable from 1,5 to 10 times the thermal
setting Ir,
v. The time delay shall be either adjustable or fixed at 40 ms,
vi. Instantaneous protection
vii. The threshold shall be either adjustable or fixed (starting from 1.5
times In and up to a value between 11 and 15 times In, depending on
the rating)
D. Load Monitoring Function
• The following monitoring functions shall be integral parts of

electronic trip units:
a. LED for load indication, one lighted above 90 % of Ir, and one
lighted above 105 % of Ir
b. A test connector shall be installed for checks on electronic and
tripping mechanism operation using an external device.
E. Thermal Memory
i. In the event of repeated overloads, the electronic trip unit shall

optimize protection of cables and downstream devices by memorising
temperature variations.
ii. Options:
Page 9 of 19
RAJASTHAN
a. It shall be possible to install all options for the electronic trip

unit:
• High-threshold earth-fault protection,

• Auxiliary contact to indicate the cause of tripping (long time,
short time, instantaneous, earth fault if requested),
• Data transmission via a BUS, in particular all the trip unit
settings, current measurements for each phase, tripping
causes, circuit breaker status alarms.
2.1.4 Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB):
a. MCB’s shall have quick make and break non-welding self-wiping silver alloy
contacts for 10 / 16 kA short circuit both on the manual and automatic
operation. Each pole of the breaker shall be provided with inverse time
thermal over load and instantaneous over current tripping elements, with
trip-free mechanism. In case of multi-pole breakers, the tripping must be on
all the poles and operating handle shall be common.
b. Electrical life and Mechanical life of the MCB shall be as per IS: 13947-2 /
IEC-60974-2
c. Breakers must confirm to BS 3871 with facility for locking in OFF position.
Pressure clamp terminals for stranded / solid conductor insertion are
acceptable up to 4 sq.mm. Aluminum or 2.5 sq.mm. Copper and for higher
ratings, the terminals shall be suitably shrouded. Wherever MCB isolators
are specified they are without the tripping elements. The MCBs shall have
following features in accordance with IEC 60364:
i. Protection against contact with live parts.

ii. Dual function terminals enabling simultaneous connection of bus bar and
cable without any connection pieces.
iii. Positioning of MCBs on DIN rail.
iv. Padlocking and sealing facility for every pole in ON and OFF position.
v. Short circuit capacity of 10kA.
2.2 DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
2.2.1 General
Page 10 of 19
RAJASTHAN
a. The DC Distribution boards shall be provided with 2 Nos. busbars made out
of electrolytic copper of adequate capacity duly tinned supported by bus-
bar supporters.
b. These bus bars will be connected to 110 V D.C 2 wire system consisting of
110 V, VRLA batteries or battery charger rated for 110 V D.C output.
c. The DC Distribution boards required under this specification are to feed
lighting circuits and shall work satisfactorily under the severest operating
and climatic conditions and shall conform to the relevant IS/BS of latest
issue.
d. The D.C distribution board shall comprise the following components:
i. Double Pole DC MCB for incoming DC Supply 1 No. (25 A)

ii. Double Pole DC MCB for outgoing DC Supply 6 Nos. (10 A)
e. All the D.C Circuit breakers (MCB) shall be mounted on the front of the
panel. All the MCBs shall be inside the front panel and operating handle
alone shall protrude out of the panel.
f. The D.C. Distribution Board shall be of simplex type, sheet steel cubicle,
indoor type, wall mounted and self-supporting. It shall be totally enclosed,
completely dust tight, weather and vermin proof.
g. The D.C distribution Board shall be made out of suitable angles and CRCA
Sheet of 16SWG for the front, 18SWG for the back, top and sides, and 14
SWG for bottom. The Height, depth and suitable width to accommodate all
components i.e., adequate clearance / space should be provided between
item to item to facilitate easy handling at the time of attending on repairs.
The D.C distribution Board shall be provided with hinged type rear doors.
h. The internal wiring of the D.C. distribution board shall be carried out with
FRPVC Insulated 650 V / 1.1 kV grade copper conductor, The wiring shall be
carried out with 2.5 Sq.mm copper conductors. All wiring for external
connections shall be brought to 650 V grade single piece molded terminal
blocks with barriers. Suitable terminal blocks with stud type terminals shall
be provided. The cables used shall have ISI marking on them.
i. The DC distribution boards shall be provided with indicating lamps to
indicate DC supply ON position, for all circuits.
j. The DC distribution boards shall be complete in all respects with all internal
wiring incoming and outgoing terminals, labels, Earthling connection and
required cable glands.
Page 11 of 19
RAJASTHAN
2.2.2 Painting
a. Regarding painting of the panel, Bidders may please note that outside
visible portion of the panel (when doors are closed) must be painted with
light Grey shade No. 631 of IS-5 (or any shade approved by the Architect)
and inside of the panel with Brilliant white and Base channel with black
paint after necessary primary coats of red –oxide. All external surfaces shall
receive a minimum of 3 coats of Paint.
b. Anticorrosive Acid resistant paint is to be provided for interior side of the
System Box, The paint shall be guaranteed for 5 year from the date of
receipt of material.
2.2.3 Workmanship
a. The D.B. shall be properly grouted in the wall in concealed manner taking
care that the powder coating is not scratched, and dents are not formed on
the D.B.
b. The MCBs in the distribution boards shall be fixed as per the circuit details
provided.
c. All the wires terminating in the MCBs and the ELCBs shall be lugged for
proper contact and ferrules depicting the circuit nos. shall be provided.
D.B.s mounted in concealed manner shall have a groove around it so as to
save the finish of the plaster and color during future opening of the door.
d. The distribution boards shall have circuit chart tagged on the door for future
maintenance. Danger notice plates shall be fitted to the distribution boards
with screws and not stuck so as to assure its presence for a longer duration.
2.2.4 Mode of Measurement
• The distribution boards shall be measured in nos. and the MCBs shall be
measured in nos. separately.
3.0 SWITCHES & SOCKETS:
3.1 SWITCHES & SOCKETS:
Page 12 of 19
RAJASTHAN
a. Switches shall be modular type with silver-coated contacts. Sockets shall be 5 pins
with switch and plate type cover. Combination of multiple switch units and sockets
should be used to minimize the switch boxes.
b. Modular type switch sockets with M.C.B / Isolator mounted in a galvanized steel
box shall be provided.
3.2 SWITCH PLATE AND BOX:
• Plates of the same make, as that of switches shall be used with the modular range.
Also M.S. boxes shall be taken as switch boxes.
4.0 WIRES
a. All wires shall be single core multi-strand / flexible copper or single strand Copper
(if specified in BOQ), FRLS XLPE insulated HFLS / ZHFR grade as per IS: 694 and
shall be 660 V \ 1100 V with 99.97% pure electrolytic grade bright annealed
stranded bare copper conductors. The cable shall have ISI mark. All wires shall be
color coded as follows:
Phase Color of wire

R Red
Y Yellow
B Blue
N Black
Earth Green (insulated)
Control (if any) Grey
All wire Same as Phase wire
4.1 GENERAL
a. All the wiring, outlet points shall be done in a concealed manner in wall & slab in
PVC Rigid conduit of minimum 25 mm dia. (medium gauge) & with 650 v / 1100 v
grade PVC insulated flexible copper conductor wire.
b. The switches should be modular with moulded cover plates, blank plates for outlet
boxes. The accessories, connectors, sockets, should be fixed with brass chrome /
cadmium plated machine screw.
Page 13 of 19
RAJASTHAN
c. For fan points, the rates should be with hum -free type 300 W regulators as
required to complete the point wiring. The wiring shall be as per IS: 732 and IS:
4648.
d. The wiring shall be done in a looping manner so as to avoid junction boxes at any
place. All the looping shall be done only in the switchboard and outlet points. The
size of the wire shall be as per the specification. Color code shall be strictly
followed.
e. The size of wires shall as follows:
Two nos. of 15 / 16 Amps. socket out let connected in parallel from DB to first outlet
Phase / Neutral 2.5 m m²
Earth 2.5 m m²
From first outlet to second outlet.
Phase / Neutral 2.5 mm²
Earth 2.5 mm2
Light, fans exhaust fan, 5 Amp. On board plug point, bell point etc from switch to outlet.
Phase / Neutral 1.5 mm2
Earth 1.5 mm2
From D.B. to switch board – lighting / 5 A socket etc – i.e. circuit mains part of point wiring
Earth 2.5 mm2
25 Amps. Socket outlet for AC (Single Phase / Three Phase)
Earth 2.5 mm2
15/16 Amps. Socket outlet for appliances or looped from sockets with 4 sq mm2.
Earth 2.5 mm2
f. Separate conduit pipes shall be laid for off wires and circuit mains.
g. Circuit mains of same phase shall be drawn in one pipe with prior permission /
discussion with the consultant.
Page 14 of 19
RAJASTHAN
h. Separate phase, neutral and earth wire of sizes recommended by consultant shall
be drawn for each and every circuit mains.
i. Mains for lighting and on-board plug points shall be of one-size higher wires than
those used in off.
j. The point definition shall be wiring from D.B. to S.B through conduit and there
from to final outlet point including switches and accessories, junction boxes, fan
boxes, zarri work with cement –sand etc. shall be of SUGGESTED / RECOMMENDED
MAKE.
5.0 CONDUITS
i. Conduits shall be kept at a minimum distance of 100 mm. from the pipes of
other non-electrical services. And maintain minimum 300 mm distance between
telephones, TV & Computer piping.
ii. Separate conduits/raceways shall be used for :
• Normal lights and 5 A ,3 pin sockets on lighting circuit.
• Emergency lighting.
• Telephones.
• For all other voltages higher or lower than 230 V.
• Computer Wiring
• Separate conduit shall be laid from D.B. to switch board.
iii. Electrical Raceway to be used for taking LAN Cables
iv. General points
a) Wiring for short extensions to outlets in hung ceiling or to vibrating equipments,

motors etc., shall be installed in flexible conduits. Otherwise rigid conduits shall
be used. No flexible extension shall exceed 1.25 m.
b) Conduits run on surfaces shall be supported on metal 12 mm. thick G.I. pressure
saddles which in turn are properly screwed to the wall or ceiling. Saddles shall be
at intervals of not more than 500 mm. Fixing screws shall be with round or cheese
head and of rust-proof materials.
Page 15 of 19
RAJASTHAN
c) Exposed conduits shall be M.S. & neatly run parallel or at right angles to the walls
of the building. Unseemly conduit bends and offsets shall be avoided by using
fabricated mild steel junction/pull through boxes for better appearances.
d) No cross-over of conduits shall be allowed unless it is necessary and entire conduit
installation shall be clean and neat in appearance.
e) Conduits embedded into the walls shall be fixed by means of staples at not more
than 500 mm. intervals. Chases in the walls shall be neatly made and refilled after
laying the conduit and brought to the finish of the wall but the building Contractor
will do final finish.
f) Conduits buried in concrete structure shall be put in position and securely fastened
to the reinforcement and got approved by the CLIENT AND/OR ITS ARCHITECT,
before the concrete is poured.
g) Proper care shall be taken to ensure that the conduits are neither dislocated nor
choked at the time of pouring the concrete suitable fish wires shall be drawn in all
conduits before they are embedded.
h) Where conduit passes through expansion joints in the building, adequate expansion
fittings shall be used to take care of any relative movement.
i) Inspection boxes shall be provided for periodical inspection to facilitate
withdrawal and removal of wires. Such inspection boxes shall be flush with the
wall or ceiling in the case of concealed conduits. Inspection boxes shall be spaced
at not more than 12 meters apart or two 90° solid bends or equal.
j) All junction and switch boxes shall be covered by 6 mm clear plate. These junction
boxes shall form part of point wiring or conduit wiring as the case may be including
the cost of removing the cover for painting and re-fixing. No separate charges shall
be allowed except where specially mentioned.
k) Conduits shall be free from sharp edges and burrs and the threading free from
grease or oil. The entire system of conduits must be completely installed and
rendered electrically continuous before the conductors are pulled in. Conduits
should terminate in junction boxes of not less than 32 mm. deep.
l) An insulated earth wire of copper rated capacity shall be run in each conduit.
6.0 Lighting & Power Wiring:

a) All final branch circuits for lighting and appliances shall be single conductor/
stranded/ flexible wires run inside conduits. The conduit shall be properly
connected or jointed into sockets, bends, and junction boxes.
b) Branch circuit conductor sizes shall be as shown in the schedule of quantities and
or drawings.
Page 16 of 19
RAJASTHAN
c) All circuits shall preferably be kept in a separate conduit up to the Distribution

Board. No other wiring shall be bunched in the same conduit except those
belonging to the same phase. Each lighting branch circuit shall not have more than
ten outlets or 800 watts whichever is lower. Each conduit shall not hold more than
three branch circuits.
d) Flexible cords for connection to appliances, fans and pendants shall be 650/1100 V
grade (three or four cores i.e. with insulated neutral wire of same size) with
tinned stranded copper wires, insulated, twisted and sheathed with strengthening
cord. Color of sheath shall be subject to the NAYARA ENERGY LTD AND/OR ITS
ARCHITECT’S approval.
e) Looping system of wiring shall be used. Wires shall not be jointed. Where joints are
unavoidable, they shall be made through approved mechanical connectors. No such
joints shall be made unless the length of the sub-circuit, sub-main or main is more
than the length of the standard coil.
f) Control switches shall be connected in the phase conductors only and shall be ÒN'
when knob is down. Switches shall be fixed in 3 mm. thick painted or galvanized
steel boxes with cover plates as specified. Cadmium plated brass screws shall be
used.
g) Power wiring shall be distinctly separate from lighting wiring. Conduits not less
than 25 mm. and wires not less than 2.5 sq.mm. Copper shall be used.
h) Every conductor shall be provided with identification ferrules at both ends
matching the drawings.
i) Testing: the entire installation shall be tested for the following:
- Insulation resistance.
- Earth continuity.
- Polarity of single pole switches.
7.0 SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE AND COMPUTER SYSTEM
7.1 General
a) The type of cables and the services shall be as follows:

✓ Outdoor – Multi pair PVC sheath armored / un-armored as specified 0.6 mm tin
Cu. Cable.
✓ Outside – Multi pair PVC sheath armored / jelly filled as specified 0.6 mm tin
Cu. Cable.
Page 17 of 19
RAJASTHAN
b) All multi core cables and wires shall be of tinned copper conductor of not less
than 0.6 mm dia and shall be color coded twisted pairs with rip cord.
c) The conductor resistance shall be less than 150 ohms per KM and the insulation
resistance between the conductors not less than 50 mega ohms and the nominal
capacitance of about 0.1 microfarad per kilometer.
d) Cables laid underground or locations subject to dampness and flooding shall be
filled with polyethylene compound and shall have sufficient protection against
moisture and water ingress.
e) All armoring shall be of galvanized steel wires and protected against corrosion by
an outer sheath of PVC in the case of outdoor cables and polyethylene in the case
of outdoor cables. Outer sheathing must be fire retarding and anti-termite.
f) All un-armored single core cables and inner sheath of armored cables shall be
provided with ripcord.
7.2 TELEPHONE TAG BLOCKS:

a) The telephone tag blocks shall be suitable for the multi core telephone cables and
shall have two terminal blocks, cross connect type.
b) All incoming and outgoing cables shall be terminated on separate terminal blocks
and termination shall be silver soldered. The cross connecting jumpers shall be
insulated wires of same diameter and screw connected.
c) The tag blocks shall be mounted inside fabricated sheet steel boxes with
removable hinged covers and shall be fully accessible. The enclosure shall be
painted with 2 coats of red oxide and stove enameled.
7.3 TELEPHONE OUTLET SOCKET

a) Telephone outlet socket shall be of the same make as that of the switches and
accessories.
b) The outlet sockets shall consist of 2 A 2 Pair polyethene connector in M.S.I / PVC
boxes with switch plate of the same make as that of switches and telephone
socket.
c) The telephone outlet socket unless and otherwise specified shall be jack type and
not pin type.
7.4 COMPUTER WIRES

a) The computer wires shall be of 4 pair enhanced Cat 6e category and shall be of the
makes as specified in the tender.
b) The wires used shall be as per the specifications laid down in relevant standard for
the certification of the network installed.
Page 18 of 19
RAJASTHAN
7.5.1 COMPUTER DATA OUTLET SOCKETS:

a) The computer sockets shall be of e Cat 5 category and of the make specified in the
tender.
b) The sockets shall be installed in the plates of the modular switches range to be
used. The sockets shall be crimped using crimping tool with the Cat 5e wire.
7.6 WORKMANSHIP
a) All cables shall be on cable conduits and neatly stitched together.
b) The connection at the tag blocks shall be silver soldered so as to achieve minimum
contact resistance.
c) The final branch connections with single pair cables in conduits and the maximum
number of cables in each conduit shall be as follows:
Conduit diameter Diameter Max no. of Cables

(in inch) (in mm)
3/4" 20 2 Nos. single pair
1" 25 6 Nos. single pair
d) The tag blocks shall be mounted inside fabricated sheet steel boxes with
removable hinged covers and shall be fully accessible. The enclosure shall be
painted with 2 coats of red oxide and stove enamelled.
Page 19 of 19
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR BUS DUCT

Page 1 of 10
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 GENERAL
2.0 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
8.0 WARRANTY
Page 2 of 10
RAJASTHAN
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
This specification covers the technical requirements for the design, manufacture,
inspection and testing at bidder’s works, installation at site and commissioning for
non-segregated metal enclosed compact aluminum bus duct, to be installed in the
Petroleum Storage Terminal Project of Nayara Energy Ltd. (NEL), Pali,Rajasthan.
The design, material, manufacturing, inspection, testing, installation at site,

commissioning and performance of bus duct shall comply with all currently applicable
statutory acts, regulations and safety codes in the locality where the equipment will
be installed. The equipment shall also conform to applicable IS or relevant standards
of the country of manufacture. Nothing in this specification shall be construed to
relieve the bidder of his responsibility.
The relevant Indian and International Standards are:
IS: 5 Colors for ready mixed paints & enamels

IS: 4237 General requirements for switchgear & control gear for voltage not exceeding 1000 V
IS: 5082 (1981) Specification for wrought Aluminum & AL alloy bars, rods, tubes & sections for
electrical purposes
IS: 8623 (1993) Factory-built assemblies of switchgear and control gear For voltages up to and
including 1000 V AC and 1200 V DC
IEC: 60439 Short Circuit ratings of bus ways
IS: 13947 (1993) Specification for LV Switchgear & Control Gear
IEC: 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosure
BS EN 60439-1&2 Low Voltage switch gear combination - type tested of assembly busbar trunking
system
In case of any contradiction between various referred standards / specifications /

data sheets and statutory regulations, the following order of priority shall be given:
i. Statutory regulations
ii. Data sheets
iii. Unit Specifications
iv. This Specification
Page 3 of 10
RAJASTHAN
v. Codes & Standards
The bus duct shall be suitable for operating in humid & corrosive atmosphere found in
refineries & petrochemical plants. Service conditions shall be defined as
Maximum ambient temperature: 47 °C

Minimum ambient temperature: 5 °C
Relative humidity: 50 - 60 %
Wind speed: 0.5 - 6.0 m/s
3.1 CONSTRUCTION
i. Busbar flat conductor material: Electrolytic grade aluminum 99.9% pure with 60 %
IACS conductivity
ii. No. of phases: 3 phase and neutral
iii. Type: Non segregated design with extruded class F epoxy insulation. The epoxy
shall be fire retardant.
iv. Jointing of busbar: overlap joint with coating and single bolt mechanism with high
tension bolts and Belleville washers.
v. Rated Current: 3200 Amps for transformer secondary.
vi. Rated operational voltage: 500 volts, AC 50 Hz
vii. Type of laying: Interleaving
viii. Busbar Insulator: SMC or better, non-hygroscopic
ix. Type of Enclosure: IP 55 or better
x. Installation type: Indoor/Outdoor for 3200A.
xi. Enclosure of Busduct: Electro galvanized with minimum 1.6 mm thick housing. The
entire housing shall be epoxy powder quoted to prevent corrosion and atmospheric
conditions.
xii. Max Rise of busbar temperature: 50ºC above max ambient temp.
xiii. Enclosure earthing: 2 nos of 50 mm x 6mm tinned copper flat through-out the
enclosure
xiv. All the necessary supports for installation of busbar from the bottom or at
horizontal surface are in the scope of supply of bidder.
Page 4 of 10
RAJASTHAN
xv. Civil works for busduct supports is in the scope of bidder.
3.2 ENCLOSURE
3.2.1 Mechanical strength
The design of bus duct enclosure shall be such that it will withstand the
internal or external forces resulting from the following
1. Rated operating current (continuous)

2. Momentary shot-circuit currents (Peak): 105 KA peak, AC, 50 kA for 1 sec
Type test certificate for the above requirement shall be submitted. The test
certificate shall be issued by govt. approved laboratory.
3.2.2 Flexible expansion joints
Flexible expansion joints for the enclosure shall be provided wherever deemed
necessary by the bidder. Expansion joints shall take care of expansion and
contraction due to temperature variation and fault conditions.
3.2.3 Gaskets
The gaskets material and thickness shall be so selected as to satisfy the

operating conditions imposed by temperature and weather
3.2.4 Earthing
Two runs of 50 mm X 6 mm tinned copper flat through out the length.
The earth bus shall have provision to connect it either to the system earth bus
or the earth bus of the equipment on which the bus duct is terminating, to the
case may be.
Page 5 of 10
RAJASTHAN
3.2.5 Space heater
a. The bus duct shall be provided with space heaters of adequate capacity to
avoid moisture condensation within bus duct.
b. The space heater shall be rated for 240 V, single phase, 50 Hz AC supply.
The space heater shall be automatically controlled by thermostat.
c. Necessary wiring shall be done and connections shall be brought out to
terminal connector to receive 240 V AC supply.
3.2.6 Flanges
a. Necessary flange opening shall be provided at the terminating ends of the

bus duct.
b. These flanges shall match with corresponding flanges in the equipment to
which they are connected.
3.3 BUS BARS
3.3.1 Busbar Joints
a. The termination of bus bars at the transformer & switchgear end shall be
done through tinned copper flexible joints.
b. At the bends, the bus bars shall bend at a radius of 2t where ‘t’ is the
thickness of the bus bars and the radius is measured to the inside of the bus
bars.
3.4 ACCESSORIES
a. When the bus duct is delivered to site in sections, bus jointing pieces, bolts, nuts,
washers etc. necessary for jointing conductor and enclosure shall be provided.
b. When the bus duct passes through a plant building, from indoor to outdoor, a wall
frame assembly shall be provided to prevent any leakage of rain water, dust and
air.
3.5 NAMEPLATE
Bus duct shall have rating plate, which is readily visible and fixed at a non-removable
part of the enclosure. Nameplate shall be of non-corrosive material. The letters shall
Page 6 of 10
RAJASTHAN
be engraved in black on white background. The rating plate shall give the necessary
information specified in the applicable standards.
3.6 PAINTING
a. The inside of bus enclosure shall be treated with a matt paint of dark color,
preferably black to facilitate efficient heat dissipation.
b. All sheet steel work / enclosure shall be painted using standard 7 tank process.
c. The enclosure shall be epoxy painted shade 631 as per IS: 5.
d. All other parts that are not stainless steel shall be cadmium plated.
3.7 MARKING
All components of bus duct along with the supporting structure shall be distinctly
marked for erection in accordance with the erection drawings.
The following tests shall be carried out at supplier’s works in presence of third party.
4.1 ROUTINE TESTS:
IR value test: IR value at 1000 V dc between the busbars and between each busbar to
enclosure before and after HV test.
H.V test: At 2.5 KV AC 50 Hz for 1 minute
4.2 TYPE TEST:
Temperature rise test: This shall be carried out at rated current for sufficient time to
that temperature stabilized at the surface of busbar. Alternatively test certificate can
be submitted and issued by govt. Approved laboratory.
Temperature rise at the joint shall not exceed more than 50 ºC above ambient.
Alternatively test certificate can be submitted and approved by govt. approved
laboratory.
Page 7 of 10
RAJASTHAN
i. Layout drawing (plan and sections) for busduct between switchgear and
transformer with bill of material
ii. GA drawing with dimensions and weight
iii. Busduct support arrangement drawing and support structure design calculations
iv. Flange details of both ends
v. Technical datasheet
vi. Type test certificate of similar rated busduct
vii. Make of bought out items
viii. QAP
ix. Bill of materials
x. Technical write-ups / leafups on various pieces of equipment offered
i. Technical Particulars / datasheet

ii. General Arrangement drawings
iii. Busduct support drawings and support structure design calculations
iv. Quality assurance plan (QAP) for purchaser’s approval prior to dispatch at
v. Descriptive literature and catalogues on various pieces of equipment offered
vi. Bill of Materials/Quantities
vii. Installation, operation and maintenance manual
viii. Spare parts list with identification
ix. Test Certificates and Test reports (not older than 5 years)
x. Guarantee Certificates
xi. Rating and diagram plate
xii. Recommended erection sequence in detail
xiii. As built drawings
xiv. Foundation plan and loading data
Page 8 of 10
RAJASTHAN
Bidder shall not start manufacturing unless manufacturing clearance is provided by

Owner / Consultant in writing.
i. Bill of quantity.
ii. Bidder shall clearly specify the deviation taken w.r.t specification and datasheet.
Unless otherwise specifically mentioned it will be understood and agreed that offer
is based on strict conformance to this specification in all respect.
iii. All the necessary datasheets and drawings as applicable.
iv. Bidder shall submit type test certificate conducted on same or higher rating of
non-segregated phase busduct along with the bid.
i. All the equipment shall be divided into several sections for protection and ease of
ii. The equipment shall be properly packed for transportation by ship/ rail or trailer.
The equipment shall be wrapped in polythene sheets before being placed in
crates/ cases to prevent the damage to finish.
iii. Crates/ cases shall have skid bottom for handling. Special notations such as
purchase order.
iv. The equipment may be stored in outdoors for long periods before installation. The
packing shall be completely suitable for outdoor storage in areas with heavy rains/
8.0 WARRANTY
busduct supplied under this specification. The equipment and the system shall be
guaranteed for troubles free operation for a period of 12 months from the date of
Page 9 of 10
RAJASTHAN
commissioning. Any defects discovered during this period shall be rectified free of
charge.



sequence and major inspection points and to reference manufacturer's test and
will be witnessed.
Page 10 of 10
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR HV AND LV POWER CABLES

Page 1 of 18
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 SCOPE
4.0 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION
5.0 CORE IDENTIFICATION
6.0 IDENTIFICATION OF CABLES
7.0 CABLE ACCESSORIES
8.0 CABLE DRUMS
9.0 TOTAL QUANTITY VARIATION
10.0 INSPECTION AND TESTS
11.0 INFORMATION REQUIRED WITH THE BID
12.0 TRANSPORT, SHIPMENT AND INSURANCE
13.0 WARRANTY
Page 2 of 18
RAJASTHAN
ANNEXURES

I DOCUMENTATION FOR CABLES
Page 3 of 18
RAJASTHAN
1.0 SCOPE
inspection and testing at vendor’s works of XLPE insulated cables, suitable for 1.1 kV
& 11 kv voltage grade to be used in the Petroleum Storage Terminal Project of Nayara
Energy Ltd. (NEL), Pali, Rajasthan
to relieve vendor of his responsibility.
Unless otherwise specified. The Cable shall comply with the applicable relevant Indian
Standards.
IS: 613 Copper rods and bars for electrical purposes

IS:1885-(Part32) Electro Technical vocabulary - electric cables
IS: 2633 Method of testing uniformity of coating on zinc coated articles
IS:3961-(Part4) Recommended current ratings for Polyethylene insulated cables
IS: 3975 Mild steel wire, formed wires and tapes for armouring of cables
IS: 5831 Specification for PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables
IS: 6474 Specification for Polyethylene insulation and sheath of electric cables
IS:7098-(Part I) Specification for cross-linked Polyethylene insulated, PVC sheathed cables. (For
working voltages upto and including 1100 volts)
IS:7098-(Part II) Specification for cross-linked Polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cables. (For
working voltages from 3.3 KV upto and including 11 kv)
IS: 8130 Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords
IS: 10418 Drums for electric cables
IS: 10462 Fictitious calculation method for determination of dimensions of protective coverings
of cables
IS: 10810 (Pt 58) Methods of test for cables: Part 58 Oxygen Index test
IS: 10810 (Pt 61) Methods of test for cables: Part 61 Flame retardant test
IS: 10810 (Pt 62) Methods of test for cables: Part 62 Flame retardant test for bunched cables
IEC: 60028 International standard for resistance of copper
IEC 60331-12 Tests for electric cables under fire conditions
IEC: 60502 Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables for rated voltages from 1KV upto
30KV
IEC: 60540 / A Test methods for insulation & sheaths of electric cables
Page 4 of 18
RAJASTHAN
IEC: 230 Impulse tests on cables and their accessories

IEC: 60332 Tests on electric cables under fire conditions
IEC: 60754-1 Test on gases evolved during combustion of materials from cables
IEC: 60811 Test methods for insulating and sheathing materials of electric cables.
IEC: 60840 Tests for power cables with extruded insulation for rated voltages above 30 KV upto
150KV
IEC 61034 Measurement of smoke density of electric cables burning under defined conditions
ASTM: D2863 Test for determination of Oxygen Index & Temperature Index
ASTM: D2843 Test for determination of Smoke density
IECAS-61-402 Thermoplastic insulated wire & cable for transmission & distribution of electrical
energy
IECAS-66-524 Cross linked thermosetting poly ethylene insulated wire & cable for transmission &
distribution of electrical energy
IEC: 840 Tests for power cables with extruded insulation for rated voltages above 30KV up to
150 KV
In case of any contradiction between various referred standards / specifications /

data sheets and statutory regulations, the following order of priority shall be given: -
i. Data sheets
ii. This Specification
iii. Codes & Standards
iv. Statutory regulations
The cables & accessories shall also confirm to the provisions of the latest revisions of
Indian Electricity rules & any other statutory regulations currently in force.
The cables & accessories shall be suitable for operating in humid & corrosive
atmosphere found in refineries, fertilizers, petrochemical & metallurgical plants.
Service conditions shall be defined as

Wind speed: 1.97 m/sec
Page 5 of 18
RAJASTHAN
4.0 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION
1. The cables shall be suitable for laying in trays, trenches, ducts and conduits and
for underground-buried installation ‘
2. Outer sheath of all XLPE insulated cables shall be black in color and minimum
value of the oxygen index shall be 29 at 27 +/-2 °C. In addition, suitable chemicals
shall be added in to the PVC compound of the outer sheath to protect the cable
against rodent & termite attack.
3. In addition, suitable chemicals shall be added to minimizing water treeing effect.
4. Sequential marking of the length of the cable in the meters shall be provided at
every one meter. The embossing or engraving shall be legible or indelible.
5. The overall diameter of the cables shall be strictly as per the values declared by
the manufacturer in the technical information subject to a maximum tolerance of
+/- 2 mm up to overall diameter up to 60 mm and +/- 3 mm for above 60 mm.
4.1 XLPE INSULATED FRLS CABLES
All cables covered in this specification shall be gas / dry cured, flame retardant low
smoke (FRLS) unless otherwise specified in the data sheet. However, Cables inside the
dyke wall shall be Fire Resistant (FR) type. The outer sheath of XLPE insulated cables
shall possess flame propagation properties meeting requirements as per IS-10810
(Part-62) category AF.
4.2 CONDUCTOR
Conductor wire shall be uniform in size, shape and free from any defects. Max
conductor resistance oat 20 deg C shall conform to table-2 of IS 8130.The cable
conductor shall be of Cu or Al material as specified in cable quantity list. All the
cables having cross section ≤10 sq mm shall have high conductivity annealed plain
copper conductor and above 10 sq mm shall be electrolytic grade aluminum (H2
grade). Conductor shall be Class-2 stranded, compacted circular / compacted sector
shaped conforming to IS 8130. Max conductor temperature shall be 90 deg C and Max
short circuit temp shall be 250 deg C. Laying up of cores shall be as per relevant
standards.
Page 6 of 18
RAJASTHAN
4.3 INSULATION
1. The insulation shall be cross-linked polyethylene, conforming to the relevant

standards and shall be free from voids. It shall withstand all mechanical and
thermal stresses under steady state and transient operating conditions.
2. The insulation shall be so applied (by extrusion) that it fits closely on the
conductor and it shall be possible to remove it without damaging the conductor.
4.4 FILLER AND INNER SHEATH
1. The fillers and inner sheath shall be of,
a. Vulcanized or unvulcanized rubber, or

b. Thermoplastic materials.
2. Vulcanized or unvulcanized rubber or thermoplastic material used for inner sheath

shall not be harder than XLPE and PVC used for insulation and outer sheath
respectively. Fillers and Inner sheath materials shall be so chosen as to be
compatible with the temperature ratings of the cable and shall have no deleterious
effect on any other component of the cable.
3. The inner sheath shall be extruded PVC of uniform thickness and shall be applied
over the laid-up cores by extrusion. It shall conform to the requirements of Type
ST2 compound as specified in IS: 5831.
4. The material shall have reduced flame propagation property and reduced emission
of halogen gas fumes when overheated during fire.
5. Material used for inner sheath shall not be harder than XLPE used for insulation.
PVC used for outer sheath, fillers and inner sheath materials shall be so chosen as
to be compatible with the temperature ratings of the cable and shall have no
harmful effect on any other component of the cable. Inner sheath shall be
extruded type and of uniform thickness.
4.5 ARMOURING
1. Armoring shall be of,
a. Galvanized round steel wire, or

b. Galvanized steel strip, or
Page 7 of 18
RAJASTHAN
c. Any metallic non-magnetic wire / strip
2. Armoring shall be applied over insulation / inner sheath for single / multicore
cables respectively, as close as possible.
3. Where the cable diameter below armour does not exceed 13mm, the armour shall
consist of galvanized round steel wires and where the diameter below the armour
is greater than 13 mm, the armour shall consist of either galvanized steel strips.
4. In case of single core A.C. cables, the armouring shall be of hard drawn non-
magnetic material i.e aluminium (H4 grade) as per IS 8130.
5. The joints (if applicable) in armour wires or strips shall be made by brazing or
welding and any surface irregularity shall be removed.
6. All cables covered in this specification shall be gas / dry cured, flame retardant
low smoke (FRLS) unless otherwise specified in the data sheet. The outer sheath of
XLPE insulated cables shall possess flame propagation properties meeting
requirements as per IS-10810 (Part-62) category AF.
7. Armouring coverage shall cover minimum 90% area.
4.6 OUTER SHEATH
1. The outer sheath shall be of extruded poly-vinyl chloride (PVC) compound

conforming to the requirements of type ST2 compound as specified in relevant
standards and shall be of FRLS type only. The outer sheath of cable shall be black
in colour and the minimum value of oxygen index shall be 29 at 27 + 2 0 C. All the
FRLS properties shall conform to relevant IEC and ASTM standards.
2. The outer sheath shall be applied by extrusion over the insulation or insulation
screening or armour as applicable.
3. In case of FRLS cables, PVC compound used for the outer sheath shall have reduced
flame propagation property, shall have reduced emission of halogen gas fumes
etc., when severely overheated during fires.
4. Outer sheath materials shall be resistant to UV rays, oil, acid and alkali and
Suitable additive compounds shall be added to prevent rodent and termite attack.
4.7 CONDUCTOR SCREENING
All cables rated above 3.3 KV shall be provided with conductor screening. Conductor
screening shall be provided over the conductor by applying non-metallic and shall
consist of either semi-conducting tape or a layer of extruded semi-conducting
compound or combination of the two.
Page 8 of 18
RAJASTHAN
4.8 INSULATION SCREENING
1. All cables rated above 3.3 KV shall be provided with insulation screening.
2. The insulation screening shall be of non-metallic extruded semi-conducting
material in combination with a non-magnetic metallic screening of copper. Unless
specified otherwise, the copper screen for all the three cores together shall be
capable of carrying single to ground fault current value and the duration specified
in the data sheet.
3. Non-metallic part shall be applied directly over the insulation of each core and
shall consist of either a semi-conducting tape or a layer of extruded semi-
conducting compound, or a combination of these materials, or either material in
combination with a semi-conducting coating.
4. The metallic part shall be applied over the individual core. Metallic screening shall
consist of either tape, or braid, or concentric serving of wires or a sheath, and
shall be of non-magnetic material when applied to single-cores, either in single
core or multi-core cables. For single core armoured cables, the armouring shall
constitute the metallic part of the screening.
5. XLPE insulation, conductor screen, and insulation screen shall be extruded in one
operation “Triple extrusion” process to ensure perfect bonding between the layers
for 11kv HV cables.
4.9 DIMENSIONS / THICKNESS OF MATERIAL
The thickness of insulation, inner sheath, outer sheath and dimensions of wire/strips
used for armouring shall be as per relevant standards.
5.0 CORE IDENTIFICATION
1. Cores of cable shall be identified by colour coding of PVC insulation by adopting

the following scheme.
Single-core Red, black, yellow, blue or natural

Two-core Red and Black
Three-core Red, Yellow and Blue
Three & Half core Red, Yellow, Blue and Black
Four-core Red, Yellow, Blue and Black
Page 9 of 18
RAJASTHAN
2. The core identification shall be done by printing numbers or by providing colored

strips all along cores. The insulation of cores shall be of the same colour and
numbered sequentially. The numbers shall be printed in Hindu-Arabic numerals on
the outer surface of cores. The numerals shall be legible. The numbers shall be
repeated at regular intervals along the core and the spacing between consecutive
numbers shall not exceed 50 mm.
6.0 IDENTIFICATION OF CABLES
1. The cables shall be clearly and permanently marked with following information
throughout the length of cable.
a. Manufacturer’s name or trade mark.

b. Year of manufacture.
c. Voltage grade.
d. Cross sectional area of conductor and no. of cores.
e. Type of Insulation
f. FRLS
g. ISI mark and IS reference number
h. Cable Code
i. Colour identification
j. Batch No. / Lot No.
7.0 CABLE ACCESSORIES
The termination kits for use on high voltage systems shall be suitable for the type of
cables offered as per this specification and Heat shrinkable type. The termination
shall be supplied in kit form. The kit shall include all insulating and sealing materials
apart from conductor fittings and consumable items. An installation instruction shall
also be included in each kit. Specific approval based on type tests shall be obtained
from the owner for the list of suppliers of these kits.
7.1 TERMINATING KITS / JOINTING KIT
1. The terminating kits shall be suitable for termination of the cables to indoor
switchgear or to a weatherproof cable box of an outdoor mounted transformer /
Page 10 of 18
RAJASTHAN
motor. The terminating kits / jointing kits shall preferably be one of the following
types:
a. Tapes / pads involving non-linear resistance stress grading materials.

b. Heat / shrinkable sleeve type.
2. For outdoor terminations, weather shields/sealing ends and any other accessories
required shall also form part of the kit.
8.0 CABLE DRUMS
1. Cables shall be supplied in non-returnable drums steel drums of suitable barrel

diameter, securely battened, with take-off end fully protected against mechanical
damage. Also, PVC / Rubber end caps shall be supplied free of cost for each drum
with a minimum of eight per thousand-meter length. While selecting cable drums,
care should be taken to avoid joints.
2. The following information shall be marked on each drum
a. Name of manufacturer, brand name or trademark.

b. Nominal cross-sectional area of conductor.
c. Number of cores.
d. Type of cable and voltage grade.
e. Cable code
f. Length of cable on the drum.
g. Number of lengths on drum (if more than one).
h. Drum number
i. Direction of rotation of drum (by means of an arrow).
j. Reference standard
k. Approx. gross weight.
l. Job number
m. Country of manufacture
n. Year of manufacture.
3. A tolerance of +/- 3% shall be permissible for each drum. However, overall

tolerance for each size of cable shall be limited to +/ - 2%. Offer with short / non-
standard lengths are liable for rejection. If nonstandard drum lengths are
specified in the data sheet, then same shall be supplied.
Page 11 of 18
RAJASTHAN
9.0 TOTAL QUANTITY VARIATION
1. The bidder shall quote unit rates for all types of cables as indicated in the BOQ.
The unit rate quoted by the bidder shall be valid in the event of addition /
deletion of cable quantity.
2. Quantity shown in the Bill of Material annexed to this specification is for bid
purpose only. The quantity shall be revised after placement of order as per actual
requirement.
3. Bidder shall not start manufacturing unless written manufacturing clearance is
obtained from the purchaser. Any manufacturing prior to approval shall be
rejected.
4. NTP to manufacture cable shall be furnished in several lots in phases as per site
progress and requirement.
5. Total supplied quantity shall not vary by more than + 2.5% of total quantity of NTP
length for all types of cables without any negative tolerance. Unit rates for
addition / deletion will be applicable for length upto +2.5%. Bidder can-not claim
for any quantity supplied above +2.5% of the NTP (notice to proceed) quantity, no
payments will be made for extra quantity supplied above +2.5% of NTP quantity.
10.0 INSPECTION AND TESTS
1. Inspection and testing shall be carried out in accordance with relevant standards.
Routine tests and acceptance test shall be witnessed by Owner approved Third
Party Inspection Agency. Vendor shall quote unit rate for witnessing such type test
by TPI Agency.
2. Vendor shall submit blank formats where in the test results/readings are to be
entered. This format shall give minimum acceptable value as per the relevant
standards.
3. Vendor to confirm availability of Type test certificates along with offer. Type test
certificates, for all types of cables being ordered, shall be furnished by vendor in
the event of an order.
4. The inspector shall have free access to free access to the manufacturer’s works for
the purpose of inspecting the process of manufacture in all stages and he will have
the power to reject any material which appears to him to be of unsuitable
description or of unsatisfactory quality. The vendor shall give at least 2 weeks
Page 12 of 18
RAJASTHAN
prior notice to the purchaser, regarding the date of testing to enable him or his
representative to witness the tests.
5. All routine tests, acceptance tests, type tests & additional type tests for improved
fire performance shall be carried out as listed in IS-7098 (Part-2).
6. The inspector shall have free access to the manufacturer’s works for the purpose
of inspecting the process of manufacture in all stages and he will have the power
to reject any material which appears to him to be of unsuitable description or of
unsatisfactory quality. The vendor shall give at least 2 weeks prior notice to the
purchaser, regarding the date of testing to enable him or his representative to
witness the tests.
10.1 ROUTINE TESTS
1. All routine tests, acceptance tests for improved fire performance shall be carried
out as listed in IS-7098 (Part-1 & 2).
2. The finished cables shall be tested at manufacturer’s works. Following routine
tests for each and every length of cable and copy of test results shall be furnished
for each length of cable along with supply. If specified, the cables shall be tested
in presence of client’s representative.
10.1.1 High Voltage Test
The cables shall withstand without any failure, the test voltages given below,
when applied for a period of five minutes for each test connection.
VOLTAGE GRADE TEST VOLTAGE

kV kV
1.1 3
33 48
10.1.2 Conductor Resistance Test
The D. C. Resistance of each conductor shall be measured at room temperature

and the results shall be corrected to 20 °C. to check the compliance with the
values specified in IS 8130 - 1976.
Page 13 of 18
RAJASTHAN
10.1.3 Mechanical Routine Test
A mechanical Load of 20% in excess of the maximum working load of the

insulator is applied after suspending the insulator for one minute. There shall
be no mechanical failure of the insulator.
10.2 ACCEPTANCE AND SPECIAL TESTS
Acceptance tests as per IS-1554 Part-1 and IS-7098 Part-1 & 2 and the following
special tests to be performed on the cables as per the sampling plan. These tests are
to be witnessed by PMC / Owner before the dispatch of cables. The type test
certificate for conductor and insulator material shall be provided and it shall not be
more than 7 years at the time of bid.
10.2.1 Accelerated Water Absorption Test
Accelerated Water absorption test for insulation as per NEMA – WC-5 (For PVC
insulated cables) and as per NEMA WC-7 (For XLPE insulated cables). Test
certificates with respect to this test (not older than one year) from recognized
testing laboratory to be furnished for review by PMC before dispatch, clearance
of cables. In case test certificates are not available, test is to be conducted by
vendor at his own cost in any recognized test laboratory or in-house testing
laboratory, before dispatch clearance of cables. Sampling for this test is carried
out one for each order.
10.2.2 Dielectric Retention Test
The dielectric strength of the cable insulation tested in accordance with NEMA
WC-5 at 75 ± 1°C shall not be less than 50% original dielectric strength. Test
certificates with respect to this test (not older than one year) from recognized
testing laboratory to be furnished for review by PMC before dispatch, clearance
of cables. In case test certificates are not available, test is to be conducted by
vendor at his own cost in any recognized test laboratory or in-house testing
laboratory, before dispatch clearance of cables. Sampling for this test is to
carried out one for each order.
Page 14 of 18
RAJASTHAN
10.2.3 Oxygen Index Test
The test shall be carried out as per ASTM D2863 or applicable Indian Standard
specifications. Oxygen index shall be more than 29%.
10.2.4 Temperature Index Test
specifications. Temperature index shall be more than 250 °C.
10.2.5 Smoke Density Test
specifications. Smoke density shall be more than 40%.
10.2.6 Acid Gas Generation Test
The test shall be carried out as per IEC 754-1 or applicable Indian Standard
specifications. It shall be less than 20%.
10.2.7 Flammability Test
1. The test shall be carried out on finished cable as per IS-10810 (part 61 &
62). Sampling for this test is to be carried out one for each order, provided
the outer sheath remains the same. The acceptance criteria for tests
conducted shall be as under:
a. Part-61: The cable meets the specifications if there is no visible damage

on the test specimen within 300 mm from its upper end.
b. Part-62: The maximum extent of charred portion measured on the test
sample shall not have reached a height exceeding 2.5m above the
bottom edge of the burner at the front of the ladder.
Page 15 of 18
RAJASTHAN
10.2.8 Type Test
The following Type test certificate issued by Government approved laboratories

like CPRI / ERDA / any other govt approved agency shall be submitted to the
inspector before placement of order and before dispatch commencement at
site.
1. Test for thickness of insulation and sheath

2. Physical tests for insulation.
a. Tensile strength and elongation at break.

b. Ageing in air oven.
c. Hot test.
d. Shrinkage test.
e. Water absorption (Gravimetric)
3. Physical Test for outer sheath:
a. Tensile Strength and elongation at break.

b. Ageing in on even.
c. Shrinkage Test.
d. Hot deformation.
10.2.9 Test for Rodent & Termite Repulsion Property
The vendor shall furnish details to analyze the property by chemical method.
Sampling to be done for every offered lot / size as per the sampling plan.
10.2.10 Certification
1. All offered equipments or equipment of similar design manufactured by

same supplier:
a. Shall have been type tested by an authority approved by the Company.

b. Shall have been in continuous satisfactory service for a minimum period
of two years.
c. Shall be having current certification/approval listing by an approved
agency.
Page 16 of 18
RAJASTHAN
11.0 INFORMATION REQUIRED WITH THE BID
1. Vendor shall furnish technical particulars / description and performance details of

all cables, current carrying capacities and derating factors for all conditions of
cable laying.
2. Type test report and certificates
3. QAP
4. Armour coverage calculation
Documents required for approval after award of contract shall be decided during kick
off meeting with the successful vendor. Any data / document required for approval
shall be submitted by vendor during detail engg.
Unless otherwise stated elsewhere the number of sets will be 3 sets hard with one soft
copy for initial submission / revision submissions and 10 sets hard and one set soft for
as built final submission.
12.0 TRANSPORT, SHIPMENT AND INSURANCE
Transport and shipment of items will be contractor’s responsibility. Contractor need

to follow the instructions for the same detailed under the ‘Electrical scope of work’ in
bid package. Insurance charges may be separately quoted.
13.0 WARRANTY
Vendor shall have final and total responsibility for the design and performance of all
the equipment supplied under this specification. The equipment and material shall be
guaranteed for trouble-free operation for a period of 12 months from the date of
commissioning. Any defect discovered during this period shall be rectified free of
charge.
Page 17 of 18
RAJASTHAN
ANNEXURE - I
DOCUMENTATION FOR CABLES

3. Illustrative and Descriptive catalogues Y N Y
4. Installation, Termination and Jointing N N Y
Instructions
5. Test certificates
a. Routine N N Y
b. Type Y N Y
6. Guarantee Certificates N N Y
Note:

the date of LOI.
coated folder.
Y - Yes, N – No
Page 18 of 18
DATA SHEET FOR HV CABLES AND LV CABLES
REV. 00
Project No. Unit

REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0
Date 21/12/2018
Prepared By PBS
Checked By PBS
Approved By SKJ
Client Review

DATA SHEET FOR HV CABLES
Cable Des:
Quantity: As per BOQ
PART - A : GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1 Quantity As per BOQ
1.1 Design Ambient Temperature 65 deg. C

1.2 Altitude Above MSL 183 m
1.3 Humidity 50-60%
1.4 Seismic Zone II
1.5 Location Outdoor
2 SYSTEM PARTICULARS
2.1 High Voltage Cables

a Voltage 11kV ± 10%
b Frequency 50 Hz ± 5%
c Combined Voltage and Frequency Variation ± 10%
d No. of Phase / Wire 3 Phase / 3 Wire
e System Fault Level 25 kA for 1 sec
3 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
3.1 Conductor Material Aluminium

3.2 Standard IS 7098, IEC 60502
3.3 Cable to be Flame Retardant No
3.4 Conductor Screening Extruded Semi conducting compound
3.5 Insulation XLPE
3.6 Insulation Screen Extruded Semi conducting compound follower
Metallic screening of copper wire / tape
3.7 Filler Non-hygroscopic PVC / Polypropylene Fibre
3.8 Material for Inner Sheath Extruded PVC
3.9 Material for Outer Sheath Extruded PVC ST2
3.10 Armouring
a Single Core Cable Non magnetic
b Three Core Cable Galvanized round wire or flat strip armoured
PART - B: PERFORMANCE PARTICULARS To be Furnished by Vendor.
A General
1 Name of Manufacture
2 Cable Type / Code
B Technical Particulars (To be furnished separately for each size)

1 Voltage Grade
2 Conductor Material
3 Material/ Thickness of Semi-conducting
3.1 Conductor Screen
4 Thickness of Insulation
5 Material/ Thickness of Semi-Conducting
5.1 Insulation Screen
6 Thickness of Inner Sheath
7 Calculated Diameter of Cable under Armour
8 Material / Size of Armour
9 Nominal Diameter of Cable under Outer Sheath
10.1 Outer Sheath
11 Thickness of Outer Sheath
12 Tolerance of Outer Sheath
13 Type of Conductor for Conductor Insulation
13.1 Inner Sheath and Outer Sheath
14 Bending Radius
15 Max. Drum Length of Cable
16 DC Resistance at 20 deg. C
17 AC Resistance at 90 deg. C
Page 2 of 5
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-EL-DS-032 Rev: 00
DATA SHEET FOR HV CABLES
Cable Des:
18 Reactance at 50 Hz
19 Conductor short circuit rating for 3 sec.
20 Screen short circuit rating for 3 sec.
21 Current carrying capacity : For cable in air
21.1 For cable in non ventilated basement/ vault
21.2 For cable in concrete trenches
21.3 For cable directly buried in ground
NOTES:
1 Cables shall be supplied in Wooden / Metallic Non returnable drum.
Page 3 of 5
DATA SHEET FOR LV CABLES
Cable
PART - A : GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1 Quantity As per BOQ
1.1 Design Ambient Temperature 65 deg. C

1.2 Altitude Above MSL 183 m
1.3 Humidity 50-60%
1.4 Seismic Zone II
1.5 Location Outdoor
2 SYSTEM PARTICULARS
2.1 Low Tension Cables

a Voltage 415V ± 10%
b Frequency 50 Hz ± 5%
c Combined Voltage and Frequency Variation ± 10%
d No. of Phase / Wire 3 Phase / 4 Wire
e System Fault Level 50 kA for 1 sec
c System Grounding Solidly Earthed
3 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
3.1 Voltage Grade 1100V
3.2 Conductor Material Aluminium/Copper
3.3 Standard IS 7098, IEC 60502, IEC 60331, IS 1554
3.4 Insulation XLPE
3.5 Inner Sheath Extruded PVC
3.6 Armouring
a Single Core Cable Non magnetic
b Three Core Cable Galvanized round wire or flat strip armoured
3.7 Material for Outer Sheath Flame Retardant Low Smoke/Fire Resistant
3.8 Filler Non-hygroscopic PVC / Polypropylene Fibre

3.9 Control cable acceptable no. of cores 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9.12
PART - B: PERFORMANCE PARTICULARS To be Furnished by Vendor.
A General
1 Name of Manufacture
2 Cable Type / Code
B Technical Particulars (To be furnished separately for each size)

1 Voltage Grade
2 Conductor Material
3 Thickness of Insulation
4 Insulation Screen
5 Thickness of Inner Sheath
7 Material / Size of Armour
8 Nominal Diameter of Cable under Outer Sheath
10 Outer Sheath
11 Thickness of Outer Sheath
12 Tolerance of Outer Diameter
13 Type of Conductor for Conductor Insulation
13.1 Inner Sheath and Outer Sheath
14 Bending Radius
15 Max. Drum Length of Cable
16 DC Resistance at 20 deg. C
17 AC Resistance at 90 deg. C
18 Reactance at 50 Hz
19 Conductor short circuit rating for 1 sec.
20 Current carrying capacity: For cable in air
Page 4 of 5
DATA SHEET FOR LV CABLES
Cable
20.1 For cable in non ventilated basement/ vault

20.2 For cable in concrete trenches
20.3 For cable directly buried in ground
NOTES:
1 Cables shall be supplied in Wooden / Metallic Non returnable drum.

2 Screened cables are considered from VFD & SS to motors.
Page 5 of 5
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR HIGH MAST LIGHTING SYSTEM

Page 1 of 20
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 INTRODUCTION
2.0 LOCATION AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
6.0 INSPECTION, TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE AT WORK
7.0 VENDOR DOCUMENTATION
Page 2 of 20
RAJASTHAN
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope of work consists of Providing, Installing, testing and commissioning of 30 Mtr.
height high mast lighting system, using raising and lowering type of high mast towers,
including designing of civil foundation works, installation of feeder pillar distribution
board, local control station, light fittings and supply, laying of cable from control
room to feeder pillar, earthing & lightning system and aviation obstruction lamp. The
job also includes supplying and providing trailing cables (5CX10 SQMM CU cable) from
FLP motor, switch plug & socket at the foot of high mast to the junction box at the
top.
1.2 This specification covers the minimum requirements for the Design, Engineering,
Preparation of Drawings, Fabrication, Assembly, Painting, Inspection at manufacturers
works, Supply & Delivery to site, Erection, Testing and Commissioning of High Mast
Lighting System with lighting fixtures, accessories including supply of fixture cables
etc. for “Nayara Energy Pali Project”.
1.3 The Vendor shall ensure that the design complies with the requirements of this
specification and standards.
1.4 This specification does not relieve the Vendor from final guarantee as to materials,
apparatus, workmanship and performance of the equipment supplied.
2.0 LOCATION AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
2.1 PLANT LOCATION
Nayara Energy Pali Project is located at Rajasthan, India. The High Masts for the
above-mentioned terminals shall be located within the respective Plot.
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
3.1 SCOPE:
The High Mast Lighting System shall include following Equipment & Materials, in
accordance with this specification; standards stated herein.
• Equipment Supply
Page 3 of 20
RAJASTHAN
a. High mast structure with lantern carriage [for Flood light fixtures & Aviation
lights] raising / lowering motorized Winch Assembly.
b. Flood light fixtures with LED lamps & Aviation obstruction lighting fixtures.
c. Power & control cables complete as required from feeder pillar to winch motor
& light fittings for power distribution shall be in Vendor’s scope.
d. Flameproof Feeder pillar distribution boards which will house TPN isolator,
starter for winch power tool motor and outgoing feeders for the fixture.
e. Power tool for winch drive.
f. Wires / strips for complete earthing, lightning protection including supply &
erection of lightning spikes & earth pits.
g. GI / PVC conduits, GI pipes and supporting structures for feeder pillars.
h. All other accessories like branch / pull / junction boxes, cross arms brackets for
supporting light fixtures, distribution board etc., saddle / clamps and other
miscellaneous items required for the completeness and efficient working of the
system whether explicitly specified or not in this specification shall be
included.
• Design Related
a. 350/400W LED Lamps, Nos. of Flood Light fittings per High mast shall be as
shown in Street Lighting Layout (NAYA-PALI-EL-LY-012).
b. The drawings / documents mentioned in Cl. No.7 of this specification shall be
prepared by the successful vendor.
• The scope of civil and structural foundation for Highmast tower is included in
scope of Electrical Contractor for Nayara Energy Pali Project. The scope includes
design, detailing, supply and construction of foundation for High mast poles &
associated feeder pillars. Necessary design & drawings with load data as per IS: 875
shall be prepared on standard size sheets & submitted for review / approval prior
to execution of work. The detail of civil structural work is described in Cl. 5.6 of
the document
• Inspection and Testing as specified.
• Submission of documents as specified.
• Painting as specified.
• Preservation, preparation of shipment and delivery to site.
• List of Spares for two years normal operation.
Page 4 of 20
RAJASTHAN
• Start-up spares and commissioning spares.

• List of special tools required (Vendor to provide list with the bid).
• Any other items, required to make system complete.
3.2 ENGINEERING SERVICES
The Vendor shall provide engineering services, which shall include, but not necessarily
be limited to, the following:
• Providing / coordinating detailed design of all equipment and components within

the scope of supply.
• Resolving engineering queries related to the equipment and components within the
scope of supply.
• Performing all relevant calculations pertaining to lighting design and equipment
within the scope of supply.
• Providing progress reports etc.
• Providing expediting services for all sub-vendors.
• Providing quality assurance, including all sub-vendors with respect to ISO 9000 or
equivalent.
• Quality Assurance.
• Supervision of Installation / erection and commissioning.
• Training of client’s personnel at site / Vendor’s shop.
The High Mast Lighting System shall meet the requirements of this specification and
latest edition of applicable standards.
IS 6665: 1972 Code of practice for Industrial lighting

IS 10322 Luminaries –Part 1: General requirements
IS 5216-1982 Guide for safety procedures and practice in electrical work
IS 325: 1996 Three Phase Induction Motors
IS-4691: 1985 Degree of protection provided by enclosure for rotating electrical machinery
IS 732: 1982 Code of practice for electrical wiring installation
IS 2667-1988 Fittings for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring
IS 9537 Conduits for Electrical installation
Page 5 of 20
RAJASTHAN
Part 1 – 1980 General requirements

Part 2 – 1981 Rigid steel conduits
Part 3 – 1983 Rigid plain conduits of insulating material
Part 4 – 1983 Pliable self-recovering
Reaffirmed 1990 Conduits
IS 694: 1990 PVC insulated cables for working voltages up to & including 1100 volts.
IS 9046: 1978 AC contactors of voltage above 1000 V upto and including 11000 V.
IS 1554: 1988 PVC Insulated (heavy duty) electrical cables: Part I for working voltages up to &
including 1100V
IS 4289 Flexible cables for lifts and other flexible connections-Part 1 Elastomer Insulated
Cables
IS 3618 Phosphate treatment of iron and steel for protection against corrosion
IS 2675 Enclosed distribution fuse boards and cut outs for voltages not exceeding 1000 volts
IS 13947 1993 Low voltage switchgear and control gear: General rules
IS 3043: 1987 Code of practice for Earthing
IS 2309: 1989 Code of practice for the protection of buildings and allied structures against
lightning.
IS 2551-1982 Danger boards
First Rev. Reaffirmed
1990
I. E Rules Indian Electricity rules-1956
• In case of imported equipment standards of the country of origin shall be

applicable, if these standards are equivalent or stringent than the applicable
Indian standards.
data sheet and statutory regulations the following order of priority shall govern:
a. Statutory regulations
b. Project data sheets
c. Job specification
d. This specification
e. Codes and standards
5.1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Page 6 of 20
RAJASTHAN
Each High mast shall have feeder pillar distribution board located near the mast (not
integral with mast). This flame proof feeder pillar will house a TPN isolator and
starter for winch power tool motor and will give supply to light fittings on High Mast
and to motor. This feeder pillar will be mounted separately near the High mast. Each
feeder pillar will receive 3-phase 415 V TPN (4 wire) 50 Hz supply from purchaser.
Further distribution shall be in vendor's scope.
Lighting circuits shall be single phase and neutral and / or three phase & neutral,
protected with MCBs, but not to be loaded higher than 80% capacity. 20% spare MCB to
be provided in each feeder pillar.
Adjacent luminaries shall not be supplied from the same circuit, or in case of three
phase circuits, from the same phase.
Locations of the high masts and the feeder pillars shall be decided by vendor based on
calculations. It shall be outside tank dykes so that they do not fall under the
hazardous zone. Also, the location of the masts shall be such that they do not put any
hindrance on the movement of the tankers and the vehicles on the roads neither do
they foul with any equipment, structure or buildings.
It is to be noted that the area allocated for each lighting mast is around 5m x 5m for
piling, foundations and for the general operational purpose taking into account the
maintenance of the lighting fittings and accessories after winching down.
5.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENT
The high mast and other equipment & materials shall be of the best quality and shall
conform to the specification given under:
5.2.1 Mast Structure
a. The Mast base, structural & foundation design shall be designed in a manner
so that it is capable of withstanding external forces exerted on it by
maximum wind speeds and stresses specified in IS 875 Part 3-1987 along
with load of the lantern carriage assembly. The resonant frequency of Mast
shall be less than 1Hz so that wind speed stresses which arise at resonance
are correspondingly low.
Page 7 of 20
RAJASTHAN
b. The mast shall be of continuously tapered, polygonal cross section

presenting a good and pleasing appearance based on proven intension design
conforming to standards.
c. The mast shall be fabricated from steel plates cut and folded to form a
polygonal section. The high Mast shall comprise of two sections of approx.
equal lengths. Each mast section shall not have any circumferential welding
joint. Sections should be fitted together on site, telescopically, in manner
that does not require additional welding nor any bolted joints acceptable.
The minimum overlap distance shall be 1.5 times the diameter at
penetration. The welding shall be in accordance with BS 5135 / AWS.
d. The mast shall be provided with fully penetrated flange, which shall be free
from any lamination or incursion. The welded connection of the base flange
shall be fully developed to the strength of the entire section. The base
flange shall be provided with supplementary gussets between the bolt holes
to ensure elimination of helical stress concentration and high tensile anchor
bolts.
e. Both the inner & outer surface of entire fabricated mast shall be hot dip
galvanized, having a uniform thickness for bottom and top sections. The
amount of galvanizing shall be 610 gm/m². The mast shall accommodate
integral power tool for winch drive. The mast shall have a minimum design
life of 25 years.
f. An adequate door opening shall be provided at the base of the mast to
permit clear access to equipment like power tool winch drive, cables, plug
and socket etc and also facilitate easy removal of the winch. The door shall
be close fitting, dust and vermin proof and provided with heavy-duty double
locking arrangement. Size of door opening shall be such as to avoid buckling
of the mast section under heavy wind conditions.
5.2.2 Head Frame
a. The Head frame, designed to be capping unit of the mast shall be welded
steel construction and hot dip galvanized.
b. The top pulleys shall be of a diameter, appropriately large enough to
accommodate the steel wire ropes and the multi-core electric cable. The
material of construction of the pulley blocks shall be non – corrosive and
preferably made up die cast LM6 Al. alloy, material such as plastic or PVC
not acceptable The design shall ensure that operation of pulleys shall be
Page 8 of 20
RAJASTHAN
maintenance free. The pulleys will run on stainless steel shaft / spindles and
will be self-lubricating type
c. Close fitting removable guards shall be provided over the pulleys to ensure
correct location of the ropes and cables in their grooves during operation.
Guides and stops shall be provided for docking the lantern carriage. The
complete chassis assembly covered by weather proof hot dip galvanised
after fabrication
d. The whole head frame assembly shall be covered and protected by weather
proof hot dip galvanised canopy and secured to the frame by stainless steel
bolts and nuts.
5.2.3 Lantern Carriage
a. The fabricated lantern carriages shall be provided for holding the desired
number of LED floodlight fittings, control gear box, junction boxes, aviation
lights on each High Mast and balance counter weights shall be provided
wherever required.
b. The complete lantern carriage shall be of mild steel tubular ring type
construction and hot dip galvanized internal & external after assembly. The
inner lining of the carriage shall be provided with perfect self-balance
arrangement so as to avoid swing and buffer arrangement to prevent
damage to mast surface or other installed parts, during lowering/raising
operation of carriage.
c. The carriage shall be supported / suspended by at least three wire ropes for
better stability. The lantern carriage assembly shall not touch the lower
surface of the mast. At the lower docking position, the lantern carriage will
rest firmly at a maintainable height from the ground level with the help of
stoppers for easy maintenance.
d. All hardware like bolts, nuts etc. shall be stainless steel to avoid corrosion.
The carriage shall have weather protected (IP-55) cast aluminium junction
box with required number of terminals (phase, neutral and earth) for
connection to the designed number of flood light fittings and associated
control gears fixed on the carriage. The carriage design and fabrication shall
be such that the lantern carriage will suit the lanterns and their control gear
boxes to be used in the work.
e. Lantern carriage shall be suitable for accommodating aviation lights,
maximum 12 numbers of flood light fixtures & associated control gear box,
Page 9 of 20
RAJASTHAN
junction boxes. The number, wattage and type of lighting fixture of the high
mast shall be decided by the High mast lighting system vendor.
5.2.4 LED Light Fittings
a. The Non-Integral LED flood light fixtures shall have diecast aluminum body
with facility for lamp centering and focusing and shall be provided with
angle indicator for aiming, and also with anodized and polished aluminum
reflector.
b. The Control gear shall be provided with die-cast aluminum & prewired wired
with copper ballast, Power factor improving capacitor, rewired fuses,
electronic ignitor, Mains connector & 2 Nos-earthing-one internal & one
external.
c. Each high mast shall have aviation obstruction lighting fixture with two nos.
of 40W neon spiral type lamps of reliable design and reputed make. Aviation
lights shall be mounted above highmast. It shall be possible to bring down
these lights located on lantern carriage for maintenance purpose.
d. The luminaries shall be tested as per Indian standards and test reports shall
be submitted along with materials.
5.2.5 Winch Assembly
a. For Installation & maintenance of luminaries & lamps, it will necessary to

lower and raise of lantern carriage assembly, a winch arrangement shall be
fixed in the base of the mast. This shall have provision to operate both
manually and electrically. The winch shall be suitable to handle the weight
of the lantern carriage assembly with lighting fixtures and all other
accessories, with appropriate factor of safety. Minimum two number of
winch drum shall be provided for the winch assembly. A handle shall also be
provided for hand operation of the winches.
b. The winch shall be of self-sustaining type with positive locking arrangement
without the need for brake shoe, springs, or clutches. The winch shall be
capable of handling maximum anticipated load with sufficient safety
margin.
c. The winches shall be of self –lubricating type by means of an oil bath and
the lubrication shall be of recommended quality. The double drum winch
shall use an arrangement of minimum two independent ropes and each rope
shall have one end clamped to winch drum and the other end attached to
Page 10 of 20
RAJASTHAN
the lantern carriage. Termination of the ropes of the winch shall be in such
a way, that it does not involve distortion or twisting of the rope
configuration. At least one full layer of rope shall remain on the drum when
the lantern carriage is fully lowered.
d. The mast shall be fitted with flexible stranded high tensile strength stainless
steel wire ropes, which shall have a factor of safety not less than five times
the safe working load of winch. Particular care shall be exercised in all
aspects of design, manufacture, testing and installation arrangements of the
system to ensure safety under all operation conditions.
e. The capacity, operating speed, safe working load, recommended lubrication
and serial number of the winch shall be clearly marked on each winch.
f. A test certificate shall be supplied along with each winch in support of the
maximum load operated by the winch and for the safety of operation at the
full load rotation.
5.2.6 Stainless Steel Wire Rope
All wire ropes shall be made from stainless steel confirming to IS 2365, 1963 &
IS-3457, 1977. Stainless steel wire ropes shall be of 7 / 19 construction of min.6
mm diameter. There shall not be any intermediate joints on the ropes between
winch and lantern carriage. The end for connection to the winch drum shall be
fitted with thimbles and the thimbles shall be secured by copper compression
splices.
5.2.7 Power Tool for Winch Assembly
a. A suitable, high power, electrically driven, internally mounted power tool,

with manual override shall be supplied for raising and lowering of the
lantern carriage for maintenance purposes. The power tool shall be single
speed, provided with a motor of the required rating. The capacity and speed
of the electrical motor used in the power tool shall be suitable for the
lifting of the design load installed in the lantern carriage with design margin
of minimum 20%.
Page 11 of 20
RAJASTHAN
b. The power tool mounting shall be so designed that it shall not only self-
sustaining but also aligns the power tool perfectly with respect to the winch
spindle during the operations.
c. The power drive shall be connected to the winch via a match coupler. It
shall incorporate torque limiter to protect the wire ropes from over
stretches /over load. The torque limiter shall trip the load when it exceeds
the adjusted limits. There shall be suitable provision for warning the
operator once the load is tripped off. Electrical overload tripping of the
power tool with visual indication of motor tripping is also acceptable.
d. The electric driven tool shall be single speed, reversible three phase, 415V,
50Hz & hand operated motor.
e. Manual handle shall be provided for hand operation of the winches in case
of power failure or for minor adjustment of the lantern carriage.
f. For High Mast located in Hazardous Area winch motor shall be of flame proof
type construction.
5.2.8 Feeder Pillar (Flame Proof Type)
a. Each high mast shall be supplied with one feeder pillar distribution box
which shall be located near it. The feeder pillar box shall be metal
enclosed, flame proof free standing type, Dust & Vermin Proof, made out of
2 mm thick MS sheet steel, epoxy painted and IP-55 weather protected.
Additional canopy for rain protection shall be provided as an integral part of
feeder pillar distribution box.
b. The feeder pillar shall contain incomer Switch fuse / MCB, ELCB, motor
starters for winch drive, MCB for lighting control and a 3 pin 5 / 15A socket
with 15A MCB. Motor starter shall be complete with switch fuse, contactor
and bimetal relay with single phasing preventor. Feeder pillar incomer shall
have three number LEDS for indication of three phase power supply. The
cable entry shall be from bottom.
c. The power supply to lighting fixtures shall be manual as well as in auto
mode. An Auto / manual / Off selector switch shall be used. In Auto mode
the switching operation shall be controlled though clock timer / photocell
controller.
d. Feeder pillar shall have adequate space to receive incoming and outgoing
cable terminations for 415V, TPN supply loop in and loop out arrangement.
Adequately rated space heater with switch fuse, thermostat shall be
provided for the feeder pillars. The feeder pillar box shall be complete with
Page 12 of 20
RAJASTHAN
double compression nickel plated brass cable glands and tinned copper lugs.
The feeder pillar shall have two numbers external earthing terminal.
e. The feeder pillar-box shall have required wiring interface for taking signals
from hand held external control push button station. The feeder pillar box
shall be installed on a raised concrete foundation block and foundation shall
be up to the level of minimum 300mm above ground level.
f. Suitable Name plates and danger board shall be provided on the feeder
pillar. The feeder pillar shall be mounted on raised concrete foundation
near to the lighting mast structure.
5.2.9 Local Control Station
Spring return type hand held control pushbutton shall be provided for the
purpose- for raising the lantern carriage and lowering the lantern carriage.
Also, it shall have emergency stop push button. The hand-held control Push
Button station shall be supplied with minimum of 5 meters length of 5 * 2.5 sq
mm flexible cable and cable type shall be with copper conductor, PVC
insulation, metal braiding and overall PVC sheath. The hand-held control
station and associated cable shall be kept inside feeder pillar box when not in
use and suitable arrangement shall be provided for the same.
5.2.10 Junction Box
Weather proof junction box made of Cast Aluminum shall be provided on the
Carriage Assembly as required from which the interconnections to the designed
number of flood light luminaries and associated control gears on the lantern
carriage.
5.2.11 Cables and Cable Connections
a. All power & control cable including flexible trailing cables shall be supplied,
laid & terminated by high mast vendor.
b. The cable shall be flexible, round, multi-core, copper conductor power
cable with 2 Nos spare cores. The cable shall be suitable sized to ensure
proper flow of current & reputed make.
c. The electrical connection from base compartment to the junction box shall
be made through special multicore trailing cable of min 4 sq mm copper
Page 13 of 20
RAJASTHAN
conductor, EPR (ethylene polyethylene rubber) insulated, metal braided and

sheathed in heavy duty poly chloroprene (PCI).
d. Separate core shall be used for lighting fixtures, aviation fixtures and one
dedicated core shall be kept for earthing. Suitable chemicals shall also be
added to outer sheath to protect cable against birds, rodent and termite
attack. The cable shall be suitable sized to ensure proper flow of current &
reputed make.
e. Connections from the junction box to individual luminaries shall be made by
using 3C x 2.5 sq-mm copper conductor, PVC insulated, armoured and outer
flexible PVC sheath cable. The system shall have in-built facilities for
testing the luminaries while in lowered position.
f. Power cable from the feeder pillar to the base compartment of the lighting
mast shall be taken through the PVC conduit laid in the foundation / shall
be laid directly buried trenches.
g. The trailing cable shall be terminated by means of metal cased plug and
socket which shall be provided at the base compartment to enable easy
disconnection. The exposed end of trailing cable at the top shall be taken in
flexible metal conduit. Connection to the power tool motor inside mast at
the bottom shall be through metal cased plug and socket arrangement to
enable easy disconnection.
5.2.12 Lightning Finial
Lightning protection shall be provided on the high mast. One number heavy
duty hot dip galvanised lightning finial shall be provided for each mast. The
lightning finial shall be minimum 1.2 m in length and shall be provided at the
centre of the head frame. It shall be bolted solidly to the head frame to get a
direct conducting path to the earth through the mast. The lightning finial shall
not be provided on the lantern carriage under any circumstances in view of
safety of the system. Down Lead conductor along with lightning earth pits shall
be supplied by vendor.
5.2.13 Earthing & Earthing Terminals
a. Suitable earth terminal using 12 mm diameter stainless steel hexagonal head

bolts shall be provided at convenient location at base of the mast for
lightning and electrical earthing of the mast. The mast shall be provided
Page 14 of 20
RAJASTHAN
with duplicate earthing including necessary 2 Nos. earth pits. Earth Pits shall
be G.I Pipe electrode type of min. 40 mm dia. and shall be as per IS 3043.
b. The earth resistance of each electrode (earth station) will be measured by
an approved earth testing apparatus and recorded. In case the earth
resistance is more than the required value, additional earth pits, as required
shall be made and inter connected by the contractor. The value of earth
resistance for Housing units shall not be more than 5 ohms.
c. The earthing ring shall be made by GI strip / insulated single core cable of
specified size. The ring shall be laid in the cable trench along with lighting
cable and connected to all the earthing pits.
d. The Feeder Pillar shall be provided with two separate earth terminals. An
earth busbar of appropriate cross section shall be provided inside the feeder
pillar and connected to the earth terminals provided on either side of the
feeder pillar.
Adequate number of holes / terminals shall be provided on earth bus with

suitable provision for terminating the earth wire.
GI strip / GI wire insulated single core cable of suitable size shall be used
for earthing by connecting the two earth terminals separately to the
earthing main in the shop / earth pit.
e. The single core PVC insulated wire/ bare copper wire or 4 mm2 GI wire and
the third core of the flexible wiring cable shall be used for earthing the light
fixtures.
f. Not less than 4 mm2 GI wire or suitable size PVC insulated copper wire shall
be used for earthing all metal boxes and brackets.
5.3 NAME PLATES
5.3.1 Permanent Non-Corrosive Nameplate with Engraved White Letters on Black

Background indicating the High Mast Lighting System Designation shall be Fixed.
The Nameplate shall indicate the following:
First line: Equipment Item No.
Page 15 of 20
RAJASTHAN
Second line: Equipment Description
Nameplates shall be provided for each equipment (lamps, Local control

stations, winch drive, starter, feeder pillar box etc.) mounted on the High
mast. Danger labels shall have black letters on a yellow background.
5.4 MAKES OF COMPONENTS
5.4.1 Manufacturer shall Furnish Standard List of Components makes for the complete
the High Mast Lighting System.
5.4.2 Preferred make of Components shall be
High Mast: Philips / Crompton / Bajaj

Lighting fixture & lamps: Philips / Crompton / Bajaj
Feeder Pillar: Reputed Make
Contactors: Siemens / ABB / L&T
Selector Switch: Kaycee / Recom
Fuse / Link: Siemens / GE
Timer: L & T / Siemens
Push button / Local control station: Siemens / L & T
Switch / MCB: Siemens / MDS
Terminals: Elmex / Connectwell
PVC insulated Copper wires: Polycab / Finolex
Items for which preferred makes are not indicated shall be procured only after
approval of the make by owner / consultant
5.5 PAINTING
5.5.1 All Metal Surfaces shall be thoroughly Cleaned and Degreased, Pickled and
Phosphatized. Thereafter, a Coat of Phosphate Paint and a Coat of Zinc
Chromate Primer shall be applied. After removing all Imperfections, all Metal
Surfaces shall be sprayed with Two Coats of Final Paint as per Colour Shade
Silver Grey No. 628 (Is-5). Final Coat shall be of Epoxy Based Heavy Duty Finish
Coat. All Unpainted Parts shall be plated to Prevent Corrosion.
Page 16 of 20
RAJASTHAN
5.6 CIVIL STRUCTURAL WORK
The scope of work includes design, detailing, supply and construction of foundations
for high mast. The work shall in general be executed as per IS and all referred codes
herein.
5.6.1 Materials
i. Cement
The cement used shall be any one of the following unless otherwise
specified in project data sheet:
• 33 Grade ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS 269: 1989

• 43 Grade ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS: 8112.: 1989
• Portland slag cements conforming to IS 455: 1989.
• Sulphate resisting Portland cement conforming to IS 12330: 1988.
ii. Aggregates
• Only natural existing aggregates conforming to IS 383: 1989 shall be

used.
• Coarse aggregate shall be 20 mm down-graded as per IS 383: 1989.
• Fine aggregate shall be graded evenly from fine to coarse as per Zones II
and III of IS: 383. Zone IV aggregate shall not be used.
iii. Water
Water used for manufacture and curing of concrete shall be clean and free
from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, sugar, organic materials
or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel as specified
in IS 456: 2000. Potable water shall be considered satisfactory
iv. Chemical Admixtures
Page 17 of 20
RAJASTHAN
• Chemical admixtures, if used, shall conform to IS 9103: 1999.

• Criteria of use of chemical admixtures shall be as per IS 456: 2000.
v. Reinforcing Steel
• Only high strength deformed steel bars of grade Fe-415 conforming to IS

1786: 2000 shall be used.
• Minimum diameter of main reinforcing bars in foundation and pedestal
shall be 12mm. Links shall be of minimum 8mm diameter
vi. Anchor / Foundation Bolts
Mild steel bars for turning anchor bolts shall conform to IS 432: 1982 Grade 1
and / or IS: 2062 Grade A. Nuts shall conform to IS 1363: 2002, IS 1367: 2002
and IS 3138: 1966
vii. Grout
Premix free-flow non-shrink cementations grout, with a minimum

compressive strength of 40 N/mm² at 28 days, shall be used.
5.6.2 Concrete
The concrete shall be design mix of min. grade M25 and other requirements as
mentioned in project data sheet. 75mm thick lean concrete shall be provided
under the structural foundation of proportion 1:4:8 using 40mm down
aggregates. The mud mat of lean concrete shall project 75mm beyond all sides
of the structural foundation slab.
5.6.3 Design of Foundation
a. The foundation shall be placed minimum 2.0 metres below Finished Grade
Level (FGL) or Natural Ground Level (NGL), whichever is lower.
b. Ground water table shall be considered at FGL/NGL, whichever is higher.
c. Factor of safety against overturning and sliding shall be considered as 2.0
and 1.5, respectively. Only 50% of the overburden weight of backfilled soil
over base slab of the foundation shall be accounted for checking of over-
Page 18 of 20
RAJASTHAN
turning and sliding. All design parameters for foundation shall be as per
IS:456 and referred BIS codes. Limit state method shall be used.
d. Safe Bearing capacity of Soil (SBC) shall be as per the Data sheet/Soil
investigation report.
5.6.4 Loadings
Loading in general shall be as per IS: 875. The basic wind speed shall be as per
the Project / site location and as called for in IS: 875. k1 and k2 factors shall be
unity. k3 shall be appropriate to topography but not less than 1.22 for Black Oil
Terminal.
6.0 INSPECTION, TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE AT WORK
6.1 During fabrication, the High mast lighting system shall be subject to inspection by
Owner / Consultant, or by an agency authorized by the Owner, to assess the progress
of work, as well as to ascertain that only proven raw material is used. The
manufacturer shall furnish all necessary information / data concerning the supply to
Owner’s / Consultant’s inspectors. The vendor shall give at least 15 days’ notice to
the purchaser regarding the date of testing to enable him or his representative to
witness the tests
6.2 Tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s works under his care and expense. All
routine tests as specified by the applicable standard codes shall be conducted. Type
test certificates for the high mast lighting system equipments used shall be furnished
of a recognized testing organization.
6.3 Routine Test shall be carried out on motor for winch drive.
6.4 All tests shall be conducted as per relevant applicable standards. Vendor shall furnish
valid Type Test Certificates of similar models along with the offer. Fresh type tests for
the equipment are not needed, provided the Manufacturer can submit certificates
that the equipment complies with all type tests as prescribed by IEC/IS Standard
specifying the test requirements for that equipment.
7.1 All information listed below is to be furnished along with the offer as a minimum
Page 19 of 20
RAJASTHAN
a. The layout of High Masts, Feeder Pillar. Lighting fixtures showing the illumination
level for the area.
b. Lighting calculation based on average illumination level of 20 lux & Min. of 12 lux
for high mast lighting system for Nayara Energy Pali Project.
c. List of major components with Makes.
d. List of recommended spares for two years normal operation with itemized rates.
e. Type test certificates.
f. Technical Catalogues.
g. List of clientele for similar equipment in last 5 years.
h. Complete list of special tools (if required)
7.2 The Manufacturer shall furnish the drawings and documents.
7.3 The Owner / Consultant will review drawings submitted by Vendor & return to the
Vendor one copy of drawings with comments to carry out necessary changes, if any,
during the engineering / manufacturing stage.
The High Mast supplied shall be acceptable to local Electrical Inspectorate and
changes required, if any, shall be carried out by the vendor without any extra cost.
Vendor to ensure that the maximum height of high mast clearance from concerned
statutory authority before procurement & execution of work.
Page 20 of 20
DATA SHEET FOR HIGH MAST LIGHTING SYSTEM
REV. 00
Project No. Unit

REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0
Date 21/12/2018
Prepared By PBS
Checked By PBS
Approved By SKJ
Client Review
Page 1 of 3
DATA SHEET FOR HIGH MAST LIGHTING SYSTEM
A GENERAL
1 Manufacturer : #
2 Quantity. of Fixtures Nos. : $
3 Quantity of Mast Nos. : 9
4 Applicable Standard / Reference Document : As per Doc. No.NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-033 Specification for High Mast
Lighting System
B SITE CONDITION
5 Design Wind Speed m/s : 5.5-6
7 Environment : Dry
C OPERATING CONDITIONS
1 Voltage Volts : 415 V ± 10% AC
2 Frequency Hz : 50 Hz ± 1%
3 Phase : 3 Phase + Neutral
4 Control Supply : 240 V AC ± 10%, 1 phase, 50 Hz. (through control transformer to be
derived by vendor)
1 Height of the mast Meter : 30 meter
2 Method of operation winch : Both manual and electrical
3 Type of fixture : LED Floodlight luminaire
4 Fixture wattage Watt : 400W LED
5 No of fixtures on each mast No. : $
6 No. of layer for fixture arrangement No. : 1
7 No. of fixtures in each layer No. : $
8 No. of aviation fixtures on each mast No. : 1 Nos.
9 Type and rating of aviation fixture : Medium intensity flashing LEDs
10 Feeder pillar loop in loop out facility : Yes / No
11 Area classification : Safe Area
12 Lightning protection finial & down conductor : Required
E STRUCTURAL DESIGN DATA
1 Maximum basic wind speed : 52 m/sec
2 Dynamic loading of high mast for wind Load : As per BS EN
3 Factor of safety overturning : 1.6
4 Factor of safety sliding : 1.6
5 Soil load bearing capacity : 20 T/m² @ 2m below NGL
6 Design safety factor for foundation : As per BS EN
F FEEDER PILLAR
1 Input supply : 415 V ± 10% AC, 50 Hz, TPN
2 Enclosure : Metal Sheet Steel, IP-55
3 Painting : Epoxy RAL-7031
4 Canopy : Required
5 Space heater : Required
6 Cable Glands : Double compression nickel-plated brass
7 Cable Lugs : Tinned copper
8 Earthing terminal : 2 Nos.
9 Lighting Controller : Microprocessor based Lighting Controllers

MANUFACTURER'S DATA (TO BE FILLED BY BIDDER)
A HIGH MAST STRUCTURE

1 Manufacturer Name :
2 Manufacturer Country of origin :
3 Type :
4 Height of mast : Meters
5 Qty. required (No’s): :
6 Material of construction :
7 Cross section of mast : Polygonal
8 Length of individual section : Top: Middle: Bottom:
9 Thickness of individual section : Top: Middle: Bottom:
10 Base and top diameter :
11 Type of joints :
12 Length of overlap joint :
13 Type of metal protection : Hot dip Galvanized treatment
14 Thickness of galvanization : Minimum
15 Size of door opening :
16 Thickness of base plate : mm
17 Size of anchor plate and thickness :
18 Weight of mast including base plate, door, head frame etc. : Kgs
19 Lightning protection finial : Required
20 Aviation Obstruction Light Fixtures : Required
B LANTERN CARRIAGE
1 Material of construction :
2 Diameter of carriage ring (mm) :
3 Buffer arrangement between carriage and mast :
4 Load carrying capacity :
5 Total weight of assembly with fittings :
C WINCH
1 Make of winch :
2 Number of drums per winch :
3 Gear ratio / materials :
4 Capacity :
5 Operating speed : rpm
6 Time to raise / lower :
7 Method of operation :
8 Type of Lubrication arrangement :
9 Type of lubricants :
10 Tested load per drum (kg.) :
11 Factor of safety :
12 Positive locking :
D STAINLESS STEEL WIRE ROPE
1 Make :
2 Grade :
3 Number of ropes :
4 Material and Construction :
5 Diameter (mm) :
6 Braking load capacity :
7 Factor of safety :
E HIGH MAST TRAILING CABLE
1 Type :
2 Make :
3 Conductor size and insulation :
4 Reference code :
5 Current carrying capacity :
6 No. of cores & Circuits :
7 Earthing conductor size :
F POWER TOOL **
1 Model :
2 Make :
3 Input supply : 240 V
4 Power rating :
5 Operating speed : rpm @ F. L.
6 Remote control switch PB station :
7 Size and Length of control cable :
8 Time taken for Raising / Lowering :
** EACH HIGH MAST SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A DEDICATED POWER TOOL
G TORQUE LIMITER
1 Model :
2 Make :
3 Lifting capacity :
4 Type of tripping device :
H FEEDER PILLAR
1 Model :
2 Make :
3 Input supply : 415 V ± 10% AC, 50 Hz, TPN
4 Type of enclosure :
5 Indication : LEDs
6 Canopy : Required
7 Cables Type :
8 Cable Glands & Lug Type :
9 Earthing terminals :
10 Lighting Controller :
11 Incoming MCCB & outgoing MCB & ELCB Rating :
I Expected designed life of the mast in years :

J Proven track record for the offered mast : Furnished / Not Furnished
NOTES:
2 $ : To be provided later
4 This Data Sheet shall be Read / Refer In Conjunction with Specification for High Mast Lighting System.

RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR CAPACITOR CONTROL PANEL

WITH CAPACITOR BANK

Page 1 of 7
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 SCOPE
3.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURE
4.0 CAPACITOR CONTROL PANEL
5.0 TESTS
6.0 INSPECTION
7.0 GUARANTEE
8.0 DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTION MANUALS
Page 2 of 7
RAJASTHAN
1.0 SCOPE:
This specification covers design, manufacture, testing and supply of APP type 480
KVAR Low Voltage Capacitors and Automatic power factor Control Panel required for
power factor improvement.
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS:
2.1 The design, manufacture and performance of power capacitors and accessories shall
comply with all currently applicable statutory regulations and safety codes in the
locality where the equipment will be installed.
2.2 Unless otherwise specified, the capacitor and control panel shall confirms to
following:
CODES DESCRIPTION
IS: 2147 (1962) Degree of Protection provided by customer for low voltage switchgear
BS: EN 60947
IEC: 144 / IEC539
IS: 9224 (1979) HRC cartridge fuse link upto 650 Volts
BS: 88
IS: 13947 (1993) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear
BS: 5486
IEC: 157-1
IS: 2705 (1992) Specification for current transformers
BS: 7626
IEC: 185
IS: 1248 (1993) Specification for direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments
and their accessories
BS: 89
IEC: 51
IS: 8623 (1993) Specification for factory unit assemblies of switch gear and control gear (upto 1000
volts)
IEC: 439
IS: 5578 Guide for marking of insulated conductor
IS: 13925 (1998) Specification for shunt capacitor for power system
IEC: 831-1
Page 3 of 7
RAJASTHAN
3.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURE
3.1 Capacitor bank shall be suitable for operation on 415 V. 3 Ph, 4 Wire, 50 Hz, solidly
earthed AC supply system.
3.2 The capacitor bank shall be complete with the required capacitor units with the
supporting post insulators, sheet steel cubicle, bus bars, connecting strips, foundation
channels, fuses.
3.3 The capacitor bank shall comprise suitable number of single-phase self-cooled
hermetically sealed unit in series parallel combination to achieve required KVAR
rating. However, failure of one unit shall not create an over voltage on other units
connected in parallel to avoid failure of parallel units.
3.4 Each capacitor unit / bank shall be provided with directly connected continuously
rated, low loss discharge device to reduce voltage to 50 volts within one minute.
3.5 Each capacitor unit shall be capable to continuously operate at the following overload
conditions separately.
a. Overvoltage upto 10% of the rated RMS voltage.

b. Over current upto 15% of the rated current.
c. Maximum reactive output upto 30% over the rated reactive output.
3.6 Each capacitor unit shall be individually protected by Capacitor MCCB with visual
indication for operation.
3.7 Capacitor bank shall be of “APP” type construction.
3.8 The Capacitor bank shall be provided with min. 14 step APFCR.
4.0 CAPACITOR CONTROL PANEL:
4.1 The control panel shall be indoor cubicle type, floor mounted, dust and vermin proof.
Page 4 of 7
RAJASTHAN
4.2 Cubicle shall comprise rigid structural frame enclosed by 2 mm thick cold rolled sheet
steel. Doors and covers shall be from 1.6 mm thick cold rolled sheet steel. Structural
frame work with foundation bolts etc. Shall be provided at the bottom to mount
control panel directly on steel channel base. ISMB 100 base channel shall be supplied
along with panels.
4.3 All doors, removable cover shall be gasketed all around preferably with neoprene
gaskets.
4.4 The control panel shall be complete with the following:
a. Removable cable gland plate, Ni Plated brass cable glands and crimping typelugs.
b. 1100 V grade terminal blocks.
c. Earth bus bar, size and material shall be specified in the data sheet.
4.5 All internal control wiring inside the cubicle shall be carried out with 2.5 sq. mm 600
V grade, PVC insulated stranded copper wires duly ferruled at either end. The power
wiring of 6 sq. mm and above shall be carried out with PVC insulated copper links.
4.6 Separate name plate shall be provided for relay, instruments, switch, indicating lamp,
etc. Name plate shall be made in acrylic material, rear engraved with white letter in
black background type.
4.7 Panting shall include emulsion cleaning, pickling with dilute acid, washing and rinsing
by water, phosphatising and oven drying. Two (2) coat of stoving type zinc chromate
primer. Uneven surface shall be smoothen with appropriate putty and rubbed with
sander to obtain smooth surface. Finally, two coats of light grey 631 of IS-5 paint shall
be applied.
4.8 Automatic power factor control relay with fourteen numbers of step shall be provided.
4.9 Control panel shall consist of Isolating MCCB, contactors, timer, Auto / manual
selector switch, indicating lamps, etc. as specified in data sheet and / or single line
diagram.
4.10 The busbars, if any, shall be of aluminium as specified and shall be PVC sleeved and
colour coded.
Page 5 of 7
RAJASTHAN
4.11 All panel doors, where equipment are mounted, shall be bonded with earth bars.
4.12 Schematic wiring shall be designed in such a way that once a capacitor bank is
switched “OFF”, it shall not be possible to switch “ON” the same capacitor bank until
its terminal voltage drop down to less than 50 volts.
4.13 The MCCBS and power contactors shall be suitable for capacitor duty.
5.0 TESTS
5.1 Routine test shall be carried out on assembled capacitors and control panel as per
relevant BS / IS / IEC standards. Following routine test shall be carried out on all
components and assembled control panel and as per relevant standards.
a. Functional test.
b. Checking of dimensions, paint shade, bill of materials, circuit diagram etc.
c. High voltage test (2.5 KV for 1 min.).
d. Insulation resistance test.
5.2 Type test reports for similar rating of capacitor units shall be submitted.
5.3 Seven (7) copies of type test and routine test certificates shall be submitted before
dispatch of Capacitor and Control Panel.
6.0 INSPECTION
6.1 Visual inspection including witnessing routine tests will be carried out by Owner or his
authorised representative.
6.2 Contractor shall notify Owner or his authorised representative in writing at least
fifteen (15) days prior to contractor’s scheduled inspection test.
Page 6 of 7
RAJASTHAN
7.0 GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall guarantee, design, materials / workmanship and performance for
a period of 18 (eighteen) months from final acceptance or 12 (twelve) months from
the date of commissioning and handing over the installation to the Owner, duly
certified by the site-in-charge / Owner’s representative for satisfactory operation of
the equipment.
8.0 DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTION MANUALS
8.1 Contractor shall submit four copies of the following certified drawings after award of
contract:
8.1.1 General arrangement of capacitor bank and control panel indicating main
dimensions, type of mounting, locations of various devices etc. and foundation
details.
8.1.2 Schematics diagram for automatic sequential switching with terminal and ferrule
numbers, for automatic operating type of capacitor control panel.
8.1.3 Wiring diagram of control panel indicating terminal block and various
apparatus.
8.1.4 Final list of components of control panel.
8.2 Contractor shall submit four (7) copies of ‘Installation and Maintenance Manual.
8.3 One print of each drawing will be returned to contractor after making all necessary
corrections, changes and required specifications. Contractor shall incorporate these
and send within fifteen days even (7) prints of each drawing marked “Certified for
Record and Uses”.
8.4 Detailed drawing & literature of APFC panel shall be supplied, one copy original and
seven copies of zerox for records.
Page 7 of 7
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR EARTHING & LIGHTNING

PROTECTION

Page 1 of 21
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 GENERAL
3.0 SYSTEM DEFINITIONS
4.0 DESIGN CRITERIA
6.0 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
7.0 CALCULATIONS
8.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Page 2 of 21
RAJASTHAN
1.0 GENERAL
Scope
This specification defines the requirements for the supply of earthing and lightning
protection materials and installation of the earthing and lightning protection systems,
which shall be installed in the petroleum storage terminal project of Nayara Energy
ltd. (NEL), Pali, Rajasthan.
Installation of complete Earthing & lightning protection system including air terminals,
roof conductors, down conductors, test links, connection to main station earthing
conductor and earthing electrode of the system, only hot dip galvanized hardware
shall be used.
The main codes and standards, considered as minimum requirements, as applicable,

are as follows. Latest version of these shall be followed.
IS 3043 (1987) Code of practice for earthing.

IS 3716 (1978) Application guide for Insulation coordination.
IS 732 (1989) Code of practice for electrical wiring installations.
IS 2309 (1989) Code of practice for the Protection of buildings and allied structures against
lightning.
IS 5572 Classification of hazardous areas having flammable gases and vapors’ for electrical
installation.
IS 7689 Guide for control of undesirable static Electricity.
IS: 4759-1979 Specification for Hot Dip Zinc Coatings on Structural Steel an and other allied.
IS: 209-1979 Specification for zinc.
IS: 2629-1966 Recommended Practice for Hot Dip Galvanizing of Iron and Steel.
IS: 6158-1971 Recommended Practice for Safe-guarding against Embrittlement of Hot Dip
Galvanized Iron & Steel Product.
IS: 2633-1972 Method of Testing Uniformity of Coating on Zinc Coated Articles.
IS: 6745-1972 Method for Determination of weight of Zinc Coating on Zinc coated iron and steel
articles.
ASTM A-123 Spec. for Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on (1978) Products Fabricated from Rolled,
Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips.
OISD STD 110 Recommended practices on static electricity.
OISD STD 244 Storage and Handling of Petroleum Products at Depots and Terminals
OISD STD 149 Design aspects for safety in electrical systems.
Page 3 of 21
RAJASTHAN
OISD STD 180 Lightning Protection.

API STD 610 Centrifugal Pumps for Petroleum, Petrochemical and Natural Gas Industries.
Note: IEC, NEC and OISD standard shall be followed where equivalent Indian Standards
are not available in specific cases.
3.0 SYSTEM DEFINITIONS
3.1 EARTHING SYSTEM
The earthing system consists of the interconnected grounding conductors and ground
electrodes necessary to provide an adequate electrical connection to earth. The
earthing system will minimize shock hazards to personnel and will provide a low
impedance path for ac system faults and direct stroke lightning currents.
3.2 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
The building and equipment lightning protection system consists of interconnecting air
terminals and the coursing / Downcomer strip to the grounding system. Unless
specifically directed, the lightning protection system shall comply with IS 2309
protection of buildings & allied structures against lightning.
3.3 EARTH CONNECTION
A connection used in establishing a ground and consisting of a grounding conductor, a

grounding electrode and the earth (soil) which surrounds the electrode.
3.4 EARTHING CONDUCTOR
A protective conductor connecting the main earthing terminal or the bonding

conductor of an installation, when there is no earth bus to an earth electrode or to
other means of earthing.
Page 4 of 21
RAJASTHAN
3.5 EARTHING GRID
A system of grounding electrodes consisting of interconnected bare conductors and

rods buried in the earth to provide a common ground for electric devices and metallic
structures.
3.6 CHEMICAL EARTHING ELECTRODE
Chemical Earthing using Electrode of size 100 mm Diameter, 3048 mm long connected
with 50 X 6 mm GI internal strips complete with super conductive crystalline
compound, cast iron cover with back fill compound.
3.7 BACKFILL COMPOUND
Earthing Backfill Compound has Hydrated Aluminium Silicate as the chief component,
which has a natural property of swelling. The Earthing Compound reduces soil
resistivity and helps in faster dissipation of fault current. The Earthing Compound
ensures least fluctuation of OHMIC value and elimination of the use of Salt, Charcoal,
etc. around the earthing electrode. The chemical absorbs a large amount of water to
produce thick tropic.
4.0 DESIGN CRITERIA
All Design criteria are based on Maintenance free Chemical earthing system
4.1 EARTHING NETWORK
This consists of main earth conductor (grid conductor) forming a closed ring network
with required number of earth electrodes connected to it to provide a common earth
for electrical devices and metallic structures. From each earth electrode two distinct
connections shall be made to the main earth conductor. The size of main conductor
shall be 75 x 10 mm GI strip.
a. The earth conductors shall be laid along cable trenches as indicated on the
earthing layout, and shall be firmly cleat to the sidewall of concrete trenches using
GI clamps at interval of 400 mm to 500 mm and near to the termination end. The
earthing for equipment shall be tapped from the main earth conductor and not
Page 5 of 21
RAJASTHAN
from cable tray support structure. Earth conductor when laid underground shall be
at a depth of 500mm below finished ground level.
b. Joints and tapping in the main earth loop shall be made in such a way that reliable
and good electrical connections are permanently ensured.
c. All joints below ground shall be welded and shall be suitably protected by giving
two coats of bitumen and covering with hessian tape.
d. Earth strip laid above ground shall be welded across straight through joints and
joints shall be suitably protected by giving two coats of bitumen to avoid oxidation
and insulation film formation of the strip surface.
e. When two earth strips are to be joined by means of welding, lap welding with an
overlapping of strip equivalent to double the width of the strip and all four sides
shall be continuously welded.
f. All joints at tapping above ground shall be by means of connector / lugs. A
minimum of two bolts of adequate size shall be used for this purpose. Earthing
strip joints at earth plate and equipment shall be through GI bolts, nut etc.
g. The Earthing system shall comply with the National Electrical Code and IEEE 80, IS
3043. The earthing system design and installation shall provide effective system
and equipment earthing.
4.2 MAINTENANCE FREE CHEMICAL EARTHING ELECTRODE
a. Maintenance free, Chemical Earthing Electrode with pipe-in-pipe technology, with

2 nos. B class IS mild steel pipes, one inside the other, hot dip galvanized with 610
gm/sq.m coating outside and inside, outer pipe dia. 80mm & inner pipe dia 50
mm, 3.048 mtr. long, buried at the depth of 3m below ground level along with Al
Earth-pit marker. The envelope space between pipes shall be filled with High
conductive and corrosion resistant crystalline mixture. Double GI flat strip earth
wire from the electrode shall be connected to grid on both side through PVC sleeve
of adequate size. Backfill compound around electrode shall have moisture
retaining mixture. Concrete inspection pit & Cast Iron cover with lifting shall be
included. The earth electrode assembly shall be duly tested with earth tester and
the results to be recorded.
b. The exact location of earth electrodes in the field shall be determined by
contractor in consultation with the Engineer-in-charge, depending on the soil
strata and resistivity. Earth electrodes shall be located avoiding interferences with
road, building foundation, column, pipelines etc. The civil area drawings shall be
referred for this. The distance between two electrodes shall not be less than twice
the depth of electrode.
Page 6 of 21
RAJASTHAN
c. Electrodes shall preferably be located in a moist soil which has a fine texture,
grain size and distribution. Wherever practicable the soil shall be dug up, all lumps
broken, and stones removed from the immediate vicinity of the electrodes and soil
packed by watering and ramming as tight as possible.
d. All Nut, Bolt & Washers shall be galvanized, and all steel work shall be hot dipped
galvanized.
e. The electrodes shall have a clean surface, not covered by paint, enamel, grease or
other materials of poor conductivity.
f. All earth electrodes shall be tested for earth resistance by means of standard earth
test meter. The tests shall take place in dry months, preferably after a protracted
dry spell.
g. The disconnect facility shall be provided for the individual earth electrode to
check its earth resistance periodically (IS 3043 cl-34).
h. Location of earth electrodes shall be marked by permanent markers for easy
identification. All earth Electrodes shall be serial numbered and also marked on 'As
Built' drawing for future reference.
i. Earthing system provided for concrete paved area by other agency where
applicable; shall be connected to the plant earthing system below ground by
minimum two earth connections.
4.3 CONNECTION
The earth system connections shall generally cover the following:
Equipment earthing for personnel safety System neutral earthing Static and lightning
protection
The following shall be earthed.
• System neutral.
• Current and potential transformer secondary neutral.
• Metallic non-current carrying parts of all electrical apparatus such as transformers
Switchboards, bus ducts, motors, neutral earthing resistors, capacitors, UPS,
battery, Charger panels, welding receptacles, power sockets, lighting / power
panels, control Stations, lighting fixtures etc.
• Steel structures / columns, rail loading platforms etc.
• Conduits and racks, lighting mast and poles.
Page 7 of 21
RAJASTHAN
• Storage tanks, spheres, vessels, columns and all other process equipment.
• Fence and Gate for electrical equipment (e.g. transformer, yard etc.).
• Cable shields and armour.
• Flexible earth provision for Wagon, Truck.
• Shield wire.
4.4.1 Conductor size for branch connection to various equipment shall be as per OISD
244, IEEE 80, IS 3043 and NEC Standards unless otherwise stated on earthing
layout drawings.
4.4.2 All process pipelines shall be bonded and earthed at the entry and exist points
of battery limit of hazardous area.
4.4.3 Steel pipe racks in the process units and offsite area shall be earthed at every
25 meters.
4.4.4 Equipment / street light pole etc. located remote from main earth network
shall be earthed by means of individual earth electrode and earth conductor as
per standard practice of manufacturer.
4.4.5 The main earthing network shall be used for earthing of equipment to protect
against static electricity.
4.4.6 All medium and high voltage equipment (above 250 V) shall be earthed by two
separate and distinct connections with earth.
4.4.7 Plant instrument system clean earthing, UPS system clean / safety earth shall
be separate from the electrical earthing system.
4.4.8 All paint, scale and enamel shall be removed from the contact surface before
the earthing connections are made, all earthing connections for equipment
earthing shall be preferably from the earth plate mounted above ground
wherever provided
Page 8 of 21
RAJASTHAN
4.4.9 Equipment foundation bolts shall not be used for earthing connection, Earth
connections shall be made through compression type cable lugs / by welded
lugs.
4.4.10 All hardware used for earthing installation shall be hot dip galvanized or zinc
passivated. Spring washers shall be used for all earthing connections and all
connections adequately locked against loosening.
4.4.11 Lighting fixtures and receptacles shall be earthed through the extra core
provided in the lighting circuit / cable for this purpose.
4.4.12 The Grid of Lightning Protection shall be distinct and shall not be connected to
any other earth Grid (OISD 244).
4.4.13 High voltage insulating mats shall be used for Substation Flooring. The
insulating mats are made from elastomer (rubber, latex and elastomeric
compounds that may be natural or synthetic or mixture of both) with anti-skid
aberrations on top to avoid slippery effects and smooth lower surface, these
high voltage insulating mats are developed as floor covering for the protection
of workers on AC & DC installations with the system voltages up to 11 kv.
5.1 TRANSFORMERS
The Neutral of the Transformer shall be earthed with two distinct earth pits
separately. Connections will be made to the pit directly and then pits will be
connected to each other to form a grid. This Grid shall be distinct and shall not be
connected to any other earth Grid. The transformer body shall be earthed at two
points separately leading to earthing system.
5.2 SUBSTATIONS, SWITCHGEAR AND MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
The grounding bus in metal-clad switchgear and motor control centers shall be
connected to the station grounding system at each end by earthing conductors.
Equipment supplied from metal-clad switchgear, Substations and motor control
centers shall be grounded as per relevant standard.
Page 9 of 21
RAJASTHAN
5.3 DIESEL GENERATORS
The equipment grounding for the diesel generators shall be connected to the station
grounding system at two locations or per manufacturer’s instructions.
The Neutral of the Diesel Generator shall be connected to two distinct earth pits
separately. Connections shall be made to the pit directly and then pits will be
connected to each other to form a grid. This Grid shall be distinct and shall not be
connected to any other earth grid.
5.4 MOTORS
Earthing Arrangement for Motors with Push Button Station / Starter Earth Connections
to Starter Looped from Earth Connections of Motor.
All the Motors operating above 250 volts shall have two separate connections to the
earth.
The grounding conductor shall be connected to the motor frame and terminal box.
5.5 PIPING AND TANKS
Tanks shall have two separate and distinct connections. Each connection will be made
to the respective earth pit directly. There after these earth pits should be inter-
connected to form a grid for Tank Farm.
The number of earth pits connections to be increased for large tanks so that the
distance between the connections does not exceed 30-meter on the tank perimeter.
Steel pipe racks in the process units and off-site areas should be grounded at every 25
m (OISD 244).
6.0 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Lightning protection systems shall be provided for required structures like Exhaust
pipes of DG sets. The systems shall be designed in accordance with IS 2309 protection
of buildings & allied structures against lightning.
Page 10 of 21
RAJASTHAN
Self-conducting structures shall not require separate aerial rod and down conductors.
These shall however be connected to the earthing system at two or more points as
shown on layout drawing.
An independent earthing network shall be provided for lightning protection and this
shall not be bonded with the main earthing network.
Lightning down conductor shall be brought to earth electrode in shortest straight path
as feasible to minimize surge impedance.
The Down conductor minimum size of the down conductor shall be 25mm X 3mm
tinned Cu strip, each down conductor shall be connect to a distinct earthing pit
directly and connected to form a grid.
The function of a down conductor is to provide a low impedance path from the air
termination to the ground system so that the lightning current can be safely
conducted to earth, without the development of excessively large voltages.
In order to reduce the possibility of dangerous sparking (side-flashing), the down

conductor Route should be as direct as possible with no sharp bends or stress points
where the Inductance, and hence impedance, is increased under impulse conditions.
Indian Standard IS: 2309 recommends following factors as a basis of calculating the
overall risk factor for assessing the requirement of lightning protection.
• Type of Construction.
• Contents of the building and consequential effects due to lightning stroke.
• Degree of isolation.
• Type of terrain where the structure is located.
• Height of the Structure.
• Lightning prevalence.
• Usage of the building.
Depending upon the characteristic features of above factors, overall risk factor shall
be calculated as per procedure given in IS-2309.
Page 11 of 21
RAJASTHAN
If the value of risk factor is less than One in Hundred Thousand, then in the absence of
any other overriding consideration, protection may not be provided.
If the risk factor is greater than One in Hundred Thousand, then sound reasons shall be
necessary to support the decision of not providing the lightning protection
Equipment Earthing Minimum Requirements
Equipment Minimum Size of the conductor

Main Earthing Grid 50 mm X 6 mm GI strip
Lightning protection Electrode 3048 mm (h) x 100 mm (d) Chemical Electrode
Lightning Down Conductor 25 mm x 3 mm Tinned Cu strip
Storage Tanks 40 mm X 5 mm GI Strip
Fire Water Pump House 25 mm x 6 mm GI strip
Static Earth at Tanker / Wagon loading / Unloading 40 mm x 6 mm GI strip.
gantry
Flexible cable for Static Earth 10 Sq mm Cu flexible cable with lugs at one end and
crocodile clip at other end.
Sub-Station equipments 40 mm x 6 mm GI strip
Power Transformer Neutral 50 mm X 6 mm GI strip
Power Transformer Body 40 mm x 6 mm GI strip
DG Neutral 50 mm X 6 mm GI strip
DG Body 40 mm x 6 mm GI strip
Motors 37 KW and above 16 mm (5/8”) diameter Wire Rope
Small Equipments & Instruments No. 8 SWG Solid GI Wire
Street Light Poles 10 mm (3/8”) GI Wire Rope
Push button stations No. 8 SWG Solid GI Wire
Main Earthing Electrode 3048 mm (h) x 100 mm (d) Chemical Electrode
Bonding of pipes 25 mm square copper strip / braided flexible cable.
Building structures and column 40 mm X 5 mm GI Strip
Recommended size for most plant designs, Confirm adequacy by calculation.
Page 12 of 21
RAJASTHAN
7.0 CALCULATIONS
• Ground conductor sizing is based on the maximum line-to-ground fault current and
fault duration.
• Ground resistance values should be as low as possible to reduce ground potential
rise (GPR) which is directly proportional to ground resistance.
• The soil resistivity value should be the average value corresponding closest to the
depth where the majority of the grounding system will be installed.
7.1 STEPS FOR EARTHING DESIGN CALCULATION.
• Soil resistivity report

• Calculation of Size of earth Conductor.
• Calculation of Quantity of earth Electrode.
• Calculation of Resistance of Earth Electrode.
• Calculation of Resistance of Earth Conductor.
• Verifying the total Grid resistance.
8.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING.
8.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HOT DIP ZINC GALVANIZATION OF STEEL.
8.1.1 Quality of Zinc
Zinc conforming to at least grade Zn 99.95 specified in IS: 209-1979 shall be

used for the purpose of galvanizing. Quality certificate required from
Manufacturer.
8.1.2 Base Metal
The steels and castings shall be in accordance with clause 2 of IS: 6158-1971,
where steel is supplied by the fabricator, it is the responsibility of the
fabricator to select suitable steel which will withstand normal galvanizing
operation without embrittlement. The edges of tightly contacting surfaces
should be completely sealed by welding. The residue of coated electrodes
should be removed, prior to pickling, by brushing, chipping or sand blasting.
Page 13 of 21
RAJASTHAN
8.1.3 Surface Preparation
Surface shall be cleaned and prepared as per clause 4 of IS: 2629-1966.

Malleable iron castings shall be shot, and grit blasted before galvanizing.
8.1.4 Galvanizing
The members shall be galvanized in accordance with the practice contained in

the IS: 2629-1966 unless otherwise specified in the succeeding paragraphs.
8.2 COATING REQUIREMENTS
8.2.1 Mass of zinc coating
Minimum average mass of zinc coating
Fabricated steel
Thickness less than 2 mm but not less than 1.2 mm shall be min. 610 gms/sq.m
Thickness 2 mm and above shall be min. 610 gms/sq.m
Fasteners
Up to nominal size M10 shall be 270 gms/sq.m
Over M10 shall be 300 gms/sq.m
8.2.2 Freedom from defects
The zinc coatings shall be uniform, adherent, reasonably smooth and free from
imperfections such as flux ash and dross inclusions, bare patches, black spots,
pimples, lumpiness and runs, rust stains, bulky white deposits and blisters, etc.
These terms have been defined in IS: 2629-1966 (duly amended wherever
necessary).
Page 14 of 21
RAJASTHAN
8.2.3 Steel embrittlement
The design of the product and the selection of steel, wherever steel is to be
supplied by fabricator, for its suitability to withstand normal galvanizing
operations without embrittlement or the method of fabrication shall be the
responsibility of the fabricator.
Recommended precautions to properly design, fabricate and prepare the

material for galvanizing to prevent embrittlement shall be as per IS: 6158-1971.
8.3 TESTS
8.3.1 General test
• Stand Dimension
• Bend Test
• Scrap Test
• Resistivity Test (20 deg C on three samples)
• Tensile Strength
• Percentage of Elongation
• Per sulfate Test
• Stacking Test
8.3.2 Type tests
• Visual Inspection
• Adhesion of coating
• Uniformity of coating
• Mass of zinc coating
• Each test shall be conducted on three samples.
Page 15 of 21
RAJASTHAN
8.3.3 Acceptance tests
• Adhesion of coating
• Uniformity of coating
• Mass of zinc coating
8.3.4 ROUTINE TESTS
8.4 SCALE OF SAMPLING
Samples in accordance with TABLE 1 shall be taken, at random, from each lot for
tests.
Table 1: SCALE OF SAMPLING
Lot size Sample size Permissible no. of defective units

Up to 25 3 0
26-50 5 0
51-100 8 0
101 and above 13 1
8.4.1 For materials of inconvenient lengths and from which it is not possible to cut a
specimen for coating characteristic tests, two test pieces of same cross section
and not less than 90 cm length shall be galvanized in the same bath.
8.4.2 The samples selected in accordance with Table 1 above shall be subjected to
the visual inspection. If any sample fails to conform to the requirement, the lot
shall be rejected.
8.4.3 If the lot inspected for visual inspection, passes the test, 3 samples for coating
characteristics shall be taken from the samples, which were subjected to the
visual tests.
Page 16 of 21
RAJASTHAN
8.4.4 Each of the 3 samples will be subjected to test for adhesion, uniformity, and
mass of zinc coating. Should any sample fail in any test, six more samples shall
be taken from the lot and all the 3 tests repeated. Should any sample fail in the
retest, the lot shall be rejected. If it is not possible to take six samples for the
test, the lot shall be rejected.
8.4.5 The material in a lot which has been rejected may be stripped and re-
galvanized and submitted for inspection and tests.
8.5 TEST METHODS
8.5.1 Visual inspection
The material shall be inspected visually to observe that it is smooth, reasonably

bright, continuous and free from such imperfections as flux / ash / dross
inclusions, bare patches, black spots, pimples, lumpiness runs, rust stains,
bulky white deposits and blisters. The stains of flux, usually white in colour,
shall not be regarded as flux intrusions.
8.5.2 Adhesion of galvanized coating
Coating shall withstand the knife tests as prescribed in IS: 2629-1966. When cut
or pried into, such as with a stout knife applied with considerable pressure, in a
manner tending to remove a portion of the coating, it shall only be possible to
remove small particles of the coating; and it shall not be possible to peel any
portion of the coating so as to expose iron or steel underneath.
On articles fabricated from angles, channels, beams and rolled sections of 8

mm or more thickness, the adhesion may, alternatively, be tested by pivoted
hammer tests as per IS: 2629-1966. This test is not suitable for curved and
round surfaces.
Page 17 of 21
RAJASTHAN
8.5.3 Uniformity of galvanized coating.
On small articles, which can be conveniently handled the uniformity of the

coating shall be determined by Preece Test in accordance with IS: 2633-1966 by
dipping the whole article in the copper sulphate solution. For sheets, strips and
other fabricated articles a 10 cm x 10 cm specimen may be cut for tests. For
tubes, 100 mm long piece shall be cut from each end of the product, after
discarding 300 mm length from the end. The article shall withstand 5 dips of
one minute each.
For long articles, measurement of coating thickness at a number of places by

magnetic method shall be taken as a uniformity test.
Note: The Preece Test is primarily meant for articles where surface is
mechanically scrapped or wiped after dip in the galvanizing baths etc.
8.5.4 MASS OF GALVANIZED COATING.
The average mass of galvanized coating shall be determined by any one of the
following methods as agreed between the purchaser and the galvanizer before
the tests.
Mass before and after galvanizing: The mass of coating may be determined by
weighing the article before and after galvanizing, subtracting the first mass
from the second and dividing the result by the coated surface area. The first
mass shall be determined after pickling, rinsing and drying; and the second
after cooling to the ambient temperature.
Stripping method: In case of materials galvanized without purchasers’

inspection, average mass of coating shall be determined by stripping the entire
article in accordance with IS: 6745-1972.
8.5.5 Magnetic thickness gauge method.
For large products such as poles, towers, structural shape and castings the
average weight of the coating shall be determined by a magnetic thickness
gauge.
Page 18 of 21
RAJASTHAN
Before making the measurement, the gauge shall be calibrated by measuring

the thickness of zinc coating on a test panel and comparing the measured value
with the value obtained by stripping method on the same piece.
For castings etc. at least 5 readings may be taken at convenient locations

nearly in the centre. Thickness in micro-meters, when multiplied by 7.047
would give the average mass of zinc coating. Three articles in each lot of up to
100 shall be tested in this manner.
8.6 TESTING FOR TINNED COPPER CONDUCTOR
Applicable codes, standards and specifications, the supply of the conductor shall
comply with all currently applicable Standards, regulations and safety codes in the
locality where the equipment will be installed.
Nothing in this specification shall be construed to relieve the supplier of his

responsibility. Where no standards are available, the supply items shall be of good
quality and workmanship and backed by test results.
The conductor shall conform to the latest applicable standards and codes of practice
as mentioned in this specification. Other National Standards are acceptable if they are
established to be equivalent to or superior to the listed standards subject to approval
by the purchaser and the manufacturer shall provide English version of standards and
codes applicable.
IS - 613 Copper rods and bars for Electrical purposes –Specification.

IS – 14214 Annealed stranded Copper conductors for jumper wires specification.
IS -1778 Reels and drums for bare conductor.
IS – 1885 Electro technical Vocabulary: Part-32. Cables, Conductors and Accessories for electricity
supply.
IS – 191 Copper –specification.
ASTM – B 3 Specification for soft or annealed copper wire.
ASTM–33 Specification for tinned, soft or annealed copper wire for electrical purpose.
Page 19 of 21
RAJASTHAN
8.6.1 Pre-Dispatch Inspection.
• Visual examination.
• Measurement of Physical dimensions.
• Measurement of conductor resistance.
• Annealing test. (Before and after stranding).
• Persulphate Test.
• Purity of copper.
8.6.2 Stages for Testing.
• Before Tinning.
• After annealing.
• After Tinning.
8.6.3 The following test certificate shall be produced during / Inspection.
• Lay length.
• Tensile Strength.
• Purity of copper.
8.7 GENERAL TEST & ROUTINE.
• Resistance of individual earth electrodes shall be measured after disconnecting it

from the grid by using standard earth test meggar.
• Earthing resistance of the grid shall be measured after connecting all the earth
electrodes to the grid.
• The resistance value of an earthing system to general mass of the earth should not
exceed 1 Ohm for main earth grid (OISD 244), 1 Ohm for bonding connections
between joints in pipelines and associated facilities and 2 Ohms for each electrode
to the general mass of Earth.
• For lightning protection, the value of 5 ohms as earth resistance shall be desirable,
but in no case it shall be more than 10 ohms.
• Vender to submit QAP after purchase order is placed and get the QAP approved
from us.
Page 20 of 21
RAJASTHAN
8.8 THE RESISTANCE TO EARTH SHALL BE MEASURED TYPICALLY AT THE FOLLOWING

POINTS.
• At each electrical system earth or system neutral earth.

• At each earth provided for structure lightning protections.
• At one point on earthing system used to earth electrical equipment enclosures.
• At one point on earthing system used to earth wiring system, enclosures such as
metal conduits and cable sheaths or armour.
• At one point on fence enclosing electrical equipment.
Page 21 of 21
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR LOCAL CONTROL STATION

Page 1 of 10
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 INTRODUCTION
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
3.0 SITE CONDITION
5.0 ELECTRICAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
7.0 CERTIFICATIONS
8.0 DRAWINGS / DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED
Page 2 of 10
RAJASTHAN
1.0 INTRODUCTION

4000 KL.
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
This specification covers the general requirements for the design, manufacture,
inspection, testing and supply of industrial and flameproof local control stations (LCS).
This document shall be read in conjunction with corresponding data sheet.
The design and the installation of the equipment shall be in accordance with
established codes, good engineering practices and shall confirm to the statutory
regulations applicable in the country. Latest IEC, BS standards are to be followed for
all electrical equipment / component design.
The main codes, standards and statutory regulations considered as minimum

requirements are as given below. Latest version of these shall be followed:
• International Electro-technical Commission (IEC)

• British Standard Institution (BS)
• The Institute of Petroleum (IP)
• Institute of electrical & electronics engineers (IEEE)
Page 3 of 10
RAJASTHAN
• National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

• Atmospheres Explosives (ATEX)
The design and terminology shall comply as a minimum with the latest editions of the
engineering codes, standards and practices as below. However, system / equipment
design shall be in line with latest of all applicable standards-
Codes Description
IEC 60027-1 Letter symbols to be used in electrical technology Part-1
IEC 60079 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmosphere.
IEC 60227 PVC insulated cables for working voltages up to and including 750V
IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cables
IEC 60071 Insulation co-ordination
IEC 60085 Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation
IEC 60445 Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and identification -
Identification of equipment terminals, conductor terminations and conductors
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
IEC 60664 Insulation coordination for equipment within LV system
IEC 61000 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
IEC 60502 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages from 1
kV (Um = 1.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
Codes and standards shall be inclusive of all the amendments at the time of order.
The LCS shall also confirm to the local Electricity Rules and other statutory regulations
currently in force in the country.
Any conflicts between the referenced documents shall be identified to BUYER in

Writing for resolution. In general, the order of precedence shall be as follows:
• Statutory Regulations
• Data Sheet
• Technical Specifications
• Purchase Order
• Tender and any other documents forming part of the Contracts
• Electrical Design Basis
• Referenced Codes & Standards
Page 4 of 10
RAJASTHAN
Vendor shall give a notice of at least one year to the end user of equipment before
phasing out of product / spares to enable the end user for the placement of order for
spares & services.

sheets.
3.0 SITE CONDITION
The LCS shall be suitable for outdoor installation and satisfactory operation in salt
laden, humid and corrosive atmosphere. The equipment shall be selected for
suitability of Plant Environment Conditions as specified below.
The following conditions apply, unless otherwise specified in the data sheets:
Altitude from above Sea Level 183 Meter
Average Ambient Temperature (Min. / Max.) ‘5 / 47 °C
Seismic Zone Category ZONE-2
Average Relative Humidity 50-60%
Environment Dry
Page 5 of 10
RAJASTHAN
Distribution Supply : 415V, 3-Phase Supply 240V, 1-Phase Supply

Voltage tolerance : ± 10%
System Frequency : 50Hz
Frequency tolerance : ± 1%
System Power Factor : 0.8 (Assumed)
5.1 GENERAL CRITERIA
All motors will be provided with local control stations each having START (Green) /
STOP (Red) pushbuttons. The stop position is stay put type with pad lock facility.
The local control stations shall be of aluminum alloy (LM6) construction, Enclosure of
the control station shall be suitable for site conditions such as weather proof, dust
proof, flame proof (Ex-d), corrosion resistant etc. LCS located outside shall have
minimum IP-65.
• Design Life
The equipment will be designed for an operational design life of minimum 30

years.
5.2 ENCLOSURE
The local control station for hazardous area shall be flameproof type (ex-‘d’), in
aluminum alloy (LM-6) enclosure confirm to IEC-60079, suitable for site condition such
as weather proof & dust proof. LCS Enclosure shall have minimum IP-65 Protection.
All local control stations shall be provided with neoprene gaskets.
All accessories like nut, bolts, washers etc. shall be made of stainless-steel SS-304.
Page 6 of 10
RAJASTHAN
5.3 PUSH BUTTONS
Push buttons for start & stop shall be of green & red color respectively. All Push
buttons shall be rated for 5 A at 240V AC fitted with self-reset, 2 NO and 2 NC
contacts.
“START” & “STOP” push button shall be spring return & flush type. “Emergency STOP”
push button shall be mushroom type with stay-put/turn to release feature and shall be
lockable in pressed position.
5.4 INDICATING METERS
LCS for motors rated above 22 kW will be provided with ammeter.
Moving iron type ammeters shall be incorporated in the local control stations
wherever mentioned in Local control station schedule. Meters shall be rectangular of
size 72 mm x 72 mm or 65 mm dia. and shall have provision for zero adjustment. Class
of accuracy shall be 1. These shall be suitable for operation from 1 A secondary CT.
The ammeter shall have a compressed scale at the upper end to read motor starting
current. The ammeter shall be suitable for 1A secondary current. The ammeter glass
shall be toughened type (Type A glass).
The normal scale shall cover approximately 80 % of the scale length and the remaining
20 % scale length shall have compressed scale from 100 % to 600 % of CT primary
rating.
A red mark shall be provided at the full load current of the motor, the value of which
shall be furnished to the vendor.
5.5 SELECTOR SWITCH
Local control station is required for all motor feeders. All selector switches shall have
minimum 2 poles & 2 positions for Local - Remote. Six terminals shall be provided for
each selector switch, unless otherwise stated.
Page 7 of 10
RAJASTHAN
5.6 INTERNAL WIRING
All Internal wiring shall be carried out with 600/1000 V grade PVC insulated,
multistrand copper conductor wires, color coded for phase, neutral and earth with
minimum size of 2.5 Sq.mm.
Ferrules for identification shall be provided according to wiring diagram. The ferrules
shall be yellow in color and engraved with black numbers and shall be fitted to each
wire. Spare auxiliary contacts of all equipment shall also be wired up to the terminal
block.
5.7 TERMINAL BLOCKS
Terminals shall be shrouded and shall be numbered as per the wiring diagram.
Minimum rating of the terminal block shall be 10A. More than 2 wires per terminal
shall not be permitted.
20% spare terminals shall be provided for each local control station. Minimum distance
between terminal block and gland plate should not be less than 150mm. Local control
station shall be suitable for bottom cable entries. Each control station have provided
with 2 Nos. of cable entries. Unused Entry shall have Flameproof Plug ATEX certified.
Suitable Flameproof cable glands of brass double compression type ATEX certified for
Hazardous areas shall be supplied by vendor for flameproof equipment’s. Cable glands
shall be sleeved and shall be at least IP65 in accordance to IEC 60529.
5.8 NAMEPLATES
Tagging & Nameplate shall be done on SS strips with engraved lettering giving pump
Tag No & Description & kW rating. Letter size shall not be less than 3mm.Warning
inscription ‘isolate power supply before opening’ shall be provided on equipment’s.
Separate Nameplate shall be provided to indicate the details of testing agency, test
certificate number with date etc. for flame proof equipment’s. The particulars of the
plate will be supplied to the vendor. Nameplate shall be fixed by screws and not
pasted.
Page 8 of 10
RAJASTHAN
5.9 MOUNTING
Local control station shall have 4 lugs for fixing on wall or fabricated steel support.
The lugs shall be offset so that the rear of the unit stays away from the surface by at
least 5 mm. Two of the holes shall be round and the other two oblong to facilitate
correct positioning. All screws, nuts and studs etc. shall be of electro-galvanized or
zinc passivated type. One No of earth terminal shall be provided on the enclosure.
The terminals shall be suitable for 8 SWG wire.
5.10 PAINTING
The enclosure shall be treated for painting with two coats of epoxy paint having RAL-
7031 shade.
Inspection and testing shall be carried out with relevant IEC Standards of latest
edition. All tests shall be carried out in the presence of purchaser's representative.
Vendor shall carry out routine tests at works and in presence of purchaser’s
representative/Third party inspector. The Vendor shall arrange all necessary
equipment required for testing/inspections.
Vendor shall confirm in their offer that type test certificates for completely
assembled fittings and for all standard components shall be submitted after purchase
order. Type test certificates older than 5 years will not be accepted. Test certificates
shall be submitted for all bought out components.
7.0 CERTIFICATIONS
All Local control stations shall be tested by authorized testing agency (ATEX /
BASEEFA / PESO/ LCIE / UL / FM) for use in specified gas group locations. Local
Standards Authority marking is mandatory. Equivalent testing and certification of the
each type of local control station shall be furnished along with the offer.
8.0 DRAWINGS / DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED
The Vendor shall submit drawings and documents in accordance with the requirements
of the Owner.
Page 9 of 10
RAJASTHAN
Drawings shall be with full details, dimensions and reference data.
Before commencing manufacture the Vendor is to submit for approval the documents
listed:
• Cross sectional drawings giving all dimensions and weight / specific weight.
• Should it be found necessary during manufacturing to deviate from the approved
drawings, it is the Vendor’s responsibility to correct and modify those drawings,
and obtains Purchaser’s approval for such changes.
• Filled in Datasheet
• Vendor’s catalogues
• Routine Test Certificates
• Type Test Certificates
selected mode of transportation, i.e. by ship / rail or trailer, and shall be wrapped in
polythene sheets before being placed in crates / cases to prevent damage to finish.
The crates/ cases shall have skid bottom for handling. Special notations such as
‘Fragile’, ‘This side up’, ‘Centre of gravity’, ‘Weight’, ‘Owner’s particulars’, ‘PO no.’
etc., shall be clearly marked on the packages together with other details as per
purchase order.
The equipment may be stored in a covered shed for long periods before installation.
The packing should be suitable for such storage.
Page 10 of 10
DATA SHEET FOR LOCAL CONTROL STATION (LCS)
REV. 00
Project No. Unit

REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0
Date 21/12/2018
Prepared By PBS
Checked By PBS
Approved By SKJ
Client Review
Page 1 of 3
DATA SHEET FOR LOCAL CONTROL STATION (LCS)
A GENERAL
1 Manufacturer : #
2 Model Number : #
3 Quantity : $
4 Tag. No. : $
5 Applicable Standard : As per Doc. No.NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-036 Specification for Local Control
Station (LCS)
B SITE CONDITION
5 Environment : Dry
6 Area Classification : ZONE-1/2, Group-IIA, Temperature Class T3
1 Control Voltage Volt : 240 V AC +/- 10%,
2 Frequency Hz : 50Hz +/- 1%
3 Number of phase : 1-Phase Neutral
4 System Earthing : Solidly earthed
5 CT secondary Current Amp. : 1 Amp
1 Enclosure
1.1 Material of construction and enclosure : Alluminium alloy (LM6), Flameproof (Ex-'d')
1.2 Degree of protection : IP-65
1.3 Paint shade of enclosure : $ (Manufacturer's standard / Epoxy RAL 7031)
1.4 Name Plate : Stainless Steel
2 Push Button
2.1 START : Spring Return & Flush type
2.2 STOP : Spring Return & Flush type
2.3 Emergency Push Button : Mushroom headed lockable type
2.4 Break capacity : 5 Amp for 240 V AC
2.5 Contact configuration : 2 NO + 2 NC
3 Selector Switch
3.1 No. of Poles & Positions : 2 Poles & 2 Position (Min.)
3.2 Make and Break Capacity : 5 Amp for 240V AC
4 Ammeter (for Motor Rated above 37 KW)
4.1 Type : Moving Iron Type
4.2 Accuracy Class : 1
5 Wiring and Terminal Block
5.1 Voltage Grade : 600 / 1000 V
5.2 Current Rating : 10 A Min.
5.3 Type of Wiring : Multistrand Copper Conductor
5.4 Lugs Type & Materials : Ring Type Tinned Copper
5.5 Cable Entry : 2 Nos. of cable entries from Bottom
6 Cable Gland
6.1 Type & Materials : Double Compression, Nickel Coated Brass Type (Ex-'d')
6.2 Size : $

LOCAL CONTROL STATION MANUFACTURER'S DATA (TO BE FILLED BY BIDDER)
1 Tag No. :
2 Make :
4 Manufacturer’s Country of origin: :
5 Overall weight of LCS : Kg.
6 Overall dimensions (Length x Depth x Height) : mm
7 Enclosure
7.1 Area of classification :
7.2 Temperature class :
7.3 Gas group :
7.4 Degree of protection :
7.5 Paint shade of enclosure :
7.6 Thickness of paint shade :
8 Canopy
8.1 Material of canopy :
8.2 Thickness of material :
9 Push Botton
9.1 Make :
9.2 Type of START P.B :
9.3 Type of STOP P.B :
9.4 Locking facility for STOP button :
9.5 Break capacity :
9.6 Contact configuration :
10 Terminal Block
10.1 Make :
10.2 Voltage grade :
10.3 Current rating :
11 Internal wiring
11.1 Type :
11.2 Voltage grade :
12 Ammeter
12.1 Make :
12.2 Type :
12.3 Accuracy class :
12.4 Dimensions(mm) :
12.5 Type of glass :
12.6 Red marking for full load current :
13 Selector Switch (Flameproof)
13.1 Make :
13.2 No. of Poles & Positions :
13.3 Make and Break Capacity :
14 Cable Gland
14.1 Make :
14.2 Type :
14.3 Size :
14.4 Material :
15 Lugs
15.1 Make :
15.2 Type :
15.3 Material :
16 Earthing Terminals
16.1 Number of Terminals :
16.2 Size :
NOTES:
4 This Data Sheet shall be Read / Refer In Conjunction with Specification for Local Control Station.
7 Valid Flame Proof Certificate from Competent Authority For LCS shall Be Submitted By Bidder & shall Be Certified by recognized independent test house (ATEX /
BASEEFA / LCIE / UL / FM/PESO).

RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTING SYSTEM

Page 1 of 16
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 GENERAL
4.0 LIGHTING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
5.0 TESTS
6.0 COMMISSIONING CHECKS
Page 2 of 16
RAJASTHAN
ANNEXURES

A LUX CHART
B DOCUMENTATION FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES
Page 3 of 16
RAJASTHAN
1.0 GENERAL
This specification covers the general description of design, manufacture and

construction features, testing, supply, installation and commissioning of the
illumination system equipment required to be provided by the bidder. All lighting
fixtures of the plant shall be LED.
2.1 All standards and codes of practice referred to herein shall be the latest edition
including all applicable official amendments & revisions as on date of bid opening. In
case of conflict between this specification and those (IS codes, standards etc.)
referred to herein, the former shall prevail. All work shall be carried out as per the
following standards & codes.
2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES
IS:1913 General and safety requirements for luminaries.

IS:2148 Flame proof enclosures of electrical apparatus.
IS:418 Tungsten filament general service electric lamps.
IS:1258 Bayonet lamp holders.
IS:1534 Ballast for fluorescent lamps.
IS:1569 Capacitors for use in tubular fluorescent, high pressure mercury vapour and low-pressure
sodium vapour discharge lamp circuit.
IS:1777 Industrial luminaire with metal reflectors.
IS:2149 Luminaire for Street lighting.
IS:2215 Starters for fluorescent lamps.
IS:2418 Tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting services.
IS:3323 Bi-pin lamp holders for tubular fluorescent lamps.
IS:3324 Holders for starters for tubular fluorescent lamps.
IS: 3646 Calculation of coefficient of utilization
IS: 4012 Dust proof electric lighting fittings
IS:4013 Dust-tight electric lighting fittings.
IS:6616 Ballasts for high pressure mercury vapour lamps.
IS: 6665 Code of practice for industrial lighting
IS:8224 Electric Lighting fittings for Division 2 areas.
IS:9900 High-pressure mercury vapour lamps.
IS:9974 High pressure Sodium vapour lamps.
IS:10276 Edison screw lamp holders.
IS:10322 Luminaires for street lighting
Page 4 of 16
RAJASTHAN
IS:13021 AC Supplied Electronic Ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps.

OISD: 244 Storage & Handling of petroleum products at depots and terminals
(Draft-3 2013)
2.3 LIGHTING PANELS, SWITCH-BOXES, RECEPTACLES AND JUNCTION BOXES
IS:2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low-voltage switchgear and control gear.
IS:1293 Plugs & socket outlets of rated voltage upto and Including 250 volts & rated current upto and
including 16 Amps.
IS: 2551 Danger notice plates.
IS:13947 Low voltage switchgear and control gear
IS: 3854 Switches for domestic and similar purposes.
IS: 6875 Control switches (switching devices for control and auxiliary circuits including contactor
relays) for voltages upto and including 1000 V AC and 1200 V DC.
IS: 13703 Low voltage fuses for voltages not exceeding 1000 V AC or 1500 V DC.
2.4 CONDUITS, PIPES AND ACCESSORIES
IS:2667 Fittings for rigid steel conduit for electrical wiring.

IS:3837 Accessories for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring.
IS:9537 Conduits for electrical installations.Conduits, Pipes and Accessories
IS:2667 Fittings for rigid steel conduit for electrical wiring.
IS:3837 Accessories for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring.
IS:9537 Conduits for electrical installations.
2.5 LIGHTING WIRES / CABLES
IS:694 PVC insulated cables for working voltages upto & including 1100 V
IS:3961 Recommended current ratings for cables. (PVC Insulated and PVC sheathed heavy duty cables
and light duty cables).
IS:8130 Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords.
IS:10810 Methods of tests for cables.
Page 5 of 16
RAJASTHAN
2.6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION PRACTICES & MISCELLANEOUS
IS:1944 Code of practice for lighting of public thorough fare

IS:3646 Code of practice for interior illumination.
IS:5572 Classification of Hazardous areas (other than Mines) having flammable gases and Vapours for
electrical installation
IS:6665 Code of practice for industrial lighting.
IS:5 Colour for ready mixed paints & enamels.
IS:280 Mild steel wires for general engineering purposes.
IS:374 Electric ceiling type fans & regulators.
IS:732 Code of practice for electrical wiring installations.
IS:1255 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of power cables Upto and including 11 kv
rating.
IS:2062 Steel for general structural purposes
IS:2629 Recommended practice for hot-dip galvanizing of iron and steel.
IS:2633 Methods for testing uniformity of coating of zinc coated articles.
IS:2713 Tubular steel poles for overhead power lines.
IS:3043 Code of practice for earthing
IS:5216 Guide for safety procedures and practices in electrical work.
IS:5571 Guide for selection of electrical equipments for hazardous areas.
BS:6121 Mechanical cable glands

Wind speed: 5.5 – 6.0 m/sec
4.0 LIGHTING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
4.1 LED LIGHTING SYSTEM
LED lighting system 415 V, 3 Phase, 4 wire, will be fed from the lighting distribution
boards (LDBs) which in turn will be fed from MLDB / EMLDB.
Page 6 of 16
RAJASTHAN
4.2 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
1. A comprehensive illumination system shall be provided.

2. The system shall include lighting distribution boards, lighting fixtures, junction
boxes, receptacles, switch boards, conduits, cables and wires, etc. The system
shall cover all interior and exterior lighting such as area lighting, including
Transformer & DG yard etc. The constructional features of lighting distribution
boards shall be similar to AC/DC distribution boards described in chapter of LT
Switchgear. Outgoing circuits in Lighting Distribution Boards shall be provided with
MCBs of adequate ratings.
3. The illumination system shall be designed on the basis of best engineering practice
and shall ensure uniform, reliable, aesthetically pleasing and glare free
illumination. The lighting fixtures shall be designed for minimum glare. The design
shall prevent glare / luminous patch seen on VDU / Large video screens, when
viewed from an angle. The finish of the fixtures shall be such that no bright spots
are produced either by direct light source or by reflection. The diffusers / louvers
used in fluorescent fixtures shall be made of impact resistant polystyrene sheet
and shall have no yellowing property over a prolonged period. The Lux levels to be
adopted for various area are indicated at Annexure – A.
4. Apart from maintenance factor as given below, Temperature correction factor
shall be considered in the lighting design for fluorescent fixtures located in non-
air-conditioned area.
Air-conditioned area: 0.8

Non-Air-conditioned and other indoor area: 0.7
Dust prone indoor areas and outdoor areas: 0.6
5. All outdoor fixtures shall be weather proof / flame proof as the case may be.
6. All lighting fixtures & control gears shall be powder coated.
7. Wires of different phase shall normally run in separate conduit. For areas
illuminated by more than one circuit, the adjacent circuits shall be from different
phases.
8. Power supply shall be fed from suitable number of conveniently located lighting
distribution boards (LDB). AC lighting supply shall be isolated from main supply by
lighting transformers of max. rating of 300KVA and fault level restricted to 10 kA
at Lighting Distribution Boards. Minimum 2 ways shall be kept as spare feeders in
the lighting distribution boards.
Page 7 of 16
RAJASTHAN
9. Lighting transformer shall be 415 V / 415 V, AN cooling, 4% impedance. Vector

group shall be Dyn11.offload tap switch / link of ±5% in steps of 2.5% tapping full
capacity. Class of insulation shall be class F and maximum temperature rise shall
be 90 ºC over ambient temperature of 50ºC. The neutral of the transformer shall
be solidly earthed and brought through separate earth bus. Noise level shall be as
per NEMA standard (50 dB for 0 - 50 KVA and 55 dB for 51 - 150 KVA)
10. Lighting distribution boards shall be constructed out of 2 mm thick CRCA sheet
steel. The door shall be hinged and the panel shall be gasketted to achieve
specified degree of protection. The panel shall be provided with terminal blocks
for incoming and outgoing circuits, earthing terminals, removable gland plates at
bottom and canopy shall be provided with slope towards the rear side of the panel.
Wiring inside the panel shall be carried out with 1100 V grade PVC insulated
stranded copper wires of adequate size. Terminal blocks shall be 750 V grade, clip-
on stud type, moulded in melamine and shrouded.
All MCBs / Isolators / Switches / Contactors etc. shall be mounted inside the board
and a fibre glass sheet shall be provided inside the main door such that the
operating knobs of MCBs etc., shall project out of it for safe operation against
accidental contact. MCB’s shall be current limiting type with magnetic and thermal
release suitable for manual closing and automatic tripping under fault condition
with short circuit interrupting capacity of 10 kA rms. Isolators of AC lighting boards
shall be of TPN, continuous duty, load make-break type and fuses shall be of HRC
plug in type.
Lighting boards shall have IP55 degree of protection in general. However, Lighting
boards located in flameproof areas shall have IP65 degree of protection.
Ladder approaches shall be provided for maintaining the fixtures wherever

applicable.
11. 16 A, 240 V AC industrial type receptacles shall be provided in the following areas:
• These receptacles shall be energized from lighting panel. Maximum three

receptacles shall be connected in one circuit.
• 10A, 24V AC receptacles with IP55 DOP shall be provided in the following areas.
• Two nos in each fire Pump house, TLF shed, product pump house, T/T locking
shed.
Page 8 of 16
RAJASTHAN
• It shall not be possible to insert 24V plug into 240V receptacle
12. All fluorescent fixtures shall have energy efficient ‘T5’ type fluorescent lamps
except those in div 2 hazardous area. The louvers of these fixtures shall be
designed for ‘T5’ type fluorescent lamps. All fluorescent lamps shall have ‘cool day
light color designation. The mirror optics type fluorescent fixtures shall have no
iridescence effect.
13. All hazardous area lighting system accessories like poles, fixtures, receptacles,
Distribution boards, etc. shall be flameproof.
14. Bidder shall ensure lux levels as per OISD 244 (latest standard).
15. There shall be no dark patches for hazardous and non-hazardous areas.
4.3 FIXTURES
4.3.1 Weatherproof type fixtures shall be suitable for use with fluorescent / sodium
vapor LEDs as per the requirement.
4.3.2 The fixtures shall be designed to facilitate easy installation and maintenance,
including cleaning, replacements of accessories like lamps / starters, etc. Also,
all corresponding parts of similar equipment shall be interchangeable.
Connections between different components shall be made in such a way that
they will not get loose by small vibrations.
4.3.3 All outdoor fixtures shall be provided with canopy and shall be dust & drip
proof having degree of protection equal to IP-55.
4.3.4 The complete fixture body & control gear shall be suitable to withstand the
corrosive atmosphere prevalent in chemical plant. All gaskets shall be of
neoprene.
4.3.5 The integral housing shall be designed for efficient cooling of the unit.
4.3.6 Fixtures shall be suitable for the mounting arrangements as specified. Fixture
mounting arrangements required on lighting fixtures like brackets, clamps,
reducer hardware etc. shall be in vendor’s scope.
Page 9 of 16
RAJASTHAN
4.3.7 A steel wire protective cage having mesh dimensions not exceeding 50 mm shall
be provided for all outdoor fixtures. Mounting arrangement shall be provided on
fitting to support the wire guard.
4.3.8 Fixtures shall be designed for continuous trouble-free operation under site
conditions without reduction in lamp life or without undue deterioration of
materials and internal wiring.
4.3.9The fixtures shall be designed to minimize glare and achieve effective light
distribution. The light distribution patterns of cut-off, semi cut-off and non-
cut-off fixtures shall be as specified in relevant standards.
4.3.10 All fixtures shall be supplied complete with all accessories like led lamps,
starters, etc. suitable for operation and guaranteed performance on single
phase and neutral, 240 V ± 10%, 50 HZ ± 3%. HPSV fixtures shall have in built
voltage compensation feature. Tapping of 200 - 220 - 240 V shall be given for
all fittings.
4.3.11 Each lighting fixture and control gearbox shall be provided with 2 no. internal
and 2 no. external earthing terminal. All metal or metal enclosed parts of the
housing shall be bonded and connected to the earthing terminals so as to
ensure satisfactory earth continuity throughout the fixture. Facility for looping
earthing core of the cable shall be provided.
4.3.12 All fixtures shall be provided with 2 nos. ¾ inch ET threaded entries with one
approved type threaded plug to seal the unused entry. Two entries shall be
used for looping of circuit wherever required.
4.3.13 All the hardware shall be cadmium plated whereas clamps and supporting
brackets shall be hot dip galvanized.
4.3.14 All luminaries and their accessories and components shall be of type readily
replaceable by available Indian makes.
Page 10 of 16
RAJASTHAN
4.4 SWITCH BOX
Switch boxes shall be made of 1.6 mm thick, MS sheet with 3 mm. thick decorative,
Perspex cover. Switchbox shall be hot dip galvanized
4.5 JUNCTION BOXES
Junction box for lighting fixtures shall be deep drawn or fabricated type made of min.
1.6 mm thick CRCA Sheet. The box shall be hot dip galvanized. Bolted cable entry
gland plate at the bottom shall be provided. Junction boxes shall be powder coated in
light Grey RAL 7035 color.
4.6 CONDUITS
Wires of different phases shall normally run in separate conduit. For areas illuminated
by more than one circuit, the adjacent circuits shall be from different phases.
Concealed / surface conduit wiring shall be provided in substation room, MCC room,
other enclosed rooms and office area of the buildings. Black stove enameled rigid
steel conduits shall be provided for concealed wiring application and galvanized rigid
steel conduit shall be used for surface wiring application. All conduits shall be of
heavy-duty type. All conduit and conduit accessories shall be threaded type. In long
distances straight runs of conduit, inspection type couplers at reasonable intervals (10
Mtrs.) shall be provided. In long distances straight runs of conduit, inspection type
couplers at reasonable intervals (10 Mtrs.) shall be provided. Minimum diameter of
conduit shall be 20mm for wiring purpose. GI Earth wire of minimum 14 SWG shall be
laid along each conduit in order to have earth continuity of it. Wiring for lighting and
plug circuits shall be done with 1100 V grade, PVC insulated, HFFR (Halogen Free
Flame Retardant) wires using 1.5 sq.mm Cu wires for lighting circuits and 2.5 sq.mm
Cu wires for plug circuits. The number of insulated single core cables / stranded wires
that can be drawn into rigid steel conduit are given in Table below (Ref: IS 732-1989):
Size of cable Size of conduit, mm

Nominal cross-sectional Number and diameter of 20 25 32
area, mm² wires, mm
1.5 1/1.40 7 12 20
2.5 1/1.80
3/1.06 5 10 18
Page 11 of 16
RAJASTHAN
4.7 PULL-OUT BOXES
Pull out boxes shall be provided at approximately 4 (four) meter interval in a conduit
run Boxes shall be suitable for mounting on Walls, Columns, Structures, etc. Pullout
boxes shall have cover with screw and shall be provided with good quality gasket
lining. Pull out boxes shall be weather proof type suitable for IP: 55 degree of
protection. Pull out box & its cover shall be hot dip galvanized.
4.8 LIGHTING WIRES
Lighting wires shall be 1100 V grade, light duty PVC insulated, stranded copper wire
for fixed wiring installation. colour of the PVC insulation of wires shall be Red, Yellow,
Blue and Black for R, Y, B phases & neutral, respectively and white & grey for DC
positive & DC negative circuits, respectively. Minimum size of wire shall not be less
than 1.5 sq.mm. The size of the lighting wires/ cables shall be selected such that the
total voltage drop from the LDB to the lighting fixture / receptacle does not exceed
3%.
4.9 LIGHTING POLES
The poles wherever required shall be of steel tubular swaged type welded pole of
specified lengths. Lighting poles shall be painted with two coats of red Oxide and Zinc
chromate in Synthetic compound primer on the exposed outside surface and with
Bituminous paint all along the inside of the pole and outside portion which shall be
embedded in foundation at manufacturing stage.
4.10 Lighting fixtures shall generally be group controlled directly from lighting boards.
However, in office areas, control shall be provided through switch boxes. Each switch
shall control a maximum of three fluorescent fixtures.
4.11 Wiring shall run throughout in separate conduits. Wires of different phases shall run in
different conduits. Wiring for lighting circuits and receptacle circuits shall be carried
out in separate conduits and from separate feeders.
4.12 Lighting boards etc. shall be earthed by two separate and distinct connections with
earthing system. Switch boxes, junction boxes, lighting fixtures, fans, single phase
receptacles etc. shall be earthed by means of separate earth continuity conductor.
Page 12 of 16
RAJASTHAN
The earth continuity conductor 14 SWG GI wire shall be run along with each conduit
run. Cable armours shall be connected to earthing system at both the ends.
5.0 TESTS
5.1 All lighting LED fixtures shall be subjected to acceptance and routine test, as per
relevant specified standards.
5.2 Junction boxes, switch boxes, receptacle enclosure etc. shall be subjected to physical
and dimensional checks.
5.3 Galvanizing Tests
5.4 The quality of galvanizing shall be smooth, continuous, and free from flux stains and
shall be inspected visually.
5.5 Lighting transformer tests shall be as per IS 11171.
5.6 In addition following tests shall be conducted as acceptance tests.
a. Uniformity of coating - The coating of any article shall withstand four 1minute dips
in standard copper sulphate solution without the formation of an adherent red spot
of metallic copper upon the basic metal.
b. The quality of cadmium / zinc plating on items with screw threads shall be free
from visible defects such as unplated areas, blisters and modules and shall be
inspected visually.
c. In addition, the plating thickness shall be determined microscopically/chemically
or electronically.
6.0 COMMISSIONING CHECKS
6.1 On completion of installation work, the Contractor shall request the Project manager
for inspection and test with minimum of fourteen (14) days advance notice.
Page 13 of 16
RAJASTHAN
6.2 The Project manager shall arrange for joint inspection of the installation for
completeness and correctness of the work. Any defect pointed out during such
inspection shall be promptly rectified by the Contractor.
6.3 The installation shall be then tested and commissioned in presence of the Project
manager.
6.4 The contractor shall provide all, men material and equipment required to carry out
the tests.
6.5 All rectifications repair or adjustment work found necessary during inspection, testing
and commissioning shall be carried out by the Contractor without any extra cost. The
handing over the lighting installation shall be effected only after the receipt of
written instruction from the Employer / his authorized representative.
6.6 The testing shall be done in accordance with the applicable Indian Standards and
codes of practices. The following tests shall be specifically carried out for all lighting
installation.
a. Insulation Resistance.
b. Testing of earth continuity path.
c. Polarity test of single-phase switches.
d. Functional checks.
6.7 The lighting circuits shall be tested in the following manner:
a. All switches ON and consuming devices in circuit, both poles connected together to
obtain resistance to earth.
b. Insulation resistance between poles with lamps and other consuming devices
removed and switches ON.
Page 14 of 16
RAJASTHAN
ANNEXURE - A
Area Lux level

Main roads (Gate entry / exit, roads around TT gantry 20
Secondary roads (along storage tanks & Periphery etc.) 10
Tank farm area 20
Pump / Compressor / Dosing Sheds / Fire Pump House 100
Main Operation Platforms & Access Stairs (TT and TW gantry, Tank manifold) 60
Ordinary Platforms 20
OWS / ETP Area 60
Sub Station / PMCC room 150
Transformer yard / HT Di pole area 100
Battery room, Charger / UPS rooms 150
Control Room bldg. / laboratory 400
Lube Warehouse 100
Admin Building 300
Security Cabin / Watch Booth 100
Stairs 50
Corridors 70
Tank truck Parking area 20
NOTE:
Any additional fixtures required to take care of the dark patches / shadows shall also be
provided.
Page 15 of 16
RAJASTHAN
ANNEXURE - B
DOCUMENTATION FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES

1. Specification Sheets, duly completed Y Y Y
2. Technical particulars, duly filled-in Y Y Y
3. Illustrative and descriptive catalogues N Y Y
indicating general arrangement, light
distribution, light absorption and utilisation
factors, full load currents, power factors and
power requirement for each type of fixture
including control gear losses.
4. Sketch showing mounting arrangement with Y Y Y
dimensions.
5. Type Test Certificates for
a. Hose proof fixtures
b. Flame proof fixtures Y N Y
c. Division-2 area fixtures
6. Spare parts list Y N Y
7. Test certificates N N Y
8. Guarantee certificates N N Y
Note:

the date of LOI.
despatch of the equipment. These shall be made in sets and supplied in fine plastic-
coated folder.
Y - Yes, N - No
Page 16 of 16
DATA SHEET FOR INDOOR & OUTDOOR LIGHTING

FIXTURES & ACCESSORIES
REV. 00
Project No. Unit

REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0
Date 21/12/2018
Prepared By PBS
Checked By PBS
Approved By SKJ
Client Review
Page 1 of 5
DATA SHEET FOR INDOOR & OUTDOOR LIGHTING FIXTURES & ACCESSORIES
A GENERAL
1 Manufacturer : #
2 Type of Fixtures : #
3 Quantity Nos. : $
4 Applicable Standard : As per Doc. No.NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-019 Specification for Indoor /
Outdoor Lighting Fixtures & Accessories
B SITE CONDITION
1 Average Ambient Temperature (Min. / Max.) °C : 5 / 47
5 Design Wind Speed m/s : 5.5-6.0
7 Environment : Dry
8 Location : Indoor & Outdoor
1 Rate Input Voltage Volts : 240 V ± 10% AC
2 Frequency Hz : 50 Hz ± 1%
1 Earthing Terminal : 2 Nos. (1 No. Internal + 1 No. External)
2 Material of Construction : CRCA sheet steel for Non-Hazardous Area
3 : Cast Aluminim (LM6) for Hazardous Area
4 Degree of Protection Indoor : IP 42
5 Outdoor : IP 65
6 Area of classification : Zone-1/2, Group-IIA, Temperature Class-T3
7 Flameproof / Increased safety : ex ‘d’ / ex-e
8 Cable Entry : 2 Nos. 3/4 ET threaded
9 Hardware for Control Gear Box : Cadmium plated stainless steel
10 Reflector Type : Internal
11 Certification : ATEX / BASEEFA / PTB / UL / FM
E ACCESSORIES
1.1 Lamp Holder Type GLS : Edison screw (ES type)
1.2 Fluorescent : Medium Bi-pin Turn type
1.3 HPMV : Edison screw (ES type)
1.4 HPSV : Edison screw (ES type)
2 Wire Guard
2.1 Wire guard protection of glass cover in well glass &bulkhead fitting : Required
2.2 Material : Galvanized Iron
2.3 Thickness : 2 mm
2.4 Chain & Hook Assembly for suspension of wire guard : Required
3 Ballast
3.1 Fluorescent Fitting Type : Electronic choke
4 Internal Wiring
4.1 Florescent : Stranded copper conductor
4.2 Wellglass / Flood light : Stranded copper conductor
5 Painting : RAL-7031 (Outdoor) & RAL-7032 (Indoor)

A WELL GLASS FIXTURES LED

1 Manufacturer Name
2 Manufacturer Country of origin
3 Type No.
4 Manufacturer Drawing No./ Catalogue No.
5 Qty. required (No’s):
6.1 Lamp Type
6.2 Rating
6.3 Lumen Output
6.4 Power factor / power factor correction
capacitor rating
7.1 Lamp Holder Type
7.2 Rating
8 Type of Glass
9 Overall Loss
10 Integral / Non-integral
11.1 Material of Construction for Glass
11.2 Wire Guard
11.3 Gasket
11.4 Fitting Casting
12.1 Ballast Type
12.2 Losses
12.3 Ballast Model / Catalogue Number
13 Reflector Type
14 Igniter Model No. / Catalogue No:
15.1 Cable entry No. of entries
15.2 Size
17 Final paint Shade
18 Mounting / Suspension Type
19 Hinge Type
20 Weight of complete fitting (kg)
21 Mounting bracket & stud to be supplied
B FLUORESCENT FIXTURE LED
1 Manufacturer Name
2 Type No.
3 Manufacturer Drawing No. / Catalogue No..
5.1 Lamp No. of Lamps (Single / Twin)
5.2 Rating (9 W / 18 W / 36 W)
5.3 Power factor/power factor correction capacitor
rating
5.4 Lumen Output
6.2 Rating
7.1 Ballast Type
7.2 Losses
8 Overall Loss
9.1 Material of Construction Glass
9.2 Wire Guard
9.3 Gasket
9.4 Fitting Casting
10 Reflector Type
12.2 Size
15 Mounting / Suspension Type
16 Hinge Type
18 Mounting bracket & stud to be supplied
C FLOODLIGHT FIXTURE LED
1 Manufacturer Name
2 Type No.
5.1 Lamp Type
5.2 Rating
capacitor rating
5.4 Lumen Output
6.2 Rating
7.1 Ballast Type
7.2 Losses (250 W, 400 W,)
8 Overall Loss
9.2 Wire Guard
9.3 Gasket
9.4 Fitting Casting
10.1 Enclosure Flameproof / Increased safety
10.2 Degree of Protection
10.3 Area of classification

11 Reflector Type
13.2 Size
16 Mounting Type
17 Hinge Type (J bolt / Chain & Hook)
19 Type of Glass
20 Certification No.
D STREET LIGHT FIXTURE LED
1 Manufacturer Name
2 Type No.
5.1 Lamp Type
5.2 Rating
capacitor rating
5.4 Lumen Output
6.2 Rating
7.1 Ballast Type
7.2 Losses (90W)
7.3 Model/Catalogue Number
8 Overall Loss
9.2 Wire Guard
9.3 Gasket
9.4 Fitting Casting
12 Reflector Type
14.2 Size
17 Mounting Type
18 Pole Type & Height
19 Hinge Type (J bolt / Chain & Hook)
21 Type of Glass
E CONTROL GEAR BOX
1 Manufacturer Name
2 Type No.
5.1 Components Ballast suitable for lamp rating
5.2 Power factor improvement capacitor
6.2 Rating
6.3 Fuses
6.4 Fuse Type & Rating
6.5 Any other Rating
7.1 Material of Construction Gasket
7.2 Fitting Casting
9.2 Size
12.1 Mounting Type
12.2 No. of holes & size
F LIGHTING JUNCTION BOX
1 Manufacturer Name
2 Type No.
5.1 Material of Construction Gasket
5.2 Fitting Casting
6.2 Size
9 Final paint Shade
10.1 Mounting Type

Mounting
10.2 No. of holes & size
NOTES:
4 This Data Sheet shall be Read / Refer In Conjunction with Specification for Lighting Fixtures.
5 Valid Flame Proof Certificate from Competent Authority For Fixtures shall Be Submitted By Bidder & shall Be Certified by recognized independent test house (ATEX /
BASEEFA / PESO/ PTB / UL / FM).

RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY

Page 1 of 9
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 INTRODUCTION
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
3.0 SITE CONDITION
Page 2 of 9
RAJASTHAN
1.0 INTRODUCTION

Chotila, Dist: Pali. The product will be received by Tank wagon Nayara Energy Vadinar
delivered by Road to Dealers and bulk Customers / Consumers. Approx. 60 acres of
land is acquired for setting up of this depot.The depot shall be designed & constructed
for full compliance with OISD 117,118, 244 & other statutory codes & standards as
applicable.
4000 KL.
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
This specification covers the general design, engineering and procurement of

materials, fabrication and supply requirements of ladder type cable trays for
electrical power cables and perforated type cable trays for electrical power / Control
/ Lighting cables.
The design and the installation of the equipment shall be in accordance with
established codes, good engineering practices and shall confirm to the statutory
regulations applicable in the country.
The main codes, standards and statutory regulations considered as minimum

requirements are as given below. Latest version of these shall be followed:
• International Electro-technical Commission (IEC)

• International standard organization (ISO)
• The Institute of Petroleum (IP)
• American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
Page 3 of 9
RAJASTHAN
• Institute of electrical & electronics engineers (IEEE)
The design and terminology shall comply as a minimum with the latest editions of the
engineering codes, standards and practices as below. However, system / equipment
design shall be in line with latest of all applicable standards-
Codes Description
ASTM A123 Zinc (hot-galvanized) coatings on products fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel
shapes, plates, bars and strips
ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc coating (hot-dip) on iron and steel hardware
ASTM A446 Specifications for Steel Sheet Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by Hot Dipped Process
ASTM A490 Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts for Structural Steel Joints
ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
IEC 60050 International Electro technical Vocabulary
IEC 61537 Cable management
Codes and standards shall be inclusive of all the amendments at the time of order.
The equipment shall also conform to the provisions of local Electricity rules and other
statutory regulations currently in force in the country.
Any conflicts between the referenced documents shall be identified to BUYER in

Writing for resolution. In general, the order of precedence shall be as follows:
• Statutory Regulations
• Technical Specifications
• Purchase Order
• Tender and any other documents forming part of the Contracts
• Electrical Design Basis
• Referenced Codes & Standards
Page 4 of 9
RAJASTHAN

sheets.
3.0 SITE CONDITION
All the cable trays and their accessories shall be suitable for installation in salt laden,
humid and corrosive atmosphere, and shall be designed to operate under specified
site conditions.
Altitude from above Sea Level 183 Meter
Average Ambient Temperature (Min. / Max.) 5 / 47 °C
Average Relative Humidity 50-60 %
Environment Dry
Gl racks and Accessories shall have Zinc Coating of 610 gm/Sq.m applied by hot dip
galvanizing process. Galvanizing shall be uniform, adherent, smooth and free from
defects.
The finished rack accessories shall be free from sharp edges and corners, burrs and
unevenness. Stepped arrangement of bending is not acceptable. The channel members
in the bending shall have uniform curvature and shall be made out of single piece.
Page 5 of 9
RAJASTHAN
For terminal area, all cable trays and accessories shall be prefabricated, 2 mm thick
hot dipped Galvanized sheet steel ladder trays with rungs at 300 mm interval.
Maximum width of trays will be 600 mm. Collar height will be 200 mm.
Support span 2000 mm for horizontal & 1500 mm for vertical tray supports. In addition
to this, 105 kg concentrated load at Centre span shall be considered for horizontal
trays. Cable tray installed vertically shall be fastened at intervals which will not allow
sag in the cables or cause the damage. Nuts, bolts and any other hardware to be used
in cable trays shall be stainless steel. Cable ladder routes shall be bonded to the earth
grid via green / yellow PVC covered cables. Fastening of cables in cable ways shall be
done with UV resistant (Black) PVC cable ties.
Coupler plate shall be fitted at each side runner at one end. The coupling plates shall
be supplied with bolts, nuts and washers fitted at the other four holes for fixing to
adjoining member. Each side runner shall have two coupler plates (one on inside face
and one on outside face). Coupling plates shall be designed to permit longitudinal
adjustment up to +/-10 mm and skew up to 10°.The side runner shall have suitable
holes at every meter for cleating earthing conductors.
All the bends, tees and junctions shall be pre-fabricated and shall be made
sufficiently rigid by providing suitable Reinforcement on rungs as required.
Side Runner shall be 100 x 20/30 mm Channel as a minimum with the flanges facing
inside. Rungs shall be 35 x 15 x 5 mm slotted Channel Type and provided at regular
interval of maximum 300 mm along Tray Length.
Trays sections (3000 mm & 6000 mm long) will be installed on prefabricated support
and will be bolted to the support in hazardous areas and welded to the support in safe
areas.
Trays will be connected by expansion splice plates between their sections and fitted
with expansion guide clamps at every 36 m to 40 m intervals. Tray will be connected
at other junctions by standard splice plate and fitted with hold-on clamps.
The Cable Tray shall be supplied in standard length of 3000 mm & 6000 mm. The
maximum allowable middle span deflection shall be 10 mm.
Page 6 of 9
RAJASTHAN
Cable trays used in the outdoor areas shall be provided with covers on top layer, for
protection from rain water. The minimum thickness of the cover shall be 2mm. Cable
Tray Cover shall be fabricated with Hot Dip Galvanized Sheet Steel with standard
length of 3000 mm.
Tolerances in various dimensions shall be as follows:
• Length: ±5 mm
• Width: ±2 mm
• Height: ±1 mm
• Bend: ±1 mm
• Thickness: ±0.2 mm
Positive tolerance on total quantity, up to +5% is acceptable. However negative

tolerance on total quantity is not acceptable.
4.2 LADDER TYPE CABLE TRAYS
Ladder type Cable Trays shall be of Prefabricated Hot Dip Galvanized Sheet Steel.
Two parallel ‘I-beam’ or 'H' type side rails linked together by rungs.
Ladder type Cable Trays standard dimensions are as follows:
• Width: 300, 600mm

• Length: 3000 mm & 6000 mm
• Side rail height: 100, 200 mm
Tray I-ladder coupling splice plates shall be expansion type. Tray hold down clamps of
standard type shall be provided for one end and combination (expansion) type for
other. Safety factor for ladder type cable tray is 1.5
Cable trays shall be supported at an interval of 2000 mm for horizontally and 1500 mm
vertically. Galvanization thickness shall be as per ASTM A123 / A153.
Page 7 of 9
RAJASTHAN
Other Accessories: Couplers, Vertical Tee, Reducer, Tee, Cross, Vertical & Horizontal
Bend (30 to 90), Horizontal bend Splice Plate, Horizontal & Vertical Adjust Plate, Tray
Cover, Tray hold down clamps
4.3 PERFORATED TYPE CABLE TRAYS
Perforated cable trays shall be as per the specification given below:
• Width: 75,100, 150, and 300 mm

• Length: 2500 mm
• Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel
• Sheet thickness: 2.5 mm
• Height: 25 mm
• Steel: As per ASTM A36
• Galvanizing: As per ASTM A123 / A153.
Other Accessories: Couplers, Vertical Tee, Reducer, Tee, Cross, Vertical & Horizontal
Bend (30 to 90), Horizontal bend Splice Plate, Horizontal & Vertical Adjust Plate, Tray
Cover, Tray hold down clamps.
During fabrication, the cable trays and other accessories shall be subject to inspection
by Purchaser, or by an agency authorized by the purchaser, to assess the progress of
work, as well as to ascertain that only proven raw material is used. The manufacturer
shall furnish all necessary information / data concerning the supply to Purchaser's
inspectors.
Testing and Inspection of cable trays shall be include but not be limited to the
following:
a. Visual Inspection and dimension check shall be made to ensure that good
workmanship and practice were maintained throughout the fabrication.
Quantitative check shall be made to assure whether all items with accessories are
present according to the order and the packing list.
b. Verification of galvanization thickness. Provide applicable test reports and
certificates.
Page 8 of 9
RAJASTHAN
c. All tests shall be conducted as per relevant applicable standards.
selected mode of transportation, i.e. by ship / rail or trailer, and shall be wrapped in
polythene sheets before being placed in crates / cases to prevent damage to finish.
The crates / cases shall have skid bottom for handling. Special notations such as
‘Fragile’, ‘This side up’, ‘Center of gravity’, ‘Weight’, ‘Owner’s particulars’, ‘PO no.’
etc., shall be clearly marked on the packages together with other details as per
purchase order. The equipment may be stored in a covered shed for long periods
before installation. The packing should be suitable for such storage.
Page 9 of 9
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR FLAMEPROOF FITTINGS, GLANDS

& JUNCTION BOX

Page 1 of 14
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 SCOPE
4.0 DETAILS OF DESIGN
5.0 CERTIFICATION
6.0 FINISHING & PAINTING
12.0 DEVIATIONS
Page 2 of 14
RAJASTHAN
1.0 SCOPE
inspection and testing at vendor’s works and dispatch in well packed condition of
flameproof fittings, glands & junction box the which shall be installed in the
petroleum storage terminal project of Nayara Energy ltd., Pali, Rajasthan.
to relieve *vendor of his responsibility.
Unless otherwise specified. The Equipments shall comply with the applicable relevant
Indian Standards.
IEC-79 Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmosphere

IEC-529 Degree of Protection Provided by Enclosures
IS-2147 Degree of Protection provided by enclosures for Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear
IS-2148 Flame proof enclosure of Electrical Apparatus
IEC-309 Plugs, socket outlet, connectors and appliance inlets for use in explosive gas atmosphere
(Part-3)
IS-5571 Guide for selection of electrical equipment of hazardous areas.
IS-5572 Classification of hazardous area (other than mines) for electrical installation. (Part 1)
IS-8239 Classification of maximum surface temperature of electrical equipment for use in explosive
atmosphere.
IS-6381 Construction and testing of electrical apparatus with type of protection è’.
IS-8289 Electrical equipment with type of protection `n’.
IS-2206 Flameproof electric lighting fittings (well glass and bulk head type, fittings using glass tubes).
(Part 1 to 4)
IS-8224 Electrical lighting fitting for division 2 areas,class I or class II.
IS-1913 General and safety requirements for Luminaires (Part 1).
IS-13408 Code of practice for the selection, installation and maintenance of electrical apparatus for
use in potentially explosive atmospheres (other than mining application or explosive
processing and manufacture Part 1).
IEC 60079-15 Explosive atmospheres –Equipment protection by type of protection “n”
Page 3 of 14
RAJASTHAN
In case of any contradiction between various referred standards / specifications and

statutory regulations, the following order of priority shall be given:
i. Statutory regulations
ii. This Specification
iii. Codes & Standards
Equipments shall also conform to the provisions of the latest revisions of Indian
Electricity rules & any other statutory regulations currently in force.

Wind speed: 5.5 – 6.0 m/sec
4.0 DETAILS OF DESIGN
4.1 SOCKET OUTLETS AND PLUGS
4.1.1 Flameproof sockets shall be provided with a switch and a mechanical interlock
so as to break the electrical circuit before the plug is completely withdrawn
and make the circuit after the plug is fully inserted.
4.1.2 In order to prevent accidental removal of plug from socket, the engagement &
disengagement shall be by two separate and distinct movement & positions.
4.1.3 415 V, 63 A, three phase flameproof plug and socket meant for welding
receptacle / any other three phase auxiliary loads shall be provided with either
4 pins (3 P + E) or 5 pins (3 P + N + E) as required.
4.1.4 4-pin socket shall be provided with 63 A, three-pole heavy-duty switch whereas
5-pin socket shall be provided with four pole (TPN) heavy-duty switch.
Page 4 of 14
RAJASTHAN
4.1.5 240 V, 15 A single phase flameproof plug and socket shall be provided with 3
pins (2 P + E).
4.1.6 Provision shall be made so that it shall not be possible to insert 110 V DC plug
on to a 240 V socket.
4.1.7 Each outlet shall be provided with either a spring-loaded hinged cover, or with
a cap connected through metallic chain, to close the outlet when not in
service.
4.1.8 All internal power wiring shall be done with 650 V / 1.1 kV grade PVC insulated
flexible copper wires of 25 sq.mm copper for 63 Amps. and 2.5 sq. mm for 15
Amps.
4.1.9 Stud type terminals of suitable size shall be provided for all outgoing and
incoming cables.
4.1.10 All sockets shall be suitable for two cable entries with looping facility and shall
be provided with two flameproof double compression nickel plated brass type
cable glands and one flameproof SS sealing plug per socket to seal the unused
cable entry.
4.1.11 All units shall be provided with one internal & two external earthing terminals.
4.1.12 Scraping earth connections shall be provided between the plug and socket.
Earth pin of plug shall first engage with earth pin of switch socket.
4.1.13 The plug assembly shall be mechanically rugged, light and shall not unduly
stress the socket or its own pins when fitted on to the socket.
4.1.14 Each socket outlet unit shall have suitable mounting frame / bracket to
facilitate installation on vertical surface of wall / structure.
4.2 CABLE GLANDS
4.2.1 Flameproof Cable glands of appropriate size shall be supplied by vendor

whenever specified.
Page 5 of 14
RAJASTHAN
4.2.2 Cable glands shall be flameproof double compression type for use with
armoured cables as per data sheet.
4.2.3 The cable glands shall be of nickel-plated brass type.
4.2.4 The cable glands shall be flameproof and certificate from statutory body (CCOE
/ PESO) shall be furnished.
4.2.5 Cable glands shall be supplied to suit the cable dimensions indicated along with
tolerance indicated in data sheets. Various components like rubber ring,
metallic, ring, metallic cone and the outer / inner nuts etc. shall be capable of
adjusting to the above tolerances of cable dimensions.
4.2.6 Reducers / Adaptors shall be supplied as applicable. These shall be flame proof
and certificate from statutory body (CCOE / PESO) for flameproof shall be
furnished.
4.3 JUNCTION BOXES
4.3.1 Junction boxes shall be flameproof and certificate from statutory body (CCOE /
PESO) shall be furnished.
4.3.2 The enclosure for flameproof JB shall be as per IS-2148 suitable for the area
classification specified.
4.3.3 Each junction box shall have an anodised aluminum / SS nameplate

permanently fixed to it at a visible place bearing the tag and type of enclosure.
The name plate shall also bear the stamp of certifying agency with certificate
number.
4.3.4 Number of entries and locations shall be as per data sheets.
4.3.5 All gaskets shall be of neoprene.
4.3.6 Junction boxes shall be provided with telephone sockets and plugs for
connection of hand powered telephone set.
Page 6 of 14
RAJASTHAN
4.3.7 Power Junction Boxes
a. Material shall be die-cast aluminium of minimum 5 mm thick (LM-6 alloy).

b. Flameproof junction boxes shall have detachable cover which is fixed to the
box by means of cadmium plated triangular head/hexagonal head screws.
c. Flameproof junction boxes shall have a warning engraved / integrally cast
on the cover as given below: “Isolate power supply elsewhere before
opening”
d. Terminals shall be spring loaded, vibration proof, clip-on type, mounted on
nickel plated steel rails complete with end cover and clamps for each row.
e. Each junction box shall be complete with requisite number of ET threaded
cable entries and with approved type double compression nickel-plated
brass cable lands and one threaded plug for sealing unused cable entry.
f. All terminals shall be suitable for accepting minimum 2.5 sq. mm copper
conductor, in general. However, for power supply distribution boxes,
terminal detail shall be as per job specification / data sheets.
g. Sizing shall be done with due consideration for accessibility and
maintenance in accordance with the following guidelines
i. 50 to 60 mm between terminals and sides of box parallel to terminal

strip for upto 50 terminals and additional 25 mm for each additional 25
terminals.
ii. 100 to 120 mm between terminals for upto 50 terminals and additional
25 mm for each additional 25 terminals.
iii. Bottom / top of terminal shall not be less than 100 mm from bottom/top
of the junction box.
h. Terminals shall be marked as per the various types indicated in data sheets.
i. Shall be provided with external earthing lugs.
4.3.2 Signal Junction Boxes
a. Flameproof Signal junction boxes shall be made of 3 mm thick hot rolled

steel. They shall have necessary neoprene gasket between door and body.
Page 7 of 14
RAJASTHAN
b. Single tube entries shall be suitable for 6 mm O.D. copper tube with bulk
head fittings. Multi tube bundle entry shall be suitable for the data
furnished in data sheets.
4.4 LOCAL CONTROL STATION
4.4.1 Enclosure
4.4.1.1 Local control stations flameproof type, shall be suitable for gas
group and surface temperature class as specified in the data
sheets.
4.4.1.2 Local control station shall have housing of cast aluminium LM6
alloy.
4.4.1.3 The degree of protection shall be IP65.
4.4.1.4 Outdoor local control station shall be provided with integral

canopy. However, where the enclosure has been certified without
canopy, a separate canopy can be accepted. The separate canopy
can be made of at least 14 SWG (2 mm) galvanized sheet steel.
The canopy shall be providing protection against rain from top &
two sides.
4.4.1.5 All control stations shall be provided with neoprene gaskets.
4.4.1.6 The warning inscription “Isolate before opening” shall be

embossed on the top cover of the control station. It shall be
legible when control station is mounted.
4.4.1.7 All accessories like nut, bolts, washers etc shall be made of
stainless-steel SS- 304.
4.4.2 Indicating lamps and push buttons
4.4.2.1 LED type indicating lamps shall be provided to indicate the various
circuit conditions as indicated in the attached Single line diagram.
Page 8 of 14
RAJASTHAN
4.4.2.2 The LEDs shall provide good illumination through a viewing angle
of 1800. The LEDs shall have lumen output of 200 milli candela in the
axial direction.
4.4.2.3 The colour of the LED indication for various functions shall be as
follows:
RED: For ‘ON’ indication

GREEN: For ‘OFF’ indication
WHITE: For ‘Ready to start’ indication.
4.4.2.4 Push buttons for start & stop shall be of green & red colour
respectively.
4.4.2.5 Push buttons shall be rated for 10 A at 240 V AC and 1 A (inductive

breaking) at 220 V DC fitted with self-reset, 2 NO and 2 NC contacts.
4.4.2.6 “START” push button shall be spring return & flush type. “STOP”
push button shall be mushroom type with stay put / turn to release
feature and shall be lockable in pressed position.
4.4.3 Selector switches
4.4.3.1 All selector switches shall have minimum 2 poles & 3 positions for
Auto-OFF-Manual or Local-OFF-Remote. Six terminals shall be provided
for each selector switch, unless otherwise stated.
4.4.3.2 Local control stations for circuit breaker control shall have three
position rotary control switch with a pistol grip handle. Three positions
shall be Trip-Neutral-Close (T-N-C) with spring return to neutral both
from START and STOP positions. Three positions of switch shall be
indelibly marked on the control station.
4.4.3.3 All push buttons & control switch contacts shall be rated for min 5
A at 240 V AC-11 and 1 A at 220 V DC-11.
Page 9 of 14
RAJASTHAN
4.4.4 Internal wiring
4.4.4.1 Internal wiring shall be carried out with 1000 / 650 V grade PVC
insulated, multi strand copper conductor wires with minimum size of 2.5
sq mm.
4.4.4.2 Ferrules for identification shall be provided according to wiring

diagram. The ferrules shall be yellow in colour and engraved with black
numbers and shall be fitted to each wire. Spare auxiliary contacts of all
equipment shall also be wired up to the terminal block.
4.4.5 Terminal blocks
4.4.5.1 More than 2 wires per terminal shall not be permitted. Terminals
shall be shrouded and shall be numbered as per the wiring diagram.
Minimum rating of the terminal block shall be 10 A.
4.4.5.2 20% spare terminals shall be provided for each local control
station.
4.4.5.3 Local control station shall be suitable for bottom cable entries.
4.4.6 Nameplate
4.4.6.1 Aluminium anodized nameplate indicating the equipment to be

controlled shall be provided on each local control station. The
particulars of the plate will be supplied to the vendor. Nameplate shall
be fixed by screws and not pasted.
4.4.6.2 The letter shall be engraved in black on white background.
4.4.6.3 Certificate numbering date and gas group classification must be

indicated on the manufacturer’s nameplate on each equipment.
4.4.7 Mounting
4.4.7.1 Local control station shall have 4 lugs for fixing on wall or
fabricated steel support. The lugs shall be offset so that the rear of the
Page 10 of 14
RAJASTHAN
unit stays away from the surface by at least 5mm. Two of the holes shall
be round and the other two oblong to facilitate correct positioning. All
screws, nuts and studs etc. shall be of electro galvanized or zinc
passivated type.
4.4.7.2 Two (2) nos. earth terminals shall be provided on two opposite
sides of the enclosure. The terminals shall be suitable for 8 SWG wire.
5.0 CERTIFICATION
All offered equipment shall have type tested issued certificate by CMRI (Dhanbad) and
approved by CCOE / PESO for use in specified gas group locations. BIS marking is
mandatory. Equivalent testing and certification of the country of origin may be
acceptable for imported equipment. Type test certificates for each type of offered
equipment shall be furnished along with the offer.
6.0 FINISHING & PAINTING
All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased to remove mill scale,
rust, grease and dirt. Fabricated structures shall be pickled and then rinsed to remove
any trace of acid. The surface shall be prepared by applying a coat of phosphate paint
and coat of yellow zinc chromate primer. The surface shall be made free from all
imperfections before undertaking the finishing coat.
After preparation of the surface, the surfaces shall be powder coated with two coats
of epoxy based final paint. Colour shade of final paint shall be 631 as per IS:5. The
finished panels shall be dried in stoving ovens in dust free atmosphere. Panel finish
shall be free from imperfections like pinholes, orange peels, runoff paint etc.
All unpainted steel parts shall be cadmium plated or suitably treated to prevent rust
formation. If these parts are moving elements then they shall be greased.
7.1 Unless otherwise specified, purchaser reserves the right to test and inspect all the
items at the vendor’s shop.
Page 11 of 14
RAJASTHAN
7.2 The Equipments shall be tested in accordance with the relevant standards. The
following tests shall be conducted on all Equipments:
a. Insulation resistance with 500 V DC.

b. High potential test at 2 KV for 1 minute between phases and phase to earth.
c. Type Test certificates shall be furnished along with the equipment for the above.
7.3 Vendor shall submit following test certificates and test reports for purchaser’s
7.4 Dimensional test report.
7.5 CMRI test certificates along with CCOE / PESO approval certificates as applicable shall
be furnished. All equipment shall be routine tested as per applicable Indian Standards.
7.6 All junction boxes, cable glands and other accessories shall be offered for pre-
dispatch inspection for the following as a minimum:
a. Physical dimensional checks and workmanship.

b. Review of all certificates and test reports
7.7 In case of not witnessed by purchaser, the tests shall anyway be completed by the
vendor and documents for same submitted for scrutiny.
7.8 During inspection, facility shall be provided for impact testing of random sample.
i. Layout drawing (plan and sections)

ii. Technical datasheet
iii. Type test certificate
iv. QAP
v. Bill of materials
vi. Technical write-ups / leafups on various pieces of equipment offered.
Page 12 of 14
RAJASTHAN
i. Technical Particulars / datasheet

ii. Quality assurance plan (QAP) for purchaser’s approval prior to dispatch at
iii. Descriptive literature and catalogues on various pieces of equipment offered
iv. Bill of Materials / Quantities
v. Installation, operation and maintenance manual
vi. Spare parts list with identification
vii. Test Certificates and Test reports (not older than 5 years)
viii. As built drawings
Drawing submission shall be within 1 month from kick off meeting (KOM). Bidder shall
not start manufacturing unless manufacturing clearance is provided by Owner /
Consultant in writing.
2. The equipment shall be properly packed for transportation by ship/ rail or trailer.
The equipment shall be wrapped in polythene sheets before being placed in
crates/ cases to prevent the damage to finish.
purchase order.
Page 13 of 14
RAJASTHAN



sequence and major inspection points and to reference manufacturer's test and
will be witnessed.
12.0 DEVIATIONS
Deviations from specification must be stated however minor it may be, in writing at
the bid stage. Unless such deviations are recorded as above and submitted with the
offer, it will be taken for granted that the offer is made in conformity with this
specification in all respects.
Page 14 of 14
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR PLANT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

Page 1 of 13
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 SCOPE
4.0 SITE CONDITIONS
6.0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
7.0 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
9.0 APPROVAL CERTIFICATES
10.0 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
11.0 TRAINING
13.0 GENERAL
Page 2 of 13
RAJASTHAN
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 The intent of this specification is to define the functional and design requirements for
an independent communication system meant for communication between various
process units and offsite areas of an industrial plant and non-plant buildings and its
control room. This specification covers the requirements for selection, design,
engineering, manufacture, testing at manufacturer’s works/ site and erection, testing
and commissioning of plant communication system. Plant Communication system shall
consist of P.A. system with master control station , EPABX / Telephone System with
master control station ,Walkie Talkie (UHF) with base station. Master Control station
shall interface with PA and EPABX system.
2.1 The equipment shall comply with the requirements of latest revision of ITU-T and ITU-
R (CCITT and CCITR) and relevant BIS and other Indian/ international standards as
applicable.
2.2 In case of imported equipments, standards of the country of origin shall be applicable
if these standards are equivalent or stringent than applicable Indian standards.
2.3 The equipment shall also conform to the provisions of Indian electricity rules and
2.4 In case Indian standards are not available for any equipment, standards issued by IEC /
BS / VDE / IEEE / NEMA or equivalent agency shall be applicable.
2.5 In case of any contradiction between various referred standards/ specifications and
statutory regulations the following order of priority shall govern.
• Statutory regulations
• Specification
• Codes and standards
3.1 The offered equipment shall be brand new with state of art technology and proven
field track record. No prototype equipment shall be offered.
Page 3 of 13
RAJASTHAN
3.2 The system shall consist of distributed amplifier type field call stations, paging
loudspeakers, back-up power system (UPS) and necessary software. The integration of
Field call stations through page controller facilities individual and selective paging
while ensuring clarity and audibility at very high ambient noise areas.
3.3 The System offered shall be minimum 2-Channel Page & Party Configuration with
various area wise zone stations forming functional groups comprising Field Call
stations and loudspeakers. The PA system shall be IP based Paging system, The field
call station shall be IP addressable.
3.3 The system shall be based on distributed network , the system shall provide coverage
to various locations within the plant
3.4 Communication feasibility between fields shall be 100% Non Blocking type.
3.5 Vendor shall ensure availability of spare parts and maintenance support services for
the offered equipment at least for 05 years from the date of supply.
3.6 Vendor shall give a notice of at least one year to the end user of equipment and
Consultant before phasing out the product/ spares to enable the end user for
placement of order for spares and services.
3.7 The Digital Plant Communication system shall have following features:
1) 2 way system
2) Selective Calling
3) Zone/Facilities wise paging system, Multizone/all zone paging
4) Distributed Amplifier type
5) Gong tone precedes all paging announcement
6) While making paging announcement the loudspeaker(LS) connected to station is
muted automatically to avoid feedback.
7) More than 2 persons can join the conversation having conference
8) The loudspeaker (LS) is also free to receive page calls during party conversation and
conference.
4.0 SITE CONDITIONS
Page 4 of 13
RAJASTHAN
4.1 All the equipments shall be suitable for the site conditions at design ambient of 40 °C
and an altitude not exceeding 1000M above mean sea level, shall be considered, with
a minimum temperature of -6.7 °C for battery sizing.
4.2 The power supply shall be made available by the purchaser at one point at the central
exchange. Further distribution shall be in vendor’s scope. Unless otherwise specified,
the equipment / system shall be designed for the following input supply conditions:
a. Supply voltage: 230 / 110 V A.C. ± 10%, Single – Phase (field selectable)
b. Supply frequency: 50 Hz ± 5 %
5.1 In general the central exchange, master call stations, desktop call stations etc, shall
be located in non-hazardous area. However, the field call stations, paging
loudspeakers, flashing beacons etc. may be installed in safe area or hazardous area.
The equipment suitable for installation in hazardous area shall be classified as Zone-1,
Gas group IIA / IIB, Temp. class T3.
5.2 The equipments located in hazardous area shall have test certificates issued by
recognized independent test house (CIMFR / BASEEFA / LCIE / UL / FM / PESO or
equivalent). All indigenous equipment shall confirm to Indian standards and shall be
certified by Indian testing agencies. All equipment (indigenous & imported) shall also
have valid statutory approvals as applicable for the specified location. All indigenous
flameproof equipment shall have valid BIS license and marking as required by
statutory authorities.
6.0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
6.1 The system shall comprise one microprocessor based central exchange consisting of
system control hardware, one master control station located in control room as
applicable, field call stations, paging loud speakers and back up battery system.
6.2 CENTRAL EXCHANGE
Page 5 of 13
RAJASTHAN
6.2.1 Front-type, fabricated out of minimum 16 gauge sheet steel, naturally

ventilated, dust and vermin proof with IP-41 enclosure as a minimum. The
panel shall be with swing out assembly of plug-in-card rack. The system shall be
distributed amplifier type with power supply only at the central cabinet. It
shall be possible to locate faults by monitoring from the central cabinet.
6.2.2 The central exchange shall have a processor module for the control of the
central exchange. The exchange shall have a completely non-blocking type
switching system and associated circuitry for call recognition and
acknowledgement. The speech diagram and other features, such as all call,
group call, alarm call, priority call, conferencing etc. shall be resident in the
processor module as a software programme which shall be re-programmable at
site using laptop PCs with user friendly menu structure. District Push buttons
shall be provided for various tones and their re-setting.
6.2.3 The exchange shall house call station modules, each of which shall be able to
control multiple call stations, and their corresponding power amplifiers.
6.2.4 The exchange shall house connection modules, each of which shall be able to
switch a multiple of audio frequency channels / connections.
6.2.5 The exchange shall also house all-call module, alarm tone generator module,
timer switch module etc.
6.2.6 The offered system shall be flexible and modular in construction with the
possibility of expanding to a bigger system in the future. The construction of
the panel shall be designed to allow for at least 20% expansion for future
additions without involving any major modifications in the system. The
exchange shall be fully wired for connecting the spare field call stations .
6.2.7 The central exchange shall have built-in fault diagnostic unit using test and
monitoring modules. It shall be possible to locate faults by visual signalling and
monitoring by means of test plugs from the central cabinet. All hardware
necessary for fault isolation and troubleshooting shall be supplied as a part of
the cabinet.
6.2.8 It shall be possible to program / re-program the exchange through external lap-
top PC, using text editor, via RS 232 or other suitable interface. This shall
Page 6 of 13
RAJASTHAN
enable the user to carry out the following operations without any other
additional software.
a. Creation of speech communication diagrams.

b. Alteration of existing speech communication diagrams parallel to the
functional process and without any hardware alterations.
c. Alteration of existing speech communication diagrams parallel to the
functional process and with-out interrupting the system.
d. Alteration of priorities, addition of audio-frequency lines / channels,
redefinition of communication path / links.
6.2.9 The lap top PC when interfaced shall be able to down load software or system
information for editing / report generation.
6.3 MASTER CONTROL STATION (MCS)
Master control station shall be desktop mounted type / flush mounted in console, and
shall consist of a goose neck type microphone, 1 watt (minimum) loud speaker,
necessary control keys and indication lamps to meet the operational requirements.
Alternately the master control shall have full keypad along with different function
keys for making calls to different call stations by means of single- digit / multi digit
dialing. The keypad along with the function keys shall also be used for invoking
different like paging, all call, group call alarm tone etc. The master control station
shall have LCD display for alphanumeric user-friendly message during call initiation,
call recognition, alarm etc. All these messages shall be programmable by means of
user-friendly menu driven software. The master control station shall have a
communication interface with the central exchange.
6.4 FIELD CALL STATION (FCS)
Field call station shall consist of wall / desktop mounted type communication units.
6.4.1 Field call stations for outdoor areas shall be complete with mouth piece /
microphone, 4 watt (minimum) built in loudspeaker in hazardous areas and
necessary keys and LED indicators to meet the operational requirements.
The field call stations shall be weather proof with IP-55 (ingress protection) as
a minimum. Microphone of wall / pedestal mounting type field call stations
Page 7 of 13
RAJASTHAN
shall be provided with protection grid. Field call station shall be suitable for
installation in hazardous areas if located in hazaradous area.
All outdoor equipment, such as field call stations shall be provided with
additional canopy for protection against direct rain.
6.4.2 Desktop mounted call station shall be suitable for indoor location and shall be
provided with luminous push button key strips, a gooseneck microphone, a 1 –
watt (minimum) loud speaker and built in amplifier.
6.4.3 Desk top / fields call stations shall have necessary keys. Alternatively, the desk
top / field call station (Hazardous and safe area) shall have full keypad along
with function keys for making calls to any other stations by means of single /
multi-digit dialling. The call station may have LCD display for alphanumeric
user-friendly message during call initiation, call recognition, alarm etc. All
these features should be programmable by means of user-friendly menu driven
software.
6.4.4 Controls for microphone sensitivity, volume, treble and bass shall be provided
and shall be easily accessible after opening the call station cover.
6.4.5 Field call stations in high noise areas (as mentioned in specification) shall be
provided with acoustic hoods to enable normal communication with the
background noise and separate flashing beacons. Ambient noise level in such
cases shall be considered as 85 db (A), unless otherwise specified in the
technical specification / data sheet.
6.5 PAGING LOUD SPEAKER
6.5.1 The paging loudspeakers shall generate 124 db (A) output at 1-meter distance
and shall have suitable bracket for mounting on wall / steel structure. It shall
be possible to orient the loud speaker in any direction and suitable tapping
shall be provided to select the output of 12 or 25 watts. Muting device shall be
provided in the concerned amplifiers where required (to be identified later
during detailed engineering). The loud speakers for hazardous areas shall have
suitable enclosure.
Page 8 of 13
RAJASTHAN
6.5.2 The paging loudspeakers in the indoor building’s areas shall be box type of 6-
watt (minimum) output, if specified in technical specification / data sheets.
6.6 POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Single phase AC UPS power supply having battery backup shall be provided at the
central exchange for the entire plant communication system. The central exchange
shall be complete with rectifier, components and switching devices for distributing
power supply.
6.7 Any other equipment / module required for the safe and satisfactory operation,
control, protection, monitoring, testing and maintenance of the system shall be
included in supply with no extra cost.
6.8 All the equipment shall be supplied complete with lugs and SS cable glands suitable
for type and size of cables recommended by the vendor and for the area classification
as per specification.
7.0 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
7.1 The plant communication system shall provide, as a minimum, the following paging
and communication facilities.
a. Paging (in voice mode) of the entire plant or a group of call stations over
loudspeakers from the master control station (s) located in the central control
rooms(s).
b. Call back from any of the field call stations to the master call station(s).
c. Communication between master call stations.
d. Initiation of call from any of the field call stations to the master call station(s).
e. Manning the master call station(s) i.e. any field call station can talk to any of the
other field call stations by dialling single / multi digit buttons of respective field
call station without the help of operator.
f. Communication between any two field call stations only at the discretion of the
master call station, except for call stations with a dedicated speech path as per
speech diagram.
g. Operating an alarm call from master call station(s) over all the loudspeakers during
an emergency. (An alarm tone generated with 5 tones shall be included for this
purpose)
Page 9 of 13
RAJASTHAN
h. Communication between different exchanges, if provided, within the plant.

i. Monitoring the health of the system.
j. Muting facility for silencing the speaker connected to the booster amplifier.
k. Field programming facility for flexible speech diagram at site.
7.2 While paging or talking from any communication station, whether master control
station or field call station, the loud speaker associated with the talking station shall
be muted automatically
7.3 Where more than one master control station has been specified, priority
communication between the master control stations shall be possible. Also, provision
shall be made to page all the slave stations from any of the master control stations.
7.4 Plant communications system shall be compatible for interfacing with owner’s digital
telephone exchange (EPABX) for providing access to paging system through
preselected telephone sets and also for announcing emergency conditions through pre-
defined tones.
7.5 Plant communication system shall be compatible for interfacing with owner’s fire
alarm system for automatic & manual generation of alarm tones and announcements
over all loudspeakers or group of loudspeakers.
7.6 The central exchange shall have digital audio recorder module which shall be capable
of automatic & manual relaying of pre-recorded announcement / messages and
recording of announcement / messages. All facilities and hardwares shall be provided
in the central exchange for recording conversations among MCS, FCS etc.
8.1 During fabrication, panel shall be subject to inspection by Consultant / Owner or by

an agency authorized by the Owner, to assess the progress of work. Consultant /
Owner’s representative shall be given free access in the manufacturer’s works from
time to time to inspect the progress of work. Two week’s notice shall be given by the
vendor to Consultant / Owner for witnessing the final routine tests of complete
assembly to ensure satisfactory working of all components.
8.2 All routine tests as per specified by the applicable codes and standards shall be
carried out at the manufacturer’s work under his care and expense.
Page 10 of 13
RAJASTHAN
8.3 All equipment shall be type tested as per relevant standards. Type test certificates
from a recognized testing organization and type test certificates for hazardous area
equipment shall be furnished as per specification.
8.4 Panels shall be tested for functional adequacy, at manufacturer’s work by simulation
of speech diagram. Minimum testing shall be as per standards prevalent in the country
of origin.
8.5 Vendor shall conduct tests at site (SAT), after the entire plant communication system
is installed and interconnected by cables. These tests shall establish the operational
correctness of the system. The SAT procedure shall be submitted and got approved
from owner well in advance.
9.0 APPROVAL CERTIFICATES
The manufacturer shall furnish type test certificates and applicable approval
certificates from certifying authorities.
10.0 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Where installation of the system is included in the scope of the vendor, vendor shall
arrange all necessary man power and equipment required for the installation.
Commissioning of the complete system is to be carried out by vendor in all cases
irrespective of whether the installation was performed by vendor or not. All tools,
test equipment etc. for the successful commissioning of the system shall be arranged
by the vendor.
11.0 TRAINING
The vendor shall provide comprehensive training on various operation and

maintenance aspects to owner’s engineers at site.
Page 11 of 13
RAJASTHAN
12.1 All the equipment shall be divided into several sections for protection and ease of
selected mode of transportation i.e. by ship/ rail or trailer. The panels shall be
wrapped in polythene sheets before being placed in crates to prevent damage to
finish. Crates shall have skid bottom for handling. Special notations such as ‘fragile’,
‘this side up’, ‘Center of gravity’, ‘weight’, Owner’s particulars, PO number etc, shall
be clearly marked on the package together with other details as per purchase order.
12.2 The equipment may be stored outdoors for long periods before installation. The
high ambient temperature unless otherwise agreed.
13.0 GENERAL
1. All subscribers of this system are connected directly to the central exchange with
(minimum) four pair 0.8 mm diameter telephone cable of approved make.
2. The make of the cables shall be Delton / CCI / KEI / POLYCAB / FINOLEX /
RADIANT / RAVINE.
3. The system cables shall run on instrumentation trays / duct / cable trenches etc.,
wherever instruments
4. Required mounting brackets with necessary hardwares for field call station / loud
speaker shall be in the vendor scope.
14.0 Any deviation from the standard shall be clearly spelt out clause wise, failing which
the offer may be rejected.
15.0 Suggestive location of field call stations & loud speaker shall be as under:
S. No. Location Type of Area QTY. of FCS QTY. of Loud Remarks
(In Nos.) Speaker
(In Nos.)
A) NON-CLASSIFIED AREA (SAFE AREA):
PROPOSED FACILITIES
1 CONTROL ROOM Safe area 1 1 -
2 MCC ROOM Safe area 1 1 -
3 STORE & CHANGE ROOM Safe area 1 1 -
4 * FIRE PUMP HOUSE Safe area 1 1 * Noisy area
5 CANTEEN & AMINITY BLOCK Safe area 1 1 -
6 ADMN. BUILDING Safe area 1 1 -
7 S&D BLOCK Safe area 1 1 -
Page 12 of 13
RAJASTHAN
8 MAIN GATE SECURITY CABIN Safe area 1 1 -

9 TT CREW REST ROOM Safe area 1 1 -
10 EMERGENCY GATE CABIN-3 Nos Safe area 3 3 - -
11 RAILWAY STAFF OFFICE Safe area 1 1 -
12 FOAM PUMP HOUSE Safe area 1 1 -
13 CAR PARKING Safe area 1 1 -
14 Spares Safe area 4 4 -
B) HAZARDOUS AREA:
1 DYKE AREA Hazardous 2 2 For Each Dyke
area
2 RAILWAY SIDING AREA Hazardous 2 2 -
area
3 * TLF &TWD PUMP HOUSE Hazardous 4 4 * Noisy area
area
4 SAMPLE ROOM Hazardous 1 1 -
area
5 TT LOCK & UNLOCK SHED Hazardous 1 1 -
area
6 TT CALIBRATION SHED Hazardous 1 1 -
area
7 TLF BAY GANTRY Hazardous 2 2 -
area
8 Spares Hazardous 2 2 -
area
Page 13 of 13
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR WALKIE TALKIE SYSTEM

Page 1 of 6
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 SCOPE
4.0 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE OF DOCUMENTS
5.0 DETAILED SPECIFICATION
6.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
7.0 TAGGING REQUIREMENTS
8.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 6
RAJASTHAN
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 The scope of this specification covers engineering, manufacturing, inspection &
testing at works, packing, supply, delivery, at site of UHF type Walkie-Talkie system
for efficient and trouble-free operation at site
1.2 The Walkie-Talkie set shall be certified as intrinsically safe for their operation in Zone
1 Gas Group IIA IIB T3 classified Areas. Such certification would be issued by UL or any
other Nationally / Internationally recognized agency, authorized to certify field
performance and conditions of equipment material and services.
1.3 The Vendor will be fully responsible for meeting the General and specific
requirements in respect of both materials and services.
2.1 RS-152-B-70 Land Mobile Communication FM or PM Transmitters
2.2 RS-204-A-72 Minimum standards for Land Mobile Communication FM or PM Receivers.
2.3 RS-220-A-79 Minimum standards for land mobile communications continuous Tone-
Controlled squelch systems (CTSS).
2.4 RS-316-B-79 Minimum standard for portable / personal radio transmitter, receivers,
and transmitter / receiver communications FM or PM equipment.
2.5 RS-329-A-75 Minimum Standards for land-mobile communications antennas Part 1 –

Base or fixed station antennas
2.6 RS-388-71 Minimum standard for test conditions common to FM or PM Land-Mobile

communications equipment.
Instruments located in hazardous area will be certified to meet or exceed the

electrical hazardous area classification
Page 3 of 6
RAJASTHAN
Hazardous area classification: Zone 1 Gas Group IIA / IIB T3
Instruments & all electrical enclosures will be certified for use in hazardous area and
have certification for use by accredited authority like FM. CENELEC, BASSEFA, ATEX,
PESO
4.0 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE OF DOCUMENTS
4.1 Applicable order of precedence of various documents in descending order is as

follows:
• Technical Specification
• National Standards
• International Standards.
4.2 In all cases of conflict, however, the Purchaser will be advised before proceeding with
the affected scope of work.
5.0 DETAILED SPECIFICATION
5.1 WALKIE TALKIE SYSTEM
5.2 SYSTEM CONCEPT
A two – Way, UHF radio system operating in the utility band of 400 - 512 MHz The
radio system consists of a fixed base station radio, a roof top mounted antenna and
portable battery operated hand-held radios (Walkie – talkies) for communications
between operating and / or maintenance personnel.
A UHF radio paging system consisting of the following:
a. UHF transmitter paging station.

b. Multi-unit rechargers (each capable of recharging 2 units).
c. Fixed antenna and lead-in cable separate from the UHF base station.
d. Antenna support and raceway system.
The radio systems will operate on 230 VAC with built in UPS system, for ½ hr backup
Page 4 of 6
RAJASTHAN
The UHF radio / Walkie-Talkie System with following minimum features:
a. Multiple channel for organizing workgroup.

b. Tone tagging for specific users/talk group caller identification.
c. LED light for indication of battery strength.
d. Easy to access one touch button for piercing alarm in case of emergency.
e. Additional facilities for add on functionalities for DTMF decode for incoming calls,
Voice storage for recording & playback voice message.
f. Programmable channel spacing
6.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Frequency Range : Minimum 400 - 512 MHz

Transmitter Power Output : 5 Watts with power reduction facility
Spurious emission : Should be less than 0.30 microwatts
Mode of operation : Simplex
Channel spacing : 12.5 KHz / 25 KHz
Channels : 16 Channels. All will be programmable channels (synthesized). Actual
channels / frequencies to be Programmed will be intimated at the
time of delivery. Supplier / Local service centre of the supplier
should be equipped to provide channel programming support, Initially
at no cost basis to Owner
Frequency Stability : 5 PPM or better
Receiver Sensitivity : 0.25 microvolt for 12 dB SINAD or better
Selectivity : 70 dB or better
Audio Power Output : Minimum 500 miliwatt or better
Antenna : Flexible Helical
Antenna Impedance : Typically, 50 Ohm
Battery Packs : Rechargeable NiCd / NIMH battery fittable in walkie talkie unit, with
minimum capacity of 1200 mAh or better. Battery should also be
Intrinsically safe type.
Battery Charger : Battery charger should operate on 220 V – 250 V / 50 HZ frequency.
The charger will be suitable to charge single unit of intrinsically safe
battery packs in rapid rate changing mode. The charging will not take
more than 150 minutes.
Page 5 of 6
RAJASTHAN
7.0 TAGGING REQUIREMENTS
7.1 Each instrument will bear corrosion resistance SS tag plate riveted to the instrument
body engraved with the following details. The letter height will be minimum 2 mm
and location of the plate will permit easy readout in all possible installed positions.
7.2 The following minimum information will be clearly and deeply stamped or engraved on
the name plate(s) of Instruments:
a. Tag number
b. Vendor’s name or trade mark
c. Vendor’s model no. and serial no.
d. IP class marking as well as hazardous area certification mark where applicable.
8.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS
8.1 Vendor will submit a detail Quality Plan which includes Routine & Type Tests to
purchaser’s review and approval which will form part of purchase order.
8.2 Review of all certificates and test reports will be carried out for each unique model
number.
The following documents to be supply as a minimum for Owner’s record and use. The
data will be supplied as one soft copy and one hard copy as minimum. The data
supplied as soft copy will be preferably on CD, properly indexed and readable like an
e-Book.
a. OEM catalogues
b. Hazardous area and IP Certificates
c. Operational and Maintenance Manual
Page 6 of 6
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR EPABX & TELEPHONE SYSTEM

Page 1 of 10
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 SCOPE
2.0 ELECTRONIC PRIVATE AUTOMATIC BRANCH EXCHANGE (EPABX)
3.0 TELEPHONE INSTRUMENTS
4.0 CABLES
5.0 BATTERY
6.0 MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME
7.0 THE LOCATION OF TELEPHONE & EPABX SHALL BE AS UNDER
8.0 ERECTION TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
9.0 PACKING
Page 2 of 10
RAJASTHAN
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 The scope shall cover equipment design, manufacture, testing at works, supply,
packing, transportation, unpacking, installation, testing, commissioning &
programming of all equipments and accessories of EPABX & Telephone System for its
satisfactory operation and performance, at Pali, Rajasthan including supply and laying
of structured cable for 25 nos. new Analog phone on turn-key basis.
1.2 All the supplied equipment must have the proper license and approval from BSNL /
TEC Department. The scope of work shall also include responsibility of obtaining
statutory approval for the entire installation. Necessary modification, if required by
statutory body shall be carried by without any extra charge. Necessary fee shall be
reimbursed by purchaser against documentary evidence of payment.
1.3 The scope of work shall also include the submission of drawings/ documents of the
system as described elsewhere.
1.4 The telephone system mainly comprises of the following: --
a. EPABX
b. Battery and battery charger
c. Main Distribution frame
d. Telephone instruments
e. Junction box of various sizes
f. Cable of different pairs
g. PVC conduits / slotted channel with top cover, clamps as required for cabling
1.5 The scope shall also include provision for imparting training to purchaser’s personnel
for operation and maintenance purpose.
2.0 ELECTRONIC PRIVATE AUTOMATIC BRANCH EXCHANGE (EPABX)
2.1 The equipment shall be electronic type. It shall have microprocessor based stored
program control features. The system shall be approved by TEC and other statutory
bodies.
2.2 It shall be in PCM / TDM switching technology, 100% Non-Blocking.
Page 3 of 10
RAJASTHAN
2.3 For fault detection, it should have automatic on line self-diagnostic and reporting
system, complete with audio-visual indication facilities, fault isolation and recovery
features.
2.4 It shall be suitable for DTMF as well as FSK type of telephone instruments.
2.5 Its capacity shall be suitable for 4 nos. Junction Ports and 25 Analog ports. System
shall be suitable expandable up to 40 Ports.
2.6 All slots shall be Universal slots.
2.7 It shall be suitable for Single or Multiple Conference
2.8 It shall integrate in skin voice mail card with minimum 256 MB capacity with 6 hours
storage capacity.
2.9 CLI Facility & CLI on Analog Trunks shall be in built for both DTMF and FSK instrument.
2.10 It shall have minimum one no. Public Address Port.
2.11 It shall have in built Remote Maintenance Facility.
2.12 All trunks in case of power supply failure should be transferred to desired extension.
2.13 Power supply should be in built SMPS (90 to 260 V AC).
2.14 EPABX shall have Unrestricted Dialing For All Extensions.
2.15 EPABX shall have inbuilt Auto attendant facility and shall be able to answer minimum
5 calls simultaneously.
2.16 Detail reports of all system parameters and programming should be generated on
SMDR port of EPABX.
2.17 Machine shall suitable to work with other EPABX & shall work in tandem switch.
Page 4 of 10
RAJASTHAN
2.18 EPABX shall be programmable type for features like call routing, features to be used
by extension and dialing facility on trunks.
2.19 System shall be suitable for assigning flexible numbering for extensions. EPABX shall
be able to give any 3 digit or 4-digit flexible codes starting with any numbers for
extension.
2.20 Graphical user interface base programming along with the License copy of software
and all hardware attachments shall be provided for on-site programming and also
training to be imparted to use this software.
2.21 Machine shall have ISDN PLATFORM; the system shall be compatible to ISDN PRI Line of
BSNL.
2.22 System shall have suitable flexible least cost routing features.
2.23 Access codes, system timers and access to features shall be programmable.
2.24 Storage for Incoming, Outgoing and Internal call and reports shall be generated on
SMDR port of EPABX.
2.25 System shall have provision for connecting T1/ E1 and also VOIP Lines for further
expansion.
2.26 Voice guided auto attended shall be preferably in built.
2.27 DISA, DOSA & Remote Programming features along with their hardware cost shall be
provided.
2.28 Hold on music choice interface, in built PAS port shall be provided.
2.29 There shall be minimum 1000 numbers possible and shall be able to dial by as an
abbreviated number.
2.30 Unanswered calls on analog (FSK CLI) or all extensions shall be provided.
Page 5 of 10
RAJASTHAN
2.31 Features given to an extension shall be accessed from any other extension by dialing
the secret codes.
2.32 System should have COMPUTER TECHNOLOGY INTEGRATION/ PC Based Programming

software even for all analog extension.
2.33 CTI software for all extension is needed.
2.34 The system features shall have class of services, voice and data integration, night
service, conference, auto-diagnostic etc. Class of service shall be Unrestricted, STD
restricted and semi restricted.
2.37 Extension features shall have extension to extension call, extension to central office,
extension to operator, automatic call back, call transfer, follow me, executive /
secretary, emergency reporting etc.
2.38 Operator features shall have assistance to extension, attendant call transfer, call
intercept, indication of call waiting, night service control etc.
2.39 Over voltage protection on junction and extension lines shall be provided by the
supplier.
2.40 Automatic diagnostic provision shall be made in the system and in case any fault
occurs the operator console shall minimum give an audio alarm to enable the
maintenance personnel to attend it immediately. However, desire shall be done in
such a way that smooth unmanned operation shall be performed.
3.0 TELEPHONE INSTRUMENTS
The instruments shall be Decadic and shall have foil type push button and fail safe
contact points. It shall be sleek and elegant and electronic type. Technology shall be
solid state for transmitter, receiver and ringer and approved by Department of
Telecommunication. Ringing, dial and speech shall be integrated in one board. It shall
be of DOT approved model.
Page 6 of 10
RAJASTHAN
A. Features for Analog Phones (Type - I) –
1. It should be convenience of mini EPABX.

2. It shall have Redial / Flash / Pause / Mute facilities.
3. It should be tone / pulse switchable.
4. It shall have facilities to call transfer with consultation.
5. It shall have facilities for busy line indication.
6. It shall have facilities for call privacy.
7. It shall have intercom facility.
8. It should be desk mountable.
9. It shall have ringer volume control facility.
10. Colour of key phone should be Warm Gray.
Note: -- Type – I Instrument shall be compatible with 103-plan of BSNL.
B. Features for Analog Phones (Type - II) -
1. It shall work in single pair of wire.

2. It shall have mechanical lock for 0, 95 call lock & full keyboard lock.
3. It shall have special ring for VIP numbers.
4. It shall have 3 programming alarm clock settings.
5. It shall have programmable selectable tone/ pulse mode.
6. It shall have 12-digit LCD display.
7. It shall have music on hold facilities.
8. It shall have provision for last no. redial.
9. It shall have 38 incoming call memories & 5 outgoing calls memories.
10. It shall be provided with line tapping protection.
11. It shall have hand-free dialing facility.
12. Colour of key phone should be Warm Gray.
C. Operator Console
i. Phone based with 2 x 16 LED Display 80 DSS Dual Programmable keys with
cordless headset.
ii. PC based operator console is required.
Page 7 of 10
RAJASTHAN
D. Interface Ports --
There should be Parallel ports and SMDR PORTS connectivity for connection printer
and PC respectively. Also, system should have Serial Port & at least one LAN Port
4.0 CABLES
4.1 Cables shall be PVC type of annealed and tinned copper conductor and conforming to
ITU standard. Its cross-sectional area shall be designed in such a way that attenuation
is minimum. However minimum size shall be 2 pair 0.5-sq mm.
4.2 Cables for indoor installation shall be unarmoured and laid through PVC pipes /
channels and properly clamped and provided with suitably identified cable marker
along the route of the cable at the interval of 30 meters & one at tapping/ turning. All
cables shall have at least 30% spare core.
4.3 Make of communication cables shall be TEC approved.
4.4 The required quantity of cables shall be supplied by the bidder without any extra cost.
The extra material after installation and handling over of the system may be taken
back by the supplier.
5.0 BATTERY
The battery charger shall be based on solid-state technology having one boost and one
float. Changeover from float to boost and boost to float shall be automatic. Suitable
battery for 4 hours back up shall be considered. Battery shall be low maintenance lead
acid type. Make, type, capacity rating etc of battery and battery charger shall be
clearly indicated in the offer.
6.0 MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME
The main distribution frame shall be wire wrap type having necessary protection unit
/ fuse in the extension lines and junction lines to guard against abnormal voltage
which may be appear in the internal extension / junction lines due to induction from
power line / actual contact with power line etc. Make of the main distribution frame
shall be clearly indicated in the offer.
Page 8 of 10
RAJASTHAN
UPS supply is available in Reception area where EPABX shall be installed and the
contractor has to arrange necessary supply from UPS distribution board to his various
instrument.
7.0 THE LOCATION OF TELEPHONE & EPABX SHALL BE AS UNDER:
The EPABX along with battery, battery charger operator console and MDF shall be
housed in the Admin & Control Building.
8.0 ERECTION TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
8.1 All the equipment shall be tested at works as per the relevant standards. In case of
electronic cards, necessary burn out test shall be done and test certificate shall be
furnished. In case of cable, battery, battery charger, telephone instruments, console
etc. test certificate shall be furnished. Spares required for erection, testing and
commissioning should be supplier’s responsibility
8.2 Contractor shall undertake erection in conformity with statutory regulation, safety
requirements and to the entire satisfaction of the purchaser.
8.3 Contractor shall arrange necessary tools and tackles, testing and measuring
equipment, consumables etc. required for erection, testing and commissioning.
8.4 All minor civil works inclusive of drilling, chipping etc. shall be carried out by
contractor. After the installation is over the contractor shall make up the damage and
give finish in an identical manner as in the original condition.
8.5 Following site tests shall be specifically conducted before commissioning in the
presence of purchaser’s representative:
a. Insulation Test
b. Continuity Test
c. Simulation Test
Page 9 of 10
RAJASTHAN
9.0 PACKING
The equipment shall be properly packed for transportation. The panels shall be
wrapped in polyethylene sheets before being placed in wooden crates / cases to
prevent damage to the finish. Crates / cases shall have skid bottoms for handling.
Special notations such as ‘Fragile', ‘This side up’, ‘Weight’, ‘Owner's particulars’, ‘PO
nos.’ etc., shall be clearly marked on the package together with other details.
Page 10 of 10
RAJASTHAN
SPECIFICATION FOR 11 KV OUTDOOR GOD AIR BREAK

ISOLATOR ALONG WITH EARTH SWITCH, POST
INSULATORS, AND THE DOUBLE POLE STRUCTURE

Page 1 of 25
RAJASTHAN
LIST OF CONTENT
Sr. No. Description

1.0 INTRODUCTION
2.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
3.0 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & MATERIAL
5.0 EXCLUSIONS / INCLUSIONS
12.0 SPARES AND SPECIAL TOOLS
Sr. No. Description

13.0 SUPERVISION OF INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Page 2 of 25
RAJASTHAN
14.0 PACKING AND TRANSPORTATION
16.0 GUARANTEE
17.0 APPENDIX-A: CODES & STANDARDS
18.0 APPENDIX-B: GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
19.0 APPENDIX-C: 11 KV OUTDOOR GOD AIR BREAK ISOLATOR ALONG WITH EARTH
SWITCH, POST INSULATORS, CT, PT AND THE DOUBLE POLE STRUCTURE
20.0 APPENDIX-D: ELECTRICAL DRAWING
Page 3 of 25
RAJASTHAN
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This specification is intended to cover the design, manufacture, assembly, testing at

manufacturer’s works, supply & delivery, properly packed for transport F.O.R. site of
11 KV, 400 Amp. outdoor type triple Pole Switching Unit with Vertically mounted
manually gang operated Air Break Isolator with explosion type Drop Out fuses
(mounted on the same base channel), lightning arrestors, suitable post Insulators,
operating pipes, square shaft, handles, along with CT, PT, Earthing switch and all
other accessories suitably mounted on a double pole structure. This also includes
supply of suitable metering panel for RSEB’S metering purpose.
The scope of work shall also include, the supervision of erection, testing,
commissioning and putting into successful commercial operation of the switchgear
furnished under this specification
The Vendor shall ensure that the design complies with the requirements of this
specification .The Guaranteed Technical Particulars, Appendix B, which forms part of
this specification, shall be completed by the Vendor. Deviation if any should be
specifically brought out at the offer stage. Failure to clearly identify specific
deviations if any shall be assumed by the Purchaser to be total compliance with the
specification.
This specification does not relieve the Vendor from final guarantee as to materials,
apparatus, workmanship and performance of the equipment supplied.
1.1 PLANT LOCATION
The Petroleum Storage Terminal Project of Nayara Energy Ltd. (NEL), is located:
Sawaipura, Chotila, Dist: Pali
1.2 SITE DATA

Page 4 of 25
RAJASTHAN
Minimum 5 °C
Seismic Zone II
2.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
The following equipments shall be supplied, in accordance with this specification;

standards stated herein & enclosed appendices.
3.0 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & MATERIAL
Electrical Equipment & Material required for one 2 pole structure:
Sr. No. Item Description Unit Quantity Remarks

1.0 11 KV, 400 A, Outdoor Air break Set 1
Isolator
2.0 12 KV Post Insulators Nos. 12
3.0 Lightning Arrestor Set. 1
4.0 3 Pole Earth Switch Set 1
5.0 100/5 A Current Transformer Nos. 3
6.0 11 KV / √3 / 110 V / √3 Potential Nos. 1
Transformer
7.0 Metering panel Nos. 1
8.0 Suitable Double pole structure Set 1
9.0 ACSR conductor Lot 1
10.0 GI wire for shielding Lot 1
11.0 Earthing Lot 1
12.0 Accessories (All insulators, clamps, Lot 1
connectors etc.)
Page 5 of 25
RAJASTHAN
The Vendor shall provide engineering services, which shall include, but not necessarily
be limited to, the following:
• Providing / coordinating detailed design of all equipment and components within

the scope of supply.
• Resolving engineering queries related to the equipment and components within the
scope of supply.
• Performing all relevant calculations pertaining to the equipment and components
within the scope of supply.
• Providing progress reports etc.
• Providing expediting services for all sub-vendors, if any.
• Providing quality assurance, including all sub-vendors if any with respect to ISO
9000 or equivalent.
• Quality Assurance.
• Supervision of Installation / erection and commissioning.
• Training of client’s personnel at site / Vendor’s shop.
5.0 INCLUSIONS
5.1 Civil detailed design and construction work including foundation, fencing and gravel
filling are included.
5.2 Installation / Erection & commissioning included under respective items of SOQ..
6.1 General
The 11 KV Outdoor equipment shall meet the requirements of this specification and
latest edition of applicable standards listed in enclosed Appendix-A.
6.2 Conflicting Requirements
In case of conflict between documents relating to the enquiry or purchase order, the
following priority of documents shall apply.
Page 6 of 25
RAJASTHAN
First priority : This engineering specification along with attached drawings /

and subsequent purchase order & variations thereto.
Second priority : Relevant Indian / International standards.
Note: Should any conflict arise either before or after order placement the Vendor
shall immediately inform the Purchaser for technical resolution of the conflict.
Construction Features
The general constructional features of 11 kV Outdoor Equipment shall incorporate the

following as a minimum:
11 kV, 400 A, Outdoor Air break Isolator and Earth switch:
7.1 Air break Isolator:
7.1.1 The 11KV A.B. Switch Set shall be the outdoor type suitable for horizontal
mounting on the support structure. The A B switch shall be 3 phase, 3-pin type
gang operated and of rotating type having 1 post insulators per stack and single
throw, double break characteristic. It would be complete with arching horns,
down pipe and operating mechanism. The operating mechanism shall be
suitable for manual operation from the ground level and shall be so designed
that all the three phases shall open or close simultaneously. The Switches shall
be robust in construction, easy in operation and shall be protected against over
travel or staining that might adversely affect any of its parts. The required base
M.S. Channel (hot dip galvanized) phase coupling rod, operation rod with
intermediate guide braided with flexible electrolytic copper, tail piece of
required current carrying capacity and operation mechanism with ‘ON’ & ‘OFF’
positions shall be provided. The operation rod shall be medium gage of 32mm
diameter nominal bore G.I. pipe single length 6 meters.
Page 7 of 25
RAJASTHAN
7.1.2 The A.B. Switches shall be suitable for horizontal mounting in double pole sub-
station structures. MS Galvanized base Channel & base support channel should
be of min. size 75 x 40 x 6 mm.
7.1.3 Switching Blades shall be made out of electricity copper with silver plated. The
approximate size shall be 220 mm X 50 X 6 mm. The Switch shall have such a
spring mechanism so as to ensure that the speed of the opening of contact is
independent of speed of manual operation.
7.1.4 The Fixed Jaw type female contacts shall be made of electrolytic copper
(minimum 95% copper composition) duly silver coated controlled by stainless
steel high pressure spring housed in robust G.I. Cover. It is essential that
provision shall be made in fixed female contacts to take the shock arising from
the closing of move contact blade without the same being transmitted to the
post insulator. The arrangement made in this regard shall be specifically shown
in the drawing.
7.1.5 As the switches are generally meant for isolating transmission line and
distribution transformers, suitable arcing horns shall be provided for breaking
the charging current horn shall be made of 10mm dia G.I. Rod with spring
assisted operation.
7.1.6 A B Switch operating mechanism shall be provided with 1100 V grade stud type
terminals. Terminal connectors shall be robust in design. The fixed connector
and the movable connector shall be of copper casting with uniform machine
finishing duly silver plated made out of minimum 95% copper composition with
2 nos. holes provided with suitable brass bolts and double nuts, flat washers &
2nos. bimetallic solder less sockets suitable up to 185 mm2 conductor.
7.1.7 The minimum clearance between phases to the switch shall be 760mm. The
operation down rod shall be at a transverse distance of 300mm from the outer
limb of the switch. The centre spacing between two post insulators of the same
phase shall be 380mm. In the open position of the A.B. switches the moving
blade shall rotate through 90o..
7.1.8 It shall make it possible to effect a smooth and fully controlled movement of
the three blades simultaneously throughout the entire cycle of operation.
Adjustment step shall be provided at either end of the mechanism to stop the
Page 8 of 25
RAJASTHAN
handle in the “ON” and “OFF” position. Pad locking arrangement for the handle
in the “ON” and “OFF” position should be clearly indicated in the stand.
The terminal shall be made of rolled / extruded electrolytic grade copper flat
having a cross section area equal to that blade. It shall be so constructed that
an intimate contact with the contact element is ensured and provision is made
to bolt with two numbers of 3/8 inch dia galvanized bolts and nuts, a cast
aluminum connector suitable to take conductors up to the size ACSR 300 mm²
using number 3/8 inch dia bolts and nuts. The terminals shall be silver coated.
The cast aluminum connectors shall be smooth and supplied for the each end of
each phase of the switch. The design of the connector shall be such that at no
place its crosssectional area is less than twice the crosssectional area of the
copper blade. All bolts shall be galvanized.
7.1.9 Main switch operating mechanism shall be equipped with reliable quick make
and break type, inbuilt snap action type auxiliary switch with 4NO & 4NC
contacts exclusively for owner’s interlocking and protection scheme. The
Auxiliary switch shall be capable of carrying of 10 A current continuously.
Auxiliary switches shall be actuated by a cam or similar arrangement directly
mounted on the A B switch shaft without any intermediate levers, linkages etc.
to ensure fool proof operation. Auxiliary switches shall be wired up to the
terminal block with 1100V grade, PVC insulated 2.5sq.mm copper conductor.
7.1.10 Flexible copper braid connections shall be provided between rotating earth
blades and the frame which shall have a cross section of at least 50 Sq.mm and
shall be tinned or suitably treated against corrosion.
7.1.11 The frame of the A B switch shall be provided with two reliable earthing
terminals for connecting to earth mat. The connection shall be such that it can
carry specified short circuit current.
7.2 Earth Switch:
7.2.1 Earth Switch shall be tripe pole gang operated type and the assembly shall be
the integral part of the main Isolator.
Page 9 of 25
RAJASTHAN
7.2.2 Earthing switch shall have manual operating mechanism, easily operable from
standing height at grade level.
7.2.3 Earthing switch shall be provided with 4 NO + 4 NC contacts for indication and
interlocking.
7.2.4 Two independent ground terminations with tinned copper flexible braids and
suitable connectors for the specified size of earth conductor loads shall be
provided at the hinge end of the switch.
7.2.5 Flexible tinned copper connections between the earthing blade and frame shall
have a cross section of at least 50 sq.mm.
7.2.6 2 Nos. Earth Terminals on Main Isolator, Earth Switch, Operating Cubicle shall
be provided to receive Owner’s earth conductor.
7.2.7 Isolator and Earth Switch shall be provided with padlocking facility to lock them
in fully open or fully closed positions. Both Isolator and Earth Switch shall be
mechanically interlocked such that it shall not be possible to close the earth
switch when the isolator is closed and vice versa. Isolator shall be with
electrical interlock with circuit breaker such that the isolator cannot be
operated unless the associated circuit breaker is switched off.
7.3 12 kV Post Insulators:
7.3.1 The post insulators shall be with solid core insulators. The Post Insulators shall
conform to IS: 2544, 1973. Each stack shall comprise two such Insulators placed
one over other with original cementing.
7.3.2 The Insulator shall be provided with a completely galvanized steel base design
for mounting on the support. The base and mounting arrangement of the
Insulators shall be such that the insulator shall be rigid and self-supporting and
no guying or cross bracing between phases shall be necessary.
7.3.3 Insulators shall be made of homogeneous and vitreous porcelain of high

mechanical & dielectric ‘strength. It shall have sufficient mechanical strength
to sustain electrical and mechanical loading on account of wind load, short
circuit stresses etc. Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown or dark
Page 10 of 25
RAJASTHAN
brown colour with a smooth surface arranged to shed away rain water.
Porcelain and metal parts shall be assembled in such a way that any thermal
differential expansion between the metal and porcelain through the range of
temperature specified in this specification shall not loosen the parts or create
undue internal stresses which may affect the mechanical or/and electrical
strength or rigidity.
7.3.4 Cap of Insulators shall be of high grade malleable steel casting. It shall be
machine faced and hot dip galvanized as per IS 3638, IS 2623. The cap shall
have four number tapped holes spaced on a pitch circle of suitable diameter to
accommodate the terminal clamps of Busbar.
7.3.5 The Insulator unit shall be assembled in a suitable jig to ensure correct
positioning of the top and bottom metal fittings relative to one another.
7.4 Lightning Arrestors:
7.4.1 Lightning Arrestors shall be outdoor, heavy duty, station class, hermetically
sealed type, employing non-linear metal oxide resistors and gapless type.
7.4.2 Lightning Arrestor shall have adequate thermal discharge capacity for severe
switching surges, long duration surges and multiple strokes. They shall be
provided with pressure relief devices which shall prevent explosive shattering
of the porcelain housing in the event of an arrester failure. However, pressure
relief devices shall be capable of withstanding the internal pressure developed
during discharge without operation of the pressure relief device.
7.4.3 Lightning Arrestors shall be housed in porcelain insulators, having adequate

mechanical strength and rigidity for satisfactory operation under specified
environmental conditions. Porcelain shall be finely brown glazed and shall be
free from imperfections, cavities and laminations that might affect the
mechanical or dielectric quality and shall be tough and impervious to moisture.
7.4.4 Lightning Arrestor shall be of self supported type, suitable for mounting on
concrete or steel structure.
Page 11 of 25
RAJASTHAN
7.4.5 The Lighting Arrestor shall be of robust construction to have with excellent
electrical, thermal and mechanical characteristics even after repeated
operation.
7.4.6 Arrestors shall be capable of
• Spark over on frequent switching surge.

• Discharging over voltages experienced during switching of unloaded
transformer, capacitor banks and long lines.
7.4.7 All metal parts shall be non-corrosive hot dip galvanized and non-rusting
material. Bolts, screws and pins shall be provided with locking washers, keys or
equivalent locking facilities.
7.4.8 Interchange ability of similar parts, particularly removable one, shall be

possible.
7.5 Accessories:
7.5.1 Discharge Counter at LA base including GI flat and insulator and

necessary hardware shall be supplied.
7.5.1.1 The self contained discharge counter, suitably enclosed for

outdoor use shall be provided for each single pole unit. The
discharge counter shall be visible through an inspection window.
The counter terminal shall be robust and shall be so located that
incoming and outgoing connections are made with minimum
possible bonds. The by-pass shunts of GI suitably sized shall be
supplied loose to facilitate by-passing of discharge counter. The
terminal conductor shall be suitable for connection of these GI
shunts.
7.5.1.2 Leakage Current Detector shall be supplied as an integral

part of discharge counter. Discharge Counter shall be complete
with Ammeter with suitable shunt to measure leakage current
while in service. The counter along with detector shall be so
arranged that it will be possible to read leakage current value
from ground level.
Page 12 of 25
RAJASTHAN
7.5.2 Grading Rings shall be provided on each Arrestor unit for proper stress
distribution.
7.5.3 Supporting Arrangement: All hardware for Mounting LA shall be included. LA

shall be complete with insulating bases.
7.5.4 Terminals: Arrestor shall be complete with line and earth terminals. The
terminal clamps / connectors on the earth terminal of the arrestors and the
discharge counter incoming and outgoing terminals shall be within the scope of
the VENDOR.
7.5.5 Two Earthing connections at insulation base suitable for GI strip shall be
provided.
7.6 Current Transformers:
7.6.1 Current transformers shall be outdoor, free standing type, suitable for mounting
on the galvanized steel structures.
7.6.2 CTs shall have the primary and secondary windings housed in porcelain
insulators, filled with pure mineral oil conforming to IS 2705, 1992 and shall be
hermetically sealed.
7.6.3 The Current Transformer shall be wound type.
7.6.4 The Current Transformer shall be oil immersed with an oil level indicator.
7.6.5 The primary terminal shall be suitable for overhead electrical conductors & CT
Secondary terminals shall be suitable for termination of 4 Sq.mm Cable.
7.6.6 The secondary terminal shall be housed in weatherproof enclosure. This

enclosure shall have terminal blocks, links and a suitable gland plate for
terminating the external control cables.
7.6.7 All metallic non current carrying parts shall be bonded and provided with two
separate earthing terminals. The earthing shall be effective even when the
cover or any other movable part is removed.
Page 13 of 25
RAJASTHAN
7.6.8 Insulator shall be of porcelain, brown glazed and shall be free from
imperfections, cavities and laminations and shall be tough and impervious to
moisture. All metal parts and hardware shall be hot dipped galvanized.
7.6.9 The earthing terminal shall be of adequate size and all hard wares like nuts,
spring washers and plain washers shall be hot dip galvanized.
7.6.10 The oil used in the Current Transformer shall not flow even when operating
under the maximum permissible temperature.
7.6.11 The cores shall be built from high permeability steel so that the exciting
current is low.
7.6.12 The winding shall be clamped so that they do not get dis-lodged due to high
mechanical forces arising out of short circuit.
7.6.13 The Current Transformers shall be dried under atmospheric pressure followed
by vacuum drying. Impregnation shall then be carried out with filtered and
degreased oil in the vacuum and sealed.
7.6.14 The main terminal holder, coupling terminal holders shall be of copper.
7.6.15 The current transformers are to have sufficient overload capacity to permit
continuous operation with currents up to 120% of rated current.
7.6.16 CT parameters shall be selected by vendor based on relay make, type & as per
approved CT
7.7 Potential Transformers
7.7.1 Voltage Transformers shall be outdoor, free standing type, suitable for
mounting on the galvanized steel structures.
7.7.2 VTs shall have the primary and secondary windings housed in porcelain
insulators, filled with pure mineral oil conforming to relevant IS and shall be
hermetically sealed.
Page 14 of 25
RAJASTHAN
7.7.3 The Potential Transformer shall be wound type.
7.7.4 The Potential Transformer shall be oil immersed with an oil level indicator.
7.7.5 The primary terminal shall be suitable for overhead electrical conductors.
7.7.6 The secondary terminal shall be housed in weatherproof enclosure. This

enclosure shall have terminal blocks, fuses and links and a suitable gland plate
for terminating the external control cables.
7.7.7 All metallic non-current carrying parts shall be bonded and provided with two
separate earthing terminals. The earthing shall be effective even when the
cover or any other movable part is removed.
7.7.8 The earthing terminal shall be of adequate size and all hard wares like nuts,
spring washers and plain washers shall be plated.
7.7.8 The oil used in the Potential Transformer shall not flow even when operating
under the maximum permissible temperature.
7.7.9 The cores shall be built from high permeability steel so that the exciting
current is low.
7.7.10 The winding shall be clamped so that they do not get dislodged due to high
mechanical forces arising out of short circuit.
7.7.11 The Potential Transformers shall be dried under atmospheric pressure followed
by vacuum drying. Impregnation shall then be carried out with filtered and
degreased oil in the vacuum and sealed.
7.7.12 The main terminal holder, coupling terminal holders shall be of copper.
7.7.13 The temperature rise shall not exceed 55 deg at any part when carrying the
rated current at rated frequency and rated burden.
7.7.14 Fuses shall be provided as integral part of PT.
Page 15 of 25
RAJASTHAN
7.7.15 Each set of fuses or MCBs shall be monitored, and an alarm (PT failure) shall be
provided for each set.
7.8 Cable Termination
7.8.1 The A B Isolator shall be designed for cable entry from the bottom. Sufficient
space shall be provided for ease of termination and connection.
7.8.2 Power cables shall be XLPE insulated, armoured, overall PVC sheathed with
stranded Aluminum conductor.
7.8.3 Control cables shall be PVC insulated, armoured, overall PVC sheathed with 2.5
mm² stranded copper conductor. Control cables will enter the switchgear from
the Bottom. Adequate space shall be provided for termination. Supporting
facilities shall be provided for clamping the control cables.
7.8.4 All provisions and accessories shall be furnished for termination and connection
of cables, including removable gland plates, cables supports etc. as required
for termination.
7.8.5 The gland plates shall be minimum 2.5 mm thick. The gland plate and
supporting arrangement for 1/C power cables shall be such as to minimize flow
of eddy current.
7.9 Double pole Structure:
7.9.1The supporting structures shall be fabricated out of galvanized steel sections

conforming to IS 1239.
7.9.2 The support structure shall be suitable for mounting operating mechanism and
guides. It shall be designed to withstand short circuit forces, wind pressure,
seismic forces etc. along with the operating forces, vibrations, shocks etc. at
actual site conditions with adequate factor of safety.
7.10 Metering panel
7.10.1 The Trivectormeter shall be RSEB approved make, having accuracy class 0.2 or
better, & having recording facilities.
Page 16 of 25
RAJASTHAN
7.10.2 The set of meters shall comprise of 2 nos. Trivector meter as follows:
• For Main metering

• For Owner’s metering (Check metering)
7.10.3 The Trivectormeter shall be generally in dust proof, moisture resistant, sheet
steel enclosure.
7.10.4 The enclosure shall provide degree of protection IP - 55, outdoor weather proof
enclosure, having facility to padlock, seal as per UPPCL norms, having
transparent window for taking the reading. The arrangement shall be such that
it should be possible to take reading without opening the front cover.
7.10.5 The Trivectormeter shall have measurements of following parameters in import

and export mode simultaneously.
i. Voltage (Line, phase, Neutral) with phase angle

ii. Current (Line, Phase, Neutral) with phase angle
iii. kVA
iv. kW
v. kVAR
vi. kVAh, kWh, kVARh (Integration and instantaneous)
vii. Maximum demand in kW, kVA, kVAR, Current
viii. Power factor
ix. Four quadrant operation
7.10.6 The Trivectormeter should be compatible to communicate with PLC / SCADA /

RTU. The Trivector meter shall be connected to Plant PLC for display of
parameters.
7.10.7 The Trivectormeter shall have its own memory, which can record minimum last
10 events and other parameters.
7.10.8 The Trivectormeter shall be suitable for power measurement simultaneously in

both the directions (Import / Export) independently.
7.10.9 The scan time for parameters shall be as minimum as possible
Page 17 of 25
RAJASTHAN
Manufacturer shall furnish standard list of components makes for the complete the 11
kV outdoor assembly. This list must be included with the offer. However this is subject
to confirmation form Purchaser.
9.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
9.1 The Manufacturer is expected to demonstrate that he has working Quality Assurance
System which complies with ISO 9001 or may be appropriate to the type of contract
and his product.
9.2 If the Vendor elects to sub-contract part of the work he shall ensure that only those
sub-contractors or suppliers are used who can demonstrate that they operate Quality
Systems based on ISO 9001 or ISO 9002 as applicable. The Vendor shall give his sub-
contractors or suppliers assistance in attaining the required standard, if necessary.
This shall not relieve the Vendor of his responsibility for the quality of the finished
work. The Owner reserves the right to audit the Vendor’s Quality System.
9.3 The Vendor shall assign sufficient full time personnel to the Project to ensure the
Quality Assurance / Quality Control System, documented in a Quality Assurance /
Control Manual, is maintained and kept up-to-date throughout the duration of any
purchase order. The Vendor’s Quality Assurance / Control System shall become an
integral part of any Purchase Order. Vendor shall organize a prefabrication /
inspection meeting with the Owner.
Within 3 weeks from the date of Purchase Order the Manufacturer shall submit a
“Quality Assurance Plan” for the review of the Owner.
10.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING:
10.1 The responsibility for inspection, certification, etc. of all materials, parts lies with the
Vendor.
Page 18 of 25
RAJASTHAN
10.2 The Vendor shall specify all of the inspection and testing requirements in the quality
plan which shall identify the activities requiring the Owner’s approval, review,
witnessing etc.
Inspection and testing requirements shall be in accordance with this specification,

other All Equipment shall be inspected for compliances with:
• Requirement of Owner’s specification & correspondence therefore.

• Applicable codes, standards and specifications, which shall also include sub-
referenced standards therein.
• Test and Inspection Plans produced by the vendor.
10.3 Inspectors have the right to request additional inspections or tests to ensure that the
equipment complies with the specification and all relevant codes & standards.
10.4 Manufacturer shall furnish valid Type Test Certificates of similar models along with
the offer. Fresh type tests for the equipment are not needed, provided the
Manufacturer can submit certificates that the equipment complies with all type tests
as prescribed by IEC / IS Standard specifying the test requirements for that
equipment.
10.5 The routine tests shall include but not necessarily limited to the following:
a. Operation under simulated service condition to ensure accuracy of wiring,

correctness of control scheme & proper functioning of the equipment.
b. All wiring and current carrying part shall be given appropriate High Voltage test.
c. Primary current and voltage shall be applied to all instrument transformers.
d. Routine test shall be carried out on all equipment such as circuit breakers,
instrument transformers, relays, meters etc.
10.6 Routine tests on the equipment shall be carried out as per the relevant IS / IEC.
Equipment offered for final inspection shall be complete and ready for shipment, with
the possible exception of the final paint finish.
10.7 Routine Test certificates to be submitted for Equipment and its all auxiliaries. Type
test certificate of similar equipment shall be submitted.
Page 19 of 25
RAJASTHAN
10.8 Vendor to furnish required copies of test certificates, Ref Documents, Drawings, and
Instruction Manuals before Equipment are dispatched.
10.9 Factory acceptance test (FAT) is required to be done at no extra cost to the
purchaser. The purchaser or his representative shall be advised of the tentative date
for FAT at least 3 weeks in advance prior to the test date.
10.10 Any defects found by the TPI or the Owner’s appointed Inspector shall be rectified in
his presence. Where this is not possible or practical, check lists shall be prepared and
signed by the Third Party Inspector stating all “pending items”. Copies of these lists
shall be sent to the Owner to enable their subsequent checking. The equipment shall
not leave the Vendor factory before all defects have been rectified and without the
written permission of the Owner.
10.11 All spare parts shall be subjected to the same inspection standards and full material
certification as the main order.
10.12 The equipment shall not leave the Vendor / Sub-Vendor’s factory before all discovered
defects have been rectified and without the written permission of the Owner /
Purchaser.
10.13 Any acceptance or release of equipment following an inspection or test activity shall
in no way relieve the Vendor of his contractual responsibility to provide guarantees as
to the suitability of the materials, workmanship and performance of the equipment in
accordance with this Specification.
10.14 Owner / Consultant reserves the right to waive the inspection at any stage. Inspection
shall be carried out only on receipt of Vendor's internal test report of the equipment
offered and scrutiny of the same. In the event, on receipt of inspection call, the
Owner / Consultant’s representative reaches the Vendor's works and finds the
material not ready for inspection / incomplete / has short supply, the inspector will
return to his base station and all expenses incurred by the inspector including to and
from travelling expenses from his base station to place of inspection, boarding and
lodging etc shall be reimbursed by Vendor.
11.0 VENDOR DOCUMENTATION:
11.1 All information listed here is to be furnished along with the offer as a minimum.
Page 20 of 25
RAJASTHAN
a. Duly filled up Guaranteed Technical Particulars [enclosed Appendix-B].

b. List of components & accessories with Makes.
c. List of recommended spares for two years normal operation with itemized rates.
d. Type test certificates.
e. Technical Catalogues and brochures of major Components.
f. List of client for similar equipment in last 5 years.
g. Complete list of special tools (if required)
11.2 The Manufacturer shall furnish the drawings and documents as per enclosed
Requisition for Engineering Documents - RED Form [Appendix-C].
11.3 The Owner / Consultant will review drawings submitted by Vendor & return to
the Vendor one copy of drawings with comments to carry out necessary changes, if
any, during the engineering / manufacturing stage.
11.4 The documents required by the Third Party Inspection Agency are not covered
under this specification. The Vendor shall provide all the drawings and documents
required by the Third Party Inspection agency in compliance with the applicable codes
and standards.
12.0 SPARES AND SPECIAL TOOLS:
12.1 Spares
The Manufacturer shall furnish list of spares and provide all necessary spares for
testing, pre-commissioning, commissioning. Any of the spares if used during testing /
commissioning must be replenished at no extra cost to the purchaser.
The Manufacturer shall also provide all consumables required during erection up to
commissioning.
In addition to above, Manufacturer shall quote separately for Spares required for two
years of operation.
12.2 Special tools
Page 21 of 25
RAJASTHAN
The Manufacturer shall include any special tools, which are required for the
installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance of the equipment being
supplied. A list of special tools shall be supplied along with the offer
13.0 SUPERVISION OF INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING:

Vendor shall dispatch Installation and Commissioning instructions at least 2 weeks
before the arrival of the equipment.
Vendor shall provide qualified personnel to supervise the installation and carryout site
testing and commissioning of all equipment supplied under this contract. Prices for
these services shall be given separately.
14.0 PACKING AND TRANSPORTATION:

Packing, shipping and delivery of equipment at site and unloading requirements shall
be as per relevant Standard. Vendor to submit the procedure & all the relevant
necessary datas / informations along with offer.
Preparation of the skids for shipment is a crucial step in the completion of this
contract. The Vendor must take in to consideration that all equipment and the skid
itself shall be prepared for land transportation.
15.0 STATUTORY APPROVAL:
The Equipment supplied shall be acceptable to local Electrical Inspectorate and

changes required, if any, shall be carried out by the vendor without any extra cost.
16.0 GUARANTEE:
Equipment shall be guaranteed to meet the specified performance at specified

conditions in terms of power, air flow, thermal performance, design conditions etc.
Equipment and its components shall be guaranteed against faulty design, defective /
improper materials poor workmanship or failure from normal use during the guarantee
period.
Vendor shall make all necessary and desirable alterations, repairs and replacement
free of charge in the even of mal performance or defects occurring in the equipment
during guarantee period.
Page 22 of 25
RAJASTHAN
17.0 APPENDIX-A: CODES & STANDARDS
Document Number Standard Title

IS 9921: Part 1: 1981 Specification for Alternating Current Disconnectors (Isolators) and Earthing Switches
for Voltages Above 1 000 V - Part I: General and Definitions.
IS 9921: Part 2: 1982 Alternating current disconnectors (isolators) and earthing switches for voltages above
1000 V: Part 2 Rating.
IS 9921: Part III: 1982 Specification for Alternating Current Disconnectors (Isolators) and Earthing Switches
for Voltages Above 1000 V - Part III: Design and Construction.
IS 9921: Part 4: 1985 Specification for Alternating Current Disconnectors (isolators) and Earthing Switches
for Voltages Above 1000 V - Part 4: Type Tests and Routine Tests.
IS 9921: Part 5: 1985 Specification for Alternating Current Disconnectors (Isolators) and Earthing Switches
for Voltages Above 1000 v - Part 5: Information to be Given with Tenders, Enquiries
and Orders.
IS 2544: 1973 Porcelain post insulators for systems with nominal voltage greater than 1000 Volts.
IS 2633: 1986 Methods for testing uniformity of coating of zinc coated articles.
IS 2629: 1985 Recommended Practice for Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Iron and Steel.
IS 4759: 1996 Hot-dip zinc coatings on structural steel and other allied products.
IS 1573: 1986 Specification for Electroplated Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.
IS 11353: 1985 Guide for Uniform System of Marking and Identification of Conductors and Apparatus
Terminals.
IS 2705: Part 1: 1992 Current transformers: Part 1 General requirements.
IS 2705: Part 2: 1992 Current transformers: Part 2 Measuring current transformers.
IS 2705: Part 3: 1992 Current transformers: Part 3 Protective current transformers.
IS 2705: Part 4: 1992 Current transformers: Part 4 Protective current transformers for special purpose
applications.
IS 3156: Part 1: 1992 Voltage transformers: Part 1 General requirements.
IS 3156: Part 2: 1992 Voltage transformers: Part 2 Measuring voltage transformers.
IS 3156: Part 3: 1992 Voltage transformers: Part 3 Protective voltage transformers.
IS 3156: Part 4: 1992 Voltage transformers: Part 4 Capacitor voltage transformers.
IS 4146: 1983 Application guide for voltage transformers.
IS 4201: 1983 Application Guide for Current Transformer.
IS 5082: 1998 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bars, rods, tubes and sections for electrical
purposes.
IS 3043: 1987 Code of practice for earthing.
IE rule,1956 Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.
Page 23 of 25
RAJASTHAN
18.0 APPENDIX-B: GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
Sr. no. Parameters Unit Requirement

1 Rated Frequency HZ 50
2 Rated nominal current Amp 400
3 Rated short time withstand current kA 25 kA for 3 second
4 Rated short circuit making current kA 63 kA for 3 second
5 Nominal System Voltage KV 11
6 Highest System Voltage KV 12
7 System Neutral Earthing Effectively earthed
8 Number of poles No. 3
9 Temperature rise Deg. C As per standards IS / IEC
10 Safe duration of overload Minutes
a. 150% of rated current Tenderer to furnish
b. 120% of rated current Tenderer to furnish
11 Basic Insulation Level (BIL)
1. Lightning Impulse withstand voltage KV Peak
a. Pole to earth & between poles 75
b. Across isolating distance 85
2. Rated power Frequency withstand voltage KV rms
c. Pole to earth & between poles 28
d. Across isolating distance 32
12 Minimum creepage distance mm 300
Material Details:
Sr. no. Description Material

1 Base Channel MS Galvanized
2 Base Support Channel MS Galvanized
3 Tandem pipe GI Pipe
4 Down Pipe GI Pipe
5 Earthing Terminals M16, Bolts with nuts
6 Support Structure MS Galvanized pipe
Page 24 of 25
RAJASTHAN
19.0 APPENDIX-C: Requisition for Engineering Documents for11 KV OUTDOOR GOD AIR
BREAK ISOLATOR ALONG WITH EARTH SWITCH, POST INSULATORS, CT, PT AND THE
DOUBLE POLE STRUCTURE
Sl. No. Description Documents Required (Y / N)

2. General arrangement drawing showing main Y Y Y
dimensions, arrangement of auxiliarly
components, etc
3. Foundation Plan N Y Y
4. Block Logic ,Schematic & Connection N Y Y
Diagrams
5. Name Plate Drawing Y Y Y
6. Make of each components N Y Y
7. Type Test, Routine Test Certificates N N Y
8. Spare List for 2 years operation N N Y
manual
10. Spare Parts List Y N Y
Note:
the date of LOI.
despatch of the equipment. These shall be made in sets and supplied in fine plastic
coated folder.
Y - Yes, N - No
20.0 APPENDIX-D: ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
1. Dwg. NAYA-PALI-EL-LY-045: 11kV, DP Structure
Page 25 of 25
REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRN BY CHD BY APP BY
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
ELECTRICAL BOQ
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
NAYARA ENERGY LIMITED

DESIGN, SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENTS ALONG WITH ASSOCIATED WORKS AT PALI, RAJASTHAN
SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES & RATES
LV PACKAGE
Sl. No. Item Description Unit Qty Remarks
a) Cement brand to be used:

i) Ultratech Cement
ii) J.K. Cement
iii) Coromandal King
iv) Birla Cement ACC
v) Ambuja Cement
vi) Dalmia Cement
vii) Top Cement
vii) Star Cement
36.3 Providing and laying cement concrete in foundation, footings and base for columns/walls including proportioning, mixing in mechanical mixer,
laying vibration by means of mechanical vibrators, curing etc. complete including the cost of shuttering:-
36.4 Concrete of mix 1:3:6 ( 1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) 200.00 m3
37.0 Supply and Installation of Hume pipes of following sizes for road crossing
37.1 100mm Hume pipe NP2 18.00 Nos
37.4 300mm Hume pipe NP2 16.00 Nos
38.0 Supply and Installation of Pull pit box of following sizes for cable pulling
38.1 1500x1500x1000 9.00 Nos
38.2 800x800x1000 2.00 Nos
Doc No: EOL-PALI-MT-001 Rev: 01 Page 17 of 17

ELECTRICAL DOCUMENTS & DRAWINGS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
RAJASTHAN
ELECTRICAL SCOPE OF WORKS

Page 1 of 6
RAJASTHAN

4000 KL.
2.0 SCOPE OF WORKS

1. Bidder shall supply the electrical items as per specifications attached in this
document.
2. This tender document covers specification for Electricals including supply of material
and bought out items / equipment. Bidder shall submit the spare list including
erection & commissioning spares, mandatory spares & tools /tackles.
3. The scope includes works / services like handling at site, fabrication, testing,
inspection & testing, erection / installation, Site Acceptance test, field trials,
performance tests, mechanical completion, calibration as required, commissioning,
pre-commissioning, obtaining approvals from statutory bodies / other agencies,
Page 2 of 6
RAJASTHAN
performance test runs, rectification of any defect and handing over the package /
equipment as per data sheets and specification to the complete satisfaction of the
Engineer-In-Charge including supply of all labours, consumables & hardware etc. as
required, for the scope of work. Bidder shall submit the QAP for all electrical items
supplied. Bidder shall also provide the Test Report format for the tests carried out by
vendor.
4. Third party inspection for all supply items. Third party inspection prices are included
in the supply price. Contractor to appoint Third Party Inspection Agency (TPIA) from
the Nayara Energy approved vendor list for carrying out various stage-wise and final
inspection. The scope includes preparation of as-built drawings.
5. Bidder shall submit all the relevant drawings and approvals as per the requirement of
individual specifications within 1 month from the placement of order. Bidder shall not
start fabrication / manufacturing unless the drawings and documents are approved by
the purchaser. Any manufacturing done prior to the drawing/document approval from
the purchaser shall be rejected.
6. Scope of work also includes preparation of electrical equipment and cable route
layout from MCC room to equipments, lighting layouts, primary and secondary
earthing layouts, cable schedules, interconnecting schedules, lightning protection
drawings, vendor drawings, datasheets, and design calculations of equipments.
7. Bidder shall provide experienced engineer of respective discipline from his team for
carrying out all the Electrical work at site. Progress report shall be prepared by the
Site Engineer. Different progress report like Daily, weekly and monthly shall be
prepared for the site work/
8. Scope of Work also includes obtaining statutory approvals as required for electrical
installation of the plant. All equipment not mentioned but required for satisfactory
operation of the plant and to meet desired intent of specification shall be included in
the scope of supply of bidder. Such equipment if noticed during detail engg shall be
supplied by bidder without any implication of bidder. Make of equipment shall be
subjected to purchaser’s approval.
Any other work not mentioned specifically above but required to complete the
job.
Page 3 of 6
RAJASTHAN
satisfaction of the Nayara Energy/ DEC or if any damage due to bad workmanship is
found within warrantee period, cost of rectification of the damaged portion shall be
recovered from Security Deposit against warrantee of work done by contractor.
The complete work shall be done as per attached Standard Specifications, Drawings and
instructions of Engineer in Charge.
3.0 SITE DATA

Minimum 5 °C
Seismic Zone II
4.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
OWNER’S SCOPE OF SUPPLY - NIL
CONTRACTOR’S SCOPE OF SUPPLY:-
All materials and consumables required for satisfactory completion of the job shall be
supplied by contractor. Contractor’s scope shall also include arranging of all tools,
tackles, equipments, machinery and labour required for satisfactory completion of the
job.
5.0 POWER, WATER & OTHER FACILITIES
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to provide within the scope of work all
facilities, consumables and utilities necessary for performance of the work including
(but not limited to) water, power, transportation, labour, tools, construction and
testing equipment, machinery and land at or about the job site(s) for the
Page 4 of 6
RAJASTHAN
CONTRACTOR’s field offices, stores; residential accommodation for CONTRACTOR’s

staff; quarry rights and borrow areas and making access roads to or about the job
site(s) and CONTRACTOR’s offices, stores, accommodation, borrow areas.
The OWNER does not warranty or undertake the provision of any facility, consumable
or utility whatsoever to the CONTRACTOR.
Any assistance which the OWNER renders to the CONTRACTOR in terms hereof or otherwise
relative to the work by provision of any facility, utility, consumables for the performance of
any of his obligations under the Contract, shall not be a ground for extension of time for
6.0 CONSTRUCTION POWER
The contractor has to arrange construction power connection with his own DG sets at no extra
cost. Alternatively, contractor may directly arrange construction power from the existing sub-
station/ LT line of State Electricity Board and make necessary arrangement (supply , laying of
cables, etc.) for distribution to his job site/s by his own effort and cost.
All the works will be done as per IEA regulations and passed by the Engineer-In-Charge. The
temporary lines will be removed forthwith after the completion of the work or if there is any
hindrance caused to the other works due to the alignment of these lines, the contractor will
reroute or remove the temporary lines at his own cost. The cost of power supply shall be
payable to SEB directly. The owner shall not, however, guarantee the supply of electricity and
no compensation for failure or short supply of electricity will be entertained.
7.0 CONSTRUCTION WATER
Contractor will have to make his own arrangements for supply of water to his labour
camps, residential accommodation of staff and for the works. All pumping installation,
pipe net wok and distribution system will have to be carried by the contractor at his
own cost.
The owner shall not take any guarantee for the supply of water and will not relieve
the contractor of his responsibility in making his own arrangement and for the timely
completion of the various works as stipulated.
8.0 LAND
The OWNER may at his discretion and convenience, if it has sufficient available land
at its disposal, provide land to the CONTRACTOR near or about the job site, for the
construction of the CONTRACTOR’s field office(s), stores and Yard required for or in
connection with the execution of the work(s). Such land shall be utilized by the
CONTRACTOR only for the purpose of the contract and for the duration of the
contract.
Page 5 of 6
RAJASTHAN
The CONTRACTOR shall at his own cost and initiative construct temporary buildings or
other accommodation necessary for the purpose and make suitable arrangements for
water and power supply and for provisions of drainage and dewatering arrangements
thereof in accordance with plans / designs / layouts previously approved by the Site
Engineer in this behalf.
9.0 ACCESS TO SITE
The CONTRACTOR shall construct, if necessary at his own cost and initiative, temporary
access road to the site from the main public feeder road(s) and from borrow areas and shall so
align such roads or ways so as not to interfere with the construction of the site or hamper
construction of pavement roads by or on behalf of the OWNER or other CONTRACTORS
operating at or about the job site.
The CONTRACTOR shall, if so required or relative to the performance of any other

work at the site or construction of permanent roads, suspend, discontinue use of and
/ or re-route any access road constructed by him. No suspension, discontinuance or
re-routing as aforesaid shall form the basis of any claims by the CONTRACTOR against
the OWNER for compensation of damages or ground for extension of time for
10.0 SPECIAL INFORMATION
The tenderer shall before tendering and shall be deemed before tendering to have
undertaken a thorough study of the proposed work, the job site(s) involved, the site
conditions, soil conditions, the terrain, the climatic conditions, the labour, power,
material and equipment availability and transport and communication facilities, the
availability and transport suitability or borrow areas, the availability of land for right
of way and temporary office and accommodations, quarters, and all other facts and
facilities necessary or relevant for the formulation of the tender, supply of materials
and the performance of the work. Without prejudice to the foregoing, the tenderers
may be allowed access to any information regarding the site of the work, the
investigations conducted relative thereto, such as soil investigation etc. But, these
shall be only indicative in nature and the tenderers are expected to collect their own
data for preparation and submission of their tender. Any claim at a later date based
on either incorrectness or inadequacy of the information/data made available by the
OWNER/consultant to a tenderer shall not be entertained. The OWNER/Consultant
shall be fully absolved of any and all liabilities in this regard.
Page 6 of 6
RAJASTHAN
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-EL-DB-001 Rev: 02 Date: 27-04-2019
ELECTRICAL DESIGN BASIS

0 10-12-2018 ISSUED FOR REVIEW KB PBS SKJ
Page 1 of 34
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

2.0 SCOPE
3.0 DESIGN BASIS
4.0 ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION / SWITCHGEAR BUILDING
Page 2 of 34
RAJASTHAN

4000 KL.
2.0 SCOPE
This document will form the basis for design and selection of equipment and
philosophy to be adopted for basic engineering of project.
Page 3 of 34
RAJASTHAN
3.0 DESIGN BASIS
3.1 SITE DATA

Minimum 5 °C
Seismic Zone II
3.2 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
HT power supply 11 KV ±10%, 50 Hz ±3%

(From Electricity board)
LT power supply for Normal & DG source
3 Phase system 415 V ±10%, 4 wire
1 Phase system 240 V ±10%, 2 wire
UPS power supply 230 V ±10%, 2 wire
(For I & C)
DC power supply 110 V DC, 2 wire
(For switchgear trip coil supply and critical light)
Control power supply 110 V AC ±10%, 2 wire
Page 4 of 34
RAJASTHAN
The main codes and standards, considered as minimum requirements, as applicable,

are as follows. Latest version of these shall be followed:
IS 13234 (1992) Guide for short circuit calculations in three phase AC systems
IS 12360 (1988) Voltage bands for electrical installation including preferred voltages and frequencies
IS 3043 (1987) Code of practice for earthing
IS 3716 (1978) Application guide for Insulation coordination
IS 732 (1989) Code of practice for electrical wiring installations
IS 6665 (1972) Code of practice for industrial lighting
IS 3646 (1992) Code of practice for Interior illumination
IS 2309 (1989) Code of practice for the Protection of buildings and allied structures against lightning
IS 1646 (1997) Code of practice for fire safety of buildings – Electrical installations
IS 10118 (1982) Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of switch gear and
control gear
IS 5216 (1982) Guide for safety procedures and practices in electrical work
IS 5571 Guide for selection of electrical equipment for hazardous area
IS 5572 Classification of hazardous areas having flammable gases and vapors for electrical
installations
IS 7689 Guide for control of undesirable static electricity
IS 325 Specification for Induction Motors
IS 8478 Application guide for on load tap changers
IS 9676 (1980) Reference Ambient Temperature for Electrical Equipment
IS 10028 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of transformer
IS 10118 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of switchgear and control
gear
IS 11064 Guide for construction and use of rooms or buildings protected by pressurization for
installation of electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres
IS 12360 Voltage bands for electrical installations including preferred voltage and frequencies
IS 13346 General requirements for electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmosphere
IS 13408 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of electrical apparatus
for use in potentially explosive atmosphere
IS 14154 Electrical apparatus with protection by enclosure for use (Part 1 and 2) in the
presence of combustible dusts
IS 14774 Resistance trace heating in potentially explosive (Part 1 and 2) atmospheres
IS 15142 Guide to use of electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres in the
presence of combustible dusts
SP 30 National Electrical Code (NEC) – BIS publication
OISD STD 110 Recommended practices on static electricity
OISD STD 113 Classification of Area for electrical installation at Hydrocarbon and handling facilities
OISD STD 118 Layouts for Oil and Gas Installations
Page 5 of 34
RAJASTHAN
OISD STD 147 Inspection and safe practices during Electrical installation
OISD STD 244 Storage and Handling of Petroleum Products at Depots and Terminals
OISD STD 149 Design aspects for safety in electrical systems
OISD STD 173 Fire protection systems for electrical installations
OISD STD 180 Lightning Protection
API STD 610 Centrifugal Pumps for Petroleum, Petrochemical and Natural Gas Industries
Note: -IEC specifications shall be followed where equivalent Indian Standards are not
available in specific cases.
3.4 SUPPLY SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Main Grid supply 11 kV, 50 Hz, 3-Phase, 3 wire

(Provided by Rajasthan Electricity Board)
Distribution Supply for 415 V, 3-Phase Supply 240 V, 1-Phase Supply
Normal & Emergency
Voltage tolerance ±10%
System Frequency 50 Hz
Frequency tolerance ±1%
System Power Factor 0.8 (Assumed)
Design Fault Level 11 kV 25 kA for 3 Sec. (Max.)
Design Fault Level 415 V 50 KA for 1 sec.
3.5 SYSTEM EARTHING DETAILS
Transformer (LV secondary) Solidly earthed Neutral

415 V Diesel Generator Solidly earthed Neutral
11 KV MV Switchgear Solidly earthed
240 V System Solidly earthed
DC System Unearthed
Page 6 of 34
RAJASTHAN
3.6 SYSTEM VOLTAGE AND CIRCUIT PARAMETERS
1. Grid / Main power station Supply 11 kV, 50 Hz, 3-Phase, 3 wire

(Provided by Rajasthan Electricity Board)
2. Power Distribution System [HV]
Voltage 11 kV; 50 Hz; 3ph; 3 W

Neutral Earthing Resistance Earth System
A Fluctuation
Voltage ±10%
Frequency ±5%
Combined Voltage & Frequency ±10%
3. Power Distribution System [LV]
Voltage 415 V; 50 Hz; 3 ph; 4 W

Earthing System TN-S
Neutral Earthing Solidly Earthed
A Fluctuation
Voltage ±10%
Frequency ±5%
Combined Voltage & Frequency ±10%
Power factor to be maintained 0.99
(At LV side only)
Emergency DG 1. DG Sets (415 V; 50 Hz; 3ph; 4 W) – 1010 kVA (2
(Back up for Emergency load) Nos.)
2. DG set (415 V; 50 Hz; 3ph; 4 W) – 380 kVA for
Emergency loads
4. Power Distribution System of A.C. UPS [LV] 1 + 1 Parallel Redundant with Bypass arrangement
for PLC & Instrument load, Computer & other with separate 100% Batteries (UPS & Distribution
Board shall be located in air-conditioned room) With
IT Equipment etc. and Admin Block
battery back-up for 60 minutes (PLC & Instrument
load). UPS status will be displayed in Control Room
through Ethernet.
1 + 1 Parallel Redundant with Bypass arrangement
with Separate 100% Batteries (UPS & Distribution
Board shall be located in air-conditioned room) With
battery back-up for 30 minutes (UPS load at admin
Bldg). UPS status will be displayed in Control Room
through Ethernet.
Page 7 of 34
RAJASTHAN
Voltage 415V Input/ 240 V Output; 50 Hz; 1ph; 3 W
A Fluctuation
Voltage +1%
5. Power Distribution System of DC UPS for HV & 1 + 1 Float Cum Boost charger, Bypass arrangement &
LV Switchgear Control supply. 100% parallel redundancy (Charger & Distribution
Board shall be located in non-conditioned Substation
Building)
Voltage 110 V DC;

A Fluctuation
Voltage +1%
6. Lighting Distribution System
A Normal Lighting
Voltage 230 V AC
Source From PMCC
B Emergency Lighting
Voltage 230 V AC
Source From Emergency DG
7. Power Receptacles
Voltage, 3P + N + E 415 V AC
Voltage, 1P + N + E 230 V AC
Source From PMCC/ PDB
8. Control Supply for Electrical System
A High Voltage Circuit Breakers (11 kV)
Spring Charging Motors 230 V AC

Closing Circuit 110 V DC
Trip Coil 110 V DC
Alarm 110 V DC
Indication 110 V DC
Page 8 of 34
RAJASTHAN
Metering, Relays Auxiliary Supply 110 V DC

Heaters in Panels 230 V AC, 1 Phase
B Low Voltage Circuit Breakers (Applicable for

Incomers & Bus coupler)
Spring Charging Motors 240 V AC

Closing Circuit 110 V DC
Trip Coil 110 V DC
Alarm 240 V AC
9 Supply Voltage for Instrument
PLC 230 V AC UPS

Instrument Power Supply 230 V AC UPS
10 Power Supply to Local Control Panels

(Package Unit Control Panels)
Power (One-point supply) 415 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, 50 Hz / 240V, 1 ph, 3 wire,

50Hz as applicable
Control To be derived by Vendor.
230 V AC, 1 Phase, if UPS supply required.
11 Power supply to MOV 415 V 3 Phase 4 wire 50 Hz / 240 V, 1 ph, 3 wire, 50

Hz as applicable
3.7 PERMISSIBLE VOLTAGE DROPS
The maximum voltage drops in various sections of the electrical system under steady
state conditions at full load shall be within the limits stated in the following table:
Sr. System Description Maximum Permissible

No. Voltage Drops
1 Cables between DG and MCC 2%
2 Cables between MCC and LV motor during motor running 5%
3 Maximum voltage drops for cables between MCC & LV motor during 15%
motor starting
4 Cable between MCC and DB 2%
5 Circuit between DB and lighting points 5%
6 UPS outgoing circuit 5%
Page 9 of 34
RAJASTHAN
3.8 PROTECTION PHILOSOPHY
• The protection system will be designed such that a faulty circuit is identified and
disconnected safely and quickly without adversely affecting the stable operation of
other healthy circuits and plant.
• All the protection relays shall be numerical type (intelligent electronic devices)
and shall comply with IEC 61850
• Typical protection relay applications as minimum are tabulated as follows:
11 KV VCB Panel Incomer Feeder • IDMT Over current Relay - 51

• IDMT Earth fault Relay - 51N
• Under voltage Relay with Timer - 27
• Trip circuit supervision Relay - 95
• High speed tripping relay - 86
LV Switchgear Incomer Feeder • IDMT Over current Relay - 51
LV Switchgear (From Transformer • IDMT Earth fault Relay - 51N
secondary winding • Instantaneous Over current Relay - 50
• Instantaneous Earth fault Relay - 50N
• Trip circuit supervision Relay - 95
• High speed tripping relay – 86
LV SWITCHGEAR Outgoing Feeder • IDMT Over current Relay - 51
• Motor Protection Relay with (46, 49, 59
Protection Relay
415 V D.G. Set Generator Protection • Under voltage Relay with Timer - 27
• IDMT Over current Relay - 51
• Generator Protection Relay
• Reverse Power Relay - Anti motoring
protection - 32
All numerical protection relays and other communicable meters shall have FO / RS485
port for serial interface. The data of this relays shall be capable of transferring to
SCADA / PLC via Modbus communication or Ethernet over IEC 61850 protocols
Page 10 of 34
RAJASTHAN
3.9 EQUIPMENT & SYSTEM DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
• Grid Supply
Incomer 11 kV power supply to the plant shall be tapped from Rajasthan State
Electricity Board (RSEB). The 11kV power supply shall be made available on DP
Strucure (Nayara Energy) by RSEB. Electrical contractor scope starts from procuring
of 2-pole structure (Nayara Energy) and Indoor VCB located at proposed Substation,
HV XLPE cable connected from 2-pole structure to Indoor VCB and Indoor VCB to
Transformer and further power distribution with associated electrical equipments
as shown in SLD to entire plant.
• Normal Operation
In normal operation, all loads will be catered by the national grid Power.
• Standby Supply
Standby supplies shall be provided for the “Essential Services” necessary to

maintain plant safety and security as required.
“Essential services” power shall be feed from 415V Emergency diesel generator for
which rating shall be determined on the basis of essential loads. The Electrical
system will be designed on the basis of maximum demand.
Working Philosophy:
During Normal Operation, Transformer Incomer will be closed with all other PMCC
Incomers Open, and Transformer will feed the entire load of Nayara Pali Terminal.
All Essential Loads shall be fed from Emergency Switch Board (ESB) located in
Substation with two nos. Incomers. ESB Incomer-1 shall be Normal Grid Supply &
ESB Incomer-2 shall be Emergency DG (EDG) supply.
In the event of loss of power supply due to grid power failure or Transformer fault,
EDG shall start on under voltage signal from line PT of ESB. Once EDG develops the
required voltage ESB I/c-2 shall be closed & EDG shall feed the critical loads.
Electrical Interlock shall be provided between ESB I/c-1 & ESB I/c-2. On
Page 11 of 34
RAJASTHAN
resumption of Grid power supply, the change over from EDG supply to Normal Grid
supply shall be manual with break in power supply.
During Grid supply failure, apart from ESB loads, if loads on PMCC are required to
be operated, then DG-1 shall be started manually. During the time when DG-1
feeds the loads, if load exceed to more than 75% of DG-1 capacity, DG-2 shall start
automatically. Synchronization of both DG-1 & Dg-2 shall be done and both the DGs
shall share the total loads equally. During this period, in case of failure of one of
the DG, the other DG can feed the load equal to the capacity of that DG. On
resumption of Grid power supply, the change over from DG-1 & DG-2 supply to
Normal Grid supply shall be manual with break in power supply.
Two number Incomers provision for Solar Supply shall be made available in PMCC
Panel.
• Emergency Shut Down Operation
Emergency Shutdown Pushbutton shall be provided in Control Room as well as on
PMCC Panel. In case of Emergency shutdown, the Emergency shutdown push button
shall trip all the PMCC Incomers. EDG shall start on under voltage signal from line
PT of ESB. Once EDG develops the required voltage ESB I/c-2 shall be closed and
EDG shall feed the critical loads to be operated during Emergency Shutdown
Operation.
Solar Panel Incomers provision shall be made in PMCC Panel.
• Design points
1. The HT breaker will be Vacuum Circuit Breaker.

2. The LT distribution will be through LT Air Circuit Breaker and MCCB.
3. Motors less than and equal to 18.5 kw shall be started with DOL. Motors greater
than 18.5 kW and equal to 45 kw will be started with Soft Starter. All TWD
Pump Motors shall have VFD starters. All TLF Pump Motors shall have Soft-starters. All
VFD feeders shall be provided with Bypass facility.
4. VFD Driven motors will be provided LCS with ammeter, Local/Remote Selector
Switch, Start/Stop Push Button, Ramp up / down push buttons. All other motors
will be provided LCS with ammeter, Local/Remote Selector Switch, Start/Stop
Push Button.
5. Thermistors and space heaters shall be provided for VFD and Soft starter driven
motors. Space heaters shall be provided with motors greater than 30 kW.
6. The running motor input voltage is considered to be min. 90% of rated voltage
at any time.
7. For design it is considered that all other pumps will be operating on the bus and
largest capacity motor is started last in the sequence. The input terminal
Page 12 of 34
RAJASTHAN
voltage of the started pump while accelerating shall not be less than 80% of
rated voltage.
8. Earth pit resistance shall be maximum 5 ohm and minimum 1 ohm for grid.
9. The Separate earth pits for Communication package and PLC shall be provided.
It shall not be interconnected with rest of the Earth pit.
10. The distribution transformer shall be Air Cooled and will be located Indoor on
suitable foundation. The neutral will be solidly grounded (DYN 11).
11. All the cable will be FRLS type & Cables inside the tank farm will be Fire
Resistant type.
12. All electrical items inside the plant in hazardous area shall be flame proof.
13. Status (running, stop and as required) for all the motors, fire engine, bore well,
jockey pumps, DG sets, compressor, etc. shall be implement in separate
Marshalling cabinet/ box in respective panels and same can be taken to PLC.
3.9.1 Area Classification and Equipment Selection
Area classification shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 5572 & OISD-STD-
113 / 244.
Electrical equipment installed in the classified area shall be suitable for the
area and taken into consideration, during design of the plant equipment, the
gases and chemical substances, which shall be handled, processed or stored in
the plant.
Electrical apparatuses suitable for use in classified areas with test certificates
by an official test laboratory / Notified body such as CCOE / PESO etc. will be
considered.
The equipment suitable for Zone 1 area will be deemed suitable for zone 2
area.
3.9.2 Distribution Transformers
The Distribution transformer will be indoor Air Natural cooling type and suitable
for installing inside substation. The Distribution transformer will be with all
accessories and safety relief valve. The sizing of Distribution transformer will
be selected as per maximum demand. Maximum continuous load on the
transformer shall not to exceed 80%.
Page 13 of 34
RAJASTHAN
KVA rating and % impedance of transformer shall be selected so as to limit the

short circuit current to values within the current rating and rupturing capacity
of proprietary available switchgear whilst also ensuring that the voltage drop in
the system elements stays within permissible limits. The transformer
impedances shall comply with the applicable IS standards unless otherwise
required.
Transformer shall be provided with off circuit tap changer (OCTC) on the
primary (HV) winding with tap selection for (-) 5% to (+) 5% of rated primary
voltage in steps of 2.5%.
3.9.3 Diesel Generator Set
415 V Diesel generator set is envisaged to back up the normal power. The unit
will automatically start and come into operation without manual intervention in
the event of failure of normal supply. Manual starting will be possible locally.
The DG set shall consist of a diesel engine directly coupled to an electric

generator, together complete with all the required accessories and components
including starting, cooling, lubricating, combustion air intake, exhaust and fuel
systems, control panel, battery, Generator Control Panel, diesel tank etc.,
along with electrical protection & metering system.
The generator set shall have at least 20% spare capacity for meeting future
requirements.
Generating units will be suitable for rapid starting and loading to full capacity
within 15 seconds.
It will be suitable for outdoor operation in a sound proof shelter Acoustic

enclosure with common base frame & Anti-vibration mounting pad suitable for
assembly of engine, radiator and alternator with their accessories.
1. The DG’s will have self-starting features with battery for subsequent three
starts. 2 Nos Power DG has been considered to take the total load of the
Page 14 of 34
RAJASTHAN
plant in synchronization. Kindly refer to SLD NAY-PALI-EL-SD-001 for the

operation philosophy of DGs.
2. Chargers will be provided with the battery chargers of adequate capacity.
DG set will be ‘ON’ on sensing under voltage at 415 V main Bus.
3. Synchronizing panel with auto mains fail start feature shall be considered
for parallel operation of DG sets.
3.9.4 Emergency Generator
Essential services panel shall be feed from 415 V Emergency diesel generator
for which rating shall be determined on the basis of essential loads.
415 V Emergency Generator driven by battery started diesel engine with AMF
panel shall be provided.
The electrical loads of Essential services panel to be fed by emergency

generator shall consist of the following as minimum:
• 20-25% lighting load

• Loads critical for process, plant and personnel safety
3.9.5 Switchgear
• LV switchgear shall be located in non-hazardous area close to the load

Centre in order to reduce transmission losses, size and length of cables.
• PMCC will consist of 5 nos of incoming circuit breakers, and outgoing shall
be starter & power feeders, lighting and power distribution board feeder,
grouped together to form where appropriate a Power Control Centre of the
cubicle type construction.
• LV switchgear shall be metal enclosed, dead front, floor mounted, free
standing, draw-out type as per applicable IEC standards with the following
features:
o Vaccum type circuit breaker shall be considered for HT supply and ACB,
MCCB and MCB shall be considered for LT distribution
o Incomer Circuit Breakers shall be ACB, four poles, spring charged,
horizontal draw out electrically operated type single front design.
o LV switchgear shall be single front type.
Page 15 of 34
RAJASTHAN
o Distribution boards shall be fixed type with a single front design.

o LV switchgear shall be suitable for future expansion on both sides and all
bus bars for all the switch boards shall be electrolytic grade copper and
shall be fully insulated unless otherwise specified.
o A minimum of 20% spare feeders or one no. of each rating and type on
each side of the bus section, whichever is the greater, shall be provided
o A minimum of 10% of all type of feeder panel shall be kept as vacant.
o Circuit breakers / contactors controlling motor feeders shall have a
rating of at least 125% of the maximum continuous rating of the
connected motors.
o Motor starter and contactor components shall be selected to achieve
type-2 co-ordination. Motor modules shall be fitted with ammeters for
motors rated 37 kW and above. Consider selector switch type for remote
and local operation in the LV panel for motor feeder. Consider Bypass
selector switch for Motor starter (Soft starter and VFD) and arrangement
in respective panels.
o For feeders rated up to and including 630A, MCCBs shall be provided, for
the feeders rated above 630A, ACBs shall be provided.
o All incomer ACB feeder for PMCC shall be provided with numerical relays
and outgoing MCCB feeder in PMCC shall be with microprocessor based
adjustable type release for over current, short circuit, instantaneous and
earth fault release. MCCBs shall be provided tripping device with inverse
time characteristic for overload protection and instantaneous
characteristics for short circuit protection & earth fault protection.
o The switch board components like circuit breakers, Main horizontal and
vertical bus bars, bus bar joints, bus bar supports etc. shall be designed
to withstand the maximum specified short circuit current for a minimum
of 1 second, unless otherwise specified.
o Provision shall be made for space heater supply of motors rated 30kW
and above.
o LV switch gear shall have metal enclosed horizontal main bus bar
compartment running at the top.
o All the incoming and outgoing cables from LV switchgear shall be from
bottom.
o Control transformer of suitable rating shall be provided for bus section in
LV switchgear for control supply. Transformer shall be rated for 100%
load requirement of entire panel.
o Thermostatically controlled space heater for each panel, maintenance
sockets outlets, panel illumination etc. shall be provided.
Page 16 of 34
RAJASTHAN
o All LV switchgear modules shall be designed to have all safety features,

not to have access to live terminals and interlocks to ensure to protect
accidental closing while racking in and door opening while in service.
• Protection relay co-ordination shall be selected such as to provide enhanced

safety to equipment and personal. Trip coils of HT and LT breakers will be
provided with trip coil monitoring relay, which will generate alarm.
• The supply voltage of the trip coils of all circuit breakers will be 110V DC
through back up battery of adequate capacity.
• Audio-visual annunciation shall be provided as part of PMCC to monitor the
switchgear and other electrical equipments.
Detailed annunciation schedule shall be based on but not limited to the

following:
1. Breaker-wise fault trip alarm

2. Auto-changeover completed
3. Auto-changeover failure
4. Trip circuit status for each breaker
5. Restricted earth fault relay.
6. Transformer trouble alarm
3.9.6 Low Voltage Bus Duct
LV bus ducts will be provided for interconnection of the 11 / 0.415 kV

transformer rated above 1000 KVA from the transformer secondary to the 415 V
LV Switchgear.
Non-phase segregated, self-cooled type, 3 phase, 4 wires with copper bus bars
with heat shrinkable PVC Sleeves.
Enclosure will be fabricated from 3 mm thick aluminum sheets for ratings above
3000 A and 2 mm thick sheet steel otherwise. The Indoor portion of the bus
duct shall be minimum IP42 and the outdoor portion of the bus duct shall be
minimum IP55. The adopter box with flexible bus bars on both ends of the bus
duct shall be designed as part of the bus duct.
Page 17 of 34
RAJASTHAN
Bus bar supporting insulator shall be made of SMC (Sheet molding compound).
Bus bar shall be supported at regular intervals on insulator made of high
dielectric strength. Non-hygroscopic, non-inflammable material with tracking
index equal to or more than that defined in standard.
Both Bus bar and supports shall be adequately sized and braced to withstand
dynamic and thermal stress expected due to the specified short time rating.
Seal-off bushings with wall frame assembly wherever the Busduct crosses wall
from outdoor to indoor.
The Rating of the bus ducts connected to breakers shall have same continuous
and short circuit rating as that of breakers.
Neoprene rubber bellows for enclosure wherever expansion joints, transformer
end, panels end are provided.
3.9.7 Automatic Power Factor Improvement System
An automatic power factor improvement system shall be considered on Busbar

of LV Switchgear. The system shall have capability to improve the overall
power factor of the grid supply to above 0.96 lag.
The power factor improvement system shall consist of:
• Capacitor banks
• Series Reactors
• Power cabinets with MCCB, busbars, feeders comprising fuses/breakers and
power contactors, control transformers, etc.
• Power factor correction relay
3.9.8 Uninterrupted Power Supply System & Batteries
Uninterruptible Power Supply system comprises the converters, static inverters,

static automatic transfer switch, battery banks, and Isolation transformer with
constant voltage transformer in bypass along with maintenance by pass switch
along with AC & DC distribution Board. AC UPS shall be compete with SNMP card
and its logic with PLC/DCS.
Page 18 of 34
RAJASTHAN
One complete Uninterruptible Power Supply System consisting of two parallel

units (for redundancy) shall be provided for powering the plant Process PLC,
FGS, instrument package equipment system, and local control panels and
second UPS shall be for Admin Block.
The inverter shall be transistorized (IGBT) type or with the latest proven
technology. All components shall be of a high quality and reliability that satisfy
the requirements of a secure AC power to vital equipment with respect to
performance.
Rectifier shall be Thyristor base three phase full wave rectification.
The system input shall be 3 phase, 415 V ±10%, 50 Hz ±1%, Output shall be 240
V ±10% AC, 1 Phase, 50 Hz ±1% & 110 V ±5% DC. Harmonic filters shall be
considered at input side, if required. System total harmonic distortion (THD)
content shall be not exceeding 5%, conforming to IEEE-519.
UPS system shall consist of two parallel units (each including a 100 % converter,
a 100 % solid state inverter,) with two nos. separate 100% sealed valve
regulated lead acid maintenance free battery bank, static automatic transfer
switch, and a constant voltage by-pass transformer with maintenance by pass
switch. Batteries to be placed in a separate well-ventilated room on racks.
Both units shall operate in parallel, each shall provide 50% load, but each shall
have 100% loading capability. Battery backup time shall be 120Minutes (2
Hours) for the complete TAS system ( 60 minutes with each battery bank) and
60Minutes (1 Hour) for Admin Block (30 minutes with each battery bank) .
Under normal condition, the converter will feed the inverter load requirement
through static switch and keep the battery under charged condition. On failure
of supply to converter, the battery will start feeding the inverter load
requirements automatically without interruption. Reverse transfer on
resumption of normal power will also be automatic.
Usually, the two UPS units will operate in parallel and share total load
requirement equally. On failure of inverter of one of the UPS the other UPS will
start feeding 100% of the load automatically without any interruption. In case
of failure of both the inverters, the bypass mains will take care of 100% of the
Page 19 of 34
RAJASTHAN
load through static bypass switch automatically without interruption. Forward

and reverse transfer of load will be done automatically and without any
interruption of supply to loads.
Each UPS shall have at least 10% spare feeders and the UPS shall be designed to
cater additional 10% for future loads.
3.9.9 Battery Charger & Batteries (DC UPS)
Battery Charger with adequate battery backup will carter the DC lighting load
and switchgear coil loads.
DC Power supply system comprises the converters, battery banks and the Main
DC Distribution Boards (Main DCDBs).
System shall supply continuous 110 V DC power to HV panel and LV switchgear

and relays. The DC power supply system shall be a fully redundant system
consisting of two units operating in parallel.
1. DC UPS rectifier shall be IGBT/Thyristor based three phase full wave

rectification
2. Each unit shall consist of one 100% Float-cum-boost charger with 100%
loading capability but operating at 50% load. Batteries shall be one common
100% sealed valve regulated lead acid maintenance free battery bank placed
in a separate well-ventilated room on racks.
3. In case of normal power failure to the float-cum-boost chargers, each
battery unit shall have sufficient capacity to supply the total 110 V DC
system loads for 60 Minutes (1 Hours.).
4. Under normal condition the Float-cum-boost charger will take care of all DC
load connected to its Main DCDB and keep the battery under charged
condition. In case of failure of normal supply, battery will feed the DC load
requirement. Retransfer of load on resumption of normal supply will be
done without interruption of supply to loads.
5. AC input to the DC system shall be 415 V ±10%, 3 phase, and 50 Hz ±1% from
the plant LV Switchgear.
6. Each battery charger and DCDB shall be sized to cater to selected battery
capacity.
Page 20 of 34
RAJASTHAN
7. Each DCDB shall have at least 10% spare for future loads. All the DB’s shall
have cable entry at the bottom.
8. The battery chargers shall have intelligent monitoring / metering system
and shall display the capacity of the battery, battery voltage, rectifier
voltage and current and events and alarms and communicable for remote
monitoring.
3.9.10 Motors
In general, three phase squirrel cage motors shall be totally enclosed, fan
cooled type and suitable for continuous outdoor use with protection IP 55.
Motor construction shall be as per IEC 60034 and have efficiency class IE2 as
indicated in IEC 60034-30-1.
The type of enclosure for motors (i.e. indoor / outdoor, industrial / non-
sparking / flameproof) shall be adequate for the application and area in which
it is to be installed.
All the motor greater than 45kW will be started with VFD. Motors greater than
18.5 kW and equal to 45 kw will be started with Soft Starter. Motors less than
and equal to 18.5 kw shall be started with DOL.
VFD Driven motors will be provided LCS with ammeter, Ramp up / down push
buttons. Soft starter motors will be provided LCS with ammeter. DOL starter
motor will be provided with LCS.
Thermistors and space heaters shall be provided for VFD and Soft starter driven
motors. Space heaters shall be provided with motors greater than 30 kW.
• Hot & Cold Start
Motors shall be designed to allow the minimum number of consecutive starts

indicated below:
Condition Min. No. of Consecutive Starts

With initial temp. of the motor 3
as ambient temp. (cold)
Page 21 of 34
RAJASTHAN
With initial temp. of the motor 2

as full load operating temp.
(hot)
Minimum locked rotor thermal withstand time at rated voltage shall be 10

seconds under cold conditions and 8 seconds under hot conditions. The hot
thermal withstand time at 100% voltage shall be at least 5 seconds more
than the starting time at 80% voltage. The starting time of the motor shall
be less than the hot thermal withstand time (time t in case of increased
safety motors) to facilitate application of conventional bimetal relays or
thermal release against locked rotor and overload conditions.
• Insulation
All motors shall have class F insulation with temperature rise limit to class B
on a maximum ambient temperature measured by resistance, in accordance
with IEC 60034-1, for all parts of the machine windings, adjusted for
ambient temperature in excess of maximum temperature in accordance
with IEC.
3.9.11 Local Control Station
All motors will be provided with local control stations each having START
(Green) / STOP (Red) pushbuttons. The stop position is stay put type with pad
lock facility.
The local control stations shall be of aluminum alloy (LM6) construction,

Enclosure of the control station shall be suitable for site conditions such as
weather proof, dust proof, flame proof (Ex-d), corrosion resistant etc. LCS
located outside shall have minimum IP-65.
Local / Remote (Hand - Auto) selector switch shall be provided in LCS.
LCS cable gland shall be provided by the vendor properly coordinated with the
cable size and shall be of high quality. Cable glands shall be brass compression
type with isometric threads.
3.9.12 Cables and Wires
Page 22 of 34
RAJASTHAN
1. LT / HT cables for the equipment are XLPE insulated with FRLS sheath. HT
cable termination will be done with heat shrinkable sleeves as per relevant
IS.
2. The station auxiliaries’ viz. pump motors will be connected by FRLS cables
and mostly in the trench to reduce fire hazards. The cable for lighting load
shall also have FRLS cable and wiring shall be carried out in concealed or
surface with heavy-duty conduits.
3. All motor cables shall be design for 15% voltage drop during starting and 5%
during running condition.
4. Cable route markers shall be installed at every 30 metres intervals all along
the cable routes and also at cable joints and locations where the direction
of cable trench changes.
5. Fire Resistant Cables cables with 29-degree Oxygen Index to be considered
inside Tank Farm Area
HV Cables:
11 KV (E) stranded Aluminum conductor and insulation screened, extruded XLPE

insulation, extruded PVC (ST – 2 type) FRLS inner sheath Galvanized Steel
armored. Extruded PVC (ST – 2 type) FRLS outer sheathed conforming to IS 7098
(part 2)
LV Cables:
1100 Volts grade XLPE insulated, stranded annealed Copper conductor up to 16

Sq.mm. Stranded Aluminum conductor from 25 Sq.mm. and above steel strip /
wire armored, extruded FRLS PVC inner sheathed and extruded PVC outer
sheathed ST1 type conforming to IS 1554 (Part 1)
Control Cables:
650 / 1100 Volts grade stranded annealed copper conductor 2.5 Sq.mm. wire
armored, PVC insulation with extruded FRLS PVC inner sheathed, extruded PVC
outer sheathed ST 1 type conforming to IS 1554 (part 1)
Type of Lugs:
Page 23 of 34
RAJASTHAN
Aluminum / tinned copper lugs
Type of cable glands:
Double compression type nickel plated brass cable glands either weather proof
or flame proof as per area classification
3.9.13 Cable Tray and Cable Laying Philosophy:
Cables will be in general laid above ground on cable trays and or directly buried
as per the convenience at each location.
Cable trays will be hot dip galvanized steel ladder type. Covers will be provided
for protection against direct sunlight, rain water and mechanical damage.
Electrical cables will not be laid in the same trench, tray or conduit with the
instrument and communication cables.
Cable trenches, Trays and PVC duct banks will have 20% of spare space for
future cables.
Multi-core HV cables will be arranged in a single layer with one cable diameter
spacing between them. Single core HV cables shall be arranged in trefoil
formation in single layer, with one trefoil cable diameter spacing between
them.
• Buildings:
In the plant buildings, sub stations, control rooms, etc. cables will generally
be laid on cable trays supported on overhead metal structures, trenches,
cable cellars, basement or along building structures, walls, ceilings, etc.
In other non-plant buildings, power cables shall be laid in FRP cable trays /
UPVC conduits. In the false ceiling area, cables shall be laid above false
ceiling and vertical dropper below the false ceiling shall be concealed in
Page 24 of 34
RAJASTHAN
wall. In the non-false ceiling area vertical trays shall be provided with
cover.
• Outdoor Underground Area:
1. In unpaved area cable will be in general directly buried on a layer of

sand at the bottom and again layer of sand will be applied according to
layer of cable and at the top of the cable also layer of sand is required
with brick/concrete slab.
2. Cable tag shall be provided in every interval of length as per the
standard and codes.
3. Cable route marker shall be provided separately for HT and LT at every
bend and at every interval of length as per standard and codes.
4. At every ERC & IRC, cable shall be cross under the hume pipe with
suitable size of hume pipe and with 20% spare area for future.
5. At both end side of the hume pipe cable crossing (ERC&IRC), box culvert
shall be made of proper man moment and will be cover with concert
slab.
6. Minimum 300 mm gap shall be maintained throughout the length
between Electrical/power cable and Instrumentation cable.
In paved areas cables will be laid in concrete trenches filled with sand and
covered with concrete slab or will be laid in PVC pipe / conduits in concrete
duct bank.
For road crossing cables will be laid in PVC sleeves in concrete duct bank.
Cables will be identified with corrosion resistant cable strips, showing the
cable numbers, every 10m and at both side of road crossing, where ever
transition from underground to above ground and vice versa. A warning
system of plastic strips will be provided above the top level of all cables run
in trenches. For unpaved areas cable trench markers will be provided at
grade over the cable trenches to show clearly the extent and the run of the
cables.
• Outdoor Aboveground Area:
Page 25 of 34
RAJASTHAN
Cables will be laid on hot-dip galvanized cable trays (ladder type) or in

galvanized steel conduits.
Cable trays will be bolted to steel structures and walls or to adequately

sized tray supports and shall be routed on dedicated tiers of the pipe racks
and on sleepers to equipment.
• Cable Tray:
The trays shall not show deflection / bend / deformation after laying of
cables.
For terminal area, all cable trays and accessories shall be prefabricated, 2
mm thick hot dipped Galvanized Iron ladder trays with rungs at 300 mm
interval. Maximum width of trays will be 800 mm. Collar height will be 200
mm. The standard length of single cable tray shall be 3000 mm & 6000 mm.
For tray system design, in addition to self-load and wind forces, following
guidelines for design shall be considered.
Maximum Support span - 2500 mm for horizontal & 1500 mm for vertical tray
supports. Nuts, bolts and any other hardware to be used in cable trays shall
be stainless steel / cadmium coated. Fastening of cables in cable ways shall
be done with UV resistant (Black) PVC cable ties.
Cable trays used in the outdoor areas shall be provided with covers on top
layer, for protection from rain water & mechanical damage.
A horizontal clearance of 300 mm shall be maintained between

instrumentation, signal cable and electrical power / control cables.
For all cable trays stacked vertically, there shall be a minimum vertical
working clearance of 300 mm from the top of the lower tray to the bottom
of the tray above.
The trays shall be supported at appropriate intervals both vertically and

horizontally, as required by the cable tray manufacturer’s design criteria
3.9.14 Lighting System
Page 26 of 34
RAJASTHAN
1. LED shall be used for lighting.

2. Normal and emergency lighting system shall be on 415/ 240V AC supply,
whereas critical lighting will be 110V DC based in critical areas like Sub-
Station, Control Room, Security cabin(s), Admin & Control Room Building,
Main Security, Security cabins, Fire Water pump house, Electrical room and
DG shed.
3. Under normal operation, both emergency and normal lighting shall be fed by
normal power source. On failure of normal supply, emergency lighting shall
be transferred to emergency source (DG set).
4. Light fittings in the zone’1’ of plant area are flameproof Led with adequate
light intensity as per IS OISD 244.
5. The plant boundaries, Gate Light, DP structure, metering area and street
lighting, and security light will be provided with normal light LEDs.
6. Flameproof LED lamps shall be installed in hazardous areas.
7. High mast provided in the plant shall be of 30 Mtr. In total 9 Nos of high
mast to be designed for the plant. 4 Nos of High mast shall be fed from
Emergency Board. All pillar panels shall be flameproof.
8. Few Number of street lighting fixtures shall be fed from Emergency board.
9. Pole height shall be 11 Mtr and distance between 2 poles shall be 30 Mtr.
10. Lighting system design shall be based on illumination levels as specified
below as per OISD 244:
Area LUX
Main Roads (Gate entry/exit, roads around TT gantry) and tank farm 20
Secondary roads (along storage tanks & periphery etc) 10
Pump house/ Compressor/ Dosing Sheds/ Fire Pump House 100
Main operation platforms and access stairs, TT & TW Gantry, tank manifold 60
Ordinary platforms 20
OWS/ ETP Area/ Pipe racks 60
Substation/ Switchgear room/ Battery room 150
UPS / Operator room 300
Cable cellar 70
Battery room, Charger, UPS room 150
Control room, Laboratory 400
Transformer Yard/ HT Di Pole Area/ Metering Area (Outdoor) 100
Switchyard 20
Warehouse 100
Office (Admin Building) 300
Page 27 of 34
RAJASTHAN
Stairs 50
Security cabin/Watch tower 100
Corridors 70
Truck parking area 20
TLF gantry, Tank Manifold area 60
3.9.15 Earthing & Lightning System
1. Electrical earthing pits will be designed as per site available data and OISD
244 standard. The pits will be interconnected through mesh. in a ring
manner. The total earth resistance at any point of the earthing system for
substations and main plant buildings will not be more than one ohm.
However, at other points the value will not exceed 3 Ohms.
2. Lightning protection will be provided as per IS 2309.
3. All the equipment will have earthing in two diverse locations to avoid
common cause failure. The earthing conductor will be selected from
standard sizes. Insulating Rubber mat of appropriate voltage rating will be
provided for personnel safety.
4. Neutral of transformer and DG set shall be connected directly to two
distinct earth pit independent of any earth grid. The body of transformer
and DG set shall be connected at two points to earthing grid.
5. All the electrical equipments operating above 250 volts shall have two
separate connections to the earth.
6. For the gantry 6 mm Sq. braided copper wire with one end firmly bolted to
the Loading Unloading Arm / hoses and the other end provided with G.I /
Copper / Non-corrodible metal crocodile clips are to be used, the crocodile
clips being attached to the tank-truck under loading or discharging. (For
External Bonding of Loading unloading arms / hose with the Tank Truck).
7. Product Storage Tanks etc shall have two separate and distinct connections.
Each connection will be made to the respective earth pit directly. There
after these earth pits should be inter-connected to form a dedicated grid for
Tank Farm. The number of earth pits / connections to be increased for large
tanks so that the distance between the connections does not exceed 30-
meter on the tank perimeter.
8. The resistance value of an earthing system to general mass of the earth
should not exceed.
Page 28 of 34
RAJASTHAN
4 Ohms for electrical systems and metallic structures

7 Ohms for storage tanks
1 Ohm for main earth grid, and bonding connections between joints in pipelines and associated
facilities.
2 Ohms for each electrode to the general mass of the earth.
9. Earthing system shall be designed for the following:
i. System neutral earthing.

ii. Protective Equipment Earthing for personnel safety.
iii. Protection against Static discharges.
iv. Lightening Protection
v. Earthing for Data Processing system
10. Minimum Permissible Sizes of the Earthing Conductors:
Size of the conductor shall be selected based the fault current that is
required to be dissipated during emergencies.
Equipment Size of the conductor

Main Earthing Grid 50 mm X 6 mm GI strip
Lightning Arrester of the 2/4 Pole Structure 40 mm X 6 mm GI strip
2/4 Pole structure / Sub-Station equipments / VCB etc. 40 mm X 5 mm GI strip
Fence of the 2/4 pole structure / transformer yard 25 mm X 3 mm GI strip
Power Transformer Neutral 50 mm X 6 mm GI strip
Power Transformer Body 40 mm X 6 mm GI strip
Fire Water Pump House 25 mm X 6 mm GI strip
Building / Structure Columns 40 mm X 5 mm GI strip
Storage Tanks 40 mm X 5 mm GI strip
Push Button Stations No 8 SWG Solid GI wire
Street Light Poles 10 mm (3/8”) GI Wire rope
Small Equipment & Instruments No 8 SWG Solid GI wire
Bonding of Pipes 25 Sq MM Copper strip / Braided flexible
cable
Motors up to 3.7 KW No 8 SWG Solid GI wire
Motors above 3.7 KW up to 30 KW 10 mm (3/8”) GI Wire rope
Static Earth at Tanker / Wagon loading Unloading gantry 40 mm X 6 mm GI strip
Flexible cable for Static Earth 10 Sq MM Copper flexible with lugs at one end
Page 29 of 34
RAJASTHAN
and crocodile clip other end
11. No of earth pits:
Equipment No
Earthing for LA 2 No independent
For DI / Four Pole Structure, GO, Fence 2 No (All metal bodies connected)
Neutral of the transformer 2 No independent
Neutral of the D G Set 2 No independent for each DG set
Body of DG set / Control panel for DG set 2 No
Sub-station – PMCC room 4 No
Fire Pump House 2 No
Air Compressor House 2 No
All structures Shed of Pump House / Fire Engine / 2 No Each Structures
Loading Unloading Gantry / Air Compressor / Engg
Store etc
Static Earh for Loading Unloading Gantry (Tank / 2 No earth pits for 8-bay gantry
Truck)
Static Earh for Loading Unloading Gantry (Tank Min. 4 nos. earth pits for each (single / two spur)
Wagon) gantry. For rail track as per railway norms.
All 3 Phase Motors / FLP lights in each shed 2 No
High Mast Tower (HMT) 2 No for each HMT
Admin Blocks 2 No
Data Processing One for Metallic body parts of equipments and one for
neutral of Isolation transformer
Inspection Platform / Watch Tower / Weigh Bridge 1 No each
Water storage Tanks (Fire Water Tank) 2 per tank
Product Storage Tank Min 2 No and further as defined in Cl.B of OISD 244
3.9.16 Communication System
The system shall consist of distributed amplifier type field call stations, paging
loudspeakers, back-up power system (UPS) and necessary software. The integration of
Field call stations through page controller facilities individual and selective paging
while ensuring clarity and audibility at very high ambient noise areas.
Communication Systems consist of P.A System with master control station,

EPABX/Telephone System with master control station, Walkie Talkie (UHF) with base
station, Master control station shall interface with PA and EPABX system.
1) The System shall have minimum 2-Channel Page & Party configuration with various
area-wise zone stations forming functional groups comprising Field Call Stations and
Page 30 of 34
RAJASTHAN
Loudspeakers. The PA system shall be IP based Paging System. The field call stations
shall be IP addressable.
2) The system shall be based on distributed network, the system shall provide coverage
to various locations within the plant.
3) The system will be installed in an industrial environment. Equipment in some areas

will be subject to vibration, dust, oil/water vapours as prevalent in Oil & Gas plant.
4) Nos. of PA system, EPABX and Walkie- talkie shall be provided in all required
facilities/location as per OISD & Layout.
5) Communication feasibility between fields shall be stations100% Non-Blocking Type.
The Digital Plant Communication System has the following features:
1) 2 way system
2) Selective calling
3) Zone/Facilities wise paging system, Multi zone/all zone paging.
4) Distributed Amplifier type.
5) Gong tone precedes all paging announcement.
6) While making paging announcement the loudspeaker (LS) connected to the station is
muted automatically to avoid feedback.
7) More than two persons can join the conversation having conference.
8) The LS is also free to receive page calls during party conversation and conference.
3.9.17 Socket Outlets
Enclosure of the convenience receptacle shall be suitable for site conditions

such as weather proof, dust proof, flame proof, corrosion resistant etc.
Necessary interlocks and earthing facilities shall be provided as per safety
requirements. These receptacles shall be provided at selected locations in the
plant.
For office buildings, 240 V, 13 A /15 A twin socket outlet will be provided for
PC, monitors and printer from UPS supply. 240 V, 13 A / 15 A, socket outlets
will be provided in each room from normal supply for general purpose. In halls,
one socket for each 10m of the hall periphery will be provided.
Apart from the above power outlets will also be provided for Pantry appliances,
water coolers, refrigerators and Lab.
Page 31 of 34
RAJASTHAN
Welding outlets (415 V - 3 ph – 63 A) and convenience outlets(230V – 1 Ph –

15A) will be provided at suitable location near major equipment like Pump
house, Process area etc. to provide power for portable equipment at inspection
and maintenance point.
Substation will have industrial type receptacle while Control Room , Office
rooms will have decorative type receptacles, with ELCB (sensitivity range 30 mA
– 300 mA) controlled socket, 240 V, 1 phase, Neutral & Earthing,13 A /1 5 A, 3
Pin.
All receptacles shall have looping facility & shall have cable entry at the
bottom.
4.0 ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION / SWITCHGEAR BUILDING
The substation building will consist of switchgear room and transformer bay. The
switchgear room will house LV Switchboard, MCC, auxiliary switchboards, UPS &
battery bank and Distribution Boards.
The sub-station shall be located in a safe area close to the load center. Proper access
shall be provided / ensured for operation / maintenance of indoor and outdoor
equipment. Layout of the substation shall comply with the requirements of the latest
versions of relevant IEC standards or equivalent.
The Substation shall have a minimum two access points, one entry suitably sized to
accommodate equipment / normal entry and the second for emergency exit. Both
exits shall be fitted with a proprietary panic bar. The doors will be equipped with
anti-panic handles and will open outward.
The switchgear room floor will be elevated such that the floor level of the building
will be 1.8 meter above the site FGL (ground level) to allow trenches below
switchboards for cabling.
The Substation shall be sized to accommodate all electrical loads identified and to
give adequate clearances between items of equipment for ease of maintenance.
Space for two adjacent panels for future extension on each side of each switchboard
shall be provided.
Page 32 of 34
RAJASTHAN
The Substation shall be designed for mounting on raised columns to provide access for
the installation of cables to the equipment. All switchgear panels shall be arranged to
permit all cables to enter from below.
Transformer bay & neutral grounding resistor (if any) will be outdoor type separated
from substation building with firewalls Fence & gate.
Sub-station wall adjacent to the transformer bays shall be 355 mm thick (inclusive of
plastering) in case of brick construction or 230 mm thick in case of RCC construction.
Substation shall be provided with shutter for transformer in-out for maintenance
purpose.
Batteries of UPS and DC Power Supply System shall be located separately in well
ventilated room provided with an exhaust fan and heat detectors. All fittings inside
the battery room i.e. Light fittings, exhaust fan, switch & socket, DB, etc. shall be
flameproof.
The substation building shall be sized to maintain adequate clearances between

equipment for ease of maintenance. The following minimum clearances around
various equipment shall be maintained:
S. No. Location Clearance

1 Front clearance for HV switchboard 2500 mm
2 Rear clearance for HV switchboard 1500 mm
3 All around clearance for transformer 1000 mm
4 Diesel generator set to wall 1500 mm
5 Clear height of bus-duct from FFL 3000 mm
6 Rear clearance for LV switchboard which require Maintenance from 1000 mm
rear
7 Rear clearance for panels having maintenance access from front only Less 200 mm or more than
750 mm
8 Front-Front of 2 switchboards facing each other 2000 mm
9 Side clearance between switch boards or from nearest obstruction 1000 mm after considering
space for future panels
10 Minimum substation building free height 3500 mm
The substation shall be provided with portable fire extinguishers, safety signs, First-
aid box etc. in accordance with international safety requirements
Page 33 of 34
RAJASTHAN
Installation of all electrical equipment shall be carried out with high standard or
workmanship, neat routing / layouts, and clearances / access as per recommendations
by the manufacturers, standards and good engineering practices.
After installation the system equipment shall be tested for pre-commissioning test as
recommended by the manufacturers & established practices. Further, commissioning
tests shall be conducted to prove agreed performance within specified tolerance,
temperature rise, noise and vibration.
Page 34 of 34
ELECTRICAL LOAD CALCULATION
REV. 01
Project No. Unit

Location Pali, Rajasthan Document No. NAYA-PALI-EL-CA-002
REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0 1 2
Date 19/12/2018 14/03/2019 27/04/2019
Prepared By KB KB KB
Checked By PBS PBS PBS
Approved By SKJ SKJ SKJ
Client Review
REV : 01 Page 1 of 5
NOTES
GENERAL NOTES
1 This load list is based upon preliminary data given in process equipment list & shall be confirmed after receipt of vendor data
2 Rating considered for Motor / Non-Motor feeder in the load list shall be re-verified during detailed design stage.
3 All LV Motors are considered as 4 pole motor
4 Values of efficiency & power factor of motor are considered from Siemens Catalogue for Energy Efficient (EFF) Motors.
DUTY TYPES
E : Continuous Operation" all loads that may continuously be required for normal operation, including lighting and workshops.
F : Intermittent Operation" the loads required for intermediate pumping storage, loading etc., and all electrical spares of electrically driven units.
This Load may not be required to run continuously but sometimes are required to run for process purpose or maintenance purpose.
G : Standby loads" : These loads do not work in the normal situation and they are known as a backup, they run or come into the circuit only when the
running motor stops.
TOTAL PLANT CONNECTED LOAD=CONT. LOAD + INTERM. LOAD + STANDBY LOAD

TOTAL PLANT RUNNING / OPERATING LOAD=CONT. LOAD + 30% INTERM. LOAD
TOTAL PLANT PEAK LOAD=CONT. LOAD + 30% OF INTERM. LOAD + 10% OF STANDBY LOAD OR LARGEST STANDBY RATING
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-EL-CA-002 Rev: 01 Page 2 of 5

LOAD LIST
ELECTRICAL LOAD LIST - 415V USERS
LOAD SUMMARY -- LOW VOLTAGE (415 V)
Equipment Tag. No. Description Load Type Consumed Load Remarks
Load
Full Load
Full Load
Full Load
Load (E)
Load Factor
Sr. No.
Absorbed
Standard
Tentative
Equipment
motor rating
Rating
Equipment
Type
Current
Efficiency at
Power
Factor at
Normal (N) /
Emergency
Intermittent
Motor /
Standby
Working
kW = A/C kVAR = kW × tanf
Continuous Intermittent Stand-by

A B C D E F G
kW KW kW AMP % % cosf kW kVAR kW kVAR kW kVAR
1 PM-100A Motor for Tank Wagon Unloading Pump1

108.00 118.80 120.00 VFD 205.43 0.90 94.5 0.86 N § 114.29 67.82
for MS
2 PM-100B Motor for Tank Wagon Unloading Pump2
108.00 118.80 120.00 VFD 205.43 0.90 94.5 0.86 N § 114.29 67.82
for MS
3 PM-100C Motor for MS Stripper pump
20.00 25.00 30.00 Soft Starter 67.80 0.67 76.0 0.81 N § 26.32 19.06
4 PM- 101A Motor for Tank Loading pump A for MS

35.00 40.25 45.00 Soft Starter 78.36 0.78 94.0 0.85 N § 37.24 23.08
5 PM- 101B Motor for Tank Loading pump B for MS

35.00 40.25 45.00 Soft Starter 78.36 0.78 94.0 0.85 N § 37.24 23.08
6 PM- 101C Motor for Tank Loading pump C for MS

35.00 40.25 45.00 Soft Starter 78.36 0.78 94.0 0.85 N § 37.24 23.08
7 PM-101D Motor for Submersible pump for MS

5.00 6.25 7.50 DOL 12.58 0.67 95.3 0.87 N § 5.25 2.98
8 PM-200A Motor for Tank Wagon Unloading PumpA

123.00 135.30 150.00 VFD 256.78 0.82 94.5 0.86 N § 130.16 77.24
for HSD
9 PM-200B Motor for Tank Wagon Unloading PumpB
123.00 135.30 150.00 VFD 256.78 0.82 94.5 0.86 N § 130.16 77.24
for HSD
10 PM-200C Motor for Tank Wagon Unloading PumpC
123.00 135.30 150.00 VFD 256.78 0.82 94.5 0.86 N § 130.16 77.24
for HSD
11 PM-200D Motor for HSD Stripper puimp
23.00 26.45 30.00 Soft Starter 67.80 0.77 76.0 0.81 N § 30.27 21.92
12 PM- 201A Motor for Tank Loading pump A for HSD

80.00 88.00 90.00 Soft Starter 154.07 0.89 94.5 0.86 N § 84.66 50.24
13 PM- 201B Motor for Tank Loading pump B for HSD

80.00 88.00 90.00 Soft Starter 154.07 0.89 94.5 0.86 N § 84.66 50.24
14 PM-201C Motor for Tank Loading pump C for HSD

80.00 88.00 90.00 Soft Starter 154.07 0.89 94.5 0.86 N § 84.66 50.24
15 PM-201D Motor for Submersible pump for HSD

6.00 7.50 7.50 DOL 12.30 0.80 96.4 0.88 N § 6.23 3.37
16 PM-201E Motor for HSD Vertical pump for HSD

0.15 0.19 0.55 DOL 0.90 0.27 96.4 0.88 N § 0.16 0.09
17 PM-300A Motor for Ethanol Submersible pump A

6.00 7.50 7.50 DOL 12.30 0.80 96.4 0.88 N § 6.23 3.37
18 PM-300B Motor for Ethanol Submersible pump B

6.00 7.50 7.50 DOL 12.30 0.80 96.4 0.88 N § 6.23 3.37
19 PM-300C Motor for Ethanol Submersible pump C

6.00 7.50 7.50 DOL 12.30 0.80 96.4 0.88 N § 6.23 3.37
20 PM-300D Motor for Ethanol Submersible pump D

6.00 7.50 7.50 DOL 12.30 0.80 96.4 0.88 N § 6.23 3.37
21 PM-300E Motor for Ethanol Submersible pump E

6.00 7.50 7.50 DOL 12.30 0.80 96.4 0.88 N § 6.23 3.37
22 PM-400A Motor for Slop Collection Submersible

1.00 1.25 1.50 DOL 3.11 0.67 79.0 0.85 N § 1.27 0.79
Pump
23 PM-501A Motor for Jockey Pump A
20.00 25.00 30.00 Soft Starter 59.92 0.67 86.0 0.81 E § 23.26 16.84
24 PM-501B Motor for Jockey Pump B

20.00 25.00 30.00 Soft Starter 59.92 0.67 86.0 0.81 E § 23.26 16.84
25 PM-801A Motor for Borewell Submersible Pump A

9.00 11.25 15.00 DOL 29.25 0.60 87.0 0.82 E . § 10.35 7.23
26 PM-801B Motor for Borewell Submersible Pump B

9.00 11.25 15.00 DOL 29.25 0.60 87.0 0.82 E § 10.35 7.23
27 PM-801C Motor for Borewell Submersible Pump C

9.00 11.25 15.00 DOL 29.25 0.60 87.0 0.82 E § 10.35 7.23
28 PM-802A Motor for Fire Water Transfer pump A

1.00 1.25 2.20 DOL 4.24 0.45 85.0 0.85 E § 1.18 0.74
29 PM-802B Motor for Fire Water Transfer pump B

1.00 1.25 2.20 DOL 4.24 0.45 85.0 0.85 E § 1.18 0.74
30 PM-803A Motor for Potable Water Transfer Pump A

1.20 1.50 2.20 DOL 4.29 0.55 87.0 0.82 N § 1.38 0.97
31 PM-803B Motor for Potable Water Transfer Pump B

1.20 1.50 2.20 DOL 4.29 0.55 87.0 0.82 N § 1.38 0.97
32 PM-807A Motor for Raw Water Transfer Pump A

4.00 5.00 5.50 DOL 10.59 0.73 85.0 0.85 N § 4.71 2.92
33 PM-807B Motor for Raw Water Transfer Pump B

4.00 5.00 5.50 DOL 10.59 0.73 85.0 0.85 N § 4.71 2.92
34 PM-912A Motor for Calibration Tower Pump A

6.00 7.50 7.50 DOL 14.63 0.80 87.0 0.82 N . § 6.90 4.82
35 PM-912B Motor for Calibration Tower Pump B

6.00 7.50 7.50 DOL 14.63 0.80 87.0 0.82 N § 6.90 4.82
36 PM-902 Motor for Foam pump B

2.00 2.50 3.00 DOL 5.78 0.67 85.0 0.85 E § 2.36 1.47

LOAD LIST
ELECTRICAL LOAD LIST - 415V USERS
LOAD SUMMARY -- LOW VOLTAGE (415 V)
Equipment Tag. No. Description Load Type Consumed Load Remarks
Load
Full Load
Full Load
Full Load
Load (E)
Load Factor
Sr. No.
Absorbed
Standard
Tentative
Equipment
motor rating
Rating
Equipment
Type
Current
Efficiency at
Power
Factor at
Normal (N) /
Emergency
Intermittent
Motor /
Standby
Working
kW = A/C kVAR = kW × tanf
Continuous Intermittent Stand-by

A B C D E F G
kW KW kW AMP % % cosf kW kVAR kW kVAR kW kVAR
37 PNL-500A Fire Engine Panel for Pump 500A

1.10 1.10 1.10 FEEDER 1.74 1.00 96.4 0.88 E § 1.15 0.63
38 PNL-500B Fire Engine Panel for Pump 500B

1.10 1.10 1.10 FEEDER 1.74 1.00 96.4 0.88 E § 1.15 0.63
39 PNL-500C Fire Engine Panel for Pump 500C

1.10 1.10 1.10 FEEDER 1.74 1.00 96.4 0.88 E § 1.15 0.63
40 PNL-VRU Panel for VRU package

50.00 50.00 50.00 FEEDER 79.05 1.00 96.4 0.88 N § 51.87 28.00
41 PNL-OWS Panel for OWS package

30.00 30.00 30.00 FEEDER 47.43 1.00 96.4 0.88 N § 31.13 16.81
42 PNL-AIR COMP1 Motor For Air Compessor Package 1

12.00 15.00 15.00 FEEDER 28.88 0.80 85.0 0.85 E § 14.12 8.76
43 PNL-AIR COMP2 Motor For Air Compessor Package 2

12.00 15.00 15.00 FEEDER 28.88 0.80 85.0 0.85 E § 14.12 8.76
44 Admin UPS UPS Load Admin

12.00 12.00 12.00 FEEDER 19.64 1.00 85.0 0.85 E § 14.12 8.76
45 TAS UPS UPS Load Control (TAS)

32.00 32.00 32.00 FEEDER 52.38 1.00 85.0 0.85 E § 37.65 23.34
46 HVAC HVAC Load Admin Building ( Including

35.00 35.00 35.00 FEEDER 57.29 1.00 85.0 0.85 N § 41.18 25.53
Control Room)
47
Normal Lighting DB 110.00 110.00 110.00 FEEDER 153.04 1.00 85.0 1.00 N § 129.42
48
Emergency Lighting Load 30.00 30.00 30.00 FEEDER 41.74 1.00 85.0 1.00 E § 35.30
49
Critical Lighting Load 4.00 4.00 4.00 FEEDER 5.56 1.00 85.0 1.00 N § 4.71
50
Normal Aux DB 125.00 125.00 125.00 FEEDER 204.60 1.00 85.0 0.85 N § 147.06 91.14
51
MOVs 25.00 25.00 25.00 FEEDER 40.92 1.00 85.0 0.85 N § 29.42 18.24
52 Control panel of RHVLR-1

2.20 2.20 2.20 FEEDER 3.60 1.00 85.0 0.85 E § 2.59 1.61
53 Control panel of RHVLR-2

2.20 2.20 2.20 FEEDER 3.60 1.00 85.0 0.85 E § 2.59 1.61
54 DC UPS Load
4.00 4.00 4.00 FEEDER 6.55 1.00 85.0 0.85 E § 4.71 2.92

TRANFO SIZING CALCULATION
TRANSFORMER SIZING CALCULATION

PROCEDURE
The sizing of the transformer is done based on the following conditions.
a) Peak Load
b) Calculation for Transformer capacity with 10% design margin
c) Actual load
A) CALCULATION OF TOTAL PEAK LOAD:

Total connected load as per load summary given below:
[Refer ELECTRICAL LOAD SUMMARY Annexure for details ]
Continuous Load (E) Intermittent Load (F) Standby Load (G)

Total KW 915.17 Total KW 370.85 Total KW 471.10
Total KVAR 443.69 Total KVAR 230.11 Total KVAR 291.69
Total KVA 1017.06 Total KVA 436.45 Total KVA 554.10
Single largest 31.13 Single largest "standby" load : 130.16
"intermittent" load: 16.81 77.24
PEAK LOAD CALCULATION
Coincidence factor: X = 100 %

Y = 30 %
Z = 10 %
Maximum (Peak) Load = X% of E + (Y% of F or single largest intermittent load, whichever is higher)
+ (Z% of G or single largest standby load, whichever is higher)
Maximum (Peak) KW = 100% × 915.17 + (30% × 370.85 or 31.13 whichever is higher)

+ (10% × 471.1 or 130.16 whichever is higher)
= 915.17 + 111.26 + 130.16
= 1156.59 kW
Maximum (Peak) KVAR = 100% × 443.69 + (30% × 230.11 or 16.81 whichever is higher)
+ (10% × 291.69 or 77.24 whichever is higher)
= 443.69 + 69.04 + 77.24
= 589.97 kVAR
Maximum (Peak) KVA = SQRT (1156.59 ² + 589.97 ² )

= 1298.37 kVA
Transformer Capacity (in kVA) = Maximum Peak Load X 1.20 (20% Design margin )
Considering 1 No. Transformer = 1558.04 kVA
So, we select standard transformer rating of = 1600 kVA
C) VOLTAGE REGULATION OF TRANSFORMER AT FULL LOAD:
Fault current at LV level = 50 kA at 415 V

or 35.94 MVA
Considering no paralleling, % impedence to be restricted = 1600/(35.939*1000)

to minimum value = 0.0445 P.U
= 4.45%
% Impedance to be considered for transformer regulation = 6 (As per IS 2026-5)

Total % Impedance with 10% tolerance = 6.60
Running current Ir= I load = kVA / (1.732 * kVb) = 2167.62 Amps
Transformer secondary rated current = I rated = 2225.99 Amps

( kVAt / 1.732 * kVb )
PF = cosφ = 0.900 sinφ = 0.44
Voltage regulation of transformer in % Regulation ( P.U ) = [ Z sinφ + {(Z cosφ ) 2 / 200}] * (I load / I rated)
= 2.98 %
This is within allowable limit of 5% voltage drop at transformer end during running.
D) TRANSFORMER REGULATION AT STARTING OF BIGGEST MOTOR:
(a) Running load ( kWr) = 1006.59

(b) Biggest motor ( kWs ) = 150.00 kW of biggest motor
pf 0.86
( c ) Running pf ( pfr ) = 0.90
( d ) Starting pf ( pfs ) = 0.2 assumed
( e ) Running pf for highest rated motor ( pfm ) = 0.86
( f ) Running current ( Ir ) = kWr / 1.732 * kVb * Pfr )

= 1556.33 A at running pf= 0.90 sinφ = 0.44
= 1400.41 679.0 j
( g ) Starting current ( Is ) for highest load = (kWs / 1.732 * kVb * Pfr )

= 1043.43 A at starting pf= 0.2 sinφ = 0.98
= 208.69 1022.4 j
( h ) Total load current ( I load ) = Ir + Is

= 1609.10 1701.3 j
= 2341.73 A at pf 0.69
( i ) cos φ = 0.69
sin φ = 0.73
Z = 6.6
( j ) Transformer voltage regulation ( at starting of = [ Z sinφ + {(Z cosφ ) 2 / 200}] * (I load / I rated)
biggest motor ) = 5.15 %
This is within allowable limit of 10% voltage drop at transformer end during starting.

RAJASTHAN
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-EL-CA-006 Rev: 1 Date: 11-03-2019
EARTHING SIZING CALCULATION

Page 1 of 5
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 SCOPE
2.0 REFERENCES
3.0 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY SYSTEM
4.0 BASIS FOR CALCULATIONS
5.0 EARTHING PROTECTION CALCULATIONS
Page 2 of 5
RAJASTHAN
EARTHING SIZING CALCULATION
1.0 SCOPE
The intent of this document is to perform the Earthing sizing calculation for NAYARA
ENERGY-PALI Plant.
2.0 REFERENCES
1. PLOT PLAN
2. ELECTRICAL DESIGN BASIS
Distribution Supply : 415 V, 3-Phase Supply 240 V, 1-Phase Supply

Design Fault Level: 415 V System : 50 KA for 1 sec.
Soil Resistivity : 176 Ohm-m (From Earth Resistivity Test

Report)
Depth of Laying of Main Grid : 3000mm below ground
Main Earth Grid Material : GI strip
Main Earth Electrode : 20mm dia, 3000 mm long GI Pipe
Page 3 of 5
RAJASTHAN
5.0 EARTHING PROTECTION CALCULATIONS
1. The minimum cross-sectional area of earthing conductor based on following

formula
S= I √t Sq.mm
k
I = 50000 A (short circuit current for 415 V system)

t = 1 sec
k = 80 (Protective conductor dependent factor)
S = 625 sq. mm.
Hence considering the above, the main earth conductor for plant is selected as 1
Run of 75 x 10 sq.mm GI strip considering 10% corrosion allowance.
2. CALCULATION OF MAIN GRID RESISTANCE
a. Calculation of Pipe Electrode Resistance
The resistance of pipe electrode is given by
RP = 100ρ loge 2l ohms

2πl d
Where
RP = Resistance of One Pipe Electrode

ρ = 176 Ohm-M (Soil Resistivity (From Earth Resistivity Test Report)
l = 300 cm (Length of pipe electrode (cm))
d = 2 cm (Diameter of pipe electrode (in cm))
RP = 53.25 ohms
Page 4 of 5
RAJASTHAN
Calculation of Total resistance of pipe electrode (RE)
RE = RP
n
RP = 53.25 ohms
n = 10 Nos (Number of Earth pits)
RE = 5.32 ohms
b. Calculation of strip Electrode Resistance
The resistance of strip electrode is given by
RS = 100ρ loge 4l ohms

2πl t
Where
ρ = 176 Ohm-M (Soil Resistivity (ohm-m))
l = 220500 cm (Length of strip (cm) in the plant)
t = 7.5 cm (Width of Main Earth Strip (cm))
RS = 0.148 ohms
c. Calculation of Total Earth Resistance
RT = RE * RS
RE + RS
RE = 5.32 ohms
RS = 0.148 ohms
RT = 0.143 ohms
RT < 1 ohms
Conclusion
The overall Electrical Earth Grid resistance is within permissible limit of 1-ohms.
Page 5 of 5
RAJASTHAN
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-EL-LI-007 Rev: 1 Date: 14-03-2019
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LIST

Page 1 of 4
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 INTR0DUCTION
2.0 SCOPE
Page 2 of 4
RAJASTHAN
1.0 INTRODUCTION

Chotila, Dist: Pali. The product will be received by Tank wagon ex Essar Oil’s Vadinar
delivered by Road to Dealers and bulk Customers / Consumers. Approx. 60 acres of
land is acquired for setting up of this depot.The depot shall be designed & constructed
for full compliance with OISD 117,118, 244 & other statutory codes & standards as
applicable.
4000 KL.
2.0 SCOPE
The intent of this document is to List all the Electrical Items required for the Project
S. No. Description Qty

1 Transformer (1600 KVA,11 Kv / 415 V, 3 ph, 50 Hz) 1
2 DG set (1010 KVA, 415 V, 3 ph, 50 Hz) 2
3 DG Synchronization Panel 1
4 DG set (380 KVA,415V,3ph,50Hz) 1
5 DG AMF Panel (800 A, 415 V, 3 ph, 50 Hz) 1
6 LV Busduct (3200A, 415V,3ph, 50Hz) 1
7 PMCC (3200 A, 415 V, 3 ph, 50 Hz) 1
8 Emergency switchboard (800A, 415V, 3ph 50Hz) 1
9 Automatic Power Factor Controller 1
10 Normal Lighting Transformer 1
11 Emergency Lighting Transformer 1
12 Main Lighting Distribution Board 1
13 Emergency Lighting Distribution Board 1
14 Normal Aux Power Distribution Board 1
15 Lighting Distribution Boards (Safe & Hazard) 24
16 Yard Lighting Distribution Board 2
17 Sub Distribution Boards (Safe & Hazard) 12
Page 3 of 4
RAJASTHAN
S. No. Description Qty

18 AC UPS with Battery and ACDB for TAS 1
19 Fire Water Panel 1
20 Motors (Safe & Hazard) Lot
21 Lighting Fixtures LED (Safe & Hazard) Lot
22 High Mast 11
23 Lighting Poles Lot
24 Cable Trays Lot
25 Cables (HV & LV) Lot
26 Earthing Materials (Earthing Pit, Bus, Strips, Cables, etc.) Lot
27 Cable Termination (Safe & Hazard gland; Lugs) Lot
28 DC UPS with Battery and DCDB 1

29 2 Pole Structure 1
30 VCB (Indoor) 1
31 AC UPS with Battery and ACDB for Admin 1
Page 4 of 4
RAJASTHAN
LIGHTNING PROTECTION CALCULATION

Page 1 of 4
RAJASTHAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sr. No. Description

1.0 SCOPE
2.0 REFERENCES
5.0 LIGHNING PROTECTION CALCULATIONS
6.0 CONCLUSION
Page 2 of 4
RAJASTHAN
LIGHTNING PROTECTION CALCULATION
1.0 SCOPE
The intent of this document is to perform the Lightning Protection calculation for
NAYARA ENERGY-PALI Plant.
2.0 REFERENCES
1. NAYA-PALI-PR-LY-002 PLOT PLAN

2. NAYA-PALI-EL-DB-001 ELECTRICAL DESIGN BASIS
3. NAYA-PALI-CV-GA-006 ADMIN BUILDING
4. NAYA-PALI-CV-GA-008 TT CREW REST ROOM
5. NAYA-PALI-CV-GA-009 S&D ROOM
6. NAYA-PALI-CV-GA-010 CANTEEN & AMENITY BUILDING
7. NAYA-PALI-CV-GA-010 MCC BUILDING
Distribution Supply : 415 V, 3-Phase Supply 240 V, 1-Phase Supply

Design Fault Level: 415 V System : 50 KA for 1 sec.
IS 2309 IS for Protection of Buildings and Allied

Structure Against Lightning
P : Probable No of Strikes(risk) to the structure
per year
Ng : No of lightning flashes per km2 per year

Ng : 1.9 for Pali
Ac : Collection Area in mm2
(LXW)+2(LXH)+2(WXH)+πh2
WEIGHING FACTORS :
A (Use of structure) : 1.0
B (Type of Construction) : 0.4
C (Contents or Consequential effects) : 0.8
Page 3 of 4
RAJASTHAN
D (Degree of Isolation) : 1.0

E (Type of Country) : 0.3
5.0 LIGHTNING PROTECTION CALCULATIONS
The Overall Multiplying Factor (MF)= A x B x C x D X E

= 1.0 x 0.4 x 0.8 x 1.0 x 0.3
= 0.096
P=Ac x Ng x 10-6
The Overall risk = P X MF

= Ac x Ng x 10-6 x 0.096
The Acceptance value = 1 x 10-5
Sr RCC BUILDING L (M) W (M) H(M) Ac P Px MF LIGHTNING

No PROTECTION
1 ADMIN BUILDING 26 12 9 1250.34 2.37x 10-3 2.28 x 10-4 REQUIRED
2 CANTEEN & 30 15 4 860.24 1.63x 10-3 1.56 x 10-4 REQUIRED

AMENITY
BUILDING
3 MCC BUILDING 25 15 5 853.5 1.62x 10-3 1.55 x 10-4 REQUIRED
4 S&D ROOM 15 8 3.5 319.5 6.07x 10-4 5.8x 10-5 REQUIRED
5 TT CREW REST 33 10 4 724.2 1.37x 10-3 1.32 x 10-4 REQUIRED

ROOM
6.0 CONCLUSION
Lightning Protection is required for Admin, Canteen & Amenity, MCC Building , S&D
and TT Crew Rest room
Page 4 of 4
CABLE SCHEDULE
REV. 02
Project No. Unit

Location Pali, Rajasthan Document No. NAYA-PALI-EL-SC-008
REVISION INDEX
Sht. Rev. Sht. Rev.
REV. 0 1 2
Date 26/12/2018 15/03/2019 03/05/2019
Prepared By PBS PBS PBS
Checked By PBS PBS PBS
Approved By SKJ SKJ SKJ
Client Review
REV : 02 Page 1 of 10
NOTES
SCOPE:
Purpose of the document is to define the technical basis and parameters used for Electrical Power & Control cables Schedule of the project.This document is intended as a guide for Cable Laying & sizing & Quantities of Power & Control Cables
to specify the requirements for this project.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS:
Plot Plan_Doc. No.-NAYA-PALI-PR-LY-001

Electrical Design Basis_Doc. No.-NAYA-PALI-EL-DB-001
Single line Diagram LV Distribution NAYA-PALI-EL-SD-010
Specification for LV Electrical Cables NAYA-PALI-EL-SP-032
Data Sheet for LV Electrical Cables NAYA-PALI-EL-DS-032
Doc No.: NAYA-PALI-EL-SC-008 Rev: 02 Page 2 of 10

CABLE
SCHEDULE
Description FROM From Location TO To Location Rating Type of POWER & OD Remarks
Cable
Equipme
nt Type
SL. NO.
No.
VOLTAGE
GRADE
cable CONTROL (in mm)
CABLE
Item Item Size Length (Mtr)
Route
Length
No of
Type of
cable
Run
(kW) (Sq. mm)
1 Transformer 1600 KVA HT VCB PANEL MCC Room Transformer 1600 KVA MCC Room 630A 11kV Feeder Power 1 3CX300 Al./XLPE 25 25 80
2 HT VCB PANEL EM STOP PB MCC Room HT VCB PANEL MCC Room 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 1 3C x 2.5 Cu/XLPE 15 15 14
3 HT VCB PANEL DCDB MCC Room HT VCB PANEL MCC Room 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 1 2C x 16 Cu/XLPE 15 15 17
4 HT VCB PANEL ACDB MCC Room HT VCB PANEL MCC Room 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 1 3C x 6 Cu/XLPE 15 15 17
5 PMCC HT VCB PANEL MCC Room PMCC MCC Room 0.6/1.1 Feeder Control 1 12C x 1.5 Cu./PVC 20 20 19
8 PMCC I/C-1 Transformer MCC Room PMCC I/C-1 MCC Room 3200A 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 0 BUS DUCT BUS DUCT 20 0 0
9 Transformer Control Cable Transformer Marshalling MCC Room PMCC MCC Room 0.6/1.1 Feeder Control 1 19C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 20 20 24.5
Box
10 PMCC I/C-2 DG-1 MCC Room PMCC I/C-2 MCC Room 1600A 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 4 3.5CX400 Al./XLPE 40 160 70
11 PMCC I/C-3 DG-2 MCC Room PMCC I/C-3 MCC Room 1600A 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 4 3.5CX400 Al./XLPE 40 160 70
12 PMCC I/C-4 Solar Power1 Solar Room PMCC I/C-4 MCC Room 1600A 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 4 3.5CX400 Al./XLPE 40 160 70
13 PMCC I/C-5 Solar Power2 Solar Room PMCC I/C-5 MCC Room 1600A 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 4 3.5CX400 Al./XLPE 40 160 70
14 DG-1 control DG-1 Panel MCC Room Marshalling Cabinet MCC Room 0.6/1.1 Control 1 12C x 1.5 Cu./PVC 20 20 19
18 ESB EDG MCC Room ESB MCC Room 630A 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 2 3.5CX400 Al./XLPE 40 80 70
19 ESB PMCC MCC Room ESB MCC Room 630A 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 2 3.5CX400 Al./XLPE 40 80 70
20 ACDB ACDB MCC Room PMCC MCC Room 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 1 2C x 16 Cu/XLPE 25 25 17
21 DCDB DCDB MCC Room PMCC MCC Room 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 1 2C x 16 Cu/XLPE 25 25 17
22 0
23 ACDB ACDB MCC Room ESB MCC Room 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 1 2C x 16 Cu/XLPE 25 25 17
24 DCDB DCDB MCC Room ESB MCC Room 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 1 2C x 16 Cu/XLPE 25 25 17
25 Motor for Tank Wagon PMCC MCC Room Motor for Tank Wagon TLF-TWD Pump House 120.00 0.6/1.1 VFD Power 2 3CX240 Al./XLPE/ 420 840 53
Unloading Pump-A for MS (P- Unloading Pump1 for MS SCREEN
100A)
26 LCS for Motor for Tank PMCC MCC Room LCS for Motor for Tank TLF-TWD Pump House 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 19C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 420 420 24.5
Wagon Unloading PumpA for Wagon Unloading Pump1
MS for MS
27 Space Heater for Motor for PMCC MCC Room Space Heater for Motor for TLF-TWD Pump House 0.6/1.1 Space Heater Power 1 3C x 4 Cu/XLPE 420 420 16
Tank Wagon Unloading Tank Wagon Unloading
PumpA for MS Pump1 for MS
28 Marshalling Cabinet PMCC MCC Room Marshalling Cabinet MCC Room 0.6/1.1 Start Stop Control 1 9C x 1.5 Cu./PVC 20 20 17.5
29 Marshalling Cabinet PMCC MCC Room Marshalling Cabinet MCC Room 0.6/1.1 Run Indication Control 1 5C x 1.5 Cu./PVC 20 20 15.5
30 Motor for Tank Wagon PMCC MCC Room Motor for Tank Wagon TLF-TWD Pump House 120.00 0.6/1.1 VFD Power 2 3CX240 Al./XLPE/ 410 820 53
Unloading Pump B for MS (P- Unloading Pump 2 for MS SCREEN
100B)
Wagon Unloading Pump B Wagon Unloading Pump 2
for MS for MS
Pump B for MS Pump 2 for MS
35 Motor for MS Stripper pump PMCC MCC Room Motor for MS Stripper pump TLF-TWD Pump House 30.00 0.6/1.1 Soft-starter Power 1 3CX120 Al./XLPE/ 415 415 39.5
(P-100C) SCREEN
36 LCS for Motor for MS PMCC MCC Room LCS for Motor for MS TLF-TWD Pump House 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 415 415 16.5
Stripper pump Stripper pump
39 Motor for MS submersible PMCC MCC Room Motor for MS submersible TK-100D 7.50 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3CX25 Al./XLPE 310 310 23
pump pump
40 LCS for Motor for MS PMCC MCC Room LCS for Motor for MS TK-100D 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 310 310 16.5
submersible submersible
pump pump
43 Motor for Tank Loading PMCC MCC Room Motor for Tank Loading TLF-TWD Pump House 45.00 0.6/1.1 Soft-starter Power 1 3CX185 Al./XLPE/ 405 405 48.5
pump A for MS (P-101A) pump A for MS SCREEN
Loading pump A for MS (P- Loading pump A for MS
101A)

CABLE
SCHEDULE
Cable
Equipme
nt Type
SL. NO.
No.
VOLTAGE
GRADE
CABLE
Route
Length
No of
Type of
cable
Run
(kW) (Sq. mm)
Tank Loading pump A for MS Tank Loading pump A for
MS
pump B for MS (P-101B) pump B for MS SCREEN
Loading pump B for MS Loading pump B for MS
Tank Loading pump B for MS Tank Loading pump B for
MS
pump C for MS (P-101C) pump C for MS SCREEN
Loading pump C for MS Loading pump C for MS
Tank Loading pump C for MS Tank Loading pump C for
MS
58 Motor for Tank Wagon PMCC MCC Room Motor for Tank Wagon TLF-TWD Pump House 150.00 0.6/1.1 VFD Power 2 3CX300 Al./XLPE/ 420 840 57.5
Unloading PumpA for HSD Unloading Pump1 for HSD SCREEN
(P-200A)
Wagon Unloading PumpA for Wagon Unloading Pump1
HSD for HSD
PumpA for HSD Pump1 for HSD
Unloading Pump B for HSD Unloading Pump 2 for HSD SCREEN
(P-200B)
Wagon Unloading Pump B Wagon Unloading Pump 2
for HSD for HSD
Pump B for HSD Pump 2 for HSD
Unloading Pump C for HSD Unloading Pump 3 for HSD SCREEN
(P-200C)
Wagon Unloading Pump C Wagon Unloading Pump 3
for HSD for HSD
Pump C for HSD Pump 3 for HSD
73 Motor for HSD Stripper pump PMCC MCC Room Motor for HSD Stripper TLF-TWD Pump House 30.00 0.6/1.1 Soft-starter Power 1 3CX120 Al./XLPE/ 425 425 39.5
(P-200D) pump SCREEN
74 LCS for Motor for HSD PMCC MCC Room LCS for Motor for HSD TLF-TWD Pump House 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 425 425 16.5
Stripper pump Stripper pump
pump A for HSD (P-201A) pump A for HSD SCREEN
Loading pump A for HSD Loading pump A for HSD

CABLE
SCHEDULE
Cable
Equipme
nt Type
SL. NO.
No.
VOLTAGE
GRADE
CABLE
Type of
cable
Route
Length
No of
Run
(kW) (Sq. mm)
Tank Loading pump A for Tank Loading pump A for
HSD HSD
pump B for HSD (P-201B) pump B for HSD SCREEN
Loading pump B for HSD Loading pump B for HSD
Tank Loading pump B for Tank Loading pump B for
HSD HSD
pump C for HSD (P-201C) pump C for HSD SCREEN
Loading pump C for HSD Loading pump C for HSD
Tank Loading pump C for Tank Loading pump C for
HSD HSD
92 Motor for HSD submersible PMCC MCC Room Motor for HSD submersible TK-200D 7.50 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3CX25 Al./XLPE 310 310 23
pump (P-201D) pump
93 LCS for Motor for HSD PMCC MCC Room LCS for Motor for HSD TK-200D 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 310 310 16.5
submersible submersible
pump pump
96 Motor for Ethanol PMCC MCC Room Motor for Ethanol TK-300A 7.50 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3CX10 Cu/XLPE 260 260 19
Submersible pump A Submersible pump A
97 LCS for Motor for Ethanol PMCC MCC Room LCS for Motor for Ethanol TK-300A 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 260 260 16.5
submersible pump A submersible pump A
100 Motor for Ethanol PMCC MCC Room Motor for Ethanol TK-300B 7.50 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3CX10 Cu/XLPE 265 265 19
submersible pump B submersible pump B
101 LCS for Motor for Ethanol PMCC MCC Room LCS for Motor for Ethanol TK-300B 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 265 265 16.5
submersible pump B submersible pump B

CABLE
SCHEDULE
Cable
Equipme
nt Type
SL. NO.
No.
VOLTAGE
GRADE
CABLE
cable
Route
Length
No of
Type of
Run
(kW) (Sq. mm)
104 Motor for Ethanol PMCC MCC Room Motor for Ethanol TK-300C 7.50 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3CX10 Cu/XLPE 270 270 19
submersible pump C submersible pump C
105 LCS for Motor for Ethanol PMCC MCC Room LCS for Motor for Ethanol TK-300C 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 270 270 16.5
submersible pump C submersible pump C
108 Motor for Ethanol PMCC MCC Room Motor for Ethanol TK-300D 7.50 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3CX10 Cu/XLPE 270 270 19
submersible pump D submersible pump D
109 LCS for Motor for Ethanol PMCC MCC Room LCS for Motor for Ethanol TK-300D 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 270 270 16.5
submersible pump D submersible pump D
112 Motor for Ethanol PMCC MCC Room Motor for Ethanol TK-300E 7.50 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3CX10 Cu/XLPE 270 270 19
submersible pump E submersible pump E
113 LCS for Motor for Ethanol PMCC MCC Room LCS for Motor for Ethanol TK-300E 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 270 270 16.5
submersible pump E submersible pump E
116 Motor for Slop Collection PMCC MCC Room Motor for Slop Collection TK-400 1.50 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3CX10 Cu/XLPE 900 900 19
pump pump
117 LCS for Motor for Slop PMCC MCC Room LCS for Motor for Slop TK-400 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 900 900 16.5
Collection pump Collection pump
124 Panel for VRU package PMCC MCC Room Panel for VRU package VRS 125A 0.6/1.1 Power Feeer Power 2 3.5Cx95 Al./XLPE 370 740 38
125 Panel for OWS package PMCC MCC Room Panel for OWS package OWS 125A 0.6/1.1 Power Feeer Power 2 3.5Cx120 Al./XLPE 900 1800 41
126 Normal Lighting Trafo PMCC MCC Room Normal Lighting Trafo MCC Room 315A 0.6/1.1 Power Feeer Power 2 3.5CX185 Al./XLPE 25 50 50
127 MLDB Normal Lighting Trafo MCC Room MLDB MCC Room 315A 0.6/1.1 Power Feeer Power 2 3.5CX185 Al./XLPE 10 20 50
128 Normal Aux PDB PMCC MCC Room Normal Aux PDB MCC Room 400A 0.6/1.1 Power Feeer Power 2 3.5CX185 Al./XLPE 25 50 50
129 AC UPS SUPPLY-1 TAS ESB MCC Room AC UPS SUPPLY-1 TAS ADMIN (1st. Fl.) 80A 0.6/1.1 Power Feeer Power 1 3.5Cx50 Al./XLPE 145 145 29.5
Control room
130 AC UPS SUPPLY-2 TAS ESB MCC Room AC UPS SUPPLY-2 TAS ADMIN (1st. Fl.) 80A 0.6/1.1 Power Feeer Power 1 3.5Cx50 Al./XLPE 145 145 29.5
Control room
131 AC UPS SUPPLY-Bypass TAS PMCC MCC Room AC UPS SUPPLY-Bypass TAS ADMIN (1st. Fl.) 80A 0.6/1.1 Power Feeer Power 1 3.5Cx50 Al./XLPE 145 145 29.5
Control room
132 AC UPS SUPPLY- 1 ADMIN ESB MCC Room AC UPS SUPPLY- 1 ADMIN ADMIN (1st. Fl.) 32A 0.6/1.1 Power Feeer Power 1 3.5C x 25 Al./XLPE 145 145 25.5
Control room
133 AC UPS SUPPLY- 2ADMIN ESB MCC Room AC UPS SUPPLY- 2 ADMIN ADMIN (1st. Fl.) 32A 0.6/1.1 Power Feeer Power 1 3.5C x 25 Al./XLPE 145 145 25.5
Control room
134 AC UPS SUPPLY- Bypass PMCC MCC Room AC UPS SUPPLY- Bypass ADMIN (1st. Fl.) 32A 0.6/1.1 Power Feeer Power 1 3.5C x 25 Al./XLPE 145 145 25.5
ADMIN ADMIN Control room
135 DC UPS SUPPLY-1 ESB MCC Room DC UPS SUPPLY-1 MCC Room 32A 0.6/1.1 Power Feeer Power 1 4Cx16 Cu/XLPE 20 20 21
136 DC UPS SUPPLY-2 PMCC MCC Room DC UPS SUPPLY-1 MCC Room 32A 0.6/1.1 Power Feeer Power 1 4Cx16 Cu/XLPE 20 20 21
137 APFC PANEL PMCC MCC Room APFC PANEL MCC Room 1250A 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 6 3.5CX240 Al./XLPE 25 150 56
138 Fire Water Panel ESB MCC Room Fire Water Panel FWPH 100A. 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 1 3.5Cx50 Al./XLPE 135 135 29.5
139 Motor for Borewell ESB MCC Room Motor for Borewell pump1 Near Fire Water Sump 15.00 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3C X 2.5 Cu/XLPE 160 160 14
Submersible pump-A
140 LCS for Motor for Borewell ESB MCC Room LCS for Motor for Borewell Near Fire Water Sump 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 160 160 16.5
Submersible pump-A pump1
141 Marshalling Cabinet ESB MCC Room Marshalling Cabinet MCC Room 0.6/1.1 Start Stop Control 1 5C x 1.5 Cu./PVC 20 20 14.5
142 Marshalling Cabinet ESB MCC Room Marshalling Cabinet MCC Room 0.6/1.1 Run Indication Control 1 5C x 1.5 Cu./PVC 20 20 14.5
143 Motor for Borewell ESB MCC Room Motor for Borewell pump 2 Near S&D room 15.00 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3C X 70 Al./XLPE 570 570 32
Submersible pump-B
144 LCS for Motor for Borewell ESB MCC Room LCS for Motor for Borewell Near S&D room 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 570 570 16.5
Submersible pump-B pump 2

CABLE
SCHEDULE
Cable
Equipme
nt Type
SL. NO.
No.
VOLTAGE
GRADE
CABLE
Type of
cable
Route
Length
No of
Run
(kW) (Sq. mm)
147 Motor for Borewell ESB MCC Room Motor for Borewell pump 2 Near Watch Tower (36B) 15.00 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3C X 70 Al./XLPE 585 585 32
Submersible pump-C
148 LCS for Motor for Borewell ESB MCC Room LCS for Motor for Borewell Near Watch Tower (36B) 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 585 585 16.5
Submersible pump-C pump 2
151 Motor for foam pump B ESB MCC Room Motor for foam pump B FOAM PH 3.00 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3C x 2.5 Cu/XLPE 125 125 14
152 LCS for Motor for foam pump ESB MCC Room LCS for Motor for foam FOAM PH 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 125 125 16.5
B pump B
155 Motor for Raw Water PMCC MCC Room Motor for Raw Water RAW WATER SUMP 5.50 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3C x 4 Cu/XLPE 150 150 16
Transfer pump A Transfer pump A
156 LCS for Motor for Raw Water PMCC MCC Room LCS for Motor for Raw RAW WATER SUMP 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 150 150 16.5
Transfer pump A Water Transfer pump A
159 Motor for Raw Water PMCC MCC Room Motor for Raw Water RAW WATER SUMP 5.50 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3C x 4 Cu/XLPE 150 150 16
Transfer pump B Transfer pump B
160 LCS for Motor for Raw Water PMCC MCC Room LCS for Motor for Raw RAW WATER SUMP 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 150 150 16.5
Transfer pump B Water Transfer pump B
163 Motor for Calibration Tower PMCC MCC Room Motor for Calibration Tower TT CALIBRATION SHED 7.50 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3CX10 Cu/XLPE 165 165 19
pump A pump A
164 LCS for Motor for Calibration PMCC MCC Room LCS for Motor for TT CALIBRATION SHED 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 165 165 16.5
Tower pump A Calibration Tower pump A
167 Motor for Calibration Tower PMCC MCC Room Motor for Calibration Tower TT CALIBRATION SHED 7.50 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3CX10 Cu/XLPE 165 165 19
pump B pump B
168 LCS for Motor for Calibration PMCC MCC Room LCS for Motor for TT CALIBRATION SHED 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 165 165 16.5
Tower pump B Calibration Tower pump B
171 Motor for HSD Vertical pump PMCC MCC Room POTABLE WATER SUMP TK-200E 0.55 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3C x 2.5 Cu/XLPE 175 175 14
172 LCS for Motor for HSD PMCC MCC Room LCS for Motor for HSD TK-200E 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 175 175 16.5
Vertical pump Vertical pump
175 Motor for Potable Water PMCC MCC Room Motor for Potable Water POTABLE WATER SUMP 2.20 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3CX10 Cu/XLPE 150 150 19
176 LCS for Motor for Potable PMCC MCC Room LCS for Motor for Potable POTABLE WATER SUMP 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 150 150 16.5
Water Transfer pump A Water Transfer pump A
179 Motor for Potable Water PMCC MCC Room Motor for Potable Water POTABLE WATER SUMP 2.20 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3CX10 Cu/XLPE 150 150 19
180 LCS for Motor for Potable PMCC MCC Room LCS for Motor for Potable POTABLE WATER SUMP 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 150 150 16.5
Water Transfer pump B Water Transfer pump B
183 Motor for fire Water Transfer ESB MCC Room Motor for fire Water FIRE WATER SUMP 2.20 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3C x 2.5 Cu/XLPE 145 145 14
pump A Transfer pump A
184 LCS for Motor for fire Water ESB MCC Room LCS for Motor for fire Water FIRE WATER SUMP 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 145 145 16.5

CABLE
SCHEDULE
Cable
Equipme
nt Type
SL. NO.
No.
VOLTAGE
GRADE
CABLE
Type of
cable
Route
Length
No of
Run
(kW) (Sq. mm)
187 Motor for fire Water Transfer ESB MCC Room Motor for fire Water FIRE WATER SUMP 2.20 0.6/1.1 DOL Power 1 3C x 2.5 Cu/XLPE 145 145 14
pump B Transfer pump B
188 LCS for Motor for fire Water ESB MCC Room LCS for Motor for fire Water FIRE WATER SUMP 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 145 145 16.5
191 Control Panel for RHVLR-1 ESB MCC Room Control Panel for RHVLR-1 FWPH 32A 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 1 4Cx6 Cu/XLPE 145 145 18.5
192 Control Panel for RHVLR-2 ESB MCC Room Control Panel for RHVLR-2 FWPH 32A 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 1 4Cx6 Cu/XLPE 145 145 18.5
193 Panel for Air Compressor ESB MCC Room Panel for Air Compressor FWPH 63A 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 1 3.5Cx35 Al./XLPE 145 145 26.5
Package 1 Package 1
194 Panel for Air Compressor ESB MCC Room Panel for Air Compressor FWPH 63A 0.6/1.1 Feeder Power 1 3.5Cx35 Al./XLPE 145 145 26.5
Package 2 Package 2
195 ACDB TAS AC UP TAS ADMIN (1st. Fl.) ACDB TAS ADMIN (1st. Fl.) 125A 0.6/1.1 Power Feeer Power 2 3.5Cx50 Al./XLPE 20 40 29.5
Control room Control room
196 ACDB ADMIN AC UPS ADMIN ADMIN (1st. Fl.) ACDB ADMIN ADMIN (1st. Fl.) 32A 0.6/1.1 Power Feeer Power 1 3.5C x 25 Al./XLPE 20 20 25.5
Control room Control room
197 DCDB DC UPS MCC Room DCDB MCC Room 32A 0.6/1.1 Power Feeer Power 1 2C x 16 Cu/XLPE 30 30 17
198 Emergency Lighting Trafo ESB MCC Room Emergency Lighting Trafo MCC Room 100A 0.6/1.1 Power Feeer Power 1 3.5Cx35 Al./XLPE 25 25 26..5
199 EMLDB Emergency Lighting Trafo MCC Room EMLDB MCC Room 100A 0.6/1.1 Power Feeer Power 1 3.5Cx35 Al./XLPE 10 10 26..5
200 Motor for Jockey pump A FIRE PANEL FWPH Motor for Jockey pump A FWPH 30.00 0.6/1.1 Soft-starter Power 1 3Cx25 Al./XLPE/ 25 25 23
SCREEN
201 LCS for Motor for Jockey FIRE PANEL FWPH LCS for Motor for Jockey FWPH 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 25 25 16.5
pump A pump A
202 Marshalling Cabinet FIRE PANEL FWPH Marshalling Cabinet MCC Room 0.6/1.1 Start Stop Control 1 5C x 1.5 Cu./PVC 145 145 14.5
203 Marshalling Cabinet FIRE PANEL FWPH Marshalling Cabinet MCC Room 0.6/1.1 Run Indication Control 1 5C x 1.5 Cu./PVC 145 145 14.5
204 Motor for Jockey pump B FIRE PANEL FWPH Motor for Jockey pump B FWPH 30.00 0.6/1.1 Soft-starter Power 1 3Cx25 Al./XLPE/ 25 25 23
SCREEN
205 LCS for Motor for Jockey FIRE PANEL FWPH LCS for Motor for Jockey FWPH 0.6/1.1 LCS Control 1 7C x 2.5 Cu./PVC 25 25 16.5
pump B pump B
206 Marshalling Cabinet FIRE PANEL FWPH Marshalling Cabinet MCC Room 0.6/1.1 Start Stop Control 1 5C x 1.5 Cu./PVC 150 150 14.5
207 Marshalling Cabinet FIRE PANEL FWPH Marshalling Cabinet MCC Room 0.6/1.1 Run Indication Control 1 5C x 1.5 Cu./PVC 150 150 14.5
208 Fire Engine Panel-1 FIRE PANEL FWPH Fire Engine Panel-1 FWPH 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx2.5 Cu/XLPE 20 20 14.5
211 HM-1 EMLDB MCC Room HM-1 TT PARKING 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5Cx35 Al./XLPE 640 1280 26.5
212 HM-2 EMLDB MCC Room HM-2 RAILWAY STAFF ROOM 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5C x 25 Al./XLPE 500 1000 25.5
213 HM-3 EMLDB MCC Room HM-3 RAILWAY SIDING 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx10 Cu/XLPE 355 355 20.5
214 HM-4 EMLDB MCC Room HM-4 CANTEEN 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx10 Cu/XLPE 200 200 20.5
215 HM-5 MLDB MCC Room HM-5 FIRE WATER TANK 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx10 Cu/XLPE 80 80 20.5
216 HM-6 MLDB MCC Room HM-6 UNDERGROUND ETHANOL 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx10 Cu/XLPE 220 220 20.5
TANK
217 HM-7 EMLDB MCC Room HM-7 TLF-TWD Pump House 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx10 Cu/XLPE 290 290 20.5
218 HM-8 MLDB MCC Room HM-8 TLF Gantry 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5Cx35 Al./XLPE 400 800 25.5
219 HM-9 MLDB MCC Room HM-9 TANKFARM 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5C x 25 Al./XLPE 400 800 25.5
220 HM-10 MLDB MCC Room HM-10 TANKFARM 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5Cx35 Al./XLPE 530 1060 26.5
221 HM-11 MLDB MCC Room HM-11 TANKFARM 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5Cx35 Al./XLPE 530 1060 26.5
222 YARD Lighting Panel-1 MLDB MCC Room YARD Lighting Panel-1 MCC Room 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 3.5C x 25 Al./XLPE 30 30 25.5
223 YARD Lighting Panel-2 EMLDB MCC Room YARD Lighting Panel-2 MCC Room 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 3.5C x 25 Al./XLPE 30 30 25.5
224 ELDB-1 EMLDB MCC Room ELDB-1 ADMIN (Gr. Fl.) 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx10 Cu/XLPE 150 150 20.5
1 kW
225 ELDB-2 EMLDB MCC Room ELDB-2 ADMIN (1st. Fl.) 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx10 Cu/XLPE 150 150 20.5
Control room 7 kW
226 ELDB-3 EMLDB MCC Room ELDB-3 MCC Room 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx2.5 Cu/XLPE 30 30 14.5
4 kW
227 ELDB-4 EMLDB MCC Room ELDB-4 EMERGENCY GATE CABIN 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx2.5 Cu/XLPE 95 95 14.5
(25A) 0.5 kW
228 ELDB-5 EMLDB MCC Room ELDB-5 EMERGENCY GATE CABIN 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx4 Cu/XLPE 940 940 17.5
(25) 0.5 kW
229 ELDB-6 EMLDB MCC Room ELDB-6 MAIN SECURITY ROOM 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx4 Cu/XLPE 940 940 17.5
0.5 kW
230 ELDB-24 EMLDB MCC Room ELDB-24 FWPH 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx2.5 Cu/XLPE 150 150 14.5
1.5 kW

CABLE
SCHEDULE
Cable
Equipme
nt Type
SL. NO.
No.
VOLTAGE
GRADE
CABLE
Route
Length
No of
Type of
cable
Run
(kW) (Sq. mm)
231 ELDB-21 EMLDB MCC Room ELDB-21 SECURITY CHECK POST 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 3.5C x 25 Cu/XLPE 800 800 25
0.5 kW
232 LDB7 MLDB MCC Room LDB7 ADMIN (1st. Fl.) 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx10 Cu/XLPE 150 150 20.5
Control room 11 kW
233 LDB8 MLDB MCC Room LDB8 ADMIN (Gr. Fl.) 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx10 Cu/XLPE 150 150 20.5
11 kW
234 LDB9 MLDB MCC Room LDB9 CANTEEN 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 4Cx10 Cu/XLPE 240 480 20.5
6 kW
235 LDB10 MLDB MCC Room LDB10 S&D ROOM 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx10 Cu/XLPE 600 600 20.5
3 kW
236 LDB11 MLDB MCC Room LDB11 TT Crew Rest room 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5C x 25 Al./XLPE 900 1800 25
5 kW
237 LDB12 MLDB MCC Room LDB12 RAILWAY STAFF OFF 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx6 Cu/XLPE 600 600 18.5
1.5 kW
238 LDB13 MLDB MCC Room LDB13 QC LAB 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx10 Cu/XLPE 630 630 20.5
2 kW
239 LDB14 MLDB MCC Room LDB14 SAMPLE ROOM 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx2.5 Cu/XLPE 350 350 14.5
0.5 kW
240 LDB15 MLDB MCC Room LDB15 STORE & Change Room 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx4 Cu/XLPE 285 285 17.5
1.5 kW
241 LDB16 MLDB MCC Room LDB16 TLF-TWD Pump House 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx10 Cu/XLPE 420 420 20.5
3 kW
242 LDB17 MLDB MCC Room LDB17 FOAM PH 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx2.5 Cu/XLPE 120 120 14.5
0.5 kW
243 LDB18 MLDB MCC Room LDB18 TT CALIBRATION SHED 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx4 Cu/XLPE 375 375 17.5
0.75 kW
244 LDB19 MLDB MCC Room LDB19 TT Lock& Unlock shed 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx16 Al/XLPE 600 600 21
3 kW
245 LDB20 MLDB MCC Room LDB20 TLF GANTRY 1 kW 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5Cx35 Al./XLPE 415 830 26.5
15 kW
246 LDB22 MLDB MCC Room LDB22 VRS 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx10 Cu/XLPE 375 375 20.5
3 kW
247 LDB23 MLDB MCC Room LDB23 RAILWAY SIDING 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx16 Al/XLPE 560 560 21
3 kW
248 LDB23 MLDB MCC Room LDB24 RAILWAY SIDING 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx16 Al/XLPE 560 560 21
3 kW
249 PDB-1 Normal Aux PDB MCC Room PDB-1 ADMIN (Gr. Fl.) 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 3.5C x 25 Al./XLPE 150 150 25
250 PDB-2 Normal Aux PDB MCC Room PDB-2 ADMIN (1st. Fl.) 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 3.5C x 25 Al./XLPE 150 150 25
Control room
251 PDB-3 Normal Aux PDB MCC Room PDB-3 MCC Room 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 3.5C x 25 Al./XLPE 30 30 25
252 PDB-4 Normal Aux PDB MCC Room PDB-4 CANTEEN 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5C x 25 Al./XLPE 245 490 25
253 PDB-5 Normal Aux PDB MCC Room PDB-5 MAIN SECURITY ROOM 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 4Cx6 Cu/XLPE 930 1860 18.5
254 PDB-6 Normal Aux PDB MCC Room PDB-6 S&D ROOM 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5C x 25 Al./XLPE 600 1200 25
255 PDB-7 Normal Aux PDB MCC Room PDB-7 RAILWAY STAFF OFF 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 3.5C x 25 Al./XLPE 600 600 25
256 PDB-9 Normal Aux PDB MCC Room PDB-9 QC LAB 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5Cx50 Al./XLPE 630 1260 29.5
257 PDB-10 Normal Aux PDB MCC Room PDB-10 TT Crew Rest room 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5Cx50 Al./XLPE 925 1850 29.5
258 PDB-11 Normal Aux PDB MCC Room PDB-11 FWPH 125A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5Cx35 Al./XLPE 125 250 26.5
259 PDB-12 Normal Aux PDB MCC Room PDB-12 TLF-TWD Pump House 125A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5Cx120 Al./XLPE 405 810 41
260 PDB-13 Normal Aux PDB MCC Room PDB-13 TT CALIBRATION SHED 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx10 Cu/XLPE 375 375 20.5
261 PDB-14 Normal Aux PDB MCC Room PDB-14 TT Lock& Unlock shed 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 3.5C x 25 Al./XLPE 600 600 25
262 PDB-15 Normal Aux PDB MCC Room PDB-15 TLF GANTRY 125A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5Cx185 Al./XLPE 600 1200 50
263 HVAC DB1 Normal Aux PDB MCC Room HVAC DB for Control Room ADMIN (1st. Fl.) 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx10 Cu/XLPE 150 150 20.5
10 kW Control room
264 HVAC DB2 Normal Aux PDB MCC Room HVAC DB for Admin Bldg ADMIN (1st. Fl.) 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 3.5Cx35 Al./XLPE 150 150 26.5
25 kW Control room
265 MOV DB1 Normal Aux PDB MCC Room MOV DB1 TLF-TWD Pump House 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 3.5Cx35 Al./XLPE 420 420 26.5
266 MOV DB2 Normal Aux PDB MCC Room MOV DB2 TANKFARM 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 3.5Cx35 Al./XLPE 400 400 26.5
267 MOVDB2 TLF-TWD Pump Near Railway Gantry 10A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx2.5 Cu/XLPE 110 110 14.5
MOV2101 House MOV2101
268 MOVDB1 TLF-TWD Pump Near P-200A 10A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx2.5 Cu/XLPE 100 100 14.5
269 MOVDB1 TLF-TWD Pump Near P-200B 10A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx2.5 Cu/XLPE 100 100 14.5
270 MOVDB1 TLF-TWD Pump Near P-200C 10A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx2.5 Cu/XLPE 100 100 14.5

CABLE
SCHEDULE
Cable
Equipme
nt Type
SL. NO.
No.
VOLTAGE
GRADE
CABLE
cable
Route
Length
No of
Type of
Run
(kW) (Sq. mm)
271 MOVDB1 TLF-TWD Pump Near P-200D 10A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx2.5 Cu/XLPE 20 20 14.5
272 MOV2201 MOVDB2 Tankfarm MOV2201 Near HSD Tank 10A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx2.5 Cu/XLPE 110 110 14.5
273 MOVDB2 TLF-TWD Pump Near Railway Gantry 10A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx2.5 Cu/XLPE 110 110 14.5
274 MOVDB1 TLF-TWD Pump Near P-100B 10A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx2.5 Cu/XLPE 30 30 14.5
275 MOVDB1 TLF-TWD Pump Near P-100A 10A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx2.5 Cu/XLPE 25 25 14.5
277 MOV1201 MOVDB2 Tankfarm MOV1201 Near MS Tank 10A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx2.5 Cu/XLPE 120 120 14.5
278 MOV1501 MOVDB2 Tankfarm MOV1501 Near TK-100D 10A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx2.5 Cu/XLPE 120 120 14.5
281 MOV2502 MOVDB2 Tankfarm MOV2502 Near TK-200D 10A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx2.5 Cu/XLPE 120 120 14.5
282 MOV3001 MOVDB2 Tankfarm MOV3001 Near TK-300A 10A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx6 Cu/XLPE 220 220 18.5
283 MOV3002 MOVDB2 Tankfarm MOV3002 Near TK-300B 10A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx6 Cu/XLPE 215 215 18.5
284 MOV3003 MOVDB2 Tankfarm MOV3003 Near TK-300C 10A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx6 Cu/XLPE 210 210 18.5
285 MOV3004 MOVDB2 Tankfarm MOV3004 Near TK-300D 10A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx6 Cu/XLPE 205 205 14.5
286 MOV3005 MOVDB2 Tankfarm MOV3005 Near TK-300E 10A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx6 Cu/XLPE 200 200 14.5
288 MOV4001 MOVDB2 Tankfarm MOV4001 Near TK-400 10A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx16 Al/XLPE 670 670 21
290 WSDB Normal Aux PDB MCC Room WSDB MCC Room 125A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 3.5Cx 95 Al/XLPE 30 30 38
291 WR#01 WSDB TLF Gantry WR#01 TLF Gantry 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5Cx 95 Al./XLPE 410 820 38
292 WR#02 WSDB TLF-TWD Pump WR#02 TLF-TWD Pump House 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5Cx 95 Al./XLPE 430 860 38
House
293 WR#03 WSDB TLF-TWD Pump WR#03 TLF-TWD Pump House 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5Cx 95 Al./XLPE 450 900 38
House
294 WR#04 WSDB FWPH WR#04 FWPH 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 2 3.5C x 35 Al./XLPE 135 270 26.5
295 STP PACKAGE Normal Aux PDB MCC Room STP PACKAGE SOLAR POWER 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 3.5C x 70 Al./XLPE 440 440 34
296 WTP PACKAGE Normal Aux PDB MCC Room WTP PACKAGE FWPH 63A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 3.5C x 25 Al./XLPE 150 150 25.5
297 LDB25 MLDB MCC Room LDB25 TANKFARM 32A 0.6/1.1 Power 1 4Cx10 Cu/XLPE 580 580 20.5

CONN. EQUIPMENT
LOAD IN KW DESCRIPTION LOCATION
HIGHMAST-5 EXTERNAL AREA
PMCC PANEL
NORMAL LIGHTING DB
YARD LIGHTING EXTERNAL AREA

PANEL-1
EMERGENCY SWITCH BOARD
R3
SPARE
SPARE
100 / 1A, 15 VA
CL 0.5
LDB-8 ADMIN GR FLR

3
CT
LDB-7 ADMIN 1ST FLR

100 A
CLASS
DROP
LDB-9 CANTEEN
11KV SUPPLY FROM RSEB
3
OUT FUSE
LDB-10 S&D ROOM

11 kV, 100A, 3PH
TT CALIBRATION
LDB-18
LIGHTNING ARRESTER
SHED
11kV 110V CL0.5
11kV, 10kA DISTRIBUTION
3 100VA
GOD WITH EARTH SWITCH
TT CREW REST
LDB-11
ROOM
6A MCB
LDB-12 RAILWAY OFF
LDB-13 QC LAB
FROM PMCC PANEL

LDB-14 SAMPLE ROOM
METERING
FOR TARRIF
LDB-15 STORE & CHANGE

TRIVECTOR METER
ROOM
TLF TWD
LDB-16 PUMP HOUSE
EXTERNAL DB
110V DC FROM
LDB-17 FOAM PUMP
HOUSE
LDB-19 TT LOCK UNLOCK

SHED
BUS FOR O/G FEEDERS

LDB-20 TLF
GANTRY
240V AC CONTROL SUPPLY

LDB-22 VRV
R3
LDB-23 RAILWAY
GANTRY
RAILWAY
LDB-24 GANTRY
FROM PMCC PANEL

LDB-25 TANK FARM
SPARE
R3
SPARE
CONN. EQUIPMENT
PDB-3 MCC ROOM
PDB-2 CONTROL ROOM
R3
PDB-4
POWER DB
CANTEEN
PDB-1 ADMIN BLDG.

GR. FL
PDB-5 MAIN SECURITY

11 KV C/B
R3
NORMAL AUXILIARY
PDB-6 S&D ROOM
11KV SUPPLY
PDB-12 TLF-TWD PH
PDB-7 RAILWAY
OFFICE
QC LAB
R3
PDB-9
FROM PMCC PANEL

FROM 2 POLE STRUCTURE
PDB-11 FIRE WATER

PUMP HOUSE
PDB-10 TTQ REST ROOM
PDB-13 TT CALIBRATION
R3
PDB-15 TLF GANTRY
PDB-14 TT LOCK
UNLOCK SHED
HVACDB-1 CONTROL ROOM

R3
HVACDB-2 ADMIN BUILDING
MOVDB TLF-TWD PH
R3
FROM
R3
MOVDB TANK FARM
ESB I/C-1
WSDB
MCC ROOM
PANEL FOR
WTP PLANT
EXTERNAL DB
110V DC FROM
PANEL FOR
R3
STP PLANT
SPARE
EXTERNAL DB
110V DC FROM
R3
BUS FOR O/G FEEDERS
EXTERNAL DB

240V AC FROM
R3
FIRE WATER PANEL

R3
Ac ups for tas
R3
R3
EMERGENCY
SWITCHBOARD
EMERGENCY SWITCHBOARD
I/C-1
FROM
FROM PMCC PANEL
BUS FOR O/G FEEDERS

R3
Ac ups ADMIN
PANEL
EMERGENCY SWITCHBOARD
100 KVAR
FROM DG-1
APFC PANEL
100 KVAR
FROM PMCC PANEL
100 KVAR
SOLAR PANEL
50 KVAR
FROM PMCC PANEL
DC ups
50 KVAR
EMERGENCY
SWITCHBOARD
25 KVAR
SOLAR PANEL
25 KVAR
30 KVAR
R3
R3
FROM PMCC PANEL
R3
R3
CONN. EQUIPMENT
HIGHMAST - 1 EXTERNAL AREA
YARD LIGHTING EXTERNAL AREA

PANEL - 2
R3
SPARE
REV.
EMERGENCY LIGHTING DB
ELDB-3 MCC ROOM

DATE
ELDB-2 CONTROL ROOM
ELDB-1 ADMIN BLDG.

GR. & 1ST FL
ELDB-4 EM GATE
25A
ELDB-5 EM GATE
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
25
EMERGENCY
SWITCHBOARD
ELDB-6 MAIN SECURITY

ROOM
ELDB-24 FIRE WATER

PUMP HOUSE
ELDB-21 SECURITY
CHECK POST
SPARE
SPARE
DESCRIPTION
DRN BY
CHD BY
APP BY
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
FROM FROM
MLDB MLDB
LDB-24 (FLAME PROOF) LDB-23 (FLAME PROOF)

LOC : RAILWAY SIDING LOC : RAILWAY SIDING
9WAY SPN 9WAY SPN
FPL34 FPL23 FPL12 FPL1

FPL44 FPL33 FPL22 FPL11 GLOBAL CONSULTANTS

FROM
MLDB
LDB-25 (FLAME PROOF)

LOC : TANK FARM
9WAY SPN
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
EXIT DOOR
OUTSIDE OPENING
BATTERY ROOM
1IN10 NORMAL N. LTG E. LTG
11KV
AUX PDB APFC TR TR WSDB DC UPS
RAMP UP 630A
VCB
±0.00m Lvl NORMAL SOLAR EMERGENCY YLDB-2

LIGHTING DB PANEL-2 LTG. DB
SOLAR EMERGENCY DG SYN DG AMF

PANEL YLDB-1
PANEL-1 SWITCH BOARD PANEL
1600 KVA
1IN10 11KV/433V
RAMP UP DRY-CAST RESIN
TRANSFORMER
WITH OFFLTC
PMCC PANEL
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
ERC-X
600W
PT-X
600W 600W
400
600W 600W
250 250
600
600W 600W 600W 300W

250 250
900
600W 300W 300W 300W 300W 300W

300 250 250
100 100 100 100 100 100
800 400 400 400
SECTION A-A SECTION B-B SECTION C-C SECTION D-D SECTION E-E SECTION F-F
ERC-1
ERC-15
ERC-10
4
C-1
ER
ERC-13
ER
C-1
2
ERC-2
ERC-3
ERC-
ERC-11
9
ERC-8
PT-11
ERC-4
ERC-5
PT-8
PT-7
0
PT-1
PT-2
-7
PT-6 PT-1 C
ER
PT-5
PT-4
PT-9 PT-3
ERC-6
600W
600W 600W
250
550
600W 550
250 600W 250 600W
150
100 100 100
100
100
100
100 100
100
300
150 GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
(DETAILS OF BURIED LV CABLE TRENCH) (DETAILS OF BURIED LV CABLE TRENCH)

(300W x 850D) (150W x 750D)
SECTION G-G SECTION H-H SECTION J-J SECTION L-L SECTION M-M
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
WATCH TOWER
L1
L2
SB-1
SR. QTY
LEGENDS DESCRIPTION
NO.
SB-1-6
L2
L1
SB-1
L2
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
LOCK & UNLOCK ROOM
FROM
MLDB
L6

LOC : LOCK UNLOCK ROOM
LDB19
P1
9WAY SPN
L4
L1
L7
L2 L8
L1 L6
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
L2 L4 L7
L3 P1 L5 P2 L8
L9
L3 L9
L5
P2
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
TT CALIBRATION
PDB-13 L5
P1
L1 CL1 L2
LDB-18
L4 L3
P2
L6
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
FROM
MLDB

LOC : TT CALIBRATION SHED
9WAY SPN
L1 L5
CL1 L6
L2
L3
L4
FROM NORMAL
AUX PDB
PDB-13 (FLAME PROOF)

LOC : TT CALIBRATION SHED
6WAY SPN
P1 P2
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
TLF/TWD PUMP HOUSE
LDB16 SDB12 MOVDB

P1 CL3 P2
CL1
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8
L16 L17 L18 L19 L20 L21 L22 L23
CL2 P4
CL5 P3
L9 L10 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15
L24 L25 L26 L27 L28 L29 L30
CL4 P5
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
FROM
MLDB

LOC : TLF & TWD PUMP HOUSE
12WAY SPN
L1 L15 FP1 L6 L20 FP9 L11 L25
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
L16 FP2 L21 FP10 L12 L26
CL1 CL3
CL5
L2 L17 FP3 L7 L22 FP11 L27
L3 L18 FP4 L8 L23 FP12 L13 L28
L4 FP5 L9 FP13 L14

CL2 CL4
L5 L19 FP6 L10 L24 FP14
FP7 FP8 FP15 FP16

FROM NORMAL
AUX PDB
PDB-12 (FLAME PROOF)

LOC : TLF & TWD PUMP HOUSE
6WAY SPN
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
P1 P4
P2 P5 P3 GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
FIRE WATER PUMP HOUSE
ELDB-24 PDB11
CL1 FWP
L1 L2 L4 L5 L6 L7
L3
L8 L9 L10 L11 L12 L13 L14
P1 CL2 P2
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
FROM
EMLDB
LDB-24
LOC : FIRE WATER PUMP HOUSE
9WAY SPN
L1 L8
SPARE
FL15 FL18 FL1 FL9
SPARE
FL5
L2 L9
FL16 FL6 FL2 FL10
L10
CL1 FL17 FL7 FL3
L3 L11
FL8 FL8 FL4
L4 L12
CL2
L5
L6 L13
FROM NORMAL
AUX PDB
L7 L14
PDB-11
LOC : FIRE WATER PUMP HOUSE
6WAY SPN

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
P1 P2 P1
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
FOAM PUMP HOUSE
FROM
MLDB
LDB-17
LOC : FOAM PUMP HOUSE
9WAY SPN
LDB17 CL1
L1
L1 L2 L3
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
L2
FL11 FL13
CL1 FL12 FL14
L3
L6
L4 L5 L6
L5
L4
L7
L7 L8 L9 L8
L9
P1
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
FOR VISITOR PARKING
OFFICER PARKING
TO ADMIN BUILDING LDB-1 TO ADMIN BUILDING LDB-1
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
MCC ROOM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
EXIT DOOR
OUTSIDE OPENING
EXHAUST FAN EXHAUST FAN EXHAUST FAN (FLAME PROOF)
BATTERY ROOM
11KV AUX PDB APFC TR TR WSDB DC UPS
RAMP UP 630A
VCB
f f EXHAUST FAN
f f f
f
f f f
f
DCDB ACDB-1
ROLLING SHUTTER

YLDB-1
PANEL
SDB-3
1600 KVA
1IN10 11KV/433V
f f f f f
ELDB-3
RAMP UP DRY-CAST RESIN f
TRANSFORMER
WITH OFFLTC
PMCC PANEL
EXHAUST FAN
A
EXHAUST FAN
ROLLING SHUTTER
EXHAUST FAN
EXHAUST FAN
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
MCC ROOM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
EXIT DOOR
OUTSIDE OPENING
EXHAUST FAN EXHAUST FAN EXHAUST FAN (FLAME PROOF)
BATTERY ROOM
RAMP UP 630A
VCB
f f EXHAUST FAN
f f f
f
f f f
f
DCDB ACDB-1
ROLLING SHUTTER

PANEL YLDB-1
SDB-3
1600 KVA
1IN10 f f f f f
11KV/433V ELDB-3
RAMP UP DRY-CAST RESIN f
TRANSFORMER
WITH OFFLTC
PMCC PANEL
EXHAUST FAN
A
EXHAUST FAN
ROLLING SHUTTER
EXHAUST FAN
EXHAUST FAN
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
TLF/TWD PUMP HOUSE
EP-3 c c c c c c
LDB16 PDB12 MOVDB
e e EB-7 EB-6
e h g
EB-8 f g g f g g
h
a
h g g g
e e e c
f e f e g
e h e e
h g
e e
EB-1 EB-2 EB-3
f
c c c c c c
g
EP-5 h
EB
c c EP-4
EB-5
g
g g
g g
g
EB-4
c c
EP-6
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
c
a a
f
c c c c EP-1 e
e
ELDB-24 SDB11 FWP
e e e e f
f f f f
f f
a EB
e
f f f e
f f
e e f
f
EB-5
EB-1
a
c c a
c c a
EP-2
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
FOAM PUMP HOUSE
a a
c
EP-7 c c d
f
LDB17 e
f EB
e d
f
f
EB-1
c c
EP-8
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
TLF GANTRY
PDB15 LDB20
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
MCC ROOM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
EXIT DOOR
OUTSIDE OPENING
a a
EP-9 b c c EP-10 c c b EP-11

C
EB-4 EB-5 EB-7
b b
b b b
b b b
BATTERY ROOM
11KV AUX PDB APFC TR TR WSDB DC UPS c
RAMP UP 630A
VCB
e
b
b
b
b DCDB ACDB-1
±0.00m Lvl NORMAL SOLAR b EMERGENCY YLDB-2
a e
EB-3 b b c
b b e
c
EB
B b c
c
b
b
EB-6
b
b
EP-16 SOLAR EMERGENCY DG SYN DG AMF
YLDB-1
PANEL
b PANEL-1 SWITCH BOARD PANEL e
PDB-3 a
1600 KVA b b
1IN10 b e
11KV/433V
RAMP UP DRY-CAST RESIN ELDB-3
TRANSFORMER
WITH OFFLTC
PMCC PANEL
b
EB-1 b
EB-2
A b
c c c c EP-15 c c
a a
EP-18 EP-12
b b b
EP-17
c
c EP-14
c c c
EP-13
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
b b b
EP-19 EP-20 EP-21 GLOBAL CONSULTANTS

TABLE 1
TLF/TWD PUMP HOUSE
LDB16 PDB12 MOVDB
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
TABLE 1
ELDB-24 SDB11 FWP
DN DN DN DN DN
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
TABLE 1 FOAM PUMP HOUSE
LDB17
DN DN
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
TLF GANTRY
LDB20
P4 P3 P2 P1
PDB15
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
MCC ROOM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
EXIT DOOR
OUTSIDE OPENING
1500(W)x1500(L)
1250(D) EXHAUST FAN
(CABLE PIT) 1500(W)x1500(L) EXHAUST FAN (FLAME PROOF)
800(W)x800(L)
1000(D) 1250(D)
(CABLE PIT) (CABLE PIT)
C
600(W)x1000(D) 1200(W)x1000(D)
1200(W)x1000(D)
(CABLE TRENCH) (CABLE TRENCH)
(CABLE TRENCH)
BATTERY ROOM
RAMP UP 630A
VCB
300(W)x850(D)
1200(W)x1000(D) (CABLE TRENCH) EXHAUST FAN
(CABLE TRENCH)
±0.00m Lvl
DCDB ACDB-1
ROLLING SHUTTER NORMAL SOLAR EMERGENCY YLDB-2
1200(W)x1000(D)
1500(W)x1500(L)
1200(W)x1000(D) (CABLE TRENCH)
1000(D)
B (CABLE TRENCH)
1200(W)x1000(D)
(CABLE TRENCH)
(CABLE PIT)
600(W)x1000(D)
(CABLE TRENCH)

PANEL YLDB-1
SDB-3
1600 KVA 1500(W)x1500(L)
1IN10 11KV/433V 1200(W)x1000(D)
ELDB-3 1000(D)
(CABLE TRENCH) 1600(W)x1000(D)
RAMP UP DRY-CAST RESIN (CABLE TRENCH) 1200(W)x1000(D) (CABLE PIT)
(CABLE TRENCH)
TRANSFORMER
WITH OFFLTC
PMCC PANEL
EXHAUST FAN
A
EXHAUST FAN
ROLLING SHUTTER
EXHAUST FAN
500(W)x850(D) 800(W)x850(D) 800(W)x850(D)
(CABLE TRENCH) (CABLE TRENCH) (CABLE TRENCH)
EXHAUST FAN
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GROUND FLOOR PLAN

GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
TLF GANTRY
LDB20/Y1
L9 L14 L19 L24 L25 LDB20/B1 L33 L38
L13 L20
L29 L32 L37
L10
L15 L18 L23 L26 L34 L39

L31
L12 L21
L11 L16 L17 L22 L27 L28 L30 L35 L36 L40
LDB20/R2
LIGHTING DIMENSION LAYOUT

PLAN AT FFL +104.700
L2 L3 L7
L6
CL1 CL2
L1 L4 L5 L8
LDB20/R1
LDB20
P4 P3 P2 P1
PDB15
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
LIGHTING DIMENSION LAYOUT GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
PLAN AT EL.+103.350
FROM FROM NORMAL
MLDB AUX PDB
LDB-20 (FLAME PROOF) PDB-12 (FLAME PROOF)

LOC : TLF GANTRY LOC : TLF GANTRY
12WAY SPN 6WAY SPN
L1 L30 L9 L20
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
P1 P3
L2 L31 L10 L21
P2 P4
L3 L32 L11 L22
CL1 L33 L40 L12 L23
L4 L34 L39 L13 L24
L35 L38 L14 L25

L5
CL2 L36 L37 L15 L26
L6 L16 L19 L27
L7 L8 L17 L18 L29 L28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRN BY CHD BY APPD BY
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
Part - 5
Recommended Makes/
Brand
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
LIST OF APPROVED MAKES FOR
MECHANICAL WORKS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
RAJASTHAN
LIST OF APPROVED MAKES FOR MECHANICAL WORKS
1. PUMPS - HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL: (GENERAL WATER SERVICE)
VENDOR NAME ADDRESS & CONTACT DETAILS

KSB PUMPS LTD. 126, Maker Chambers III, Nariman Point, Mumbai 400 021.
Mr. Prashant Kumar (Branch Manager)
Phone: +91 22 6658 8787
Fax: +92 22 6658 8788
Mobile: +91 98212 30248
KIRLOSKAR BROTHERS LTD. 10, Corporate Park, Sion Trombay Road,
Chembur, Mumbai 400 071.
Mr. Pawan Kulkarni (Asst Manager-Industry Sector)
Phone: +91 22 2528 9320-28
Mobile: +91 9619931391
Email: pawan.kulkarni@kbl.co.in
Customer Care Toll Free Number: 1800 - 10 - 34443
FLOWSERVE INDIA CONTROLS PVT. LTD 215, 2nd Floor, Marathon Max Building, Mulund Link
Road, L B S Marg, Mulund West, Mumbai – 400080.
Phone: +(91)-22-25908220, 25908221, 25908222
Mobile: +(91)-9820617767
Fax: +(91)-22-25908222
SULZER PUMPS INDIA LTD. Plot No 9, Thane Belapur Road, Dighe, Navi Mumbai -
400708, MIDC.
Phone: +(91)-22-39130500, 39130525, 39130516
Fax: +(91)-22-27796814, 27796811
BHARAT PUMPS & COMPRESSORS LTD C/o R & C Mulund Works, L.B.S Marg, R mall, Mulund
West, Mumbai-400080.
Phone No: 022-25918779 / 25917342
Fax No: 022-25918825
E-mail: bpcmumbai@gmail.com
WILO MATHER & PLATT PUMPS LTD 101, Centre Point, Andheri Kurla Road, Andheri
(East), J B Nagar, Mumbai – 400059.
Phone: +(91)-22-66910769, 66910779
Mobile: +(91)-9892267876, 9820421086
Fax: +(91)-22-66910780
FLOWMORE LTD. 714 / 715, 7th Floor, Marathon max
Mulund link road, Mulund (West) Mumbai — 400 080.
Phone – 022- 32092134 / 32232135 / 67997964
Fax – 022 – 67997965
E-mail: bommkt@flowmoregroup.com
TEXMO INDUSTRIES Flat No 302, 3rd Floor, Shri Ganesh Darshan
Apartment, Thane West, Thane - 400601, Opp State
Page 1 of 31
RAJASTHAN

Bank Of India, Jambli Naka.
Phone: +(91)-22-25382724, 65971029
BEACON WEIR 1st Flr 8 Sona Udyog Bldg No 4, Parsi Panchayat Rd,
Andheri East, Mumbai – 400069.
Phone: +(91) 28389610, 28378581, 28381938, 65244091
A R WILFLEY INDIA PVT. LTD. 301 Timmy Arcade, Makwana Road, Andheri East,
Mumbai - 400059, Marol Naka.
Phone: +(91)-22-28525533 / 28525800
CROMPTION GREAVES Corporate Communication Division, 2nd Floor,
Stamping Division Building, Kanjurmarg East, Mumbai – 400
042.
Phone No. +(91)-22-7558630, 67558631, 67558413,
67558173,67558000,67558606,25782451, 67558629,
Customer Care Toll Free Number: 18004190505
Mobile: +(91)-9769208606
Fax: +(91)-22-67558669, 25787283
ATLAS COPCO Mahatma Gandhi Memorial Building, Charni rd,
Girgaon, Mumbai - 400002.
Phone: 022 2208 5631
Customer Care Toll Free Number:1800 200 0030
Varat Pump & Machinery Pvt. Ltd. Marshal House, 20, Netaji Subhas Rd, Opposite, Murgighata,
B.B.D. Bagh, Kolkata, West Bengal 700001
RUHRPUMPEN Plot No. G33 SIPCOT Industrial Park,Vallam Vadagal,
Sriperumbudur Taluk,Kanchipuram District,Tamil Nadu- 602105
2. PUMP – ROTARY SCREW

ROTO PUMPS LTD. 54, Ajay Deep Building, 240, Perin Nariman Street,
Fort, Mumbai - 400001, Near Arya Samaj Building &
Big Bazaar.
Phone: +(91)-22-22694604, 22659681
Mobile: +(91)-9987428677
Fax: +(91)-22-22659681
UT PUMPS & SYSTEMS C-204, 2nd Floor, Building No-2, Kailash Industrial
Complex, Behind Godrej Residantial Colony, Off L B
S Road, Parksite, Vikhroli West, Vikhroli West,
Mumbai, Maharashtra 400079.
Phone:022 2517 1490
DELTA CORPORATION LTD. 109, Bayside Mall, 1st Floor, Opp. Sobo Central Mall,
Tardeo Road, Haji Ali, Mumbai - 400 034.
Phone: 022 4079 4700
Fax: 022 4079 4777
Page 2 of 31
RAJASTHAN

Email: secretarial@deltin.com
NETZSCH TECHNOLOGIES INDIA PRIVATE No: 39, 2nd Street,
LIMITED Spartan Nagar, Mogappair, Chennai - 600 037
Tel: + 91 44 4296 5100
Fax: + 91 44 4296 5150
E-mail: info.nti@netzsch.com
VARAT PUMPS & MACHINERIES, KOLKATA Same as above
3. DETONATION FLAME ARRESTOR & BREATHER VALVE (INTEGRAL UNIT)

PROTEGO R-665, TTC. Industrial Area MIDC, Rabale 400701 Navi Mumbai
Mr. Prasad Jawaji
Phone: 91 / 22 / 27 69 11 56
Mobile: 91 / 88 79 68 33 39
E-Mail: prasad.jawaji@protego.com
Fax: 91 / 22 / 27 69 20 85
E-Mail: protegoindia@protego.com
PROCESS 88, Mahaveera Street, Haiderpur, Delhi - 110088,
Near Synidicate Bank, Haider Pur Industrial Area.
Phone: +(91)-11-27495849
Mobile: +(91)-9818237532
Fax: +(91)-11-27495849
PENTATECH 77, New Unigve Industrial Estate, Dr R P Road,
Mulund West, Mulund West, Mumbai – 400 080.
Phone: 022 2590 6384
Pressure & Flow Industries (PRE'CON) Control 823, GIDC Industrial Etate, Makarpura, Baroda – 390 010.
Phone: 91-265-2643838, 91-265-2645727
E-Mail: pfci@rediffmail.com, info@preconvalves.com
EMERSON Delphi B-Wing, 6th Floor, Central Avenue,
Hiranandani Business Park, Powai, Mumbai 400076,
Tel: (+91) 22 6662 0566
Fax: (+91) 22 6662 0500
E-mail: infocentral@emersonprocess.com
WADCO BUSINES S SOLUTIONS (P) LTD INDIA No. 8, Candy House, Mandlik Road, Colaba,
Mumbai: 400001, Maharashtra, India
Mobile: 08080431179
Fax: 022-22850915
E-mail: wadco@wad-corp.com
4. MECHANICAL ALUMINIUM INTERNAL FLOATING ROOF (Non-contact type)
Page 3 of 31
RAJASTHAN

SAI TOOLS PVT. LTD – Eco Tank Systems W9/B, MIDC, Additional Ambernath, Ambernath
421506. Dist. Thane, Maharashtra, India.
Phone: 91-251-262 01 08
Fax: 91-251-262 18 66
E-mail: marketing@ecotanksystems.in,
sales@ecotanksystems.in
TANK TECH ASIA (P) LTD CHENNAI 13, Gopalakrishna Rd, T Nagar, Chennai, Tamil Nadu 600 017.
Phone: +91-44-28151581, +91-44-28150619
Fax: +91-44-28150620
Email: tanktech@carmelgroup.in
AGR PETRO TECH HYDERABAD (HMT) #266-A Road #10 Jubilee Hills,
Hyderabad - 500033 A.P
Phone: 0 40 2340 8088
Email: pvps@agrpetro.com
BAILLIE TANK EQUIPMENT (EMPIRE Suite 7.11, Aero247 Building, 247 Coward
EQUIPMENTS) Street, Mascot, Sydney,NSW Australia-2020.
Phone: +61 2 9317 5900
Fax: +61 2 9317 5911
E-mail: Sydney@BaillieTank.com
(Kousik Kanjilal)
General Manager
Empire Industrial Equipment
414, Senapati Bapat Marg,
Lower Parel, Mumbai – 400 013
Ph. No. 00 91 22 66231120 (Board)
Ph. No. 00 91 22 66231142 (Direct)
Hp. No. 00 91 9903048219
Email: kousik.kanjilal@empireindia.com
FLOAT – TEK - INTERNATIONAL (HITEC 2F, No.10, Lane 120, Dongning Road, East District,
EQUIPMENT) Tainan City, Taiwan, ROC
Mr. Jefer Su
Mobile: 886-6-2365056
Fax: 886-6-2365057
Prakash Chopde
President - Special Projects
Hitec Equipment
(Div. of Kaveri Napthols Pvt. Ltd.)
11, Gulzar, Highway Service Road,
Andhri East, Mumbai 400 099
Mobile: +91 98 200 12168
WADCO BUSINESS SOLUTIONS PVT LTD No. 8, Candy House, Mandlik Road, Colaba,
(ATECO) Mumbai – 400001, Maharashtra, India.
Page 4 of 31
RAJASTHAN

Mr. Abraham Philip (Vice President Sales)
Phone: +91-22-2285 0915 / 2202 2346
Mobile: +91 9820001720
E-mail: aphilip@wadcorpp.com
VACONO E Manoharan: +91 9003009738
hse_projects@yahoo.co.in
manoharan.dubai@gmail.com
herbert.stadler@vacono.com
5. RETRACTABLE PLATFORM: M/s. WoodfieLd; M/s. LoadTec; M/s. Carbis; M/s. Silea;
M/s. SVT; M/s. Kanon; M/s. Emco Wheaton; M/s. WLT
6. MECHANICAL SHOE SEAL: M/s. Roshan Industries; M/s. Reliance Vapour Sealing System;
Pvt. Ltd; M/s. Maitri Industries; M/S. Sai Tools; M/S. Vira Associates; Approved
Manufacturers of IFR Deck
7. FIXED WATER SPRAY SYSTEM ACCESSORIES / FIXED FOAM SYSTEM ACCESSORIES /

BLADDER TANKS: M/s HD Fire: M/s Fire Tech; M/s Vimal Fire, M/s New Age; Any other
UL / FM Approved Manufacturer.
8. GASKET (METALLIC & SOFT IRON, SPIRAL WOUND, NON-ASBESTOS, TEFLON)

IGP ENGINEERS LTD. 79, Valmiki Street, Thiruvanmiyur, Chennai, Tamil
Nadu 600041.
Phone: 044 2442 0608 / 2442 4804
Fax: 044 2440 5152
E-mail: igp@vsnl.com
MADRAS INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS No. 10, Iv Main Road, Green Corner Apartments, Raja
Annamalai Puram
Chennai – 600028, Tamil Nadu, India
Mr. J Kumar
Mobile: 09176694462
Phone: 044-24610971
CHAMPION SEALS Champion Compound,
1st Floor, Champion Estate, 15, Parsi Panchayat Road,
Andheri (East), Mumbai - 400 069.
Maharashtra, INDIA.
Phone: +91-22-2836 7311 to 15
Page 5 of 31
RAJASTHAN

Fax: +91-22-2836 7316, 2820 8686
E-mail: purchase@championseals.in, sales@championseals.in
& mumbai@championseals.in
LEAK CONTROL No. 60 / 10, 18th Street Extn.,
Korattur, Chennai-600 080, Tamil Nadu, India
Phone: +91-44-26246704, 65182250
Telefax: +91-44-26246704
E-Mail: leakcontrol@hotmail.com
UNI KLINZER 9, Chitrakoot, 8th Floor, 230A A. J. C. Bose Road
Kolkata- 700 020; Phone - 2287 2510; Fax- 033 2287 6494
Contact Person - Mr. Biplab Halder (Zonal Manager)
Mobile – 9674165713, Emailbbhalder@uniklinger.com
JAMES WALKER INMARCO INDUSTRIES PVT. 104 Gayatri Complex, behind Mittal Industrial Estate
LTD. Andheri Kurla Road, Andheri (East), Mumbai -400 059
Phone - 022 4080 8080; Fax - 022 2859 6220
Email- info@jwinmarco.com
UNIQUE INDUSTRIAL PACKAINGS (P) LTD 27, Bombay Talkies Compound, Malad (W), Mumbai – 400 064.
India.
Phone: 91-22-28803006 / 28884797
Mobile: +91 9321187194 / +91 9320187193 / +91 9820187192 /
+91 9320187192
Fax: 91-22-28821676
E-mail: uip@bom5.vsnl.net.in & uip.9327@gmail.com
SOUTHERN GASKET PRODUCTS No: 57, Balaji Nagar, Padi, Chennai - 600 050, India.
Phone: +91 044 26542413, 26542171
Tele Fax: 044 26546785 / 26540608 Mobile: 98410 22628,
98844 99969
E-mail: sankar@sgp-gaskets.com, sai@sgpgaskets.com
9. FASTENERS (ALL TYPES CS / SS)

EBY INDUSTRIES 2, Hatim Palace, Tank Road, Nagpada, Mumbai - 400 008
Phone: 022 2741 2346 / 93234 64278
Mr. Ronak
E-mail: ebyfasteners@gmail.com
FAKHRI FASTENERS, CHENNAI 10, Perianna Maistry Street, Perianna Maistry Street,
Chennai, Tamil Nadu 600 001
Phone: 098400 59407
Mr. Ali (098400 59407)
E-mail: fakhrifasteners@hotmail.com
FASTENER & ALLIED PRODUCTS PVT. LTD. No. M-3, Industrial Estate, Gokul Road, Hubli – 580 030.
Page 6 of 31
RAJASTHAN

Phone: +(91)-836-2330062, 2330132, 2330184
Mobile: +(91)-9343411225, 9880527303, +91-836-4252042
Fax: +(91)-836-2300431
E-mail: sales@fappl.com
HARDWIN FASTENERS PVT. LTD. F - 10, Ansa Industrial Estate, Saki Vihar Road,
Sakinaka, Andheri (East), Mumbai - 400 072. India.
Phone: + 91 - 22 - 6692 3537, 4005 3537, 2847 0174
Fax: + 91 - 22 - 2847 2739, 2836 5487
E-mail: hardwin@vsnl.com & info@hardwin.in
JJ INDURTRIES 44, Pragati In Estate, N M Joshi Marg, Lower Parel,
Lower Parel, Mumbai, Maharashtra 400011.
Phone: 022 2309 8600, 0260 240 0454
MULTI FASTENERS PVT. LTD. 986 / 11, G. I. D. C. ESTATE MAKARPURA.
BARODA - 390 010. (GUJ) INDIA.
Phone: 0265 – 640874
Tele Fax: 0265 – 640874
E-mail: info@multifastners.net
PRESIDENT ENGINEERING LTD. 110, Neelkanth Commercial Center,
122 / 123, Sahar Road, Andheri (East), Mumbai – 400 099
Maharashtra, India
Phone: + 91 22 2839 8409 / + 91 22 2839 8410
Fax: + 91 22 2839 8318
E-mail: marketing@presidentengg.com
SYNDICATE ENGINEERING INDUSTRIES Plot No. A-257, TTC Industrial Area, M. I. D. C. Mahape
Village, Thane Belapur Road, Navi-Mumbai: 400 701.
Phone: +91-22-27781191 / +91- 22-25004945
E-mail: info@syndicateengg.com
PRECISION AUTO ENGINEERS 934, Nirankari Street - 7, Opp. S.B. I., Miller Ganj,
Ludhiana - 141003, Punjab (INDIA).
Mr. Anil Kumar Gupta / Raj Kumar Gupta
Mobile: + 91 - 98729 - 76003, 94174 – 49545
Phone: + 91 - 161 - 2532448, 2542171, 2540377
Fax: + 91 - 161 – 2540337
E-mail: studfastener@gmail.com, info@paesteel.com,
studfastener@comeconnect.com
PACIFIC FORGING & FASTENERS 19, “Nakshatra” V. Mehta Road, JVPD Scheme,
Mumbai - 400 056.
Phone No. 91-22-26186070 (6 lines)
Fax: 022 26186077/78.
Email: sales@pacific-fasteners.com
PERFECTT SERVICES, CHENNAI 28 / 2, Jones Street, Chennai - 600 001
Tamil Nadu, India
Phone: +(91)-44-42620678, 42165052
Page 7 of 31
RAJASTHAN

Mobile: +(91)-9840778001, 7418141415
Fax: +(91)-44-25232500
E-mail: perfectservicesmadras@gmail.com
10. VALVE GATE CAST / FORGED CS & SS

LARSEN & TOUBRO LTD. 1, Powai Campus Saki Vihar Road, Saki Vihar,
Mumbai, Maharashtra (Central) - 400 072
Mr. M. S. Rajaraman (Sales manager)
Mobile: 96199 72089
Phone: 022 67053690
Fax: 022 67051727
LEADERS VALVES LTD. 24C / 106, Mhada Complex. Bimbisar Nagar,
W. E. Highway, Goregaon- East, Mumbai-400065
Ph. No. 022 - 26859345,
Fax – 022-26859346
E- Mail: - rmmumbai@leadervalves.com
Kind Attn: - Mr. Rajeev Gupta (Regional Manager)
NECO SCHUBERT & SALZER (NSSL) 422 & 301, Tulsiani Chambers, Nariman Point,
MUMBAI - 400 021
Telephone - 022 - 22823015, 22832381, 22820967, 22823244
Telefax - 022 - 22832367
E-mail - necobby@bom3.vsnl.net.in
KSB PUMPS LTD (COIMBATORE) No 151, Mettupalayam Road,
Narasimhanaickenpalyam, Coimbatore - 641031,
Nsn Palayam Post
Phone: +(91)-422-2468222, 2468302, 2468340, 2468145,
2468173 Mobile: +(91)-9362230661
Fax: +(91)-422-2468232
WEIR BDK ENGINEERING INDUSTRIES LTD. 305 Trade Center, Bandra Kurla Complex, Bandra (East),
Mumbai - 400 050
Phone: +91-022-4215 6370 to 74
Fax: +91-022-4215 6375
E-mail: bdk.mumbai@weirgroup.com
NITON VALVE INDUSTRIES LTD. D-115 Ghatkopar Ind. Estate,
L. B. S. Marg, Ghatkopar (W) Mumbai-400086
Phone: +91 22 67539800 / 6796 9786
Fax: +91 22 67969790 / 6753 9874
E-mail: nitonvalve@vsnl.com
OSWAL INDUSTRIES 3rd floor., Kartar Mansion, Tribhuvan Rd., Off.
Lamington Rd., Mumbai-400004. India.
Page 8 of 31
RAJASTHAN

Tel: (+91) 22-61448000-99
Tel / Fax: (+91) 22-23861642
E-mail: mktg@oswalvalves.com
STEEL STRONG VALVES INDIA PVT. LTD. Plot NO. R-241, TTC Industrial Area,
MIDC, Rabale - 400701, Maharashtra, India.
Mr. Krishna B Bagade.
Telephone: (022) 27690074 / 5336 / 27607005
Mobile: 9223252281
Fax No: (91-22) 27695537
E-mail: mkt1@steelstrong.com
SEEM INDUSTRIAL VALVES LTD 1, A.J.C. Bose Road, 3rd Floor, Kolkata – 700 020
Phone:- 2282 3172 / 2946;
Email-sales@steammining.com
Contact Person - Mr. Sourav Bose, Cell - 98311 54387
Mr. G. Sarkar, Cell - 98301 54757
FOURESS GROUP C-2, MIDC Industrial Area, Paithan,
Aurangabad - 431 148.
Mr. Sameer Kulkarni
Phone: 02431 - 232074 / 232376
Fax: 02431 - 232058
Email: ssk@fouressindia.com
SAKHI ENGINEERS PVT. LTD. 22 Swastik Chambers, Sion Trombay Road,
Chembur, Mumbai - 400 071, India.
Fax No.: 0091-22- 2522 7858
Tel. No.: 0091-22-25220262 / 64
SHIVA DURGA IRON WORKS(P) LTD 156 / 1, Madhusudan Pal Chowdhury Lane
Kadamtala Howrah - 711 101 West Bengal, India
Phone: 091 33 2643 8217, 2643 8364, 2643 9386
Fax: 091 - 33-2643 8730
E-mail: shivadurga@vsnl.net
NUTECH CONTROLS 640 / 6 / 6, Narottam Building, Kapasia Bazar,
Kalupur, Ahmedabad - 380 002. Gujarat
Phone: +91 79 22133122 / 238
Fax: +91 79 22133122
E-mail: sales@nutechvalves.com
AKSONS MECHANICAL ENTERPRISES Plot No. A-72, Road No.22
Wagle Industrial Estate, Waagle Estate, Thane - 400604.
Mobile: +91 9821233682
Phone: +91-22 25813997 / 25826857 / 29200020
Fax: +91-22 28210491
E-mail: vkshetty@bom3.vsnl.net.in, vkshetty@mtnl.net.in,
aksons@hotmail.com, vkshetty47@gmail.com
FLOWCHEM VALVES, AHMEDABAD Flowchem House, Near Sukan Mall, Science City
Page 9 of 31
RAJASTHAN

Road, Sola, Ahmedabad - 380 060. Gujarat - India
Mobile: +91-9825013437, +91-09727742104
Phone: + 91-79-2771 2102 / 2771 2103
Fax: + 91-79-2771 2101
E-mail: flowchem@flowchem.com
GURU INDUSTRIAL VALVES Guru House, W-101(D), TTC,, MIDC, Khairane Village,, Thane
Belapur Road, Navi Mumbai,
Maharashtra, 400 710, India
Tel: +91 22 27612005
Fax: +91 22 27686368
SANMAR ENGG – XOMOX VALVES 9, Cathedral Road,
Chennai - 600 086, Tamil Nadu, India.
Tel.: + 91 44 2812 8500
Fax.: + 91 44 2811 1902
Email: reachus@sanmargroup.com
HINA INDUSTRIES 9, Meldi Estate, NR. Gota Over Bridge, Gota,
Ahmedabad -382 481. Gujarat, India
Mobile: +91-9825078717 / 9426172362
Telephone: +91-79-6525 0528 / 29
Fax: +91-2717-241746
Email: hinaind.valve@gmail.com
11. VALVE NON-RETURN / CHECK / GLOBE / BALL CAST CS & SS

LARSEN & TOUBRO LTD. Same as above
LEADERS VALVES LTD. Same as above
NECO SCHUBERT & SALZER Same as above
KSB PUMPS LTD (COIMBATORE) Same as above
WEIR BDK ENGINEERING INDUSTRIES LTD. Same as above
NITON VALVE INDUSTRIES LTD. Same as above
OSWAL INDUSTRIES Same as above
STEEL STRONG VALVES INDIA PVT. LTD. Same as above
SEEM INDUSTRIAL VALVES LTD 1, A. J. C. Bose Road, 3rd. floor.
Kolkata- 700020
Tel: 2282 3172 / 2946.
Fax: 91-33-2282 8266.
Email: sales@steammining.com / info@steammining.com
SAKHI ENGINEERS PVT. LTD. Same as above
Page 10 of 31
RAJASTHAN

SHIVA DURGA IRON WORKS(P) LTD. Same as above
NUTECH CONTROLS Same as above
FOURESS GROUP Same as above
AKSONS MECHANICAL ENTERPRISES, Same as above
HI TECH VALVES, CHENNAI Same as above
FLOWCHEM VALVES, AHMEDABAD Same as above
GURU INDUSTRIAL VALVES Same as above
SANMAR ENGG – XOMOX VALVES Same as above
HINA INDUSTRIES Same as above
12. VALVE BUTTERFLY (CARBON STEEL)

ADVANCE VALVES PVT. LTD. 142 A & B,
Noida Special Economic Zone,
NOIDA, Phase II - 201 305 (India)
Tel: +91 120 479 6900
Fax: +91 120 479 6948
LEADERS VALVES LTD. Same as above
INTERVALVE (INDIA) LTD. 212 / 2, Hadapsar, Off Soli Poonawalla Road, Pune
411 028
Tel: 91-20-2699 3900, 2699 3904
Fax: 91-20-2699 3921
E-Mail: intervalve@poonawallagroup.com
Contact Persons:
For Butterfly Valves: Mr. Ravi Swami Nathan
For GGC & Ball Valves: Mr. Jyoti Anand
CRANE PROCESS CONTROLS PVT. LTD. Plot No E/7 E 8/2, Bus Stop Road, MIDC Satara,
Satara - 415004, Old MIDC
Phone: +(91)-2162-245623, 244417
Fax: +(91)-2162-245126
WEIR BDK ENGINEERING INDUSTRIES LTD. Same as above
LARSEN EE TOUBRO LTD. Same as above
TYCO VALVES EE CONTROLS INDIA PVT. LTD. Plot No R 701, TTC Industrial Area, MIDC, Rabale,
Navi Mumbai – 400701
Phone: 022 - 66903200, 27607002, 27607003
E-mail: tvcindia@tyco-valves.com
INSTRUMENTATION LTD. (PALGHAT) Kanjikode West, Palakkad, Kerala - 678 623.
Tel: 91-491- 2566127 / 128 / 129 / 130, 2567128 / 129,
2566133
Fax: 91-491- 2566135, 2566240
Page 11 of 31
RAJASTHAN

E-mail: contact@ilpgt.com
SHIVA DURGA IRON WORKS(P) LTD - Same as above
NUTECH CONTROLS Same as above
FOURESS GROUP Same as above
FLOWCHEM VALVES, AHMEDABAD Same as above
FLUIDINE VALVES CO. PVT. LTD. 401 - A, Poonam Chambers,
115, Dr. Annie Besant Road, Worli, Mumbai 400 018 India
Phone: +91 22 2494 4057 / 2494
Fax: +91 22 2494 4059
E-mail: fluidline@hathway.com
13. FLANGE FORGED (CARBON / STAINLESS STEEL / GROOVED / THREADED)

CD ENGINEERING CO. C - 199, Bulandshahr Road Industrial Area,
Ghaziabad -201009, India
Phone: +91.120.2866315 – 17,
Fax: + 91.120.2866319
Corporate e-mail: cdec@vsnl.com
Mail us at: info@cdengg.com
CD INDUSTRIES (GHAZIABAD) 3, South of GT Road, BRIA,
Ghaziabad – 201009, Uttar Pradesh, India
Telephone No.: 0091-120-2866744, 2866369
Fax No.: 0091-120-2866743
E-Mail: info@cdind.org
CHAUDHRY HAMMER WORKS LTD. Near Hapur Road Flyover, Maliwara
Ghaziabad – 201 001, Uttar Pradesh, India
Phone +91 120 4388000
Fax +91 120 4376971
E-Mail chw@chwforge.com
ECHJAY FORGINGS PVT. LTD. (MUMBAI) 603 - 604, Raheja Chambers, 213, Backbay
Reclamation,
Nariman Point, Mumbai 400 021, India.
Ph: 91 (22) 4077 0000
Fax: 91(22) 2283 1831
Email: echjay@echjay.com
ECHJAY INDUSTRIES PVT. LTD. (RAJKOT) 83, Bajaj Bhavan, Nariman Point,
Mumbai 400 021, India.
Phone: +91-22-22024044: 22028674: 22021221: 22021008
Fax: +91-22-22045685
Telex: 04-82136 HJIN
Cable: ECHOVERSEA, MUMBAI
Page 12 of 31
RAJASTHAN

E-Mail: echjay@vsnl.com
J K FORGE INDUSTRIES 122, Narayan Dhuru Street, Ground Floor, MUMBAI - 400 003.
Phone: 2345 1284 / 2343 9210, Fax: (91-22) 2342 6901
E-mail: mailto: jkforge@hotmail.com, contact@jkforge.com
KUNJ FORGINGS 6 K. M. Mile Stone, Chapparola Distt. Gautam
Budh Nagar, (U.P.), INDIA
Phone: +91-120-4292692, 4292693, 4292694, +91-4292695,
4292696
Fax: +91-120-4292699. 4755888
Board: +91-120-4755900
E-mail: kunj@kunjforge.in
M S FITTINGS MFG. CO. PVT. LTD. 17, Weston St. Kolkata-700013, India
Phone: +91-033-2236-2869, 2236-2902 / 3
Fax: +91-033-2225-2103
E-Mail: headoffice@msfittings.com
PRADEEP METAL LTD. Pradeep Metals Limited
R-205 MIDC, Rabale, Navi Mumbai 400701, India
T: +91 22 2769 1026
F: +91 22 2769 1123
METAL FORGINGS PVT. LTD. B-1, Mayapuri Industrial Area Phase I, Delhi -
110064, near Maya puri chowk.
Phone: +91 11 28114458, 28114376, 41833100, 41833101,
41833103
Mobile: +91 9818032923, +91 9811787560
E-mail: jindal_akj@rediffmail.com
R N GUPTA & CO. LTD. 704, 7th Floor, DLF Tower-B, Jasola
New Delhi-110044.
Ph: 91-11-41090575
Tete phone: 0091-161-5246900
E-mail: info@rngupta.com, works2@rngupta.com,
marketing1@rngupta.com
PUNJAB STEEL WORKS B-38, Mayapuri Industrial Area, Delhi - 110064, Phase-1
Phone: +(91)-11-28111600, 28111700, 28113700
Fax: +(91)-11-28111300, 28112300
GAYATRI FORGE, MUMBAI 59, Mohamed Ali Road, 2nd Floor, Mumbai - 400 003.
Telefax: 23443 511, 23443 495, 23465 819
Email: gayatrif@vsnl.com
Email: gayatrif1@gmail.com
SINGHAL ENGINEERS, MUMBAI 292 / 3, Boat Hard Road, Opp. Abhyudaya Co-Op. Bank Ltd.,
Reay Road (East), Mumbai-400 010
Phone: +91-22-23721017
Fax: +91-22-23719518
E-mail: singhalngg@vsnl.net, manoj@snengineers.com
Page 13 of 31
RAJASTHAN

HAJI IRON AND STEEL WORKS, CHENNAI Address: 25, Kumbalamman Koil Street, Tondiarpet, Chennai -
600 081. Tamilnadu, India.
Phone: 044 - 2595 4953.
Fax: 044 - 2595 1461.
Email: hajiiron@yahoo.com
STEEL TUBES INDIA Ashtavinayak Building, Office No. 303, 3rd Floor, Sadanand
Wadi, V. P. Road, Girgaum, Mumbai - 400 004, Maharashtra,
India.
Phone: +91 22 61432000 (30 Lines), 23895908, 23822821,
66393996
Fax: +91 22 23895906
E-mail: stindia@vsnl.com
PERFECT SERVICES LTD. NO: 28 / 2, JONES STREET, PARRYS, Chennai - 600 001, Tamil
Nadu, India
Mr. PRAKASH JAIN (+917418141415)
Ph: 91-44-42620678 / 42165052
SUPER FORGE PVT. LTD. Bombay Taximen Society Limited, 3- C/16, LBS
Marg, Kurla West Mumbai – 400 070, Maharashtra, India
Mobile: 09867629721, Phone: 022-26503402
14. FITTINGS INCLUDING HALF COUPLING AND NIPPLE

COMMERCIAL SUPPLY AGENCY 211, Nagdevi St. Jamal Bldg., 2nd Flr., Mumbai, Maharashtra –
400 003,
Phone - 022-3400072; Fax -022-3429868
EBY INDUSTRIES Address: PLOT NO. C-19/4, MIDC INDL AREA TALOJA, NEAR
DENA BANK, Taloja - 410 208, Maharashtra
Contact Person - Mr. R. Mamawalla (+91 9323464278)
M S FITTINGS Address: 17, Weston St. Kolkata - 700 013, India
Phone: 033-2236-2869, 2236-2902 / 3
Fax: 033-2225-2103
Email: headoffice@msfittings.com
TEEKAY TUBES Address: Plot No C-102, TTC Industrial Area, Village - Pawane
Off – Thane Belapur Road, Navi Mumbai - 400 705.
Phone – 022 4141 7777 / 6633 1010; Fax - 022 4141 7700
Email - sales@teekay.co.in
Page 14 of 31
RAJASTHAN

TUBE PRODUCTS INCORPORATE PLOT NO. 748 / 7, G.I.D.C. ESTATE, MAKARPURA, Vadodara -
391243, Gujarat, India
Contact Person: Mr. Janak Katakia,
Phone No. - 0265-6545211 / 12 / 13 / 3049640 / 3049644
Fax No. - 0265-2831031
15. PIPE CARBON STEEL (INDIAN STANDARD)

ADVANCE STEEL TUBE LTD. 81, F.I.E. Patparganj, Delhi - 110 092
Phone: 011- 43041400
Fax: 011-22145978
E-Mail: info@tirupatipipes.com, info@advance.co.in
ASIAN MILLS PVT. LTD. 104, Sakar-III, Near Income Tax
Circle, Ahmedabad-380014, Gujarat, India
Tel: +91-079-27582515 / 16 / 17
Fax: +91-079-27546320
Email: info@asiansteels.com
JINDAL PIPES LTD. 402, Sarjan Plaza,
100, Dr. Annie Besant Road, Opp Telco Showroom,
Worli, Mumbai - 400 018 (India)
Tel.: +91 22 24902570 / 72 / 74
Fax: +91 22 24925473
Email: mslmum@mtnl.net.in
LALIT PROFILES & STEEL INDUSTRIES LTD. 212, Hermes Atrium,
Sector - 11, C.B.D. Belapur, Navi Mumbai - 400 614,
Tel: +91 22 2756 11 69
Fax: +91 22 2756 1173
Email: info@lalitsawpipes.com
JOTINDRA STEEL & TUBES Same as above
MAHARASHTRA SEAMLESS LTD. 402 Sarjan Plaza, Dr Annie Besant Road, Worli,
Mumbai - 400018, Opposite Telco Showroom
Phone: +(91)-22-24902570, 24902572, 24902574, 24902576
Fax: +(91)-22-24925473
MAN INDUSTRIES (I) LTD. Man House, 101, S.V. Road, Vile Parle (W),
Mumbai - 400 056. INDIA.
Tel: +91-22-6647 7500
Fax: +91-22-6647 7600
Email: enquiry@maninds.org,
Web site: www.mangroup.com
MUKAT PIPE LTD. Surindra House, M V Road, Andheri East, Mumbai - 400 072,
Safed Pool
Page 15 of 31
RAJASTHAN

Phone: +(91)-22-28515940
Fax: +(91)-22-28510129
NORTH EASTERN TUBES LTD. D. D. Tower, 5th Floor, Christian Basti
G. S. Road, Guwahati - 781 005
Assam, INDIA
Phone: 91-361-234 3951 / 234 3952
Fax: 91-361-234 3953
E-mail: netl@nezonesteel.com
Contact Person
Mr. S. M. Agarwal - Director,
Ph: 91-361-234 3946,
Mobile: 98640 28740
E-mail: smagarwal@nezonesteel.com
RATNAMANI METALS & TUBES LTD. Address: Panchsheel Plaza, ‘B’ Wing, 2nd Floor, 55, Gamdevi
Road, Near Dharam Palace, Mumbai – 400 007
Telephone: +91-22-43334555
Fax: +91-22-43334575
E-mail: info.mumbai@ratnamani.com
STEEL TUBES INDIA Same as above
SURYA ROSHNI LTD. Hollow Section & Cr Strip), Prakash Nagar, Delhi - Rohtak
Road, Bhadurgarh – 124 507 (Haryana) India
Phone: +91 1276 241540, 241980 / 81 / 82
Fax: +91 01276 241886
E-mail: surya@sroshni.com
SWASTIK PIPES LTD. 1/23 B Asaf Ali Road, New Delhi – 110 002
Phone: + 91-11-47471717
Fax: + 91-11-47471718
E-mail: info@swastikpipes.com
TATA IRON STEEL LTD. Bombay House, 24, Homi Mody Street, Mumbai - 400 001
Ph: 91 022 66658282
WELSPUN GUJRAT STAHL ROHREN LTD. Address: Welspun City, Tal. Anjar, District Kutch, Gujarat 370
110, INDIA
Tel: +91 2836 662222
Fax: +91 2836 279060
Email: sales_wcl@welspun.com
ESSAR INDIA LIMITED Essar House, 11, Keshavrao Khadye Marg, Mahalaxmi
Mumbai 400 034, Maharashtra, India
Telephone: +91-22-66601100
Fax: +91-22-66601809
PRAKASH STEELAGE LTD 701, Mahalaxmi Chambers, Near Mahalaxmi Temple,
Dr. Bhulabhai Desai Road, Mumbai - 400 026
Tel: +91-22-6613 4500
Fax: +91-22-6613 459
Page 16 of 31
RAJASTHAN

E-mail: sales@prakashsteelage.com
16. PIPES & TUBES (API STANDARDS)

JINDAL PIPES LTD. Same as above
LALIT PROFILES & STEEL INDUSTRIES LTD. Same as above
LLYODS METALS & ENGINEERS LTD. Trade World, 'C' Wing, 16th Floor, Kamala City, Lower Parel,
Mumbai - 400 013.
PHONE: +91-22-30418111 / 06
FAX: 91-22-30418260 / 59
E Mail: vvshettigar@lloyds.in, svnagraj@lloyds.in,
hsmishra@lloyds.in
MAHARASHTRA SEAMLESS LTD. Same as above
MAN INDUSTRIES (I) LTD. Same as above
MUKAT TANKS & VESSELS LTD. Same as above
NORTH EASTERN TUBES LTD. Same as above
RATNAMANI METALS & TUBES LTD. Same as above
SURYA ROSHNI LTD. Same as above
WELSPUN GUJRAT STAHL ROHREN LTD. Same as above
JOTINDRA STEEL & TUBES Address: 14/3, Mathura Road, Near Mewla Maharajpur Village,
Sector 45, Faridabad-121003 (Haryana)
Phone: +91-129-2477888, 2272416, 2252356
Telefax: +91-129-2477898
E-mail: jotindra@jotindra.com
ASIAN MILLS Same as above
ESSAR INDIA LTD Same as above
17. PIPE CARBON STEEL (SEAMLESS TO ASTM STANDARD)

HEAVY METALS & TUBES LIMITED (MEHSANA) 12, SKM House, 6th Khetwadi, Mumbai - 400 004.
+91- 22 - 2386 1761/ 2380 2232
hitesh@heavytubes.com, hmtbby@heavytubes.com
MAHALAXMI SEAMLESS LTD. 54-A Virwani Industrial Estate,
Western Express Highway Goregoan (E), Mumbai 400 063.
Tel: +91-22-65013491/92
Fax: +91 22 67048987
e-mail- enquiry@mahatubes.co
Page 17 of 31
RAJASTHAN

MAHARASHTRA SEAMLESS LTD. Same as above
PSL LTD Address: PSL Tower, Makwana Rd, Gamdevi, Marol Naka,
Andheri East, Mumbai 400059
Phone: 022 6644 7777, 6644 7788
Fax: 022 6644 7700, 6644 7711
E-mail: psl@pslltd.co.in
JINDAL Same as above
INDIAN SEAMLESS METAL TUBES LTD ISMT Limited
Lunkad Tower, Viman Nagar, Pune – 14
Tel: +91 20 414 341 00 / 01, +91 20 660 249 01 / 02 / 03 / 04
Fax: +91 20 266 307 79
E-mail: enquiry@ismt.co.in
18. PIPE SS & TUBES (SEAMLESS & WELDED TO ASTM STANDARD)

HEAVY METALS & TUBES LIMITED (MEHSANA) Same as above
REMI ENGINEERING WORKS Remi House, 11, Cama Industrial Estate, Walbhat
Road, Goregaon East, Mumbai – 400 063. India
Tel.: +91 - 22 - 4058 9888 / 800
Fax: +91 - 22 - 2685 3868
E-mail: remiprocess@remigroup.com
RATNAMANI METALS & TUBES LTD. Same as above
SANDVIK ASIA LTD. Sandvik India Pvt Ltd
Mumbai Pune Road, Dapodi, Pune - 411 012
PHONE: +91 20 27104800
FAX: +91 20 27145339
SAW PIPES LTD. NASIK A-59 / 60, M I D C, Malegaon Sinnar, Malegaon
Sinnar, Nashik, Maharashtra 422 103
Phone: 0253 223 0239
CHOKSI TUBE COMPANY CO. LTD. Office no - 801, 8th Floor, samruddhi building, old gujarat
High Court, Opposite Sakar - 3, Navrangpura, Ahmedabad -
380 014, Gujarat,
Mr. Jayesh Choksi (Senior Manager Finance)
Mobile: +919327584494
Phone: 91-79-30082532 / 30082533
PRAKASH STEELAGE LTD. Same as above
SURAJ STAINLESS LTD. ‘Suraj House’ Opp. Usmanpura Garden, Ashram
Road, Ahmedabad. Pin – 380 014, Gujarat
Tel: +91-79-27540720, 27540721
Page 18 of 31
RAJASTHAN

Fax: +91-79-27540722
E-mail: domestic@surajgroup.com, purchase@surajgroup.com
19. EXPANSION BELLOW (RUBBER / CANVAS)

KEILD ELENTOFF 4th Flr. Churchgate Hse 32 - 34 V N Rd Fort-1
Mumbai – 400 001
T: +91 96191 81907
E: kebom@keldindia.com
ATHULYA BELLOWS & ENGINEERING PVT. LTD. B-3, Sahajanand Appt., Near Ward Office No. 6,
Old Padra Road, Vadodara-20.(Gujarat), India.
Phone: (91) 0265 2344238, 5544238
Fax: (91) 0265 2352805
E-mail: response@athulyabellow.com,
athulyabello@satyam.net.in
ALFA FLEXITUBES PVT. LTD. Saurabh Tondon (Director-Intl. Business)
1726 & 1743, Modern Industrial Estate
Bahadurgarh - 124507, Haryana, India
Call Us: 08588831099
Mobile: +(91)-9873965080, +(91)-9811209178
Telephone: +(91)-(1276)-268119, +(91)-(1276)-267175
Fax: +(91)-(11)-25261475, +(91)-(1276)-267134
AREA FLEXIBLE INDUSTRIES No. 1-B, Kailash Nagar, Near Sadiq- Ki- Pulia
Pratap Vihar Santosh Medical Hospital Ghaziabad,
Ghaziabad – 201001, Uttar Pradesh, India
M. K. Ansari
Call Us: 08042907673
FLEXICAN BELLOWS & HOSES PVT LTD 283, G I D C, Makarpura, Makarpura, Vadodara,
Gujarat 390010
Phone:0265 263 4614
Himanshu Mistry
Mob: 09377114220, 0265-3043200
20. MS STRUCTURAL STEEL

SAIL IISCO House - 5TH Floor,50 Jawaharlal Nehru Road;
Kolkata - 700 071
Phone – 033 2288 0970 / 3524; Fax- 033 2288 2355
TATA (TISCO) TATA Steel Ltd
Page 19 of 31
RAJASTHAN

52 Chowringhee Road, Kolkata-700 017
Phone – 033 6550 8157 / 8166; 2282 2013; Fax - 033 2282 1687
/ 1813
JINDAL / JSW 6th Floor, East Wing, Raheja Tower, M. G. Road, Bangalore –
560 001
Phone – 080 25559 869-73; Fax- 080 2559 8896
VIZAG STEEL Rastriya Ispat Nigam Ltd
Visakhapatnam nSteel Ltd; Project Office
Complex, Block – D, Visakhapatnam - 530 031
Phone – 0891 251 8026/ 2518446
Fax- 0891 2518460
21. COMPRESSOR

INGERSOLL RAND Office Unit No.31,
3rd Floor (2nd level), Kalpataru Square,
Kondivita Lane, Andheri East, Mumbai – 400 059
Tel: +91 22 61540500, 1-800-102-7926 (Toll free)
customersupportindia@irco.com, Contact-India@irco.com
KG KHOSLA 401, Kailas Complex, Behind Godrej Residence
Colony, Vikhroli W, Mumbai - 400079
Phone: 022 2518 0089 / 2518 1081
KIRLOSKAR PNEUMATIC Kailash Industrial Complex, 401 - 408, G Wing, 4th
Floor, Park Site, Vikhroli West, Vikhroli West,
Mumbai, Maharashtra 400079
Phone: 098190 57249
E-mail: acdmktg@kpcl.net
ELGI EQUIPMENTS Trichy Road, Singanallur, Coimbatore – 641005
Tel: + 91-422-2589555
Fax: +91-422-2573697, +91-422-2589401
E-mail: enquiry@elgi.com
Toll free customer care (India): 1800-425-3544
GODREJ Plant - 1, Pirojshanagar, Vikhroli, Mumbai - 400 079,
Mr. Sunil Purohit
(AGM- Tendering & Estimation – T & D)
Tel.: +91 22 6796 6286
Mobile: 07045536266
Email: spurohit@godrej.com
CHICAGO PNEUMATIC 404 76, Ashwatha Chs, Vasant Vihar, Thane,
Thane, Mumbai, Maharashtra 400 601
Phone: 022 2564 0011
Page 20 of 31
RAJASTHAN
22. PAINT

BERGER Pattanwala Glass Works, Lbs Marg, Ghatkopar
West, Mumbai - 400086, Chirag Nagar
Phone: +(91)-22-25168355, 25167398, 25169414
Customer care: 18003458800,18001036030
Fax: +(91)-22-25166406
GRAUER & WELL (INDIA) LTD (ERSTWHILE Akurli Road, Kandivli East Mumbai - 400 101
BOMBAY PAINTS) Mobile: +(91) - 9892214311
Phone: +(91) - (22) - 66993000
Call Us: 08586970105
JENSON NICHOLSON 107 Udyog Vihar Phase 4
Gurgaon 122 016, Haryana
Tel: 0124-4567777
Fax: 0124 - 4567750
E-mail: info@jnpaints.com
GODLAS NEROLAC (KANSAI NEROLAC) NEROLAC HOUSE, Ganpatrao kadam marg
Lower parel, Mumbai 400 013.
Customer Care No: 1800 209 2092
Phone: 022 - 24 93 4001 / 24 99 2500
Fax: 022 - 2491 943
SHALIMAR PAINTS Shalimar Paints Limited
4th Floor, Plot No. 64, Sector 44
Gurgaon 122 003, Haryana (India)
Phone: +91-124-4616600
Fax: +91-124-4616659
Email: Feedback@ShalimarPaints.co
ASIAN PAINTS Asian Paints Limited,
Asian Paints House, 6A, Shantinagar, Santacruz (E), Mumbai -
400 055, India.
Tel: 022 - 3981 8000
Fax: 022 - 3981 8888
Asian Paints Helpline: 1800 - 209 - 5678
CDC CARBOLINE OFFICE NO-605, TOWUN CENTER 2, 6TH FLOOR,
ANDHERI KURLA ROAD, SAKI NAKA, ANDHERI EAST,
Mumbai – 400 059, Maharashtra, India
Key Personnel: MR. PRASAD MATHEW (Executive VP)
Mobile: +919819271515
Phone: 91-22-27659358/28500321/322
Fax: 91-22-28500323
AKZO NOBEL Plot No 1/1 TTC Industrial Area, Thane Belapur
Road, Kopar Khairane, Navi Mumbai 400 709
Maharashtra, India
Page 21 of 31
RAJASTHAN

Phone: 022 3920 1000, 27787356
Fax: +91 22 27780025
PPP SIGMA KALON (LAGOS - SIGMAKALON LAGOS - SIGMAKALON NIGERIA
NIGERIA) 1a Professor Tiamiyu Belo-Osagie Street, Parkview Estate
Ikoyi Lagos Niger
Phone: +234 (0) 1 843 7408
E-Mail: pmc@ppg.com
GRAND POLYCOATS (P) LTD 204 Sidharth Complex, R. C. Dutta Road, Vadodara – 390 007
Phone – 0265 3064 200 / 201; Fax- 0265 2337 022
Email-marketing@grandpolycoats.com
23. WELDING RODS

ESAB India Ltd. Plot No.13, 3rd Main Road, Industrial Estate, Ambattur,
Chennai - 600 058.
Phone No.: +44 - 42281100
Fax No.: +44 – 42281150
E-mail: kayvee.bcruz@esab.co.in
Honavar Electrodes Ltd. 305 - 309, 3RD floor, damji shamji industrial complex, 9, l. b.
s. marg, kurla (w), Mumbai - 400 070, india.
phone: (+91 22) 2502 0317, 2502 1238, 65008821
Fax: (+91 22) 25100048
E-mail: hel@vsnl.com, honavarelectrodes@gmail.com
Advani Orlekons (Ador Welding Ltd) Ador House, 6, K. Dubash Marg,
Fort, Mumbai 400 001 – 16. INDIA.
investorservices@adorians.com
+91 22 2284 2525./ 6623 9300
+91 22 2287 3083 / 2596 6562 / 2596 6062
D & H Sechron Electrodes Ltd. 5th Floor, Merchant Chambers,
S. V. Thackersy Marg, 41,
New Marine Lines, Mumbai - 400 020.
Tel: +91 22 2203 7663, 4042 8100
Fax: +91 22 2203 7664, 4042 8101
Email: dnhmerc@dnhsecheron.net
D & H Welding A-204, Kailash Esplande, Opp. Shreyas Cinema,
L. B. S. Marg, Ghatkopar (W),
Mumbai - 400 086 - Maharastra
Phone: 022-25006441
E-mail: ho@dnhindia.com / tvsundaram@dnhindia.com
98202 14827
Modi Arc Electrodes Co Modi Industries Ltd. (Electrode Section)
Page 22 of 31
RAJASTHAN

Opp. Hotel Prasant, Turang, Angul – 759 122 (Orissa)
Tel.: (06764) 233318, 329981
Fax: (06764) 233318
Email: infoangul.modiarc@groupmkm.in
GEE Limited Plot No. E-1, Road No. 7,
Wagle Industrial Estate, Thane - 400 604, Maharashtra, India.
Phone: +91 22 2582 1277/0619/2620
Fax: +91 22 2582 8938
E-mail: geeho@geelimited.com
Kobe Steels KOBE STEEL, LTD., Welding Business
Marketing Dept., International Sales & Marketing Sec.
Tel. +81-3-5739-6331
Fax. +81-3-5739-6960
Fusion Engineering Products (P) Ltd, B -16, VIth Phasem, P. O. Gamaria (Jamshedpur),
Dist: Seraikela - Kharsawan – 832108
Telefax: +91 - 657 – 2200713
Telephones: +91 - 657 – 6542444
Email ID: info@fusionweld.co.in
24. AUTO RECIRCULATION VALVE

DARLING MUESCO Plot No. 97 / A, Phase- 1, G. I. D. C. Vatva
Ahmedabad - 382445, Gujarat
Phone - 0 79 25832578 / 25893791; Fax- 0 79 25834392
Contact Person- Mr. Jainesh Modi -Managing
Director, Cell No- 0 9825061383
Email - sales@darlingmuesco.com
NIRMAL INDUSTRIAL CONTROLS (P) LTD. 4, Nahur Industrial Estate, L B Sastri Marg, Samriddhi - 1ST
Floor, Muland (West), Mumbai - 400 080.
Contact Person - Mr. Prakash Desai- Director
Cell No- 098201 90323
Email: sales@nirmalindustries.com
SCHUF SPECIALITY VALVES INDIA PVT. LTD. 6/16, Ponnandamplayam, Kaniyur Post,
Coimbatore - 641 659
Phone No- 0421 22 64 600, Fax No- 0421 2264 643
Contact Person - Mr. D. Sandeep
Cell No- 0 97876 50470
Email- DSandeep@schuf-india.com: sales@schuf-india.com
Page 23 of 31
RAJASTHAN
25. FALL ARRESTOR ACCESSORIES

KARAM INDUSTRIES D-95, Sec-2, NOIDA – 201301
Phone:- 0120-4734400
Fax:- 01202541095
Email:- karam@karam.in
INDIAN INNOVATIX 103, Sahajanad Complex, Shahibaug Road,
Ahmedabad - 380 004.
Tel.: 91 + 079 - 25621329, 25625951
Fax: 91-079-25620895
E-mail: indianinovatix@rediffmail.com,
info@indianinovatix.com
UDYOGI PLASTICS (P) LTD 294 B. B. Ganguly Street,2nd Floor
Kolkata- 700 012
Phone – 033 2225 1470 / 71 / 72; Fax- 033 2225 1486
Email:- info@udyogi.net
Mtandt, Chennai Registered Office & HO:
17/8, West Mada Church Road,
Royapuram, Chennai – 600 013.
Phone: +91 44 4263 2500
Fax: 91 44 4263 2600
Email: marketing@mtandt.com
26. PRESSURE GAUGES / TEMPERATURE GAUGE

A. N. INSTRUMENTS PVT. LTD. 3/907, Navjiban Society, Lamington Road,
Mumbai – 400 008.
Phone No.: +91 022 2308 7395
Tele Fax.: +91 022 2300 2172
Fax No.: +91 022 2307 2867
E-mail: animum04@yahoo.com
WAREE INSTRUMENTS 602, Western Edge- I, Off. Western Express
Highway, Borivali (East), Mumbai - 400066
Phone: 022 - 66444444
Email: waaree@waaree.com
ASHCROFT INDIA PVT. LIMITED Plot 2306, GIDC Chhatral, Ta. Kalol, DIst.
Gandhinagar, Chhatral - 382729, Gujarat.
Phone: +91 2764 233681 / 82 / 83
Fax: +91 2464 233440
E-mail: sales@ashcroftindia.com
Page 24 of 31
RAJASTHAN

GE GAUGES PVT LTD 249 B, DUM Dum Road, Kolkata - 700074, Near Bagjola
Phone: +(91)-33-25486940
Mobile: +(91)-9231520123
H. GURU INDUSTRIES 603, Crystal Paradise besides, Janki Center,
Jeevan Nagar, Opp. Veera Desai Road, Andheri
West, Mumbai-400 053
E-mail: contact@hguruindustries.com
PH: 022- 40106014 / 40106015,
PH: 022-40106014 (Mr. PK Mitra)
PH: 09820016422,
FAX: 022-40106013
GLUCK (INDIA) LTD B / 114 Shivshakti Industrial Estate L B S Marg
Ghatkopar West, Mumbai – 400 086, Maharashtra, India
Contact Person: Mr. Y N Padia (Director)
Mobile / Cell Phone No.: 22 - 25000679
BAUMER TECHNOLOGIES Baumer India Private Limited
Fourhum Centre, S. No. 112 / 2 / 21, 112 / 2 / 64 & 112 / 2 /
72, Opp. RMD Sinhgad Institute, Pune - Mumbai Highway,
Warje 411058 Pune, India
Phone +91 2066292400
Fax +91 2025286835
GENERAL INSTRUMENTS CONSORTIUM 194 / 195, Gopi Tank Road, Behind Citylight
Cinema, Mahim, Mumbai - 400016,
Maharashtra, India
Tel: 0091-22-24454387, 0091-22-24449177
Fax: 0091-22-24449123, 0091-22-24463507
Email: info@general-gauges.com, exports@general-
gauges.com
WIKA INSTRUMENTS INDIA PVT. LTD. A 703 Pranik Chambers, Saki Naka Junction,
Saki Vihar Road, Mumbai 400 072, India
Mr. Sunil Janwadkar
Tel.: +91 22 28575915 / 6
E-mail: wikabom@wika.co.in
MANOMETER INDIA 31, Yogesh Bhavan, Manu Mansion, S B S Road,
N S Patkar Marg, Grant Road, Mumbai – 400 007, 400 007
Phone: 022 2266 2076
27. THERMAL RELIEF VALVE

DARLING MUESCO Darling Muesco India Pvt. Ltd. Plot No. 97,
Phase – 1, G.I.D.C. Estate, Vatva, Ahmedabad – 382 445.
Page 25 of 31
RAJASTHAN

Phone: +91 79 4008 4881 to 4884,
Fax: +91 79 2583 2578
E-mail: sales@darlingmuesco.com
NIRMAL INDUSTRIAL CONTROLS First Floor, Samriddhi, L. B. S. Road,
Mulund(W), Mumbai - 400 080
Ph.: +91-22-67746200, 91-22-25608668
Fax: +91-22-25682771
Email: info@nirmalindustries.com
Website: www.nirmalindustries.com
ASIAN INDUSTRIAL VALVES AND INSTRUMENTS No – b - 16, Industrial Area, Mogappair East,
Mogappair East, Chennai 600050
Phone: 044 2653 1137
TYCO SANMAR LTD. Same as above
TELEFLO INSTRUMENT CO. PVT. LTD. No. 3, Uday Building, 70-D/3 Central Avenue,
Next to ‘Hotel Grand Central’, CHEMBUR (East)
Mumbai – 400 071.
Contact Person: Mr. K Sampath
Phone: +(91)-(22)-25285345 / 25280073
Mobile No: +(91)-9821027547
Fax: + (91)-(22)-25280642
E-mail: mail@telefloindia.com, teleflo@yahoo.com,
teleflo@hotmail.com, fluidyne@yahoo.com,
fluidyne@hotmail.com
MEKASTER ENGINEERING LTD. 2507, G. I. D. C. Estate, Halol – 389 350, Dist. Panchmahal,
Gujarat (India).
Phone: (02676) 220986 / 220706.
Fax: (02676) 220981
Email: mel@mekaster.com
28. ORIFICE PLATE & ASSEMBLY

GENERAL INSTRUMENTS CONSORTIUM General Instruments Pvt. Ltd.
194 / 195, Gopi Tank Road, Behind Citylight
Cinema, Mahim, Mumbai-400 016, INDIA.
Phone: +91-22-24454387 / 24449177
BALIGA LIGHTING Same as above
ENGINEERING SPECIALTIES 30-F Free School Street, Kolkata – 700 016
Phone No.: (033) 2252 5584, 2252 2064
Fax No. +91-33-2252 4718
E’mail esplcal@vsnl.com, contact@espl.co.in
Page 26 of 31
RAJASTHAN

MICRO PRECISION 238, Pantarapalya, Mysore Road
Bangalore 560 039.
Ph: +91 080 2675 0385
Fax: +91 080 2674 3238
Enquiry: info@micro-precision.in
Sales: sales@micro-precision.in
EUREKA INDUSTRIAL 17 - 20, 1st Floor, Royal Chambers, Paud Road,
Pune 411 038, Maharashtra.
Tel: 0091-20-25443079
Fax: 0091-20-25441323
Email: sales@eurekaflow.com
UNI-CONTROLS INSTRUMENTS 22/S, Sreenath Mukherjee Lane, Sreenath
Mukherjee Lane, Kolkata, West Bengal 700 030
Phone:033 2556 4891
CHEMTROLS Same as above
29. CIVIL ITEMS

SN MATERIALS APPROVED MAKES IS CODE REF.
1. ORDINARY PORTLAND CEMENT ULTRA TECH / JP / JK / BIRLA / ACC 8112: 1989, 12269:
/ MADRAS CEMENTS / INDIA CEMENTS 1987
/ AMBUJA / DALMIA / ZUARI / RAMCO
2. STRUCTURAL STEEL - SECTIONS, TATA / SAIL / VIZAG / JINDAL 2062: 1999
PLATES, RODS, FLATS, STRIPS ETC.,
3. MS TUBULAR SECTIONS TATA / SAIL / VIZAG / JINDAL 1161: 1963
4. REINFORCEMENT STEEL – MILD STEEL TATA / SAIL / VIZAG / JINDAL 432: 1982
AND MEDIUM TENSILE BARS
5. REINFORCEMENT STEEL – HIGH TATA / SAIL / VIZAG / JINDAL 1786: 1985
STRENGTH DEFORMED STEEL BARS
6. BURNT CLAY BUILDING BRICKS ANY APPROVED MAKE 1077: 1992
7. STANDARD CERAMIC TILES KAJARIA / NITCO / REGENCY / 13712: 1993
(WALLS / FLOOR) / VITRIFIED SOMANY / JOHNSON / RAK /
CERAMIC TILES HINDWARE
8. ROLLING SHUTTERS / ROLLING GRILLS VINAYAGA / SWASTIK / GAPL / RAMA 6248: 1979
INDUSTRIES / FK ROLLING SHUTTERS /
MM VISION / AVIANS
9. ALUMINIUM SECTIONS FOR DOORS, HINDALCO /JINDAL / BHORUKA / AJIT 1948, 1285
WINDOWS, VENTILATORS, PARTITIONS INDIA / ALUMLITE
10. PRELAMINATED PARTICLE BOARD NOVOPAN / ARCHIDPLY / KITSOL / 12823: 1990
ANCHOR / GREENPLY
11. DOOR CLOSER EVERITE / HARDWYN / RITZ / KADSON 3564: 1996
Page 27 of 31
RAJASTHAN

/ DORSET / DORMA
12. FLOOR SPRING EVERIE / HARDWYN / RITZ / / 6315: 1992
KADSON / DORSET / GARNISH /
DORMA
13. WATERPROOFING COMPOUNDS FOSROC / ROFF / SIKA / CICCO / ACC 2645: 2003
/ PIDILITE / DR FIXIT / IMPERMO
14. FLOOR HARDENER IRONITE / HARDONITE / FOSROC / 9197: 1979
PIDILITE / DR FIXIT / SIKA /
HARDCRETE
15. ACRYLIC EMULSION, PAINTS, I.C.I / BERGER / ASIAN / NEROLAC / 354: 1989, 428: 2000
DISTEMPERS JENSON & NICHOLSON / DULUX /
NIPPON / BRITISH PAINTS
16. WATERP ROOF CEMENT PAINTS SNOWCEM PLUS / DURACEM / 5410: 1992
SUPREME / SURFACEM / BERGER / JP
/ BRITISH PAINTS /
17. FLOAT GLASS INDO-ASAHI / MODI FLOAT / SAINT 14900: 2000
GOBAIN / GUJARAT BOROSIL / BINANI
/ HNG FLOAT GLASS LTD / AIS FLOAT
18. PRESSED CLAY TILES (FOR ANY APPROVED MAKE 2690: Part I: 1993
WATERPROOFING)
19. PRESSED CEMENT CONCRETE TILES EUROCON / ULTRA / DURACRETE / 13801: 1993
SOBHA / DAZZLE OR EQUIVALENT
APPROVED MAKE
20. PRECAST CEMENT CONCRETE KERBS EUROCON / ULTRA / SOBHA OR 5758: 1984
EQUIVALENT APPROVED MAKE
21. GRANITE TILES ANY IS APPROVED MAKE 14223: Part 1: 1995
22. RCC HUME PIPES INDIAN HUME PIPE CO LTD OR 458: 2003
EQUIVALENT AS APPROVED
23. ROAD MARKING PAINTS SHALIMAR / MRF / ASIAN 164: 1981
24. ORISSA TYPE WATER CLOSET WITH HINDWARE (HSIL) / PARRYWARE (EID 2556 / 774
FLUSHING CISTERN (VITREOUS CHINA) PARRY) / CERA
25. EUROPEAN TYPE WATER CLOSET HINDWARE (HSIL) / PARRYWARE (EID 2556
(VITREOUS CHINA) PARRY) / CERA / AMERICAN
STANDARD / TOYO / GROHE / JAGUAR
26. WASHBASIN (VITREOUS CHINA) HINDWARE (HSIL) / PARRYWARE (EID 2556
PARRY) / CERA / AMERICAN
27. SINK (VITREOUS CHINA) HINDWARE (HSIL) / PARRYWARE (EID 2556
28. FLUSHING CISTERN (PLASTIC) HINDWARE (HSIL) / PARRYWARE (EID 7231: 1994
Page 28 of 31
RAJASTHAN

29. EWC PLASTIC SEAT COVER PARRYWARE / HINDWARE / CERA / 2548: Part II: 1996
AMERICAN STANDARD / TOYO /
GROHE / JAGUAR
30. MIRROR MODI FLOAT / SAINT GOBAIN / 3438: 1994
GUJARAT BOROSIL / BINANI / HNG
FLOAT GLASS LTD
31. SOAP TRAY HINDWARE (HSIL) / PARRYWARE (EID
PARRY) / CERA
32. TOWEL RAIL NOVACE / ESSESS / ARK / SOMA /
METRO-SUPER
33. PVC PIPES AND FITTINGS (DRINKING SUPREME / FINOLEX / PRINCE / 4985: 2000
WATER) TRUBORE / KISSAN
34. PVC PIPES AND FITTINGS (RAINWATER SUPREME / FINOLEX / PRINCE / 4985: 2000
/ WASTE) TRUBORE / KISSAN
35. CPVC PIPES & FITTINGS ASTRAL / ASHIRWAD / SUPREME
36. UPVC PIPES & FITTINGS ASTRAL / FINOLEX / SUPREME /
PRINCE / KISSAN
37. GI PIPES TATA / ZENITH / JINDAL / SWASTIK 6631: 1972
38. GI FITTINGS TATA / 'R' BRAND / K BRAND/ UNIK 1239: 1992
39. GM GATE VALVES FOR SANITARY & LEADER / ORIENT / ZOLOTO / NETA 778: 1984
PLUMBING WORKS
40. CP BRASS SPRAY SHOWER WITH BALL ARK-SOMA / PARKO / METRO-SUPER /
AND SOCKET NOVA SPECTRUM / ESS ESS / JAGUAR
/ JAL
41. BRASS FLOAT VALVES WITH COPPER LEADER / ORIENT / ZOLOTO / NETA 1703: 2000
FLOATS
42. CP BRASS STOP COCKS ARK-SOMA / PARKO / METRO-SUPER / 781: 1984
NOVA SPECTRUM / ESS ESS / JAGUAR
/ JAL
43. POLYETHYLENE WATER TANK SINTEX / INFRA / FUSION / UNIPLUS / 12701: 1996 / 10146:
PATTON 1982
44. FLOOR TRAP (NAHANI TRAP) APPROVED MAKE 2556: 1973
45. SW GULLY TRAP APPROVED MAKE 651: 1992
46. CP BRASS PILLAR TAPS ARK-SOMA / PARKO / METRO-SUPER / 8931: 1993
NOVA SPECTRUM / ESS
47. FLUSH VALVES ARK-SOMA / PARKO / METRO-SUPER / 9758: 1981
NOVA SPECTRUM / ESS ESS / JAGUAR
/ JAL
48. PADLOCKS GODREJ / HARRISON 1018: 1982
49. MORTICE SLIDING DOOR LOCK GODREJ OR EQVT. APPROVED MAKE 8760
50. MORTICE DEAD LOCK GODREJ OR EQVT. APPROVED MAKE 7540
Page 29 of 31
RAJASTHAN

51. REBATED MORTICE LOCK (VERTICAL) GODREJ OR EQVT. APPROVED MAKE 6607
52. MORTICE LOCK (VERTICAL TYPE) GODREJ OR EQVT. APPROVED MAKE 2209
53. CHAINLINK FENCING FABRIC ANY IS APPROVED MAKE 2721: 2003
54. BOREWELL WATER PIPE AND FITTINGS ANY IS APPROVED MAKE 4984: 1995 / 8360:
– HDPE 1977
55. BOREWELL CASING PIPE - STEEL ANY IS APPROVED MAKE 4270: 2001
56. SUBMERSIBLE PUMPSET FOR WATER ATLANTA / SUGUNA / TEXMO / 8034: 2002
SULZER APPROVED EQUIVALANT
57. MOTOR FOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMPSET ANY IS APPROVED MAKE 9283: 1985
FOR WATER
58. FIRE BUCKET ANY IS APPROVED MAKE 2546: 1974
59. False ceiling for canopy (150F) RAMCO HILUX, INTER ARCH BUILDING STEEL: IS 513
PRODUCTS LTD. / SPECO - TECH / Galvanizing: IS 277
METACIL, CONWED, HUNTER DOGLAS ORGANIC COATING: IS
/ SONEX ROOFING SYSTEM / INDIA 14246
GYPSUM / METCRAFT / KIRBY
60. Hi-Rib Bare Galvalume, Hi-Rib INTER ARCH / CRIL (Colour Roof India STEEL: ASTM A 446 AZ
Galvalume colour coated, GI Hi-Rib, Ltd) / METACRAFT / METACIL / 150 COATING: ASTM
GI Hi-Rib colour coated roof sheeting CONWED / SPECOTECH / ROOFFIT / A792
/ Gutter / Flashings / skylights. SWASTIK ROOFING SYSTEMS / SATEC /
INDIAN ROOFING INDUSTRIES / DELTA
STEEL STRUCTURES (P) LTD / ZAMIL
STEEL / PRIMEX BUILDING SYSTEMS (P)
LTD / FLEXI TUFF INDUSTRIES /
HARSON ASSOCIATES / UNI MET
PROFILES (P) LTD / METCRAFT
61. ROOF TURBO VENTS DURAFLO / BLAZE ENIGNEERS / AIR
CREATIONS INDIA / GOLDEN
INDUSTRIES / AIRIER NATURE (P) LTD
/ MUKTA ENGINEERS / SWASTIK
ROOFING /
62. INTERLOCK CONCRETE PAVERS / KERB APPROVED MAKE MEETING AS PER BS 6717:
STONES SPECIFICATIONS PART1: 1986 AND AS
PER IS 1237 1980 –
AFTER PRIOR
APPROVAL FROM
NAYARA
63. SWITCHES / SWITCH SOCKET OUTLETS BEST & CROMPTON / MDS / INDO
(INDUSTRIAL / MS) ASIAN / HAVELLS / ANCHOR
64. SWITCHES, SOCKETS, BELL PUSH, Anchor, MK India, MDS, Legrand, GE
ELECTRONIC REGULATORS, ETC PIANO
TYPE
Page 30 of 31
RAJASTHAN

65. MODULAR TYPE SWITCHES, SOCKETS, Anchor, Crab Tree, MK India, Clipsal,
BELL PUSH, ELECTRONIC MDS, Legrand
REGULATORS, TELEPHONE, TV, RJ 45
SOCKETS ETC
66. MS JUNCTION BOX / FAN BOX Homelite, PEW, Gupta
67. DOL STARTERS FOR BORE WELL PUMP Siemens, L & T, Schneider Electric,
C&S, Crompton Greaves
68. METAL CLAD PLUG & SOCKET L & T Hager, Havells, Siemens
Schneider Electric, MDS, Indo Asian
69. EXPANSION JOINT FOR RCC WORKS Shalimar, Kampun Polymers,
JollyBoard, Softex Industrial Products,
Duron Polyvinyls (P) ltd
70. POLY-SULPHIDE SEALING COMPOUND Fosroc, Pidilite, Anabond, Dr Fixit,
Nitobond
Page 31 of 31
LIST OF APPROVED MAKES FOR
ELECTRICAL WORKS
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
RAJASTHAN
LIST OF APPROVED MAKES FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS
HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCH BOARD
INDIA
1. ALSTOM LIMITED (AREVA T & D)

2. ASEA BROWN BOVERI
3. BHEL (ELECTRICAL MACHINES DIVISION)
4. BIECCO LAWRIE LIMITED
5. CROMPTON GREAVES LTD
6. JYOTI LIMITED
7. LARSEN & TOUBRO LIMITED
8. LOTUS POWERGEAR PVT LTD
9. SIEMENS LTD.
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCH BOARD (PCC/MCC)
INDIA
1. ALSTOM LIMITED (AREVA T & D )

2. BHARTIA INDUSTRIES LTD. (DIVN. BCH)
3. CONTROLS & SWITCHGEAR CO. LTD.
4. COSMIC POWER SYSTEMS PVT. LTD.
5. ELECMECH CORPORATION
6. GE POWER CONTROLS INDIA PVT LTD.
7. INTRELEC
8. JAKSON ENGINEERS LTD.
9. LARSEN & TOUBRO LTD. (EL. PRODUCTS DIVN)
11. SIEMENS LTD.
12. SPACEAGE SWITCHGEARS LIMITED.
13. VENUS CONTROLS & SWITCHGEAR (P) LTD.
FLOOR MOUNTING TYPE DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
INDIA
1. ANAND POWER LTD.
Page 1 of 21
RAJASTHAN
2. ASSOCIATED SWITCHGEARS & PROJECTS LTD.

3. AUTOMATIC CONTROLS CORPORATION
4. AVONE SYSTEM & CONTROL
5. CONTROLS & SCHEMATICS PVT LTD.
6. CONTROLS & SWITCHGEAR CO. LTD
7. COSMIC POWER SYSTEMS PVT. LTD.
9. ELECTRIC SUPPLY & SERVICES (P) LTD.
10. GE POWER CONTROLS INDIA PVT LTD.
11. GLOBE ELECTRICAL INSUSTRIES
12. HI-TECH ENGINEERS
13. HINDUSTAN CONTROL & EQPT. PVT. LTD.
14. INTRELEC
15. JASPER SWITCHGEARS LTD.
16. LARSEN & TOUBRO LTD. (EL. PRODUCTS DIVN)
17. LOTUS POWERGEAR PVT. LTD.
18. SHIVALIC POWER CONTROL (P) LTD.
19. SIEMENS LTD.
20. SPACEAGE SWITCHGEARS LTD.
21. TRICOLITE ELECTRICAL INDUSTRIES PVT. LTD.
22. TRIDENT SWITCHGEARS PVT. LTD. (UP TO 3200A)
23. UNITED ELECTRIC CO. (DELHI) PVT. LTD.
24. UNIVERSAL INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS
26. VIDHYUT CONTROL (INDIA) PVT. LTD.
WALL MOUNTING TYPE DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
INDIA
1. ADHUNIC SWITCHGEARS (P) LTD.

2. ANAND POWER LTD.
4. AUTOMATIC CONTROLS CORPORATION
5. AVONE SYSTEM & CONTROLS
7. CONTROLS & SWITCHGEAR CO. LTD
Page 2 of 21
RAJASTHAN
9. GLOBE ELECTRICAL INSUSTRIES

10. HAVELL’S INDIA LTD.
11. HI-TECH ENGINEERS
12. HINDUSTAN CONTROL & EQPT. PVT. LTD.
13. INDIANA CURRENT CONTROL LTD.
14. INDO ASIAN FUSEGEAR LTD.
15. INTRELEC
16. LEGRAND INDIA LTD.
17. LOTUS POWERGEAR PVT. LTD.
19. STANDARD ELECTRICALS LIMITED.
20. TRICOLITE ELECTRICAL INDUSTRIES PVT. LTD.
21. TRIDENT SWITCHGEARS PVT. LTD. (UP TO 3200A)
22. NEBUS CONTROLS & SWITCHGEAR (P) LTD.
POWER TRANSFORMERS
INDIA
1. ALSTOM LIMITED (AREVA T&D)

2. BHARAT BIJLEE LTD.
3. CROMPTON GREAVES LTD.
4. EMCO LIMITED
5. ESENNAR TRANSFORMERS (P) LTD.
6. INDCOIL TRANSFORMER PVT LTD.
7. KANOHAR ELECTRICALS LTD.(UPTO 10MVA)
8. KIRLOSKAR ELECTRIC COMPANY LTD
9. VOLTAMP TRANSFORMERS LTD. (UPTO 132 KV,50 MVA)
10. VOLTAS LTD.(PUMPS & PROJECT BUSINESS DIV)
AUXILIARY SUPPLY TRANSFORMER (DRY TYPE)
1. ESENNAR TRANSFORMERS (P) LTD.

2. GUJARAT PLUG-IN DEVICES PVT. LTD. (UPTO 300 KVA)
3. IMP POWER LTD.
4. INDCOIL TRANSFORMER PVT. LTD.
5. KALPA ELECTRICAL PRIVATE LIMITED (DRY TYPE UPTO 100 KVA)
6. MEHRU ELECTRICALS (FORMERLY AUTOMATIC ELECTRIC LIMITED).
Page 3 of 21
RAJASTHAN
7. SHEPHARD TRANSFORMERS LTD.
HIGH VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
INDIA
1. BHEL (ELECTRICAL MACHINES DIVN)

3. JYOTI LIMITED
4. KIRLOSKAR ELECTRIC COMPANY LTD.
FRANCE
5. ALSTHOM ATLANTIQUE
6. JEUMONT INDUSTRIE
GERMANY
7. AEG TELEFUNKEN AG
ITALY
8. ANSALDO ROBICON
JAPAN
9. FUJI ELECTRIC SYSTEMS CO LTD.

10. MITSUBISHI CORPORATION
11. SHINKO ELECTRICALS CO LTD.
12. TOSHIBA CORPORATION
SWEDEN
UK
14. LAURENCE, SCOTT & ELECTROMOTORS LTD.
Page 4 of 21
RAJASTHAN
15. PEEBLES ELECTRICAL MACHINES
U.S.A.
16. GENERAL ELECTRIC CO

17. WESTINGHOUSE ELECTRIC CORPORATION
MEDIUM VOLAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
INDIA
1. ALSTOM LIMITED (AREVA T&D)

2. ASEA BROWN BOVERI LTD.
4. BHEL (ELECTRICAL MACHINES DIVN.)
6. ELGI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES LTD.
7. HEM INDUSTRIES.
9. LAXMI HYDRAULICS PVT. LTD. (UP TO 355L FRAME SIZE)
10. SIEMENS LTD.
FRANCE
11. ALSTHOM ATLANTIQUE

GERMANY

14. SIEMENS AG,GERMANY
ITALY
15. ANSALDO ROBICON
JAPAN
Page 5 of 21
RAJASTHAN
16. FUJI ELECTRIC SYSTEM CO LTD.

18. SHINKO ELECTRICALS CO LTD.
SWEDEN
UK

22. PEEBLES ELETRICAL MACHINES
U.S.A.

MEDIUM VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS (FLAME PROOF/ INCREASED SAFETY)
INDIA
1. ASEA BROWN BOVERI LTD.

5. LAXMI HYDRAULICS PVT. LTD. (UPTO 315L FRAME SIZE)
FRANCE
GERMANY
7. SIEMENS AG.GERMANY
Page 6 of 21
RAJASTHAN
ITALY
8. ANSALDO ROBICON
JAPAN
9. FUJI ELECTRIC SYSTEM COMPANY LTD.

SWEDEN
U.K.

14. PEEBLES ELECTRICAL MACHINES
U.S.A

FLAME PROOF ITEMS LIKE LIGHTING FIXTURES & CONTROL GEARS / JUNCTION BOX, SWITCH
SOCKETS, LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS/ SPLITTER BOX ETC
INDIA
1. BALIGA LIGHTING EQUIPMENT PVT.LTD.

2. FCG FLAMEPROOF CONTROL GEARS PVT LTD. (FORMERLY CEAG FLAMEPROOF CONTROL
GEARS PVT LTD.)
3. FCG-POWER INDUSTRIES LTD.
4. FLAME PROOF EQPT. PVT. LTD.
5. FLEXPRO ELECTRICALS PVT LTD.
6. GOVAN INDUSTRIES PVT LTD.
7. PROMPT ENGINEERING WORKS
8. SUDHIR SWITCHGEARS PVT.LTD.
Page 7 of 21
RAJASTHAN
FRANCE
9. LEGRAND S.A
GERMANY

11. BBC-BROWN BOVERI & CIE AG
12. R STAHL SCHALTGERATE GMBH
13. SIEMENS AG
14. WEIDMULLER LTD.
ITALY
15. CORTEM S.P.A
JAPAN
16. FUJI ELECTRIC SYSTEM CO.LTD.

17. TOGAMI ELECTRIC MFG.COMPANY
SWEDEN
U.K.
20. CROUSE-HINDS (EUROPE) LTD

21. GEC INDUSTRIAL CONTROL LTD
22. M&C SWITCHGEAR
MEDIUM VOLTAGE BUS DUCT:
1. ANAND POWER LIMITED

3. AVONE SYSTEM & CONTROLS.
Page 8 of 21
RAJASTHAN
4. BEST & CROMPTON ENGG. CO.

6. CONTROLS & SWITCHGEARS CO. LTD.
7. COSMIC POWER SYSTEM PVT LTD.
8. DB POWER ELECTRONICS PVT. LTD
9. GLOBE ELECTRICAL INDUSTRIES
10. HINDUSTAN CONTROL & EQPT PVT. LTD.
11. INTRELEC
13. MAHESHWARI ELECTRICAL MFRS. (P) LTD.
14. POWERGEAR LIMITED
15. REUNION ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS (P) LTD.
17. SPACEAGE SWITCHGEARS LIMITED
18. UNITED ELECTRIC CO. (DELHI) PVT.LTD.
BATTERY (ALKALINE)
INDIA
1. AMCO POWER SYSTEMS LTD

2. HBL NIFE POWER SYSTEMS LTD
3. HIGH ENERGY BATTERIES (INDIA) LTD
JAPAN
4. FUJI ELECTRIC SYSTEM CO LTD.

5. HITACHI LTD.
BATTERY (LEAD ACID)
INDIA
1. AMARA RAJA BATTERIES LTD.

2. EXIDE INDUSTRIES LTD.
BATTERY CHARGER
Page 9 of 21
RAJASTHAN
INDIA
1. AMCO POWER SYSTEM LTD.

2. CALDYNE AUTOMATIC LTD.
3. CHHABI ELECTRICALS PVT. LTD.
4. DUBAS ENGINEERING PVT. LTD.
5. HBL NIFE POWER SYSTEMS LTD
6. KERALA STATE ELECTRONICS DEV. CORPN LTD.
7. MEHRU ELECTRICALS (FORMERLY AUTOMATIC ELECTRIC LIMITED)
8. UNIVERSAL INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS.
9. SERVILINK ENGINEERS PVT. LTD.
HT POWER CABLES
INDIA
1. ADVANCE CABLE TECHNOLOGIES (P) LTD

2. APAR INDUSTRIES LTD. (UNIT: UNIFEX CABLES)
3. CABLE CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
4. DIAMOND POWER INFRASTRUCTURE LTD.
5. GUPTA POWER INFRASTRUCTURE LTD. (UPTO 33 KV & SIZE UP TO 3CX400 SQ.MM. AND 1C
X 1000 SQ. MM.)
6. HAVELLS INDIA LTD.
7. INDUSTRIAL CABLES (I) LIMITED.(3.3 KV PVC/XLPE & 11 KV XLPV INSULATED)
8. KEC INTERNATIONAL LTD (FORMERLY RPG CABLES LIMITED)
9. KEI INDUSTRIES LIMITED (UP TO 33 KV)
10. NICCO CORPORATION LTD
11. PARAMOUNT COMMUNICATIONS LTD. (UPTO 33 KV & SIZE UPTO 3CX400 SQ.MM. AND
1CX630 SQ.MM.)
12. PLAZA CABLE INDUSTRIES LIMITED.
13. RAVIN CABLES LIMITED.
14. TORRENT CABLES LTD.
15. UNIVERSAL CABLES LTD.
16. STERLITE TECHNOLOGIES LTD. (6.6 KV TO 33 KV)
LT POWER & CONTROL CABLES
Page 10 of 21
RAJASTHAN
INDIA
1. ALPHA COMMUNICATION LTD.

2. APAR INDUSTRIES LTD. (UNIT : UNIFLEX CABLES)
3. CABLE CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
4. CORDS CABLE INDUSTRIES LTD.
5. DELTON CABLES LTD.
6. DIAMOND POWER INFRASTRUCTURE LTD.
7. FINOLEX CABLES LTD.
8. GENUS ELECTROTECH LTD.
9. GRANDLAY ELECTRICALS(INDIA) (1.1KV PVC/XLPE INSULATED)
10. GRID INDIA POWER CABLE PVT. LTD.
11. GUPTA ELECTRIC & MACHINERY STORES(3-1/2 CORE 400MM2/19 CORE 2.5 MM2)
12. GUPTA POWER INFRASTRUCTURE LTD.
14. INDUSTRIAL CABLES (I) LIMITED (1.1 KV PVSC/ XLPE INSULATED)
15. J K CABLES LTD.
16. KEC INTERNATIONAL LTD. (FORMERLY RPG CABLES LIMITED)
17. KEI INDUSTRIES LTD.
18. KRISHNA ELECTRICAL INDUSTRIES LTD.
19. MANSFIELD CABLE CO.
20. NETCO CABLE INDUSTRIES (PVT.) LTD. (3-1/2 CORE 400MM2/19 CORE 2.5 MM2)
21. NICCO CORPORATION LTD.
22. OMEGA CABLES LTD.
23. PARAGON CABLES
24. PLAZA CABLE INDUSTRIES LTD.
25. PRESTIGE CABLE INDUSTRIES
26. PREW INDUSTRIES LTD.
27. RADIANT CABLES PVT. LTD.
28. RAVIN CABLES LTD.
29. SATELLITE CABLES PVT.LTD. (3-1/2 CORE 400MM2/19 CORE 2.5 MM2)
30. SHYAM CABLES INDUSTRIES.
31. SKYTONE ELECTRICALS LTD. (3-1/2 CORE 400MM2/19 CORE 2.5 MM2,1.1 KV)
32. SPECIAL CABLES PVT.LTD.
33. SUYOG ELECTRICALS LTD.
35. T C COMMUNICATION PVT LTD.
36. TCL CABLES
Page 11 of 21
RAJASTHAN
37. TERACOM LIMITED

39. BHANSALI CABLES & CONDUCTORS PVT. LTD (ONLY FOR CONTROL CABLE)
40. N.C. CABLES LIMITED (FORMERLY NATIONAL CABLES- ONLT FOR CONTROL CABLE)
FLEXIBLE CABLES
1. ANCHOR ELECTRICALS PVT. LTD.

2. BHANSALI CABLES & CONDUCTORS PVT. LTD.
3. DELTON CABLES LTD
4. FINOLEX CABLES LTD
5. GUPTA POWER INFRASTRUCTURE LTD.
7. KALINGA CABLES & CONDUIT CO.
8. N.C. CABLES LIMITED (FORMERLY NATIONAL CABLES)
9. NICCO CORPORATION LTD
10. PLAZA CABLE INDUSTRIES LIMITED
11. POLYCAB WIRES & CABLES
14. SHYAM CABLES INDUSTRIES
15. SKYTONE ELECTRICALS (I) LTD. (3.5 CORE, 185 SQ.MM.)
16. SPECIAL CABLES PVT. LTD.
17. T C COMMUNICATION PVT LTD
18. TERACOM LIMITED
TELEPHONE CABLE
1. ALPHA COMMUNICATION LIMITED.

2. BHANSALI CABLES & CONDUCTORS PVT. LTD.
3. CMI LIMITED.
4. CORDS CABLE INDUSTRIES LTD.
5. DELTON CABLES LTD
6. FINOLEX CABLES LTD
7. HINDUSTAN CABLES LTD.
8. NICCO CORPORATION LTDA
9. PARAGON CABLES
Page 12 of 21
RAJASTHAN
10. PLAZA CABLE INDUSTRIES LIMITED

13. RELIANCE ENGINEERS LTD.
14. RPG TELECOM LTD
16. SPECIAL CABLES PVT. LTD.
18. USHA BELTRON LIMITED
19. VINDHYA TELELINK LTD.
EARTHING CABLES
INDIA
1. ADVANCE CABLE TECHNOLOGIES (P) LTD.

2. DELTON CABLES LTD.
3. FINOLEX CABLES LTD.
4. GUPTA ELECTRIC & MACHINERY STORES.(GEMSCAB)
5. J.K.CABLES LTD.
6. NETCO CABLES INDUSTRIES (PVT) LTD.
7. NICCO CORPORATION LTD.
10. SPECIAL CABLES PVT.LTD
INDUSTRIAL WEATHER PROOF/ HOSEPROOF LIGHTING FIXTURES
INDIA
1. BAJAJ ELECTRICALS LIMITED

4. KESELEC SCHREDER PRIVATE LIMITED
5. PHILIPS INDIA LTD.
6. SPACEAGE SWITCHGEARS LIMITED.
Page 13 of 21
RAJASTHAN
7. SURYA ROSHNI LTD.

8. WIPRO LIGHTING
COMMERCIAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
INDIA
1. BAJAJ ELECTRICALS LIMITED

4. KESELEC SCHREDER PRIVATE LIMITED
7. WIPRO LIGHTING
PRE-FABRICATED CABLE TRAYS (GI)
1. GLOBE ELECTRICAL INDUSTRIES

2. INDIANA ENGG WOKS PVT LTD
3. JAMNA METAL COMPANY
4. KANADE ANAND UDYOG PVT. LTD.
5. MAHESHWARI ELECTRICAL MFRS. (P) LTD.
6. METALITE INDUSTRIES
7. PAREKH ENGINEERING COMPANY
8. PREMIER POWER PRODUCTS (CALCUTTA) PVT. LTD.
9. RUKMINI ELECTRICALS & COMPONENTS PVT LTD.
10. SADHANA ENGINEERING CORPORATION
11. SLOTCO STEEL PRODUCTS PVT LTD
12. SREE ATREYA ENTERPRISES
13. STEALITE ENGG CO.
PLANT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
INDIA

2. HAKOTRONICS PRIVATE LIMITED.
3. INDIAN TELEPHONE INDUSTRIES LTD.
Page 14 of 21
RAJASTHAN

5. TATA TELECOM LTD
6. TELEMAX CORPORATION
GERMANY
7. NEUMANN GMBH ELEKTRONIK
SINGAPORE
8. MOTOROLA SINGAPORE PVT LTD
U.K.
9. GAI TRONICS SRL
TELEPHONE EXCHANGE EQUIPMENTS
INDIA

2. HAKOTRONICS PRIVATE LIMITED
3. INDIAN TELEPHONE INDUSTRIES LTD.
5. SIEMENS LTD.
6. TATA TELECOM LTD
GERMANY
7. NEUMANN GMBH ELEKTRONIK
SINGAPORE
8. MOTOROLA SINGAPORE PVT LTD
STATIC TYPE UPS SYSTEM
INDIA
Page 15 of 21
RAJASTHAN
1. DB POWER ELECTRONICS PVT LTD.

2. DUBAS ENGINEERING PVT. LTD.
3. EMERSON NETWORK POWER (INDIA) PVT. LTD.
4. GE POWER CONTROLS INDIA PVT. LTD
5. HITACHI HI- REL ELECTRONICS PVT. LTD.
6. INSTRUMENTATION LTD.
7. KERALA STATE ELECTRONICS DEV. COPN. LTD
GERMANY
JAPAN
10. FUGI ELECTRIC SYSTEM CO.LTD

SWEDEN
USA
13. GENERAL ELECTRIC CORPORATION

14. SOLIDSTATE CONTROL INC.
15. WESTING HOUSE ELECTRIC CORPORATION
DIESEL GENERATOR SET
INDIA
1. BATLIBOI & CO LTD.

2. BHASKAR POWER PROJECTS LTD
3. BHEL (ELECTRICAL MACHINES DIVN)
4. CATERPILLAR
5. CUMMINS INDIA LIMITED
Page 16 of 21
RAJASTHAN
6. GARDEN REACH SHIPBUILDERS & ENGINEERS LTD.

7. GREAVES COTTON & CO. LTD.
8. HI-TECH ENGINEERS ( UPTO 625 KVA)
9. JAKSON ENGINEERS LTD
10. JEEVAN DIESEL & ELECTRICALS LTD.
11. KIRLOSKAR OIL ENGINES
12. SUDHIR GENSETS LTD.
13. TOYO DENKI POWER SYSTEMS PVT LTD
14. WARTSILLA INDIA LTD.
JAPAN

16. TOYO ELECT. MFG. CO. LTD.
SWEDEN
DIESEL ENGINE MAKE
1. CUMMINS INDIA LTD.

2. GREAVES COTTON & CO. LTD.
3. CATERPILLAR
4. KIRLOSKAR GREEN
5. VOLVO
6. MITSUBISHI
7. SKODA
ALTERNATOR MAKE
1. KIRLOSKAR
2. JYOTI
3. STAMFORD
4. KEL
5. LEROY SOMER
6. KIRLOSKAR GREEN
7. SIEMENS
Page 17 of 21
RAJASTHAN
8. BHEL
MEDIUM VOLTAGE/ LOW VOLTAGE SHUNT CAPACITORS
INDIA
1. BHARAT HEAVY ELECTRICALS LTD (BHEL)

3. KAPSALES ELECTRICALS LTD.
4. SHREEM CAPACITOR PVT LTD.
5. UNIVERSAL CABLES LTD
OUT DOOR FLOOD LIGHTING PACKAGE (HIGH MAST TOWER) INDIA
1. BAJAJ ELECTRICAL. LTD

3. HAVELL’S INDIA LTD.
4. KESELEC SHREDER PRIVATE LIMITED
6. SPACEAGE SWITCHGEARS LIMITED
8. WIPRO LIGHTING
WEATHER PROOF JUNCTION BOX
INDIA
1. BALIGA LIGHTING EQUIPMENT LIMITED

3. FCG FLAMEPROOF CONTROL GEARS PVT. LTD (FORMERLY CEAG FLAME)
4. FCG POWER INDUSTRIES LTD.
5. FLAMEPROOF EQUIPMENTS PVT. LTD.
WEATHER PROOF LOCAL CONTROL STATION
INDIA
1. BALIGA LIGHTING EQUIPMENT LIMITED
Page 18 of 21
RAJASTHAN

3. CONTROL & SWITCHGEAR CO.LTD.
7. HOTLINE SWITCHGEAR & CONTROLS
8. POWER ENGG CO.
INDUSTRIAL TYPE SW. SOCKET & PLUG
INDIA
1. BALIGA LIGHTING EQUIPMENTS LIMITED.

2. CALDYNE AUTOMATICS LTD.
4. CYCLO ELECTRIC DEVICES & SERVICES CO.
8. LEGRAND INDIA LTD.
EARTHING MATERIALS
INDIA
1. ANAND ELECTRIC TRADING LTD.

2. BHARTI EXPORTS.
3. CONTROL SWITCHGEAR CO. LTD.
4. JAMNA METAL COMPANY
5. JAYANT METAL MFG CO.
6. MAHAVIR INDUSTRIAL CORPORATION
7. METALITE INDUSTRIES.
8. METROPOLITAN INDUSTRIES.
9. PREMIER POWER PORDUCTS (CALCUTTA) PVT. LTD.
10. RUKMINI ELECTRICALS & COMPONENTS PVT. LTD.
11. SADHANA ENGINEERING CORPORATION.
12. SAI GALVANISERS & FABRICATORS PVT. LTD.
13. STEALITE ENGG. CO.
Page 19 of 21
RAJASTHAN
EQUIPMENT / COMPONENTS RECOMMENDED MAKE

ACB L & T / Siemens
Switch L & T / Siemens / ABB/ GE Power
HRC Fuse / Fuse Switch unit L & T / Siemens
Contactor L & T / Siemens
MCB / MCCB / ELCB Morarji Dorman Smith/ GEC Alsthom/
Crompton Greaves/ L&T / Siemens / F&G
Datar /ABB
Protection Relay AREVA
Auxiliary Relay Alsthom / ABB / Siemens
Bimetal Relay/Thermal O/L Relay Siemens / L& T/ ABB / Schneider /G.E.
Power
Timers L & T / Siemens / ABB
HT CT /PT Jyoti / Insutech / Silkaans / ABB /Electrical
Control System
LT - CT / PT AE / INDCOIL/ Siemens / Precise / Gilbert &
Maxwell
Analogue Measuring Instrument/ Meters Automatic Electric Ltd./ MECO/ IMP/SIMCO/
Conzerve
Push Buttons L & T / Siemens / Kaycee
Breaker Control Switch AREVA
Selector Switch L & T / Siemens / Kaycee
Change Over Switch HH ELCON / Havells
Signal Lamps/ Indication Lamps (LED) L & T / Siemens / Binay
Cable Gland (Weather Proof) Power Engg. / Comet / Central Hardware
Industries
Cable Gland (Flame Proof) Baliga / R-Sthal / Flax-Pro / Sudhir / FCG-
Flameproof Control Gears Ltd. / FCG–Power
/ FEPL
Cable Lugs Dowel
Page 20 of 21
RAJASTHAN
Power Terminals / Control Terminals Elmex / Connect well

Hooter CANDS / MINILEC
Annunciation windows & Facia Minilec / IIC / PROCON
Cable Markers, Cable Tie, and Terminal Novoflex
Block Marker
Power & Control wires / Special Wire Finolex /Polycab / KEI / Universal/ Torrent/
Delton/ CCI/ Radiant/ Ravin
HT Cable End Terminal Kit (Heat shrinkable Raychem
Type)
Thyristor / Diode Uasha / Hind Rectifier / Rutton shah
Insulating Supports / Busing Baroda Bushing / Kusma Indu /Engineers &
Contractors / Fibertech
Lamp Philips / Crompton / Wipro /Osram / Bajaj /
Surya / Havells
Choke Philips / Crompton
Condenser Asian / ORCEE / EPCOS
Ignitor Philips / Crompton
Certified Exè’ Terminals Baliga /R-Stahl / CEAG – FCG / FCG-POWER /
Flexpro / FEPL
Control Transformer IMP Power ltd. / Indcoil / Kalpa Electricals /
Mehru Electricals (Formerly Automatic
Electric ltd.) Shephard
GI pipes & conduits Bharti Exports, Indian Tube Co. (TATA div of
tubes & pipes), jindal pipes Ltd., Meghjyot
enterprises, Steelcraft
FRP Canopy Pankti Enterprises,Makarpura (Baroda),
Ercon Composites (Jodhpur-Rajasthan)
Pipe Earth Electrode Ashlok Safe Earthing Electrode Ltd.
Airconditioner (Split type / Window type) Blue Star / Voltas / Carrier / Daikin
NOTE:- Make of any other item not listed in the above list shall be subject to Consultant/
Nayara Energy Approval.
Page 21 of 21
6
Part -
Master BOQ
GLOBAL CONSULTANTS
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
BILL OF QUANTITIES (BOQ)
SCHEDULE-A: TANK & TANK FOUNDATION FOR PROPOSED PETROLEUM STORAGE DEPOT, PALI, RAJASTHAN
SL. No. ITEM UNIT QTY UNIT RATE AMOUNT (Rs.)
A Tank
1 SUPPLY / FABRICATION / ERECTION OF IFR / CR VERTICAL TANKS: Fabricating, erecting, welding, testing, painting and commissioning of bottom, shell, wind girders, fixed
roof for cone & internal floating roof vertical tanks etc including cutting, squaring, bevelling, rolling etc, marking the plates for identification, lifting the plates in position by any
approved method for the IFR & CR vertical tanks of the following sizes by hydraulic jacking system as per specification and General Arrangement drawings. All items such as
material, labour, equipment, power, consumables etc shall be supplied by contractor.
Note:
a. Supplying all the steel plates, steel structures & appurtenances required for shell & fixed roof including provision of pressure / Emergency venting arrangement, operating
platforms, supports & excluding Internal Floating roof as per enclosed drawings and detailed Technical specifications.
b. Item rate should include conducting various tests on tanks during fabrication as per attached TESTING PROCEDURE. Item includes Hydro-testing & Floatation testing.
Water for Hydro-testing is in scope of contractor
c. Item includes Radiographic Inspection of welds as per attached RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION PROCEDURE
d. Cost includes STRUCTURALS & APPURTENANCES FOR VERTICAL TANK: Handling, straightening, fabricating, erecting, assembling, fixing and welding all the supplied
steel structures including spiral stair case required for shell & fixed roof including all structures and appurtenances for ALUMINIUM INTERNAL FLOATING ROOF & FIXED
ROOF TANKS.
e. PAINTING OF TANKS: (Including supply of all paints, thinner, material, equipment & labour) Surface preparation by Blast cleaning (using Slag / Shots) and painting of the
following tanks as per details of painting specification given in tender documents. Application for External/ Internal painting for tanks shall be carried out by means of AIRLESS
SPRAY PAINTING SYSTEM only.
Panting Includes:
EXTERNAL PAINTING OF PRODUCT / WATER STORAGE TANKS: Surface preparation by blast cleaning & painting the outside surface of tank shell and upperside surface of
roof, wind girders, roof and shell appurtenances of INTERNAL FLOATING & FIXED ROOF tanks including all fittings and appurtenances etc. providing Nayara logo (3 nos @
120 deg along the circumference of the tank) with tank name plate. Painting Scheme: Refer to enclosed specification.
INTERNAL PAINTING OF STORAGE TANKS: Surface preparation by blast cleaning and painting upper side surface of bottom plates, inner surface of tank shell and shell / roof
appurtenances, roof structurals of INTERNAL FLOATING & FIXED ROOF tanks including all fittings and appurtenances etc
Painting Scheme: Refer to enclosed specification
The job should be done only after providing and fixing double scaffolding system on the exterior & interior side, up to required height using 40 mm/ 50 mm dia M.S. tubes 1.5 m
centre to centre, horizontal & vertical tubes joining with M.S. tubes, M.S. tube challies, M.S. clamps and M.S. staircase system in the scaffolding for working platform etc. and
maintaining it in a serviceable condition for the required duration as approved and removing the same thereafter. The scaffolding system shall be stiffened with bracings,
runners, connection with the tank etc wherever required for inspection of work at required locations with essential safety features for the workmen etc.
f. Job includes fixed water spray & foam pourer system on tanks. It also includes supply, installation, testing and commssioning of UL/FM listed accessories for fixed water
spray system, Fixed Foam pourer system on vertical tanks & Fire Hydrant piping on tank of approved make.
All the accessories (Foam Deflector, Inline Balance Pressure Foam proportioner assembly, foam concentrate control valve, strainers, Medium Velocity Spray Nozzle with
strainer, body/pin & deflector; 1/2" NPT end connection (K value as per design) etc.) shall be as per design confirming to latest OISD 117/ OISD 244
1.1 16 M DIA X 15 M HIGH IFVRT (MS) (As per Drawing No. NAYA-PALI-ME-GA-005) SET 3.0
1.2 23 M DIA X 19 M HIGH CRVT (HSD) (As per Drawing No. NAYA-PALI-ME-GA-006) SET 3.0
1.3 18 M DIA X 13 M HIGH CRVT (FIRE WATER) (As per Drawing No. NAYA-PALI-ME-GA-007) SET 2.0
2 ALUMINIUM INTERNAL FLOATING ROOF: Design, Manufacture, Packing, Transportation, Supply, Fabrication, Erection, Testing and Commissioning of Aluminium Internal
Floating Roof designed as per API 650, Appendix H & as per specifications.
Note:
a. MOC shall be Full Aluminium as per specifications for MS and Appendix H as per API 650
The design & QAP for this item shall have to be vetted through any one among the list of TPI attached. Additionally, the materials required for this item shall also require Third
party inspection / clearance from any agency from the 'list attached. The item shall be quoted for total responsibility towards design, supply, testing, erection and
commissioing of the gadget. TPI for the item including design verification shall be in the scope of the contractor as per list of TPIs given in tender document.
Note:
a. The erection of all gadgets, fixing of the rim seals shall be in the scope of above item.
b. The rate is inclusive of providing required Cathodic Protection for the IFR during the entire period of Floatation test.
c. The rate also includes precommissioning visit to site by the OEM of IFR inlcuding providing clearance for commissioning.
2.1 16 M DIA X 15 M HIGH IFVRT (MS) SET 3.0
3 Supplying, Fixing, Testing and commissioning of COMBINED GAUGE WELL AND POST/ STILL WELL using ASTM A 106 SCH-40 Grade B pipe including all still wells, nozzles,
structural supports, negotiators, gaskets, ladder arrangement, manway forming part of the Combined gauge well pipe as per enclosed drawings and detailed Technical
specifications.
4 SUPPLY, FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK: Fabricating, erecting, welding and testing of shell, end plates, supports, etc including
cutting, squaring, bevelling, rolling, etc., marking the plates for identification, lifting & placing the plates in position by any approved methods for the underground horizontal
tanks of following size as per our specifications and drawings with Carbon Steel plates and all other items such as labour. Rates quoted should include hydrostatic testing for
tank (on completion, tank has to be tested as per standards) etc. complete in all respects.
Note:
a. Item includes Radiographic Inspection of welds as per attached RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION PROCEDURE.
b. Cost includes Supplying all the structurals & appurtenances for underground tanks shell including provision of pressure / Emergency venting arrangement, operating
platforms, supports as per enclosed drawings and detailed Technical specifications.
c. Cost includes Fabricating, erecting, assembling, fitting & welding all the structurals & appurtenances for underground tanks of following sizes such as stiffening rings,
nozzles, manholes, vents nozzles with pipe & its supports, dip pipes, holding down arrangement, mounting stool with accessories for vertical pumps, temperature hatch,
nozzle for radar gauge, earthing boss with GI flat connection from tank to the pits, earthing pits, etc as per drawings.
4.1 2.75 M DIA X 13 HIGH UG HDR (MS) (As per Drawing No. NAYA-PALI-ME-GA-008) SET 1.0
4.2 2.75 M DIA X 13 HIGH UG HDR (HSD) (As per Drawing No. NAYA-PALI-ME-GA-011) SET 1.0
4.3 2.25 M DIA X 5.5 M HIGH HSD UG HDR (HSD) (As per Drawing No. NAYA-PALI-ME-GA-035) SET 1.0
4.4 2.75 M DIA X 13 M HIGH UG HDR (ETHANOL) (As per Drawing No. NAYA-PALI-ME-GA-009) SET 5.0
4.5 1.8 M DIA X 4.25 M HIGH UG HDR (Slop Tank) (As per Drawing No. NAYA-PALI-ME-GA-010) SET 1.0
5 Conducting Bottom & shell Calibration of tanks (IFRVT / CRVT / UGHT) by providing required water, labour, water meter, strapping tape (as applicable) etc.The work includes
pouring into the tank measured quantity of water in the bottom saucer portion up to level of datum plate to ascertain the exact volume of conical portion of tank per site
instructions.
Note: The job involves engaging CPWD / Dept of Legal Metrology personnel towards carrying out calibration of tanks including professional charges & submission of
approved calibration charts. Nayara shall only provide letter to CPWD / Dept of Legal Metrology for allotment of personnel for callibration purposes. Water required for the
calibration shall be arrangd by the tenderer at his own cost & shall be paid under respective item.

5.2 23 M DIA X 19 M HIGH CRVT (HSD) SET 3.0
5.3 18 M DIA X 13 M HIGH CRVT (FIRE WATER) SET 2.0
5.4 2.75 M DIA X 13 M HIGH UG HOR (ETHANOL) SET 5.0
5.5 2.75 M DIA X 13 M HIGH UG HOR (MS) SET 1.0
5.6 2.75 M DIA X 13 M HIGH UG HOR (HSD) SET 1.0
5.7 2.25 M DIA X 5.5 M HIGH UG HDR (HSD) SET 1.0
5.8 1.8 M DIA X 4.25 M HIGH UG HDR (Slop Tank) SET 1.0
Page 2 of 28
B TANK FOUNDATION
1 CONSTRUCTION OF SAND PAD FOUNDATON FOR TANKS - CRVT and IFRVT (EXCLUDING ALL MECHANICAL WORKS)
SAND PAD FOUNDATION: Supplying and providing sand pad foundations for the following CR / FR tanks. The work shall include all materials, labours, tools, machineries, etc.
completed in all respect without and inclusive of all items required to complete the job, as below-
1. Excavation required upto any lift/depth by mechanical means (Hydraulic excavator) / manual means in all kind of soil and surface preparace including compation/ramming
with water. Including all backfilling works, if required.
2. Supplying and filling in sub-base/base with murrum/good earth in layers not exceeding 200mm. Each deposited layer shall be compacted by mechanical vibro roller of 8 to
10 ton capacity and copius watering to achieve minimum compacted density 98%. The murrum/good earth filling depth for sub-base/base shall be kept 2m (upto hard strata,
extra depth over 2m shall be paid extra) otherwise as directed by Engineer-in-charge and site conditions. Filling quantity over and above 2m depth shall be paid extra.
3. Supplying & filling coarse sieve cleaned sand of Zone II or III in SAND PAD FOUNDATION in layers not exceeding 200mm. Each deposited layer shall be compacted by
mechanical vibration and copius watering to achieve minimum relative density 95%. The sand pad foundations to be prepared in desired shape and slope as per drawings.
4. Supplying and filling crushed stone aggregates in filter-1 & 2 and other areas, testing shall be done as per applicable IS codes.
5. Brick pitchitng with joint filling in mortar (1:4) and concrete finishing (1:2:4), before finishing course base preparation and comaption to be done and top/side slope PCC
1:2:4 as per drawings.
6. Supplying and fixing PVC drain pipe, perforation holes to be made with covering the same with mesh, as required.
7. Supplying and fixing 1mm thick LDPE sheet, jointing of sheet shall be leak proof.
8. Supplying and lying anti-corrosive layer of required thickness (min. 75mm) in proper slope as directed by Engineer-in-charge. The achieve uniform thickness, required slope
shall be maintaned below this layer only.
9. All works related to the construction on of product sump-2 nos. (as per drawing), i.e. brickwork, PCC, formwork, RCC (M-25), steel reinforcement, plastering, etc. (not
applicable for fire water tank pad foundations).
10. All other works required to complete the job.
Note:
1. Tenderers may note that the rate quoted should include testing of compacted layers of murrum/good earth in sub-base/base with necessary equipment / laboratory tests etc
in order to achieve desired relative density for the compacted layers.
2. Tenderers may note that the rate quoted should include testing of compacted layers of sand with necessary equipment / laboratory tests etc in order to achieve desired
relative density for the compacted layers.
3. The work shall be completed in accordance with approved drawings, technical specifications, IS codes/OISD norms & other statutory requirements and as per direction of
Engineer-in-charge.
1.1 For HSD Tank (tank dia. 23m & 19m height) PER SET 3.0
1.2 For Fire Water Tank (tank dia. 18m & 13 m height) PER SET 2.0
1.3 For MS Tank (tank dia. 16m & 15m height) PER SET 3.0
2 Construction of Under Ground (UG) Tanks foundations (excluding mechanical works)

The work shall include all materials, labours, tools, machineries, etc. completed in all respect without and inclusive of all items required to complete the job, as below-
1. Excavation required upto any lift/depth by mechanical means (Hydraulic excavator) / manual means in all kind of soil/rock and surface preparace including
compation/ramming with water. Including all backfilling works with available good earth.
2. Supplying and filling in sub-base/base with murrum/good earth in layers not exceeding 200mm (min. 1m filling to be consider), if required. Each deposited layer shall be
compacted by mechanical vibro roller of 10 ton capacity and copius watering to achieve minimum compacted density 98%.
3. Supplying & filling coarse sand of Zone II or III in layers not exceeding 200mm. Each deposited layer shall be compacted by mechanical vibration and copius watering to
achieve minimum relative density 95% (as per approved drawings).
4. 75 class designated Brick works with joint filling in mortar and concrete finishing, before finishing course base preparation and comaption to be done for UG wall and kerb
wall.
5. PCC and RCC in raft/pedestal, etc. including all formwork/centring/shuttering and reinforcement, proper curing to be done for all concrete works.
6. Supplying and fixing of tank turn-buckles with all required accessories into the tank concrete raft/pedestal. Nos. as per drawings.
7. 230mm thick soling below raft PCC.
8. Supplying, cutting, bending and placinf reinforcement/TMT bars in RCC, as per drawings. All structiral works shall aslo incuded in the scope, if any.
Note:
The work shall be completed in accordance with approved drawings, technical specifications, IS codal/OISD norms & other statutory requirements and as per direction of
Engineer-in-charge.
2.1 For 2.75 M DIA X 13 M Length of Ethanol UG tank PER SET 5.0
2.2 For 2.75 M DIA X 13 M Length of MS UG tank PER SET 1.0
2.3 For 2.75 M DIA X 13 M Length of HSD UG tank PER SET 1.0
2.4 For 1.8 M DIA X 4.25 M Length of Slop UG tank PER SET 1.0
2.5 For 2.25 M DIA X 5.5 M Length of HSD UG tank PER SET 1.0
3 Earthwork in supply & filling upto any depth & height for all works with good quality borrowed Earth/Murrum brought outside plant premises, free from vegetation, organic Cum 2,500.0
matters, boulders with all leads and lifts including cost of transportation, loading/ unloading, breaking clods, in layers not exceeding 200mm in depth to achieve at least 95%
maximum dry density as per IS-2720 (Part-VII),and compacted properly including watering, ramming/compaction by manual/mechanical means, dressing etc. complete in all
respect for all Lift/depth and lead. with vibroroller (8 to 10 MT capacity) etc. & vibro compactor in confined spaces, cost shall also include royalty (if any), etc. complete as per
directions of Engineer -in- Charge. The measurement shall be made on the basis of calculated compacted volume of earth, based on the contour surveys of level on site before
filling and spot level after filling to be taken jointly with contractor after execution of work. The contractor shall make good all subsidence and shrinkage in murrum / earth
fillings during execution and till the completion of work. The rate includes for supplying all machineries, tools and tackles and consumables. The rate includes for supplying all
machineries, tools and tackles and consumables.
4 Providing and lying Stone pitching of 225mm thickness to be laid in courses and required profile with hammer dressed stone having no side less than 15 cm, with minimum Sqm 2,000.0
depth of 20 cm including supply of stones and preparing bedding surface complete with filling the voids in 1:4 cement sand mortar as per directions of Engineer-in-charge.
Total=
Page 3 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
SCHEDULE-B: EQUIPMENT FOR PROPOSED PETROLEUM STORAGE DEPOT, PALI, RAJASTHAN
Supply, Mounting, installing, aligning, testing and commissioning of all static & rotary equipment as per datasheet, specification,
manufacturer's drawings, instructions at site.
Note:
a) The cost of RCC foundation, grouting, MS Structural steel etc shall be deemed to be included.
1 c) Painting with approved make, colour, shade including colour coding as per specifications shall be part of rate quoted.
d) Item includes provision of Mill rate fitter, required dial gauges & aligning all the rotary equipment within the tolerance limits.
e) Item rate includes provision of Coupling guard for all rotary equipment & AVM pads for Fire Engines.
f) The OEM Representative must be at site during commissioning of the equipment ( 3 nos of visit)
g) Warranty of all equipment 24 months from supply,12 months from commisioning. To be transferred to Nayara Energy
Supply & Installation of Following Equipments:
1.1 MS Transfer Pump - Motor Driven (550 cu.m/hr Cap. x 65 MLC Head) (As per Data Sheet No. NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-017) SET 2.00
1.2 HSD Transfer Pump - Motor Driven (550 cu.m/hr Cap. x 65 MLC Head) (As per Data Sheet No. NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-018) SET 3.00
1.3 MS Twin Screw Pump - Motor Driven (120 cu.m/hr Cap. x 55 MLC Head) (As per Data Sheet No. NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-019) SET 1.00
1.4 HSD Twin Screw Pump - Motor Driven (120 cu.m/hr Cap. x 55 MLC Head) (As per Data Sheet No. NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-020) SET 1.00
1.5 MS TLF Pump - Motor Driven (180 cu.m/hr Cap. x 65 MLC Head) (As per Data Sheet No. NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-021) SET 3.00
1.6 HSD TLF Pump - Motor Driven (360 cu.m/hr Cap. x 65 MLC Head) (As per Data Sheet No. NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-022) SET 3.00
1.6A 40 Mesh startup-strainer in all above Pumps Nos. 13.00
Fire Water Pumps (DIESEL DRIVEN) - (610 cu.m/hr Cap. x 55 MLC Head) with all accessories like Panel, battery charger etc, Item rate is
inclusive of installing Exhaust lines (150 mm dia or more) for the diesel engines along with the residential Silencers. The item also to include
lagging of the exhaust lines including cladding in aluminium (28 g) (As per Data Sheet No. NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-023)
1.7 Installation of supplied Fuel tank for Fire Engines. SET 3.00
Note: Laying of fuel line & return line is included in this item.
Civil works & Structural supports for the Exhaust pipe is deemed to be included
1.8 Fire Water Pumps (JOCKEY) - (50 cu.m/hr Cap. x 120 MLC Head) (As per Data Sheet No. NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-024) SET 2.00
1.9 FOAM PUMP - (5 cu.m/hr Cap. X 120 MLC Head) (As per Data Sheet No. NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-025) 2.00
1.1 Slop Pump (SUBMERSIBLE) - (10 cu.m/hr Cap. x 30 MLC Head) (As per Data Sheet No. NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-026) SET 1.00
1.11 MS Submersible Pump - (30 cu.m/hr Cap. x 60 MLC Head) (As per Data Sheet No. NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-027) SET 1.00
1.12 HSD Submersible Pump - (30 cu.m/hr Cap. x 60 MLC Head) (As per Data Sheet No. NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-028) SET 1.00
1.12A HSD Submersible Pump - (5 cu.m/hr Cap. x 25 MLC Head) (As per Data Sheet No. NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-028A) SET 1.00
1.13 Ethanol Submersible pump - (30 cu.m/hr Cap. x 75 MLC Head) (As per Data Sheet No. NAYA-PALI-ME-DS-029) SET 5.00
1.14 Water Submersible pump for TT calibration unit (30 cu.m/hr Cap. x 30 MLC Head) SET 1.00
Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Instrument Air system comprising of Air Compressor Rotary screw type compressor, 85
2 NM3 @ 5 bar, MOC:CS as per enclosed detailed specifications. The Instrument Air system must contain: Prefilter (1 Working + 1 Standby); SET 2.00
Refrigerant Dryer ((1 Working + 1 Standby); Air Receiver (2 m³) Post Filter, Gauges, Valves etc as per PID NAYA-PALI-PR-PI-015 and Datasheet
Design, manufacture, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Foam Concentrate Tank & associated system comprising of the
following:
A. Foam concentrate tank (5.0 KL) in 3 mm thk, SS 304 fitted with cover and locking arrangement, vent pipe, fill pipe, level indicator with
suitable transparent PE/PP tubing and control valves (2 no, 3/4 "" SS SW valve).
B. Min 2 no, 25 mm dia outlets per tank for connections to be established to inductors at tanks.
C. Drain line with 1 no, 25 mm dia valve as per design.
3 SET 1.00
D. Tank to be supplied with 1 no 500 mm dia manhole, 1 no vent pipe with sillica gel assembly, 1 no fill pipe
E. Design of the tank to be submitted to Nayara for approval before procurement
F. MS structural staging for mounting the foam concentrate tank with suitable approach for filling/ draining the foam and for operating the tank
for FF purpose .
G. Shed/ cover for the entire foam concentrate tank and its fittings in MS structurals with Galvalume sheet top.
4 Installation of Retractable Platform/ Swing Platform (TT Gantry, Lock-Unlock Shed) SET 17.00
Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissoning of Fall Arrestor System consisting of Shock absorber with tensioner, Wire rope 8 mm dia SS
5 316, Cable Extremity 8 mm dia SS 316 with extremity plates, Carriage Body or Traveller SS 316, Anti-static Full harness, Retractable block SS SET 12.00
316 for TLF gantry,Calibraton Shed,TT lock and unlocak shed, as per enclosed specification.
Supply & Installation of -
6
6.1 Stand post for Double Hydrant points SET 61.00
6.2 Fire Hose Non-Perculating Synthetic (Type-B) as per IS-636 & UL, 15 metre with gunmetal male and Female coupling SET 132.00
6.3 Hose Box including all accessories SET 61.00
6.4 Installation of Hose bank of 10 nos of hose for TLF area including all accessories SET 1.00
7 Supply & Installation of Wheeled Water Equipment/ Foam Monitor
Remote operated high volume long range water cum foam monitor (HVLR) assembly, complete with ratio controler pump, panel, coupling,
7.1 SET 4.00
hose, connecting valve etc.
7.2 Water cum Foam Monitor of 75 NB SET 61.00
7.3 Water/ Foam Monitor of 1000 GPM each (as per clause 4.3.7 (vi) SET 4.00
7.4 Foam compound trolley 200/ 210 liters for 24 m - 30 m Tank diameter SET 2.00
Supply of Aqueous Film Forming Foam (AFFF) 50 M3 [49.5 M3 in 500 liter IBC tank(TOTE Tank),0.5 M3 in 5 liter drum].
a) The AFFF concentrate shall conform to IS: 4989 latest revision & marked with IS: 4989. Copy of IS certificate should be submitted along with
8 Ltrs 50,000.00
offer.
b) The AFFF foam concentrate shall be UL (underwriters Laboratories) listed conforming to UL-162.
9 Supply of Portable Fire Extinguishers
9.1 10 KG DCP extinguisher SET 130.00
9.2 25 Kg DCP extinguisher SET 8.00
9.3 75 Kg DCP extinguisher SET 4.00
9.4 4.5 Kg CO2 extinguisher SET 22.00
Nitorgen Purging System: Supply, installation, testing & commissioning including all Civil, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical & Instrumentation
works for NITROGEN PURGING SYSTEM designed to purge Nitrogen in Foam Piping Network having 3 cylinders of 46.7 L as per IS:7285:Part II
: 2004 with manifold fitted with Nitrogen Pigtails, provision of isolation valves in each manifold, PCV with Globe valve in by-pass valve for
12 SET 1.00
pressure regulation from cylinder along with interconnecting piping, strainer, valves, fittings, non- return valves, pressure-gauges, pressure -
relief valves etc., provision of connection of external mobile liquid nitrogen unit and all activities in connection with erection including hooking
up with foam piping system. The scope also includes first fill quantity of Nitrogen.
13 Supply of unloading Hose with Galvanized wire.(EN13765/2003(E) Type-2)
13.1 Supply of 4" NB,150# end flange connection both end TWG Hose with Galvanized wire (6 mt. length each) Nos. 108.00
13.2 Supply of 3" NB,150# end flange connection both end Ethanol unloading with Galvanized wire (3 mt. length each) Nos. 2.00
Supply of 4" NB,150# Ind end flange connection other end C.S cam lock coupling only female part TLF Hose with Galvanized wire (3 mt. length
13.3 Nos. 16.00
each)
Supply, Fabrication, Erection of stainless steel Safety Shower 3 nos (udyogi or equivalent) with all mechanical/ civil structural works including
laying, connecting pipelines from UG water tank at 3 locations ie 1 no. between Gantry & TWD/TLF Pump House and 2 nos. at Railway siding
14 (at 1/4 and 3/4 distance from siding begining point). Pipeline running approximately 1500mt. 25 to 40 mm dia. , including pump for Job 1.00
pressurisation of the system all time. The scope shall include all works required to complete the job in all respect and as per direction of
Engineer-in-charge.
Total=
Page 4 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
SCHEDULE-C: STRUCTURE WORKS FOR PROPOSED PETROLEUM STORAGE DEPOT, PALI, RAJASTHAN
Design, Fabrications, Supply and Erection of Pre-Engineered steel framed building/shed (PEB) of required area including turbo ventilators with standard post & beam system (all
built up sections shall be as per relevant IS codes), as per particular specifications and consisting of Primary (Built-up) Sections Frame - Clearspan with minimum yield strength
of 345 MPa and Galvanized secondary members having a minimum yield strength of 450 MPa , strictly in accordance with IS: 2062-2011 code and Roofing System - factory made
Trackdeck Klippon galvalume roofing (single sheet without insulation) of minimum 0.5mm coated thickness 550 MPA minimum yield strength of Interarch make (including all
accessories) and Side cladding with Trackdeck Hi-rib 1015 Wall Panels roll or equivalent of Interarch make galvalume (including all accessories, self tapping screw, etc.) formed
from minimum 0.5 mm coated thickness of minimum yield strength of 550 MPa with all accessories like trims, wall flashings, ridge caps, gable, corner, eave gutters and
downspouts including erection and commissioning, all inclusive rate. The shade/colour of roofing and cladding sheets shall be approved by NAYARA.
Note:-
1. The following documents shall be submitted to NAYARA for approval:
i) Structural design calculations including STADD-pro
ii) GA drawings along with Bill of Material (BOM).
2. Design calculations, checked and certified by Govt. Approved Structural Engineer or Agency, shall be submitted to NAYARA for approval. For design purpose applicable wind
speed (47 m/s) and seismic zone (Z-II) of the location shall be considered.
3. Contractor shall supply the structural materials such as columns, rafters, beams, purlins, tie rods, sheets, rain water gutters/ down comers/ pipes, wall cladding/ roofing,
hardware etc. to the site as per the NAYARA approved drawings. Raw materials for steel sections, sheets etc. shall be of reputed make.
1 4. Vendor shall also supply the hardware that are used for positioning and anchoring of the PEB structures to the RCC foundation, i.e. foundation bolts, nuts, washers, etc.
5. All the items shall be supplied direcfly to the project site.
6. Fasteners used for fixing the cladding/sheeting panels shall be approved make self tapping type with metal washer & neoprene washer and shall have matching color
hexagonal head.
7. Gutter size shall be adequately designed for minimum 50 mm/hour rainfall intensity and shall be made out of min. 3 mm thick black M.S. Sheet having min. yield strength of
240 Mpa. Gutter shall be shot blasted on both inner and outer side. 1 coat of Epoxy primer + 2 coat of PU paint shall be applied at both inner side and outer side of gutter for anti-
corrosion. After erection, all joints of gutter shall be coated with anti-corrosive & waterproof paint (Kemper or approved equivalent) over primer as per paint manufacturer’s
specifications on the inner side. Downspouts shall be adequately sized, in adequate numbers and shall be made of 26 G color coated galvanized plain sheet. Each down spout
shall have an elbow at the bottom and shall be supported by attachment to the wall cladding at maximum 3 m. centers, if required.
8. All structural steel used shall be as per IS: 2062-2011 and manufactured by SAIL, TATA, JINDAL or ESSAR.
9. The tenderer shall provide Structural stability certificate from approved structural consultant/engineer with mentioning design life of the structure, which is expected to be
more than 30 years for this building.
10. Hooked anchor bolts (Either J-type or L-type) is not allowed. Straight type foundation bolts with adequate sized end plate/end nut shall be provided. The Contractor shall also
specify the minimum distance of Foundation bolts to be maintained from edge of RCC pedestal as per design pull-out strength of anchor bolts. The Contractor should consider
RCC grade for Pedestal as M-25 for anchor bolt design. The design of RCC foundations is provided in the tender is indicative only and detailed design is in the scope of the
Contractor.
11. Complete responsibility of the structural design of the building shall remain with the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit design basis report for the approval of the
NAYARA/ Consultant prior to taking up the design work.
12. Details of Brackets and beams for support of priduct lines, cable trays or utility pipes shall be got approved with NAYARA/Consultant. Provision for future shall also be
consider while designing the structures.
13. Natural light/Day light panel of Polycarbonate sheet of 2mm thickness over 5% area shall be included in the roof. Turbo ventilator on roof shall be included, preferably in
alternate bay.
14. All primary and secondary members shall be supplied with factory applied one coat of primer, as mentioned below. However, finishing coat of paint shall be applied at site
after erection, as mentioned below. The shade shall be approved by Nayara. The cleaning & painting specifications for the Structural Steel work shall be as below
a) Sandblasting / shot blasting to Sa 2.5 .
b) One shop coats of zinc chromate primer (1 x 40 µ)
c) Three coats of intumescent coating to a total thickness of 750 microns after erection of the structures.
d) 2 top coats as per the instructions of the manufacturer / Engineer – in –charge to protect the intumescent coatings.
15. Civil foundation designing is also in included in the scope of PEB vendor, however it will paid exrta to the contractor.
16 CONNECTIONS :
16.1 SITE CONNECTIONS
a) All primary bolted connections shall be provided with galvanized high strength bolts, washers, nuts conforming to specifications of grade 8.8 OF IS 1367
b) All secondary bolted connections shall be furnished with bolts, nuts, washers conforming to the specifications of grade 4.6 of IS 1367 or ASTMA307.
16.2 SHOP CONNECTIONS
All shop connections shall be welded with appropriate arc welding process and welding shall be in accordance with IS 816,IS-819 ,IS1024,IS-1261 ,IS1323,IS9595, AWSD 1.1. as
appropriate. The Webs should be welded on to the flanges at both the faces at top and bottom for columns, beams and crane girders. Weld material should have strength more
than the parent metal.
17 ROOF & WALL BRACINGS

Roof and wall bracings shall have a minimum yield strength of 250 Mpa and shall conform to the specifications IS 2062. Portal Bracing connecting columns should be min. at one
place on both the side walls.
18. Purlins should be of Pre Galvanised steel of 345 Mpa having a coating thickness of 275 gsm. Z purlins to be avoided.
19. The dimensions mentioned below are indicative only, the contractor shall verufy the same with NAYARA wrt site requirements.
20. Civil foundations works shall be excluded in the scope of work and shall be paid seperately.
21. Over head crane not required, hence not to consider in the scope of design.
Note:
Engineer-in-charge.
Measurement computation: The area for payement shall be measured in sqm only and shall be computed outer edge to edge of shed (plan area of roof).
1.01 For TT Calibration Shed (clear height-7m from FFL in two floor or as required) Sqm 50
1.02 For Car Parking (clear height-3m from FFL or as required) Sqm 170
1.03 For Foam Pump House Shed (clear height-5m from FFL or as required) Sqm 115
1.04 For Fire Water Pump House Shed (clear height-7m from FFL or as required) Sqm 205
1.05 For Lock & Unlock Shed (clear height-6.15m from FFL or as required---two stroey and attched to lock room--refer tender drawing for more details) Sqm 26
1.06 For Surprise Checking Platforms (clear height-5.5m from FFL or as required) Sqm 35
1.07 For TLF / TLD Pump House Shed (clear height-5m from FFL or as required) Sqm 310
1.08 For TLF Gantry (clear height-8m from FFL or as required) Sqm 765
1.09 For Watch Tower Sheds (clear standing/platform height-6m from FFL and 9.5m total height or as required) 55
1.1 For Pipe Rack (clear height-7m from FFL or as required to comply TLF gantry height) Sqm 85
Important Note: The pipe rack shall accommodate all required product pipelines, cable trays, etc. Pipe rack shall be designed for additional product pipelines (2 nos. of 300mm
OD) for future provision.
2 Construction of Civil works for PEB structuctures including civil foundations, concrete flooring, pump foundations, etc. (excluding all mechanical works):-
The work shall include all materials, labours, tools, machineries, etc. completed in all respect without and inclusive of all items required to complete the job, as below-
1. Excavation required upto any lift/depth by mechanical means (Hydraulic excavator) / manual means in all kind of soil/rock and surface preparace including compation/ramming
with water. Including all backfilling works with available good earth.
2. Supplying and filling in sub-base/base with murrum/good earth in layers not exceeding 200mm, if required. Each deposited layer shall be compacted by mechanical vibro roller
of 8 to 10 ton capacity and copius watering to achieve minimum compacted density 98%.
3. Supplying & filling coarse sand of Zone II or III in layers not exceeding 200mm under floor/foundations. Each deposited layer shall be compacted by mechanical vibration and
copius watering to achieve minimum relative density 95%.
4. All PCC and RCC (foundations, steps, plinth beams, tie beams, pedestals, floor raft, pump foundations, etc.) works including all formwork and reinforcement, etc., proper
curing to be done for all concrete works.
5. Fixing of foundations bolts (foundations bolts to be supplied by PEB vendor) with all required accessories into the concrete coulmns/pedestals. Nos. as per drawings. Fosroc-
Conbextra GP-2 grouting between structure base plate/pump and RCC pedestals/columns/pump foundations to be filled, gap shall not be more than 50mm.
6. 40mm thk IPS fllooring works (1:2:4). Joint filling with polyshulphide or suitable sealant in pump foundations and flooring joints. Expansion joint treatment also included in the
scope, as per drawings (if any).
7. Painting on pump foundations and RCC pedestals/columns with cement based (grey shade mathcing with cement colour) of approved make and as directed by engineer-in-
charge.
8. 230mm thick soling below floor/foundations. Plastering work of required thickness is also included in the scope of work, i.e. on pump foundations, steps, pedestals, etc.
Note:
Engineer-in-charge. Payment shall be made on lumpsump basis.
2.01 For TT Calibration Shed Set 1

2.02 For Car Parking Set 1
2.03 For Foam Pump House Shed Set 1
2.04 For Fire Water Pump House Shed Set 1
2.05 For Lock & Unlock Shed Set 1
2.06 For Surprise Checking Platforms Set 4
2.07 For TLF / TLD Pump House Shed Set 1
2.08 For TLF Gantry Set 1
2.09 For Watch Tower Sheds Set 4
2.1 For Pipe Rack Set 1
Page 5 of 28
3 Supplying, transporting, de-rusting, fabricating, erecting, hoisting and fixing in position with necessary welding and/or bolting with MS bolts conforming to property class 4.6 of MT 250
I.S:1367 at all height as per approved fabrication drawings of all types of Mild Steel structural works in rolled steel joints, channels, angles, tubes (round tubes, square tubes),
tees, flats, plates, lattice members built up / compound sections in columns, portals, girders, beams, bracings, trusses, purlins, rafters, staircase, steps, walkway, gates, railing,
gratings and chequered plates, fencing, embedments, inserts, pipe sleeves, angle pieces, rungs of various diameters, plates of dimensions as required etc.etc. including gusset
plates, anchor plates, hand rail etc., including site and shop fasteners, riveting, bolting, welding at shop or work site at all heights etc. & including applying approved coats of
primers and paint as per Technical specification. Complete as per drawing and direction of Engineer-in-chrgae. (All materials supply is in contractor’s scope including paints &
primer ).
Providing and applying Anticorrosive treatment to structural steel surface as per below specifications.
a) Surface preparation by shot blasting conforming to SA 2.5
b) Primer coat of INORGANIC ZINC ETHYL SILICATE, one coat of 75 – 80 micron DFT
c) Intermediate coat of TWO PACK EPOXY-POLYAMIDE MIO UNDERCOAT, one coat of 120 – 125 micron DFT
d) Final coats of TWO PACK ALIPHATIC POLYURETHANE, two coats of 25 micron DFT
Total DFT shall be 230micron.Primer & paint shall be of approved make as specified by NAYARA.
Payment will be on the basis of weight of structural steel sections provided.
4 Providing and fixing not less than 0.5mm thick Hi-Rib Galvalume high tensile cold rolled steel in roofing sheets/cladding/ridges/corner pieces of approved shade and in required Sqm 2000
lengths & level having a yield strenth of 550 M pa as per IS 1397 having Galvalume coating class AZ 150 (minimum 150 gm. per Sq.metre total zinc- Aluminium alloy coating on
both sides). The sheets shall be fixed to the purlins with suitable over laps in longitudinal and lateral directions and by providing self fit fasteners/sel-tapping screws along with
EPDM washers and Polysulphide sealant as per manufacturers specifications.(Note-actual area of sheets including ridges/corner pieces as laid will be measured for payment.)
Total=
Page 6 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
SCHEDULE-D: PIPING WORKS FOR PROPOSED PETROLEUM STORAGE DEPOT, PALI, RAJASTHAN
1 Product Pipeline
Supply, Laying, fabrication, testing, commissioning of Above Ground Product pipelines of steel on pedastals / sleepers / overhead pipe rack /
structures etc. The pipeline laying includes cutting, beveling, positioning, setting and fixing of the pipe fittings such as elbows, bends tees, reducers,
flanged joints (both for flanges & blind flanges & Spectacle Blind) etc, complete with supports as per drawings and hydro testing the pipelines at 22.5
KSC for a minimum period of 4 Hrs.
Note:
a. Welding of pipeline should conform to Radiography quality. 10% of the joints shall be radiograped.
b. The job includes Blast cleaning (using Slag/ Shots) & painting of the outer surfaces of above ground pipeline / fittings / specials all leads & lifts etc.
complete as per enclosed specifications and instructions at site.
c. Pipe length indicated against each size is actual as per drawing.
d. The primer and paint shall be as per the list of paint manufacturers enclosed. The make and quality of paint shall be decided in consultation with
Nayara prior to use.
e. Pipeline colour coding shall be carried out as per Nayara specifications at no extra cost for product piping.
f. Concrete sleepers is in the scope of this Tender.
g. Structural Pipe rack to be constructed
h. Cost includes Edge preparation for butt weld as per ASME B 31.3, tack welding, and final welding of Product pipelines including pipe fittings (3 runs
minimum) of radiographic quality by welders qualified as per ASME Section IX with supply of approved electrodes / consumables, welding machine,
tools & tackles etc. Conduct tests for establishibg welding procedure (PQR and WPS) as per ASME Section IX and Third Party Inspection.
i. Cost should include Welding of WNRF flanges, flanged joints (blind / spectable) of the following sizes on the Product pipelines including setting,
positioning, setting, welding with min. three runs outside and all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications and instructions at site. This also
includes supplying and fixing 3 mm thk Spiral Wound & Graphite Filled Metallic gaskets, studs, nuts, washers of approved make. Item also includes
providing bare Cu wire for bonding between flanges
j. Cost should include radiography, dye penetration examination
k. Item includes providing 8 SWG bare Cu wire for bonding between flanges
1.1 450 mm NB M 750

1.2 400 mm NB M 1,150
1.3 350 mm NB M 260
1.4 300 mm NB M 975
1.5 250 mm NB M 495
1.6 200 mm NB M 250
1.7 150 mm NB M 100
2 Pipeline
Supply, Laying, fabrication, testing, commissioning of Above Ground Product pipelines of steel on pedastals / sleepers / overhead pipe rack /
structures etc. The pipeline laying includes supply, cutting, beveling, positioning, setting and fixing of the pipe fittings such as elbows, bends tees,
reducers, flanged joints (both for flanges & blind flanges & Spectacle Blind), all types of valves etc, complete with supports as per drawings and hydro
testing the pipelines at 22.5 KSC for a minimum period of 4 Hrs. Pipeline laying includes all fittings,NRV, valves gaskets and above etc. No extra cost
will be applicable on this account.
Note:
b. The job includes Blast cleaning (using Slag/ Shots) & painting of the outer surfaces of above ground pipeline / fittings / specials all leads & lifts etc.
f. Concrete sleepers is in the scope of this Tender.
g. Structural Pipe rack to be constructed
h. Cost includes Edge preparation for butt weld as per ASME B 31.3, tack welding, and final welding of Product pipelines including pipe fittings (3 runs
i. Cost should include Welding of WNRF flanges, flanged joints (blind / spectable) of the following sizes on the Product pipelines including setting,
positioning, setting, welding with min. three runs outside and all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications and instructions at site. This also
includes supplying and fixing 3 mm thk Spiral Wound & Graphite Filled Metallic gaskets, studs, nuts, washers of approved make. Item also includes
providing bare Cu wire for bonding between flanges
j. Cost should include radiography, dye penetration examination
k. Item includes providing 8 SWG bare Cu wire for bonding between flanges
2.1 100 mm NB M 950

2.2 80 mm NB M 1,500
2.3 50 mm NB (SCH XS)/ASTM A106 GR B M 150
2.4 25 mm NB (SCH XS)/ASTM A106 GR B M 200
2.5 20 mm NB (SCH 160)/ASTM A106 GR B M 250
2.6 15 mm NB M 100
2A Instrument Air Pipeline

Supply, Laying, fabrication, testing, commissioning of Above Ground Instrument air pipelines of GI Heavy duty on pedastals / sleepers / overhead pipe
rack / structures etc. The pipeline laying includes supply, cutting, beveling, positioning, setting and fixing of the pipe fittings such as elbows, bends
tees, reducers, flanged joints (both for flanges & blind flanges & Spectacle Blind), all types of valves etc. Pipeline laying includes all fittings,
valves,NRVgaskets and above etc. No extra cost will be applicable on this account.
Note:
a. Pipe length indicated is actual as per drawing.
b. The primer and paint shall be as per the list of paint manufacturers enclosed. The make and quality of paint shall be decided in consultation with
c. Pipeline colour coding shall be carried out as per Nayara specifications at no extra cost for product piping.
2A.1 25 mm NB (GI Heavy Duty) M 1,850
Supply, Laying, fabrication, testing and commissioning of Underground Product pipelines of steel through RCC Culvert / Hume pipe at road crossing
inlcuding providing Blast cleaning (using Slag / Shots) wrapping & coating with 4 mm thick Pypkote or equivalent (as per specifications) to be laid at a
depth as per site condition / laying through hume pipes/ culverts as detailed in the enclosed specifications.
Welding of pipeline should conform to Radiography quality. 10% of the joints shall be radiograped and the cost of the same will be paid separately as
per respective items as per specifications and instructions at site.
Note:
1) Concrete sleepers is in the scope of this Tender.
3 2) The rates quoted includes hydro testing the pipelines at 22.5 KSC for a minimum period of 4 Hrs.
3) Excavation if any is deemed to be included in this item
4) Cost includes Edge preparation for butt weld as per ASME B 31.3, tack welding, and final welding of Product pipelines including suppy and fixing of
pipe fittings (3 runs minimum) of radiographic quality by welders qualified as per ASME Section IX with supply of approved electrodes / consumables,
welding machine, tools & tackles etc. Conduct tests for establishibg welding procedure (PQR and WPS) as per ASME Section IX and Third Party
Inspection.
3.1 450 mm NB M 15
3.2 400 mm NB M 30
3.3 350 mm NB M 20
3.4 300 mm NB M 185
3.5 250 mm NB M 20
3.6 200 mm NB M 70
Page 7 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
Supply, Laying, fabrication, testing and commissioning of Underground Product pipelines of steel through RCC Culvert / Hume pipe at road crossing
inlcuding providing Blast cleaning (using Slag / Shots) wrapping & coating with 4 mm thick Pypkote or equivalent (as per specifications) to be laid at a
depth as per site condition / laying through hume pipes/ culverts as detailed in the enclosed specifications.
Welding of pipeline should conform to Radiography quality. 10% of the joints shall be radiograped and the cost of the same will be paid separately as
per respective items as per specifications and instructions at site.
The pipeline laying includes supply, cutting, beveling, positioning, setting and fixing of the pipe fittings such as elbows, bends tees, reducers, flanged
joints (both for flanges & blind flanges & Spectacle Blind), valves etc, complete with supports as per drawings and hydro testing the pipelines at 22.5
KSC for a minimum period of 4 Hrs. Pipeline laying includes all fittings,NRV, valves gaskets and above etc. No extra cost will be applicable on this
account.
4 Note:
2) The rates quoted includes hydro testing the pipelines at 22.5 KSC for a minimum period of 4 Hrs.
4) Cost includes Edge preparation for butt weld as per ASME B 31.3, tack welding, and final welding of Product pipelines including suppy and fixing of
pipe fittings (3 runs minimum) of radiographic quality by welders qualified as per ASME Section IX with supply of approved electrodes / consumables,
welding machine, tools & tackles etc. Conduct tests for establishibg welding procedure (PQR and WPS) as per ASME Section IX and Third Party
Inspection.
4.1 100 mm NB M 270

4.2 80 mm NB M 290
Supply and Installation of Check Valve of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing 3 mm thk gaskets, studs, nuts washers of
approved make, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications and instructions at site.
Cost Includes:
Spiral Wound & Graphite Filled Metallic gaskets, studs, nuts washers of approved make, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications and
instructions at site for Product pipe joints.
5 Note:
a) Painting with approved make, colour, shade including colour coding as per specifications.
b) The valves shall be supplied anywhere within the premises and the contractor shall undertake to lead the same to the foundations at no extra cost.
c) Item includes providing 8 SWG bare Cu wire for bonding between flanges
5.1 300 mm NB (Non Return Valve) Nos. 2

Supply and Fixing of Gate Valve of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing 3 mm thk gaskets, studs, nuts washers of
Cost Includes:
6 Note:
6.1 450 mm NB Nos. 1

6.2 400 mm NB Nos. 8
6.3 350 mm NB Nos. 3
6.4 300 mm NB Nos. 15
6.5 250 mm NB Nos. 16
6.6 200 mm NB Nos. 21
6.7 150 mm NB Nos. 8
Supply and Fixing/ installation & calibration of TSV & of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing 3 mm thk gaskets, studs, nuts
washers of approved make, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications and instructions at site.
Cost Includes:
7 instructions at site for Product pipe joints.
Note:
7.1 (Size 1 = 20 mm NB, Size 2 = 25 mm NB) Nos. 30
Supply and Fixing of Auto-recirculaton Valve (Body- ASTM-A216 WCB, Trim- 13% Cr Steel, ASME B16.5 Class 150) of the following sizes on the pipeline
including supplying and fixing 3 mm thk gaskets, studs, nuts washers of approved make, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications and
instructions at site.
Cost Includes:
Note:
8.1 100 mm NB Nos. 6
Supply and Fixing of Basket Type Strainer of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing 3 mm thk gaskets, studs, nuts washers
of approved make, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications and instructions at site.
Cost Includes:
9 Note:
9.1 400 mm NB Nos. 2

9.2 300 mm NB Nos. 3
9.3 250 mm NB Nos. 3
9.4 200 mm NB Nos. 5
9.5 100 mm NB Nos. 12
9.6 50 mm NB Nos. 4
Fixing of MOVs of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing 3 mm thk gaskets, studs, nuts washers of approved make, all leads
& lifts etc., complete as per specifications and instructions at site.
Cost Includes:
Note:
10.1 450 mm NB Nos. 1
10.2 400 mm NB Nos. 2
10.3 300 mm NB Nos. 3
10.4 250 mm NB Nos. 3
10.5 150 mm NB Nos. 2
Page 8 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
Fixing of ROSOV of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing 3 mm thk gaskets, studs, nuts washers of approved make, all
leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications and instructions at site.
Cost Includes:
11 Note:
11.1 400 mm NB Nos. 3

11.2 350 mm NB Nos. 3
11.3 300 mm NB Nos. 6
11.4 250 mm NB Nos. 6
Fixing of DBBV of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing 3 mm thk gaskets, studs, nuts washers of approved make, all leads
& lifts etc., complete as per specifications and instructions at site.
Cost Includes:
Note:
12.1 400 mm NB Nos. 3

12.2 350 mm NB Nos. 3
12.3 300 mm NB Nos. 6
12.4 250 mm NB Nos. 6
Supply and Fixing of (Flange) of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications
and instructions at site.
13
Note:
a) Painting with approved make, colour, shade including colour coding as per specifications. b) Item includes providing 8 SWG bare Cu wire for bonding
between flanges.
13.1 450 mm NB Nos. 7

13.2 400 mm NB Nos. 48
13.3 350 mm NB Nos. 23
13.4 300 mm NB Nos. 81
13.5 250 mm NB Nos. 83
13.6 200 mm NB Nos. 66
13.7 150 mm NB Nos. 34
Supply and Fixing of (Blind Flange) of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per
specifications and instructions at site.
14
Note:
between flanges.
14.1 450 mm NB Nos. 3

14.2 400 mm NB Nos. 5
14.3 350 mm NB Nos. 2
14.4 300 mm NB Nos. 7
14.5 250 mm NB Nos. 2
14.6 200 mm NB Nos. 1
Supply and Fixing of (Reducer Tee) of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per
15
Note:
between flanges.

Supply and Fixing of (Spectacle Blind) of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per
16
Note:
between flanges.
16.1 400 mm NB Nos. 3

16.2 350 mm NB Nos. 6
16.3 300 mm NB Nos. 19
16.4 250 mm NB Nos. 18
16.5 200 mm NB Nos. 8
16.6 150 mm NB Nos. 6
Supply and Fixing of (Equal Tee) of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications
17
Note:
between flanges.
17.1 450 mm NB Nos. 1

17.2 400 mm NB Nos. 6
17.3 350 mm NB Nos. 3
17.4 300 mm NB Nos. 9
17.5 250 mm NB Nos. 3
17.6 200 mm NB Nos. 6
17.7 150 mm NB Nos. 6
Supply and Fixing of (ECC. Reducer) of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per
18
Note:
between flanges.

Page 9 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
Supply and Fixing of (CONC. Reducer) of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per
19
Note:
between flanges.

Supply and Fixing of (90 Deg. Elbow) of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per
20
Note:
between flanges.
20.1 450 mm NB Nos. 6

20.2 400 mm NB Nos. 19
20.3 350 mm NB Nos. 8
20.4 300 mm NB Nos. 64
20.5 250 mm NB Nos. 33
20.6 200 mm NB Nos. 34
20.7 150 mm NB Nos. 30
FIRE WATER
Supply, Laying of Above Ground Fire Water pipelines of steel on pedastals / sleepers / overhead pipe rack / structures etc. The pieline laying includes
cutting, beveling, positioning, setting, fixing the pipe fittings such as elbows, bends tees, reducers etc., complete with supports as per drawings and
hydro testing the pipelines at 22.5 KSC for a minimum period of 4 Hrs.
Note:
b. The job includes Blast cleaning (using Slag / Shots) & painting of the outer surfaces of above ground pipeline / fittings / specials all leads & lifts etc.
f. Concrete sleepers / pedestal is not in the scope of this Tender.
1 g. Cost includes Edge preparation for butt weld as per ASME B 31.3, tack welding, and final welding of Product pipelines including pipe fittings (3 runs
h. Cost includes Welding of WNRF flanges of the following sizes on the Product pipelines including setting, positioning, setting, welding with min. three
runs outside and all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications and instructions at site.
i. Cost includes Welding of WNRF flanges, flanged joints (blind / spectable) of the following sizes on the Product pipelines including setting, positioning,
setting, welding with min. three runs outside and all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications and instructions at site. This also includes
supplying and fixing 3 mm thk Spiral Wound & Graphite Filled Metallic gaskets, studs, nuts, washers of approved make. Item also includes providing
bare Cu wire for bonding between flanges
j. Cost includes radiography, dye penetration examination
1.1 700 mm NB M 78
1.2 600 mm NB 7.14 mm thickness M 11
1.6 300 mm NB 5.6 mm thickness M 1,247
1.7 250 mm NB 6.3 mm thickness M 1,652
Supply, Laying of Above Ground Fire Water pipelines of steel on pedastals / sleepers / overhead pipe rack / structures etc. The pieline laying includes
supply, cutting, beveling, positioning, setting, fixing the pipe fittings such as elbows, bends tees, reducers, all types of valves etc., complete with
supports as per drawings and hydro testing the pipelines at 22.5 KSC for a minimum period of 4 Hrs. Pipeline laying includes all fittings and above and
gaskets etc. No extra cost will be applicable on this account.
Note:
b. The job includes Blast cleaning (using Slag / Shots) & painting of the outer surfaces of above ground pipeline / fittings / specials all leads & lifts etc.
f. Concrete sleepers / pedestal is not in the scope of this Tender.
2 g. Cost includes Edge preparation for butt weld as per ASME B 31.3, tack welding, and final welding of Product pipelines including pipe fittings (3 runs
h. Cost includes Welding of WNRF flanges of the following sizes on the Product pipelines including setting, positioning, setting, welding with min. three
runs outside and all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications and instructions at site.
i. Cost includes Welding of WNRF flanges, flanged joints (blind / spectable) of the following sizes on the Product pipelines including setting, positioning,
setting, welding with min. three runs outside and all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications and instructions at site. This also includes
supplying and fixing 3 mm thk Spiral Wound & Graphite Filled Metallic gaskets, studs, nuts, washers of approved make. Item also includes providing
bare Cu wire for bonding between flanges
j. Cost includes radiography, dye penetration examination

Supply, Laying of Underground Fire Water pipelines of CS materials through RCC Culvert / Hume pipe at road crossing inlcuding providing Blast
cleaning (using Slag / Shots) wrapping & coating with 4 mm thick Pypkote or equivalent to be laid at a depth as per site condition / laying through hume
pipes / culverts & doping the same as detailed in the enclosed specifications.
3
Note:
2) The rates quoted includes hydro testing the pipelines at 22.5 KSC for a minimum period of 4 Hrs.

Page 10 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
Supply and Fixing of Check Valve of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing 3 mm thk gaskets, studs, nuts washers of
Cost Includes:
4 Note:
4.1 300 mm NB Nos. 3

4.2 150 mm NB Nos. 1
Supply and Fixing of Gate Valve of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing 3 mm thk gaskets, studs, nuts washers of
Cost Includes:
5 Note:
5.1 600 mm NB Nos. 2

5.2 500 mm NB Nos. 6
5.3 400 mm NB Nos. 3
5.4 350 mm NB Nos. 11
5.5 300 mm NB Nos. 18
5.6 250 mm NB Nos. 14
5.7 150 mm NB Nos. 3
Supply and Fixing of (Flange) of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications
6
Note:
between flanges.
6.1 700 mm NB Nos. 2

6.2 600 mm NB Nos. 6
6.3 500 mm NB Nos. 13
6.4 400 mm NB Nos. 15
6.5 350 mm NB Nos. 22
6.6 300 mm NB Nos. 46
6.7 250 mm NB Nos. 27
6.8 150 mm NB Nos. 12
Supply and Fixing of (Blind Flange) of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per
7
Note:
between flanges.
7.1 700 mm NB Nos. 2

7.2 500 mm NB Nos. 1
7.3 300 mm NB Nos. 2
Supply and Fixing of Basket Type Strainer of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per
8
Note:
between flanges.
8.1 400 mm NB Nos. 3

8.2 100 mm NB Nos. 2
Supply and Fixing of (Elbow 90) of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications
9
Note:
between flanges.
9.1 700 mm NB Nos. 1

9.2 500 mm NB Nos. 8
9.3 400 mm NB Nos. 3
9.4 350 mm NB Nos. 21
9.5 300 mm NB Nos. 35
9.6 250 mm NB Nos. 37
9.7 150 mm NB Nos. 18
Supply and Fixing of (Elbow 45) of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications
10
Note:
between flanges.
10.1 500 mm NB Nos. 1

10.2 350 mm NB Nos. 2
10.3 250 mm NB Nos. 4
Supply and Fixing of (Tee) of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications and
instructions at site.
11
Note:
between flanges.
11.1 500 mm NB Nos. 1

11.2 350 mm NB Nos. 6
11.3 300 mm NB Nos. 13
11.4 250 mm NB Nos. 2
Supply and Fixing of (RED. Tee) of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications
12
Note:
between flanges.

Page 11 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
Supply and Fixing of (ECC. REDUCER) of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per
13
Note:
between flanges.

Supply and Fixing of (Water Cum Foam Monitor) riser pipe with valve of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads &
lifts etc., complete as per specifications and instructions at site.
14
Note:
between flanges.
14.1 100 mm NB Nos. 59
Supplying & Fixing of (Double Hydrant) riser pipe with valve of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc.,
complete as per specifications and instructions at site.
15
Note:
between flanges.
15.1 100 mm NB Nos. 62
Supply and Fixing of (MEFG) riser pipe with valve of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as
per specifications and instructions at site.
16
Note:
between flanges.
16.1 150 mm NB Nos. 4
Supply and Fixing of (HVLRM) riser pipe with valve of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as
per specifications and instructions at site.
17
Note:
between flanges.
17.1 200 mm NB Nos. 3
FOAM
Supply, Laying of SS pipe lines (SS 316L) and welding (3 runs min.) above ground pipelines of the following sizes as described below, including supply,
cutting, bevelling and fixing the supplied specials such as elbows, bends tees, reducers, all types of valves etc complete and hydrotesting the pipelines
at 18 KSC for a minimum period of 4 Hrs.
Note: Item includes providing repeated Purging operation to the line with required compressors, N2 or any other inert gas for fully draining the hydro-
tested water from the pipeline. Pipeline laying includes all fittings and above and gaskets etc. No extra cost will be applicable on this account
Cost includes Edge preparation for butt weld as per ASME B 31.3, tack welding, and final welding of SS 316L pipelines including pipe fittings (3 runs
1 minimum) of radiographic quality by welders qualified as per ASME Section IX with supply of approved electrodes / consumables, welding machine,
tools & tackles etc. No extra payment will be made for conducting tests for establishibg welding procedure (PQR and WPS) as per ASME Section IX and
Third Party Inspection.
Welding of SS SORF flanges of the following sizes on the pipelines including setting, positioning, setting, welding with min. three runs outside and one
inside, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per specifications and instructions at site.
1.1 80 mm Sch Std M 48

1.2 50 mm Sch Std M 2,793
1.3 25 mm Sch Std M 3
1.4 20 mm Sch Std M 151
2 Strainer (Y)
2.1 80 mm Nos. 2
Supply and Fixing of (Control Valve) of the following sizes on the pipeline including supplying and fixing, all leads & lifts etc., complete as per
3
Note:
between flanges.
3.1 80 mm Nos. 1
Pipe Supports
CIVIL WORKS
EARTHWORK
a) The prices for all excavations are to include for removing and clearing away all shrubs, bushes, roots etc.
b) The prices are also to include for all leveling and ramming foundation beds, trimming of sides and bottom grading to proper level as required.
c) Removal and carrying shall include for all loading, unloading and handling as may be necessary and also all necessary means of transport
(Mechanical or manual as required).
d) The prices are also to include removal of water accumulated due to subsoil seepage, rains or from any kind of sources, either by pumping or by
bailing or by any suitable method like well point dewatering etc. if reqd. No extra payment shall be made for dewatering. This also includes for draining
out the pumped water to nearby available drainage system.
e) Normally payment of earth work shall be made according to the sizes of PCC for all kind of foundations/trenches/ pits as contemplated in the working
drawings. Extra due to widening or deepening of foundations/trenches / pits shall not be paid, except for the cases where water / acid proofing required
as per working drawings. In all cases the mode of measurement shall be as per IS : 1200 Part-I 1992 code.
f) Nothing extra shall be paid for sorting /screening of excavated materials to obtain good earth for filling.
g) Nothing extra shall be paid on account of any lift for disposal of excavated materials
h) Where excavation are made in excess of the depth required, the contractor shall at his own expense fill up to the desired level with lean concrete of
mix 1:5:10 (1 Cement: 5 Coarse sand: 10 Graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size
i) Rate shall include Royalty, Taxes, etc., levied by the local authorities, all transportation, loading and unloading, etc., and nothing extra will be paid on
this account.
j) Soft / loose soil also includes filled up earth / moorum.
k) The filling for earth / morrum or sand shall be done in layers not exceeding 20 cm in thickness (consolidated) with Suitable means to achieve 95% dry
density at Optimum Moisture Content corresponding to standard Proctor test compaction with vibroroller (8 to 10 MT capacity) & vibro compactor in
confined spaces. The works shall be compelted in all respect in accordance with applicable IS Code, technical specifications and as per the direction of
Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 12 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
Earth work in excavation upto any lift/depth by mechanical means (Hydraulic excavator) / manual means for all kind of works (pipe, drains, foundations,
trenches, etc.). The item shall including disposal of excavated earth within and/or outside site to unobjectionable place upto all lead, disposed earth to
1 be levelled and neatly dressed. The work shall be completed as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
1.1 All kind of soil Cu.M 2,000

1.2 Soft/Ordinary Rock Cu.M 500
Back filling with available excavated earth within the plot upto any depth & height (excluding rock) in all works including pipes, drains, trenches, plinth,
sides of foundations, under floors, etc. in layers not exceeding 200mm in depth to achieve at least 95% maximum dry density as per IS-2720 (Part-
2 VII),and compacted properly including watering,ramming/compaction by manual/mechanical means, dressing etc. complete in all respect for all Cu.M 1,800
Lift/depth and lead. The work shall be completed as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
Supplying and filling local sand upto any depth within the grading zone II or III of fine aggregates as per IS Code 383-1970 in plinth, under floors,
underground tanks, foundations, etc. in layers not exceeding 200mm in depth to achieve at least 90% relative density as per IS- 2720 (Part-XIV), each
3 deposited layer to be compacted by ramming watering and dressing, royalty to be paid (if any) etc. complete as per technical specifications/ drawings Cu.M 200
and as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
Earth work in supply & filling upto any depth & height for all works with good quality borrowed Earth/Murrum brought outside plant premises, free from
vegetation, organic matters, boulders with all leads and lifts including cost of transportation, loading/ unloading, breaking clods, in layers not exceeding
200mm in depth to achieve at least 95% maximum dry density as per IS-2720 (Part-VII),and compacted properly including watering,ramming/compaction
by manual/mechanical means, dressing etc. complete in all respect for all Lift/depth and lead. with vibroroller (8 to 10 MT capacity) etc. & vibro
compactor in confined spaces, cost shall also include royalty (if any), etc. complete as per directions of Engineer -in- Charge.The measurement shall be
4 made on the basis of calculated compacted volume of earth, based on the contour surveys of level on site before filling and spot level after filling to be Cu.M 1,000
taken jointly with contractor after execution of work. The contractor shall make good all subsidence and shrinkage in murrum / earth fillings during
execution and till the completion of work.The rate includes for supplying all machineries, tools and tackles and consumeables. The rate includes for
supplying all machineries, tools and tackles and consumeables.
CONCRETE WORK/ REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK

a) The prices for concrete in beds and slabs are to include for laying on any type of sub grade, laying to falls, or cambers and for preparing surfaces to
receive concrete.
b) All concrete surfaces shall be finished to a fair face to give a smooth and even surface. Nothing extra shall be paid on this account.
c) The prices are to include leaving pockets, cut outs and holes and to provide wooden boxes or any other suitable arrangements in RCC for drains,
sumps, bolt holes in slab, beams, walls, foundation of equipments etc. as per approved working drawing. (Nothing extra shall be paid on this account).
d) No deduction in RCC quantity shall be made for pockets and nothing extra shall be paid for providing pockets as mentioned in para 'C' above.
e) Measurement of opening in concrete work/RCC work: For measurement of openings in concrete work / RCC works, shall be as per IS: 1200 Part-II
1974.
f) All pocket holes are to be properly covered by suitable means so that dirt, rain water etc. etc., should not enter the pockets/holes etc. (Nothing extra
shall be paid on this account.)
g) Threads of bolts etc. which have already been fixed in the pockets are to be greased and polythene sheet properly covered with gunny bags to protect
it from damages from all sources. (Nothing extra shall be paid on this account.)
h) The prices shall include for all rebating, trotting, chamfering weathering, molding etc. to accord with the details shown on the approved working
drawings
i) Nothing extra shall be paid for any intricate concrete work for foundations of equipments and machinery (dynamic/static), RCC wall and other
superstructure works or any delay in concreting in small and thin sections in PCC or RCC works.
j) The prices for concrete are to include for hoisting and / or lowering to any height and/or depth required and in any type of form work, packing around
reinforcement where required and finishing the surfaces, to fair and even surface.
k) The prices shall include working up or hacking of concrete surface for providing keys for further concrete work and shall also include all plane,
rebated or grooved constructional and other joints.
l) The design mixes of all controlled concrete of various grades shall be established by the contractor on the basis of weigh batching, at the beginning of
work. In all concrete / RCC work graded coarse aggregate shall be used. Any concrete work with honey comb shall be rejected and the work has to be
redone by the contractor at his own cost.
m) Concrete admixtures for workability if necessary, may be used in RCC if decided by Engineer-in-charge. No extra payment for mixing etc, shall be
made on this account.
n) Machine and equipment foundations shall mean all foundations including pedestals of vessels, towers, pumps, compressor motors, or any other
equipment or machinery (both static and dynamic), pipe supports, etc. and the like.
o) The prices are also to include the removal of water caused by rains/seepage etc. either pumping or by bailing out or by special means like well point
dewatering etc. that may accumulate in the trenches and foundation pits etc.
p) The prices are to include the supply of cement by the contractor.

q) Anti shrinkage compound used in grouting shall be paid separately.
r) Desired design mix shall be got approved from Engineer-in charge before commence of casting.
s) The source of supply for sand and stone chips shall be approved by Engineer-in charge
t) Approved brand of 43 grade cement shall be used for preparing design mix & cement shall be tested as per relevant IS Codes 8112-1989. Cement
supply shall be in contractor’s scope.
Following additional points to be noted for Batch Mix Concrete(BMC)
a) BMC shall be setup within the plant premises as Directed by Engineer-in-charge.
b) Nothing extra should be paid for establishing and removal, after compliting of Job of such plant.
c) It shall be ensured that shuttering done by contractor shall be adequate to withstand pumping pressure.
d) Any loss of material shall be contractor’s responsibility.
e) Desired design mix shall be got approved from Engineer-in charge before Casting. No extra cost shall be paid against for designing of desired design
mix of concrete, in contractor's scope only.
f) Approved brand shall be used for preparing BMC & Cement and water shall be tested as per relevant IS Codes. Cement supply shall be in contractor’s
scope.
g) The engineer-in-charge may permit the use of ordinary Portland cement (53 grade) or Portland puzzolana cement (fly ash/calcined based) confirming
to is: 1489 or Portland slag cement conforming to is: 455 or sulphate resisting Portland cement conforming to IS: 12330 or high alumina cement
conforming to is: 6452 without any extra cost.
h) The consumption of cement (per cum. of concrete) shall be as per recommended/approved concrete design mix subject to minimum requirement of
IS 456. However no extra claim shall be entertained on account of excess cement consumption as per the actual design mix to achieve required target
strength & other parameters. No extra cost for RMC will be paid to the contractor.
Providing and laying in position cement concrete (confirming to IS 456) of following grade in all works including foundation, footings, base for
columns/walls/floors, etc. including proportioning, mixing in mechanical mixer, laying vibration by means of mechanical vibrators, curing etc. complete
5
excluding the cost of formwork/shuttering---All works up to all level:-
Plain Cement Concrete of mix 1:3:6 ( 1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size confirming to IS 383 & IS 8112)
5.1 Cu.M 120
REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE

Providing and laying in position, machine batched, machine mixed design mix M-25 grade cement concrete (confirming to IS 456 & IS 10262) for
reinforced cement concrete works with coarse sand and graded hard stone aggregate of 20mm nominal size, using cement as per approved design mix,
transported to site by millers, for all leads & lifts including pumping of concrete to site of laying excluding the cost of centering, shuttering and
reinforcement. including Admixtures in recommended proportions as per IS 9103 to accelerate, retard setting of concrete,improve workability, to
achieve required slump, without impairing strength and durability as per direction of Engineer-in-charge.
Note :-
a. Minimum Cement content considered in this item as per IS 456.
b. Batch mixing plant of capacity to be approved by Site Engineer for the works to be installed by the Contractor at site along with required NOCs from
6 concerned Authorities. Alternatevely, Contractor shall also be permitted to use RMC (if available) at no extra cost & after obtaining prior approval from
Engineer In-Charge.
c. For small quantities (up to 5 cum per day), mixing & placing of concrete using mechanical mixer shall be permitted with the prior approval of from
Engineer In-Charge.
d. Hacking of exposed surface of green concrete (wherever applicable) as Key to plaster shall be done at no extra cost"
e. Proper curing to be done as per the direction of Engineer In-Charge.
Page 13 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
In pipe pedestal/substructure, grade slab, paving, drains, under floors etc. at any level below finished floor level, any shape, position or thickness
6.1 Cu.M 500
etc.complete.
REINFORCEMENT & EMBEDMENTS
a) Wastage in cutting will not be paid for. Only steel actually fixed in position will be paid by the linear measurement i/c hooks, chairs, dowels and laps.
Only authorized hooks and laps approved in bar bending schedule shall be paid. Lapping of bars will be allowed only where the required bar length
exceeds the standard lengths available. All other laps provided unless otherwise specified in the drawings shall not be measured and paid for. Weight of
binding wire shall not be measured for payment. The prices are to include for the supply of all Reinforcement & Embedment at site by the Contractor.
b) Reinforcement are to be tack welded in addition to binding by 18 SWG annealed wire wherever necessary to impart fixity. Bars of 28 mm dia & above
shall also be provided with stitch weld in additions to binding with annealed iron wire and nothing extra will be paid for stitch welding. Stitch welding
shall be done as per IS specifications. No extra claim shall be entertained on this account.
Supplying, straightening, cutting, bending, hoisting, placing in position including cost of precast concrete block cover and binding with 18 SWG
7 annealed wire, labour and scaffolding, TMT bars of grade Fe-500 as per IS: 1786 for all R.C.C works including all necessary handling at all heights and
depths complete in all respects and as per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
7.1 Thermo Mechanically Treated Bars Fe- 500 grade or better, Conforming to IS1786 MT 50
Providing & Fixing Fairface form work with good quality water proof ply wood / steel of required thickness and smooth surface, including centering and
shuttering including strutting, propping etc. and removal, for foundations, footings, base of columns, walls, columns, pilasters, staircase, beams, mass
8 concrete, trenches etc. upto all level and height. The shuttering shall be leak-proff and surface shall be oil well before placing the concrete as per the Sq.M. 4,000
direction of Engineer-in-charge.
9 MS Flat MT 15
10 Teflon Bar 18 Dia MTR 500
11 MS Strip (100 X 50 X 5 THK) MT 1
12 Lugs (150 X 40 X 6 THK) MT 2
13 UC 152 MT 5
14 UB 127 MT 4
TLF/ TWD/FW Pump House Manifold

Providing and laying in position, machine batched, machine mixed design mix M-25 grade cement concrete (confirming to IS 456 & IS 10262) for
reinforced cement concrete works with coarse sand and graded hard stone aggregate of 20mm nominal size, using cement as per approved design mix,
transported to site by millers, for all leads & lifts including pumping of concrete to site of laying excluding the cost of centering, shuttering and
reinforcement. including Admixtures in recommended proportions as per IS 9103 to accelerate, retard setting of concrete,improve workability, to
achieve required slump, without impairing strength and durability as per direction of Engineer-in-charge.
Note :-
b. Batch mixing plant of capacity to be approved by Site Engineer for the works to be installed by the Contractor at site along with required NOCs from
1 concerned Authorities. Alternatevely, Contractor shall also be permitted to use RMC (if available) at no extra cost & after obtaining prior approval from
Engineer In-Charge.
c. For small quantities (up to 5 cum per day), mixing & placing of concrete using mechanical mixer shall be permitted with the prior approval of from
Engineer In-Charge.
In foundations/substructure, grade slab, paving, drains, under floors etc. at any level below finished floor level, any shape, position or thickness
1.1 Cu.M 175
etc.complete.
Supplying, straightening, cutting, bending, hoisting, placing in position including cost of precast concrete block cover and binding with 18 SWG
2 annealed wire, labour and scaffolding, TMT bars of grade Fe-500 as per IS: 1786 for all R.C.C works including all necessary handling at all heights and MT 18
depths complete in all respects and as per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Providing and laying in position cement concrete (confirming to IS 456) of following grade in all works including foundation, footings, base for
columns/walls/floors, etc. including proportioning, mixing in mechanical mixer, laying vibration by means of mechanical vibrators, curing etc. complete
3
excluding the cost of formwork/shuttering---All works up to all level:-
Plain Cement Concrete of mix 1:4:8 ( 1 cement : 4 coarse sand : 8 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size confirming to IS 383 & IS 8112)
3.1 Cu.M 120
Providing & Fixing Fairface form work with good quality water proof ply wood / steel of required thickness and smooth surface, including centering and
shuttering including strutting, propping etc. and removal, for foundations, footings, base of columns, walls, columns, pilasters, staircase, beams, mass
4 concrete, trenches etc. upto all level and height. The shuttering shall be leak-proff and surface shall be oil well before placing the concrete as per the Sq.M. 50
direction of Engineer-in-charge.
Surface preparation of Sub-grade by excavating earth to all depth by mechanical/manual means, dressing to camber, consolidation with 8-12 Tonne
capacity road roller to achieve minimum 95% dry density as per IS-2720 (Part-VII) including making good the undulation etc. and disposal of surplus
5 earth any where inside/ outside plant area as directed and consolidation as specified. Cost include preparation, dressing and consolidation of earth Sq.M. 1,600
work in berm with available excavated earth in proper slope as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
Murrum filling/packing in the periphery of manifolds well compacted, watering, ramming complete in all respect and as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
6 Rmt 300
Total=
Page 14 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
SCHEDULE-E: DYKE WALL WORKS FOR PROPOSED PETROLEUM STORAGE DEPOT, PALI, RAJASTHAN
CIVIL WORKS
A - EARTHWORK
b) The prices are also to include for all leveling and ramming foundation beds, trimming of sides and bottom grading to proper level as
required.
c) Removal and carrying shall include for all loading, unloading and handling as may be necessary and also all necessary means of
transport (Mechanical or manual as required).
d) The prices are also to include removal of water accumulated due to subsoil seepage, rains or from any kind of sources, either by pumping
or by bailing or by any suitable method like well point dewatering etc. if reqd. No extra payment shall be made for dewatering. This also
includes for draining out the pumped water to nearby available drainage system.
e) Normally payment of earth work shall be made according to the sizes of PCC for all kind of foundations/trenches/ pits as contemplated in
the working drawings. Extra due to widening or deepening of foundations/trenches / pits shall not be paid, except for the cases where water
/ acid proofing required as per working drawings. In all cases the mode of measurement shall be as per IS : 1200 Part-I 1992 code.
h) Where excavation are made in excess of the depth required, the contractor shall at his own expense fill up to the desired level with lean
concrete of mix 1:5:10 (1 Cement: 5 Coarse sand: 10 Graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size
i) Rate shall include Royalty, Taxes, etc., levied by the local authorities, all transportation, loading and unloading, etc., and nothing extra will
be paid on this account.
j) Soft / loose soil also includes filled up earth / moorum.
k) The filling for earth / morrum or sand shall be done in layers not exceeding 20 cm in thickness (consolidated) with Suitable means to
achieve 95% dry density at Optimum Moisture Content corresponding to standard Proctor test compaction with vibroroller (8 to 10 MT
capacity) & vibro compactor in confined spaces. The works shall be compelted in all respect in accordance with applicable IS Code,
technical specifications and as per the direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
Earth work in excavation upto any lift/depth by mechanical means (Hydraulic excavator) / manual means for all kind of works (pipe, drains,
foundations, trenches, etc.). The item shall including disposal of excavated earth within and/or outside site to unobjectionable place upto all
1
lead, disposed earth to be levelled and neatly dressed. The work shall be completed as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
1.1 All kind of soil Cu.M 2,500.00

1.2 Soft/Ordinary Rock Cu.M 250.00
Back filling with available excavated earth within the plot upto any depth & height (excluding rock) in all works including pipes, drains,
trenches, plinth, sides of foundations, under floors, etc. in layers not exceeding 200mm in depth to achieve at least 95% maximum dry
2 density as per IS-2720 (Part-VII),and compacted properly including watering,ramming/compaction by manual/mechanical means, dressing Cu.M 2,000.00
etc. complete in all respect for all Lift/depth and lead. The work shall be completed as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
Supplying and filling local sand upto any depth within the grading zone II or III of fine aggregates as per IS Code 383-1970 in plinth, under
floors, underground tanks, foundations, etc. in layers not exceeding 200mm in depth to achieve at least 90% relative density as per IS- 2720
3 (Part-XIV), each deposited layer to be compacted by ramming watering and dressing, royalty to be paid (if any) etc. complete as per Cu.M 1,500.00
technical specifications/ drawings and as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
Earth work in supply & filling upto any depth & height for all works with good quality borrowed Earth/Murrum brought outside plant
premises, free from vegetation, organic matters, boulders with all leads and lifts including cost of transportation, loading/ unloading,
breaking clods, in layers not exceeding 200mm in depth to achieve at least 95% maximum dry density as per IS-2720 (Part-VII),and
compacted properly including watering,ramming/compaction by manual/mechanical means, dressing etc. complete in all respect for all
Lift/depth and lead. with vibroroller (8 to 10 MT capacity) etc. & vibro compactor in confined spaces, cost shall also include royalty (if any),
etc. complete as per directions of Engineer -in- Charge.The measurement shall be made on the basis of calculated compacted volume of
4 Cu.M 1,000.00
earth, based on the contour surveys of level on site before filling and spot level after filling to be taken jointly with contractor after execution
of work. The contractor shall make good all subsidence and shrinkage in murrum / earth fillings during execution and till the completion of
work.The rate includes for supplying all machineries, tools and tackles and consumeables. The rate includes for supplying all machineries,
tools and tackles and consumeables.
B-CONCRETE WORK/ REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK

a) The prices for concrete in beds and slabs are to include for laying on any type of sub grade, laying to falls, or cambers and for preparing
surfaces to receive concrete.
c) The prices are to include leaving pockets, cut outs and holes and to provide wooden boxes or any other suitable arrangements in RCC for
drains, sumps, bolt holes in slab, beams, walls, foundation of equipments etc. as per approved working drawing. (Nothing extra shall be
paid on this account).
d) No deduction in RCC quantity shall be made for pockets and nothing extra shall be paid for providing pockets as mentioned in para 'C'
above.
e) Measurement of opening in concrete work/RCC work: For measurement of openings in concrete work / RCC works, shall be as per IS:
1200 Part-II 1974.
f) All pocket holes are to be properly covered by suitable means so that dirt, rain water etc. etc., should not enter the pockets/holes etc.
(Nothing extra shall be paid on this account.)
g) Threads of bolts etc. which have already been fixed in the pockets are to be greased and polythene sheet properly covered with gunny
bags to protect it from damages from all sources. (Nothing extra shall be paid on this account.)
h) The prices shall include for all rebating, trotting, chamfering weathering, molding etc. to accord with the details shown on the approved
working drawings
i) Nothing extra shall be paid for any intricate concrete work for foundations of equipments and machinery (dynamic/static), RCC wall and
other superstructure works or any delay in concreting in small and thin sections in PCC or RCC works.
j) The prices for concrete are to include for hoisting and / or lowering to any height and/or depth required and in any type of form work,
packing around reinforcement where required and finishing the surfaces, to fair and even surface.
k) The prices shall include working up or hacking of concrete surface for providing keys for further concrete work and shall also include all
plane, rebated or grooved constructional and other joints.
l) The design mixes of all controlled concrete of various grades shall be established by the contractor on the basis of weigh batching, at the
beginning of work. In all concrete / RCC work graded coarse aggregate shall be used. Any concrete work with honey comb shall be rejected
and the work has to be redone by the contractor at his own cost.
m) Concrete admixtures for workability if necessary, may be used in RCC if decided by Engineer-in-charge. No extra payment for mixing etc,
shall be made on this account.
n) Machine and equipment foundations shall mean all foundations including pedestals of vessels, towers, pumps, compressor motors, or
any other equipment or machinery (both static and dynamic), pipe supports, etc. and the like.
o) The prices are also to include the removal of water caused by rains/seepage etc. either pumping or by bailing out or by special means like
well point dewatering etc. that may accumulate in the trenches and foundation pits etc.

s) The source of supply for sand and stone chips shall be approved by Engineer-in charge
t) Approved brand of 43 grade cement shall be used for preparing design mix & cement shall be tested as per relevant IS Codes 8112-1989.
Cement supply shall be in contractor’s scope.
Page 15 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
SCHEDULE-E: DYKE WALL WORKS FOR PROPOSED PETROLEUM STORAGE DEPOT, PALI, RAJASTHAN
e) Desired design mix shall be got approved from Engineer-in charge before Casting. No extra cost shall be paid against for designing of
desired design mix of concrete, in contractor's scope only.
f) Approved brand shall be used for preparing BMC & Cement and water shall be tested as per relevant IS Codes. Cement supply shall be in
contractor’s scope.
g) The engineer-in-charge may permit the use of ordinary Portland cement (53 grade) or Portland puzzolana cement (fly ash/calcined based)
confirming to is: 1489 or Portland slag cement conforming to is: 455 or sulphate resisting Portland cement conforming to IS: 12330 or high
alumina cement conforming to is: 6452 without any extra cost.
h) The consumption of cement (per cum. of concrete) shall be as per recommended/approved concrete design mix subject to minimum
requirement of IS 456. However no extra claim shall be entertained on account of excess cement consumption as per the actual design mix
to achieve required target strength & other parameters. No extra cost for RMC will be paid to the contractor.
Providing and laying in position cement concrete (confirming to IS 456) of following grade in all works including foundation, footings, base
for columns/walls/floors, etc. including proportioning, mixing in mechanical mixer, laying vibration by means of mechanical vibrators, curing
5 etc. complete excluding the cost of formwork/shuttering---All works up to all level:-
Plain Cement Concrete of mix 1:4:8 ( 1 cement : 4 coarse sand : 8 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size confirming to IS 383 & IS
5.1 Cu.M 120.00
8112)
Plain Cement Concrete of mix 1:3:6 ( 1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size confirming to IS 383 & IS
5.2 Cu.M 150.00
8112)
Plain Cement Concrete of mix 1:2:4 ( 1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size confirming to IS 383 & IS
5.3 Cu.M 1,200.00
8112)
C-REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE

Providing and laying in position, machine batched, machine mixed design mix M-25 grade cement concrete (confirming to IS 456 & IS 10262)
for reinforced cement concrete works with coarse sand and graded hard stone aggregate of 20mm nominal size, using cement as per
approved design mix, transported to site by millers, for all leads & lifts including pumping of concrete to site of laying excluding the cost of
centering, shuttering and reinforcement. including Admixtures in recommended proportions as per IS 9103 to accelerate, retard setting of
concrete,improve workability, to achieve required slump, without impairing strength and durability as per direction of Engineer-in-charge.
Note :-
b. Batch mixing plant of capacity to be approved by Site Engineer for the works to be installed by the Contractor at site along with required
6 NOCs from concerned Authorities. Alternatevely, Contractor shall also be permitted to use RMC (if available) at no extra cost & after
obtaining prior approval from Engineer In-Charge.
c. For small quantities (up to 5 cum per day), mixing & placing of concrete using mechanical mixer shall be permitted with the prior approval
of from Engineer In-Charge.
In foundations/substructure, grade slab, paving, drains, under floors etc. at any level below finished floor level, any shape, position or
6.1 Cu.M 500.00
thickness etc.complete.
6.2 In superstructure at any level, any work, any shape, position or thickness etc. complete Cu.M 400.00
D-REINFORCEMENT & EMBEDMENTS
a) Wastage in cutting will not be paid for. Only steel actually fixed in position will be paid by the linear measurement i/c hooks, chairs,
dowels and laps. Only authorized hooks and laps approved in bar bending schedule shall be paid. Lapping of bars will be allowed only
where the required bar length exceeds the standard lengths available. All other laps provided unless otherwise specified in the drawings
shall not be measured and paid for. Weight of binding wire shall not be measured for payment. The prices are to include for the supply of all
Reinforcement & Embedment at site by the Contractor.
b) Reinforcement are to be tack welded in addition to binding by 18 SWG annealed wire wherever necessary to impart fixity. Bars of 28 mm
dia & above shall also be provided with stitch weld in additions to binding with annealed iron wire and nothing extra will be paid for stitch
welding. Stitch welding shall be done as per IS specifications. No extra claim shall be entertained on this account.
Supplying, straightening, cutting, bending, hoisting, placing in position including cost of precast concrete block cover and binding with 18
SWG annealed wire, labour and scaffolding, TMT bars of grade Fe-500 as per IS: 1786 for all R.C.C works including all necessary handling at
7 Te. 110.00
all heights and depths complete in all respects and as per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
E-FINISHING
a) The prices are to include for work at any height / depth and for all necessary scaffolding etc. as required.
b) The prices shall also include for making to form key for plaster and for all work in narrow width formed angles, chamfered external angles
and for making good the faces.
c) Plastering shall be measured in sq. metre area of the surface to be plastered, as per IS: 1200 (Part XII).
The rate shall include erecting and removal of scaffolding all labour, all materials, equipment, plants, tools and all incidental expenses to
complete plastering, pointing, rubbing out joints, cleaning, wetting, filling with cement mortar, troweling etc. and making of drip moulds,
grooves, vattas, bands etc. including curing.
d) The prices are to include the supply of cement at site by the contractor.
e) Water proofing compound in proportion recommended by manufactures shall be used in all Plaster works for which no separate
payment will be done.
f) Sand used for plastering shall be from approved sources.
Note:
a) Hacking of RCC surfaces shall be done when the concrete is green in order to provide key to plaster.
b) Plastering shall be done using 1 Kg of water proofing compound to every bag of cement used.
c) The above cost includes the rates for making grooves, Plaster Band, Elevation Plaster Treatment & Etc in any shape & size in plaster or as
directed by EIC.
Providing and laying cement plaster on surfaces with Coarse sand including curing etc.
Providing and applying 12 MM thick cement plaster to all external surfaces and at all levels in CM 1:4 finishing the surface to uniform rough
texture (sponge finish) by applying neat coat of cement including staging, curing etc complete as per technical specifications and site
directions complete.
Note:
a) Hacking of RCC surfaces shall be done when the concrete is green in order to provide key to plaster, if required.
8 Sq.M 1,500.00
b) Plastering shall be done using 1 Kg of water proofing compound of approved make to every bag of cement used.
c) The above cost includes the rates for making grooves, Plaster Band, Elevation Plaster Treatment, etc. in any shape & size in plaster or as
directed by EIC.
Providing and laying Brick work with bricks of class designation 75 Including Scaffolding : Brick work with Class Designation 75 bricks in
9 Cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand) in superstructure ABOVE PLINTH AND UP TO FLOOR V LEVEL Cu.M 500.00
Providing and fixing leak detection membrane by providing Black Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE) film 1mm thickness as per IS 2508-1984.
10 Joints in the film shall be heat-sealed insitu during laying of the film, using a 3-sealer thermostatically controlled electric iron and checked Sq. M. 10,000.00
carefully.
Providing & Fixing Fairface form work with good quality water proof ply wood / steel of required thickness and smooth surface, including
centering and shuttering including strutting, propping etc. and removal, for foundations, footings, base of columns, walls, columns,
11 pilasters, staircase, beams, mass concrete, trenches etc. upto all level and height. The shuttering shall be leak-proff and surface shall be oil Sq.M. 4,000.00
well before placing the concrete as per the direction of Engineer-in-charge.
Providing Bio-degradable polymer based sealant to make the joints, gaps in dyke wall sealed propoerly. Sealant shall comply with BS:5212-
12 1875 (Pagelastic PS (AFS) from M/s. PAGE, Concrete Technologies or equivalent which is a two component Poly-Sulphide Polymer) or as Cu.M 50.00
directed by Engineer-in-charge.
Providing and applying one coat of cement primer of approved brand and manufacture on dyke external walls and steps surface.
13 Sq.M. 1,500.00
Providing and fixing M.S grating of specific size, duly painted with one coat of Zinc chromate primer and successive two coats of synthetic
14 enamel paint of approved brand. The rate is inclusive of fixing M.S. angles, concrete bedding , all complete as per directions of EIC. KG 3,500.00
Total=
Page 16 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
SCHEDULE-F: OTHER ITEM FOR PROPOSED PETROLEUM STORAGE DEPOT, PALI, RAJASTHAN
Water Purifier ,Non Sparkable Spanner Kits & Sign Boards
1 RO + Water Cooler (Big Size for Canteen & Driver Rest Room) Nos 2.0
2 RO with Hot & Cold Water Dispenser for Admin, S&D, Railway office, Laboratory and Main Security building Nos 6.0
3 Hammer Sledge 10 kg Nos 2.0
4 Hammer 2 kg Nos 2.0
5 D/E Spanner 6 X 7 mm Nos 1.0
18 Ring Spanner 6 X 7 Nos 1.0
31 Fabrication, Painting and Installation of Sign Boards as per Branding Guidelines Nos 250.0
Total=
Page 17 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
SCHEDULE-G: DESIGN, SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENTS ALONG WITH ASSOCIATED WORKS FOR PROPOSED
PETROLEUM STORAGE DEPOT, PALI, RAJASTHAN
LV PACKAGE
1 2 Pole Structure
Design, Supply, Installation, testing and commissioning of the following items for 11KV two pole structure including transportation from
store/yard to site at place of installation, unpacking, assembly, including mounting and wiring of loose parts, etc including all labour and
materials as per direction of Engineer-in-charge. Scope also includes co-ordination with Local EB as requried for completion of entire job
including preparation of Drawing and getting necessary approval, if requried.
1.1 Double pole structure Fabricated out of GI Channels/ I-beams(175x87 mm) Set 1.00
1.2 11kV, 400A gang operated Air-break type switch with Earth Switch & Interlock No 1.00
1.3 A set of 400A Drop-Out fuses Set 1.00
1.4 A set of heavy duty (10kA) Lightning Arrestors No 1.00
A set of pin insulators and strain insulators, ACSR Conductor, Anticlimbing device etc. to connect to RSEB power supply (11 KV, Overhead
1.5 Set 1.00
lines) complete with cross bracings, stays, arrangement to mount H.T outdoor termination kit/box for XLPE cables, painting etc.
1.6 Supply of trivector meter as per state electricity approved make for tariff metering including enclosure for Trivector meter. No 1.00
2 11 kV VCB Panel
Design, Supply, Installation, testing & commissioning of Indoor,11 kV, 3Phase, 630Amp, 25kA for 1 sec. , Line-in Line-out 630A TP VCB
breaker IP-42, Single Front, Stand alone type panel, compartmentalized, partitions mettalic (PM), with in-built earth switch, indicating lamp,
annunciation window, related accessories, single line-in line-out 630A VCB breaker panel, including transportation from store/yard to site at
No 1.00
the place of installation, unpacking, assembly, including mounting and wiring of loose parts supplied by equipment vendor, including
installation on foundations or steel structures, aligning, leveling, grouting, testing etc., including all labour and materials, as per attached
specification of this tender and directions of Engineer-in-Charge. (Location:MCC Room)
3 HT Cables
Design, Supply and Laying of 11 kV(E) grade, stranded, multicore, Al. Conductor, conductor scrren, XLPE insulated, Insulation screen, PVC
inner sheath, steel wire armoured, PVC outer sheathed H.T. power cables as per IEC 60502-2 of following sizes in ground/tray including fixing
of strip number tags, fixing of saddles and saddle bars, fixing of route markers, protective tiles etc. including transportation from store/yard
to site at the place of installation, unpacking, including all labour and materials, as per attached specification of this tender and directions of
Engineer-in- charge.Before procurring the cable, Contractor to make cable schedule as per site conditions and get approved by Nayara
Energy/Consultant.
3.1 3C X 300 sq.mm Mtr 750.00
4 Cable Termination
Supply & carrying out jointing and end termination kits of 12kV grade, AL conductor, XLPE insulated galvanised steel armored, extruded
PVC outer sheathed cable for indoor/outdoor installation (Heat shrinkable sleeve type or equivalent) including all labour & materials as per
attached specification of this tender and directions of Engineer In charge.
4.1 11kV Cable Outdoor termination kit (Al Cables)

4.1.1 3C X 300 sq.mm Nos. 2.00
4.2 11kV Cable Indoor termination kit (Al Cables)
4.2.1 3C X 300 sq.mm Nos. 3.00
4.3 11kV Cable Jointing Kit (Al Cables)
4.3.1 3C X 300 sq.mm Nos 3.00
5 Distribution transformer
Design, Supply, Installation, testing & commissioning of 1600 kVA, 11/0.433 kV, Dyn11, AN, 6% impedance, OCTC ±5% taps with the step of
2.5% on primary winding, Air cool Type Indoor Transformer including the construction of foundation, including transportation from store/yard
to site at the place of installation, unpacking, positioning in place, site assembly of loosely furnished accessories, including connection of No. 1.00
auxiliary circuits, including fixing of nuts and bolts etc., including all labour and materials, as per attached specification of this tender and
directions of Engineer-in-Charge. (Location - MCC Room)
6 BUS DUCT
Design, Supply, Installation, testing & commissioning of BUS DUCT of the following ratings , including storing, transportation from store/yard
to site at the place of installation, unpacking, positioning in place, site assembly of loosely furnished accessories, including connection of
auxiliary circuits, including fixing of nuts and bolts etc. including all labour and materials, as per attached specificatiions of this tender and
directions of Engineer-in-Charge. (Location: MCC Room)
3200A, TPN, Non-segregated, 415V, 50 Hz, 50 kA for 1 sec., TPN, Al Bus Duct of approx. 25 m length , Horizontal bends (2Nos) and Vertical
bends(2Nos) with CRCA sheet steel enclosure including necessary equipment connection flanges, wall entrance seals, transformer/ Mtr 25.00
equipment adaptor box, elbows, offsets, wall supports, flexible connectors, phase crossover chamber (if any), inspection cover, etc.
7 Diesel Generator Sets
Design, Supply, Installation, testing & commissioning of Diesel Generator Sets with control panel with all required accessories like lube oil
system, cooling system, Diesel oil system, Day Tank of min 990ltr capacity along with piping with level switch, Exhaust pipe ,inter connecting
cables and cable accessories, Base Chanels,minimum commissioning spares including fuel, lubricant etc, spares for two years operation and
maintenance , for following ratings including the construction of foundation, including transportation from store/yard to site at the place of
installation, unpacking, positioning in place, site assembly of loosely furnished accessories, including connection of auxiliary circuits,
including fixing of nuts and bolts etc., including all labour and materials, as per attached specifications of this tender and directions of
Engineer-in-Charge. (Location - MCC Room). Bidder to include one synchronising panel for synchronising the 2DGs of 1010 KVA. Suitable
size non-FLP, Double compression , cable glands shall be supplied for DG sets and Synchronizing panel .(Seperate rate for supporting
arrangement of Exhaust pipe shall be applicable as per the structural rate quoted , however exhaust piping system is included in the scope of
Bidder and the same must be insulated with minimum 50mm thickness with 64kg/ cubic metre density of rock wool wrapped with 24/26 SWG
aluminium sheet cladding.), DG set should be supplied with acoustic enclosure as per CPCB norms.
7.1 DG 1 - 415V, 3 Ph, 50 Hz, 750 kVA at 0.8 p.f. Set 1.00
7.2 DG 1 - 415V, 3 Ph, 50 Hz, 750 kVA at 0.8 p.f. Set 1.00
7.3 DG 3 - 415V, 3 Ph, 50 Hz, 250 kVA at 0.8 p.f. With AMF Panel Set 1.00
7.4 DG AMF & Synchronisation Control Panel (Common for DG-1 & DG-2) Set 1.00
Page 18 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
8 415V LV Switchboard
Design, Supply, Installation, testing & commissioning of sheet steel enclosed, floor mounted, free standing switch-boards, including
transportation from store/yard to site at the place of installation, unpacking, assembly, including mounting and wiring of loose parts supplied
by equipment vendor, interconnection of shipping sections and requisite inter-panel wiring between shipping sections, including supply of
foundation base material frame & its fixing by welding on foundation insert plates or angles embedded in the foundation, (The base frame
supply cost shall be included in steel fabrication, however, fixing cost shall be included in this item cost.),placing on foundation channel,
aligning, plumbing,leveling, positioning,bus bar bolting between transportation sections, bolting / tack welding with foundation channels of
various shipping section of panels including supply of GI bolts, nuts and washers etc., assembling of shipping sections, connection of inner
panel busbars, checking of terminal connection for tightness and proper wiring, including all labour and materials, as per attached
specification of this tender and directions of Engineer-in-Charge. Suitable single compression gl;ands to be supplied with all switchboards
and panels
415V PMCC (Loc: MCC Room) : 415V, 50 Hz, 3 Ph, 4 Wire, 3200Amp, 50kA for 1 sec. AL. bus bar, IP 42, indoor, floor mounted, single front,
stand alone type panel with 14 gauge CRCA sheet steel enclosure Switchgear including all control devices, micro-processor based releases,
8.1 metering devices, indicating lamps, space-heater & related accessories, internal separation Class-4B (For ACB Icu=Ics=Icw=50 kA and for No. 1.00
MCCB Icu=Ics=50 kA) testing and calibration of relays and meters etc as per attached specification and 'Single Line Diagram for PMCC' of
this tender
415V ESB (Loc :MCC Room) :Design, Supply, Installation, testing & commissioning of CRCA sheet steel enclosed, floor mounted, free
standing Emergency Switch Board, 415V, 50 Hz, 3 Ph, 4 Wire,630Amp, 50kA for 1 sec. AL. bus bar including transportation from store/yard to
site at the place of installation, unpacking, assembly, including mounting and wiring of loose parts supplied by equipment vendor,
8.2 No. 1.00
interconnection of shipping sections and requisite inter-panel wiring between shipping sections, including installation on foundations or steel
structures, aligning, leveling, grouting, testing and calibration of relays and meters etc., including all labour and materials, as per attached
specification and Single Line Diagram of PMCC of this tender and directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
415V Fire Water Panel (Loc :Fire Water Pump House) :Design, Supply, Installation, testing & commissioning of CRCA sheet steel enclosed,
floor mounted, free standing IP42 , indoor Fire Panel , 415V, 50 Hz, 3 Ph, 4 Wire, 100Amp, 50kA for 1 sec. AL. bus bar with incomer MCCB,
indicating lamps, including transportation from store/yard to site at the place of installation, unpacking, assembly, including mounting and
8.3 No. 1.00
wiring of loose parts supplied by equipment vendor, including installation on foundations or steel structures, aligning, leveling, grouting,
testing and calibration of relays and meters etc., including all labour and materials, as per attached specification and Single Line Diagram of
PMCC of this tender and directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
MLDB (Loc: MCC Room) : Design, Supply, Installation, testing & commissioning of CRCA sheet steel enclosed, floor mounted, free standing
indoor Main Lighting DB , 415V, 50 Hz, 3 Ph, 4 Wire, 315Amp, 50kA for 1 sec. AL. bus bar, IP 42, indoor, distribution board with incomer ACB,
indicating lamps, main contactor, timer with adjustable time setting & auxiliary contactors etc.including transportation from store/yard to site
8.4 No. 1.00
at the place of installation, unpacking, assembly, including mounting and wiring of loose parts supplied by equipment vendor, including
installation on foundations or steel structures, aligning, leveling, grouting, testing and calibration of relays and meters etc., including all
labour and materials, as per attached specification and Single Line Diagram of PMCC of this tender and directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
Normal Auxilary Power DB (Loc: MCC Room) : Design, Supply, Installation, testing & commissioning of CRCA sheet steel enclosed, floor
mounted, free standing indoor Normal Auxiliary Power DB 415V, 50 Hz, 3 Ph, 4 Wire, 400Amp, 50kA for 1 sec. AL. bus bar, IP 42, indoor,
distribution board with ACB incomer ,including transportation from store/yard to site at the place of installation, unpacking, assembly,
8.5 No. 1.00
including mounting and wiring of loose parts supplied by equipment vendor, including installation on foundations or steel structures,
aligning, leveling, grouting, testing and calibration of relays and meters etc., including all labour and materials, as per attached specification
and Single Line Diagram of PMCC of this tender and directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
EMLDB(Loc : MCC Room) Design, Supply, Installation, testing & commissioning of CRCA sheet steel enclosed, floor mounted, free standing
indoor EMLDB 415V, 50 Hz, 3 Ph, 4 Wire, 100Amp, 50kA for 1 sec. AL. bus bar, IP 42, indoor, distribution board with incomer MCCB
,including transportation from store/yard to site at the place of installation, unpacking, assembly, including mounting and wiring of loose
8.6 No. 1.00
parts supplied by equipment vendor, including installation on foundations or steel structures, aligning, leveling, grouting, testing and
calibration of relays and meters etc., including all labour and materials, as per attached specification and Single Line Diagram of PMCC of
this tender and directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
APFC(Loc: MCC Room) :Design, Supply, Installation, testing & commissioning of CRCA sheet steel enclosed, floor mounted, free standing
indoor 480 KVAR Capacitor Bank and Panel with Automatic Power Factor Controller and all other necessary components for smooth
operation including transportation from store/yard to site at the place of installation, unpacking, assembly, including mounting and wiring of
8.7 No. 1.00
loose parts supplied by equipment vendor, including installation on foundations or steel structures, aligning, leveling, grouting, testing and
calibration of relays and meters etc., including all labour and materials, as per attached specification and Single Line Diagram of PMCC of
this tender and directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
9 Lighting transformer
Design, Supply, Installation, testing & commissioning of Dry Type Lighting Transformer including the construction of foundation, including
transportation from store/yard to site at the place of installation, unpacking, positioning in place, site assembly of loosely furnished
accessories, including connection of auxiliary circuits, including fixing of nuts and bolts etc., including all labour and materials, as per
attached specification of this tender and directions of Engineer-in-Charge. (Location - MCC Room)
9.1 150 kVA, 0.415/0.415 kV, AN, 4% impedance (Normal Lighting Transformer) No. 1.00
9.2 50 kVA, 0.415/0.415 kV, AN, 4% impedance (Emergency Lighting Transformer) No. 1.00
10 DC System (Battery, Battery charger and DC DB)
Design, Supply, Installation, testing and commissioning of 5 KVA 110V DC Battery Charger & DCDB System (IP-31) comprising 110V DC
Battery Bank, Chargers, Battery isolator/MCCB of suitable rating & DC Distribution Board etc. which includes installation of metal stands,
Set 1.00
placing of batteries on stands on cell insulators, fixing the cell, interconnecting the battery cells, cell booster and charging the battery cells as
per attached specification of this tender .Suitable size of single compression glands shall be supplied with Battery Charger and DCDB
DCDB :
110V DC, 63A, Cu bus bar, DC DB shall be indoor Type
10.1 No 1.00
Incomer - 63A DC, DP MCCB
Outgoing - 16 Nos. 16A DC, DP MCB
NOTE :Supervision of laying & termination of all inter-panel/ inter-cubicle cabling including cabling up to Battery Bank and inter-tier cabling of
Battery Bank shall be in the scope of Supplier . However, supply, laying and termination of the cables shall be done by the contractor.
Page 19 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
11 AC UPS system.
Design, Supply, Installation, testing & commissioning of following AC UPS system (IP-31) : 230 AC UPS in 2 x 100% parallel redundant
configuration complete with battery bank (2 x 100%), Rectifier / Charger, Inverter, Main / maintenance bypass switch, battery and battery rack,
AC Distribution board with requisite incoming and outgoing feeders for computer power supply. The battery backup duration shall be 120
Mins for 40KVA UPS and 60Mins for 15KVA UPS. The battery shall be VRLA. Scope includes transportation from store/yard to site at the
place of installation, filling with electrolyte, aligning, leveling, grouting, assembly of battery racks, fixing of inter-cell connectors etc., including
all labour and materials, as per attached specification of this tender and directions of Engineer-in-Charge. Suitable size if single compression
glands to be supplied with AC UPS and UPSDB , RS485/Ethernet shall be used for Interface with Automation.
2x 40kVA, 3 Phase, 4 wire, 415V AC input, 230V AC output, parallel-redundant AC UPS with VRLA battery (2 x 100% UPS module) with by-
11.1 Set 1.00
pass, 120 minutes back up time ( 60 min for each UPS unit,) AC UPS DB and all interconnecting cables.
2x 15kVA, 3 Phase, 4 wire, 415V AC input, 230V AC output, parallel-redundant AC UPS with VRLA battery (2 x 100% UPS module) with by-
11.2 Set 1.00
pass, 60 minutes back up time (30 min for each UPS unit), AC UPS DB and all interconnecting cables.
12 Local control station (LCS)
Design, Supply, Installation, testing and commissioning of following flameproof (IP65) type LCS suitable for hazardous area Zone-1/2, Gas
12.1
Group IIA/ IIB, Temperature Class-T3, as per attached specification of this tender
FLP (Zone-1, IIA/IIB, T3) IP65 Local control station provided with L/R switch, START STOP PB, 3mm thick FRP Canopy with side cover,
12.1.1 Nos 11.00
including flameproof double compression stainless steel cable glands & plugs as required as per attached specifications.of this tender
FLP (Zone-1, IIA/IIB, T3) IP65 Local control station provided with L/R switch,START STOP PB, Ammeter, 3 mm thick FRP Canopy with side
12.1.2 Nos 8.00
cover, including flameproof double compression stainless steel cable glands & plugs as required as per attached specifications of this tender
FLP (Zone-1, IIA/IIB, T3) IP65 Local control station provided with L/R switch,START STOP PB, Ammeter, Voltmeter , Ramp up & Ramp down
12.1.3 indication, 3 mm thick FRP Canopy with side cover, including flameproof double compression stainless steel cable glands & plugs as Nos 5.00
required as per attached specifications of this tender
Design, Supply, Installation, testing and commissioning of following Weatherproof (IP55) type LCS suitable for hazardous area Zone-1/2, Gas
12.2
Group IIA/ IIB, Temperature Class-T3, as per attached specification of this tender
Local control station provided with L/R switch, START STOP PB, 3mm thick FRP Canopy with side cover, including industrial double
12.2.1 Nos 10.00
compression stainless steel cable glands & plugs as required as per attached specifications.of this tender
Local control station provided with L/R switch, START STOP PB, Ammeter 3mm thick FRP Canopy with side cover, including industrial
12.2.2 Nos 2.00
double compression stainless steel cable glands & plugs as required as per attached specifications.of this tender
Design, Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of following Industrial, weatherproof type LCS, IP-55 (minimum) provided with 1 No.
12.2.3 Mushroom head stay put type, lock & pin arrangement, emergency STOP push button & 1 No. spring return type push button for START with No 4.00
integral canopy/ separate canopy made of at least 14SWG galvanised sheet steel or FRPasper attached specification of this tender
13 Lighting DBs
All Lighting DBs to be supplied with double compression glands of suitable size
13.1 Lighting Distribution board : Weatherproof Type
Design, Supply,Installation, Testing & Commissioning of 415V, 50 Hz, 3 Ph, 4 Wire, 32 A, 16 kA for 1 sec.Al busbar, IP-55, Outdoor Type,
suitable for Floor/ wall mounted Weatherproof Lighting Panel IP55 as per attached specification of this tender.
13.1.1 Incomer : 1 No. 32A, 4P MCB Nos 2.00
Sub Incomer : 3 Nos. 16A, DP ELCB (30mA sensitivity)
Outgoing : 9 Nos. 6A, SP MCBs
YLDB
YLDB (Loc : MCC Room) Design, Supply, Installation, testing & commissioning of CRCA sheet steel enclosed, wall mounted, indoor YLDB ,
415V, 50 Hz, 3 Ph, 4 Wire, 50kA for 1 sec. AL. bus bar, IP 42, indoor, distribution board with incomer MCCB including transportation from
13.2 store/yard to site at the place of installation, unpacking, assembly, including mounting and wiring of loose parts supplied by equipment
vendor, testing and calibration of relays and meters etc., including all labour and materials, as per attached specification of this tender and
directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
13.2.1 63Amp, TPN, 50kA 415V, 50 Hz, 3 Ph, 4 Wire, Outgoing 15 Nos 16A 4P MCB No. 1.00
13.2.2 32Amp, TPN, 50kA 415V, 50 Hz, 3 Ph, 4 Wire, Outgoing 9 Nos 16A 4P MCB No. 1.00
13.3 Lighting Distribution board : flameproof (IP65) Type
Design, Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of 415V, 50 Hz, 3 Ph, 4 Wire, 32 A, 16 kA for 1 sec.Al busbar, IP-65, Outdoor Type, 'Ex-d'
type suitable for Zone-2, Gas Group-IIA/ IIB/ IIC, Temperature Class-T3, Lighting Panel as per attached specification of this tender.
Outgoing : 12 Nos. 6A, DP MCBs
Design, Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of 415V, 50 Hz, 3 Ph, 4 Wire, 32 A, 16 kA for 1 sec.Al busbar, IP-65, Outdoor Type, 'Ex-d'
type suitable for Zone-2, Gas Group-IIA/ IIB/ IIC, Temperature Class-T3, Lighting Panel as per attached specification of this tender.
Outgoing : 9 Nos. 6A, DP MCBs
14 Power Distribution board (PDB)
All Power Distribution boards to be supplied with double compression glands of suitable size
14.1 Power Distribution board : Weatherproof Type
Design, Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of 415V, 63A, 10 kA for 1 sec. Al busbar, Indoor Type, Floor/ wall mounted
Weatherproof Power Distribution Board IP55 as per attached specification of this tender.
14.1.3 Nos 1.00
Incomer : 1 No. 63A, 4P MCB
Outgoing : 6 Nos. 16A, SP MCBs
14.2 Power Distribution board : flameproof (IP65) Type

weatherproof Power Distribution Board.IP65 as per attached specification of this tender.
14.2.1 Nos 4.00
Outgoing : 6 Nos. 16A SP MCB
14.3 Welding Socket Distribution Board :Weatherproof (IP55) Type
weatherproof Welding Socket Distribution Board.IP55 as per attached specification of this tender.
14.3.1 Nos 1.00
Outgoing : 6 Nos. 63A TP MCB
Page 20 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
14.4 MOVDB
Design, Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of 415V, 32A, 10 kA for 1 sec. Al busbar, Indoor Type, Floor/ wall mounted flameproof
MOV Distribution Board.IP65 as per attached specification of this tender.
14.4.1 Nos 2.00
Outgoing : 18 Nos. 6A TP MCB
15 Cables
15.1 Power cables FRLS
Design, Supply and Laying of 1.1 kV) grade, stranded Cu / Al. Conductor, FRLS, XLPE insulated, PVC inner sheath, steel / wire armoured, PVC
outer sheath LV power cables.of following sizes in ground/tray including fixing of strip number tags, fixing of saddles and saddle bars, fixing
of route markers, protective tiles etc. including transportation from store/yard to site at the place of installation, unpacking, including all
labour and materials, as per attached specifications directions of Engineer-in- charge. Before procurring the cable, Contractor to make cable
schedule as per site conditions and get approved by Nayara Energy/Consultant.
15.1.1 3CX2.5 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 800.00

15.1.2 3CX4 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 4,800.00
15.1.3 3CX6 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 15.00
15.1.4 3CX10 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 2,900.00
15.1.5 3CX16 Sq. mm Al Mtr 5.00
15.1.6 3CX25 Sq. mm Al Mtr 670.00
15.1.7 3CX35 Sq. mm Al Mtr 5.00
15.1.8 3CX50 Sq. mm Al Mtr 5.00
15.1.9 3CX70 Sq. mm Al Mtr 1,200.00
15.1.10 3CX95 Sq. mm Al Mtr 5.00
15.1.11 3CX120 Sq. mm Al Mtr 840.00
15.1.12 3CX150 Sq. mm Al Mtr 2,400.00
15.1.13 3CX185 Sq. mm Al Mtr 1,200.00
15.1.14 3CX240 Sq. mm Al Mtr 1,700.00
15.1.15 3CX300 Sq. mm Al Mtr 2,600.00
15.1.16 3.5CX16 Sq. mm Al Mtr 5.00
15.1.17 3.5CX25 Sq. mm Al Mtr 9,000.00
15.1.18 3.5CX35 Sq. mm Al Mtr 6,300.00
15.1.19 3.5CX50 Sq. mm Al Mtr 3,700.00
15.1.20 3.5CX70 Sq. mm Al Mtr 1,800.00
15.1.21 3.5CX95 Sq. mm Al Mtr 2,700.00
15.1.22 3.5CX120 Sq. mm Al Mtr 2,600.00
15.1.23 3.5CX150 Sq. mm Al Mtr 5.00
15.1.24 3.5CX185 Sq. mm Al Mtr 1,350.00
15.1.25 3.5CX240 Sq. mm Al Mtr 150.00
15.1.26 3.5CX300 Sq. mm Al Mtr 5.00
15.1.27 3.5CX400 Sq. mm Al Mtr 800.00
15.1.28 4CX2.5 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 820.00
15.1.29 4CX4 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 2,500.00
15.1.30 4CX6 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 2,750.00
15.1.31 4CX10 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 4,800.00
15.1.32 4CX16 Sq. mm Al Mtr 1,760.00
15.1.33 4CX25 Sq. mm Al Mtr 5.00
15.1.34 4CX35 Sq. mm Al Mtr 5.00
15.1.35 4CX50 Sq. mm Al Mtr 5.00
15.1.36 4CX70 Sq. mm Al Mtr 5.00
15.1.37 4CX95 Sq. mm Al Mtr 5.00
15.1.38 4CX120 Sq. mm Al Mtr 5.00
15.1.39 4Cx150 Sq. mm Al Mtr 5.00
15.1.40 4Cx185 Sq. mm Al Mtr 5.00
15.1.41 2Cx6 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 5.00
15.1.42 2Cx10 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 5.00
15.1.43 2Cx16 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 145.00
15.2 Power cables FR (Fire Resistant)
Design, Supply and Laying of 1.1 kV grade, stranded Cu. Conductor, Fire Resistant, , XLPE insulated, PVC inner sheath, steel / wire armoured,
PVC outer sheath LV power cables.of following sizes in ground/tray including fixing of strip number tags, fixing of saddles and saddle bars,
fixing of route markers, protective tiles etc. including transportation from store/yard to site at the place of installation, unpacking, including
all labour and materials, as per attached specifications of this tender and directions of Engineer-in- charge. Before procurring the cable,
Contractor to make cable schedule as per site conditions and get approved by Nayara Energy/Consultant.
15.2.1 4C x 2.5Sq. mm Cu Mtr 1,250.00

15.2.2 4C x 6 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 1,500.00
15.2.3 4C x 10 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 5.00
15.2.4 4C x 16 Sq. mm Al Mtr 670.00
15.3 Control cables
Design, Supply and Laying and termination of 1.1 grade,stranded Cu. Conductor, PVC insulated, PVC inner sheath, steel/ wire armoured, PVC
outer sheath LV control cables.of following sizes in gattached round/tray including fixing of strip number tags, fixing of saddles and saddle
bars, fixing of route markers, protective tiles etc. including transportation from store/yard to site at the place of installation, unpacking,
including all labour and materials, as per attached specification of this tender and directions of Engineer-in- charge. Before procurring the
cable, Contractor to make cable schedule as per site conditions and get approved by Nayara EnergyL/Consultant.
15.3.1 5C x 1.5 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 1,820.00

15.3.2 7C X 2.5 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 6,580.00
15.3.3 12C X 1.5 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 140.00
15.3.4 3C x 4 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 5.00
15.3.5 12C X 2.5 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 5.00
15.3.6 19C X 2.5 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 4,510.00
15.3.7 9C x 1.5 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 220.00
15.4 Lighting cables
Design, Supply and Laying and termination of 1.1 kV grade,stranded Cu. Conductor, PVC insulated, PVC inner sheath, steel/ wire armoured,
PVC outer sheath LV control cables.of following sizes in ground/tray/conduit including fixing of strip number tags, fixing of saddles and
saddle bars, fixing of route markers, protective tiles etc. including transportation from store/yard to site at the place of installation,
unpacking, including all labour and materials, as per attached specification of this tender and directions of Engineer-in- charge. Before
procurring the cable, Contractor to make cable schedule as per site conditions and get approved by Nayara EnergyL/Consultant.
15.4.1 1C x 1.5 Sq. mm Cu Wire Mtr 1,600.00

15.4.2 1C x 2.5 Sq. mm Cu Wire Mtr 500.00
15.4.3 3C x 2.5 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 2,600.00
15.4.4 3C x 4 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 5.00
15.4.5 3C x 6 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 5.00
15.4.6 3.5CX35 Sq. mm Al Mtr 5.00
15.4.7 3.5CX25 Sq. mm Al Mtr 5.00
15.4.8 4C x 10 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 1,000.00
15.4.9 4C x 4 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 4,500.00
15.4.10 4C x 2.5 Sq. mm Cu Mtr 1,400.00
15.4.11 4C x 16 Sq. mm Al Mtr 3,000.00
Page 21 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
16 1.1kV cable Industrial termination
Cable termination with Industrial Glands and lugs
Supply & carrying out end termination of following grade, AL/ CU conductor, XLPE insulated galvanised steel armored, extruded PVC outer
16.1 sheathed cable using Double compression Weatherproof IP55 cable glands and lugs (including striping of cable insulation, crimping the lug
on to the conductor, restoration of the insulation, clamping of cable cores, & earthing of armour including all labour & materials as per
attached specification and directions of Engineer In charge.
16.1.1 3CX2.5 Sq. mm Cu Nos. 5.00
16.1.2 3CX4 Sq. mm Cu Nos. 15.00
16.1.3 3CX6 Sq. mm Cu Nos. 2.00
16.1.4 3CX10 Sq. mm Cu Nos. 12.00
16.1.5 3CX16 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.1.6 3CX25 Sq. mm Al Nos. 6.00
16.1.7 3CX35 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.1.8 3CX50 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.1.9 3CX70 Sq. mm Al Nos. 4.00
16.1.10 3CX95 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.1.11 3CX120 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.1.12 3CX150 Sq. mm Al Nos. 6.00
16.1.13 3CX185 Sq. mm Al Nos. 3.00
16.1.14 3CX240 Sq. mm Al Nos. 4.00
16.1.15 3CX300 Sq. mm Al Nos. 6.00
16.1.16 3.5CX16 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.1.17 3.5CX25 Sq. mm Al Nos. 15.00
16.1.18 3.5CX35 Sq. mm Al Nos. 36.00
16.1.19 3.5CX50 Sq. mm Al Nos. 20.00
16.1.20 3.5CX70 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.1.21 3.5CX95 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.1.22 3.5CX120 Sq. mm Al Nos. 4.00
16.1.23 3.5CX150 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.1.24 3.5CX185 Sq. mm Al Nos. 14.00
16.1.25 3.5CX240 Sq. mm Al Nos. 12.00
16.1.26 3.5CX300 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.1.27 3.5CX400 Sq. mm Al Nos. 40.00
16.1.28 4CX2.5 Sq. mm Cu Nos. 15.00
16.1.29 4CX4 Sq. mm Cu Nos. 7.00
16.1.30 4CX6 Sq. mm Cu Nos. 8.00
16.1.31 4CX10 Sq. mm Cu Nos. 23.00
16.1.32 4CX16 Sq. mm Al Nos. 7.00
16.1.33 4CX25 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.1.34 4CX35 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.1.35 4CX50 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.1.36 4CX70 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.1.37 4CX95 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.1.38 4CX120 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.1.39 4Cx150 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.1.40 4Cx185 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.1.41 2Cx16 Sq. mm Cu Nos 12.00
16.1.42 5C X 1.5 Sq. mm Cu Nos 130.00
16.1.43 12C X 1.5 Sq. mm Cu Nos 14.00
16.1.44 19C X 2.5 Sq. mm Cu Nos 13.00
16.1.45 9C X 1.5 Sq. mm Cu Nos 22.00
1.1kV cable flameproof (IP65) termination
Supply & carrying out end termination of following grade, AL/CU conductor, XLPE insulated galvanised steel armored, extruded PVC outer
16.2
sheathed cable using Double compression flameproof (IP65) cable glands and lugs. (Including cutting & striping of cable insulation, crimping
the lug on to the conductor, restoration of the insulation, clamping of cable cores, & earthing of armour including all labour & materials as per
attached specification and directions of Engineer In charge.
16.2.1 3CX2.5 Sq. mm Cu Nos. 1.00

16.2.2 3CX4 Sq. mm Cu Nos. 11.00
16.2.3 3CX6 Sq. mm Cu Nos. 2.00
16.2.4 3CX10 Sq. mm Cu Nos. 8.00
16.2.5 3CX16 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.6 3CX25 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.7 3CX35 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.8 3CX50 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.9 3CX70 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.10 3CX95 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.11 3CX120 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.12 3CX150 Sq. mm Al Nos. 6.00
16.2.13 3CX185 Sq. mm Al Nos. 3.00
16.2.14 3CX240 Sq. mm Al Nos. 4.00
16.2.15 3CX300 Sq. mm Al Nos. 6.00
16.2.16 3.5CX16 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.17 3.5CX25 Sq. mm Al Nos. 5.00
16.2.18 3.5CX35 Sq. mm Al Nos. 8.00
16.2.19 3.5CX50 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.20 3.5CX70 Sq. mm Al Nos. 4.00
16.2.21 3.5CX95 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.22 3.5CX120 Sq. mm Al Nos. 4.00
16.2.23 3.5CX150 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.24 3.5CX185 Sq. mm Al Nos. 4.00
16.2.25 3.5CX240 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.26 3.5CX300 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.27 3.5CX400 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.28 4CX2.5 Sq. mm Cu Nos. 1.00
16.2.29 4CX4 Sq. mm Cu Nos. 1.00
16.2.30 4CX6 Sq. mm Cu Nos. 2.00
16.2.31 4CX10 Sq. mm Cu Nos. 3.00
16.2.32 4CX16 Sq. mm Al Nos. 3.00
16.2.33 4CX25 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.34 4CX35 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.35 4CX50 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.36 4CX70 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.37 4CX95 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.38 4CX120 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.39 4Cx150 Sq. mm Al Nos. 2.00
16.2.40 4Cx2.5 Sq. mm Cu FR Nos. 30.00
16.2.41 4Cx6 Sq. mm Cu FR Nos. 14.00
16.2.42 4Cx10 Sq. mm Cu FR Nos. 2.00
16.2.43 4Cx16 Sq. mm Al FR Nos. 2.00
16.2.44 12C X 1.5 Sq. mm Cu Nos. 2.00
16.2.45 19C X 2.5 Sq. mm Cu Nos. 11.00
Page 22 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
17 Lighting
Design ,Supply of Lighting fixtures , including receiving from store, transporting to erection site including handling, arrangement of transport
vehicle, unpacking, inspection, checking of internal wiring, cabling / circuit wiring between Lighting DBs to (JB/control gear box wherever
applied) to fixtures, painting of circuit nos., wherever required and installing on RCC/steel columns/roofs/structure or poles, cable glanding &
termination, crimping of lugs & connections at fixtures/ control gears, Supply of all erection materials including necessary GI hardware, GI
clamps, GI brackets, civil masonry materials, testing of following types of LIGHTING FIXTURES with all their parts & accessories
etc.,including fixing of lamps, all work, labour and materials complete as per drawings and specification of this tender and directions of
ENGINEER IN CHARGE.
17.1 Industrial type luminaries
Design , Supply and Installation of 36W decorative type mirror optics recessed mounting light fittings with reflector, LED lamp etc and
17.1.3 Nos 5.00
complete with all its accessories. Bajaj type BZRSQL 36W GZ1 WH or equivalent .
Desgn , Supply and Installation of 1x18 W industrial type light fittings, LED lamp etc and complete with all its accessories Bajaj type BLRB DB-
17.1.4 Nos 12.00
118 or equivalent.
Desgn , Supply and Installation of 2x18 W industrial type light fittings, LED lamp etc and complete with all its accessories Bajaj type BLRB DB-
17.1.5 Nos 21.00
218 or equivalent.
Design, Supply and Installation of of WP 40W LED well glass type lighting fixture with toughened glass and mesh suitable for LED lamp with
17.1.6 Nos 5.00
integral type control gear box . Bajaj type BIPC 40W or euivalent
Design , Supply and Installation of 18 W decorative type mirror optics recessed mounting light fittings with reflector, LED lamp etc and
17.1.7 Nos 5.00
complete with all its accessories. Bajaj type BZSLO 18W WH or equivalent
Design , Supply and Installation of 18 W decorative type mirror optics recessed mounting light fittings with reflector, LED lamp etc and
17.1.8 Nos 5.00
complete with all its accessories. Bajaj type BGSLO 18W WH or equivalent
Design, Supply and Installation of WP 2x 28W LED Lighting Fixture with battery backup of 90 minutes and its accessories etc and junction
17.1.9 Nos. 3.00
box (if required). Bajaj typeBTI228PCWBB or equivalent
Design, Supply and Installation of street lighting with 120W LED luminaire for street lighting complete with lighting fixture,and all accessories
17.1.10 Nos. 44.00
, cable etc.
Design, Supply and Installation of street lighting with 60W LED luminaire for street lighting complete with lighting fixture,and all accessories ,
17.1.11 Nos. 12.00
cable etc.
Design, Supply and Installation of street lighting with 90W LED luminaire for street lighting complete with lighting fixture,and all accessories ,
17.1.12 Nos. 38.00
cable etc. Bajaj type BRTFG 90W V2
Design, Supply and Installation of of WP 35W LED well glass type lighting fixture with toughened glass and mesh suitable for LED lamp with
17.1.14 Nos 23.00
integral type control gear box . Bajaj type BIWICP 35W LED or euivalent.
Design, Supply and Installation of street lighting 45W LED luminaire for street lighting complete with lighting fixture,and all accessories ,
171.15 Nos 35.00
cable etc. Bajaj type BRTFGB45W LED V2
Design, Supply and Installation of of WP 30W LED street lighting fixture with toughened glass and mesh suitable for LED lamp with integral
17.1.16 Nos 94.00
type control gear box . Bajaj type BCLST 30W LED or euivalent.
Design, Supply and Installation of of WP 150W LED street lighting fixture with toughened glass and mesh suitable for LED lamp with integral
17.1.17 Nos 20.00
type control gear box . Bajaj type BJFL 150W LED or euivalent.
17.2 Luminaries for Hazardous area

Design, Supply and Installation of FLP 80 W LED Well glass light fittings with toughened glass and mesh suitable for LED lamp with integral
17.2.1 Nos. 6.00
type control gear box.
17.2.3 Design, Supply and Installation of FLP 18W compact fluorscent type light fittings with battery back up and its accessories. Nos. 10.00
Design, Supply and Installation of FLP 40 W LED Well glass light fittings with toughened glass and mesh suitable for LED lamp with integral
17.2.7 Nos. 160.00
type control gear box. Bajaj type BJFW 40W LED or equivalent
FPL type side mounted FLP 40 W LED Well glass light fittings with toughened glass and mesh suitable for LED lamp with integral type control
17.2.8 Nos. 44.00
gear box. by Baliga
18 Lighting pole
Design, Supply and installation of street/flood lighting poles as per attached specification of this tender , excluding laying of necessary
wire/cable running from junction box to the lighting fixture (Supply of lighting fixture & wire from junction box excluded), cable termination
and connection, Supplying & fixing of cable glands and lugs, including all civil works, excavation, foundation, disposal of surplus earth,
providing shoring, strutting and dewatering if required and including painting, including all labor and materials, also including Supply of
cement, steel, GI pipes, base plates, and all sundry materials as required and directions of Engineer-in- Charge.
7M high octagonal hot dip galvanized lighting pole with 130mm bottom A/F& 70mm top A/Fmade up of 3mm thick HT sheet along with base
18.1 Nos. 31.00
plate of size 220x220x12mm thick.
18.2 4 Nos of M20 x 750mm long 'J' type EN 8 grade foundation bolts along with template Nos. 31.00
9M high octagonal hot dip galvanized lighting pole with 155mm bottom A/F& 70mm top A/Fmade up of 3mm thick HT sheet along with base
18.3 Nos 22.00
plate of size 260x260x16mm thick.
18.4 4 Nos of M24 x 750mm long 'J' type EN 8 grade foundation bolts along with template Nos. 22.00
18.5 1 M Pole long Hot dip galvanized single arm bracket made up of 40NB dia GI pipe suitable to mount on pole having top 70mm A/F Nos. 37.00
18.6 1 M Pole long long Hot dip galvanized double arm bracket made up of 40NB dia GI pipe suitable to mount on pole having top 70mm A/F Nos. 16.00
18.7 Bakellite sheet with 1Nos of 6A SP MCB and stud type connector suitable for 4C x 16 sq mm cable (for single arm bracket) Nos. 37.00
18.8 Bakellite sheet with 2Nos of 6A SP MCB and stud type connector suitable for 4C x 16 sq mm cable (fordouble arm bracket) Nos. 16.00
19 Highmast tower
Design, Supply, Installation and testing and commissioning of of 30 Mtr. height High Mast shaft in three section sutable for 47m/s wind
speed along with head frame , luminaires carriage suitable for 07 luminaires in Asymmetrical arrangement and other accesories
manufactured in factory.
Note: a) The civil works required for high mast foundations is included in bidder's scope. Construction of earth pit for high mast is excluded
19.1 Nos. 1.00
from this item.
b) Bidder to provide design and drawing for foundation of highmast tower. And the Foundation Drawings to be approved / vetted through
Government Engineering Colleges / Agency.
Supply of raising lowering system comprising double drum wich, 6mm diameter SS wire rope , trailing cable, connector, integral power tool
19.2 motor , manual handle junction box , lighting finial (Wiring material from JB to individual luminaire and MCB in base compartment are Nos. 1.00
included and are a part of installation) for SL No. 19.3
19.3 Supply of foundation bolts manufactured from special steel along with nuts,washers , anchor plates and common template for Sl No 19.3 Nos. 1.00
speed along with head frame , luminaires carriage suitable for 08/10 luminaires in Asymmetrical arrangement and other accesories
19.4 Nos. 3.00
from this item.
included and are a part of installation) for Sl No 19.6
speed along with head frame , luminaires carriage suitable for 09/10/12 luminaires in Symmetrical arrangement and other accesories
19.7 Nos. 6.00
from this item.
19.8 motor , manual handle junction box , iighting finial (Wiring material from JB to individual luminaire and MCB in base compartment are Nos. 6.00
included and are a part of installation) for Sl no 19.9
Page 23 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
speed along with head frame , luminaires carriage suitable for 13 luminaires in Symmetrical arrangement and other accesories manufactured
in factory.
19.1 Nos. 1.00
from this item.
included and are a part of installation) for SL No 19.12
Supply, Installation , Testing and commissioning of specially designed flood light luminaries 350W LED lamps on High Masts. Bajaj type
19.13 Nos. 112.00
BJFL 350W LED
19.14 Supply of LED type single dome aviation obstruction light Nos 11.00
Supply of outdoor stand mounted flameproof feeder pillar with 32A TPN MCB incomer , single dial time switch , 25A TP contactor for the
19.15 automatic switching of luminaries , power tool control with 2 No 9A contactors and raise lower push button, Incoming 35 sq mm and outgoing Nos 11.00
16 & 2.5 sqmm terminals
20 63A/16A SWITCH SOCKET & PLUG (FLP & NON FLP)

Supply of flameproof (IP65) Interlocking type switch sockets and plugs of following ratings as per attached specifications of this tender . All
20.1 switch sockets shall be provided with 3mm thick FRP canopy with side cover and required no. of FLP double compression stainless steel
cable glands and FLP stopping plug.
20.1.1 i) 415V,3 phase 63A flame proof switch socket and plug Nos. 3.00
20.1.2 ii) 240V, 3-pin, 16A/6A flame proof switch socket and plug Nos. 14.00
Supply of weather proof Interlocking type switch sockets and plugs of following ratings as per attached specifications pf this tender All
20.2 switch sockets shall be provided with 3mm thick FRP canopy with side cover and required no. of double compression stainless steel cable
glands and stopping plug .
20.2.1 i) 415V,3 phase 63A weather proof switch socket and plug Nos. 1.00
20.2.2 ii) 240V,3 phase 16A weather proof switch socket and plug 3.00
21 JUNCTION BOXES
Supply of Weather proof 16A, 415V 4-way, 125 mm (minimum) internal dimensions junction boxes with terminals block with additional
21.1 earthing terminals and end clamps etc. including 4 Nos.’ double compression stainless steel cable glands suitable for 2No.s of 4Cx16 sq.mm Nos. 150.00
(Al.) XLPE, FRLS cable & 1 No of 3x2.5 sq. mm (cu.) XLPE, FRLS cables,canopy and 1No stop plug
21.2 PVC (Rigid) - 4 way Junction Boxes of ISI mark, suitable for 25 mm dia rigid PVC pipe entry. Nos. 25.00
21.3 Flameproof - 4 way Junction Boxes of ISI mark, suitable for 25 mm dia rigid PVC pipe entry. Nos. 100.00
22 Cable Trays
Design, Supply and Installation of G.I. ladder type Cable Tray 100x30x2mm thick runners, Rungs at 300mm spacing, Min.2500mm length
along with required Coupler Plate with stainless Hard-ware ,Hold on clamps With stainless Hard- ware , Horizontal /Vertical - Inside /
Outside bends etc. suitable for following G.I. Cable Tray and Tray cover as per attached specification of this tender
22.1 Heavy Duty Ladder type cable tray and cover (2.5m piece of length)
22.1.1 600mm Wide Mtr 2,700.00
22.1.2 300mm Wide Mtr 3,600.00
22.1.4 3mm Thick cover for 600 wide G.I. ladder type cable tray Mtr 2,700.00
22.1.5 3mm Thick Cover for 300 wide G.I. ladder type cable tray Mtr 3,600.00
23 Providing, installation, testing, commissioning, inspection of RIGID/FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND JUNCTION BOX FOR CONDUITING
Providing,Installation,laying,fixing of PVC rigid conduit of min. 2 mm thick of wall heavy duty type & as per latest IS (with bends, reducers,
couplers etc.) of following sizes:-
23.1 25 mm Dia. PVC Rigid Conduit Mtr 1,100.00
23.2 50 mm Dia. PVC Rigid Conduit Mtr 125.00
23.3 100 mm Dia. PVC Rigid Conduit Mtr 70.00
Providing & Laying of following PVC flexible conduit of min. 2mm thick of wall heavy duty type & as per latest IS.
23.4 25 mm Dia PVC Flexible Conduit Mtr 200.00
24 Plant Communication System
Design, Supply , Installation and testing of Plant Communication system B377.The system shall comprise of following items as per latest
IS.Scope includes receiving from store, transporting to erection site excluding cable glanding & power/ control cable termination but
including handling, arrangement of transport vehicle, loading & unloading equipment, aligning, levelling & installation in position by bolting
etc. on base channel grouted level in foundation floor OR directly on level floor foundation OR on frame works/supports grouted OR welded to
walls/columns, mounting in position, wiring connections, plugging of all unused entries & other holes in the boards/panels to make the same
24.1 Lot 1.00
dust & vermin proof, making good of wall/columns broken or chipped by cement plastering, minor repair & touch up painting work,
operational & functional checking, Design, Supply of foundation bolts, nuts, washers, other necessary hard wares,all erection
materials,clamps,brackets,GI perforated cable tray & civil masonry materials, testing & commissioning of following Plant Communication
system and with all type of call stations and loud speakers etc. with all work, labour & material complete as per codes & standards &
instructions / directions of ENGINEER IN CHARGE.
a) Digital central exchange unit with Mater Control Desk and power supply unit and battery back up-1 set
b) PA Zone Selector System-1No
c) Weather proof field call station including 25 watt amplifier with full keypad(12 keys) along with the functional keys- 10 Nos.
d) Explosion proof field call station including 25 watt amplifier with full keypad (12 keys) along with functional keys- 10 Nos.
e) weather proof loud speaker-10Nos.
f)explosion proof loud speaker - 10 Nos.
g)Telephone to PA SystemCoupler Unit-1No
Page 24 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
h) provision for interfacing with fire alarm and gas detection system
i)basic software and prgramming
j) any other item not specifically mentioned but requireed for the completeness of the system shall be provided
k)beacons for noisy area-. 4 Nos.
l)FRP canopy of Ex'd' field call station .-10 Nos
m)Acoustic hoods for FCS in noisy area -. 4 Nos.
n) Weatherproof junction box ,IP65 protected for looping of loud speakercables -10Nos
0) Flameproof junction box ,IP65 protected for looping of loud speakercables -10Nos
Design, Supply and Laying of required ARMOURED TELECOM CABLE as per approved layout.(Note: 75-80% communication cable shall be
laid in Instrument cable tray and rest communication cable shall be laid in GI perforated cable tray for which cable tray shall also be supplied
by contractor.Estimated length of required cable is 5000 meter.Vendor shall quote unit rate for addition/deletion of laying of the cable)
24.2 Addition/Deletion rate for Supply and installation of following items:
24.2.1 Weather proof field call station including amplifier with full keypad(12 keys) along with the functional keys No 1.00
24.2.2 Approved explosion proof field call station including amplifier with full keypad (12 keys) along with functional keys No 1.00
24.2.3 weather proof loud speaker No 1.00
24.2.4 explosion proof loud speaker No 1.00
24.2.5 canopy of Ex'd' field call station No 1.00
24.2.6 Acoustic hoods for FCS in noisy area No 1.00
24.2.7 Supply and Laying of required size of cable.(for addition/deletion purpose) Mtr 1.00
supply of Intrinscically safe (IPSS)Walkie-Talkie suitable for hazardous area defined as zone2, Gas group IIA/IIB,Temperature class T3 of
25
Motorola make.
Motorola GP 328 Intrinsically safe UHF handheld radio with 1800 mAh battery Tri Chemistry Charger with Adapter & Antenna-Genuine
25.1 No 18.00
Motorola make
Motorola GM 338 Fixed base Station with Fist Mic,12V/10A Power supply unit cum battery charger with all accessories(maintenance
25.2 No 1.00
free)(Base Station)
25.3 Motorola GP 328 spare battery with 1800 mAh capacity of Genuine Motorola Make No 5.00
25.4 Preparation of application for UHF and grant of frequency license from ministry of telecommunication including visit to office LS 1.00
26 Earthing & Lightning Protection system
Design, Supply, Installation & testing of 100 NB,3.0 M. long G.I. pipe Earth Electrode in Earth pit(for equipment earthing, ) and 1C x 150 sqmm
PVC Insulated cable for (Neutral Earthing) with Inspection Cover , Including handling ,Transportation to Erection site ,Excavation of Earth pit
in all types of soil ,back filling of pit with common salt, charcoal / coke and loose Earth after Installation of Electrode there in, removal of
surplus Earth away from Erection site, consolidation of loose Earth on back filled pit, making of bricks work, Inspection chamber on back
filled pit and cover of CI (450mmx450mm) ,there of complete with lifting hook, fixing & connecting inside the chamber of G.I. Earth bracket and
26.1
other accessories of the Earth Electrode, painting of Earth pit No. and Earthing symbol on the cover, , Supply of salt, charcoal /coke, bricks,
sand, cement, stone chips, reinforcement rods, lifting hook, necessary stainless steel hardware, paints etc.all works, labour & materials
complete as per Drawings and attached specifications of this tender and direction of consultant/owner.Bidder shall note that the excavation
may be for hard or soft soil and rate is inclusive of excavation of Earth pit. Bidder Scope includes Earthing Designing and taking necessary
approval by TPI
26.1.1 Equipment Earth pit Nos. 96.00

26.1.2 Neutral Eatthing Pit Nos. 8.00
26.1.3 Lightning Earth Pit Nos. 10.00
Design, Supply, Installation and testing of GI earth strip / laying of earthing cable of following sizes enclosed in ready made concrete
trenches or in floor slits, on cable racks/ risers/ trays , on brick / concrete wall , on RCC/steel columns , on RCC/steel towers and vessels,
under concrete floors, or paved areas, across pipe joints and valves, directly buried under ground at depth of 500 mm, including handling,
transportation to erection site , bending, straightening, cutting to size, welding together of earth strips in overlapping manner, chipping in
26.2 concrete floors/ paved areas for laying the earth strips under floors/ paved areas and making good by cement plastering concrete after laying
of the strips ; clamping and supporting of earth strips laid above ground, connecting the strips/ wire at both ends to equipment or to earth bus
/ earth plates or to GI brackets fixed inside earthpit chamber, by bolting etc., Hessian tapes, all necessary GI hardware, GI clamps, civil
masonry materials, etc. all work, labour as per attached specifications of this tender and directions of owner/consultant. Rate of excavation
and back filling of GI strip/earthing cable is excluded. Bidder Scope includes Earthing Designing and taking necessary approval by TPI.
26.2.1 75 x 10 mm GI Strip Mtr 9,300.00

26.2.2 50 x 6 mm GI Strip Mtr 300.00
26.2.3 40 x 6 mm GI Strip Mtr 700.00
26.2.4 40 x 5 mm GI Strip Mtr 270.00
26.2.5 25 x 3 mm GI Strip Mtr 825.00
26.2.6 25 x 6 mm GI Strip Mtr 110.00
26.2.7 No.8 SWG Solid GI wire Mtr 125.00
26.2.8 10mm(3/8")GI wire Mtr 1,750.00
26.2.9 25mm square copper strip/braided flexible cable Mtr 5.00
26.2.10 1C x 150 mm² PVC Insulated Cable Mtr 35.00
26.2.15 Cad weld Branch connection Nos 235.00
26.2.16 Earthing lugs Nos 350.00
26.2.17 10sq m Copper flexible cable with lugs at one end and crocodile clip at other end Nos 8.00
26.2.18 Test Link Nos 11.00
26.2.19 Lightning Arrestor Nos 11.00
Supply ,and Installation of GI Earth Bus bars (size: 390x50 x12mm thick) Including handling, transportation, drilling of necessary
holes/enlargement existing holes as required; all associated work for fixing the Bus bars in position e.g. cutting, leveling, aligning, chipping,
26.3 grouting, welding bolting etc.; making good of broken/chipped portion on walls /columns by cement plastering. Supply of all necessary Nos 23.00
hardware (GI), paints, civil masonry materials etc. all work, labour complete as per drawings and attached specifications of this tender and
directions of Engineer In Charge
Page 25 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
27 FABRICATION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
Supply and Receiving from store, transporting to erection site including handling, inspection, cutting to required shape & size, providing
supporting arrangements grinding, welding, drilling holes etc. for fabrication work, transporting the fabricated steel structural to erection site,
installation in position on floors, walls, ceilings, roofs, columns, existing structures, on towers, vessels, in ready made trenches, in floor sites
etc. by hoisting, welding, bolting, riveting, grouting etc., minor repair / denting, as required, breaking of walls / floors / ceilings / columns &
making good the same by cement plastering, supply of nuts, bolts, washers, screws, fasteners, civil masonary materials, fabrication &
installation of MS cable rack, cable rack supports, risers, hangers, base frames, supports, brackets, pedestals, frameworks etc. made out of
channels, angles, flats, plates, rods, etc. for cables, pipes, electrical equipment, lighting fittings & their accessories, earthing materials, cable
trays etc., surface treatment of steel structural works including surface cleaning, supply & one coat of epoxy based primer & one coats of
epoxy based finish paint, all work, labour and materials complete as per drawings, specifications, standards and instructions / directions of
ENGINEER IN CHARGE.
27.1 ISMC 100 / ISA 75x75x8 L / Any other size of Structural steel material Ton 20.00
28 GI Cable Protection Pipes
28.1 Supply and installation of 100NB GI pipe (Class B) with all necessary accessories like bends,couplings, etc for cabling of LCS and motor. Mtr 200.00
29 Marshalling Cabinet:
Supply of wall mounted type Marshalling Cabinet (Interphassing cabinet) having 100 terminals suitable for 2.5 mm2 / 1.5 mm2 (Cu.) with
29.1 No 1.00
required Nos. of non- FLP,SC, Cable Glands
Supply of wall mounted type Marshalling Cabinet (Interphassing cabinet) having 100 terminals suitable for 2.5 mm2 / 1.5 mm2 (Cu.) with
29.2 No 1.00
required Nos. of non- FLP, SC, Cable Glands.
30 Installation, Testing & commissioning of motor ( Industrial & Flameproof)
Motor is erected by mechanical contractor at erection site. However, scope of electrical contractor excluding cable glanding & power / control
cable termination but including dehydration of windings (If required), plugging unused cable gland cutout in motor terminal box, checking &
replenishment / replacement of bearing grease / lubricant, checking of IR values between each winding & motor frame, checking of continuity
of motor windings, checking of direction of rotation, motor shall run in uncoupled condition for 8 hrs. & changing of direction of rotation (If
required by changing supply connections), trial runs on NO - LOAD & LOAD test, supply of approved grease / lubricant, installing of canopy,
necessary hardware’s, testing & commissioning of following LT MOTORS together with all accessories, all works, labour and materials
complete as per drawings & documents, specifications, codes & standards and instructions / directions of ENGINEER IN CHARGE. (Contactor
to keep proper record of tests on motord for NO - LOAD & ON - LOAD runs.)
30.1 415V, 0.55 kW Nos 1.00

30.2 415V, 1.5 kW Nos 1.00
30.3 415V, 2.2 kW Nos 4.00
30.4 415V, 5.5 kW Nos 2.00
30.5 415V, 7.5 kW Nos 9.00
30.6 415V, 3 kW Nos 1.00
30.7 415V, 15kW Nos 3.00
30.8 415V, 30 kW Nos 6.00
30.9 415V, 45 kW Nos 3.00
30.1 415V, 75 kW Nos 2.00
30.11 415V, 120 kW Nos 2.00
30.12 415V,90 kW Nos 3.00
30.13 415V, 150 kW Nos 3.00
Page 26 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
31 CHEQUERED PLATE
Fabrication & installation of 6 mm thick MS chequered plate conforming to IS: 3052 in flooring steps cover over cable trenches with painting
31.1 by one coat of bitumen paint with 50% thinner & one coats of high built black bitumen paint including supply of all consumable and paint & Sq . mtr. 500.00
lifting arrangement.
32 GENERAL SAFETY EQUIPMENTS (for sub station only)

32.1 11 KV, 900 mm wide, 3mm thick ,electric grade floor rubber mat conforming to relevant IS. ISI mark shall be there on rubber mat. Mtrs. 2.00
1.1 KV, 900 mm wide, 2mm thick electric grade floor rubber mat (in pieces of length not less than 2 mtrs.) conforming to relevant IS. ISI mark
32.2 Mtrs. 100.00
shall be there on rubber mat.
32.3 Fire extinguishers CO2 type in 4.5kg capacity complete with handle , fixing bracket etc. Nos 2.00
32.4 Fire extinguishers DCP type (10 kg capacity) Nos 2.00
32.5 Shock treatment chart ( laminated type) in bilingual language (Hindi & English). Nos 2.00
32.6 Rubber Hand Gloves of 11 KV grade. Pair 2.00
32.7 Rubber Hand Gloves of 415V grade. Pair 4.00
32.8 GI Fire Buckets, painted in PO red outside and white inside, complete with handle, fixing brackets etc (3 buckets). SET 5.00
32.9 First aid box of GI, 18 SWG sheet with necessary items. No. 2.00
33 Cable Route Marker (At every 30 mtr. Of trench routing & at evry cable bend) Nos 125.00
Charges for preparation of drawings, obtaining drawing approval, arranging for inspection getting safety certificate of complete installation
from CEA authorities/Statuary authority like energisation of HT Panel, Transformer, PMCC room & Generator etc.The contractor shall give 5
sets of approved as built drawings. The charges shall also include painting of single line diagram at shed as approved by site engineer.
Note: a) The statutory payment to be made to the CEA authorities will be reimbursed at actual on submission of the original receipt to the
34 LS 1.00
owner.
b) The job also includes all liasoning to be carried out with State Electricity Board authorities for obtaining necessary approval for successful
commissioning of the facilities.
Civil Work
35 A - EARTHWORK
b) The prices are also to include for Excavation at any depth, all leveling and ramming foundation beds, trimming of sides and bottom grading
to proper level as required.
c) Removal and carrying shall include for excavation in any depth,all loading, unloading and handling as may be necessary and also all
necessary means of transport (Mechanical or manual as required).
d) The prices are also to include removal of water accumulated due to subsoil seepage, rains or from any kind of sources, either by pumping
or by bailing or by any suitable method like well point dewatering etc. if reqd. No extra payment shall be made for dewatering. This also
includes for draining out the pumped water to nearby available drainage system.
e) Normally payment of earth work shall be made according to the sizes of PCC for trenches/ pits as contemplated in the working drawings.
Extra due to widening or deepening of trenches / pits shall not be paid for except for the cases where water / acid proofing would be accepted
as per working drawings in such case the mode of measurement shall be as per IS : 1200
h) Where excavation are made in excess of the depth required, the contractor shall at his own expense fill up to the desired level with lean
concrete of mix 1:5:10 (1 Cement: 5 Coarse sand: 10 Graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size
i) Soft / loose soil also includes filled up earth / moorum.
j) The filling for earth / morrum or sand shall be done in layers not exceeding 20 cm in thickness (consolidated) with by Suitable means to
achieve 90% dry density at Optimum Moisture Content corresponding to standard Proctor test & vibro compactor in confined spaces.
Earth work in excavation at any depth by mechanical means (Hydraulic excavator) / manual means over areas including Back Filling
(excluding rock)in foundation trenches, pole foundation, cable tray supports structures, etc.. in layers not exceeding 20cm in depth,
35.1 consolidation each deposited layer by ramming and watering and disposal of excavated earth within and outside site to unobjectionable m3 700.00
place, disposed earth to be levelled and neatly dressed. For all Lift and Lead.
All kinds of soil including ordinary rock.
Supplying and filling local sand within the grading zone IV of fine aggregates ,in plinth,under floors etc. in layers not exceeding 20cm in
35.2 m3 500.00
depth, each deposited layer to be compacted by ramming watering and dressing complete as per technical specifications/drawings.
36 CONCRETE WORK/ REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK
a) The prices for concrete in beds and slabs are to include for laying on any type of sub grade, laying to falls, or cambers and for preparing
surfaces to receive concrete.
c) The prices are to include leaving pockets, cut outs and holes and to provide wooden boxes or any other suitable arrangements in RCC for
bolt holes in slab, beams, walls, foundation of equipments etc. as per approved working drawing. (Nothing extra shall be paid on this
account).
d) No deduction in RCC quantity shall be made for pockets and nothing extra shall be paid for providing pockets as mentioned in para 'C'
above.
e) Measurement of opening in concrete work/RCC work: For measurement of openings in concrete work / RCC works, shall be as per IS: 1200
Part-III.
Page 27 of 28
NAYARA ENERGY LTD.
f) All pocket holes are to be properly covered by suitable means so that dirt, rain water etc. etc., should not enter the pockets/holes etc.
(Nothing extra shall be paid on this account.)
g) Threads of bolts etc. which have already been fixed in the pockets are to be greased and polythene sheet properly covered with gunny bags
to protect it from damages from all sources. (Nothing extra shall be paid on this account.)
h) The prices shall include for all rebating, trotting, chamfering weathering, molding etc. to accord with the details shown on the approved
working drawings
i) Nothing extra shall be paid for any intricate concrete work for foundations of equipments and machinery (dynamic/static), RCC wall and
other superstructure works or any delay in concreting in small and thin sections in PCC or RCC works.
j) The prices for concrete are to include for hoisting and / or lowering to any height and/or depth required and in any type of form work,
packing around reinforcement where required and finishing the surfaces, to fair and even surface.
k) The prices shall include working up or hacking of concrete surface for providing keys for further concrete work and shall also include all
plane, rebated or grooved constructional and other joints.
l) The design mixes of all controlled concrete of various grades shall be established by the contractor on the basis of weigh batching, at the
beginning of work. In all concrete / RCC work graded coarse aggregate shall be used. Any concrete work with honey comb shall be rejected
and the work has to be redone by the contractor at his own cost.
m) Concrete admixtures for workability if necessary, may be used in RCC if decided by Engineer-in-charge. No extra payment for mixing etc,
shall be made on this account.
n) Machine and equipment foundations shall mean all foundations including pedestals of vessels, towers, pumps, compressor motors, or any
other equipment or machinery (both static and dynamic), pipe supports, etc. and the like.
o) The prices are also to include the removal of water caused by rains/seepage etc. either pumping or by bailing out or by special means like
well point dewatering etc. that may accumulate in the trenches and foundation pits etc.
s) The source of supply for sand and stone chips shall be approved by Nayara EnergyL.
t) Approved brand of 43 grade cement shall be used for preparing design mix & cement shall be tested as per relevant IS Codes. Cement
supply shall be in contractor’s scope.
e) Desired design mix shall be got approved from Engineer-in charge before Casting.
f) Approved brand shall be used for preparing BMC & Cement shall be tested as per relevant IS Codes. Cement supply shall be in contractor’s
scope.
a) Cement brand to be used:
i) Ultratech Cement
ii) J.K. Cement
iii) Coromandal King
iv) Birla Cement ACC
v) Ambuja Cement
vi) Dalmia Cement
vii) Top Cement
vii) Star Cement
Providing and laying cement concrete in foundation, footings and base for columns/walls including proportioning, mixing in mechanical
36.1
mixer, laying vibration by means of mechanical vibrators, curing etc. complete including the cost of shuttering:-
36.2 Concrete of mix 1:4:8 ( 1 cement : 4 coarse sand : 8 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) m3 200
37 Supply and Installation of Hume pipes of following sizes for road crossing
37.1 100mm Hume pipe NP2 Nos 18
37.4 300mm Hume pipe NP2 Nos 16
38 Supply and Installation of Pull pit box of following sizes for cable pulling
38.1 1500x1500x1000 Nos 9
38.2 800x800x1000 Nos 2.00
Total=
Page 28 of 28

WT Ewyv Hha5eyejaeryr

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

WT Ewyv Hha5eyejaeryr

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANNEXURE-1

PETROLEUM STORAGE DEPOT AT PALI (RAJASTHAN)

PART - 2 SCOPE OF WORK

Supply, Fabrication, erection, testing & commissioning of

PART - 5 RECOMMENDED MAKES/ BRAND

PART - 6 MASTER BOQ

Nayara Energy (formerly known as Essar Oil) is an integrated downstream oil

Nayara Energy Limited proposes to set-up a Petroleum Depot at Village: Sawaipura,

Approx. 60 acres of land is acquired for setting-up of this depot.

4.9 Commissioning Assistance

5. IMPORTANT NOTES RELATED TO SCOPE OF WORK

CONDITIONS & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR FABRICATION OF VERTICAL CONE ROOF

1.0 SCHEDULE OF TANKS

2.0 DRAWINGS & DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

3.0 ERECTION & FABRICATION

4.0 LIST OF STRUCTURALS AND APPURTENANCES FOR TANKS STRUCTURALS:

A. MS TANK _TK-100A/B/C (IFRVT)

SR. NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. NOM. SIZE

B. HSD TANK_TK-200A/B/C (CRVT)

SR. NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. NOM. SIZE

C. MS TANK_TK-100D (UG HDR)

SR. NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. NOM. SIZE

D. HSD TANK TK-200D/E (UG HDR)

SR. NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. NOM. SIZE

E. ETHANOL TANK_TK-300A/B/C/D/E (UG HDR)

SR. NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. NOM. SIZE

F. FIRE WATER TANK_TK-500A/B (CRVT)

SR. NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. NOM. SIZE

G. SLOP TANK (OWS)_TK-400A (UG HDR)

SR. NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. NOM. SIZE

6.0 TANK CALIBRATION

SPECIFICATION FOR CONSTRUCTION OF SAND PAD FOUNDATION FOR VERTICAL STORAGE

2.0 SETTING OUT

4.0 SAND FILLING & MURRUM FILLING

5.0 BITUMEN CARPET

6.0 OTHER REQUIREMENTS

DETAILS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF SAND PAD

IS Sieve Designation % age Passing

SPECIFICATIONS FOR FABRICATION, ERECTION, WELDING OF VERTICAL STORAGE

2.0 STRUCTURAL SECTIONS

3.0 WELDING ELECTRODES

6.0 STUDS AND NUTS

8.0 CODE OF PRACTICE

9.0 WELDING REQUIREMENTS IN TANK AND PIPELINE FABRICATION

9.3.3 The impact testing is generally not required.

9.7 PREPARATION FOR WELDING

9.7.2 END PREPARATION

9.9 WELDING REQUIREMENTS

RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION PROCEDURE OF VERTICAL TANKS

1.0 RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION:

2.0 NUMBER AND LOCATIONS OF RADIOGRAPHS

2.2.1 Spot radiographs shall be taken as per 2.1 above.

3.0 EXAMINATION OF RADIOGRAPHS

4.0 DETERMINATION OF LIMITS OF DEFECTIVE WELDING

5.0 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE WELDS

6.0 RECORD OF RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION

RADIOGRAPHY FOR PIPING WORKS

2.0 PROTECTION AND CARE OF FILM

4.0 THIRD PARTY INSPECTION:

RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION PROCEDURE FOR PIPING WORKS

1.0 RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION. GENERAL

2.0 EXAMINATION OF RADIOGRAPHS